Skip to main content

Full text of "Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria"

See other formats 


PROCEEDINGS 

(>K    THE 

§apl  .^ocictn  of  f  irtoria. 

VOL.     XXYII.      (New  Sekiks). 

PARTS     1.     AND     II. 

Edited  under   the    Authority  oj  the    Couucil. 

ISSUED   AUGUST.    1914,   and    MARCH.    1915- 

(Cotihiiiiiiif;    f'n/'frs    read   he/ore   the  Socifty   during    1914)- 


TlIK  AUTHORS  OK   IIIK  SKVKRAL  PAPKRS   ARB  INDIVIDUALLY   lIKSfONSlHLK  KOR  ' 
80I1NI>NK.>*8    OK    IllK    OPINIONS    GIVKN    AND    KOR   TlIK    ACCIJRACV    OK   THR 
STATKMKNTS    MADK   THKRKIN. 


MELHUUKNE: 

FOKD    &    SON,    PRINTERS,    DRUMMONU    STHEKT,    CARLTON. 

1915.  1^ 


CONTENTS   OF   VOLUME    XXVII. 


I. — Victorian    Holotlmroiclea,  with   desciiptioiis  of  Now   Species. 

Hy  E.  C.  Joshua.     (Plat«  I.)     ...  ...  ...  ...         1 

II.— N.jte.s    on    .Xustralian    Cicadidae.  By    How.vbd    .\8hton. 

(Plate  ir.)       .  .  .  ...  ...        12 

in.— Three  New    .\friean  Cicadas.     K_v   Ho\v.\rd  Ashton.     (Plate 

III.)...  ...  ..  ..  ...  ...  ...        l.-> 

IV. — The  Anatomy  of  Caryodes  dufre.snyi,   Leach.       By   Olive    H. 

Davies,  M.Sc.     (Plate  IV.)       ...  ...  ..  .         1«> 

V. — ()n   a  New  SjHJcies  .»f  Ceratodus  from  the  Cretaceous  of  New 

South    Wales.         Hv     FreoerI'K    Chapman,    A.L.S.,    .^c. 

(Plate  V.)         .  ..  ..  .  .        j:, 

VI.  —  De.scriptiiiii  of  New  and  Kare  Fossils  ohtaineil  l>y  l»eep  Boriii;,'- 

in  the   Mallee.        (Part   III.— Ostracoda  to    Fishes.)        By 

Fkedekick  Chai'MAX,  A.L.S.,  Ac.  (Plates  VI.  to  X.)  ..  I's 
VII.— Further    Notes   on    Australian    Hy<ln.ids.  -Ill        By   W.   .M 

Bale,  F.K  M.S.      ^Plates  XI..  XII.  and  XIII.)       ..  72 

VIII. — Un  some  New  Species  of  Victorian  Marine  Molhisca      By  .1.  II. 

(tatlifk  and  C.  J.  (iabkiel.     (Plates  XI  V,  XV.  and  XVI  »         ".M 
IX.—  Additions  to   the  Catalogue  of  the  Marine  Shells  of  Victoria. 

By  J.  H.  (tatmke  and  <"  .1.  (Jabkikl  ...  ..       i>'.» 

X.  -Victorian  (jraptolites.   Part    IV.;   Some   N'.w  or  Little-known 
Sp.cies.     By  T.  S.   Hai.i,.  M.A..   D.Sc.     (  Plates  XVII.  and 
XVIII.,  and  Te.xt  Fif,Mire8)         ...  ...  ...  ...    *1m|. 

XI. — The   Petrolo^'y    and    Minin-^'    Geoloj^y    of    tho    Country    ni;ir 

Queenstown.     By  Nukman  H.  Jinnkk,  B.Sc.     (Plate  Xl.\)      I  l'.» 

.\  1 1.— Studies  in  the  Physical  Chemistry  of  Kssential  <  )ils.  (Part 
I. — The  Physical  Pro|K'rties  of  mixtures  of  two  Terpene 
substances  in  relation  to  thos"  of  the  constituents.  By 
Ik.  Bakky  Drew,  M.Sc,  and  E.  Ivan  Rosknblum,  M.S,-. 
Part  II. — The  Physical  Constants  of  some  Terijenes  and 
oxyiLjenated  derivatives  thereof,  and  their  variation  witii 
temperature.     By  Iva.s    Kosenblum,   M.Sc.  ...  .      1 1!» 

XIII. — Sin<;ular  Parameter  Values  in  tlie   Boiuidary  ProMems  of  the 

P.itential  Theory.  By  < '.  E.  Wka  rHKRBUUN.  .M.A.,  B.S.-.  Kit 
XIV.     On  the  (Jeojrraphical    Distril.ution  of  tlie  Sea-(Jrasses.      By  <'. 

H.  OSTKNKKLI).  ...  ...  ...  ...  17'.» 

XV— Mitt. -r    Pit    and    Sensitivity    of   Appl.'sto    Poi.-uns.      Bv   II.    'i 

Bkiii.ahl.  B.S.v,  and  A.  « '.  II.  KoTHeka.  IVI.A.,  U.S.-.  ...      litl 

XVI. —  Notes    on    Australian    an<l    Tasmanian    Si-ydmaeuidae,    with 

Descriptions  of  N»'w  Species.      ByAKruiK   M.   Lea  ID.s 


XVII. —Notes  ou    A inyctoiides,  with    Descriptious  t.f    N.-w    Spici.-b 

(Part  II.).     Hv  EusTACK  AV.    Fkboitsun,  .M  |{  .  (  1,..'\1  2:t2 

X\' III. —The   Petrology   of  the    Ign.'ous    Rocks    near    HeHle.svin<«  and 

Narbethoug.     By  Nokm.\n  K.  .Ins-NKR,  B.S<-.     (Plat.-  I.)    .      'Ml 
XIX.— On  the  Occurrence  of   Fj^neous   Pebble.-*  in  a  Con^'lomerate  of 
Upper  yihirian  A«,'e  from   near    Wiilhalla.        By    Nokman 
R.  JuNNER,  B.Sc.     (Plate  II. (  ...  ^sc, 

XX. — Contributions  to  the  Flora   t>f  Australia.  N«.    L'l'       My  Ai.kkkk 

J.  EwAKT.  D.Sc.  Ph.I>  297 

XXI.— Certain  Suffixes  in  O.-eanic  Liiuffiu^ifs.      IJy  W     <i.  Ivk.vn  ;{Ua 

XXII.— Notes  on  the  .-<o-calleil  Obhi«liau  from  Geeloug  au«l  from  Tara- 
dale,  and  on  .\ustralitcs  Hy  Kunkst  W.  Skkath.  D.Sc  . 
A.R.C.S..  F.G.S  ...  .        3a:J 

XXIII.— On     Bitt.r    I'il    and    Sensitivity  ..f    Apj-l.  .^    t..    P..i>..i»        lU 

Alkrh.  .1.   EwAKT,   l>.Sc..  Fh  !•  Xlli 

XXIV. — New  or  Little-known  Victorian  Ftmsils  in  the  Natiiiial 
Museum.  (Part  XVII. — Some  Tertiary  CephaU'poda).  By 
Frederick  Chai-man.  A.L  S  .  .i.-      (Phitcb  III.-VII  I  i  3ol 

XXV. — Descriptions    t>f    thre«'    unusual    fmuis    of     Australites    fr<>m 
Western  Victoria.     By  Er.n-kkt  \V    Skkath.  hSc.  .V.b'C.S.. 
F.G.S.     (Plate  IX.)      ..  .  .  ...     3G2 

XXVI. — Notfon  Eucalyptus  alpina,  Liiid.,  and  its  Essential  nil.      Hy 

l;.  r.  Bakkk.  F.l-.S..  an<l  H.  d    Smith.  F.CS.       .  :i»)7 

XXVII.— Some  Observations  un  the  Methods  of  Using  the  Ag^JlutinH- 
tiou  T«.st  in  the  Dia-rnosis  of  Disejise  in  the  liovinos  caused 
by  the  Bacillus  of  ('..nta-^i<>u'^  Abortion.  By  II.  K.  Sedijon, 
B.V.Sc.  .  ...     :i70 

Index     ...  :«»! 


[Proc.  Roy.  Soc.  Victoria,  27  (N.S.).  Part  I..  1914.J 

Am.    I — Victoi'idn    Hulutharoidea,   with  descriptions   of 
New   Species. 

By  E.  C.  JOSHUA. 

(With    I'latf   I.), 
k.ad   l:.'th   March.  lUli 

III  tliu  following'  j»:i|MT  Htti'fH  spttics  art-  dralt  witli.  four  of 
wliicli  are  liflii-vi-iJ  to  lo  new  to  scitMite.  No  iitteiiipt  lias  been  made 
to  L'ive  :i  eonipletu  synonvniy  of  eaeli  speeieK.  l)Ul  a  leferenie  has 
been  ^'iven  to  wlioro  sueli  may  Iw  ftnind.  The  author  desiies  to 
oxprfss  hiK  thanks  to  PKifeKsor  Speruei.  the  Diieetor  of  the 
National  .MiiNeum.  .\IellM)urne,  for  permission  to  make  an  examina- 
tion of  tho  speeiniens  eontained  in  its  eollettion.  in  which  all  those 
<I<m1i  with  are  intlmled;  ho  also  wishes  tc»  thank  Mr.  J.  A.  Ker- 
sliau.  tlin  Curator  of  tho  alxjvo  institution,  for  much  kindness  and 
attention  iireived  from  him.  T.j  Dr.  T.  S.  Hall,  of  the  Hiolopical 
(U'jtartinent.  of  the  I'niversity  of  .MellMiurne.  his  thanks  are  duo 
foi  most  useful  jruidaiue  jriven  on  many  occasions,  partiiiilarly 
it:  tojMKvtion  with  tho  literatur*-  of  the  subject.  Very  valuable 
assistaiui'  in  i-olleit inir  has  Ikch  L'iven  him  by  Mr.  H.  Hoebuck. 
a  (Htloii^r  naturalist,  ami  by  .Mr.  James  WilKon.  in  the  nuikingr 
'if  arranged  slides  of  the  spicules  found  in  some  of  the  species. 
ir«-  part  ioilarly  desires  to  thank  Professor  Dendy.  of  Kinp's  Col- 
IfL''-.  London,  for  vi-ry  kindly  comparing  specimens  <.f  ('liiritlnta 
(hiiuiliin  ii^ix,   Parker,   with  that  of  tlu'  Author's  Trorli<nhit(i  aUnni. 


Taxonoiny. 

Tho  system  of  classification  adopteil  in  this  jiajier  is  that  of 
I.inlwip  (ICt.  but  (^stergren's  revision  of  the  Paractinopoda  is 
used  in  dealing  with  this  order. 

The  yenus  ?>//•» j'o.'/.V'"'*  is  discai-ded  :  tlie  writer  is  of  opinion 
that,  the  jreinis  (|ua  iriiius  never  had  any  real  existence.  Semper's 
lanirua>:o  in  dealimr  with  it  conveys  little  more  than  the  sugjrestioii 
for  a  ;:tnus.  and  in  his  catalogue  and  synonymy  he  entirely  ignores 
it.  Clark  (M)  has  taken  it  .seriously,  and  I  followed  him  in  de- 
scribing Trorhodotii  (ilhini.  but  more  recently  the  examination  of 
numerous   sj)tvimens   of   this   spivies   has   definitely   sh<»wn    me   that 


2  E.  C.  Joshua  : 

the  wheel  papillae  and  aggregations  are  not  c(Mi8tantly  met  with, 
and  that  in  ninnerous  individuals  the  distril)uti(iii  of  the  wheels 
conld  only  be  described  as  scattered  everywhere,  thus  coni])ining  in 
one  species  the  characters  of  two  genera.  So  gi'eat  an  authority 
as  Dendy  will  have  neither  of  these  genei-a,  and  adhei-es  to  tlie 
original  genus  Chiridota  for  the  reception  of  all  these  wheel-bear- 
ing forms.  Personally,  I  think  that  the  genus  Cliiridofa  nuiy  be 
usefully  sepai-ated  from  the  sigmoid  bearing  genera  on  account  of 
its  members  exhibiting  bracket  shaped  ossicles ;  there  would  appear 
to  be  no  species  having  an  ossicle  which  could  "be  described  as 
intermediate  in  form  between  a  sigma  and  a  bracket. 

Verrill's  genus  Leptoxi/napta  is  used  for  the  species  doJahrifrra 
iStimpson,  Clark  (3)  having  definitely  pointed  out  the  propriety 
of  this  course. 

The  following  is  a  list  of  the  species  dealt  with  : — ■ 

Stlvliopiix  nioUis  (Hutton). 

St icJiopiis  s/zniilans  Dendy. 

Citcintuind    /uronsp/cua    Bell. 

Cnciiinaria  niiifanx,  sp.   n. 

Phyllophoru^   iJenritidiuK    Dendy. 

Plii/Unp/innis  rexfie/tt^,  sp.   n. 

C()l()chi nm  xpinoi^iis  ((|*uoy   and   (lainiard).  , 

Coloch'nus  (Jolioluni  (Pallas). 

Fsolidium   cotwen/enx  R.    Perrier. 

Gaudiud  cJ/denMis  (J.  MuUer). 

Lepfosi/napta  dnhdrrifera   (Stimpson). 

(liiridotit  r/igas  Dendy. 

Ckiridofa  inge.ns,  sp.   n. 

Trochodota  allaiii   (Joshua).  , 

Trochndota  ruehnchi ,  sp.   n. 

GENUS  STICHOPUS. 

Sticiiopus  mollis  (Hutton). 

For    syiiouyniy    see 

1907.      Sticiiopus   mollis,    Dendy    and    IJindU-    (To;    and 
1887     Holothuria  victoriae.   Bell   (1); 
191.3.      Sticiiopus  mollis,   Erwo     Willy   (S). 
After    Trading    Bell's    act'ount    of    his    Il.,lotliinia    \ictori;te.    and 
examining   tlie   hgures   he   gives   of    its    spicules.    I    havr    no    hesita- 
tion  in   synonymising   it   with   Hutton 's   species. 


Victorian    Holothuroldeu.  3 

This  Holdtlnniiin  is  I'oininon  in  Port  Phillip  Bay.  iuiJ  at  luuiiei- 
'Ovis  localitiL's  on  the  coast.  Yniiiij;  specimuus  inay  frequently  he 
met  with  on  rocks  just  l)elow  low  water  mark,  the  older  animal* 
.prefer  deeper  water. 

Sticiiopus  simulans  Dendy  and  Hiudle. 

For   synonymy   see 

191.3.      Erwe  Willy  (8). 

On  several  occasions  I  have  made  preparations  of  the  skins  of 
Holothurians.  which,  before  seeing,'  Dendy  and  Hindle's  paper,  I 
regarded  as  specimens  of  Sticliopiis  mollis;  they,  however,  ex- 
liibited  the  peculiar  dichotomoid  ossicles  described  by  Dendy  (4), 
(5),  in  addition  to  the  ordinary  spiculation,  and  must  therefore 
be  regarded  as  belonging  to  the  above-named  species. 

GENUS    CUCUMARIA. 

CUCUMARIA    INCONSPICUA    Bell    (1). 

I  have  collected  numerous  specimens  of  this  little  holothurian  at 
Flinders;  the  form  described  by  Bell  is  usually  found  between  tide 
marks,  but  it  is  also  met  w4th  in  water  of  from  five  to  ten  fathoms 
in  depth — these  latter  specimens  do  not  quite  accord  with  Bell's 
account  of  the  distribution  of  the  podia  in  his  type — in  the  strictly 
littoral  forms  the  pedicels  may  be  described  as  ventrally  confined 
to  the  radii,  and  dorsally  almost  so;  but  in  those  collected  in 
■deeper  water,  the  arrangement  in  rows  is  quite  lost  dorsally, 
but  the  ventral  disposition  remains  the  same;  the  result  is  an 
animal  whose  external  appearance  is  identical  with  Cucumaria 
parva,  Ludwig;  the  spiculation,  however,  is  unaltered,  and  the  de- 
tails of  the  internal  anatomy  are  the  same  as  in  the  shore  speci- 
mens. In  addition  to  the  large  cruciform  bodies  I  found  numerous 
small  rods  branclied  at  the  ends,  and  very  numerous 
minute  (32  /<.)  dichotomously  foliaceous  ossicles,  which  in  some 
individuals  occui-  in  dense  crust-like  patches.  This  animal  has 
■the  curious  brood-sheltering  habit  noticed  by  Ludwig  (17)  in 
Cucumaria  parva.  I  liave  never  seen  the  young  actually  adhering 
to  the  parent,  but  on  placing  some  living  specimens  in  a  narcotic 
.solution,  after  removing  the  larger  animals,  a  number  of  minute 
individuals  of  from  1  to  3  mm.  in  length  were  found  at  the  bottom 
of  the  receptacle;  these  can  only  be  assumed  to  have  become  de- 
tached from  the  older  specimens.  The  spiculation  of  the  young 
animals  agreed  with  that  of  their  parents. 

2a 


4  E.  C.  Josh  iia  : 

I  think  that  there  can  be  no  doubt  that  this  species  is  very  close- 
to.  if  not  identical  with  Ludwig's  Cucumarla  parvo.  It  is  to  be 
noted  that  Ludwig  (17)  has  pointed  out  that  so  far  as  2)arva  is 
concerned,  the  process  of  reproduction  may  occur  before  complete 
development  of  the  spicules  has  been  attained. 

CccuMARiA  MUTANs,  sp.   n.      (Plate  I.,  Figs.  1  (a),  (b),  (c),  (d).) 

Localities. — Port  Phillip  Bay.  Westernport  Bay.  and  Victorian 
Coast  line. 

Length  60  mm.,  greatest  width  20  mm.,  tapering  gradually  to 
both  posterior  and  anterior  ends.  Tentacles,  ten  of  almost  equal 
length,  pedicels  confined  to  the  radii.  In  the  three  ventral  radii 
they  occur  in  five  closely  disposed  rows;  in  the  two  dorsal  radii 
in  three  rows.  The  calcareous  deposits  consist  of  numerous  tables. 
80  fx  in  diameter,  with  three  large  central  holes,  and  a  spire  hav- 
ing three  rods,  joined  by  a  transverse  beam,  and  terminating  in 
six  or  seven  spinous  projections.  The  calcareous  ring  has  ten 
pieces  of  about  equal  length,  without  posterior  prolongations.  The 
internal  anatomy  shows  no  peculiarities;  colour,  degraded  white; 
tentacles,  black. 

This  is  perhaps  one  of  our  commonest  Holothurians — the  young 
forms  being  met  Avith  between  tide  marks  in  all  the  localities  in 
which  I  have  collected.  It  is  to  be  noted,  however,  that  these 
young  forms  differ  very  materially  from  the  mature  animal;  their 
colour  is  a  deep  blue  black,  and  the  tables,  which  are  crowded- 
in  the  older  animal,  are  few  and  far  between  in  the  young,  and 
are   usually  devoid  of  the  spire. 

Though  a  very  typical  Cucumarian.  its  spiculation  would  appear 
to  specifically  distinguish  it  from  any  previously  described  species. 

GENUS    PHYLLOPHORUS. 

Phyllophorus  dearmatus  Dendy. 

I  collected  a  single  specimen  of  this  animal  at  Flinders,  and 
there  is  another  from  Westernport  Bay.  in  the  collection  of  the 
National  Museum.  Melbourne;  Mr.  Roebuck  obtained  two  at  Tor- 
quay. Tlio  al)sence  of  spicules  in  the  perisome  would  appear  to  be 
not  unconunon  in  uiembers  of  this  genus.  A  species  about  to  be 
described  exhibits  the  same  pec-uliarity,  and  another  species  at  pre- 
sent undescribed,  found  in  South  Australia,  is  quite  devoid  of 
calcareous  bodies  in  the  perisome,  with  the  exception  of  the  cribri- 


Victor ian    H<jlutJiar<>'ulea.  5 

form  plates  at  the  end  of  the  poelia  (present  also  in  detirnuif us. 
and  rfsf/t'/is).  Perfectly  fresh  material  >vas  used  for  examinatiun. 
so  that  the  possibility  of  destruction  by  an  acid  preservative  is  un- 
tenable. 

Phyllophorus  vkstikns,  sp.  nov.       (Plate  T.,  Figs.  2  (a),  (b),  (c),  (d).) 

Localities. — Port  Phillip  Bay.  Westernport  Bay,  and  Victorian 
'Coast  line. 

Size,  70  X  25  mm.,  fusiform  flexed  dorsally.  Tentacles  20. 
ten  outer,  alternating  with  five  pairs  of  inner,  the  outer  dorsal 
tentacles  are  about  three  times  the  length  of  the  ventral,  the  ten- 
tacles forming  the  inner  crown  do  not  vary  in  size.  Tube  feet 
are  thickly  disposed  over  the  whole  surface  of  the  body,  no  ar- 
rangement in  rows  being  anywhere  visible.  The  calcareous  ring 
(Fig.  2)  consists  of  ten  very  irregular  and  complex  processes, 
deeply  imbedded  in  cartilage;  the  radial  pieces  have  prolongations 
posteriorly.  In  the  perisome  there  are  no  calcareous  deposits  other 
than  large  cribriform  plates,  at  the  extremities  of  the  tube  feet, 
The  tentacles  are  provided  with  rods,  having  expanded  ends  pierced 
Avith  several  holes;  they  also  exhibit  irregularly  distributed  patclies 
of  small  foliaceous  ossicles  (Fig.  2a,  2b,  c,  d,  e).  Polian  vessel 
and  madreporal  canal,  single.  The  genitalia  consist  of  numerous 
comparatively  short  unbranched  coeca,  springing  from  each  side 
of  the  genital  duct,  for  a  distance  of  about  30  mm.  ;  in  the  type 
they  contain  ova.   and  are  of  a  bright  yellow  colour. 

The  body  colour  of  the  animal  is  a  brownish  pink;  tube  feet, 
white;  tentacles,  black.  In  life,  it  covers  itself  with  stones,  shells 
and  shore  debris. 

This  Holothurian  is  of  frequent  occurrence  along  our  coast  line, 
though  its  habit  of  coating  itself  with  debris  would  often  protect 
it  from  observation.  The  strong  dorsal  flexure  invariably,  noted 
in  all  spirit  specimens  of  this  genus,  would  appear  to  lie  a  post 
mortem  contraction,  as  I  have,  in  this  species  at  least,  never  seen 
it  in  life;  the  animal  simply  adheres  and  accommodates  itself  to 
the  surface  to  which   it   mav  be  attached. 


CxExrs  roLorHiRus. 

CoLOCHiRUS  SPINOSUS  (Quoy  and  Gaimar 
For  synonymy,  see 
Theel  (19).  and 
1897.      Whitelegge   (20),    Colochirus   spinosu 


6  E.  C.  Joshua  : 

There  are  five  typical  specimens  of  this  species  in  the  collec- 
tion  of  the  National  Museum.  Melbourne.  They  are  presumed  ta 
have  been  collected  in  Victorian  waters,  but  exactly  when  and 
where  is  not  indicated.  Whitelegge  (20)  records  the  animal  from 
Port.  Jackson,  X.S.W. 

COLOCHIRUS    DOLIOLUM    (Pallas). 

For  localities  and  synonymy,   see 
Erwe  Willy   (8). 

Young  specimens  of  this  Colochirus  are  frequently  found  from 
the  shore  down  to  al)Out  five  or  ten  fathoms.  Tlieir  spiculation 
exactly  agrees  with  the  mature  form,  but  the  dark,  brown,  pig- 
mented areas,  which  occur  in  the  older  animals,  are  only  repre- 
sented by  very  faint  yellow  bands,  which  rapidly  lose  their  colour 
in   spirits. 

GEXUS   PSOLIDIUM. 

PsoLiDiUM  CONVERGENS  Perrler. 

1905.      Perrier  R.   (18),   Psolidium  convergens. 
Locality. — Flinders. 

I  secured  three  specimens  of  this  apparently  rare  species  at 
Flinders;  they  agreed  well  with  Perrier's  description  (18). 

GENUS    CAUDINA. 
Caudina  chilensis  (J.   Muller). 

For  synonymy,   see 
Clark   (3). 

Localities.— We^teA-u\)0\-t   Bay,    Mordialloc. 

The  above  localities  furnished  two  specimens  which,  though  dif- 
fering widely  in  appearance,  I  assign  to  this  species.  The  larger, 
picked  up  after  a  storm  at  Mordialloc,  measures  100  x  40  mm. ; 
.it  tapers  sharply  posteriorly,  but  cannot  be  described  as  caudate, 
colour  yellow,  blotched  with  brownish  pink  ;  TJie  spirules  are  inoi-e 
massive  than  those  typical  of  chil('>isi-'<.  the  lioles  being  smaller, 
and  the  cross  being  frequently  lost  by  fusion  with  the  disc.  The 
whole  ossicle  seems  to  have  undergone  a   process  of  hypertrophy. 

The  other  specimen,  from  Westernport  Bay.  is  fairly  typical. 
Some  temptation  existed  to  regard  these  two  specimens  as  belong- 
ing to  distinct  species,  but  fortunately  the  writer  has  recently 
had  an  opportunity  of  examining  a  collection   of  over   forty  speci- 


Vicfin'Hiii     H(>/<)lliaroitl('((.  7 

mens  of  c/i/ic/is/s,  fi-oiii  till!  South  Australian  Pul)lic  Musfuin.  in 
^vlli^•!^  numerous  gradations  between  the  typical  form  and  that 
al)nvi)  described  are  recognisable. 

(;EXU8  lrptosynapta. 

Lki'Tosvnapta   dolabkifkka  (8timpson). 

I'Or   svnonvmy,   see 
Clark    (3). 

Localities. — Port  Phillip  Bay,  Westernport  Bay,  Wilson's  Pro- 
montory, Torquay,  Corio  Bay,  Flinders. 

Tlie  species  is  common.  I  have  met  with  it  from  low  water  mark 
df)wn  to  twenty  fathoms.  There  is  no  doubt  in  my  mind  that  if 
dolaJn-iferu  was  collected  at  a  locality  north  of  the  equator,  it 
would  be  identified  without  hesitation  as  itihaerens.  The  only 
slight,  Init  fairly  constant  difference,  that  1  could  detect,  was  in 
the  width  of  the  anchor  plates,  which  in  dolahrifera  are  slightly 
narrower.  The  calcareous  ring  may  be  quite  without  neural  per- 
forations, or  it  may  have  any  number  up  to  five.  The  colour  may 
vary  from  rose  to  white,  and  one  specimen  from  Wilson's  Promon- 
tory   was  a  deep  purple  black. 

CiiiKiDOTA   GK^AS   Deudy. 

Localities. — Wilson's    Promontory,    Torquay. 

There  is  one  specimen  in  the  Museum  collection.  This  was  col- 
lected by  Mr.  Kershaw,  at  Wilson's  Promontory;  it  is  very  con- 
siderably contracted,  measuring  70  mm.  by  15  mm.,  the  integu- 
ment being  much  wrinkled  transversely,  and  quite  opate.  Mr. 
Roebuck  has  twice  met  Avith  the  animal  at  Torquay.  On  the 
last  occasion  he  collected  six  specimens  on  a  far  outlying  reef, 
wliicli  is  exposed  only  on  the  occasion  of  an  exceptionally  low 
tide.  He  gave  me  two  excellent  specimens,  one  of  which,  in  spirits, 
measures  15  cm.  in  length.  Mr.  Roebuck  describes  the  animal  in 
life  as  being  of  very  handsome  appearance,  bright  scarlet  in 
colour,  with  dense,  Avhite,  prominent  papilae.  A  large  specimen 
is  capable  of  extending  itself  to  a  length  of  from  eighteen  inches 
to  two  feet.  When  handled,  they  are  very  prone  to  separate  them- 
selves into  two  or  three  pieces.  The  description  of  Dendy  and 
Hindle  (5)  rendered  the  identification  easy,  but  the  difference  of 
the  spacing  of  the  radial  muscles,  noticed  by  these  authors,  cannot, 
I  think-,  be  regarded  as  a  constant  character. 


8  E.  0.  Joshua  : 

I  found  tlint  it  varied  iK't  (Hily  in  different  specimens.  l)ut  in 
different  nix-as  of  tlie  same  individual.  In  some  eases  (jne  of  the 
muscles  would  l)e  divided  in  two  for  some  part  of  its  length  ;  I  think 
that  both  this  and  tlie  otlier  condition  refei'red  to  must  be  assigned 
to  the  state  of  contraction  of  tiie  ciicular  muscles.  Tlie  ari-ange- 
ment  of  the  wlieel  papilae  is  subject  to  variation  ;  thev  frc(piently 
occur  in  all  tlie  radii.  The  polian  vessels  were  very  numei-ous 
and  variable   in  size  in  the  animals  I   opened. 

Chiridota  ixgens,  sp.   n. 

Sea  Hall  (9). 
Dr.  Hall  very  kindly  placed  at  my  disposal  a  slide  containing 
the  Chiridota  spicule,  referred  to  in  the  above  paper.  It  has  been 
presumed  to  be  a  tertiary  fossil,  and  I  am  inclined  to  think  i-ightly 
so.  The  wheel  is  exceptionally  large,  200  f>.  in  diameter,  and  of 
tlie  usual  Chiridota  character.  Although  collected  from  a  situa- 
tion in  close  proximity  to  the  sea,  it  diffei's  from  the  ossicle 
peculiar  to  tlie  two  Chiridotidae,  found  in  the  locality,  viz., 
C  r/ir/aa,  and  T.  roehuchi ;  the  wheels  of  the  foi-mer  average  112 
fx  in  diameter,  and  of  the  latter,  80  /<.  In  view  of  the  circum- 
stances under  wliich  it  was  found,  I  propose  regarding  the  species 
as  new.  Hall's  figure  conveys  a  good  idea  of  the  structure  of  the 
spicule. 

GENUS    TROCHODOTA. 

Trochodota  allani  (Joshua).      (Plate  I.,   Fig.   3). 

Taeniogyrus    allani    Joshua    (11). 
Chiridota  allani    Dendy  (7). 

Localifies. — Port   Phillip    Bay,    Westernport    Bay,    Corio    Bay. 

This  species  is  extraordinarily  abundant  on  the  sludge  baidvs 
which  form  (the  greater  part  of  the  bottom  of  Port  Phillip  Bay. 
I  have  seen  the  dredge  presenting  tlie  appearance  of  having  been 
dragged  through  a  mass  of  lilood  slime,  from  tlie  thousands  of 
this  species  adhering  to  it.  Accompanying  it,  usually,  are  al)out 
one  per  cent,  of  Lepfos//napfa  dolahrifera. 

Professor  Dendy  very  kindly  compared  specimens  of  tliis  animal 
with  those  of  ('hiridnfa  di/nedinensis  Parker,  witli  wiiich  it  was 
at  one  time  thought  to  be  identical,  and  was  able  to  conHrm  the 
differences  I  pointed  out  in  my  original  description  of  the  species. 

(II.)  For  reasons  given  in  my  note  on  Taxonomy  elsewhere,  I 
have  abandoned  my  recognition  of  Taetiiotji/DtK  as  a  genus,  and 
noAV  assign  this  species  to  Ludwig's  Trochodofa. 


Proc.  E.S.  Victoria,  1014.       Plate  I. 


VietorHni    HulollniroiJn,.  9 

It  is  pL'rhiips  wiirtli  iiotiiiir  that  (tllfi/i /  freiUK'iiliv  ixtssi'ssrs  whct'ls 
luiviii<|-  iimrr  than  six  s))(ilN.fs.  A  ti<riiri-  of  <>iil'  sliowini:  !)  spdUt'S  is 
givL'ii.     (Fig.  :V). 

Tkochodota   uoKiiUCKi,  sp.  11.      (Plate  T.,  Figs  4  (a),  (1)),  (c).) 

Locditf  //. — T()i([uay. 

Lengtli  7.")  mm.,  l»-ea(ltli  6mm.;  vermit'onn  ;  coldui-.  wd.  Tvu 
tentacles,  the  two  v^'iitial  of  wiiieh  are  about  half  the  length  <>f 
the  dorsal.  Each  tentacle  has  1)ut  four  digitations,  the  two 
proximal  of  which  are  about  one-third  of  the  lengtli  of  the  disTal. 
Deposits  of  two  kinds,  consisting  of  wheels  meusui-ing  SO  ^  in 
diameter,  and  sigmoid  bodies  (Figs.  4  a  and  e),  130  /a  in  length. 
The  wheels  have  six  spokes;  the  rim  is  hexagonal,  its  innei'  margin 
is  coarsely  serrated  around  its  whole  circumference.  The  sexes  are 
apparently  separate.  The  genital  glands  are  unbianched.  There 
is  a  single  polian  vessel,  and  one  madreporal  canal,  which  is  fused 
to  the  dorsal  mesentery.  Mi-.  Koebuck  collected  several  specimens 
from  beneath  stones  at  Torquay,  and  I  have  since  met  with  tliem  in 
the  same  locality.  The  animal  would  appear  to  ])e  very  close  to  the 
European  species,  Trochodofa  reiitisfa,  Semon.  However,  the  pro- 
portion of  the  digitations  on  the  tentacles  and  the  form  of  the  wheel 
ossicles  differ  from  the  illustrations  of  these  structures,  given  respec- 
tively by  Clark  (3)  and  Ludwig  (16)  for  venu'^fa.  I  have,  unfor- 
tunately, been  unable  to  refer  to  Semon's  original  paper.  The 
variation  in  the  size  of  the  tentacles  is  quite  constant,  and  has  been 
•determined  by  the  examination  of  numerous  specimens,  both  in  a 
living  and  preserved  condition.  They  increase  gradually  in  size 
from  the  venter  to  the  dorsum. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY. 

(1)  Bell,     F.      Jeffrey. — "  Holothuroidea,      descriptions      <if      new 

species."      Proc.  Zool.  Soc.  London.  June  21,   1887. 

(2)  Bell.    F.    Jeffrey. — "  Notes   on    Echinoderms  collected    in    Port 

Phillip."      Ann.     Mag.    Nat.    Hist.,    vol.     ii..    pp.     401-407. 
London,   1888. 

(3)  Clark,    H.    L. — "  The    Apodous    Holothurians."'      Sniitlisonian 

Contributions,  vol.  xxxv.      Washington.   1907. 
<4)   Dendy,   A. — "  Observations  on  the  Holothurians  of   New  Zea- 
land,   with    descriptions    of    four    new    species."       Journal 
Linnean  Society,   Zoology,   vol.    xxvi.      London,   1898. 


10  E.  G.  Joshua  : 

(5)  Dendy,  A.,  and  Hiudle. — Jour.  Linn.  Soc,  vol.  xxx..  Zoology. 

London,  1907. 

(6)  Dendy,  A.. — "  On  a  small  collection  of  Holothurians  from  the 

Auckland  Islands."      Sub-Antarctic  Islands  of  New  Zealand, 
Wellington,  N.Z.      1909. 

(7)  Journal   of    The    Quekett    Microscopical    Club.      Ser.    II..    vol. 

xii..  No.  72,  pp.   105/7.      1913. 

(8)  Erwe,    Willy. — "  Holothuroidea  "     in    "  Die    Fauna    Sudwest 

Australiens,"    Band,    iv..    Lief   9.       Gustav   Fischer,    Jena, 
1913. 

(9)  Hall.   T.    S.— -Proc.    Roy.   Soc.   Victoria,   vol.   xv.   (n.s.),   Pt.    1, 

1902. 

(10)  Hutton,     F.     W.— Catalogue    of    the    Echinodermata    of    New 

Zealand.      Wellington,  1872. 

(11)  Hutton,  F.  W. — "  Notes  on  some  New  Zealand  Echinodermata, 

with   description   of   a   new   species."      Trans,    and    Proc.    of 
the  New  Zealand  Institute,  vol.   ii.      Wellington,   1879. 

(12)  Joshua,     E.     C. — "  On     a     new     Holothurian     of     the     genus 

Taeniogyrus,  found  in  Port  Pliillip  Bay."    Proc.  Royal  Soc. 
Victoria,  vol.  xxi.  (new  series),  pt.  1.      Melbourne,  1912. 

(13)  Lampert,   Kurt. — "  Die    Seewalzen,"    Semper,    Reisen    im    Ar- 

chipel  der  Phillippinen,  4  bd.,  3  Abth.     Wiesbaden,  1885. 
(14:)  Lampert,    Kurt. — "  Die  wahrend   der   Expedition   S.M.S.    Ga- 
zelle,   1874-1876,    von    Prof.    Dr.    Studer   gesammelten    Holo- 
thurien."     Zool.  Jahrbiicher,  Al)th.  f.  system,  4  bd.      1889. 

(15)  Ludwig,      H. — "  Beitrage    zur.     Kentniss    der    Holothurien," 

Arbeiten  aus  dern  zool.  zootom.      Institut.,   Wiirsburg,   2  bd. 
Wlirsburg,  1874. 

(16)  Luwdig,   H. — Die  von  G.    Chierchia   auf  der   Fahrt.    der   Kgl. 

Ital    korvette    "  Vettor    Pisani,"    gesammelten    Holothurien. 
Zool  Jahrbiicher.   2  bd.     1886. 

(17)  Ludwig,   H.  — "  Ecliinodermen,    1,    Bucli,    Die   Seewalzen."      In 

Bronn,   Klassen   und   Ordnungen   des  Their-reichs,    2   bd.,    .3 
Abth.     Leipzig.  1889-1892. 

(18)  Ludwig,     G. — "  Holothurien,     in  :     Ergef)n.     dei-     Hamburg."' 

Magalhaensischen    Sammelreise,    Hamburg,    1898. 

(19)  "  Ostergren,    Das   system   der    Synaptiden  "    (Vorlautige    Mitt- 

Iioilung).      Ofv.   K.  Sv.  Vet.  Ak.  Forhand,  vol.   iv.,  pp.   111- 
120.      Stoekholm.   1898. 
(LM))    Prirer,     R. — "  Holothuries     antai'ctiques    du     Museum    d'His- 
toire   natui-elle   ile  Paris."      Annales   des   Sciences   natur..    9 
ser.      Paris.    1<)05. 


Victorian    Hololliuroideu.  1  I' 

(21)  Theel,      Hjaluui-r.  —  Report      on      the      Holotliuroideu,      pai't      ii. 

Report    oil    the    scientific    results    of    the    voyage   of    H.M.S.. 
Challenger. — Zoology,  vol.  xiv.,  part  xxxix.      London,   1886. 

(22)  Whitelegge,   T. — "The  Crustacea    and   Ecliinoderniata."      Re- 

cords of  The  Australian  Museum,  vol.  v.      Svdney,   1903. 


DESCRIPTION    OF    PLATE. 

Fiir.    1. — Cucu?naria  mufa/ifi,  sp.  n. 

a,  calcareous  ring,  enlarged. 

b,  c.  d,  ossicles  from  perisome    x    300. 
Fig.    2. — Plii/llophorits  vestiens,  sp.   n. 

a,  b,  rods  from  tentacles    x    300 

c,  d,  e,  small  bodies  from  tentacles   x    400 
f,   calcareous   ring,   enlarged. 

Fig.    3. — Abnormal  ossicle  from  Trochodota  allani  (Joshua)    x    300- 
Fig.    4. — Trochodota  roehitcki,   sp.    n. 

a,  Avheel  ossicle    x    300. 

b,  tentacle,  enlarged. 

c,  sisrmoid  ossicle    x    300. 


[PROc-  Kot.  Soc.   Victoria,  27  (N.S).,  Pt.  I.,  1914]. 

Art.  II.— Notes  on  Australian  Cicadidae. 
By  HOWARD    ASHTON. 

(With  Plate  II.). 

[Read  14th  May,  1914]. 

Of  the  cicadas  described  beh)w.  two  belong  to  the  distinc- 
tively Australian  genus  Macrof ri stria ^  and  come  fi'oni  Xoi'thern 
Australia,  having  been  given  to  nie  by  Mr.  Chas.  French,  junr. 
Government  Entomologist.  One  of  them  is  remarkable  for  its  re- 
semblance to  Thopha  Sessiliba,  Dist.  so  closely  resembling  it  in 
general  appearance  that  it  might  even  be  mistaken  on  a  passing 
glance.  Tlie  otlier  is  not  remarkable  in  any  way  except  for  its 
almost  uniform  chestnut  colour.  In  this  it  resembles  M.  ingrnsig- 
nata,  Dist.,  but  it  is  distinct  from  this  species  in  its  more  .sessile 
eyes,  its  nai'i'ower  thorax,  and  the  lack  of  the  Ijlack  basal  area  and 
membrane  to  the  tegmina.  I  have  named  it  after  Mr.  Fiench.  The 
•  other  tAVo  belong  to  the  genus  Psalfor/a.  one  of  tliem  cominir  from 
Lord  Howe  Island. 

Sub-family  Cicadinae. 
Division  Cicadaria. 

Genus  Macrotristkia.  Stal. 

M.    FRENCHI,    11.    Sp. 

/feud  deep,  reddish-yellow,  ocelli  sunouiidcd  by  l)lack.  two 
'castaneous  spots  at  base  of  front. 

J'roiiotinu  light  castaneous,  obscure  yellowish  central  longitudinal 

fascia,  posteror  margin  l)road,  bright  yellow.  Meso/iof)i/n  very 
•deep  castaneous.  with  cruciform  elevation  and  posterioi-  margins 
•dull    ochraccous.        Ahdoineii    deep    castaneous.    shading    to    l)lack. 

penultimate     segment     margined     posteriorly     with     dull     yellow. 

Tegmina  vitreous,  costa  and  basal  cell  pale  liriglit  yellow,  havsal 
membrane  orange-red,  venation  from  light  fuscous  at  l)a.se  to  dark 

fuscous   at    apex.      Wings;   vitreous,    venation   yellow    at    ba.se.    pale 

fuscous  at  apex.     Body  beneath  black,   face,  legs  and  rosti-uni  cas- 


Proc.  R.S.  Victoria,  1914.       Plate  II. 


Howard  Ashton  deU 


Notes    on    Ausfrdltau    ('Icddiihif.  13- 

taiR'i'us.     Sp;u-L'  between  t'uee  and  eyes  yellow.     Abdominal  segments 
shining  hlnek.  margined  with  dnll  orhiaceous. 
.    Le/if/(/i. — 34  mm.,  exp.  tt'g.   10")  mm. 
//irh. — Catherine  River.   N.   Teiiitorv,   S.    Australia. 


M.    TH0PH0IDK8.    n.    sp. 

Head  and  thoi-ax  othiaeeous.  //cad  a  little  reddish.  Proiiotuin 
with  two  central  longitudinal  lines  (enclosing  a  yellow  streak),  in- 
cisures, anterior  border  of  posterior  margin,  eastaneous.  posterio]- 
margin  very  l)road.  stramineous.  Mesoiiofum  Avith  two  short  central' 
obcouical  spots,  two  longer  outer  fascia,  and  the  area  before  the 
cruciform  elevation  eastaneous.  Abdomen  eastaneous.  Tegmnia 
witii  costa  stramineous,  posterior  edge  and  other  venation,  except 
ulna  eastaneous,  basal  cell  deeply  and  opaquely  eastaneous,  basal 
membrane  ochraceous.  Anastomoses  to  apical  areas  very  faintly 
infuscated,  and  traces  of  suffusion  about  apices  of  longitudinal 
veins  to  these  areas.  Wings  with  venation  stramineous.  Body 
beneath  light  eastaneous,  except  for  head,  which  is  reddish-yellow. 
Face  prominent,  reddish-yellow.  Rostrum,  eastaneous,  darker  at 
tip,  reaching  hind  coxae.  The  eyes  are  very  sessile,  and  the- 
head  very  short  above.  The  species,  except  for  its  red  and  yellow- 
colouration,  resembles  M.  angidaris,  Germ.,  more  than  any  otlier 
of  its  genus.      The  wing  tips  of  the  specimen  are  mutilated. 

LetigtJi. —       il  nmi.  ;  exp.  teg.,  circ.   120-124  mm. 

//ah. — Norseman,  W.   Australia. 

Allied  to  M.  godingi,  Dist. 


Division  Cyclochilaria. 
Genus  Psaltoda,  Stal. 

PSALTODA   ADONIS,    n.    Sp. 

//ea(/  and  thorax  gieen.  abdomen  brownish  lutemis.  Head,  with 
base  of  front,  narrow  fascia  Ijetween  eyes,  and  i-egion  of  ocelli  black, 
eyes  dark  Ijrown,  ocelli  close  together,  pale  red.  Pvonotitni  with 
incisures,  inner  border  of  anterior  margin,  inner  and  outer  bordei's 
of  posterior  margins  black.  Mesonofum  with  two  short  central 
obconical  spots  yellowish,  margined  with  black,  two  longer  obconi- 
cal  black  spots  outside  these,  inwardly  excavated  with  yelloAvish- 
green,  a  central  lanceolate  line,  and  tw^o  rounded  spots  at  anterior 


114        Howard  Ashton :   Notes  on  Australian  Cicadidae. 

angles  of  cruciform  elevation,  black.  Abdomen  deep  brownish, 
somewhat  luteous.  with  darker  bands  on  apical  segmental  margins. 
Tegmina  vitreous,  costa  green  on  basal  half,  thence  deep  lirown. 
'Other  venation  Ijrown,  with  apical  veins  narroAvly  infuscated  and 
veins  at  the  bases  of  second  and  third  apical  areas  deeply  and 
broadly  margined  Avith  fuscous.  Wings  with  apical  veins  nari-owly 
fuscously  margined.  Head  beneatli  with  lateral  striae,  and  central 
■sulcus  to  face  black,  legs  green,  with  fore  and  intermediate  tibiae 
and  tarsi  brown,  opercula  broad,  brown,  overlapping  at  centre. 
.obli(iue  at  hind  margins,  rostrum  barely  reaching  hind  coxae. 

Lenr/fh. — 37  mm.;  exp.  teg.  114  mm. 

Hab. — Blackbutt,  Queensland. 

Allied  to  P.  fnmipetmis,  Ashton,  from  which  it  may  lie  clearly 
distinguished  by  the  different  marking  of  tegmina  and  wings,  the 
greater  size,  the  more  convex  front  to  head,  and  the  very  oblique, 
angular    opercula. 

PSALTODA    IX8ULAKIS,    n.    sp. 

JJead  pale  yellow;  base  of  front,  Avliole  of  vertex,  and  broad 
fascia  from  eyes  through  vertex,  black.  Pronofum  black,  anterior 
.marginal  transverse  fascia,  followed  by  two  oblique  spots,  a  narrow 
central  fascia  and  two  large  triangular  discal  spots,  pale  yellow. 
Posterior  margin  pale  yellow.  Mesonotum  pale  yellow,  two  central 
•obconical  spots,  the  apices  of  which  unite  with  the  lateral  angles  of 
a  broad  central  lanceolate  spot,  wliich  then  occupies  the  whole  space 
before  cruciform  elevation,  and  two  broader  exterior  obconical 
fasciae,  black.  Abdomen  shiny  black,  two  patches  of  silvery  tomen- 
'tum  one  on  each  side  of  second  segment.  Body  beneath  yellowish- 
white,  streaks  to  femora  and  fore  tibiae  black,  rostrum  black, 
reaching  hind  coxae.  Opercula  outwardly  oblique,  rounded  pos- 
;teriorly.  Tegmina  and  wings  viti'eous,  immaculate,  venation  near 
■base  yellowish,  outwardly  fuscous. 

Length,  26  mm.,  exp.  teg.  76  mm. 

flab. — Lord   Howe   Island. 

Allied  to  P.  harrisii.  Leach. 


DESCRIPTION     OF     PLATE. 

Fig.  1. — Macrotristria  thophordes,  n.    sp.      Natural  size. 

Fig.  2. — Macrotristria  frenchi,  n.   sp.     Natural  size. 

Fig.  3. — Psa/toda  adonis,   n.   sp.      Natural   size. 

F"'ig.  4. — Psaltoda  insidaris,   n.   sp.       x   3. 


[Proc.  Rot.  Soc.  Victoria,  27  (N.S.),  P'r.  I.,   1914J. 


Aim'.    Hi.  —  Threr  New  African   ('ieadas. 


By  HOWARD    ASH  TON. 


(With  Plate  III.) 


[Read   14th  May,  1914]. 


All  these  species  come  from  Central  Africa,  and  all  belong  to 
the  dominant  African  genus  Platypleura.  The  first  one,  P.  nir/ro- 
marginata,  is  distinguished  by  its  immensely  dilated  pronotal 
angles,  being  allied  to  Butler's  P.  quadniticoUis,  but  differing  in 
the  lighter  colour  of  the  liead  and  thorax,  and  the  generally  yellow 
venation  of  wings  and  tegmina.  It  is  also  smaller  than  Butler's 
species. 

The  second  species,  P.  s/kiunha,  is  the  smallest  of  this  genus,  I 
think,  so  far  recorded  from  Africa,  It  is  a  very  distinct  little 
species,  being  placed  in  Distant's  divison  of  the  genus,  in  whicli  tlie 
tegmina  and  wings  are  wholly  opaque.  The  only  hyaline  or  trans- 
parent portions  are  the  first  discoidal  and  a  small  spot  in  the 
second  discoidal  areas,  a  postcostal  spot  in  the  radial  area,  a 
fascia  extending  along  the  basal  halves  of  apical  areas,  except  the 
■seventh,  some  minute  spots  at  the  extreme  apices  of  these  areas,  and 
the  tegminal  and  wing  margins.  The  general  effect  of  the  tegmina 
is  of  a  broad  fuscous  wing,  with  two  transparent  fasciae  running 
diagonally  along  the  apical  half. 

The  third  species,  P.  longirostris,  is  closely  allied  to  P.  adouma, 
Dist.,  but  may  be  at  once  distinguished  by  the  yellow  colouration 
of  the  wings.  It  somewhat  resembles  Walker's  P.  signifera, 
but  differs  by  the  fact  that  its  tegmina  and  wings  have  no 
parent  spots,  and  that  the  margins,  whicli  are  very  narrow,  are 
coloured  right  to  the  edge.     The  rostrum,  also,  is  very  much  longei-. 

The  genus  Platypleura,  besides  being  widely  distributed  over 
Africa,  Asia,  Malaysia,  and  the  Philippines,  lias  Ijeen  recorded  by 
Mr.  W.  W.  Froggatt,  from  Northern  Australia,  a  typical  species 
having  been  taken  by  Mr.  J.  0.  Tepper,  and  named  after  him. 


]6  Hoivard   Ashton  : 

Sub-family  Cicadinae. 
Division  Polyneuraria. 
Gen.   Platy pleura,   Am.  and  Serv. 

P.    ^•IGROMARGINATA,    D.    sp. 

Jiale. — Hecuh  ochraceous.  with  a  faint  tint  of  green.  Eyes  brown, 
ocelli  red.  a  slender  broken  l)lack  fascia  between  eyes,  passing 
through  region  of  ocelli.  Proiiot n ni ,  ochraceous,  faintly  greenish, 
central  tranverse  fascia  on  anterior  margin,  and  margins  of  pos- 
terior marginal  area  l>lack,  with  broad  V)lack  margins  to  the 
strongly  produced  lateral  processes,  enclosing  a  triangular  spot  on 
each  of  these  produced  areas.  MexoDof uni  shining  chocolate  brown, 
two  comma-shaped  spots  in  centre  of  anterior  margin,  and  a  trans- 
verse spot,  anteriorly  ol»tusely  angled  in  the  depression  before  the 
ci-uciform  elevation.  Ijlack.  Cruciform  elevation  with  broad  flat- 
tened disc,  light  yellowish  olive.  Ahdnnnui  shining  black,  sparsely 
greyishly  pilose,  with  obseure  central  dorsal  castaneous  fascia,  final 
segmenr  brown,  tip  black.  Head  beneath  obscurely  ochraceous, 
frontal  rugae  castaneous.  central  frontal  sulcus,  two  large  spots  be- 
tween eyes  and  front,  and  two  converging  fasciae  beside  clypeus, 
blai'k.  Sternum  ochraceous.  nuirked  with  black,  heavily  pilose, 
pronotal  lateral  margins  same  as  above,  legs  castaneous,  with  joints 
yellow.  Abdomen  beneath  didl  ocliraceous,  with  central  broad  black 
longitudinal  fascia.  Opercula  translucent  brown.  Tegmina  and 
iriiKjs.  hyaline,  venation  rtchraceous,  a  little  fuscous  at  apices,  slight 
infuscations  al)out  tegminal  apical  areas,  including  bases  of  same 
and  a  series  of  faint  spots  on  ends  of  longitudinal  veins.  Anal 
areas  of  wings  a  little  dusky.  Head  very  slnnt.  not  half  as  long  as 
pronotum.  as  wide  (including  eyes),  as  jironotum  and  mesonotuni 
(excluding  pronotal  margins),  front  depiessed,  not  seen  from 
above,  flattened  beloAv,  deeply  centrally  sulcate  and  laterally  cari- 
nate.  Rostrum  yellow,  darker  at  tip.  just  passing  hind  coxae. 
Opercula  very  s(|uaie.  just  touching  in  centre. 
I  male  in  Coll..  H.  A. 
LriKjth. — 24  mm..  ;  exp.  teg..  80  mm. 
//r/A.— Africa.   Kntel>be.    T^^anda. 

Pla'i'Vpi.kura   siktmha.   n.   sp. 
11 1(1(1  l)i-owiiish    ocliraceous,    two   black    fasciae   lietwcen    eyes,    one 
pasiug    tlirough    l)ase   of    front,    tlie    (tther    across    region    of     ocelli. 


Proc.   U.S.  Vii-tni-i;v.    191  !•.        IMatc   Til. 


Three    New    African    Cicadaf^.  17 

Eyva  l)r(i\\ii.  I'rointt  mii  brownish  oehruL-eous,  iinmacvilate. 
Mf'sdiiot  mil .  Idownish  ochvaceous,  with  four  sti-oiifrly  dcfiiuMl 
black  ulvdiiiial  spots,  the  inner  pair  shorter,  brownish  spots  at 
anterior  angles  of  and  on  centre  of  disc  of  cruciform  elevation. 
Abdomen  V)lack,  shading  at  lateral  edges  and  tip  to  an  obscure 
castaneous.  Body  beneath  brownish  ochraceous.  Ttgmina  all  grey- 
ish fuscous  and  oj^aque,  except  for  a  hyaline  fascia  across  bases  of 
apical  areas,  and  another,  including  upper  discoidal  area  and 
portion  of  second.  SjDot  behind  costa.  small  spots  in  apices  of  apical 
areas,  and  margin,  also  hyaline.  Wiiif/s  Avith  basal  third  and  anal 
area  yellow,  central  third  deep  fuscous,  and  apical  margin,  Avhicii 
is  very  broad,  hyaline.  Head  equal  in  width  to  mesonotum.  short, 
obtusely  convex,  front  not  prominent,  pronotal  margins  narrow  and 
not  produced  laterally;  head,  pronotum  and  mesonotum  about  equal 
in  length  to  abdomen.  Face  flattened,  rostrum  just  reaching  hind 
coxae.  Opercula,  broadly  rounded  posteriorly,  not  quite  meeting 
centrally.     Seven  males  in  Coll.  H.  A. 

Le/if/t/i. — 13-15  mm. ;  exp.  teg.,  37-40  mm. 

I/ah. — Central  Africa.   Sikumba. 


Platypi.euha  longirostris,  n.  sp. 

Head,  dull  ochraceous.  base  of  front  in  two  bright  yellow  spots, 
followed  by  a  fine  black  fascia.  Black  fascia  between  eyes,  includ- 
ing area  of  ocelli  and  broken  between  ocelli  and  eyes,  and  surround 
a  dull  ochraceous  spot.  Eyes  brown.  Pronotum  dull  ochraceous, 
incisures  and  spot  before  posterior  margin  blackish.  Spot  on 
anterior  angles  of  pronotal  lateral  margins,  which  are  fairly  ampli- 
ate  and  rounded,  black.  Mesonotum  ochraceous,  two  central  obconi- 
cal  spots,  on  each  side  a  longer  fascia  extending  over  almost  whole 
of  lateral  areas,  between  the  two  central  spots  a  fine  line  joining 
with  a  large  black  area  before  the  cruciform  elevation ;  all  black, 
cruciform  elevation  shining  yellow.  Abdomen  black,  tympanal 
coverings  dull  castaneous.  penultimate  segment  of  abdomen  above 
covered,  except  for  central  dorsal  line,  with  white  tomentum. 
Tegmiiia  warm  fuscous,  marked  with  several  white  spots,  of  whiel 
the  most  prominent  are.  two  in  radial  area,  one  in  third  discoidal 
area,  one  in  eighth  apical  area,  and  one  at  apex  of  fifth  apical  area. 
Wings  reddish  yellow,  evenly  margined  with  piceous,  white  spot 
on  margin  just  outside  anal  area,  which  is  all  yellow.  Body  beneath 
almost  uniformly  dull  brown,  central  sulcus  to  face,  tip  of  rostrum. 

3 


18  HovKud  AsJiton  .•    Nciv    Ajnai.n    Cicadidtu'. 

transvei'se  fasciae  on  abdominal  segments,  markings  to  fore  femora. 
black,  sternum  and  abdomen  powdered  with  wliite  tomentum. 
Rostrum  reaches  penultimate  abdominal  segment.  Opercula  broad, 
rounded,  just  touching  centrally.  Tliree  males  and  two  females  in 
Coll.  H.  A. 

Length. — J"  22  mm.,  exp.  teg.,  64  mm 

7/^6. —Africa,   Entebbe,  Uganda. 

DESCRIPTION    OF    PLATE. 

Fig.   3. — Plalypleura  iiigromanjiiKUa,   ii.    sp.       x  -. 
Fig.  4. — Platyjileura  longirostris,   n.   sp.       x  2. 
Fig.   5. — Platypleura  siknmba,   n.  .sp.       x  2. 


[Proc.  Roy.  Soc.  Victoria,  27  (N.S.),  Pr.   I.,  1914]. 


Akt.  IV. — The  Anatomy  of  Caryodes  dufresnyi,  Leach 

Bv  OLIVE    B.    DAVIES,   M.Sc. 

(Government  Research  Scholar,  Melbourne  Univet-eity). 

(With   Plate  IV.). 

[Read  14th  May,  1914]. 

Introduction. 

Most  of  the  specimens  with  which  this  work  was  carried  out  wer  ■ 
collected  by  Mr.  C.  French,  at  Port  Esperaute.  N.W.  Tasmania, 
and  sent  to  Mr.  Kershaw,  at  the  National  Muesum,  who  kindly  gave 
them  to  me  to  work  out  their  anatomy. 

Two  other  specimens,  one  of  which  was  immature,  were  collected 
by  Miss  Raff,  M.Sc,  at  Mount  Wellington,  Tasmania. 

Caryodes  dufresnyi  Avas  named  and  first  described  l)y  Leach  as  a 
Helix;  Zoological  Miscellany,  vol.  2,  pp.  L53,  L54.  pi.  120. 

A  short  account  of  the  anatomy,  mostly  of  the  reproductive 
system,  has  been  given  by  Semper,  in  Reis.  im  Philip.,  vol.  iii.  p. 
102,  pi.  xvi.,  f.  7. 

Mr.  C.  Hedley,  F.L.S.,  has  given  us  a  description  and  a  figure  in 
the  Proc.  Linn.  Soc,  N.S.W.  (2),  vi.,  1891,  p.  19,  pi.  ii.,  f.  la,  pi. 
iii.,  f.l;  and  some  further  information  as  to  its  systematic  position 
in  the  Rec.  Austr.  Mus.,  ii.  1892,  p.  29. 

Other  descriptions,  chiefly  of  the  shell,  have  been  given  by 
Quoy  and  Gaimard,  in  the  Voyage  of  the  Astrolabe,  vol.  ii.,  j)].  x.. 
f.l;  and  by  Adams,  in  the  Genera  of  Recent  MoUusca,  vol.  2,  pp. 
146  and  153. 

After  having  been  described  by  Leach  as  a  Helix,  Caryodes 
dufresnyi  was  described  as  Bulimus  dufresnyi.  The  genus  BuUmus 
according  to  Cox,  possesses  the  following  characteristics  : — "  Shell 
oblong  or  turreted,  aperture  with  unequal  longitudinal  margins, 
toothless  or  dentate;  columella  entire,  revolute  externally  or 
simple;  peristome  simple  or  expanded."  While  Semper  adds:  — 
"  A  parallel  ridged  jaw.  Teeth  similar,  in  straight  or  curved  rows. 
Shell  long,  with  thick  mouth  edge.  The  kidney  is,  in  spite  of  the 
long  lung,  as  short  as  the  pericardium;  it  is  three  cornered. 


20  Olive   B.    Davie.<  : 

genital   organs   are  quite   simple,    without    aceessory    oigans ;    tli  ■ 
Huiy  l-)e  a  flagelluin." 

The  genus  Cari/odes  possesses  the  following  thaiaiters.  as  given 
bv  Semper  : — "  Foot  as  usual,  on  the  left  of  the  edge  of  the  manth- 
there  is  a  neck  fold.  There  is  a  very  peculiarly-sti  uttured  acces- 
sory gland  to  the  sheath  (Scheide)  (homologous  to  dart  sac).  Jaw 
smooth.     Teeth  all  unicuspid  (as  in  Acavus). 

"  For  the  characters  of  the  shell,  see  Albers." 


External   Features  and  General    Description. 

As  1  was  unable  to  procure  any  living  spcciments  of  Caryodt^ 
liufresnyi,  I  had  to  take  the  following  description  and  nieasure- 
ments  from  preserved  animals. 

Shell  :   Height.   37    mms.  ;  greatest    diameter,     12    mms.      Mouth 
Opening:  Height,  10.5  nmis. ;  width,  6  mms.     Whorls,  5.     Col  c 
brown   or   brownish  green,   with   darker   brown    and   yellow   bands. 
There  is  no  umbilicus. 

The  foot  of  an  average  specimen,  preserved  in  spirit,  measured 
25  mm.  in  length.  The  animal  itself  was  greyish  brown,  with  a 
lighter  grey  colour  along  the  sole  of  tlie  foot. 

Organs  of  the   Mantle  Cavity. 

The  Mantle  cavity  is  very  long  and  narrow  ;  the  kidney  and  heart 
are  situated  at  the  posterior  end  of  it;  the  bl(X)d  vessels  are  large 
and  well  marked. 

The  Kidney  is  a  somewhat  triangular  organ,  with  a  depression 
on  one  side,  into  which  the  heart  is  fitted,  and  its  apex  directed  for- 
wards. Arising  from  the  apex  is  a  bladder-like  structure,  which 
runs  backwards,  down  one  side  of  the  kidney  and  |)artly  round  its 
base,  to  oi>cn  al)out  half  way  along  this  into  the  puhnonai ; 
cliamljer. 

The  Heart.  The  auricle  is  rather  large  compared  with  the  ven- 
tricle, it  is  extremely  thin,  being  little  more  than  a  membranous 
sac.  The  ventricle  has  thick  walls  and  a  small  lumen.  The  heart 
is  surrounded  by  the  pericardium,  an  extremely  thin  membrane, 
in  some  places  very  ditlicult  to  make  out  in  the  sections. 

The  Renopericardial  canal  can  be  seen  very  distinctly  in  section, 
one  of  which  is' represented  in  Fig.  TIT.  It  is  a  short  canal  leading 
from  the  pericardial  cavity  into  the  kidney;  the  canal  is  lined 
along  along  its  length  by  very  definite,  ciliated,  columnar  cells. 


Tic     Ainitinnif    of    (\i I'ifitiirs    ihifn'<iii/i.  'J  I 

The   Reproductive   System. 

The  Hermaphrodite  »rh»ii«l  lies  rinse  to  the  iiiteinal  svirt'ace  of  the 
third  coil  of  the  viseeral  mass.  It  is  a  rosette  shaped  ^rhmd.  com- 
posed i)f  a  numV)er  of  fiuger-like  processes  united  at  the  centre  of 
the  gland. 

The  Hermaphrodite  duet  is  a  sinuuus  duet  lunninir  from  the  her- 
maphrodite gland  to  the  albumen  gland.  It  leaves  the  hermaphro- 
dite gland  from  alKUit  its  centre  and  runs  to  near  the  anterior  en<l 
•of  the  albumen  gland,  turns  back,  lying  closely  applied  to  the 
gland,  and  enters  it  about  its  centre  on  the  under  surface. 

The  Albumen  gland  is  a  large  compact  gland  lying  behind  and 
partly  under  the  mantle  cavity.  It  is  incompletely  divided  by  deep 
furrows,  which  give  it  the  appearance  of  being  somewhat  lobed. 

The  Coimnon  dtict  leaves  the  albumen  gland  from  its  anterior 
*nd,  and  passes  forwards,  where  it  divides  into  vas  deferens  and 
■oviduct. 

The  Vas  deferens  is  a  long  slender  tube,  which,  on  leaving  the 
common  duct,  passes  round  and  under  a  pectiliar  gland,  which  I 
shall  call  the  shell  gland,  and  the  oviduct,  up  to  the  anterior  end. 
where  it  then  turns  and  runs  backwards,  to  enter  the  penis  on  the 
under  surface  at  the  posterior  end. 

The  Penis  is  large  and  strongly  muscular.  At  the  posteiioi-  t-ud 
the  retractor  penis  muscle  connects  it  with  the  ImxIv  wall.  It  opens 
to  the  exterior  beside  the  female  opening. 

The  Oviduct  is  a  broad  tube  leading  fron»  the  common  duct  to 
the  exterior.  Shortly  after  leaving  the  common  duct,  the  oviduct 
receives  the  opening  of  a  large  wide  gland,  wjiiih  ajtpears  to  f\nie- 
tion  as  a  shell  gland. 

The  gland  which  I  heard  call  the  shell  gland  is  a  large  thick- 
walled  gland,  receiving  the  duct  of  the  receptaculum  seminis,  near 
its  anterior  end.  Internally  the  lining  of  the  gland  is  thrown  into 
very  large  folds,  and  lying  in  the  grooves  between  these  I  found 
small  deposits  of  calcium  carlxmate. 

This  is  the  structure  referred  to  by  Semper  as  a  long  thick  sac.  to 
the  under  sheathing  of  which  the  uterus  and  long  drawn  out  reeep- 
taclum  seminis  are  placed,  and  to  its  base  a  retractor.  This  sac 
cut  open  contains  a  sausage  shaped  Ixidy,  which  is  free  at  the 
hinder  end,  and  appears  rounded  at  the  end  ;  its  outer  wall  was 
thickly  wrinkled  and  covered  with  thick  epithelium,  in  the  creases 
■of  which  lay  calcium  carbonate  in  irregular  plates.  He  then  goes 
on  to  give  a  description  of  the  arrangement  of  the  muscles  of  this 
•organ. 


22  Olive   B.   Davies  : 

In  transverse  section  there  is  seen  to  be  a  thin  external  mem- 
brane; underlying  this  there  is  a  layer  of  muscular  tissue;  and 
lining  the  lumen  of  the  gland  ciliated  columnar  epithelium,  com- 
posed of  very  long  narrow  cells,  very  granular  at  their  bases  and 
with  many  vacuoles.  Down  one  side  of  the  gland  is  a  specially- 
marked  fold,  probably  the  one  to  which  Semper  refers.  In  section 
this  is  seen  to  be  composed  of  muscular  tissue,  amongst  which  is 
scattered  some  brown  material,  with  no  definite  structure,  and  is- 
probably  some  kind  of  secretion. 

The  Receptaculum  Seminis  is  a  globular  body  connected  by  a  long 
thin  duct  with  the  shell  gland. 

The  Alimentary  System. 

Tlie  Jaw  is  simple  and  smooth. 

The  Radula  consists  of  a  numl>er  of  rows  of  similar  unicuspid 
teeth,  one  of  which  is  shoAvn  in  Fig.  VIb. 

The  Mouth  opens  into  a  very  narrow  oesophagus,  which  is  closely 
surrounded  by  the  salivary  glands.  The  large  strong  retractor 
muscles  run  from  either  side  of  the  ventral  surface  of  the  buccal 
mass,  and  uniting,  run  along  the  length  of  the  foot.  These  muscles 
are  of  use  in  the  biting  and  tearing  of  the  food. 

The  Oesophagus  leads  into  a  fairly  large  stomach,  which  bends 
back  on  itself,  so  that  its  anterior  end  and  its  posterior  end  lie  side 
by  side.  The  stomach  leads  by  a  long  intestine,  Avhich  twists 
amongst  the  liver  mass,  receiving  the  ducts  from  this,  and  finally 
ends  in  the  rectum,  which  runs  along  the  side  of  the  length  of  the 
long  pulmonary  chamber,  to  open  to  the  exterior  at  the  respiratory 
opening. 

The  Salivary  glands  completely  surround  the  anterior  end  of  the 
oesphagus.  being  fused  in  the  mid-dorsal  line.  Their  ducts  open 
into  the  hinder  part  of  the  buccal  cavity. 

The  Liver  is  a  large  brown  organ  occupying  by  far  the  larger  part 
of  the  visceral  hump.  The  intestine  passes  through  it,  and  receives 
its  ducts  near  to  its  anterior  end.  In  it  are  also  embedded  the 
Hermaphrodite  gland  and  the  Hermaphrodite  duct,  while  the  All)u- 
men  gland  lies  closely  fitted  into  a  depression  on  its  ventral  surface, 
being  almost  completely  hidden  by  it. 

The  above  work  was  carried  out  in  the  Melbourne  University, 
under  the  direction  of  Professor  Spencer,  whom  I  wish  to  thank 
h>r  all  his  advice.  I  also  wish  to  thank  Mr.  J.  Brake,  B.Sc,  who 
kindly  took  the  photograph  represented  in,  Fig>.  I.   for  meu,. 


The    Ainiioiitij   of   Caryodex   dtifresnyi.  23 

Literature. 

Adams. — Geneiu  of  Recent  Mollusca,  vol.  ii.  pp.   146  and  163. 
Cox. — Monograph  of  Australian  Land  Mollusca. 
Hedley.  C.  F.L.S.— Pn.e.  Linn.  Soc,  N.S.W.  (2),  vi.,  1891,  p.  19, 
pi.  ii..  f.  la.,  pi.  iii.,  f.l;  Rec.  Austr.  Mus.  ii.,  1892,  p.  29. 
Semper. — Reis.  ini  Philip.,  vol.  iii.,  p.  102,  pi.  xvi.,  f.  7. 
Quoy  and  Gaimard. — Voyage  of  the  Astrolabe,  vol.  ii.,  pi.  x.,  f.  1. 
Leach. — Zoological  Miscellany,  vol.  ii.  pp.   153-154,  pi.   120. 


EXPLANATION  OF  PLATES. 


all  figur( 

3S  : — 

An. 

Anus. 

A.G. 

Albumen  gland. 

Aur. 

Auricle. 

B.M. 

Buccal   mass. 

B.V. 

Blood  vessel. 

c. 

Cilia. 

CD. 

Conunon    duct. 

C.G. 

Cerebral  ganglia. 

C.G.A. 

Common  genital  atrium. 

H.D. 

Hermaplirodite  duct. 

H.G. 

Hermaphrodite   gland. 

K. 

Kidney. 

L. 

Liver. 

M.C. 

Mantle    cavity. 

0. 

Oesphagus. 

OD. 

Oviduct. 

P. 

Penis. 

P.C. 

Pericardium. 

R. 

Rectum. 

R.M. 

Retractor  muscle. 

R.P.C. 

Renopericardial  canal. 

R.S. 

Receptaculum  seminis. 

Sa.G. 

Salivary   gland. 

S.G. 

Shell  gland. 

T.S. 

Superior   tentacle. 

V. 

Ventricle. 

V.D. 

Vas  deferens. 

V.H. 

Visceral  hump. 

24     Olive  B.  Davies:   The  Anatomy  of  Ca-ryodes  <lafre8vyi. 

Fig.   I.— Bulimus  dufresnyi  (Shell)  from  a  photograph. 

Fig.  II. — Dissection  of  Bulimus  dufresnyi.  to  show  general  posi- 
tion of  the  organs. 

Fig.  III. — Section  across  the  Kidney  and  Heart,  showing  the 
Kenopericardial   canal. 

Fig  IV. — The  Reproductive  System. 

Y'lg.  V. — The  Reproductive  System  dissected  out.  to  show  the 
course  of  the  vas  deferens,  and  the  shell  gland. 

Fig.  VI. — (A)  Portion  of  Radula,  showing  teeth  in  position.  (B) 
Single  tooth. 


Proc.  R.S.  Victoria.   1914.       Plate  IV 


^$ 


F.o„.l 


HIM    \ 


PC  / 


^"  F)u  111 


PC 


.VGA 


Fie.VI 


[Proc.  Eoy.  Soc.  Victoria.  27  (N.S.)..  I'l.   1..   1914  . 

Akt.  V. — On  a  New  Species   of  Ceratodus  from    the 
Cretaceous  of  New  South   Wales. 

By  FREDERICK    CHAPiMAN,  A.L.S.,  Ac. 

(Palaeontologist  to  the  National   Museum,  Melbourne.) 

(With  Plate  v.). 

[Read  14th  May,   1914]. 

Introductory. 

The  specimen  now  described  is  an  opalised  tooth  of  Ceratodus, 
from  the  Upper  Cretaceous  of  Walgett,  X.S.W.  It  was  presentL'd  m 
the  National  Museum  by  T.  C.  Wollaston,  Esq..  of  Glenelg.  S.A. 
The  external  surface  of  the  tooth  has  been  remarkably  well  pre- 
served during  the  opalisation  process,  even  to  the  minutest  pittings 
and  rugosities.  During  replacement,  the  precious  opal  has  infilled 
the  hollow  portions  of  the  tooth  with  amorphous  mineral.  l)ut 
the  external  part  is  faitlifully  replaced,  as  it  still  shows,  in  some 
places  to  the  depth  of  8  mm.,  the  vasodentinal  structure  as  clearly 
as  in  a  recent  tooth  of  Cerafodus.  The  tooth  is  somewhat  imperfect, 
having  lost  approximately  6  mm.  of  the  anterior  denticle,  and  a 
small  flake  from  the  posterior  denticle. 

Description    of    Ceratodus    (^Metaceratodus)^    wollastoni,    subgen. 
and  sp.  nov. 

This  tooth,  including  a  portion  of  the  splenial  bone,  comes  from 
the  right  side  of  the  mandible,  or  lower  jaw.  It  carries  four  den- 
ticles which,  in  their  directly  normal  arrangement,  are  like  those 
of  the  living  Ceratodus  (Neoceratodus)  forsferi,  Krefft.  The  inner 
border  is  more  strongly  convex  than  in  the  Jurassic  species.  C. 
avus.  Smith  Woodward, 2  but  exhibits  parallel,  longitudinal  grooves, 
as  in  that  form.  The  grinding  surface  is  nearly  flat,  or  only  slightly 
convex,  and  shallow  sulci  extend  from  between  the  bases  of  the 
denticles  nearly  along  the  entire  surface  to  the  inner  margin. 
The  grinding  surface,  moreover,  is  roughened  by  a  regular  series 


1  New  subgenus  to  include  the  Australian  Mesozoic  species.     See  note  at  end  of  paper. 

2  Ann.  Mag.  Nat.  Hist.,  ser.  7,  vol.  ,\viii.,  1906,  pp.  1-a,  pi.  i.,  figs,   la,  b.     Reprinted   in   Rec. 
<5eol.  Surv.  Victoria,  vol.  ii.,  pt.  2,  1907,  pp.  135-137,  pi.  xiv. 


26  Frederick-   Cha^mian  : 

of  small  pittings  or  areolations.  the  margins  of  which  tend  to  form 
a  rudely  polrgonal  network.  These  pittings  are  much  finer  an(J' 
closer  than  seem  to  be  indicated  in  the  woodcut  given  bv  Ameghino, 
of  Ceratodu<  iheringi.x  from  the  Upper  Cretaceous  of  Patagonia. 
The  splenial  portion  at  the  base  projects  from  the  tooth  for  about 
4.5  nmi.,  and  is  flange-like.  At  the  junction  of  the  tooth  with 
the  splenial,  the  lower  surface  is  rather  deeply  excavated. 

Dimension^.— IjQTxgth.  of  tooth  when  complete,  about  35  mm. 
Length  of  second  anterior  denticle  from  its  junction  with  the  base, 
6  mm.  Length  of  anterior  denticle,  approximately  17  mm.  when 
complete.  Greatest  height  of  tooth  as  distinct  from  the  splenial 
bone.  10  mm. 

OccurreiK-e. — Upper  Cretaceous    (opal    deposits).       Walgert.    ' 
Baradine,   New  South  Wales.     Collected  and  presented  by  T.    C. 
WoUaston,  Esq. 

Bel-at  ion  ships. — A  British  form,  Ceratodii^  di^auris.  Agassiz,- 
from  the  Rhaetic  of  Aust  Cliff,  shows,  in  the  figure  given  by  L.  C. 
Miall,^  four  denticles,  as  in  the  present  species.  The  denticles  in 
the  specimen  mentioned,  however,  are  more  trenchant  than  in  the 
present  species. 

Ceratodus  aru4.  Smith  Woodward.*  sliows  a  nearer  relationship- 
than  other  described  forms,  in  having  four  denticles,  and  in  these 
being  comparatively  short. 

An  Upper  Cretaceous  species  from  Patagonia.  C.  iheringi, 
Ajiiegliino.-'  appears  to  be  a  palatal  tooth.  It  has  more  salient  den- 
ticles, five  in  number,  and.  according  to  Ameghino.  shows  closer 
alliance  with  the  European  mesozoic  species  than  with  the  living 
Australian  C  (yeoceratodtis)  forateri. 

Dr.  Emile  Haug  has  described  a  Cretaceous  species  of  Ceratodus 
{C.  africavu^.)  from  Djoua.  near  Timassanine.  in  the  Sahara.^ 
which  differs  from  the  Triassic  European  examples-  in  the  presence 
of  crenulations  upon  the  anterior  side  of  the  tooth,  and  of  six  ridges 
instead  of  five,  characters  which  approach  those  of  the  living  lung- 
fish.  Cerafodvs  (Xrorerafodus)  forstrri.  of  Queensland. 

TTie  surface  character  of  the  upper  portion  of  the  tooth  <>f  C.  tpof- 
Jasfoni  bears   a   dose   resemblance  to    the    recent  Cerafodv^.    from 


I  PnKHf.  Unh-.  La  Phtto.  Xo.  f,  19M.  p.  10,  fijr.  1. 

e  r«ss»us  fossUes,  Alias,  vol  iiL,  ISSS,  pi.  \ix.,  fisj.  19. 

Z  rSee  Miall  (Ceriitodiu  parent:.  Mi&ll  non  Ag^iaaz,  fide  Woodward  and  Siierbon.  Brit.  Fos;-.  Ven. 
IsSCi.  p  36).  Vul  Soc.  Mon.,  ISTs,  pi.  v..  fig.  7. 

4  Loc-,  sui>ra  cit.,  pd.  L,  fii^s-  1,  la,  h. 

5  Ijot:  supra  dt.,  j».  10.  fi^.  1. 

6  C  R.  .\t-*d.  S.-i.,  Piris,  vol.  ciLxxiiiL.  1904.  p.  1S29. 


Proc.  K.S.   Victoria.   1914.       Plate  V. 


F.C.  ad  nat.  del. 


Tooth   of  Ceratodus  (Metaceratodus)  wollastoni,  sp.  nov. 
Upper  Cretaceous;    New  South  Wales. 


A    Ncic    Speciefi   of  Geratodus.  27 

which  it  seems  to  ilift'ev  only  in  the  less  iiuuiber  of  denticles.  Re- 
garding this  latter  featuie.  Smith  Woodward  remarks,!  in  speaking; 
of  the  Jurassic  form  C  ants,  which  likewise  has  only  four  den- 
ticles, "  The  multiplication  of  the  denticles  has  already  been^ 
observed  in  the  teeth  of  certain  sharks  as  they  are  traced  onwards 
in  time;  the  same  phenomenon  obviously  occurs  in  C'erafodvs/' 

Conclusions. 

The  occurrence  of  a  tooth  of  C'rrafodus  in  the  Upper  Cretaceoii'- 
New  Sf)uth  Wales  helps  to  link  up  the  fossil  Australian  species  with 
the  living  Ceratodus  (Neoceratodus)  of  Queensland.  The  older 
form.  C.  anus,  like  the  present,  in  shoAving  only  four  denticles  as 
against  six  in  the  living  species,  bears  a  close  affinity  to  the  Creta- 
ceous species,  C.  wollastoni.  On  the  other  hand,  the  surface  of" 
attrition  in  the  Cretaceous  tooth  has  a  .structure  almost  identical 
with  the  tooth  of  the  living  lung-fish,  distinguishing  it  in  this 
respect  from  the  comparatively  coarsely  reticulated  surface  seen  in 
the  Jurassic  species,   Ceratodus  avus. 

In  consideration  of  the  fact  that  a  fossil  scale  of  Ceratodus  iden- 
tical in  l)oth  form  and  structure  with  the  living  lung  fish-  has  been; 
found  in  the  same  series  of  Jurassic  strata  in  Gippsland^  wdiich 
contained  the  tooth  of  Ceratodus  arus,  the  evidence  for  associating 
the  Juiassic  specimen  (and  at  the  same  time  the  present  Cretaceous 
form)  with  both  genus  and  subgenus  of  the  living  mudfish,  were  it 
not  for  the  number  of  denticles  on  the  tooth,  Avould  seem  to  be 
almost  conclusive.  In  view  of  the  intermediate  oi-  annectant  charac- 
ters of  the  Jurassic  and  Cretaceous  with  the  living  species  of  Aus- 
tralia, the  subgeneric  name  of  Metacerafodus  is  here  suggested. 

EXPLANATION  OF  PLATES. 

Fig.  ]. — Ceratodus  (Metacerafodus)  wollastoiit ,  subgen.  et  sp. 
nov.  Kight  mandibular  tooth.  Upper  Cretaceous,  W^algett,  New 
South  Wales.     Nat.  size. 

Fig.  2. — Ditto.     Outer  aspect  of  tootii.     Nat.  size. 

Fig  ."'>. — Ditto.  Denticle  enlarged,  to  show  the  nature  of  the 
pitted  outei-  surface,    x    2. 

1   Lof.  supra  cit.,  1006,  p.  2. 

•2  The  native  name  "  Barramunda"  jfiven  to  the  liiii{f-fi.sh  is  applied  to  any  larjfe  river  fish  inr 
Queensland,  and  according,' to  some  authorities  (see  D.  G.  Stead,  "Fishes'  of  Australia,"  190<i,  p. 
229),  properly  belonj^s  to  the  osteojjlossid,  Scltrupagen  leichardti.  The  native  name  "  djelleh  "  es- 
pecially denotes  the  lung-fish. 

3  Rec.  Geol.  Surv.  Victoria,  vol.  iii.,  pt.  2,  1912,  p.  234,  pi.  xxxix. 


^/ 


[Proc.  Roy.  Soc.  Victoria,  27  (N.S.),  Part  1.,  1914]. 

-Ak'I'.    Y\.— Description   of  Neiv   and    Rare    Fossils    obtained 
by  Deep  Boring  in  the  Mallee. 

Part  III.' — Ostracoda  to  Fishes. 
With  a  cowtpiete  list  of  Fossils  found  In  the  Borings. 

BY 

FllEDERICK    CHAPMAN,    A.L.S.,  Etc. 

(Palaeontologist  to  the  National  Museum). 

(With  Plates  VI. -X.). 
[Read  11th  June,  1914]. 

Class   CRUSTACEA. 

Super-Order  OSTRACODA. 

Family  CYPRIDAE. 

Genus  ARGILLOECIA.  G.  0.  Sars. 

Argillokcia  badia,  a.  S.   Biady.     (Plate    VI.,   Fig.  1). 

Argilloecia  bodia,  G.  S.  Brady,   1880,  Rep.   Chall..   Zoology, 
vol.   i.,  pt.   iii..  p.   40,  pi.  vi.,  figs  Sa-d.     Egger,   1901, 
Abhandl,  k.  bayer.  Akad.  Wiss.,  vol  xxi.,  pt.  ii..  p.  422, 
pi.  iv.,  figs.  6.  7. 
Observations. — 

.This  is  the  first  record  of  the  species  in  the  fossil  state.  It 
-was  described  by  Dr.  Brady  from  a  "  Challengei'  "  dredging  in 
'2-10  fathoms  at  Port  Jackson,  New  South  Wales.  Dr.  Kgger  also 
obtained  this  species  fioni  "  Gazelle  ""  dredgings  off  the  N.W.  coast 
of  Australia  at  357  metres;  and  off  the  coast  of  Queensland  at 
951  metres.  Its  occurrence  in  the  fossil  condition  adds  tn  the 
list  of  species  of  Mallee  fossils,   especially  the  ostracoda   and   some 


1.    For  Part  II.  see  this  pirt>litation,  vol.  .\.\%'i.  (ii.s.)  pt.  ii.,  l')14,  pp.  S01-o31. 
'2.   The  fossil  ostracoda  of  the  eainozoics  of  southern  Australia  have   hitherto   liocii  ahiiost  en- 
■tirel.v  iiefflet'ted.     They  are  therefore  here  dealt  with  in  more  detail  than  the  reniaiiiiii;;  jiroups. 


New  and  Hurt'  Fossils.  2U 

foraminit'era,  still  liviii<:-  in  the  Australian  afea.  Ixit  in  lower 
latitudes  compared  ^vitll  their  niioeene  ancestors,  this  obviously 
pointinfr  to  the  existence  of  a  waiiner  climate  in  those  times. 

The  length  of  the  fossil  specimen  is  .55  nun.,  whilst  the  recent 
example  from  Port  Jackson  measuied  .4mm.  Dr.  Egger's 
"Gazelle"  specimen  measured  still  less,  being  .21  mm.   in  length.. 

Occurrence. — Bore  5.  189-190  feet  (Janjnkian). 

(ienus  MACHOCYPIUS.  (4.   S.   Brady. 
^JACKocvFius   DKcuKA.   G.   S.    Brady  sp.      (Plate   VI.,    Fig.  2).^ 

Ci/f/ierif/eis  decora,  G.  S.  Brady,  1865,  Trans.  Zool.  Soc, 
Lond.,  vol.  v.,  p.  366.  pi.  Ivii.,  figs.  13a-c.  Mac- 
rocyprls  decora,  G.  S.  Brady,  1880,  Rep.  Chall.,  Zool.. 
vol.  i..  pt.  iii..  p.  44.  pi.  i.,  figs,  'oa-d.;  pi.  vi.,  figs. 
8a,  b. 
Ohservatioiis.  — 

The  geographical  distribution  of  this  species  extends  from  the 
West  Indies  southwards  to  the  Southern  Ocean  at  Kerguelen  Id.. 
and  thenee  to  the  Admiralty  Ids. 

This  species  has  been  recorded^  in  the  fossil  state  under  the  name 
of  Paracyprlit  decora,  from  the  Govt,  well-boring  in  the  Murray 
River  Flats,  30  miles  N.W.  of  the  Nor'-West  Bend  of  the  Murray 
River.  The  age  of  the  fossil  from  that  locality  is  probably  Kalim- 
nan  (L.  Pliocene,  "  Miocene  "  of  Prof.  Tate).  The  present  recorded 
specimens  range  from  Janjukian  to  Kalimnan.  The  Mallee 
examples  approximate  to  the  living  specimens  in  size. 

Occurrence.— Bove  9.  256-263  feet;  315-325  feet,  Kalimnan  or 
Janjukian).  Bore  10.  160-186  feet  (Kalimnan).  Bore  11,  542-544 
feet  (Janjukian). 

Macrocypris  tumida,     G.  8.    Brady.     (Plate   VI.,  Fig   3). 

Macrocypris  tumida,  G.  S.  Brady,  1880,  Rep.  Chall.,  Zool., 
voF.  i.,  pt.  iii.,  p.  43,  pi.  vi.,  figs.  la-d.     Egger,  1901. 
Abhandl.  k.  bayer.  Akad.  Wiss.,  vol  xxi.,  pt.  ii.,  p.  424. 
pi.    i.,  figs.   27-29. 
Observations.  — 

This  species  is  one  of  the  commonest  and  most  generally  distri- 
buted   in    tlie    Kalimnan    and    Janjukian    portion    of    the    present 


1.   Gool.  Maj,'.,  Deo.  ii.,  vol.  iii.,  1876,  p.  335  (list).     See  also  ibid,  vol.  iv.,  1877,  p.  526,  as  to  the 
age  of  the  beds.  ,  : 


■J]0  Frederich  Chapman  : 

btn-ings.  It  varies  greatly  in  the  proportional  aciimination  of  the 
post-ventral  angle,  and  may  be  distinguished  from  .1/.  decora  by 
rthe  evenly-swollen  sides  and  less  flexuoiis  upper  and  lower  borders. 
Dr.  Brady  gives  as  original  localities  for  the  living  specimens, 
Kerguelen  Id.,  at  28  fathoms,  and  Wellington  Harbour,  New  Zea- 
land, from  the  tow-net  at  ti-awl.  Dr.  Egger  obtained  this 
-species  from  the  north-west  coast  of  Australia,   at  357  metres. 

Occurrence.— Bore  2.  198-200  feet  (Kalimnan).  Bore  4.  180-li)0 
feet  (Janjukian).  Bore  8,  210-219  feet  (Kalimnan  or  Janjukian). 
Bore  9,  256-263  feet  (Kalinuian  or  Janjukian).  Bore  10.  310-320 
feet  (Kalimnan  or  Janjukian).  Bore  11.  457-458  feet;  540-542 
feet;  542-544  feet  (Janjukian). 

Genus  BYTH0CYPBI8.  (i.  S.  Brady. 

JjYTHGCYPRIS   tumefacta,   sp.  nov.      (Plate  VI.,  Figs,  ia-c  and  5). 

JJescripfion. — Carapace  subreniform,  very  tumid.  Seen  from  the 
;side,  greatest  height  about  the  middle ;  dorsal  margin  evenly 
arched,  ventral  margin  straight  to  slightly  concave,  with  a  faint 
sinuousity  in  the  middle;  extremities  rounded,  the  posterior  rather 
more  acutely  than  the  anterior.  Left  valve  much  larger  than  the 
I'ight,  overlapping  all  round.  Seen  from  above,  edge  view  sub- 
oblong,  anterior  end  sub-acutely  rounded,  the  posterior  bluntly 
rounded.  End  view  sub-circidar,  ventral  edge  flatter  than  the 
•dorsal.     Surface  smooth. 

Dimensions. — Holotype  :  Length,  1.125  mm.;  breadth  of  caia- 
pace,  .575  mm.  ;  height,  .575  mm.  Paratype  :  A  left  valve.  Length, 
.95  mm.  ;  height,  .5  mm. 

Affinities. — In  outline  this  species  is  somewhat  close  to  Bj/thn- 
cypris  reniformis,  G.  S.  Brady, i  from  which'  it  materially  differs  in 
its  more  swollen  carapace  and  less  reniform  outline.  It  is  interesting 
to  note,  in  common  with  the  above  comparison,  that  B.  reniformis 
is  still  living  in  Bass  Strait,  so  that  it  is  very  probable  that  the 
present  species  was  the  direct  forerunner  of  the  living  Australian 
form. 

Occurrence. — Bore  4,  163-170  feet  (Kalimnan  or  Janjukian). 
Bore  5,  189-190  feet  (Janjukian).  Bore  10,  310-320  feet  (Kalimnan 
or  Janjukian).  Bore  11,  342-349  feet;  450-452  feet;  540-542  feet; 
546-548  feet;  552-554  feet;  554-556  feet;  556-558  feet;  558-560  feet 
{Janjukian). 

1.    Kep.  Chall.  Zool.,  vol.  i.,  pt.  iii.,  1880,  p.  4G,  pi.  v.,  figs.  \a-L 


New  and  Ji<ire  Fo-ssUfi.  31 

Fain.    BAIRDIIDAE. 

Cxenu.s  BAIKDIA,  McCoy. 

Bairdia  AMYfJDALOiDKS,  G.  S.   Biady.     (Plate  VT.,  Fig.  6). 

Bairdia  ami/(/daloi(/ex,  G.  S.  Brady,  1865,  Trans.  Zool. 
Soc,  Lond.,  vol.  v.,  p.  364,  pi.  Ivii.,  figs.  Ga-c.  Idem. 
1880,  Rep.  Chall.,  Zool.,  vol.  i.,  pt.  iii.,  p.  54,  pl.  ix.. 
figs.  5rt-/;  pl.  X.,  figs.  2a-c.  Chapman,  1910,  Proc. 
Roy.  Soc,  Vict.,  vol.  xxii  (N.S.),  pt.  ii.  p..  307. 
Observations.  — 

The  above  species  has  been  met  with  in  fossil  deposits  only  (mce 
■previously,  namely,  at  Batesford,  near  Geelong,  in  beds  of  Janjuk- 
ian  age.  In  the  Mallee  bores  the  continuity  of  the  fossil  series 
with  the  living  form  is  seen  in  the  fact  that  examples  occur  in  both 
Janjukian  and  Kalimnan.  beds.  The  fossil  specimens  are  slightly 
smaller,  but  otherwise  typical,  with  tlie  exception  that  the  dorsal 
margin  is  rounder  and  the  posterior  acumination  sulcated,  as  in 
B.  victrix,^  from  which  species  it  differs  in  its  more  elongate  shape 
.and  less  strongly  arched  dorsal  margin.  It  probably  points  to  an 
ancestral  type  from  which  both  living  forms  have  diverged  through 
•  differences  in  environment. 

In  the  living  state  B.  amygdaloides  has  a  fairly  wide  distribu- 
tion, for  it  ranges  from  the  coral  islands  of  the  Pacific  and  Torres 
Strait  to  Port  Jackson,  and  even  as  far  south  as  Mqncoeur  Id..  Bass 
Strait.     Its  bathymetrical  range  is  doAvn  to   160  fathoms. 

Occurrence. — Bore  4,  180-190  feet  (Janjukian).  Bore  10.  310- 
320  feet  (Kalimnan  or  Janjukian).  Bore  11,  542-544  feet  (Jan- 
jukian). 

Bairdia  australis,  .sp.  nov.     (Plate  VI.,   Fig.  7) 

Bairdia  ovata,  G.  S.  Brady  (non  Bosquet  sp.),  1865,  Trans. 

Zool.   Soc,  Lond.,  vol.  v.,  p.   354,   pl.  Ivii.,  figs.   ~ia-c. 

Idem,    (in    R.    Etheridge's    Report).    1876,    Geol.    Mag. 

Dec.   ii.,  vol.  iii.,  p.  335. 

Bairdia  (?)  ovata,  G.  S.  Brady  (non  Bosquet  sp.),  1880,  Rep. 

Chall.   Zool.,  vol.   i..  pt.   iii.,  p.   53,  pl.  vii.,  figs.  ?>a-d. 

Observations. — As    Dr.     Brady    has    already    pointed    out,''^     the 

recent  specimens  from  Simon's  Bay,  South  Africa  (15-20  fathoms), 

and    from    the    E.    of    New    Zealand    (150    fathoms),    differ    from 


1.  G.  S.  Brady.     Ibid,  p.  56,  pl.  x.,  fi^s.  ,5a-d. 

2.  Tom.  cit,  1S80,  p.  54. 


'S'Z  Fredericl'  C/uipmau.  : 

Bosquet's  Cretaceous  fossils  in  having  the  carapace  liigher  in  pro- 
portion to  the  length,  and  in  having  a  more  acute  posterior 
angle.  Bosquet  remarks  in  his  description^  that  the  valves  are- 
obliquely  oval  and  rounded  at  the  two  extremities.  The  feature  of 
a  sub-acute  posterior  angle  is  so  constant  in  both  the  Cainozoic 
and  living  Australian  examples  that  it  necessitates  a  separation  of 
these  forms  from  the  Cretaceous  specimens.-  They  may,  therefore. 
appropriately  bear  the  name  Bairdio  australis. 

The  earlier  record  of  the  above  spec-ies  as  a  fossil  is  by  G.  S. 
Brady  (in  R.  Etheridge,  as  B.  orafa.  Brady).  It  came  from  the 
Kalimnan  deposits  (Lower  Pliocene)  of  the  Murray  River  Flats, 
South  Australia. 

In  the  Mallee  Bores  the  above  species  was  obtained  from  both 
Janjukian  (Miocene)  and  Kalimnan  beds.  They  are  all  isolated 
valves,  and  thus  similar  to  the  living  examples  dredged  by  tlie 
"  Challenger." 

Occurrence. — Bore  9,  256-263  feet  (Kalimnan  or  Janjukian). 
Bore  11,  260-265  feet  (Kalimnan).  540-542  feet;  542-544  feet:. 
548-550  feet;  552-554  feet;  554-556  feet  (Janjukian). 


Family  CYTHERIDAE. 

Genus  CYTHERE,   Midler. 

CYTHt;RE  CAXALicuLATA,  Reuss  sp.     (Phite  VI.,  Fig.  8). 

Ci/pridina  caual/ciilafa.  Reuss,   1850.  Haidinger's  Abhandl. , 

vol.  iii..  p.  76.  pi.  ix..  fig.   12. 

C //there   canalicidata,    Reuss  sp..    Egger.    1858.    Ostrak.    der 

Miocan.-Schicht..    vol.    v.,    p.    33,    pi.    v..    figs.    10.    11. 

Brady.   G.   S.,   1865.  Trans.   Zool.   Soc.  Lond.,  vol.  v., 

p.    373,    pi.    lix..   figs.    4r/-/.      Idem,    1880.    Rep.    Chall. 

Zool..  vol.  i..  pt.  iii..  p.  73,  pi.  xiv.,  figs.   ~ia-d.     Egger, 

1901,    Abhandl.    d.    k.     bayer.     Akad.    Wiss..    vol.    xxi.. 

Abth.  ii..  p.  432,  pi,  iv..  figs.  15,  16. 

Observations. — This  distinct   little  species  has  had  a  world-wide 

distribution    from    Miocene    times    to     the     present     day.        Reuss- 

described  it  from  the  Cainozoics  of   Bohenua,   Austria    (Miocene), 


1.  Bosquet,  Vorli.  de  C'omm.  CJeoI.  Besfhr.  Kaart  Nederland,  vol.  ii.,  18.i4.  pp.  "H  nnd  74,  pi.  v., 
figs.  ead. 

•2.  For  tracings  and  a  copy  of  the  description  of  Bosquet's  Cretaceou.s  recoid  I  am  iiiriebted  to 
mv  friend  Mr.  Chas.  r)a\  ies  Sherlioni,  A.I-.S. 


A^eiv  and  Rare  Fossils.  33 

Gulicia  (Miocene)  and  Parma  (Middle  Pliocene).  Egger  obtained 
it  from  the  Miocene  of  Ortenburg.  Lienenklaus  found  the  same 
species  in  the  Middle  Oligocene  of  Jeurre.  It  has  also  occurred 
in  Pleistocene  deposits  in  Scotland,  as  recorded  by  Brady,  Crosskey 
and  Robertson.  In  Australia  its  present  occurrence  as  a  fossil  is 
in  Miocene  (Janjukian)  strata.  In  some  of  the  examples  found 
here,  the  rugosities  of  the  carapace  tend  to  become  papillate. 

In  the  living  condition  ('.  caiialiculata  was  found  by  Dr.  G.  S. 
Brady  in  dredgings  from  Hobson's  Bay,  where  the  present  writer 
has  also  found  it  in  abundance,  and  in  no  wise  differing  from  Reuss' 
fossil  form.  Brady  also  found  it  in  the  "  Challenger  "  dredgings 
off  East  Moncoeur  Island,  Bass  Strait,  38-40  fathoms;  and  in  Port 
Jackson.  N.S.  Wales.  2-10  fathoms.  The  example  figured  by  Egger 
(loc.  cit.  pi.  iv..  figs.  15,  16)  from  the  "Gazelle"  dredgings,  Sta. 
90,  18'  52'  S,  116°  13  E,  off  Western  Australia,  appears  to  be 
identical  with  Brady's  Cythere  foveolata,  which  has  a  broader 
carapace,  and  is  not  so  rugosely  ornamented. 

Occurrence. — Bore  9,  256-263  feet  (Kalimnan  or  Janjukian). 
Bore  11,  219-260  feet;  260-265  feet  (Kalimnan);  446-448  feet;  546- 
548  feet;  548-550  feet  (Janjukian). 


Cythere  crispata,  G.  8.   Brady.       (Plate    VI..   Fig.    9). 

Cythere  crispata,  G.  S.  Brady,  1868,  Ann.  Mag.  Nat.  Hist., 
ser.  4,  vol.  ii.,  p.  221,  pi.  xiv.,  figs.  14,  15.  Idem, 
1880,  Rep.  Chall.  Zool.,  vol.  i.,  pt.  iii.,  p.  72,  pi.  liv., 
figs.   8  a-d. 

Ohxerrations. — The  fossil  valves  from  the  Mallee  bores  approach 
the  living  specimens  veiy  closely,  both  in  form  and  ornament.  The 
polygonal  surface  wrinklings  ai-e,  if  anything,  slightly  coarser  in 
the  fossil  examples.  In  some  features  it  approaches  botli  C .  luh- 
bockuina,   G.S.B.    and  C.   demissa,   G.S.B. 

In  the  fossil  condition  C.  crispata  has  hitherto  been  known  only 
from  the  Pleistocene  of  Scotland,  Ireland  and  Norway.  It  is  a 
widely  distributed  form  at  the  present  time,  being  known  from  tho 
shores  of  Great  Britain,  Norway  and  the  Mediterranean;  and  in 
the  southern  hemisphere  in  Port  Jackson  (2-10  fathoms),  off  Boobv 
Islands  (6-8   fathoms);   and  in  Hong  Kong  Harbour   (7   fathoms). 

This  species  has  been  lately  recorded  by  the  writer  from 
"  Endeavour  "  dredgings  off  South  Australia  at  100  fathoms. 

Occurrence. — Bore  11,  544-546  feet;  654-556  feet  (Janjukian). 


34  Frederick  Chapman  : 

CYTHiiHK  DASYDEHMA,   G.    S.    Brady.        (Plate  VI.,  Fig.  10). 

Ci/t/iere  dasyderma,   G.    S.    Brady.    1880,   Rep.   Chall.    Zuol., 

vol.    i.,   \>t.    iii.,   p.    105,   pi.    xvii.,  figs,   io-f ;   pi.   xviii.. 

figs.  ia-f. 

Ohservations. — The  living  species  diffei-s  from  our  fossil  examples 

in  having  the  intersections  of  the   angular  excavations  beset   with 

short,  blunt  spines.     In  the  fossils  the  angular  pittings  are  strongly 

developed,  and  it  may  be  surmised  that  the  spines,   if  any  existed, 

were  fine  and  have  been  abraded. 

C.  dasyderina  has  been  recorded  by  its  first  describer  from  20 
widely  separated  localities,  all  of  which  sh(jw  deposits  of  a  more 
or  less  deep  sea  nature. 

Occurrence. — Bore  11.  552-554  feet;  554-556  feet  (Janjukian). 


Cythere  dkmissa,   G.   S.   Brady.      (Plate  VI.,  Fig.  11). 

Cythere  deniissa,  G.  S.  Brady,  1868,  Ann.  Mag.  Nat.  Hist., 

ser.  4,  vol.  ii..  p.   180,  pi.  xii..  figs.   1,  2.     Idem.  1880, 

Rep.  Chall.   Zool.,  vol.   i..   pt.    iii.,  p.    66,  pi.   xii.,  figs. 

,    \a-j.      Id.,    1890,   Trans.    Roy.    Soc,   Edin.,   vol.    ixxv., 

pt.  ii.,  No.  14,  p.  497. 

Ohservations. — ^The  fossil   specimens  exhibit  the  merest  trace  of 

the   posterior   spines   of   the   border     sometimes   seen   in  the   living 

examples.     Recent  specimens  were  dredgd  from  Port  Jackson  at  2 

to  10  fathoms;  and  from  Noumea,  New  Caledonia,  2  to  6  fathoms. 

In  the  South  Sea  Islands  it  occurred  between  tide-marks. 

Occurrence.— Bove  10,    160-186  feet;   225-230  feet  (Kalimuan). 


Cythere  bictyon,  G.   S.    Brady.      (Plate  VII.,  Figs.  12,   13). 

Cythere  diet  yon.  G.  8.   Brady,   1880,   Rep.  Chall.  Zool.,  vol. 

i.,  pt.    iii.,  p.   99,   pi.   xxiv.,  figs.    la-y.     Egger,   1901, 

Abhandl.    d.   k.    bayer.    Ak.    Wiss..    vol.    xxi.,   abth.    ii., 

p.  442,  pi.  vi.,  figs.  41-43. 

Ohservations. — -It  will  be  seen  on  reference  to  the  splendid  series 

of  figures  given  by  Dr.   Brady  that  this  species  is  very  variable, 

owing  to  the  passage  of  the  aculeated  surface  in  the  younger  stages 

into    the   strongly    ribbed    and    excavated    ornament    of    the   older 

stages.     In  the  senile  condition  it  somewhat  resembles  C .  normani, 

but  the  latter  has  a  more  olilifiuely  truncated  antero-dorsal  angle. 


NeiD  and  Rare  Fossils.  35 

Brady  records  this  species  from  many  localities,  chiefly  in  deep 
water,  as  in  the  West  Indies,  ofi  Sydney,  and  Papua.  Egger  notes 
it  from  Kerguelen  Island,  and  Table  Bay,  S.  Africa. 

I  have  lately  found  this  species  in  dredgings  made  by  the  F.I.S. 
"  Endeavour,"  from  E.  of  Tasmania  at  777  fathoms,  and  off  South 
Australia  at  100  fathoms. 

It  is  very  interesting  to  note  that  this  species  is  one  of  the  most 
abundant  in  the  Mallee  fossil  material,  as  it  is  in  many  deep-Avater 
dredgings  at  the  present  day.  It  is,  moreover,  an  almost  restricted 
southern  form.  The  Mallee  specimens  frequently  have  their  valves 
united,  pointing  to  tranquillity  of  the  water  during  the  deposition 
of  the  calcareous  Miocene  ooze. 

Occurrence.— Bore  1,  215-244  feet  (Janjukian).  Bore  9,  256-263 
feet;  315-325  feet  (Kalimnan  or  Janjukian).  Bore  10,  310-320 
feet  (Kalimnan  or  Janjukian).  Bore  11,  219-260  feet;  260-265 
feet  (Kalimnan);  267-270  feet;  272-315  feet;  438-440  feet;  457- 
458  feet  (Janjukian). 


Cythere  flexicostata,   sp.  nov.      (Plate  VII.,  Figs.  14a,  h). 

Description. — Valve,  seen  from  the  side,  elongate,  pyriform; 
broad  anteriorly,  with  a  deep  flange-like  border,  highest  in  the 
anterior  third ;  ventral  and  dorsal  margins  nearly  parallel  for  some 
distance,  but  tapering  posteriorly  to  a  blunt  point;  dorsal  margin 
convex,  and  interrupted  by  a  short  crest-like  spine,  ventral  margin 
straight;  the  posterior  extremity  is  armed  with  a  few  ragged  spines. 
In  edge  view  the  valve  is  thickest  in  the  posterior  third,  where  it 
terminates  in  a  strong  salient  spine,  falling  abruptly  and  concavely 
to  the  posterior,  and  gradually  to  the  anterior,  extremity.  Surface 
of  valve  ornamented  with, six  or  seven  longitudinal,  sinuous  costae, 
which  are  more  or  less  persistent  from  end  to  end  of  the  valve; 
they  pass  over  the  central  boss  or  tubercle,  and  increase  in  strength 
below  and  above  the  median  area,  being  carried  over  on  to  the 
anterior  flange,  and  posteriorly  take  a  sudden  bend  dorsally,  pass- 
ing steeply  down  to  the  blunt,  spinous  hind  margin.  Between 
the  costae  there  are  faint  pittings  or  excavations. 

Dimensions. — Length  of  valve,  .92  mm.;  height,  .44  mm.;  thick- 
ness of  carapace,  about  .6  mm. 

Observations. — So  far  as  I  can  find,  there  is  no  described  species 
which  shows  a  decided  relationship  to  the  above.  Tlie  general 
form    suggests    a    remote   resemblance   to    the   genus    Bythocythere, 

4a 


36  Frederick  CliWpman  : 

but  the  well-marked  anterior  border  and  position  of  the  spines  aiii. 
tubercle  suggest  an  affinity  with  forms  like  C>/fhere  rastromar- 
ginata. 

Occiirrtnce. — Bore  10.  310-320  feet  (Kalimnan  or  Janjukian). 

Cythere  lactea,   G.   8.   Brady.     (Plate  VII.,  Fig.  15). 

Gythertlactta,  G.  S.  Brady,  1865,  Trans.  Zool.  Soc,  Lend., 
vol.   v.,   p.   377,   pi.    Ix.,   figs.   3rt-c.      Idem,    1880,   Rep. 
Chall.  Zool.,  vol.  i.,  pt.  iii..  p.  91,  pi.  xxii.,  figs.  \a-d. 
Ohservations. — The    present    fossil    occurrences    show    this    com- 
paratively rare  form  to  have  existed  as  early  as  the  Miocene.     Our 
specimen  matches  exactly  that  figured  by  Dr.  Brady  from  an  Aus- 
tralian sounding  at  17  fathoms. 

Occurrence. — Bore  10,  310-320  feet  (Kalimnan  or  Janjukian). 
Bore  11,  562-564  feet  (Janjukian). 

Cythere  lepralioides,   G.  S.  Brady.     (Plate  VII.,  Fig.  16). 

(Jythere  lejrralioides,  G.  S.  Brady,  1880,  Rep.  Chall.  Zool., 
vol.   i.,  pt.   iii.,  p.   94,  pi.  xix.,  figs.   ba-d. 

Ohservations. — The  Mallee  specimeils  came  from  a  Kalimnan 
horizon  (Lower  Pliocene).  They  are  fairly  typical  as  compared 
with  the  living  form,  the  specimen  here  figured  being  a  somewhat 
extreme  variety  with  an  unusually  broad  posterior  extremity. 
Brady  records  this  species  from  two  localities  only,  viz.,  Simon's 
Bay,  S.  Africa  (15-20  fathoms),  and  off  the  Cape  of  Good  Hope 
(150  fathoms).  I  have  lately  determined  this  species  from  "  En- 
deavour "  d'redgings  taken  east  of  Tasmania  at  the  exceptional 
depth  of  1122  fathoms. 

Occurrence. — Bore  6,  114-150  feet  (Kalimnan).  Bore  8,  210-219 
feet  (Kalimnan  or  Janjukian).     Bore  10,   195-225  feet  (Kalimnan). 

Cythere  lubbockiana,  G.  S.  Brady.     (Plate  VIT.,  Fig.  17). 

Gi/there  lubbockiana,  G.   S.  Brady,   1880,  Rep.   Chall  Zool.. 
vol.  i.,  pt.   iii.,  p.   68,   pi.  xiv.,  figs.   6a-d. 
Obserraf/ons. — This    is    a    shallow    water   species    in    modern    de- 
posits,  being   recorded   by   Dr.    Brady   from   Booby   Island,    in    6-8 
fathoms. 

It  occurs  in  the  Mallee  bore  at  a  distinctly  Janjukian  (Miocene) 
horizon,  as  well  as  in  samples  which  have  a  mixed  Janjukian  and 
Kalimnan  (Lower  Pliocene)  fauna. 


Neiv  and  Rare  Fossils.  37 

The  fossils  differ  t'rtnii  the  liviii<i  shells  in  luiviiifj:  tlie  surfaee- 
pittings  rather  iiiore  pionouueed.  otherwise  they  agiee. 

Occurrence. — Bore  8,  210-211)  feet  (Kalimnaii  <ir  Janjukian ). 
Bore  11.  260-2(55  feet  (Kaliiinian) ;  446-448  feet;  540-542  feet 
i{Janjukiaii). 

Cytiikrk  militahis,   (^.   S.    Brady  sp.      (Plate  VIT.,  Fig.  18). 

(\//f/irrcis  mi/if  oris,   H.   S.    Brady.    1866,   Trans.    Zool.    Soc, 

Loud.,  vol.  v.,  p.  .'585,  pi.  Ixi.,  figs.  9a-f/. 
Ci/there  clar'njcra.  Idem,  1880,  Rep.  Chall.  Zool.,  vol  i.,  pt. 
iii..  p.   109,  pi.  xxiii.,  figs.  la-d. 

Ohser  rat  ions. — From  an  extensive  series  of  valves  whieh  I  refer 
to  the  above  form,  obtained  from  dredgings  round  the  Australian 
coast,  I  am  eonvinced  that  C.  milifnris,  as  figured  by  Dr.  Brady, 
represents  the  young  form  of  the  later  described  C.  clarigera.  as 
Brady  himself  has  suggested. ^ 

Several  early  Cainozoie  forms  allied  to  this  species  have  been 
described  by  Keuss,  Speyer  and  others,  which  show  it  to  be  one  of 
a  related  group  which  has  persisted  throughout  the  Cainozoie  period. 

The  figured  specimen  is  an  extreme  form  in  which  the  central 
hystricated  crest  is  st)-ongly  developed,  and  the  margin  regularly 
beset  with  blunt  spines.  Others  of  the  fossil  specimens  are  matched 
by  Brady's  G.  clarigern,  which  come  from  Port  Jackson  in  New 
South  Wales  (2-10  fathoms);  whilst  an  occasional  young  form  agrees 
with  the  figure  of  C.  miUtaris,  passage  forms  being  found  which 
link  up  the  sei-ies.  The  species  is  very  connnon  in  the  first  of 
the  depths  indicated  below.  This  is  a  glauconitic  clay  in  which 
this  species,  togethei-  witli  ('.  f/icf//o/i,  fi.S.B.,  and  other  ostracodal 
shells,   form  about   15  per  cent,   of  the  washings. 

Occurrence.— Bore  9,  256-263  feet  (Kalimnan  or  Janjukian). 
Bore  11.  260-265  feet  (Kalimnan);  562-564  feet  (Janjukian). 

Cythkre   nobmani,  G.   S.   Brady.     (Plate  VII.,  Fig.  19). 

Cythere    norniani,    G.    S.    Brady,    1866,    Trans.    Zool.    Soc., 

Lond.,  vol.  v.,  p.  .379,  pi.  Ixi..  figs.   ba-d.     Iden).   1880. 

Rep.  Chall.  Zool.  vol.  i.,  pt.  iii..  p.   101,  pi.  xvii.,  figs. 

Za-d.;  pi.  xxvi.,  figs.  4r/,  h. 

Ohservnfions. — Oui'  specimens  elosely  agree  with  the  figures  given 

lay  Dr.   Brady  in  his  original  account  of  the  species,   specimens  of 

which    were    dredged   from   the   Abrolhos    Bank,    S.    Africa.      The 

1.    R.  Etheridge,  Geol.  Mag.,  Dec.  ii.,  vol.  iii.,  1876,  p.  .S3o. 


38  Frederick  Chapman  : 

"  Challenger  ''  specimens  came  from  Heard  Island  in  the  Southern- 
Ocean,  at  150  fathoms.  Cy there  normani  was  also  recorded  as  a 
fossil  by  Dr.  Brady,  from  a  well-sinking  in  the  Murray  Flats  of 
South  Australia,!  in  beds  of  later  Tertiary  age.  I  have  lately 
recorded  this  species  from  a  raised  beach  (Pleistocene)  on  the  slopes 
of  Mount  Erebus  in  the  Antarctic,  from  material  collected  on  the 
Shackleton  Expedition. 

Occurrence. — Bore   10,    310-320  feet  (Kalimnan   or  Janjukian). 
Bore  11,  444-446  feet;  446-448  feet  (Janjukian). 


Cythere  obtusalata,  G.  S.  Brady.     (Plate  VII.,  Fig.   20). 

Cythere   ohtusalata,   G.    S.    Brady,    1880,    Rep.   Chall.    Zool., 
vol.   i.,  pt.  iii.,  p.  91,  pi.  xii.,  figs.   lo-o. 

Observations. — It  is  interesting  to  record  this  striking  little^ 
species  foi-  the  first  time  from  a  fossil  deposit,  at  an  horizon  near 
the  junction  of  the  Janjukian  and  Kalimnan  beds. 

As  a  recent  species  C .  ohtusalata  has  been  recorded  from  off  E. 
Moncoeur  Island,  Bass  Strait,  at  38-40  fathoms,  and  off  the- 
Admiralty  Islands  at  16-25  fathoms  (G.  S.  Brady),  .l^so  from 
Kerguelen  Island  at  104  metres;  near  W.  Africa  at  677  metres;  off" 
Monrovia,  W.  Africa  at  18  metres,  and  near  Mauritius  at  411 
metres  (J.  G.   Egger). 

The  fossil  specimens  are  closely  comparable  with  the  recent 
forms  figured  by  Dr.   Brady. 

Occurrence. — Bore  9,  256-263  feet  (Kalimnan  or  Janjukian). 
Bore   11,   442-444 -feet;  446-448  feet  (Janjukian). 


Cythere  ovalis,  G.  S    Brady.     (Plate  VII.,  Fig.  21). 

Cythere  ovalis,   G.    S.   Brady.    1880,   Rep.    Chall.   Zool..   vol. 
i..  pt.  iii.,  p.  66,  pi.  xiv..  figs.  ia-d. 

Obser nations. — This  species  was  originally  recorded  from  recent 
dredgings  off  Booby  Island,  Torres  Sti-ait  at  6-8  fathoms. 

The  fossil  specimen  here  figured  comes  from  a  Janjukian  horizon 
(Miocene).  It  is  closely  comparable  with  the  living  form,  only 
slightly  differing  in  the  more  regular  polygonal  surface-pittings, 
and  in  the  absence  of  short  spines  at  the  posterior  extremity. 

Occurrence.— Bore  11,  267-270  feet  (Janjukian). 


New  and   Rare  Fossils.  39 

Cythp:re  pakallklo<;kamma,  G.  S.  Brady.     (Plate  VII.,  Fig.  22). 

Cythere   pardUfhxjraiiinia,    G.    S.    Brady,    1880,    Rep.    Chall. 
Zool.,  vol.   i.,  pt.   iii.,  p.  82,  pi.  xv.,  figs.   \a-e.     Egger, 
1901,    Abhaiull.    d.    k.    haver.    Akad.    Wiss.,    vol.    xxi., 
abth.  ii.,  p.  442,  pi.  vi..  figs.   15,  16. 
Ohserratio/is. — Originally    dredged    off    Prince    Edward's    Island 
in   the   Southern   Ocean    at   50-150  fathoms,    this   species  has   lately 
been    found  by  the  writer    in    a   sounding   off   Cape  Wiles,    S.    Aus- 
tralia   at    100    fathoms.       Dr.    Egger    recorded    it    from    the    West 
African  coast,   and  it  has  lately  t>ccurred  as  a  Pleistocene  fossil  in 
the  Antarctic. 

This  species  shows  a  considerable  amount  of  variation,  the  orna- 
ment in  some  specimens  becoming  granulate  at  the  intersection  of 
the  reticulations,  whilst  the  carapace  may  be  more  inflated.  It 
seems  to  link  on  to  Cythere  wyville-thomsoni  by  annectant 
characters. 

Occurrence. — Bore  9,  315-325  feet  (Kalimnan  or  Janjukian). 
Bore  10.  195-225  feet  (Janjukian). 


Cytheke  postdeclivis,  sp.  nov.     (Plate  VIT.,  Figs.  23a,  6). 

DeKcripfion. — Shell,  seen  from  the  side,  oblong  ovate,  highest  in 
the  anterior  third,  with  parallel  sides  and  broad  recurved  anterior 
end,  which  projects  towards  the  ventral  margin,  and  is  roundly 
truncate  at  the  dorsal  angle;  posterior  extremity  bluntly  acuminate. 
In  edge  view,  the  carapace  is  tumid,  depressed  in  the  median  area, 
steeply  falling  fore  and  aft  to  the  extremities,  the  posterior  being 
deeply  impressed,  and  often  with  a  fossa  in  the  central  area.  Sur- 
face-ornament consisting  of  cancellated  and  vermiform  depressions, 
which  have  a  distinct  trend  in  certain  parts  of  the  shell,  tending 
to  parallelism  at  the  hinder  end  and  the  dorsal  margin.  The 
muscle-spot  area  is  indicated  by  a  stellate  arrangement  of  the 
cancellae. 

D/i/u'ns/(nis. — Length,  1-4  mm.;  lieight,  .675  mm.;  thickness  of 
cai-apace.   .6  mm. 

Oh.<err(ifinnx. — In  a  general  way  this  species  is  related  to  both 
G.  oral/'s  and  C.  ca/icclla(a.  The  ornament,  however,  is  so  distinct 
as  to  warrant  the  establishment  of  a  new  species.  The  posterior 
depression  is  more  marked  than  in  C.  cancellafa.  It  is  one  of 
the  commonest  forms  in  the  present  collection  of  Mallee  ostracoda. 


40  Frederick  Chapnian  : 

Occurrence. — Bore  3,  201-220  feet  (Kalimnan  or  Janjukian). 
Bore  8,  210-219  feet  (Kalimnan  or  Janjukian).  Bore  10.  :510-320 
feet  (Kalimnan  or  Janjukian).  Bore  11,  342-349  feet;  438-440 
feet;  440-442  feet;  442-444  feet;  446-448  feet;  457-458  feet;  540- 
542  feet;  542-544  feet;  544-546  feet;  546-548  feet;  548-550  feet; 
5(M-566  feet  (Janjukian). 


Cythere  rastromarginata,   G.   8.  Brady.     (Plate  VII.,  Fig.  24). 

Cythere  rastronmrgitiata.  G.  S.  Brady,  1880,  Rep.  Chall. 
Zool.,  vol.  i.,  pt.  iii.,  p.  83,  pi.  xvi.,  figs.  la-d. ;  2a-d. 
Egger,  1901,  Abhandl.  d.  k.  bayer.  Akad.  Wiss.,  vol. 
xxi.,  abth.  ii.,  p.  442,  pi.  vi.,  figs.,  5-9. 

Observations. ^T\\e  "  Challenger  "  examples  came  from  Bass 
Strait,  and  off  Honolulu.  Egger  obtained  it  between  Fiji  and 
Samoa,   and   from  the  Western  Australian  coast. 

This  is  its  first  occurrence  in  the  fossil  state.  It  occurs  in  the 
bores  in  the  Kalimnan  (Lower  Pliocene)  strata,  or  even  below  that 
series.  Like  several  other  species  of  ostracoda  occurring  in  these 
borings,  the  form  persists  in  the  present  Bass  Strait  fauna,  not 
many  miles  removed  from  the  site  of  the  old  Murray  Gulf. 

Occurrence. — Bore  8,  210-219  feet  (Kalimnan  or  Janjukian). 
Bore  11,   170-175  feet;  199-209  feet;  219-260  feet  (Kalimnan). 


Cythere  scabrocuneata,  G.  S.   Brady.     (Plate  VIII.,  Fig.  25). 

Cythere  scahrocuncato^Q.  S.  Brady,  1880.  Rep.  Chall.  Zool., 
vol.  i.,  pt.  iii.,  p.  103,  pi.  xvii.,  figs.  5r/-/.-  j)l.  .xxiii., 
figs.    '2a-c. 

Observations. — The  figured  specimen  is  a  ([uadrate  and  coarsely 
papillate  variety  of  the  above  species,  but  it  is  impossible'  to 
separate  it  from  its  associated  typical  examples  from  the  same 
series,  some  of  which  are  identical  with  the  living  forms.  This  is 
another  species  still  living  in  Bass  Strait,  having  remained  per- 
sistent in  nearly  the  same  area  from  Janjukian  (Miocene)  times.  It 
has  also  been  recorded  from  recent  dredgings  in  the  Inland  Sea, 
Japan,  and  in  Wellington  Harbour,  New  Zeal-and. 

Occurrence.— ^OYQ  11.  430-432  feet;  442-444  feet;  444-446  feet; 
446-448  feet;  457-458  feet;  544-546  feet;  552-554  feet  (Janjukian). 


New  and  Rare  Fossils.  41 


Cythere  sciNTiLLULATA,  G.  S.  Brady.     (Plate  VIII.,    Fig.    26). 

Cythere  scintillulata,  G.  S.  Brady,   1880,  Rep.  Chall.  Zool., 
vol.  i.,  pt.  iii.,  p.  62,  pi.  xiv.,  figs.  -ia-d. 

Observations. — This  species  is  represented  by  one  typical  speci- 
men in  the  bores,  at  a  level  showing  a  mixed  Kalimnan  (Lower 
Pliocene)  and  Janjukian  (Miocene)  fauna.  This  is  its  first  occur- 
rence in  the  fossil  state. 

C.  scintillulata  was  dredged  in  the  Straits  of  Magellan  by  the 
■"  Challenger,"   at  55  fathoms. 

Occurrence. — Bore  5,   189-190  (Janjukian). 


Cythere  scutigera,  G.  S.   Brady.      (Plate    VIII.,  Fig.   27). 

Cythere  scutigera,  G.  S.  Brady,  1868,  Les  Fonds  de  la  Mer, 
vol.  i.,  p.  70,  pi.  viii.,  figs.  15,  16.  Idem,  1880,  Rep. 
Chall.  Zool.,  vol.  i.,  pt.  iii.,  p.  109,  pi.  xxii.,  figs.  Sa-/. 

Observations. — ^^This  species,  as  represented  in  the  Mallee  Bores, 
ishows  the  general  specific  characters  of  the  recent  species,  but  is  less 
•distinct  in  the  sharper  features  of  the  carapace. 

Brady  has  recorded  this  species  from  Amboyna,  Java  and  Papua. 

Occurrence. — Bore  11,  442-444  feet  (Janjukian). 


Cythere  wyville-thomsoni,  G.  S.   Brady.     (Plate  VIII,,  Fig.  28). 

Cythere  wi/viUe-thomsoni.  G.  S.  Brady,  1880,  Rep.  Chall. 
Zool.,  vol.  i.,  pt.  iii.,  p.  82,  pi.  xx.,  figs.  4«-/.  Egger, 
1901,  Abhandl.  d.  k.  bayer.  Akad.  Wiss..  vol.  xxi.  abth. 
ii.,  p.  444,  pi.  vi.,  figs.   13-14. 

Observations. — A  single  specimen  of  this  form,  typical  in  neaily 
;all  its  characters  with  the  recent  form,  but  not  so  spinous  at  the 
■extremities,  and  with  more  parallel  sides,  occurs  in  the  Janjukian 
•(Miocene)  of  the  Mallee  bores. 

The  "  Challenger  "  obtained  it  from  Heard  Island  and  Kerguelen 
Island  in  the  Southern  Ocean,  and  in  Torres  Strait.  Egger's 
■"  Gazelle  "  specimens  came  from  the  west  coast  of  Africa. 

Occurrence. — Bore  10,  .'UO-320  feet  (Kalimnan  or  Janjukian). 


42  Frederick  Ghaprnan  : 


Genus  KRITHE,  Brady,  Crosskey  and  Robertson. 

Krithe  eggkki,   sp.  nov.      (Plate  VIII.,  Figs.  29a,  b). 

Description. — Valve,  seen  from  the  side,  narrow,  subreniform, 
anterior  extremity  rounded,  posterior  bluntly  pointed  at  the  ven- 
tral angle ;  dorsal  margin  arched,  ventral  slightly  sinuous.  The 
anterior  margin  is  bordered  by  a  flange  of  unusual  width  for  this 
genus.  Surface  minutely  punctate.  Edge  view  of  carapace  ovate, 
compressed  anteriorly,  broad  at  hinder  end. 

Dimensions. — Length,  .615  mm.;  height,  .27  mm.;  thickness  of 
carapace,   .27  mm. 

Affinities. — This  species  is  related  to  Krithe  producta,  G.  S. 
Brady,!  but  is  much  narrower,  and  has  a  conspicuous,  flange-like- 
anterior  border. 

Named  in  honour  of  Dr.  J.  G.  Egger,  who  has  already  described 
more  than  one  new  species  of  this  genus. 

Occurrence. — Bore  11,  260-265  feet  (Kalimnan). 


Genus  LOXOCONCHA,  G.  0.  Sars. 

Lo.\ocoNCHA  AUSTRALIS,   G.   S.   Brady.      (Plate  A^IIf.,  Fig.  30). 

Loxoconcha  australis,  G.  S.  Brady,  1880,  Rep.  Chall  Zool., 
vol.  i.,  pt.  iii.,  p.  119,  pi.  xxviii.,  figs.  5«-/. ;  pi.  xxix., 
figs.    ']a-d. 

Ohser  rat  ions. — The  "  Challenger  "  recorded  this  species  from- 
Port  Jackson,  New  Soutli  Wales,  at  2-10  fathoms,  and  from  Booby 
Island,  Torres  Strait,  6-8  fathoms.  I  have  lately  obtained  it  from 
a  sounding  east  of  Tasmania,  777  fathoms,  dredged  by  F.I.S. 
"  Endeavour." 

Typical  specimens  occur  in  both  Janjukian  and  Kalimnan  strata 
in  the  bores,  showing  the  species  to  have  been  established  in  Aus- 
tralian seas  as  eai-ly  as  the  Miocene. 

Occurrence. — Bore  7,  142  feet  3  inches-155  feet  (Kalimnan). 
Bore  10,  105-225  feet  ;  225-230  feet  (Kalimnan).  Bore  11,  444-446 
feet  (Janjukian). 

1.    Kep.  Chall.  Zool.,  vol.  i.,  pt,.  iii.,  1880,  p.  114,  pi.  \xvii.,  fi<;-8.  In.?. 


New  and  Rare  Fossih.  43- 

Genus  XESTOLEBERIS,  G.  0.  Sars. 
Xkstoleberis  curta,   G.   S.   Brady  sp.     (Plate  VI 11.,  Fig.  31). 

(?)  Cytheridta  carta,  G.  S.  Brady,   1865,  Trans.  Zool.   Soc, 

Lond.,  vol.  v.,  p.  370,  pi.  Iviii.,  figs.  7a,  b. 

Xestoleberis  curta,  G.   S.   Brady  sp.,   1868,  Les  Fonds  de  la 

Mer,  vol.  i.,  p.  79,  pi.  x.,  figs.  16-18.     Idem,  1880,  Rep. 

Chall.  Zool.,  vol.  i.,  pt.  iii.,  p.  126,  pi.  xxxi.,  figs.  Qa-d. 

ObservatioJis. — The    specimen    from    the    bore,     at    a    Kalimnani 

horizon,  is  in  every  way  typical. 

As  a  recent  species  this  form  occurs  in  the  Southern  Ocean  at 
Kerguelen  Island;  at  Port  Jackson  in  New  South  Wales,  at  Booby 
Island,  Torx-es  Strait,  and  in  the  Pacific  Ocean  at  Honolulu,  Fiji, 
and  New  Caledonia. 

Occurrence. — Bore   10,    225-230  feet   (Kalimnan). 

Xestolebkris  margaritra,   G.   S.    Brady  ap.      (Plate  VIII.,  Fig.  32).. 

Cj/theridea   margaritea,    G.    S.    Brady,    1865,    Trans.    Zool. 

Soc,  Lond.,  vol.  v.,  p.  370,  pi.  Iviii.,  figs.  ^a-d. 
Xestoleberis  margaritea,  G.  S.   Brady  sp.,  1880,  Rep.   Chall.. 
Zool.,    vol.    i.,    pt.    iii.,    p.    127,    pi.    xxx.,    figs.    2a-g. 
Egger,   1901,   Abhandl.   d.   k.   bayer.   Akad.   Wiss.,  vol. 
ixi.,  abth  ii.,  p.  456,  pi.  iii.  figs.  27-30. 
Observations. — This    species    occui-s    in    the    Mallee    bores    at   the 
top  of  the  Janjukian   series,   thus  showing  the   specimens  to  have 
lived  in  Miocene  times. 

In    the   living   condition,    X.    margaritea.     is     known     from     the- 
Mediterranean  and  off  Booby  Island.  Torres  Strait. 
Occurrence. — Bore  11,  267-270  feet  (Janjukian). 

Xestoleberis  variegata,  G.  S.    Brady.     (Plate  VIII.,  Fig.  33). 

Xestoleberis  variegata,  (i.  S.  Brady,  1880,  Rep.  Chall.  Zool.. 
vol.  i.,  pt.  iii.,  p.  129,  pi.  xxxi.,  figs.  Sa-g. 
Observations. — In  the  living  condition  this  species  has  occurred 
at  Cape  Verde,  Tongatabu,  Fiji,  Samoa,  Funafuti  and  New  Cale- 
donia, in  depths  varying  from  shallow  water  to  1150  fathoms.  I' 
have  lately  found  this  species  in  a  sounding  by  F.I.S.  "  Endea- 
vour."' off  Cape  Wiles,  S.  Australia,  at  100  fathoms. 


-44  Frederick  Chapuian  : 

The  present  example  from  the  bore  came  from  the  top  of  the 
Janjukian  series  (Miocene).  It  is  in  every  way  comparable  with 
recent  examples  of  the  species  now  living  in  the  Southern  Ocean  at 
100,   fathoms,  even  to  the  distinct  variegation  of  the  carapace. 

Occurrrence. — Bore   11,    267-270   feet    (Janjukian). 


Genus  CYTHERURA,  G.  0.  Sars. 
CyTHKRUR.-V   CAPILLIFERA,   sp.    uov.      (Plate  VIII.,  Figs.  34a,  b). 

Description. — Carapace  oblong,  compressed  anteriorly.  Seen 
from  the  side,  the  valve  is  highest  at  the  posterior  third  ;  dorsal 
margin  straight  in  the  middle,  and  convexly  rounded  to  the 
extremities;  ventral  border  widely  concave;  surface  gently  sloping 
to  the  front,  swollen  and  abrupt  behind,  with  a  short  caudal 
•extremity.  Edge  view  compressed  at  the  anterior,  abi-uptly  trun- 
cated behind,  and  steeply  incurved  to  the  caudal  prolongation. 
Surface  ornamented  with  fine,  sinuous,  hair-liko  lines,  especially 
on  the  ventral  area,  generally  punctate  over  the  whole  surface. 
Colour  patches  of  organic  origin  still  visible  on  tlie  valve. 

Dimensio7is. — Length,  1.04  mm.;  height,  .423  mm.;  thickness  of 
■carapace,  .423  mm. 

Affinities. — The  nearest  allied  form  to  the  above  appears  to  be 
€i/therura  similis.  G.  0.  Sars.i  a  species  found  round  the  shores  of 
Great  Britain,  and  in  the  Arctic  and  Scandinavian  seas,  as  well  as 
&  Pleistocene  fossil  of  Scotland,  Ireland  and  Norway. 

Occurrence. — Bore  11,  175-197  feet  (Kalimnan). 

Cytherura  ouyenensis,   sp.  nov.     (Plate    VIII.,  Figs.  35a,  b). 

Description.  — Carapace  oblong,  medially  compressed;  seen  from 
the  side,  rhomboidal,  highest  towards  the  front,  height  exceeding 
half  the  length;  anterior  evenly  rounded  at  the  ventral,  and  trun- 
cately  so  at  the  dorsal  angle;  posterior  bluntly  caudate;  dorsal  line 
short  and  straight,  curving  steeply  to  the  posterior,  ventral  margin 
slightly  concave,  swelling  out  towards  the  posterior  extremity,  where 
it  suddenly  curves  inward  to  meet  the  blunt  termination.  Edge  view 
of  carapace  ovate,  compressed  in  front  and  bluntly  acuminate 
behind;  median  area  slightly  depressed.  Shell  surface  relieved 
with  numerous  impressed  puncta,  encircled  by  a  clear  ring;  other- 

1.    See  Brady  and  Norman,  Trans.  R.  Dublin  Soc.  1889,  vol.  iv.,  ser.  ii.,  p.  205,  pi.  xviii  ,  Hg».  7-9 


New  and  Rare  Fossils.  45- 

wise  fairly  smooth,  excepting  for  a  few  striae  pai'allel  with  tlie 
ventral  and  anterior  margins. 

Dimetisiom. — Length,  .6.*U  mm.  ;  height,  .:J4G  mm.  ;  thickness  of 
carapace,   .308  mm. 

Affi/itfies. — The  above  species  resemljles  a  weak  form  of  Cytherura 
ruditi,  G.  S.  Brady, ^  that  is,  having  minute  pittings  instead 
of  polygonal  excavations,  and  without  the  faint  flexuous  ribs  of  that 
species.  The  marked  distinction  of  Ciiilwruni  i)tnit'nen>si>i  in  having 
a  more  rounded  contour  separates  it  from  Brady's  living  species. 
which  came  from  the  Arctic  Seas  and,  doubtfully,  from  the  Straits 
of  Magellan.  Since  Brady's  recorded  occurrence,  ('.  riulis  has  been 
found  by  tjie  writer  in  soundings  from  the  Antarctic  taken  by 
Capt.  J.  K.  Davis  in  the  "  Nimrod  "  (British  Antarctic  Expedition, 
1907-9).  That  specimen  also  showed  a  polygonal  rather  than  the 
punctate  ornament  of  the  present  species. 

Occurrence. — Bore  11,   267-270  feet  (Janjukian). 

,     Genus  CYTHEROPTERON.   G.   0.   Sars. 
Cytheropteron   batesfokdiense,   Chapman.      (Plate  VIII.,    Fig.    36). 

Gytheropteroii   hatesfordiense,    Chapman,    1910,    Proc.    Roy. 

Soc,  Vict.,  vol.  xxii.  (N.S.),  pt.  ii.,  p.  300,  pi.  ii.,  figs. 
la-c. 

Ohner  vat  ions. — Since  the  discovery  of  the  originally  described 
specimens  in  the  Batesford  Limestone,  this  species  has  been  found 
in  some  abundance  in  the  lower  strata  of  the  Mallee  bores. 

In  the  original  description,  I  noticed  the  relationship  of  this- 
form  with  Cytheropteron  wellingtoniense,  Brady.  There  is  still 
another  species  showing  close  affinities  which  occurs  fossil  in  the 
Cretaceous  of  Basdorf  in  Mecklenburg,  namely,  C.  triangulares 
Reuss  sp.2,  a  species  which  also  occurs  in  the  Cainuzoic  (London 
Clay)  of  Copenhagen  Fields  and  Piccadilly,  London.  This  species 
differs  in  having  the  alae  less  salient  posteriorly,  otherwise,  as  seen 
in  edge  view,  the  two  forms  are  very  similar. 

Occurrence.— Bovi^  2,  211-240  feet  (Janjukian).  Bore  10,  310- 
320  feet  (Kalimnan  or  Janjukian).  Bore  11,  438-440  feet;  440-442 
feetj  442-444  feet;  444-446  feet;  457-458  feet;  5-18-550  feet  (Jan- 
jukian). 

1.  Ann.  Mag-.  Nat.  Hist.,  ser.  4,  vol.  ii.,  1868,  p.  84,  pi.  v.,  fi-s.  15-17.  Hep.  ('hall.  Zool.,  vol.  i., 
pt.  iii.,  1880,  p.  1.52,  pi.  xxxii.,  flg.s.  3a-rf. 

2.  Cijthere  triangularis,  Reuss,  Zeitsc^hr.  rl.  deutseh.  Gesellscli.,  vol.  vii.,  ISu.t,  p.  27i),  pi.  .\- 
fig.  8.  Jones,  Men.  Tert.  Eritom.  (Pal.  Soc),  18.o7,  p.  25,  pi.  vii.,  fig-.  5.  Cytheroptenni.  t)  iaixjulure 
Jones,  Mon.  Tert.  Entoni.  (Pal.  Soc),  1889,  p.  44,  pi.  ii.,  figs,  \9a-c. 


46  Frederick  Chcqntian  : 

■Cythrropteron   batesfokdiense,    Chapman.,    var.   aculeata,    var.    nov. 
(Plate  VIIL,  Fig.   37). 

Description. — This  variety  is  sufficiently  well  marked  to  merit 
a  distinctive  name,  since  it  has  a  more  compressed  carapace,  and  a 
sharp  ventral  margin.  Towards  the  posterior  extremity,  the  ven- 
tral border  carries  a  series  of  short,  strong  prickles.  The  related 
Eiuopean  cainozoic  form,  C .  triangulare  sometimes  shows  very  fine 
.  aculeations  on  the  ventral  edge. 

Occurrence. — Bore  11,   453-454  feet  (Janjukian). 


Cytheropteron  postumbonatum,  sp.  nov.     (Plate  VITI.,  Figs.  38), 

Description. — Carapace  oblong,  compressed  at  the  extremities. 
Seen  from  the  side,  the  valveis  tumid  in  the  central  area,  depressed 
around  the  margins;  anterior  extremity  with  a  subangular  margin, 
posterior  rounded;  surface  in  anterior  third  swollen  into  a  pear- 
shaped  inflation,  behind  which  is  a  deep  furrow  joining  the  mar- 
ginal depressed  areas,  whilst  posteriorly  the  valve  is  again  inflated, 
and  towards  the  ventral  side  this  prominence  is  produced  into  a 
short  recurved  hornlike  process.  Edge  view  subovate,  compressed 
at  the  ends,  with  the  post-ventral  process  pointing  outwards  and 
backwards. 

Surface  of  valve  ornamented  with  numerous  obscure  pittings  and 
fine  parallel  striae  towards  the  dorsal  margin. 

Dimensions. — Length,  .5  mm.;  height,  .21  mm.;  thickness  of 
carapace,   including  the  process,  circ.   .4  mm. 

Affinities. — ^The  appearance  in  the  Australian  Cainozoic  of  this 
modification  of  a  well-defined  Cretaceous  group  of  Cytheroptera  is 
extremely  interesting.  C.  postiimhonatuw  is  most  closely  allied  to  C. 
umbo7iatvm,  Williamson  sp.,i  a  well-known  member  of  the  English 
Chalk  and  Chalk-mai-1  of  Norwich,  Woolwich,  Dover  and  Charing. 
The  Danish  and  British  variety,  C.  umhonatum,  var.  acauthoptera, 
Marsson  var. 2  from  the  Island  of  Riigen,  Norfolk,  Dunstable  and 
Antrim,  is  distinguished  from  the  specific  form  in  having  a  much 
longer  postero-ventral  spine  and  a  prickly  rather  than  a  punctate 


1.  Ci/theriira  umbonata,  William.son,  Mem.  Manch.  Lit.  and  Phil.  Soc,  vol.  viii.,  1847,  p.  79,  pi. 
iv.,  fig.  78.  Cytheropteron  umbonatwn,  Will.  ep.  Jones,  Mon.  Cret.  Entom.  (Pal.  Soc),  1890,  p. 
40,  pi.  i.,  fijrs.  n-26. 

2.  Cythere  ac'tiithoptera,  Marsson,  Mittheil,  naturw.  Ver.  Neu-Vorpomniern  und  Riigen,  1880, 
p.  45,  pi.  iii.,  flifs.  Ha-c.  ('ytheropteron  ui)ibonatn»i,\\\U.  sp.  var.  acauthoptera,  Marsson,  var., 
Jones,  Mon.  Cret.  Entcm.  (Pal.  Soc),  1890,  p.  41,  pi.  i.,  fljfs.  1113;  pi.  iv.,  figs.  22-29. 


New  and  Rare  Fossils.  47 

surface.  The  Australian  specimen  is  short-spined  and  punctate. 
and  differs  from  0.  uinhonatum  in  the  greater  lengtli  of  the  sliell 
and  the  deeper  median  sulcus. 

Occur rence .—lioYe  8,  210-219  feet  (Kalimnan  or  Janjukian). 


Cythekopteron  phakantarcticum,   sp.  nov.     (Plate  IX.,  Figs.  39«,  h). 

Description. — Valve,  seen  from  the  side,  oblong,  tapering  to  the 
anterior,  which  is  rounded,  produced  posteriorly.  Margins  sur- 
rounded by  a  distinct  rounded  flange;  dorsal  strongly  convex  and 
slightly  sinuous,  ventral  nearly  straight.  Surface  compressed 
towards  the  dorsal  margin,  rising  rapidly  from  the  antero-dorsal 
to  the  ventral  side  to  form  a  prominent  ala  with  a  moderately 
sharp  point,  but  not  hooked.  The  caudal  extremity  is  sharp  and 
superficially  rounded.  Edge  view  of  carapace,  trapezoidal.  Sur- 
face of  valve  on  the  alar  slope  depressed  in  the  median  area,  and 
vellicate,  marked  by  numerous  fine  punctations. 

Dimensions. — Length,  .638  mm.  ;  height,  to  point  of  ala,  .4  mm.  ; 
thickness  of  carapace,  .73  mm. 

Affinities. — The  relationship  of  the  present  species  clearly  lies 
with  the  Antarctic  species,  C.  antarcticum,  recently  found  by  me 
in  material  from  a  raised  beach  (Pleistocene)  S.E.  of  Mt.  Larsen 
(Shackleton  Expedition,  1908).  That  species  differs,  however,  in 
the  more  attenuated  carapace,  and  the  sharply  pointed  but  less 
expanded  alar  process.  Another  species  approaching  the  above 
C.  praeantarcticum  is  Cytheropteron  hamatum,  G.  0.  Sars,  which 
differs  essentially  in  the  more  depressed  alae  with  their  hooked 
terminals.  The  latter  is  a  North  Atlantic  and  Arctic  species,  in 
Pleistocene  and  recent  deposits. 

Occurrence. — Bore  9,  256-263  feet  (Kalimnan). 


Cytheropteron  reticosum,  sp.  nov.     (Plate  IX  ,  Fig.s.  40a,  b) 

Description. — Carapace  subquadrate,  compressed.  Seen  from  the 
side,  of  nearly  equal  width  from  end  to  end ;  anterior  extremity 
broadl}'  rounded,  posterior  caudate;  dorsal  margin  widely  convex, 
ventral  nearly  straight;  a  depressed  flange  runs  round  almost  the 


1.  Cytheropteron  uespertilio,  G.  S.  Brady,  non  Reuss,  1S68,  Ann.  and  Mag.  Nat.  Hist.,  ser.  4, 
vol.  ii.,  p.  33,  pi.  v.,  figs.  6,  7.  Cytheropttron  hamatnm,  G.  O.  Sar.s,  1869,  Nye  iJybvaiidserustaceer 
fra  Lofoten.     Videt)s]£  Forhand.,  p.  172. 


48  Frederick  Chcqrnian  : 

entire  valve  margin.  Alar  beak  moderately  salient,  gradually 
rising  from  the  antero-dorsal  angle  towards  the  postero-ventral, 
and  terminating  in  a  sharp  marginal  angle;  surface  of  ala  depressed 
under  the  carinal  edge,  near  the  posterior  extremity  of  the  shell ; 
caudate  portion  of  the  carapace  much  compressed.  Edge  view 
suboval.  compressed  at  the  extremities,  and  broader  towards  the 
posterior  third.  Shell  surface  covered  with  a  fine  network  of 
irregularly  polygonal  areolae. 

Dimensions. — Length,  .58  mm.;  height,  .31  mm.;  thickness  of 
carapace.   .16  mm. 

Affinities. — So  far  as  T  am  aware  the  nearest  living  species  is 
C.  ivellingtoniense ,  G.  S.  Brady. i  which  was  dredged  in  Wellington 
Harbour.  New  Zealand.  C.  reticosutn  differs  in  having  more  quad- 
rate valves,  more  prolonged  alae  and  a  reticulated  ornament.  In 
general  form  it  is  like  u  much  compressed  variety  of  Ci/theropteron 
hatesfordiense. 

Occurrence. — Bore  10.   195-225  feet  (Kalimnan). 


Cytheropteron  rostratu.m,  sp.  nov.      (Plate  IX.,  Figs.  4Ia,  6). 

i 

De-^cription. — Sliell  compressed,  ovate;  in  side  view  arcuately 
oval,  highest  in  the  middle  ;  anterior  extremity  compressed,  nar- 
rowly loundc'd.  tlic  iKisterior  extremity  subacute,  excavated  ven- 
ti-ally ;  dorsal  margin  strongly  arched,  curving  steeeply  to  the 
extremities.  Ventral  margin  concave  in  tiie  lower  middle,  and 
convex  towards  the  aiiTfrior  end.  Edge  view  compressed  ovate, 
arute  at  anterior.  l)luiit  at  posterior  end.  Surface  of  valves  finely 
and  striately  punctate,  tlie  ornament  being  concentric  with  the 
margins.  The  surface  markings  are  more  distinctly  seen  when  the 
shell  surface  is  moistene<l. 

Dimensions. — Length.  A2'-]  nnii.  ;  height.  .21  nun.  ;  thickness  of 
carapace.    .21   mm. 

Affinities. — Tlie  neaiX'sT  allied  s])C'L'ics  to  the  above  is  Ci/there 
scaphoides,  CI.  S.  Brady .2  from  KcMgnelen  Island,  in  20-511  fathoms. 
They  diffei-,  liowever.  in  the  outline,  for  the  living  species  is  oblong 
and  not  arcuate.     The  sui-fare  ornament  in  ])ot]i  forms  is  similar. 

Occurrence. — Bore  11.  2(17-270  feet  (Janjukian). 


1.    Rep.  Ch.-ill.  Zool.,  vol.  i.,  i-t.  iii.,  1880,  p.  13(>,  pi.  xxxiv.,  fi;;s.  4«-(/. 
•2.    ToTi).  s\ipra  cit.,  p.  VMi.  pi.  wxiii.,  fiys.  !«-(/. 


New  and  Rare  Fossils.  49 

Fain.   CYTHERELLIDAE. 

Genus  CYTHEKELLA.   Jones. 

Cytiikhklla  AURicuLUS,   sp.  nov.       (Plate  IX.,  Figs.  4:2a,  h  ;  43). 

Description. — Cai-apace  oblong,  eonipiessed.  Seen  from  the 
side,  valves  subquadrate,  with  a  marginal  raised  rim  and  depressed 
central  area  relieved  in  the  median  line  by  a  raised  longitudinal 
and  crescentic  bar.  In  the  young  example  figured  the  central 
raised  band  starts  from  the  dorsal  margin,  and  continues  to  curve 
down  and  round,  all  but  enclosing  a  central  suboval  space;  dorsal 
margin  neaily  straight,  with  a  median  concavity,  ventral  broadly 
concave:  ijoth  extremities  widely  rounded.  Edge  view  narrow 
oblong,  relieved  l)y  the  marginal  and  median  prominences.  The 
genei-al,  depressed  surface  of  the  valve  is  roughly  granulate,  the 
marginal  and  central  bars  smooth. 

Dinntxioiis. — Length  of  lai'ger  type  specimen.  .71  mm.;  width,. 
.41  iiiiii.  ;  thickness  of  carapace.    .'■')  mm. 

Length  of  smaller  type  specimen,  .5  nnn.  ;  width,  .27  mm. 

Affinities. — There  is  one  living  species,  Cytherella  latimnrginata, 
G.  S.  Brady, 1  which  resembles  the  above  in  having  an  encircling 
fillet  around  the  margin,  but  the  centre  of  the  valve  is  occupied  by 
a  long,  rounded  protuberance,  instead  of  a  narrow  curved  bar  as 
in  C.  auriculus,  the  latter  more  nearly  reseml)ling  the  contour  of  an 
ear,  hence  the  name. 

The  closest  affinity  lies,  however,  with  some  Cretaceous  forms 
well  known  from  the  English  and  European  Chalk,  the  central  type 
of  which  is  Ci/tlierella  n'iUiamsoiiiaiKi .  Jones. 2  This  species  has  the 
central  bar  broken  to  some  extent,  whilst  the  restricted  character 
of  the  central  ornament,  especially  in  our  smaller  figured  type,  is 
perhaps  more  nearly  approached  in  V ijthereUa  chapmani,  Jones, 5 
from  the  Gault  of  Godstone,  Surrey,  England. 

It  is  extremely  curious  to  find  this  species  and  the  previously 
mentioned  Cytheropteron  postiunbo/iaf  inn  of  the  Austi-alian  Miocene 
so  closely  approaching  their  Cretaceous  analogues. 

Occurrence. — Bore   11,   219-260  feet  (Kalimnan). 


1.   Rep.  Chall.  Zool.,  vol.  i.,  pt.  iii.,  1880,  p.  178,  pi.  xxxvi.,  fi<rs.  7«-<?. 

■2.    Mon.  Cret.  Entom.(Pal.  Soc),  1849,  p.  31,  pi.  vii.,  fij;-;.  -^tki-h.     Id.,  ibi<l.,  ISltO,  p.  48,   pi.  iii., 

figs.  r.r..62. 

3.    Mom.  Cret.  Entoni.  (Pal.  .Soc),  1890,  p.  49,  pi.  iii.,  fi^-.  70. 

5 


60  Frederick  Chapman  .- 

Cythkrklla  lata,  G.    8.    Brady.      (Plate  IX.,  Figs.    ^\a,  b). 

C;/therdJa  lata,  G.  S.  Brady,  1880,  Kep.  Ghall.  Zoul..  vol.  i., 
pt.   iii.,  p.    173,  pi.  xliv.,  figs,   via-e. 

Ohsercafivus. — This  species  is  found  in  the  living  condition  in 
as  widely  separated  areas  as  the  West  Indies  and  the  Japanese 
Sea.     At  Torres  Strait  it  was  found  in  155  fathoms. 

The  fossil  example  here  depicted  differs  in  no  essential  details 
from  the  valves  of  the  living  form. 

Occurrence. — Bore  5.    163-175   feet  (Kalimnan   or   Janjukian). 


CvTHKRELLA  POLiTA,  G.  S.  Brady.      (Plate  IX.,  Figs.  \h(i,  h). 

Cytherella  poUfa.  G.  S.  Brady,  1868,  Les  Fonds  de  la  Mer. 
p.  161,  pi.  xix.,  figs.  5-7.  Idem.  188U,  Kep.  Ghall. 
Zool..  vol.  i.,  pt.  iii.,  p.  172.  pi.  xliii..  figs.,  oa-c; 
pi.  xliv.,  figs.   la-g. 

Ohserratioiis. — This  species  has  been  recorded  in  the  living  con- 
dition from  the  West  Indies;  Wellington  Harbour.  New  Zealand, 
in  the  tow-net ;  and  from  the  mouth  of  Rio  de  la  Plata.  13  fathoms. 

Cytherella  polifa  is  one  of  the  best  distributed  of  the  cytherellids 
in  the  Mallee  washings.  The  fossil  examples  agree  in  practically 
all  points  with  the  recent,  with  the  exception  that  the  former  tend 
to  exhibit  a  broader  antei'ior  border. 

Occurrence. — Bore  5,  153-175  feet  (Kalimnan  or  Janjukian). 
Bore  8,  210-219  feet  (Kalimnan  or  Janjukian).  Bore  9.  315-325 
feet  (Kalimnan  or  Janjukian).  Bore  10,  160-186  tV>et  ;  195-225 
feet  (Kalimnan).     Bore  11,  457-458  feet;  546-548  feet  (Janjukian). 


Cythkrella  pulchra,   G.   S.    Brady.      (Plate  IX.,  Figs.  46«,  h). 

Cytherella  pulchra,   G.    S.    Brady,    1866,   Trans.   Zool.    Soc, 

Lond.,  vol.  v.,  p.  361,  pi.  Ivii.,  figs.   \a-(l.     Idem,  1880, 

Rep.  Chall.  Zool.,  vol.   i.,  pt.   iii.,  ]>.    174.  pi.  xliv..  figs. 

3r/,    />. 

Ohser  rat  ion s: .—'T\ie  living  examples  were  found  at   Port  Jackson 

at  2-10  fathoms;  and  off  Ascension  Island,  42  fatlioins.     As  in  many 

other    instances   in   the   Mallee   fauna,    this  si)ecies   has   survived    in 

Australian    waters    fi'om    Miocene   times.      The    fossil    examples    are 

identical  in  all  points  \\ith  the  type  of  the  living  form.     '".  pulchra 


Neiv  and  Rare  Fossils.  51 

-may  be  readily  distinguished  from  C.  polita,  not  only  in  the 
narrower  extremities,  but  also  in  the  angularly  tumid  outline  of  the 
carapace  in  edge  view.  It  is  extremely  abundant  in  the  washings 
from  the  Mallee  bores,  and  occurs  from  the  Miocene  upwards. 

Occurrence.— Boi-e  2,  198-200  feet  (Kalimnan).  Bore  3,  260  feet, 
-circ.  (Janjukian).  Bore  4,  163-170  feet  (Kalimnan).  Bore  9,  256- 
263  feet;  315-325  feet  (Kalimnan  or  Janjukian).  Bore  10,  230-254 
feet  (Kalimnan).  Bore  11,  175-197  feet;  197-199  feet;  219-260 
feet  (Kalimnan).  349-353  feet;  540-542  feet;  554-556  feet;  558-560 
feet  (Janjukian). 


Cytherella  punctata,  G.   8.    Biady.     (Plate  IX.,  Fig.  47). 

Cytherella  piincfafa,  G.   S.   Brady,   1866,  Trans.   Zool.   Soc, 
Lond.,  vol.,  v.,  p.  362,  pi.  Ivii.,  figs.,  2r^  h.    Idem,  1880, 
Rep.   Chall.   Zool.,   vol.,  i.,   pt.   iii.,   p.    174,   pi.   xxxvi., 
figs.  6a,  h.;  pi.  xliv.,  figs.,  ^a-g.     Egger,  1901,  Abhandl. 
d.   k.    bayer.   Akad.   Wiss.,   vol.   xxi.,   abth.    ii.,   p.   469, 
pi.  iv.,  figs.  34,  35. 
Observations. — As    a    recent    species    this    is    one    of    the    deeper 
water  forms  of  the  genus  Cytherella.     It  has  been  noted  from  Tris- 
tan   d'Acunha;    Port   Jackson;    from    Challenger    Sta.    167    in   the 
Southern    Ocean    between    Sydney    and    Nevr    Zealand ;    off    the    Ki 
Islands;  and  in  the  Straits  of  Magellan. 

Egger  records  the  above  species  from  the  west  coast  of  Aiistralia  at 
"357  metres. 

Occurrence.— Bove  6.  114-150  feet  (Kalimnan).     Bore  9,  256^263 
feet  (Kalimnan  or  Janjukian).     Bore  11,  267-270  feet  (Janjukian). 


Cttherella  subtruncata,  sp.  uov.     (Plate  TX.,  Figs.  48a,  b). 

Descrij)tion. — Carapace,  from  the  side,  compressed  oblong  or  sub- 
rectangular,  with  broadly  rounded  extremities;  dorsal  margin 
nearly  straight,  slightly  concave  in  the  middle,  ventral  broadly 
concave,  antero-  and  postero-ventral  angles  rather  more  produced 
than  the  dorsal;  encircling  border  or  flange  fairly  conspicuous  on 
the  ventral  edge.  Median  surface  depressed.  Seen  from  below, 
compressed,  elongate,  pyriform,  the  contour  depressed  in  the 
middle,  anterior  extremity  compressed  and  rounded,  the  posterior 
inflated  and  much  thicker.     Surface  smooth. 


52  Frederick  Chapman  : 

Dimensions. — Lengtli,  .73  mm.;  width.  ..'^65  mm.;  thickness  of 
carapace,  .29  mm. 

Affinities. — The  above  species  differs  from  Dr.  Brady's  C.  trun- 
cata^  in  having  a  depression  in  the  median  face  of  each  valve,  and 
in  the  swollen  and  truncated  posterior  extremity  in  edge  view. 

The  allied  C.  truncata  has  been  recorded  from  Torres  Strait. 
The  present  fossil  species  is  from  a  Kalimnan  (Lower  Pliocene)- 
horizon  in  both  cases. 

Occurrence. — Bore  10,  225-230  feet  (Kalimnan).  Bore  11,  175- 
197  feet  (Kalimnan). 

Super-Order  CIRRIPEDIA. 

Fam.  LEPADIDAE. 

Genus  SCALPELLUM,  Leach. 

SCALPELLUM    SUBQUADRATUM,    sp.    uov.       (Plate    X.,    Figs.    49^-0?; 

50  and  51«,  b). 

Description. — Carina  (holotype). — Elongate,  strongly  bowed  in- 
Avardly,  with  roof  flat,  gradually  and  evenly  widening  from  apex 
to  base,  and  very  slightly  convex  towards  the  basal  margin ;  surface 
smooth  except  for  faint  growth-lines.  Sides  generally  flat,  thus 
giving  a  square-sided  appearance  to  the  valve,  and  also  showing 
indications  of  a  median  groove.  Basal  margin  broadly  rounded. 
Inner  surface  of  valve  deeply  concave.  Inner  edge  of  carina  crenu- 
late  near  the  apex,  and  cut  through  by  short  channels  near  the  base. 

Another  specimen  (paratype),  and  probably  the  rostral  latus,  is 
narrow,  of  slightly  thinner  build,  and  showing  strongly  arched 
growth-lines  along  the  length  of  the  valve;  inner  surface  concave 
and  smooth. 

Scutum  (paratype).  elongate  triangular;  occludent  margin  per- 
fectly straight,  basal,  angularly  rounded;  tergal  margin  slightly 
concave,  with  a  nodulose  edge.  A  longitudinal  ridge  runs  from  the 
apex  to  the  base,  and  close  to  the  occludent  margin.  Superficial 
growth-lines  and  shaded  colour-patches  very  distinct.  Inner  sur- 
face shoAvs  the  pit  for  the  adductor  scutorum,  above  which  is  a  deep 
fold  running  to  the  apex,  and  marked  by  some  linear  and  sinuous 
lines  of  growth. 

Dimensions. — Carina  (liolotype),  extreme  apex  wanting.  Length, 
20  mm.;  width  at  tlie  base,  4.5  mm.;  thickness  of  carina  near 
apical  end,  2.25  mm. 

1.  Les  Fondsde  la  Mer,  1868,  p.  154,  pi.  xix.,  figs.  3,  4.  Rep.  Chall.  Zool.,  vol.  i.,  pt.  ili.,  1880,. 
p.  174,  pi.  xxxvi.,  figs.  Za-A. 


NeAv  and  Rare  Fossils.  53 

Rostral  latus.  extreniL'  apex  wantiiifj:.  Length,  8  nun.  ;  width  at 
base,  2.25  mm.  ;  thickness  of  carina  at  apical  end.   1  nun. 

Scutum.     Length,  minus  apex,  7.75  nun.;  greatest  width,  9  una. 

AffinitieK. — The  above  species  shows  a  remarkable  resemblance  to 
Scolpellmn  quadratum,  Dixon  sp.,l  a  form  which  occurs  in  the 
Londinian  (Eocene,  London  clay)  of  Bognor,  in  Sussex  and  Hanip- 
stead,  near  London,  England.  As  in  .S'.  subqitadrafum,  the  lines 
of  growth  start  from  the  apex  as  noted  by  Darwin  for  that  species. 
From  the  living  Scalpellitm  rntilutn,  Darwin, 2  this  carina  differs 
in  the  flat,  ungrooved  roof,  and  strongly  arched  growth-lines. 

A  species  of  Scalpellam  (S.  jidieuse,  Ortmann^),  has  been  de- 
scribed from  tlie  Miocene  of  Patagonia,  in  which  the  outer  surface 
of  the  carina  is  convexly  rounded,  and  not  flattened  as  in  our 
species. 

Observations. — The  largest  specimen  (holotype)  is  incomplete, 
but  probably  wanting  only  5  or  6  mm.  The  specimen  was  originally 
found  in  two  parts,  washed  from  a  large  quantity  of  clay,  and 
it  was  only  when  examining  the  material  in  detail  that  the  two 
parts  were  found  to  fit  together. 

Occurrence. — Bore  4,  163-170  feet,  holotype  and  parat^-pe 
(Carina  and  Scutum), — (Kalimnan  or  Janjukian).  Bore  10,  '310- 
320  feet,  paratype  (rostral  latus).  (Kalimnan  or  Janjukian). 

Fam.  BALANIDAE. 

(ienus  BALANUS.   Lister. 

Balanus  psittacus,  Molina  sp.       (Plate  X.,  Figs.  52a,  6). 

Lepas   psitfaciis,    Molina,    1788,    Hist.    Xat.,    Chile,    vol.    i., 

p.  223. 
Balanus   psitfaciis,    Molina   sp.    Darwin,    1854,    Mon.    Cirri- 

pedia  (Ray  Soc).  vol.  ii..  p.  206.  pi.  ii.,  figs,  'ia-d . 
Balanus    cf.    psiffacus,    Molina    sp..    Ortmann.     1902,    Rep. 
Princeton    Univ.    Exped.,   vol.    iv.,    pt.    ii..    p.    249.    pi. 
xxxviii..  fig.   2. 
Observations. — The  identification  of  the  Mallee  specimens  of  the 
above,  consisting  as  they  do  of  only  separated  compartments,  would 
have  been  practically  impossible  but  for  the  other  and  more  com- 
plete    examples     from     the     Kalimnan     of     Beaumaris     in     the 

1.  Xiphidimn  qitadratum,  Dixon,  in  Sowerby's  Mineral  Coiioh,  vol.  vii.,  184C.,  pi.  dexlviii. 
DLxon,  Geol.  of  Sussex,  1850,  pi.  xiv.,  figs.  3,  i.  Scalpellitm  t/nadratum,  Dixon  sp.  Darwin,  Mon. 
Fo«8.  Lepadidae  (Men.  Pal.  Soc),  1851,  p.  22,  pi.  i.   fig:.  3. 

2.  Mon.  Cirripedia  (Ray.  Soc),  1851,  p.  253,  pi.  vi.,  flj^.  2. 

3.  Rep.  Princeton  Univ.  Exped.,  Patagonia,  1896-9,  vol.  iv.,  pt.  ii.,  1902,  p.  247,  pi.  xxxvii. 
ilgs.  9a-c. 


54     .  Frederick  Chwpman: 

National  Museum  (W.  Kershaw  coll.),  and  from  the  same 
horizon  at  Muddy  Creek,  near  Hamilton,  in  the  Den- 
nant  collection.  The  example  from  Beaumaris  is  ideu- 
tihable  with  the  specimen  referred  to,  B.  cf.  psittacus,. 
Molina  sp..  which  has  been  found  fossil  in  the  Tertiary 
beds  of  Patagonia.  B.  i^sittacus  is  still  found  living,  according  to^ 
Darwin,  along  the  coast  of  Chili,  and  very  abundant  at  a  few 
fathoms  depth.  Darwin  remarks  (loc.  cit.)  that  this  species  is 
distinguished  externally  from  B.  tintiniuilnduDi,  another  large  and 
well-known  form,  by  its  hexagonal  rather  than  its  trigonal  orifice, 
and.  moreover,  is  not  tinted  so  darkly  as  the  latter  species.  It 
is  the  largest  species  of  the  genus,  sometimes  attaining  a  length,  in 
the  living  examples,  of  nine  inches. 

Isolated  compartments  of  the  above  species  were  found  in  the 
Mallee  bore  at  one  depth  only.  The  Mallee  specimens  retain  much 
of  their  original  colour,  although  coming  from  the  deepest  part  of 
bore  9,  the  sample  of  which  contained  a  mixed  Janjukian  and 
Kalimnan  fauna,  and  may  be  as  old  as  the  Miocene.  One  of  the 
Mallee  fossils  is  of  a  pale  purplish  tint,  with  about  7  primary  and 
7  secondary  fine,  longitudinal  ribs  of  a  dark  purple.  These  ribs 
aie  noted  by  Darwin  (loc.  cit.,  p.  207),  and  also  depicted  by 
Oi'tmann  (loc.  cit.,  fig.  2).  A  fragment  of  the  base  of  the  parietes 
in  one  of  the  Mallee  specimens  indicates  the  deep  cup-shaped  habit 
of  attachment  in  this  species.  In  regard  to  the  parietal  tubes,  as 
Darwin  notes,  they  are  unusually  large  in  proportion  to  the  size 
of  the  shell,  and  run  up  to  the  summit  without  any  transverse 
septa.  "  The  radii,"  to  again  (|uote  Darwin.  "  are  generally  very 
highly  developed,  so  tliat  tlieii-  summits  are  even  wider  than  the 
bases  of  the  parietes;  but  on  the  other  hand,  in  some  few  large 
specimens,  the  radii  are  either  very  narrow  or  absolutely  linear.'* 
In  the  figured  specimen  from  the  Mallee  it  will  be  noticed  that  the 
radii  are  similarly  well-developed.  The  septa  of  the  radii  in  the 
Mallee  examples,  as  in  the  living  B.  psiffnciis.  are  strongly  denticu- 
lated, as  shown  here  (fig.  52^>). 

Occurrence. — Bore  4,  163-170  feet  (Kalimnan  or  Janjukian). 
Borc  !).  .'515-325  feet  (Kalimnan  or  Janjukian). 

Balanus  varians,   Sowerby.       (Plate  X.,  Figs.   53,   54). 

BaJdini.^  rarlans,  G.  B.  Sowerby,  1846,  in  Darwin's  Geol. 
Observations  on  South  America,  pi.  ii.,  figs.  4-6. 
Darwin,  1854,  Mon.   Cirripedia  (Ray  Soc),  vol.  ii.,  p. 


New  and  Rare  Fossils.  55 

208.  pi.  viii.,  fig.  9.  Ortmaiui,  1902,  Rep.  Princeton 
l-niv.  Kxped.,  Patagonia,  vol.  iv..  pt.  ii.,  p.  250,  pi. 
xxxviii..  figs.  'An-e. 

Observations. — By  comparing  the  Mallee  specimens  with  many 
other  complete  examples  from  Victoria,  so  far  as  regards  the 
parietes  and  in  one  instance  where  the  opercnlar  plates  have  been 
preserved,  one  is  enabled  to  draw  some  satisfactory  conclusions  as  to 
the  identity  of  the  very  abundant  remains  of  ])arnacles  in  the 
lH)rings.  The  compartments  are  all  separate,  excepting  one 
instance,  "which  is  here  figured.  Like  the  preceding  species,  this 
form  also  occurs  in  the  Patagonian  Tertiaries  at  San  Julian,  and 
the  scutum  tlierein  found  (loc.  cit.,  fig.  'M)  is  comparable  with  a 
specimen  lately  worked  out  of  a  fossil  barnacle  from  Beaumaris, 
wliich  I  refer  to  the  above  species. 

At  first  sight  one  would  be  inclined  to  place  the  fossil  forms  in  the 
genus  Chthamalus,  as  was  done  in  the  Dennant  collection,  but  bear- 
ing in  mind  the  distinctive  features  of  the  two  genera,  which  have 
reversed  characters  as  to  disposition  of  alae  and  radii,  the  rostrum 
of  Balanus  posse.ssing  radii  and  not  alae  as  in  Chthamalus,  as 
Darwin  pointed  out,  the  separation  is  at  once  easily  made. 

All  the  Mallee  examples  have  the  walls  of  the  parietes  strongly 
folded,  but  some  specimens  from  Ascot,  western  Victoria,  in  the 
Dennant  collection,  identified  as  Chthamalus  sfellatus,  have  nearly 
smooth  parietes. 

The  separated  compartments  of  this  species  of  Balanus  are  common 
in  many  of  the  bores,  and  seem  to  make  their  appearance  at  the 
top  of  the  Janjukian,  where,  in  Bore  9  at  315-325  feet,  they  are 
exceedingly  conmion. 

Occurrence. — Bore  6,  114-150  feet  (Kalimnan);  158-161  feet 
(Kalimnan  or  Janjukian).  Bore  8,  165-180  feet;  180-199  feet;  204- 
210  feet  (Kalimnan  or  Janjukian).  Bore  9,  254-256  feet  (Kalim- 
nan); 256-263  feet;  315-325  feet  (Kalimnan  or  Janjukian).  Bore 
10,  254-296  feet;  310-320  feet  (Janjukian).  Bore  11,  197-199  feet; 
199-209  feet  (Kalimnan). 

Class  PISCES. 
Fam.  CESTRACIONTIDAE. 
Genus  CESTRACION,  Cuvier. 
Cestracion  CAiNOZOicus,  Chapman  and  Pritchaid.     (Plate  X.,  Fig.  55). 
Cesfracion  cai/io~.oicus.  Chapman  and  Pritchard,  1904,  Proc. 
Roy.  Soc,  Vict.,  vol.  xvii.  (N.S.),  pt.  i.,  p.  270,  pi.  li., 
figs.  5-8;  pi.  xii.,  fig.  2. 


66  Frederick  Chapman  : 

An  antero-lateral  crushing  tooth  occurs  in  one  of  the  bores  at  an 
horizon  where  fish  reniaitis  are  abundant,  and  which  may  be  rele- 
gated to  the  top  of  the  Janjukian.  There  is  little  doubt  that  it  is 
related  to  the  specific  form  which  has  been  previously  recorded  from 
various  localities  in  Victoria  at  or  near  the  base  of  the  Kalimnan. 
The  formerly  recorded  occurrences  were  nearly  all  represented  by 
the  strong,  broad  lateral  crushing  teeth.  The  genus  dates  from 
Upper  Jurassic  times  (C  falcifer,  in  the  Solenhofen  stone  of 
Bavaria). 

Occurrence. — Bore  8,  210-219  feet  (Kalimnan  or  Janjukian). 


Fam.  TRYGONIIDAE. 
Genus  TRYGON,  Adanson. 

Trygok  cf.  rugosus,  Probst  sp.     (Plate  X.,  Figs.  i)^a-d). 

Raia  rugosus,  Probst,  (?)  1874,  Beitrage  zur  Kenntniss  der 
fossilien  Fische  ous  der  Molasse  von  Baltringen, — Wurr- 
temberg  Naturw.     Jahresheft  1874-82  (not  seen).     Zittel- 
Barrois,  1893,  Traite  de  Paleontologie,  pt.  i..  vol.  iii., 
pp.    102,   103,  fig.    120a-c.     Trygoii  rugosus,   Probst  sp. 
Eastman-Zittel,  1902,  Text-book  of  Palaeontology,  p.  42, 
fig.  83. 
Observations.-^— A  single  specimen  of  a  well-preserved  tooth  with 
bifurcated  root  was  found  in  a  sample  of  the  Mallee  bores  contain- 
ing an  admixture  of  Kalimnan   and  Janjukian  shells,  but  with  a, 
predominance  of  the  latter  fauna.     Both  in  width  and  height  the 
tooth   measures   4.25   mm.      In   the   Miocene   marls   of   Baltringen, 
Wurtemberg,    Probst    found    a   similar    pavement    tooth,    which    he 
referred  to  Baia,   but   which  has   since  Ijeen   placed   in   the  genus 
Trygon.     Our  specimen  is  in  close  agreement  as  regards  both  shape 
and  structure,  so  that  it  seems  advisable  for  the  present  to  refer  it 
tentatively   to    Probst's    species,    which    came    from    a    similar,    or 
nearly  similar,  formation. 

In  respect  to  the  generic  position  of  the  tooth,  the  marginal  or 
border  teeth  of  the  living  Thornbacks  (Baia),  which  I  have  been 
able  to  examine  in  the  National  Museum  through  the  kind  offices  of 
Mr.  J.  A.  Kershaw,  show  a  bicuspid  root,  but  differing  from  the 
present  specimen  in  having  it  more  expansive  or  less  hook-like  than 
in  the  Mallee  fossil. 

Occurrence. — Bore  5,  163-175  feet  (probably  Janjukian). 


Neiv  and  Rare  Fossils.  57 

Fain.   MYLIOBATIDAE. 

Genus  MYLIOBATIS,   Cnvier. 

MvLlOBATlS  MOORABBlNENSis,  Chapman  and  Pritchard.      (Plate  X., 
Fig.  57). 

Myliohatis  nioorahhinetisis.  Chapman  and  Pritchard.  1907, 
Proo.  Roy.  Soc,  Vict.,  vol.  xx.  (N.S.).  pt.  i..  p.  60.  pi. 
v.,  figs.    1-3. 

This  species  is  represented  in  the  Mallee  bores  in  three  samples 
by  median  palatal  teeth.  They  agree  in  all  particulars  with  the 
type  examples  from  Beaumaris,  with  the  exception  of  the  figured 
specimen  from  the  Mallee,  which  has  a  slightly  larger  number  of 
■denticles  in  a  given  length  on  the  articulating  surface.  In  its 
slender  form  and  small  size,  whilst  resembling  the  above  species, 
it  seems  quite  distinct  from  the  living  Myliohatis  australis,  Mac- 
leay.  The  type  specimens  came  from  a  Kalimnan  (Lower  Plio- 
cene) horizon. 

Occurrence. — Bore  4,  163-170  feet  (Kalimnan  or  Janjukian). 
Bore  9,  315-325  feet  (Kalimnan  or  Janjukian).  Bore  10.  225-230 
feet  (Kalimnan) — (figd.  specimen). 

Fam.  SPARIDAE. 

Genus  CHRYSOPHRYS,  Cuvier. 

(^)  Chrysophrys  sp.     (Plate  X.,  Figs.  58,  59). 

Obseririfions. — Numerous  small,  rounded,  grinding  teeth  occur 
in  the  clay  washings  from  one  or  two  of  the  Mallee  bores.  They 
are  exactly  comparable  with  those  found  in  the  8ea-Breams  or 
Chrysophrys,  living  at  the  present  time  in  Australian  seas.  When 
the  basal  surface  is  examined  the  structure  is  .seen  to  be  the  same 
as  in  the  living  genus  mentioned.  Their  occurrence  as  isolated 
teeth  show  them  to  be  easily  detachable  from  their  cartilaginous 
setting,  and  therefore  different  from  the  closely  paved  pharyngeal 
dentition  in  Labrodon.  Towards  the  base  the  tooth  is  frequently 
surrounded  by  a  distinct  cincture  at  its  junction  with  the  socket. 
The  apex  of  the  tooth  is  often  worn,  and  shows  a  conoentrir  struc- 
ture. 

Occurrence. — Bore  3,  201-220  feet  (Kalimnan  or  Janjukian);  226 
feet  (Janjukian).     Bore  8,  210-219  feet  (Kalimnan  or  Janjukian). 


58 


Frederick  Chapman . 


A  CoMPLiyfE  List  of  Fossils  found  m  the    Mallicr    Borings 

WITH    THEIK    PROBABLE    GEOLOGICAL    HoRIZONS. 

Janjukian    (J)  =  Miocene.      Kalimnan   (K)=: Lower   Pliocene. 
Werrikooian  (W)=  Upper  Pliocene.     K  or  J  =  mixed  sample. 


Name. 

Plant  A  E. 

Boring  Fungus,   indet.  _  .  _  . 

Litliothaninion  ramosissimum,   Eeuss  sp. 
Lithothamnion,  afi'.  lichenoides,  Ellis  and  Solander- 
Litliophyllum    sp.  -  -  -  - 

Animalia. 
Foraniinifera — 

Biloculina  elongata,   d'Orbigny 
Biloculina   irregularis,   d'Orbigny 
Miliolina  oblonga,   Montagu   sp.       - 

Miliolina  circularis,   Bornemann   sp. 

Miliolina  trigonula,   Lamarck  sp. 

Miliolina  seminuhim,   Linne   sp. 

Miliolina   vulgaris,   d'Orb.   sp.  -  - 

Miliolina  ciivieriana,  d'Orb.   sp. 

Miliolina   ferussacii,   d'Orb.    sp.        - 

Miliolina    bicornis,    Walter    and   Jacob    sp. 

Miliolina    achreiberiana,    d'Orb.    sp. 

Miliolina    agglutinans,    d'Orb.    sp.    - 

Miliolina  (Massilina)   secans,   d'Orb.   sp. 

Trillina   howcliini,  Schlumberger 

Sigmoilina   schlumbergeri,   A.    Silvestri 

Planispirina  sphaera,   d'Orb.   sp.        - 

Planispii'ina   exigua,    Brady   -  -  -  . 

Hauerina    intermedia,    Howchin 

Orbitolites   complanata,    Lam. 

Haplophragmium  emaciatum,  Brady 

Haplopliragmium    canariense,    d'Orb.    sp.    - 

Haplophragmium   sphaeroidiniforme,    Brady 

Ammodiscus  ovalie.  Chapman 

Textularia  gibbosa,   Brady     .  -  -  . 

Spiroplecta    sagittula,    Defrance    sp. 

Spiroplecta   gramen,   d'Orb.    sp.        - 

Gaudryina  pupoides,  d'Orb.   -  -  -  . 

Ciaudryina   rugosa,   d'Orb.      -  .  .  . 

Verneuilina    spinulosa,    Reusa 

Bulimina    elegans,    d'Orb.       -  .  -  . 

Bulimina   elegantiseima,   d'Orb. 

Bulimina   contraria,    Reuss  sp.  - 

Virgulina  schreibersiana,   Czjzek 

Bolivina   punctata,    d'Orb.      -  .  -  . 


Geological  horizons. 


K. 

?J. 

J. 

J. 

J. 

K. 

K. 

?J. 

K. 

(common), 

(1 

i-arely). 

K. 

?J. 

K. 

?J. 

W. 

K.  J. 

K. 

J. 

J. 

K. 

K. 

or  J. 

K. 

K. 

or  J. 

K. 

?K 

.    J. 

J. 

J. 

K. 

or  J. 

K. 

or  J. 

K. 

J. 

K. 

or  J. 

K. 

or  J. 

J. 

W. 

K. 

or  J. 

J. 

T 

J  . 

K. 

or  J.. 

?K 

T 

.    J. 

J. 
J. 

K. 

T 

J. 

J. 
J. 

?Iv 

.    J. 

Neui  and  Rare  Fosxih 


59> 


Name. 
Bolivina  textilarioides,  Reuss 
Bolivina   nobilis,   Hantken      .  -  - 

Bolivina   limbata,  Brady 
Bolivina    robusta,    Brady 
Cassiduliua    subgloboea,    Brady 
Cassidulina  oblonga,  Eeuss     -  -  - 

Lageua    gracilis,    Williamson 
Lagena  squamosa,   Montagu   sp.        - 
Lagena   schlicliti,   A.   Silv. 
Lagena  marginata,   Walker  and   Boys 
Lagena  orbignyana,   Seguenza 
Nodosaria  (Glanduliua)  laevigata,  d'Orb. 
Nodosaria  scalaris,  Batsch,   sp. 
Xodosaria  raphanus,   Linne   sp. 
Nodosaria    badenensis,    d'Orb. 
Nodosaria   affinis,    d'Orb. 

Nodosaria   (Dentalina)  pauperata,   d'Orb.  sp. 
Nodosaria  (D.)  consobrina,  d'Orb.     - 
Nodosaria   (D.)   soluta,   Reuss 
Nodosaria    (D.)    multilineata.   Born.    sp. 
Nodosaria  (D.)  obliqua,  Linne  sp.     - 
Frondicularia   complanata,    Defr. 
Frondicularia  inaequalis,   Costa 

Frondicularia   lorifera.   Chapman 
Marginulina  glabra,   d'Orb.   - 

Marginulina  costata,   Batsch  sp. 
A'^aginnlina  legumen,  Linne  sp. 
Cristellaria  tricarinella,   Reuss 

Cristellaria  aculeata,  d'Orb.  - 

Cristellaria  articulata,   Reuss  (keeled  var.) 

Cristellaria   rotulata.   Lam.    sp. 

Cristellaria  cultrata,  Montfort  sp.     - 

Polymorpliina  lactea.  Walker  and  Jacob  sp. 

Polymorpliina    gibba,    d'Orb. 

Polymorpliina  compressa,  d'Orb. 

Polymorpliina   elegantissima,    Parker   and   Jone.s 

Polymorpliina    diepar,    Stache 

Polymorpliina   communis,  d'Orb. 

Polymorpliina    problema,    d'Orb. 

Polymorpliina   oblonga,    d'Orb. 

Polymorpliina  regina,  Brady,  Parker  and  Jones 

Polymorpliina  sororia,  Reuss 

Polymoi-phina   rotundata.   Born.   sp. 

Uvigerina   angulosa,   Williamson 

Uvigerina  tenuistriata,   Reuss 

Sagraina   striata,   Schlumberger 

Sagraina   raphanus,   Parker  and  Jones 

Globigerina    bulloides,    d'Orb. 

Globigei-ina    triloba,    Reuss    -  -  - 

Globigerina   conglobata,   Brady 

Pullenia   quinqueloba,   Reuss 


(Jeolo};icai  horizotis. 

J. 

J. 

J. 

K. 

?K. 

J. 

J. 

K. 

or  J. 

J. 

K. 

J. 

K. 

or  J. 

K. 

or  J. 

K. 

or  J. 

J. 

K. 

rJ. 

K. 

or  J. 

K. 

or  J. 

J. 

J. 

J. 

J. 

?K. 

J. 

W. 

K. 

J. 

?K 

.    J. 

?K 

.    J. 

J. 

J. 

J. 

J. 

K. 

or  J. 

?K 

.    J. 

?K 

.    J. 

W. 

K.   J. 

J. 

W. 

K.    ?J.. 

K. 

J. 

J. 

K. 

J. 

K. 

J. 

K. 

J. 

K. 

J. 

K. 

or  J. 

?K 

.    J. 

J. 

K. 

K. 

J. 

J. 

J. 

J. 

W. 

<60  Frederick  Chapman 


Sphaeroidina   bulloides,    d'Orb. 
Patellina  corrug'ata.   Will. 
Discorbina  araiicana,  d'Orb.   sp. 
Discorbina   bertheloti,   d'Orb.    sp. 
Discorbina  parisiensis,  d'Orb.   sp.      - 
Discorbina  dimidiata,  Parker  and  Jones     - 
Discorbina  globularis,   d'Orb.   sp. 
Discorbina  turbo,  d'Orb.   sp. 
Discorbina   pileolus,    d'Orb.   sp. 
Discorbina  obtusa,  d'Orb.   sp. 
Discorbina   biconcava,   Parker   and  Jones   - 
Planorbulina  larvata,  Parker  and  Jones     - 
Truncatulina    lobatula.    Walker    and   Jacob  sp. 
Truncatulina   variabilis,    d'Orb. 
Truncatulina    refulgens,    Montfort    sp. 
Truncatulina  wuelleretorfi,   Schwager  sp.     - 
Truncatulina  ungeriana,  d'Orb.  sp.  - 
Truncatulina  akneriana,  d'Orb.  sp.  - 
Truncatulina,   reticulata,  Czjzek   sp. 
Truncatulina  tenera,  Brady    - 
Truncatulina  haidingeri,  d'Orb.  sp. 
Anomalina  ammonoides,  Reuss  sp.     - 
Anomalina  polymorpha,   Costa 
Carpenteria   proteiformis.    Goes 
Piilvinulina  elegans,   d'Orb.    sp. 
Pulvinulina  eleg'ans,  var.  partschiana,  d'Orb.  var. 
Pulvinulina    repanda.    Fichtel    and    Moll,    sp. 
Piilvintilina  repanda,  var.  concamerata,  Mont.  var. 
Pulvinulina  calabra,  (^osta  sp. 
Pulvinulina  auricula,   Fichtel  and  Moll.   s]). 
Pulvinulina  karsteni,  Reuss    - 
Pulvinulina  truncatulinoides,  d'Orb.   s^j. 
Pulvintilina   schreibersii,    d'Orb.   sp. 
Rotalia    beccarii,    L.    sp.        - 
Rotalia   papillosa,    Brady        ... 
Rotalia  papillosa,  var.  compressiuscula,  Brady 
Rotalia   clathrata,   Brady 
Rotalia   calcar,   d'Orb.   sp. 
Rotalia  orbicularis,    d'Orb.    sp. 
Rotalia   soldanii,   d'Orb. 
Rotalia    venusta,    Brady 
'Gypsina    howchini,    Chapman 
Gypsina  vesicularis,   Parker  and  Jones 
Gypeina   globulus,   Reuss   sp. 
Nonionina    depressula.    Walker    and    Jacob    sp. 
Nonionina    umbilicatula,    Mont.    sp. 
J^onionina  boueana,  d'Orb.     - 
Nonionina  scapha,   F.   uiid  M.   sp.     -  -      . 

Polystomella   striatopunctata,    Fichtel    and    Moll. 
sp. 


Geological  horizons. 


J. 

K. 

J. 

W. 

?K. 

J. 

?K. 

J. 

J. 

?J. 

K. 

J. 

J. 

J. 

J. 

?K. 

J. 

K. 

J. 

J. 

W. 

K.    J, 

K. 

AV. 

K.    J 

J. 

J. 

J. 

K. 

J. 

K. 

J. 

?K. 

,    J. 

J. 

K. 

J. 

J. 

W. 

K.    J. 

J. 

K. 

or  J. 

K. 

J. 

J. 

J. 

W. 

K.   J. 

K. 

or  J. 

K. 

J. 

K. 

J. 

J. 

?K 

.    J. 

YK 

.    J. 

J. 

J. 

J. 

?K 

.    J. 

W. 

J. 

J. 

K. 

K. 

or  J. 

W. 

K. 

New  mid  Rare  FosslL'i. 


61. 


Name. 

Polystomella    striatopuuctata,    var.    evoluta. 
Chapman  -  _  .  . 

Polyetomella    niacella,    Fichtel    and    Moll.    sp. 

Polystomella    crispa,   L.   sj). 

Polystomella  subnodosa.   Miinster  sp. 

Polystomella    imperatrix,    Brady 

Polystomella    verriculata,    Brady 

Polystomella    craticulata,    Fichtel    and    Moll,    sp.- 

Araphisteg-ina  lessonii,   d'Orb. 

Operouliua    complauata,    Defr. 

Operculina  complanata,  var.  granulosa,  Leymerie- 

Operculina  venosa,  Fichtel  and  Moll.  sp.   - 
Spongiae— 

Calcisponges,   triradiate   spicules   of, 
Anthozoa — 

Holcotrochus   crenulatus,   Denaut 

Placotrochus  elougatus,   Duncan 

Placotrochus  deltoideus,  Duncan 

Sphenotrochus  emarciatus,  Duncan  -  -  - 

Deltocyathus   fontinalis,   Dennant 

Bathyactis   lens,   Duncan   sp.  .  .  . 

Bathyactis  beaumariensis,  Dennant  - 

Notophyllia  variolaris,  Dennant         .  -  _ 

Graphularia  senescens,  Tate  sp. 

Mopsea  tenisoni.   Chapman      -  _  -  - 

Mopsea  hamiltoni,  Thomson   -  -  -  - 

Isis   compressa,    Duncan  .  .  .  . 

Echinoderma — 

Antedon   protomacronema.  Chapman 

Pentagonaster   sp.         - 

Cidaris   sp.  -  -  -  -  - 

Goniocidaris    sp.  -  -  -  - 

Paradoxechinus   novus,   Laube 
Psammechinus  woodsi,  Laube  sp.       - 
Echinocyamus  (Scutellina)  patella,   Tate  sp. 
Fibularia    gregata,   Tate  .  -  -  - 

Clypeaster   gippslandicus,    McCoy 
Arachnoides  (Monostychia")   australis,    Laube   sp.    - 
Echinoneus  dennanti.   Hall     -  .  -  - 

Linthia    sp.         .  .  .  .  . 

of.   Eupatagus  sp.         -  -  -  - 

Lovenia  forbesi,  T.   Woods  sp.  .  -  - 

Annelida^ 

Serpula  ouyenensis.   Chapman 

Ditrupa  cornea,  L.  sp.,  var.  wormbetiensis,  McCoy - 
Ditrupa  cornea,  L.   sp.,  var.   constricta,   Chapm.    - 
Spirorbis   heliciformis,   Eichwald 
Polyzoa — 

Cyclostomata — 

Idmonea  hochstetteri,  Stoliczka  sp.  - 
Idmonea  lata,  Maogillivray     ...  - 


(Je 

oloj,'i<- 

ill  liorizoMs. 

K. 

?J. 

K. 

J. 

W. 

K. 

J. 

K. 

or  .1 

J. 

?K 

.    J. 

K. 

J. 

?K 

.    J. 

:=K 

,    J. 

K. 

.T. 

J. 

K.  (rareV    J- 


K. 

?K 

.    J. 

?K 

.    J. 

?K 

.    J. 

?K 

.    J. 

?K 

.    J. 

K. 

?J. 

K. 

J. 

K. 

or  J. 

?K. 

J.  (common), 

=K. 

J. 

J. 

J. 

K. 

J.  (common).. 

J. 

J. 

J. 

J. 

:^K. 

J.  (common). 

?K. 

J.  (common). 

K. 

?J. 

?K. 

J. 

J. 

K. 

or  J. 

J. 

?K. 

J. 

?K. 

J. 

K. 

J.   (common)^ 

?K. 

J. 

K. 

J. 

K.  or  J. 

K.  or  J. 

^62 


Frederick  Chapman . 


Hornera  diffusa,  Macgillivray 
Hornera    frondiculata,   Lamaroux 
Diastopora  patina,  Lamaroux 
Entalophora    nr.    sparsa,    Maplestone 
Entalophora    verticillata,    Goldfiiss    sp. 
Lichenopora    aiistralis,    Macgill. 
Lichenopora    porosa,     Macgill. 
Lichenopora  radiata,  Audrouin  sp.    - 
LichenoiDora   wilsoni,    Macgill. 
Heteropora    pisiformis,    Macgill. 
Cheilostomata — 

Catenicella    sp.  .... 

Claviporella  sp.  .  .  .  _ 

Caberea  grandis,  Hincks 
Cellaria    acutimarginata,    Macgill.    sp. 
Cellaria  angustiloba.  Busk  sp. 
Cellaria    australis,    Macgill.    - 
Cellaria   contigua,    Macgill.    - 
Cellaria    rigida,    Macgill. 
-Cellaria  rigida,  var.   peranipla.   Waters 
Cellaria    rigida,    var.    venusta,    Macgill.    - 
Membranipora   cf.    fossa.    Macgill.    - 
Lunulites    canaliculata,     Macgill.     - 
Lunulites  (?)  parvicella,  T.  Woods  sp. 
Selenaria  cf.   concinna,  T.  Woods     - 
Selenaria    cupola,    T.    Woods     sp.    - 
Selenaria     marginata,     T.     Woods    - 
Selenaria    marginata,    var.     lucens,     Macgill. 
Selenaria   marginata,    var.    pulcliella,    Macgill. 
Selenaria  marginata,  var.   spiralis.  Chapman 
Steganoporella  magnilabris,   Busk  sp. 
Steganoporella  patula.  Waters  sp.     - 
Macropora  clarkei,  T.  Woods  sp. 
Microporella    magna,   T.    Woods   sp. 
Tessarodoma   elevata.   Waters   sp.      - 
Tessai-odoma    magnirostris,    Macgill. 
Adeona   sp.         -  -  -  -  - 

Lepralia  burlingtoniensis,   Waters     - 
Lepralia   oorrugata,    Macgill. 
Lepralia   crassatina,   Waters   sp. 
Lepralia  elongata,   Macgill.   - 
Lepralia  gippslandii.   Waters 
Lepralia  (?)  graysoui,   Maplestone     - 
Schizoporella  (':)  convexa,  Macgill.  - 
Bipora  cancellata.  Busk  sp.     -  -       *     - 

Bipora   philippinensis.    Busk   sp. 
Smittia  tatei,  T.  Woods  sp.  -  -  - 

Porina  gracilis,  M.   Edwards  sp. 
(?)   Lekythopora  sp.      - 
Cellepora  fossa,  Haswell  sp.  - 
•Cellepora  gambierensis,  T.  Woods     - 


Geological  horizons. 

K. 

or  J. 

K. 

or  J. 

J. 

K. 

or  J. 

J. 

K. 

or  J. 

?K. 

J.  (common). 

J. 

J. 

K. 

or  J. 

K. 

K. 

or  J. 

K. 

or  J. 

J. 

J. 

K. 

J. 

?K. 

.    J.  (common). 

?K, 

,    J.  (common). 

J. 

J. 

J. 

K. 

or  J. 

K. 

K. 

or  J. 

K. 

J. 

K. 

J. 

K. 

?J. 

K. 

or  J. 

K. 

?J. 

J. 

J. 

J. 

J. 

J. 

J. 

J. 

J. 

J. 

J. 

?K 

.    J. 

K. 

or  J. 

J. 

K. 

or  J. 

K. 

or  J. 

?K 

.    J. 

J. 

J. 

J. 

?K 

.    J.  (common). 

?K 

:.  J. 

New  unci   Rdve  Fossils. 


63 


Cellepora   tridenticulata.    Busk 

Cellepora  tridenticulata,  vai:^  uuiuniularia.  Busk 

(?)  Schismopora  costazei,  Audr.  sp.  - 

Schismopora  incus,  Macgill.  -  -  -  ■ 

Retepora  producta,  Busk         _  .  - 

Bracliiopoda — - 

Terebratulina  catinuliforniis,  Tate     - 

Terebratulina   triangularis,   Tate 

Terebratulina  flindersi,   Chapm. 

Terebratula   tateana,  T.   Woods 

Terebratella   acutirostra,    Cliapm. 

Terebratella  portlandica,   Cliapm. 

Magasella  compta.  Sow.  sp.     - 

Magasella  lunata,  Tate  .  .  - 

Magasella  woodsiana,  Tate     -  -  - 

Magellania  garibaldiana,   Davidson  sp. 

Magellania    insolita,    Tate     - 
Pelecypoda — 

Nucula  morundiana,  Tate 

Nucula   obliqua,    Lamarck 

Nucula   semistriata,  Tate        .  -  - 

Leda  acinaciformis,  Tate         .  -  - 

Leda    apiculata,    Tate  ... 

Leda  crassa.  Hinds       -  -  -  - 

Leda   huttoni,   T.    Woods 

Leda  woodsi,   Tate        .  .  _  - 

Cucullaea  corioensis,  McCoy    -  -  - 

Limopsia  beaumariensis,   Chapm. 

Limopsis  beaumariensis,  var.  depressa,  Chapm. 

Limopsis   insolita,    G.    Sow.    sp. 

Area  (Fossularca)   dissimilis,  Tate   sp. 

Lissarca  rubricata,  Tate  sp.  - 

Glycimeris  cainozoicUiS,  T.  Woods  sp. 

Glycimeris  convexus,  Tate  sp. 

Glycimeris  halli,  Pritchard     -  -  - 

Glycimeris  halli,  var.  intermedia,  Pr. 

Glycimeris    halli,    var.    paucicostata,    Pr.    - 

Glycimeris  maccoyi,  Johnston  ep. 

Perna  percrassa,  Tate  sp.       - 

Pteria  (Margaritifera)   crassicardia,   Tate   sp. 

Ostrea  hyotidoidea,   Tate         _  .  . 

Ostrea  manubriata,  Tate         .  _  . 

Gryphaea    tarda,    Hutton        _  -  . 

Trigonia  howitti,  McCoy        _  -  _ 

Trigonia    lamarcki.  Gray         ... 

Trigonia  margaritacea,    Lam.,    var.    acuticostata, 
McCoy  -  -  -  .  . 

Pecten   antiaustralis,    Tate 

Pecten   eyrei,  Tate        .  -  .  - 

Pecten  flindersi,   Tate  _  .  . 

Pecten  foulcheri,  T.  Woods     - 


Cfolojiical  horizons. 
K.  or  J. 
?K.    J. 
J. 

K.  or  J. 
?K.  J. 

rK.  J.  (common). 

J. 

J. 

J. 

J. 

K.  J. 

K.  ?J. 

?K.  J. 

?K.  J. 

J. 

J. 

K. 

K.  ?J. 

K.  ?J. 

K.  ?J. 

K. 

K. 

K.  or  J. 

K.  ?J. 

K.  or  J. 

K.  J.  (rare). 

K.  ?J. 

K.  or  J. 

J. 

K. 

K.  or  J. 

K.  ?J. 

K.  ?J. 

K.  ?J. 

K.  ?J. 

K.  ?J. 

K.  or  J. 

K.  ?J. 

K.  or  J. 

K.  or  J. 

K.  or  J. 

K. 

K.  or  J. 

K.  ?J. 

K. 

K.  or  J. 

J. 

J. 


64 


Frederick  Chapman  : 


Oeol()«:if'al  horizons. 


Pecten  gambierensis,  T.   Woods 

Pecten  murrayanus,  Tate        -  -  - 

Pecten    peroni,    Tate    -  -  -  - 

Pecteu  polymorphoides,    Zittel 

Pecten  praecursor,  Chapm.      -  -  - 

Pecten  sturtianus,    Tate 

Amussium  zitteli,  Hutton 

Spondylus  g^aederopoides,   McCoy 

Dimya  dissimilis,  Tate  .  .  _ 

Lima  (Limatula)  jeffreysiana,   Tate  - 

Placunanomia    ione.  Gray       -  -  - 

Mytilus  deperditns,  Tate 

Arcoperna  scaplia,  Verco 

Crassatellites  communis,  Tate  ap. 

Crassatellites  kingicoloides,  Pritchard 

Cuna  concentrica,   Hedley        -  _  _ 

Cnna  polita,  Tate  sp.  - 

Cuna  radiata,   Tate   sp.  -  -  - 

Condylocardia  tennuicostae,   Cliapm.   and  Gabriel 

Cardita  calva,  Tate       .  -  -  - 

Cardita  compacta,    Tate  -  -  - 

Cardita  latissima,   Tate  .  _  - 

Cardita  pecten,   Tate 

Cardita  solida,  Tate      -  -  -  _ 

Cardita  spinulosa,    Tate  .  .  _ 

E/Ochefortia  donaciformis,  Angas  sp. 

Erycina  micans,  Tate   sp.        -  _  _ 

Montacuta  sericea,  Tate  -        '     - 

Dosinea  gray!,  Zittel    .  -  -  - 

Yenus  (Cliione)  hormopliora,  Tate  sp. 

Venus    (Cli.)    propinqua,    T.    Woods     sp.    - 

Venus  (Ch.)  subroborata,  Tate  sp. 

Merctrix  mnrrayana,  Tate  sp. 

Psammobia  aequalis,  Tate       .  .  . 

Donax  kenyoniana,  Chapm.  and  Gabr. 

Mactra  axiniformis,   Tate 

Mactra  hamiltonensis,  Tate    - 

Mactra  howchiniana,    Tate      -  -  - 

Corbula  coxi,   Pilsbry  -  -  -  - 

Corbula  ephamilla,   Tate  -  .  . 

Corbula  pyxidata,    Tate 

Barnea  tiara,   Tate       -  .  .  . 

Scaphopoda — 

Dentalium  aratum,   Tate 

Dentalium  australe,   Sharp  and  Pilsbry 

Dentalium  latesulcatum,    Tate 

Dentalium  mantelli,   Zittel      -  -  . 

Cadnlufi   acuminatus,   Tate 
Polyplacophora — 

Chitons,    indet.  -  .  .  . 


J. 

K.   PJ. 

K.  or  J. 

J. 

J. 

K.  or  J. 

K.  or  J. 

J. 

K.  or  J. 

K.  J. 

K.  or  J. 

K. 

J. 

K.    ?J. 

K. 

K.    ?J. 

K. 

:-K.  J. 

K.    ?J. 

K. 

K.  J. 

J. 

K.    ?J. 

K.    ?J. 

K.    ?J. 

J. 

K. 

K. 

K. 

K.  or  J. 

K.    ?J. 

K.    ?.T. 

K. 

K. 

K. 

K. 

K. 

K. 

K.     (common). 

J. 

(rare). 

K.  J. 

K.  or  J. 

K. 

J. 

K.  or  J, 

K.  or  J. 

K.  or  J. 

K. 

K.  or  J. 


Neiv  and  Rare  Fossils 


65 


Oastcropoda-  - 

Liopyrga   quadricingulata,   Tate 

Liopyrga  sayceana,  Tate 

Liotia  dennanti,  Chapm.  and  Gabr. 

Euclielus  tasmanicus,  T.   Woods 

Clancuhis  aff.   aloysii,  T.  Woods 

Teinostoma  depressula,  Chapm.   and  Gabr. 

Teinostoma  pnlcherrima,  Chapm.'  and  Gabr. 

Cyclostrenia  homalon,  Verco    -  -  - 

Cyclostrema    harrietta-e,    Petterd 

Eiilima  pinguicula,   Chapm.   and  Gabr. 

Niso  psila,  T.  Woods    -  -  -  - 

Pyramidella  jonesiana,   Tate   sp. 

Tiirbonilla  weeahensis,  Chapm.  and  Gabr.  - 

Ewlisia  triplicata,  T.   Woods   sp. 

Calyptraea  corrug-ata,  Tate     - 

Calyptraea  kalimnae,  Chapm.  and  Gabr.     - 

Natica  cunninghamensis,   Harris 

Natica  hamiltonensis,  Tate     - 

Natica  perspectiva,   Tate         .  .  - 

Natica  subinfundibtilum,   Tate 

Natica  siiBinfundibnhim,    var   crassa,    Tate 

Natica  substolida,   Tate  .  .  - 

Natica  subvarians,    Tate  -  _  - 

Natica  wintlei,  T.    Woods        .  -  _ 

Rissoa  gatliffeana,  Chapm.   and  Gabr. 

Riseoa  varicifera,  T.  Woods    -  -  - 

Rissoa  (Onoba)  bassiana,   Hedley 

Rissoa  (O.)  chrysalida,  Chapm.  and  Gabr.    - 

Turritella  circumligata,    Verco 

Tiirritella  murrayana,    Tate   -  -  - 

Turritella  pag-odula,  Tate       .  .  - 

Turritella  platyspira,   T.   Woods 

Turritella  tristira,  Tate  _  _  . 

Cerithium  torrii,   Tate  ... 

Tylospira  coronata,  Tate  sp.  -  -  - 

Cassis  coutusus,  Tate  -  -  -  - 

Cassis  (Semicassis)  subgranosa,  Tate  sp. 

Lotorium  tortirostre,   Tate   sp. 

Lotorium  tumulosum,   Tate  sp. 

Nasfia  spiraliscabra,  Chapm.  and  Gabr. 

Zemira  praecursoria,   Tate      - 

Tudicla   costata,  Tate 

Tudicla  turbinata,  Tate  -  -  - 

Fasciolaria  rugata,  Tate         _  _  . 

Marginella  hordeac^a,    Tate    -  -  _ 

Marg-inella  muscarioides,    Tate 

Marginella  praeformicula,  Chapm.  and  Gabi 

Marginella  wentworthi,  T.  Woods 

Voluta   weldi,  T.   Woods 

Ancilla  hebera,  Hutton    sp.  -  -  _ 


Geolof^ical  horizoi 

K. 

'J. 

K.  or  J. 

K.  or  J. 

K.  or  J. 

K.  or  J. 

K. 

K. 

K. 

K. 

K. 

K.  or  J. 

K. 

^J. 

K. 

''J. 

K. 

?J. 

K. 

?J. 

K. 

?J. 

K. 

?J. 

K.  J. 

K.  J. 

K. 

K. 

K. 

(common). 

(rare). 

K. 

J. 

K. 

K.  or  J. 

K. 

fj. 

K. 

?J. 

?J. 

J. 

K. 

?J. 

K.  J. 

K.  J. 

K. 

K. 

?J. 

K. 

K. 

K. 

basal  bed) 

J. 

K. 

?K. 

J. 

J. 

K. 

J. 

K. 

K. 

?J. 

K. 

?J. 

K.  J. 

?K. 

J. 

66 


Frederick   Cimpinan  : 


Ancilla  papillata,  Tate  sp. 
Terebra  angulosa,   Tate  .  _  . 

Terebra  geniculata,  Tatf         .  -  _ 

Terobra  profunda,   Chapni.   and   Gabr. 
Teiebra  simplex,  T.  Woods     - 
Terebra  subspectabilis,    Tate 
Pleurotonia  selwyni,   Pritch.   -  -  - 

Pleurotonia  trilirata,   Harris 
Pleurotonia     (Drillia)     dilectoidea,      Chapm. 
Gabr.  .  _  -  -  _ 

Pleurotonia  (D.)   trevori,   T.   Woods  sp. 
Bela  sculptilis,  Tate      -  -  -  - 

Toruatina    aptyclia.   Cossmann 
Volvulella  inflatior,   Cossmann 
Bullinella   aratula,   Cossmann 
Vaginella   cf.   eligTnostoma,   Tate 
Ostracoda — 

Argilloecia  badia,  G.  S.  Brady 
Maerocypris  decora,  G.S.B.  sp. 
Macrocypris  tumida,  G.S.B.  -  -  _ 

Bythocypris  tumefacta,  Chapm. 
Bairdia   aniygdaloides,   G.S.B. 
Bairdia   australis,    Chapm. 
Cythere  canaliculata,  Reuss  sp. 
Cythere  crispata,    G.S.B. 
Cythere  dasyderma,  G.S.B.     -  -  - 

Cythere  demissa,    G.S.B. 
Cythere  dictyon,   G.S.B. 
Cythere  fiexicostata,    Chapm. 
Cythere  lactea,   G.S.B. 
Cythere  lepralioides,  G.S.B.    - 
Cythere  lubboekiana,    G.S.B. 
Cythere  militarie,   G.S.B.   sp. 
Cythere  norniani,  G.S.B. 
Cythere  obtusalata,  G.S.B. 
Cythere   ovalis,   G.S.B. 
Cythere  parallelogramma,    G.S.B. 
Cythere  postdeclivis,    Chaipm. 
Cythere  rastromarginata,    G.S.B. 
Cythere  scabrocuneata,   G.S.B. 
Cythere  scintillulata,    G.S.B. 
Cythere  scutigera,    G.S.B. 
Cythere    wyville-thomsoni,    G.S.B. 
Krithe  eggeri,   Chapm. 
Loxoconcha   australis,   G.S.B. 
Xestoleberi.s    curta,    G.S.B.    sp. 
Xcfitoleberis  margaritea,    G.S.B. 
Xestoleberis  variegata,    G.S.B. 
Cytherura  capillifera,   Chapm. 
Cythernra    ouyenensis,    Chapm. 
Cytheropteron  batesfordiense,   Chapm. 


and 


Geological  horizons, 
K.    ?J. 
K.  or  J. 
K.   ?J. 
K.   ?J. 
K. 
J. 
K. 

K.  or  J. 
J. 
K. 
J. 
J. 
K. 
K. 
K. 
?J. 

J. 

K.  J, 

K.  J. 

K.  J. 

K.  J. 

K.  J. 

K.  J. 

J. 

J. 

K. 

K.  J. 

K.  or  J. 

?K.  J. 

K.   ?J. 

K.  J. 

K.  J. 

?K.  J. 

?K.  J. 

.T. 

?K.  J. 

?K.  J. 

W.   K.    rJ, 

J. 

J. 

J. 

K.  or  J. 

K. 

K.  J. 

K. 

J. 

J. 

K. 

J. 

?K.  J. 


mJ    Ih 


Fos.sUs. 


67 


(Jcolojrical  liorizons. 


Cytlieropterou  hatest'ordiense.  var.  aculoata,  Chap. 
Cytheropteron  postumbonatum,    Chapm. 
Cytheropteron  praeantarcticiim,    Chapm. 

Cytheropteron  reticosum,   Chapm. 

Cytheropteron  rostratum,   Chapm. 

Cytherella     aiuiculus,     Chapm. 

Cytherolla  lata,  G.S.B. 

Cytherella  polita,    G.S.B. 

Cytherella  pulchra,   G.S.B.      -  -  - 

Cytlierella  punctata.    G.S.B.    -  -  - 

Cytherella  subtruncata,    Chapm. 
Cirripedia — 

Scalpellum  subquadratum,  Chapm.     - 

Balanus   psittaciis,    Molina    sp. 

Balanus  varians,   G.    Sow.        .  -  - 

Decapoda — 

Chelae  of  Crustacea,   indet. 
Pisces — 

Cestracion  cainozoicus,  Chapm.   and  Pritch. 

Galeocerdo  aduncus,  Agassiz  - 

Lamna  compi-essa,   Agassiz      -  -  - 

Carcharodon  auriculatus,   Blainv.   sp. 

Tryofon   cf.   rugosus,  Probst   sp. 

Myliobatis  moorabbinensis,  Chapm.  and  Pritch. 

Chimaeroid  teeth,   indet. 

(?)    Chrysophrys   sp.      - 

Diodon  formosue,  Chapm.  and  Pritch. 

Teleostean  fish  otoliths 


K.  or 
K. 
K. 
J. 
K. 

K.  or 
K.  J. 
K.  J. 
K.  J. 
K. 


K.  J. 


K.   or  J. 

K.   or  J. 

J. 

K.   or  J. 

J.    (probably). 

K.   ?J. 

J. 

?K.  J. 

K.   ?J. 

K.  J. 


EXPLANATION  OF  PLATES. 


Plate  VI. 

Fig.    ]. — Anjilloeci<(    J, (id id,    G.    S.    Brady.      Right    valve.      Mallee- 

B(.re,  No.  ").  18i)-190  feet.      x    52. 
Fig.    2. — Marocyjyris  decora,  G.   S.  Brady  sp.      Right  valve;  speei- 

meii  showing  original  colour  markings.     ^lallee  Bore,. 

No.  9,  256-263  feet,      x    52. 
-Macroci/pris  tumida,  G.  S.  Brady.      Right  valve.     Mallee 

Bore.  No.  10,  310-320  feet.      x    52. 
-Bytliocyjjris  finnefacta.  sp.   nov.     «,   Caiapate  seen  from 

the   right   side;   h,  seen    from     below;     c,     end    view, 

Mallee  Bore,  No.   II,  542-544  feet.      x    40. 
-B.  titmefacta,  sp.  nov.     Another  specimen  (paratype).  left 

valve.     Mallee  Bore  No.   10,  310-320  feet.      x    40. 
-Bairdia  amygdaloides,  G.  S.   Brady.     Left  valve.     Mallee 

Bore,  No.   10,  310-320  feet,      x   52. 

6a 


Fig. 

3. 

Fig. 

4. 

Fig. 

5. 

Fig. 

6. 

68  FrederieJi   Clucpinan  : 

Fig.    7. — Bnirdia   (iiis'i-dlix.    sp.    iiov.      Hif^lit    valve.      MalleL'    ^\i\yv. 

No.  i),  256-26:5  tVet.      x  52. 
Fig.    S.—Ci/tlK^re    cniKilintJafd,     Keuss    sp.       Right    valve.       Mallee 

Bore,   No.    11.   219-260  feet.      x    52. 
Fig.    9. — Ci/fhen^  cr/spafa.  G.  S.  Bi-ady.     Right  valve.     Mallee  Boie. 

X.).   11,  554-556  feet.      x    52. 
Fig.    U).—r//f/ier('  (Ja.<ii'J<iina,      (t.    8.    livadv.      Left   valve.      Mallee 

Bore.   Xo.    11.   554-556   feet.       x    52. 
Fig.    W.—Ci/there    r/emi-^sa.      (i.    S.     Brady.       Left    valve.       Mallee 

Bore,    No.    10.    160-1S6   feet.       x    52. 

Plate  VIL 

Fig.    12. — Ci/fherc   dicfijou.    (4.    S.    Brady.      Left   valve  of   a   youth- 
ful  foi'iu,    iuid   well    preserved.      Mallee   Bore,    Xo.    9, 

3 15-325  feet.      x    40. 
Fig.    13. — C.  (Vn-tjiou.   (t.S.B.      Right  valve  of   a  senile  form,  with 

smoother  and  thieker  earapaee.     Mallee  Bore,  Xo.   11. 

438-440  feet,      x    40. 
Fig.    14. — Cj/fJiere  flej-icosfafft,  sp.   iiov.     a.   Right  valve;   6,  profile 

of  valve  seen  from  above.      Mallee  Bore,   Xo.   10,   310- 

320  feet,      x   52. 
Fig.    15. — (Ji/there  larfea,  G.  S.  Brady.     Right  valve.     Mallee  Bore, 

Xo.  11,  562-564  feet,      x   40. 
Fig.    16. — ('//f litre  lepraliolf/es,  G.  S.  Brady.      Right  valve.     Mallee 

Bore,  No.  8,  210-219  feet.      x   52. 
Fig.    17. — Ci/there  luhhochiaiia,  G.  S.  Brady.     Right  valve.     Mallee 

Bore,  No.  11,  260-265  feet,      x  52. 
Fig.    18. — Ci/there  militarix,  G.  S.  Brady  sp.     Right  valve.     Mallee 

Bore,  No.  9,  256-263  feet.      x    52. 
Fig.    19. — Cyihcre   nonuani,   G.    S.    Brady.      Right    valve.      Mallee 

Bore,   No.    10,   310-320  feet.       x    40. 
Fig.   20. — Gythere  ohtusalata.  G.   S.   Brady.      Right   valve.      Mallee 

Bore,  No.  9,  256-263  feet,      x    52. 
Fig.   2\.— Gythere  oualis,  G.  S.   Brady.     Left  valve.     Mallee  Bore, 

No.   11,  276-270  feet.      x    40. 
Fig  22. — Gythere    parallelogramma,    G.     S.     Brady.       Left    valve. 

Mallee  Bore,  No.  9,  315-325  feet,      x   52. 
Fig.    23. — Gythere  postdeclivis,  sp.   nov.      a.   Left  valve;   h,  profile 

of  valve.     Mallee  Bore,  No.  10.  310-320  feet,      x    40. 
Fig.    24. — Gythere   rastromarginata ,    G.    S.    Brady.      Right    valve. 

Mallee  Bore,  No.  11.  170-175  feet,      x   52. 


Proc.  R.S.  Victoria,  1914.        Plate  VI. 


I'm.'.    h'.S.    Vift<iri;i,    li 


I'latc  VI r. 


\^^ 


F.C.  ad  nat.  del. 


Proc.  R.S.  Victoria,  1914.       Plate  Vrri. 


F.C.  ad  nat.  del. 


I'ror.    !>'.<.    Vi.'lnri.i,    l'.)l  L        I'lnlc    IX. 


F.C.  ad  nat.  del. 


Proc.  E.S.  Victoria,  1914.       riate  X. 


F.C.  ad  nat.  del. 


New  and  Rare  Fossils. 


Platk  VIII. 


69 


F,g.    2^.-C,fJ,err  .raLroc. n.afa,  G.   S.   Brady.      Right  valve  of  a 
'luadrate  variety.     Mallee  Bore,  No.   11,  457-458  feet 
X    40. 
Fig.    2fi._r.v/A...  ...nnllulafa.  (1.   S.   Brady.     Left  valve.     Mallee 

B..re.  X...  5,  189-i;)()  feet.      x"  52. 
F.g.    21.-C,thn-r    ....fi.era,    G.    S.    Brady.      Left    valve.      Mallee 

B.,re,  .A„.  f),  ],S!)-190  feet.       x    40.  / 

V^^^.    2^.~-C!,thrrr   ,r,, riUr-thom,,on; .     G.     S.     Bradv.       Left    valve 

Mallee  Bore,  No.   10,  .•nO-:320  feet.      x    40 
Fig.    29.-A-r/M.  e,,r,erL  sp.   nov.     «,   Left  valve;   h.   profile,   from 
^.       .,,,       ^     '^^^'"^^•-     ^^i^'lleeBore,  No.  11,  260-265  feet.      x52 
r,g.   oO.-Z.,.wo..A.  ...,,,//,,  G.  s.  B,.^^^.      Left  valve.     Mallee 

Bore.  N...   10,  225-230  feet.      x    52 
Fig.   :n.-.Y.^V.^../.,,,,,,  G.S.Brady  sp.     Right  valve.    Mallee 

Bore,  N...   10,  225-230  feet.      x    52. 
Fig.    32.-.Y.^/.^,,/,  ,u,n,antea.  G.  S.  Brady.    Left  valve.    Mallee 

B(.re.  N(..   11,  267-270  feet,      x    52. 
Fig.    ^^.-Xe^toleh.n,  ran.r,nfa^  G.  S.  Bra<ly.     Left  valve.     Mallee 

B..re,   No.   11,  267-270  feet.      x    52 
Fig.    34.-C>^.....  rapmifrra,   sp.   nov.      ..    Bight  valve;   i,  pro- 
hie.     -Mallee  Bore,  No.   11.   175-107  feet.      x52 
Fig.    :\:>.---(';,f],erura  ou!,enensh.  sp.   nov.      a.   Right  valve;  h    pro- 
file seen   from  ahove.      Mallee  Bore.    No.    11,   267-270 
leet.      X    52. 
Fig.   36.-C>^..o,..^..    l.atesfordien.e^    Chapman.       Right   valve. 

Mallee  Bore,  No.   11,  440-442  feet.      x    40 
Fig.    37.-r'.    hnfe.fo,^;en.,,   var.   acuhnfa,   var.    nov.    ^Left  valve. 

Mallee  Bore.  No.   11,  453-454  feet.      x    40 
'^-    ••'^-^V/^/-/o;...;v>.  po.f,nuhouat,nn^  sp.  nov.     «,  Right  valve; 
l>.  profile  seen  from  below.     Mallee  Bore,   No    8    210 
218  feet.      x    52. 


PLArK  TX. 

Fig.    :^^^.~('J^J,^^rnpf.ron  praeaniarctimm,  sp.  nov.     a.  Left  valve; 

h.  valve  seen    from  above.      Mallee  Bore,    No.    9     256- 

263  feet.      x    52. 
Fig.    iiS.-i',,n„,,..pf.ron    refiro.un>,    sp.    nov.       .,    Left    valve;    b, 

piofile.     -Mallee  Bore,  No.   ]0,  195-225  feet,      x   52. 


70  Frederick  Cha'pm<(Ai: 

Fig.    41. — Cytheropteron    rosfratum,    sp.    nnv.      a.    Carapace    seen 

from  left  side;   h,   profile   from  l)t'lo\v.      Mallee   Bore, 

No.   11,  175-197  feet,      x    52. 
Fig.    42. — Cytherelht  auriculus,  sp.   nov.     a,  Left  valve;  h,  profile. 

Mallee  Bore,  No.  11,  210-260  feet,      x   52. 
Fig.   43. — C.   auriculus,  sp.   nov.    Left  valve  of  a  young  example. 

Mallee  Bore,  No.  11,  219-260  feet,      x   52. 
Fig.   44. — Cytherella  lata,  G.  S.  Brady,     a.  Left  valve;  J>.  profile. 

Mallee  Bore,  No.  5,   163-175  feet.      x    52. 
Fig.    45. — Cytherella  polita,  G.  S.  Brady,     a.  Left  valve:  A,  profile. 

Mallee  Bore,  No.  9,  315-325  feet.      x    52. 
Fig.    46. — Cytherella   pulchra,    G.    S.    Brady,      a.    Bight    valve;    i, 

profile.     Mallee  Bore,  No.  10,  230-254  feet,      x    52. 
Fig.    il.— Cytherella  jmtietata,  G.   S.    Brady.      Left  valve.      Mallee 

Bore.  No.  9,  256-263  feet,      x   52. 
Fig.    48. — Cytherella    xuhtruncata,     sp.     nov.       r^     Carapace    seen 

from   tlie   left   side;    />,     carapaee    seen     from     below. 

Mallee  Bore,  No.  10,  225-230  feet,      x  52. 


Plate  X. 

Fig.  49. — Scalpelluin  suhquadratuni,  sp.  nov.  a.  Carina.  dc>rsal 
view;  />,  lateral  view;  c,  interioi-  of  valve;  «•/.  section 
across  posterior  end  of  valve  (Holotype).  Mallee  Bore, 
No.  4,  163-170  feet.      x    2. 

Fig.  50. — .V.  suJxpiadratmiK  sp.  nov.  (?)  Rostral  latus  (Paratype). 
Mallee  Bore,  No.   10.  310-320  feet.      x    2. 

Fig.  51. — S.  Kulx/iiadraf iiin,  sp.  nov.  Scutum:  a,  exterior;  h, 
interior  of  valve  (Pai-atype).  Mallee  Boi-e.  No.  4, 
163-170  feet.       X    2. 

Fig.  52. — Balaniis  j)sitfariis,  Molina  sp.  llosti-al  compartment  :  a. 
exterioi'  ;  l>,  interior,  showing  strongly  denticulated 
septa  of  tlie  radii.  ^Nlallee  Bore.  No.  9,  315-325  feet. 
X    2. 

Fig.  53. — Balariiis  rar/ans,  (t.  S.  Sowerby.  A  complete  l)ase. 
Mallee  Bore.  No.  9,  315-325  feet.      x    2. 

Fig.  54. — B.  variaii>f,  Sowerliy.  A  carinal  valve.  Malice  Bore,  No. 
9,  315-325  feet.      x    2. 

Fig.  55. — Cestrarion  ca/nozoirm^.  Chapman  and  Priti'liard.  An- 
terior lateral  tooth.  Mallee  Bore,  No.  8,  210-219  feet. 
X    4. 


Neio  and  Rare  Fossils.  71 

Fig.  56. — Trygon  cf.  nir/osiin,  Probst  sp.  a.  Anterior  aspect  of 
tooth;  h,  posterior  aspect;  c,  side  view;  d,  upper  sur- 
face of  tooth.     Mallee  Bore,  No.  5,  163-175  feet,      x   4. 

Fig.  57. — Myliohafis  inoorahhinensis,  Chapman  and  Pritchard. 
Lower  or  articulated  surface  of  tooth.  Mallee  Bore, 
No.  10,  2-25-230  feet,      x   2. 

Fig.  58. — (?)  Chrysophrys  sp.  Rounded  pavement  tooth;  with 
crenulated  basal  margin.  Mallee  Bore,  No.  8.  210- 
219  feet.      x    5. 

Fig.  55. — (?)  Chrysophrys  sp.  Tooth  with  thickened  basal  maigin. 
Mallee  Bore,  No.  3,  201-220  feet.      x    4. 


[Proc.  Roy.  Soc.  Victoria,  27  (N.S.),  Part  I.,  1914]. 

Art.  Vll. — Further  Notes  on  Australian  Hydrolds. — ///. 

By    W.    M.    bale,    F.R.M.S. 

(With  Plates,  XI.,  XII.,  XIII.). 

[Read  9th  July,  1914]. 

Orthopyxis,  L.  Agassiz. 

Campaniilaria,   auct.,   in   part. 

Ciytia,  auct.,   in  part. 

Laomedea,  auct.,  in  part. 

Eucopella,  Von  Lendenfeld.  in  part. 

Agasfra,  Hartlaub. 

Trophosonie  consisting  of  smooth  or  undvilated  peduncles  of  vary- 
ing length,  springing  from  a  creeping  hydiorhiza,  and  supporting 
each  a  single  hydrotheca;  hydrothecae  campanulate.  with  the  lower 
part  compressed,  but  usually  circular  above,  the  perisarc  vaiying 
much  in  thickness,  but  always  greatly  thickened  inwards  near  the 
base  so  as  to  form  a  "  floor  "  on  which  the  hydranth  is  supported; 
hydranth  radially  symmetrical,  with  al)out  24-32  tentacles  and  a 
large  tiumpet-shaped  hypostome. 

Gonothecae  very  variable  in  form  within  the  limits  of  a  species; 
gonozooid  a  modified  medusa^  having  neither  tentacles  nor  diges- 
tivH  cavity,  l)ut  provided  with  four  branched  radial  canals,  and 
sometimes  with  marginal  sense-organs. 

The  sub-genus  Orthopiixls,  w^hich  was  proposed  by  Agassiz  for 
the  reception  of  the  single  species  Ciytia  {Orthopyxis)  poteritim  (a 
species  Avhich  had  already  been  described  by  Hincks  under  the  name 
of  Campminlaria  c(dicidnta),  has  been  disi-egarded  by  later  ob- 
servers, most  of  whom  have  been  content  to  rank  the  species  under 
Ciytia  or  Campnnularia. 

In  l.'^S.'?  Von  Lendenfeld  desci-ibed  as  the  type  of  a  new  genus 
and  family  a  species  which  he  called  Evcopella  campanrdaria,  and 
which,  he  claimed,  was  distinguished  from  all  previously  known 
hydroids  by  the  possession  of  a  gonozooid  medusoid  in  character 
but  totally  destitute  of  manubrium  and  tentacles.  Aliliongh  re- 
ferring to  Agassiz'  work  he  failed  to  notice  that  the  characters  on 
which  he  based  his  new  genus  were  precisely  those  of  the  forii) 
desci-ibed  in  great  detail  by  the  Ameriian  luitiii  alist. 


Australian   Ilydrolds.  7'6 

In  ixrciit  years  several  observers  have,  following  Von  Lenden- 
fekl.  admitted  the  genus  Eiccopella,  and  Fraser.  recognising  the 
affinity  ot'  C  caliculafa  with  Von  Lendenfeld's  genus,  has  adopted 
the  name  Kncoj/clhi  cal/riihifd .  No  doubt  Fraser  is  right  with, 
regard  to  the  affinity  of  that  species,  but  if  such  forms  are  to  be 
separated  from  Cdinpaniilarid  or  Vlijt'ui  (as  most  observers  seem 
inclined  to  separate  them),  then  they  must  be  referred  to  Ortliopi/ria. 
whieh  ^\as  fai'  anterior  to  Von  Lendenfeld's  genus.  That  Eucopdla' 
should  be  superseded  is  the  more  desirable,  since  much  confusion 
has  been  caused  by  the  original  association  under  that  name  of  two 
quite  unrelated  forms. 

The  most  impoi-tant  character  of  the  genus  Orf/iopi/u/s  is  the 
structure  of  the  gonozooid,  which,  as  described  by  Agassiz,  is  a 
very  degraded  form  of  medusa,  having  an  umbrella  with  foui' 
radial  canals,  l)ut  neither  manubrium  nor  tentacles.  There  is  alsc' 
a  peculiarity  of  the  tropliosome  not  noticed  by  any  of  the  earlier 
observers,  namely  the  distinctly  bilateral  development  of  the  hydio- 
theca.  which  is  compressed  in  the  lower  half  so  as  to  be  of  an  elliptic 
or  iiblong  section,  while,  as  a  lule,  retaining  the  ordinary  circular 
form  in  the  distal  portion.  Another  prominent  characteristic,  ap- 
parently Lummon  to  all  the  species,  is  the  variability  in  thickness, 
of  the  hydrotheca-wall,  which  occurs  in  individuals  not  only  of  the 
same  variety,  but  also  of  the  same  colony.  I  find  this  variation  in 
thickness  to  l)e  dependent,  to  a  certain  extent,  on  the  position  in 
whieh  the  hydrotheca  is  viewed;  thus  a  hydrotheca  seen  in  its 
broader  aspect  is  not  only  less  tapering  downwards,  with  a  wider 
and  riattei-  floor,  but  its  wall  conuiionly  appears  distinctly  morf 
thickened  than  when  it  is  seen  in  its  narrow  aspect.  In  some  of 
the  published  figures  of  0.  coin preaxa  the  thickening  of  the  calycle- 
wall  is  remarkably  developed. 

In  0.  ealicidata  the  peduncles,  which  vary  extjemely  in  length, 
are  slender,  thin-walled,  and  twisted  into  a  loose,  irregular  spiral 
generally  throughout  their  length,  but  sometimes  with  smooth  or 
nearly  smooth  intervals.  Most  of  the  other  forms  agree  in  this 
particulai'.  oi-  else  have  the  undulations  shorter  and  more  pro- 
nounced. l)ut  O.  compressff  and  0.  a/if/u/ata  have  peduncles  whicln 
are  stouter  in  themselves,  and  pi-ovided  with  thicker  perisarc.  and 
never  exhibit  the  spiral  oi-  undulated  form  found  in  the  other 
species.  Below  the  pronounced  globular  segment  which  occui-s  im- 
mediately under  the  hydrotheca  in  all  the  species,  these  often  have- 
a  distinct  oblong  segment,  and  there  may  be  a  few  constrictions  at 
irregular  intervals. 


74  W.  M.  Bale: 

A  noteworthy  characteristic  of  the  genus  is  the  wide  range  of 
variation  displayed  in  the  forms  of  the  gonangia.  Every  species 
has  its  typical  form,  but  a  large  proportion  of  the  individual  gon- 
;angia  differ  from  their  respective  types  very  considerably,  dis- 
torted and  irregular  forms  being  abundant.  Several  species  which 
scarcely  differ  at  all  in  regard  to  the  trophosome  have  nevertheless 
gonangia  quite  unlike  each  other. 

Only  in  0.  caliculata  and  Evcopelln  campanularia  have  tlie 
gonozooids  been  the  subject  of  elaborate  investigations,  tlie  foinier 
by  Agassiz  and  the  latter  by  Von  Lendenfeld.  The  most  important 
■distinction  is  the  presence  in  E .  cainpanuloria  of  eiglit  otocysts  on 
the  umbi'ella-margin.  So  far  as  is  known  there  is  no  noticea])le 
difference  in  any  of  the  species  between  the  gonangia  which  contain 
tlie  male  and  the  female  medusae. 

Perhaps  the  most  striking  point  about  the  genus  is  the  exceed- 
ingly close  relationship  existing  between  the  various  species.  Ex- 
cept for  the  difference  in  the  peduncles,  which  distinguishes  0.  com- 
pressa  and  0.  angidnta  from  the  other  forms  included  here,  their 
trophosomes  agree  so  closely  that,  keeping  in  mind  the  variations 
which  exist  in  each  species  (and  which  will  most  probably  be  found 
on  furthei'  investigation  to  be  even  more  extensive  than  I  have 
'described  them  from  the  few  specimens  at  my  disposal^,  we  would 
not  find  it  surprising  if  all  these  variations  were  to  occur  within 
the  limits  of  a  single  species.  Yet  the  differences  in  the  gonosomes 
appear  ample  to  justify  their  separation.  It  is  to  be  borne  in 
mind,  however,  that  most  of  these  species  are  described  from  the 
trophosomes  and  the  gonangia  only;  in  none  of  them  except  0.  cali- 
culata and  E.  campanularia  have  the  gonozooids  themselves  been 
".sufficiently  investigated  to  render  it  certain  that  they  come  strictly 
"vvithin  the  limits  of  the  genus  as  it  is  described  by  Agassiz  and  Von 
Lendenfeld.  ^ 

•Okthopvxis  caliculata  (Hincks).      (Pis.  XI.   and   Xll.,    Fig.    1). 

(Jainpainilaria  cdl'cii/dfa,  Hincks,  .Ann.  .Mag.  Xat.  Hist.  (2), 
xi..  185;}.  p.  178,  pi.  v..  fig.  5.  Allman,  Proc.  Roy. 
Soc.  Edin..  iv.,  1862,  p.  61,  64.  Hincks.  Brit.  Hyd. 
Zooph.,  1868,  p.  164,  pi.  xxxi.,  fig.  2-2d.  Jiale.  Proc. 
Lin.  Soc.  N.S.W.  (2),  iii.,  1888,  p.  755,  pi.  xiii..  figs. 
^-^^.  Schneider,  Zool.  Jahrb..  x..  1897.  p.  482. 
Th..rnely.  Zool.  Uesults,  Willey,  iv.,  1900,  p.  454.  Har- 
;gitt,  Amer.  Nat.,  xxxv..  1901,  p.  88.'}.  fig.  18.     Hartlaul), 


Aiixf ndlaii,  HydroiJu.  To 

Zool.   Jiihil).,    Suppl.    vi.,    19()o.    p.    aGO.   :)5:5.   5G2,   ti-s. 
K,  L.     Want'ii.  Ann.   Nat.  Govt.   .\Ius..  i..  IDOS.  p.  :!:'„•<. 
f.     1!). 
('aiitlKiiti(l(iri(i  hrcvisci/pJtift,  Sars,  Middelliavet's  Lit.  Fanna, 

1857,  p.  locS,  pi.  i.,  tigs.  12-i:i. 
L(t()i>H'(iea    caliciilafa,    Alhnan,    Ann.     Mag.    Nat.    Hist.    (•)), 

xiii.,    186-t,   i>.   .-{T.-',. 
Ci;/ti(i    {OrfJiopi/.rix)    poicr'nnn,    Agas.siz.    Coiitr.     Nat.     Hist. 
r.8.,  iv..   1.SG2.  p.  2!)7,  pi.  xxviii..  tigs.    1-20,  pi.  xxix., 
tigs.   1-5. 
Orfliopiii'iA    pottrimii,    A.    Agassiz.    Catal.    N.    Amer.    .\cal.. 

1865,  p.  81. 
Catnpa?iular/a  poieriiim.    Nutting,   U.S.    Fisli.    Comni.    Hull. 

for  1899,  1901,  p.  .'Ui,  tig.  24. 
Clytia  caliculafn.  Nutting,  Proc.  Wash.  Acad.  Sui.,  iii..  IDOl. 

p.  170,  pi.  xvii.,  fig.  1-2. 
Eucopdla  calicidata,  Fraser,  Bull.  Labor.  N.  H.  State  Univ. 

Iowa,   vi.,    1911,   p.   .3G. 

Campanularia  luttyra,   in  part,  Levinsen,  Vid.   Meddel.    fia 

den  naturh.  Foren,  1892,  p.  26.     Marktanner-Turnerets- 

cher,   Zool.   Jahrb.,  viii.,   1895,   ■^.    406.      Birula,   Ann. 

Mus.    Zool.    Acad.    Sc.    St.  Petersbourg.    1898,    p.     M-6, 

fig.    1-3.        Billard,  Arch,  de  Zool,   exp.   et  gen.   (4).   vii.. 

1907,   p.   340.      Jaderholm,   Kungl.    Svensk.   Vetenskaps- 

akad.     Handling.,  Bd.   45,   1909.  p.   65.      Broch,   Fauna 

arctica,    v.,    1909,    p.    185,    225.       Linko,    Fauna   de   la 

Russie,   i.,    1911,   p.   170. 

(Not  Campanularia   calicvlata.    Calkins,    Pioc.    Boston    Sou. 

Nat.    Hist.,    xxviii..    1899,    p.    351.    pi.    ii.,    fig.    11-lle.. 

pi.  vi.,  fig.   lid.) 

This  cosmopolitan   species  has  been  often   described,    l)ut    all   the 

older  descriptions  missed   an    ijnportant   point   in   the  structure   of 

the  hydrotheca,  namely  the  bilateral  development  of  the  lower  poi- 

tion,  Avhich  is  distinctly  compressed,  so  that  the  hydrothecae  at  this 

pai't  may  be   said   to   have   two   broader    and   two   narrower   sides. 

I  have  generally  found  the  perisarc  of  the  nariower  sides  somewliat 

thicker  than   elsewhere,   so  that  on   viewing  the  hydrotheca   in    its 

broader  aspect  the  wall  appears  thicker  than  when  seen  in  the  other 

direction.      In   a  typical  hydrotheca,   as  seen   in   its  narrow  aspect. 

tlie  two  sides  appear  as  convergent  lines,  straight  throughout,   the 

outline  in  this  aspect  })eing  therefore  distinctly  funnel-shaped.     But 


76  W.   M.    Bale: 

as  seen  in  the  other  aspect  the  sides  are  less  convergent  down  to  the 
tloor  or  diaphragm,  hehjw  ^\hich  they  curve  inward,  making  the- 
outline  hell-shaped.  Tlie  thickening  of  the  calycle-wall  may  he 
quite  pronounced  in  the  broader  view,  while  not  appearing  in  the 
narrower  aspect.  This  thickening  is  generally  greatest  at  the 
margin  of  the  liydrotheca.  becoming  gradually  less  towards  the 
diaphragm.  The  conspicuous  inwai'd  thickening  which  forms  the 
diaphragm  is  pierced  by  a  central  channel,  or  hydropore,  w^hich 
expands  into  a  small  rounded  cavity  between  the  diaphragm  and 
the  base  of  the  hydidtheca.  If  the  same  liydrotheca  be  viewed  in 
its  narrow  aspect  tlie  sides  will  appear  (|uite  tliin,  and  even  at  the- 
base  tlie  perisarc  will  not  appear  very  thick,  as  the  central  enlarge- 
ment of  the  hyd)'opore  appears  in  this  view  to  nearly  fill  the  space 
lielow  the  diaphraiini.  But  in  some  colonies  all  the  hydrothecae 
may  appear  thin-walh'd.   in  whatever  dii^ection  they  are  viewed. 

Sometimes  the  border  of  the  liydrotheca  may  be  a  little  everted, 
in  •)ther  cases  not  at  all.  especially  when  thick  at  the  margin. 
Considerable  differences  in  size  often  exist  among  the  hydrothecae- 
of  a  single  colony.  I  have  not  detected  any  sign  of  bilateral 
synnuetry  in  the  hydianths.  which  have  a  very  large  hypostome  and 
from  about  24  to  '50  tentacles.  The  peduncles  may  be  of  any  length, 
fnim  twice  that  of  tiie  hydrothecae  to  twenty  times,  or  even  more. 
Tliey  are  thin-walled,  and  twisted  in  a  loose  irregulai-  spiral,  with 
oreasionally  smooth  interspaces. 

The  typical  g(uiangia  are  oblong  or  ovate,  tapering  below,  smooth, 
and  when  matuie  rounded  at  the  top.  They  are  but  slightly  com- 
piessed.  But  variations  fi'om  the  type  are  abundant  ;  sometimes 
there  are  two  intlatiojis.  corresponding  to  the  two  contained  zooids, 
in  other  cases  tliere  ai-e  still  more  irregular  forms,  and  there  may 
be  a  series  of  annular  undulations.,  Agassiz  describes  the  goiiothecae 
as  about  twice  the  length  of  the  hydrothecae;  in  my  specimens  I  find 
them  three  to  foui-  times  as  long. 

Miich  difference  of  opinion  exists  as  to  whether  O.  cal/riilafa  and' 
('.  i/i/ei/ra  aj'e  the  sanie  species.  Among  those  wlio  support  this 
view  are  Levinseii.  iliiula.  Billai-d.  and  Linko.  while  Hartlaub, 
Calkins,  and  Nutting  hold  the  contrary  oj)iTiion.  1  am  a1  the- 
disadvantage  of  not  having  seen  Birula's  pa]>er,  but  I  fiml  fi-om 
]Jid\o  that  ('.  i/if('(/ro.  forma  fi/p/ca,  is  distinguished  hf  its  orbicu- 
lai-  and  thin-walled  liydi'otliecae  from  forifur  ral/ciilafn,  in  which  the 
liydi-.ithecae  are  cdmiiressed.  with  thick  walls.  This  distinction 
obviously  does   not    iiuld   good,   since  we  find  the  compressed   hydro- 


Austi-al  1(1  II    H jitl loids.  77 

fluriU'  (if  i).  rdliciihitd  arc  t'riM|iiciitiy  (Hiitr  as  I  liiii-\vallc<l  as  tliosu' 
■of  ('.  n/frf/ni.  Howwcr.  it  is  admitted  that  ().  cfilirulato  has  tlic 
liydnithoear  cdinpi-i'sscd  while  C.  i.'ife(/r(f  lias  not,  and  in  face  of 
tliat  fact  it  \voidd  rc([uire  very  sti-ouj^-  evidence  to  ))rove  the  identity 
of  the  two  foi'iiis.  It  may  l)e  mentioned  that  Calkins  claims  to  l)e 
al)le  to  disliiiLinish  between  them  by  the  diaphrauni,  which  in  O. 
(•(iliviihitii  is  sim])ly  the  inward  thickening-  of  the  peiisarc.  while  in 
C .  i iitei/rd.  according'  to  this  obsei'vc'r,  theic  is  a  special  diapliia<;ni 
overlying-  the  jU'risarcal  thickeninfi'.  Hioch  (Bergens  Museum 
Aarbog  1 !)().").  Xo.  G.  p.  10.  fig.  1),  descriljcs  and  figures  this 
character  as  pertaining  to  (J.  cdliciihttd ,  \n\i  nothing  of  the  soi't 
■exists  in  any  specimen  of  C.  cnliculata  observed  by  me.  noi-  indeed 
in  any  of  the  species  ascribed  in  this  papei-  to  the  genus  Orfhop>/xis. 

Orthopyxis  macuocona,   (Von   Leudenfeld).        (Pis.   XI.   and   XII., 
Fig.   2). 

Ct/iii [KniiiJI iia    cah/ciilntn   var.    DUiln'oi/oiid .    Von    Lendenfeld. 

Pi'oc.  Lin.  Soc.  N.S.W.,  ix.,  1<XS4.  p.  922. 
(Jniiipdiiiilaria   calicidatd   vai-.    inakroyoiid.   Bale.'Proc.    Lin. 
Soc.   N.S.W.   (2),   iii.,   1888,  p.    755.  pi.   xiii.,  fig.   4-8. 
Farquhar,    Trans.    N.Z.    Inst.,    xxviii.,    1895,    p.    459. 

Hydrorhiza  very  stout,  peduncles  slightly  to  strongly  waved, 
three  or  four  times  as  long  as  the  hydrothecae. 

Hydrothecae  very  much  compressed,  Avith  the  aperture  circular 
or  elliptic ;  in  the  broad  aspect  with  very  wide  base  and  with  the 
■cavity  usually  equally  w'ide  from  the  aperture  to  the  floor,  which 
is  quite  flat;  in  the  narrow  aspect  with  a  somewhat  abrupt  decrease 
of  diameter  about  the  middle;  wall-thickening  in  the  form  of  a 
stout  convex  external  band  completely  surrounding  the  upper  half 
of  the  hydrotheca;  margin  plain,  slightly  everted.  Length  .28— .45 
mm.  ;  width  of  the  broad  side  at  aperture  .22 — .28  mm. 

Gonothecae  very  large,  oblong  or  ovate,  often  irregular,  'smooth, 
rounded  above,  very  slightly  compressed;  length  about  1.65 — 1.87 
mm.,  width,  .82 — .90  mm.  Gonophore  a  medusoid  bud,  not  becom- 
ing free. 

Hah. — Port  Phillip  (Von  Lendenfeld);  New  Zealand  (Farquhar); 
Bondi  (Australian  Museum). 

The  character  which  led  Von  Lendenfeld  to  distinguish  the  variety 
was  the  very  large  size  of  the  gonangia,  which  otherwise  much  re- 
semble those  of  0.  calic-ulata,  being  like  them,  subject  to  extreme 
variation   in   form.      They   are  of  very  firm  perisarc.      The  hydro;^ 


ujIlibrarV  ' 


jl  LIBRAP 


78  W.  M.   Bide: 

tliecae  are  uioi'e  compressed  latei'ally  than  tliose  of  0.  caliculata, 
aijil  in  most  of  tliem  the  sides,  in  tlie  broader  aspect,  are  not  con- 
vergent, so  that  in  this  view  the  cavity  appears  as  if  perfectly 
cylindrical,  with  a  flat  floor.  A  much  thickened  annular  band, 
convex  in  section,  encircle.s  the  disttl  half  of  tlie  hydrotheca  com- 
pletely; fi'oni  the  lower  edge  of  this  band  to  the  floor  the  wall  is 
less  thickened.  The  hydrothecae  freijuently  have  the  compressed 
condition  extended  in  some  degree  to  the  distal  portion,  so  that 
tlie  aperture  may  l)e  elliptical.  The  bead-like  segment  immediately 
l)eIo\v  the  hydrotlieca  is  noticeably  narrower  than  the  peduncle  on 
which  it  is  s\ippoi-ted,  a  feature  not  observable  in  0.  calicidatn. 

The  rounded  summit  of  the  gonotlieca  f(jrms  a  convex  cap,  which 
separates  at  maturity.  There  are  usually  tv,o  gonozooids,  which 
ai'B  described  by  Von  Lendenfeld  as  medusoid  buds,  which  do  not 
Ijccome  free,  and  in  fact  do  not  possess  a  properly  developed  um- 
Inella  at  the  time  when  the  sexual  products  a)e  matui'ed.  He  adds 
that  they  are  similar  to  those  of  C .  callcuJata . 


Orthopyxis  avilsoni  n.  sp.        (Pis.   XI.  and   XIT.,   Fig.  5). 

Hydrorhiza  rather  slender,  peduncles  strongly  waved,  conunonly 
2-4  times  as  long  as  the  hydrothecae. 

Hydrothecae  usually  thin-walled,  but  occasionally  slightly  thick- 
ened, thickening  principally  near  the  top;  mostly  somewhat  bell- 
shaped  in  the  broad  aspect,  rather  more  funnel-shaped  in  the  narrow 
view,  with  the  thickening  absent  or  scarcely  indicated  ;  border  plain, 
very  slightly  eveited  :  length,  .34 — .43  nnii.,  width  at  aperture, 
.25— .33  mm. 

Gonothecae  very  large,  not  compressed,  sub-cylindrical,  equal  in 
diameter  thioughout  except  at  the  basal  part,  divided  into  about 
seven  or  eight  longitudinal  areas  by  lines  which  run  from  the  summit 
to  near  the  base;  no  operculum,  irregular  fornis  frequent.  Length 
when  mature,  about  1.95  mm.,  diameter,  .75 — .87  nan.  Gono- 
phores  large,  medusoid,  umbrella  with  8  otocysts  (?). 

Ifah.—Vovt  Phillip  (Mr.  J.   Bracebridge  Wilson). 

Many  of  the  hydfothi'cae  show  no  thickening,  others  appear  in 
tht'  liroadcr  aspect  sliglitly  thickened  in  the  fashion  of  O.  calicnlatn, 
or  with  a,  sub-marginal  band  in  the  same  jxisition  as  that  of  0. 
iixicrofioiui  l)ut  much  less  pronounced.  The  two  aspects  differ  but 
litlle.  the  cavity  l)eing  somewhat  more  broadly  rounded  at  the  base 
in    one   view   than    in   tlie  other.        The   ])eduncles   usually   have  the 


Austnillini   N  1/(1  mills.  :V^ 

uiidulatioiis  sli(ii'tri-  and  iiioir  stionji;!}'  itfceiituated  than  tiiose  of" 
().  cdliciildtd .  TIk'  i::onan<i:ia  aie  of  vei'v  t-haracteristic  foi-iii.  They 
rniiM-ldy  iX'seinhk'  a  seven-  oi'  eight-sided  prism,  but  the  sides  are- 
curved  instead  of  flat.  The  h)n<ritudiual  lines  are  simply  th^  optical' 
expression  of  the  folds  in  the  perisare,  where  the  sides  meet.  These 
lines  usually  appear  nioie  or  less  irieuular,  being  bi-oken  and  want- 
ing in  parts,  and  in  comparatively  few  cases  are  they  fairly  sti'aight 
an<l  uniform  tlii-oughout.  The  gonotheca  is  subject  to  quite  as  many 
irregularities  as  in  the  allied  species;  I  have  seen  examples  with  a 
deep  constriction  round  the  middle,  and  others  with  a  series  of" 
irregular  aniiulations.  The  sexes  do  not  differ  in  foi-m.  There  are- 
two  medusae,  one  of  which  may  be  so  lai-ge  as  to  nearly  fill  the- 
capsule,  while  the  other  is  still  very  small.  In  one  case  I  saw  what 
seemed  to  be  otocysts. 

The  absence  of  a  distinctly  compressed  condition  of  the  gonangia 
differentiates  this  species  from  all  the  others  referred  to  in  this 
paper. 

Okthopvxis  platycarpa  n.   ><p.        (Pis.   XI.  and  XII.,    Fig  3). 

Hydrorhiza  stout,  peduncles  distinctly  waved,  mostly  2-4  times  as 
long  as  the  hydrothecae. 

Hydrothecae  large,  wide-based  in  the  broader  aspect,  with  the 
walls  often  somewhat  thickened,  principally  in  the  form  of  a  convex 
sub-marginal  band,  narrower  aspect  less  thickened  or  not  at  all, 
border  plain,  distinctly  everted.  Length,  .o3 — .4.3  mm.,  width  at 
Ijorder,  .32— .39  mm. 

Gonothecae  large,  very  much  compressed,  smooth,  Avith  straight 
sides  forming  angles  at  the  summit,  which  is  slightly  lower  between 
them,  a  single  gonophore  filling  the  capsule  when  matui-e.  Length., 
alxnit  1.55  mm.,  width  .72— .90. 

Hah.— In  or  near  Port  Phillip. 

This  form,  in  the  strongly  compressed  hydrotliecae,  the  bi-oad^ 
basal  portion,  and  the  form  of  the  thickening,  shows  most  affinity 
with  O.  mncrogona,  and  occasionally  a  hydrotheca  is  seen  which 
might  readily  be  taken  for  one  of  that  species.  The  gonangia,  how- 
ever, differ  greatly  in  their  straight  sides  and  squarish  summit  (as 
seen  in  their  broader  aspect),  and  in  their  much  compressed  form. 
Seen  edge-wise  they  appear  slightly  curved  alternately  in  opposite- 
directions.  In  each  of  the  few  specimens  which  I  examined  there- 
was  a  single  large  gonophore,  occupying  the  Avhole  cavity,  but  they 
were  not  in  a  condition  to  permit  of  their  character  being  made  out 
satisfactorilv. 


•80  W.  M.    Bale.- 

I  have  seen  Imt  few  gonangia,  and  cannot  say  wliat  may  be  tlie 
extent  of  their  lial)itual  variation.  Those  whieh  appeal'  typical 
somewhat  resemble  those  of  0.  (inr/ulata,  but  that  species  is  readily 
. distinguishable  from  the  present  by  its  smooth  peduncles. 

Orthopyxis  comphkssa  Clark. 

Caiinianitlaria    com/trrssa,    Chuk,    Proc.      Acad.      Xat.      Sci. 
Philad.,    1876.   p.    214.   pi.    viii..   tig.    T).   6.      Hartlaub. 
Zool.  Jahrb.,  Suppl.  vi..   1905,  Bd.  iii..  p.  062.  fig.   M, 
Xinko.  Faune  de  la  Russie,  Hydroidea.  i..  1911,  p.   172. 
'fig.    29. 
•Chjt'ut    com presxa.    Nutting.    Proc.    \Yasli.    Acad.    Sci.,    iii., 
1901,   p.    170.  pi.   xvii.,   fig.    ."i,   4.      Vanhoft'en,   Deutsche 
Sudpolarexp.      1901-3,    xi.,    Zool.     iii..     1910.    p.    303. 
fig.  24-24e. 
Eitcojyella  campanuldria.  Von  Lendenfeld,    Zeitschr.    f,    wiss. 
Zool.,  xxxviii..   18S3,  pp.   497-583,  pi.   xxvii-xxxii.   (i>ut 
not  pi.  xxix.,  fig.   15,  Dl.  D^). 
?  Cam.panularia  caliculata,   Calliins,   Proc.    Best.    Soc.    Nat. 
Hist.,  xxviii.,   1899,  p.  351,  pi.  ii..  fig.   11-llc.  pi.  vi., 
fig.  lid. 
?   Not    ('(iiujxniiilarKi    coinpreftxa,    Jaderliolm.     Schwedisciien 
Siidpolarexp.    1901-3,  v.,   1905,   p.    14,   pi.   v.,  fig.   6     7 
Not  Glytin  rompressa.  Torrey,   Univ.   Calif.    Publ.,   Zook^v. 
i.,  1902,  p.  58,  pi.  vi.,  fig.  49. 
0.   compressa  has  the  hydrothecae  of  the  same  type   as  those  nf 
'0.    caliculata,    but   they   have  the   perisarcal   thickening  more  pro- 
nounced.    Most  obseT-vers  figure  thick-walled  and  thin-walled  hydr 
thecae,  which  are  probably  different  aspects  of  the  same  individi;.:i 
The  chief  distinction  between  this  species  and  0.  caliculafa  is  in  tht 
peduncles.     These  in  0.  calicitl(i1a>  are  twisted  in  a  somewhat  irre- 
gular   spiral;    the    undulations   may    fail    here    and    there,    but    are 
rarely    a' sent    altogethei'.       In    O.    ronipresfia    the    stalks    are    iioich 
stouter,  with  thicker  walls,  while  they  are  never  imdulated,  though 
they   may   be   divided,    especially    near   the   hydrotheca,    by   several 
distinct  constrictions.     Their  thick  perisarc  appears  nan-owed  in  at 
the  point  of  origin,   so  that  their  diameter   at  this   point   is   little 
more  than   that  of  the  internal  canal,   and   altogether   they  closely 
resemble  those  of  the  genus  Silicularia. 

Various    ft^rnis    of    gonangia    have    been    figured,    some    cuni  ,i 
others   m(n-e   elongated;    Clark    describes   them   as    "largest    at     h- 


A  iisfral HI II   H i/(lr()i*fs.  ST 

disrai  fiitl,  louiuk'd  at  thr  l)ase.  verv  iinR-Ii  compressL'd  lateially." 
Vanhufien's  aiul  Ijiiiko's  ti^iu'cs  show  them  with  the  perisarc  very 
much  thickened  towaids  tlie  liase.  exactly  as  in  tliuse  of  S/I/riilnria 
ritii-iil(it(i  (Hai-thiuh).  which  they  also  i-eseiiihle  in  theii'  t'uneate- 
outline. 

( 'iintradictmy  accounts  ni'  the  speides  are  given  hy  diffefent  ob- 
servers. Nutting,  Hartlaub,  Vanhoffen,  and  Linko  appear  to  have 
seen  specimens  agreeing  with  Clark's.  Calkins  describes  under  tlie 
name  of  CampanuJaria  ctiliciilaia  a  fui  ni  of  which  the  tropliosome. 
according  to  his  account,  agrees  exactly  with  that  of  0.  compressa, 
not  with  that  of  0.  cal/culafa.  At  the  same  time  the  gonangia 
which  he  figures  are  more  like  those  of  the  latter  species.  Torrey 
descrilies  specimens  of  which  the  medusa  has  four  long  tentacles,  as 
however  the  hydrothecae  have  a  toothed  margin,  which  nevei'  occurs 
in  O.  cotnpressa,  it  is  difficult  to  see  why  they  are  referred  to  that 
species.  The  form  given  as  C.  roinjjressa  by  Jaderholm  has  ringed 
or  twisted  peduncles,  and  therefore  seems  wrongly  placed;  the 
gonotheca  moreover  is  more  like  that  of  0.  caJiculatn.  As  Van- 
hoffen states,  the  species  is  characterised  by  tlie  thick  hydrothecae, 
the  smooth  stalks,  and  the  bi'oad  flat  gonothecae. 

In  lanking  EucopeUa  campotuilario  Von  Lendenfeld  as  a  synonym 
of  0.  compressa  I  follow  Nutting,  who  lias  pointed  out  in  his  paper 
on  the  Hydroids  of  the  Harriman  Alaska  Expedition  that  there- 
appears  to  be  no  difference  between  tlie  two  species.  E.  campanu- 
lana,  however,  has  been  involved  in  some  confusion  owing  to  Von 
Lendenfeld's  having  included  in  his  account  of  the  species  two  forms 
differing  entirely  in  regard  to  the  hydrothecae,  though  the  gonangia' 
are  similar.  He  has  figured  a  number  of  hydrothecae  which  he  says 
are  connected  by  intermediate  forms;  most  of  these  are  of  the- 
ordinary  Orthopyxis  type,  but  two  among  them  are  of  totally  dif- 
ferent form,  and  are  obviously  identical  wuth  those  found  in  the 
genus  Silicularia.  No  intermediate  forms  between  these  and  the 
Orthopyxis  are  shown.  In  1886  I  received  from  the  Australian 
Museum  a  portion  of  the  type  specimens  of  E .  campavularia,  which 
consisted  solely  of  the  Silirularia-iormH,  and  were  similar  to  those 
figured  by  me  as  E.  campnnularia  in  the  Proceedings  of  the  Linnean 
Society  of  N.S.  Wales  for  1888.  I  had  not  then  seen  Von  Lenden- 
feld's original  paper,  and  was  not  aware  that  any  other  form  had' 
been  included  in  the  species.  Neither  in  the  type  specimens  sent  to 
me  nor  in  any  others  of  similar  character  whicli  I  have  examined, 
is  there  any  approach  to  the  Orthopyxis  type,  while  colonies  of  the 


82  IF.    J/.    BaU  : 

latter  invariably  fail  to  exhibit  any  liydrotheeae  witli  characters 
tending  towards  the  S/I/nilan'a  form.  The  distinction  Isetween  the 
trophosomes  is  absolute,  and  I  consider  it  lieyniid  a  doubt  that 
Eucopella  campainddria,  as  originally  described,  comprises  two 
distinct  species,  one  a  typical  Orfliopij.ris.  tlie  (.tlier.  at  least  so 
far  as  the  trophosome  is  concerned,  a  typical  SlJiciilaria. 

The  acccvunt  of  the  gonangia  of  E.  ca luixnnddrld  is  contradic- 
toiy,  theii-  length  lieing  stated  as  from  two  To  tliree  millimetres, 
while  they  are  fitiured  as  under  .75  mm.  ;  but  their  compressed 
•condition,  and  their  cuneate  outline,  as  seen  in  their  broader 
aspect,  are  (juite  similar  to  the  same  features  in  the  typical  0. 
cornpressa.  Only,  therefore,  in  the  event  of  future  research  reveal- 
ing some  important  difference  between  the  gonozooicl  of  that  species 
and  Von  Lendenfeld's  description  will  be  possible  to  maintain  the 
specific  distinctness  of  E.   campamilaria. 

0.  compresm  is  found  in  Xoilli  and  Soutli  Ameiica,  where,  like 
Von  Lendenfeld's  specimens,  is  appears  to  giow  hal)itually,  if  not 
exclusively,   on   Laminaria. 

ORTHOPYXtS    AXGULATA,    U.    sp.  (  PU. 

Hydrorhiza  thick  and  broad,  pedunch 
smootli,  occasionally  with  one  or  more 
rowed  in  at  tjie  base. 

Hydrothecae,  in  the  broader  aspect,  very  wide  at  the  base,  with 
the  floor  somewhat  flattened,  often  more  or  less  thickened,  thick- 
ening sometimes  confined  to  a  convex  band  surrounding  the  distal 
portion  of  the  hydrotlieca,  sometimes  extending  to  the  base  ^  narrow 
aspect  funnel-shaped,  with  thin  walls,  except  for  a  slight  thicken- 
ing where  the  sub-marginal  band  extends  to  them;  margin  plain, 
everted.     Length,   .'M) — .45  mm.,  widtli  at  aperture.   .27 — .37  mm. 

Gonotliecae  broad,  muclr  compressed,  the  broad  aspect  ovate,  trun- 
cate, with  edges  undulated;  a  little  narrov.ed  in  near  the  top,  and 
then  widening  outward  and  upward,  forming  angular  projections 
at  each  side  of  the  top,  or  even  produced  into  blunt,  horn-like  pro- 
cesses, summit  of  the  gonangium  straiglit  or  sliglitly  concave  be- 
tween them.  Length,  about  L27 — 1.36  nmi..  width,  .87 — .96  mm. 
Two  gonophores  in  each  gonotheca ;  lunbrella  with  foui-  b)'ancliing 
radial  canals,  and  eight  otocysts. 

//a7^._Port  Phillip  (Mr.   J.  Brace])ridgv  \Vils(ui). 

This  species  agrees  with  0.  roniprcssa,  and  differs  fiom  the  other 
forms  here  described,   in  the  stout,  thick-walled,   smooth  peduncles. 


XL.   ,ui< 

1   XLF.,    Fig.   4). 

i  stoiU. 

with  thick  perisarc. 

distinct 

constrictions,    nar- 

Aiifif  raliiia  Hydro  ids.  83 

The  hydrotlitTUc'  as  seen  in  tlie  broader  aspect,  are  wider-based 
than  any  other  form  except  0.  inncrogona,  with  the  wall  often  con- 
siderably thickened  at  the  border,  and  continuing  fairly  thick 
down  to  the  base;  oi-  in  some  cases  the  thickening  is  confined  to 
the  upper  part,  foi-ming  a  convex  l)and  like  that  of  0.  macrogond, 
but  not  so  pronounced.  The  narrow  aspect  is  funnel-shaped,  with 
no  thickening  except  a  very  slight  one  in  the  su]>marginal  region. 
The  border  generally  rises  a  little  above  the  thickened  part,  and  is 
distinctly  everted. 

The  gonangia  are  broad,  but  rather  short,  theii-  lieight  averaging 
a})out  1.3  mm.,  and  their  width  .90.  They  are  ovate,  truncate 
above,  and  nmch  compressed ;  in  the  broad  view  the  edges  are  un- 
dulated, curving  inward  near  the  top,  and  then  outward,  forming 
where  they  meet  the  top  blunt  angles,  w-hich  are  usually  produced 
someW'hat  outward  and  upward.  The  summit  of  the  gonangium 
is  slightly  concave  or  nearly  flat,  and  so  nari-ow  that  an  end  view- 
would  be  lanceolate  rather  than  elliptic.  Irregidar  forms  are  found, 
but  most  of  those  examined  were  normal.  Two  gonozooids  are  con- 
tained, pretty  closely  packed,  the  lower  one  larger  in  proportion  to 
the  upper  than  is  usually  the  case,  and  lying  obliquely  to  it.  The 
only  gonangia  seen  contained  male  gonozooids.  The  eight  otocysts 
of  the  medusa  were  very  distinct. 

A  very  close  affinity  exists  between  the  present  species  and 
Eucopella  campanularia  Von  Lendenfeld  (which  is  discussed  under 
O.  coinpressa).  The  principal  difference  is  in  the  form  of  the  gon- 
angia, which  are  distinguished  from  those  of  E.  campanularia  by 
the  broader  lower  portion,  the  undulated  outline,  and  particularly 
by  the  prominent  superior  angles. 

SiLiouLARiA,   Meyen. 

H i/panfhea,  Allman. 

Eucopella,  in  part,  Von  Lendenfeld,  Hartlaub. 
Allman's  description  of  tlie  genus  Hypanthea  is  as  follows  : — 
"  Hydrothecae  pedunculate,  inoperculate,  with  walls  enormously 
thickened,  and  so  far  encroaching  upon  the  cavity  as  to  render  im- 
possible the  complete  retraction  of  the  hydranth.  Gonosome — 
^Gonangia  enclosing  fixed  sporosacs."  The  species  were  further  char- 
acterised by  the  possession  of  bilateral  hydrothecae,  with  oblique 
apertures.  A  more  recently  described  species,  however,- — .S'.  diver- 
gens  Ha]-tlaul> — differs  from  all  the  others  in  having  the  hydrotliecae 
regular,   with  a  large  cavity,   and   apparently   resembling  those  of 


84  W.  M.   Bale: 

Orfhopj/xis.  Probably  these  may  be  bilateral  to  the  same  extent 
as  those  of  Orf/iopi/.ris:  in  any  case  they  seem  to  form  a  distinct 
link  hetAveen  the  two  genera. 

As  stated  under  0.  comparivlaria  Von  Lendcnfeld  included  under 
that  species  two  distinct  hydroids,  an  OrfJiopi/xu.  and  a  Silicularia^ 
the  latter  of  which  is  here  distinguished  under  the  name  of  .S'. 
rawpannJaria. 

In  considering  the  relations  of  OrfJ/op//,vis  and  Silicularia 
we  must  not  overlook  the  different  structure  of  the  hydranths.  Those 
of  Orthopyxls  are,  so  far  as  an  ordinary  examination  can  disclose. 
purely  radial,  while  some  species  at  least  of  Hilicninria  are  dis- 
tinctly bilateral,  as  described  by  Hilgendorf  in  his  //.  nsipnmetrica , 
and  as  they  exist  in  Von  Lendenfeld's  specimens,  and  ai-e  indicated 
by  Hartlaub  in  E.  reticulata.  A  large  lobe  or  inflation  occupies 
that  side  of  the  hydrotheca,  which  is  lower  than  the  rest,  apparently 
to  accommodate  it,  and  as  all  species  of  Silicularia  (except  S.  diver- 
yens),  also  have  one  side  lower,  it  is  presumable  that  the  structure' 
of  the  hydranth  is  similar  in  all  of  them.  Another  peculiarity  in 
our  specimens  is  the  union  of  the  proximal  part  of  the  tentacles 
in  a  sort  of  calyx  with  an  annular,  thickened  border,  and  of  this 
also  there  is  a  distinct  indication  in  Hartlaul>'s  figure  of  E. 
reticulata. 

Silicularia  campanularia    (Von   Lendenfeld).        (PI.   XIII., 
Figs.   1-6). 

Eucopella  cainjian  iilaria,  in  part.  Von     Lendenfeld,    Zeitschr, 
f.  wiss.  Zool..  v..  188:^,  p.  497-583;  pi.  xxix.,  fig.  15,  Dl. 

Eucopella  campanularia.  Bale,  Proc.  Lin.   Soc.   N.S.W.,  (2), 
iii.,   1888,  pi.  xiii.,  figs.  9-15.     Mulder  and  Trebilcock. 
Geelong   Naturalist,    (2),   vi.,    1914,    p.    9,   pi.    ii.,   figs. 
8-11. 
1   Eucopella  reticulata,   Hartlaub,   Zool.   Jahrb. ,    Suppl.    vi.,. 
iii..  1905.  p.  569,  fig.  lU. 
Hydi'orhiza  very  broad  and  thick-walled.  Avith  numerous  branches, 
which  are  mostly  given  oft'  at  liglit  angles,  and  are  commonly  oppo- 
sirL'.       IVduncles    very    stout,    and    with    thick    perisarc,    the    longer 
(UK'S   sometimes   a    little   attenuated    in   the   middle,    rounded   at   the 
top,   and   narrowed   in   at  the  base,   one  or  tAvo  rounded  or  oblong 
segments  sometimes  at  the  top,  a  distinct  rounded  or  angular  bead 
betAvecn   the   nednmle   and  the  hvdrotheca. 


AasfndittiK  Hydrohls.  85 

Hydrothceae  luiu-li  cdiiiiu'essod,  llie  two  hinad  sides  t'<iniiiii<j;  erect 
•convex  lobes,  the  intermediate  sides  lower,  forming  two  lips,  one 
lower  than  the  other;  the  interior  nearly  tilled  up  Avith  solid  peri- 
sarc,  pierced  by  the  hydropore.  which  is  enlarged  just  above  its 
lower  extremity,  and  gi-adually  widens  out  above  into  the  shallow 
cavity  of  the  liydrotheca. 

Gonothecae  usually  deeuml)eut,  euneate,  compressed,  rounded  at 
the  top  wlien  mature,  shortly  but  distinctly  stalked,  their  perisai-c 
thickened  towards  the  basfe. 

Hydranths  seated'  in  the  concavity  of  the  hydrothecae,  base  flat- 
tened, a  large  rounded  retractile  inflation  of  that  side  of  the  body 
which  is  over  the  lower  lip ;  proximal  portion  of  the  tentacles  united 
and  joined  In-  an  annular  band  into  a  calyx  surroun<ling  the  oi-al 
extremity. 

Gonophores — sporosacs,  one  or  two  in  each  gonotheca. 

The  foregoing  description  refers  to  the  specimens  which  formed 
part  of  Von  Lendenfeld's  types  of  Eucopella  campanularia,  and 
which,  as  already  mentioned,  were  sent  to  me  from  the  Australian 
Museum.  The  description  applies  equally  to  the  two  forms  from 
Bondi  figured  by  me  in  the  Proceedings  of  the  Linnean  Society 
of  New  South  Wales,  under  the  name  of  E.  campanularia.  There 
are  slight  differences  among  these  forms,  and  as  there  may  be  a 
doubt  as  to  whether  they  should  all  be  classed  together,  I  now  figure 
the  actual  specimens  taken  from  Von  Lendenfeld's  types.  The  re- 
lationship between  these  three  forms,  also  Eucopella  reticulnta 
Hartlaub,  is  very  close. 

In  Von  Lendenfeld's  specimens  tlie  liydrorhiza  is  extremely  broad, 
reaching  about  .-S'^mm.,  of  which  the  internal  cavity  occupies  alxmt 
.15  mm.  When  torn  off  and  turned  edgewise  it  is  seen  to  be  much 
flattened.  The  peduncles  also  are  very  massive,  the  longer  ones 
may  be  attenuated  in  the  middle  portion,  owing  to  the  perisarc  !:>€- 
ing  thinner,  but  neai-  the  extremities  they  usually  reach  their 
normal  diameter.  The  canal  giadually  widens  a  little  to  the  base, 
and  as  the  perisarc  is  narrowed  in  at  the  same  pa)t,  the  area  of 
attachment  is  slender.  Just  at  the  top  of  the  peduncle  there  is 
a  distinct  internal  inflation  of  the  canal.  The  bead-like  segment 
between  the  hydrotheca  and  the  peduncle  may  be  globular,  or  it 
may  be  angular  round  the  equator,  and  sometimes  there  is  a  second, 
and  larger,  globular  bead.  The  peduncles  may  be  tumid  at  the  top 
•and  bottom,  and  theii-  length  is  variable,  some  being  less  than  twice 
the  length  of  a  liydrotheca,  othei's  ten  times  that  length,  but  short 
'Ones  predominate. 


86  W.  M.   Bale: 

Tlie  hjdrothecae  were  figured  by  Vou  Leudeufeld  as  oljliquely 
truncate,  like  those  of  //.  ag(/regata  Allman.  but  the  figure  is  in- 
accurate, the  broader  sides  being  elevated  convex  lobes.  The  two 
lips  are  not  everted.  As  seen  broadside  the  outer  lateral  contours 
are  usually,  but  not  always,  slightly  concave  in  the  middle,  and 
in  the  longer  one  there  may  be  a  slight  angle.  Their  length  varies 
between  .30  and  .55  mm.,  the  width  from  .30  to  .45  mm.  The 
gonangium  is  flattened  at  the  top  during  its  growth,  1)ut  at  maturity 
the  top  is  smoothly  rounded,  and  firmly  chitinous;  there  is  no 
special  border,  and  only  by  close  inspection  can  a  line  be  detected 
at  which  the  convex  top  ultimately  separates.  They  are  about  1.35 
— 1.60  mm.   in  length,  and  .75 — .90  in  width. 

Tlie  hydranths.  which  I  have  seen  only  in  Von  Lendenfeld's  speci- 
mens, are  very  characteristic,  and  quite  unlike  those  of  Orthopyxis, 
the  lx)dy  having  on  one  side  a  large  rounded  inflation,  which  is 
situated  just  inside  the  lower  lip.  In  all  the  hydranths,  as  pre- 
served, the  body  was  bent  over  the  higher  lip,  and  in  close  contact 
with  it  t(i  tlie  edge;  on  the  opposite  side  is  the  lateral  inflation, 
which,  when  fully  expanded,  fills  in  tlie  space  above  the  lower  lip;, 
it  is  sometimes  i-etracted  to  small  dimensions,  but  more  often  ex- 
panded sufficiently  to  be  a  conspicuous  feature.  Hilgendorf  de- 
scribes a  similar  lobe  in  liis  U (jyanthed  a^iftnmefricd,  but  mentions 
that  it  is  divided  by  a  sharp  constriction  from  the  l)ody,  a  charac- 
ter which  I  have  not  detected  in  my  specimens.  Hartlaub  clearly 
indicates  the  lateral  inflation  in  his  figures  of  Eiicopella  reticulata. 

The  base  of  the  hydranth  is  flattened;  one  edge  of  it  fits  into  a 
notch  or  sinuation  half-way  down  the  inside  of  the  hydrotheca, 
below  the  higher  lip,  the  other  rests  on  the  lower  side,  opposite  tO' 
it. 

The  distal  portion  foi'ms  a  wide  infundibuliform  expansion  or 
calyx,  composed  (at  least,  in  regard  to  its  outer  layei)  of  the  united 
proximal  portions  of  the  tentacles,  and  iiordcied  l)y  a  thick,  annu- 
lar l)and,  which  is  attached  by  its  iniu'r  margin  to  the  edge  of  the 
calyx;  outside  this  circle  of  attachment  tiie  tentacles  are  free.  The 
aniiulus  is  evidently  the  homologue  of  tlu"  hypostome  of  Orthopyxis, 
but  it  is  nairower  and  situated  furtliei-  fiom  tin"  centre,  and  the 
fact  that  it  is  constant  in  position  in  all  the  hydranths  conveys 
the  impression  that  it  lias  not  tlie  mobility  of  tin-  liypostomes  of 
Orfltopyxh,  which  assume  all  sorts  of  varied  di-grees  of  expansion 
and  contraction.  Occasionally  in  a  sli(U'  of  Ortiiopyxls  is  seen  a 
hydrotheca,    with    tlie    tentacles    recurved,    and    the    hypostome    ei- 


Aiistralldii  Hijih-ohls.  87 

PjukUhI  t(.  its  utmost  limit,  and  siic-Ii  a  one  presents  a  strong  re- 
semblance to  the  specimens  before  us.  Possibly  the  treatment  to- 
which  tliev  have  been  submitted  may  liave  caused  them  to  become 
fixed  in  an  unusually  widely  expanded  attitude,  and  may  in  part 
account  for  the  eliaracteristic  form.  I  have,  however,  some  speci- 
mens of  a  New  Zealand  species,  in  which  the  condition  is  similar, 
and  Hartlaub's  ligui-e  of  Eucopella  reticulata  gives  a  distinct  indi- 
cation of  the  annular  band.  An  allied  species,  described  by  Mulder 
and  Trebilcock  as  Eucopella  undulata  (Geelong  Naturalist,  May, 
1914),  also  appears  to  have  the  same  structiire.  ^ 

Unfortunately,  the  specimens,  probably  from  the  action  of  a 
reagent,  are  excessively  dark  and  opaque,  so  that  I  was  unable  to- 
ascertain  tlie  structure  satisfactorily,  especially  the  condition  of  the 
oral  i-egion.  In  some  cases  there  seemed  to  be  a  dome-like  eleva- 
tion in  the  middle  of  the  calyx,  in  others  it  was  not  apparent.  The 
annulus  lies  flat,  and  tlie  tentacles  spring  horizontally  from  below 
it.  and  are  mostly  recurved.  In  one  or  two  cases  they  were  curled 
inwards  over  the  annulus,  which  was  not  at  all  retracted.  As  in 
manv  ("ampanularians  a  biserial  arrangement  of  the  tentacles  is. 
indicated  by  their  occasional  alternate  elevation  and  depression. 

The  gonothecae  are,  as  Hartlaub  says  of  those  of  Exicopella 
reticulata,  "  ham-shaped,"  rounded  at  the  top  when  mature,  and 
without  distinct  operculum.  In  Von  Lendenfeld's  specimens  some 
of  them  contained  the  gonophores,  which  were  so  blackened  that 
theii'  structure  could  not  be  made  out.  One  of  my  Bondi  speci- 
mens included  gonophores  in  various  stages,  some  of  the  gonothecae 
V)eing  closely  packed  with  the  developing  ova.  In  most  cases  there 
were  two  gonophores.  The  perisarc  of  the  gonotheca  is  thicker 
towards  the  base,  often  excessively  so.  Hartlaub  describes  the  gono- 
theca of  E.  reticulata  as  passing  into  the  peduncle  gradually,  and 
without  distinct  constriction  or  interruption.  While  none  of  my 
specimens  quite  agree  with  this,  some  of  them  are  but  slightly  con- 
tiacted  at  the  base;  in  others,  however,  the  contraction  is  extremely 
abriipt.  I  cannot  attach  much  importance  to  this  character,  as  the 
specimens  vary  greatly  in  regard  to  it;  moreover,  the  position  in 
which  the  gonothecae  are  viewed  has  much  to  do  with  their  apparent 
foi'm.  as  they  are  commonly  more  or  less  bent  at  the  base,  and  de- 
cumbent. 

1  In  both  the  species  referred  to  the  lateral  inflation  of  the  h.vdranth  is  evident,  as  also  is  the 
position  of  the  upper  portion,  that  is,  leaninj;  over  the  upper  lip  of  the  h.vdrotheca,  and  Mulder 
and  Trebilcock  say  that  is  the  custoinar.v  attitude  durinj,'  life.  In  all  the  species  the  iLfreatest  diameter 
is  across  the  annular  band.  y 


S8  W.  M.  Bale  .- 

The  form  from  Bondi,  figured  by  me  in  tlie  Proceedings  of  the 
Linnean  Society  of  New  South  Wales  for  1S88  (pi.  13,  figs.  9-11), 
corresponds  pretty  closely  with  Von  Lendenfeld's  specimens  in  size 
and  habit,  but  differs  in  the  very  regularly  convex  outline  <<i  the 
hydrothecae,  recalling,  in  the  shorter  ones,  Allman's  //.  hemi- 
spherica.  The  base  of  the  gonotheca  is  mostly  broadly  rounded,  l)ut 
sometimes  narrows  more  gradually  into  the  peduncle.  This  form 
may  be  provisionally  distinguished  as  var.  roiunda,  but  I  think 
it  quite  probable  that  the  characteristic  outline  of  the  hydrothecae 
may  be  an  inconstant  feature;  if  so,  the  specimens  cannot  be  dis- 
sociated from  the  type. 

The  other  Bondi  form  (Proc.  Lin.  Soc.  N.S.W.,  1888,  pi.  13,  figs. 
12-15),  is  of  more  lobust  habit,  with  larger  hydrothecae,  and  stouter 
peduncles.  The  hydrorhiza  is  about  as  wide  as  that  of  the  type, 
but  with  the  internal  channel  wider.  Its  lateral  branches,  uK^st  of 
which  are  exactly  at  right  angles,  are  excessively  numerous.  The 
hydrothecae  may  attain  the  length  of  about  .(JO  nun.,  and  their 
lateral  contours,  as  .seen  in  the  broader  aspect,  are  somewhat  con- 
cave, so  that  the  lips  appear  slightly  everted.  The  internal  sinua- 
tion,  in  which  the  foot  of  the  hydranth  rests,  is  not  very  deep.  The 
outside  is  characteristically  marked,  with  irregular  raised  veins, 
giving  it  a  woody  appearance.  It  may  be  distinguished  as  var. 
veno>^a. 

Eucopella  reticulata  Hartlaub  differs  from  my  specimens  mainly 
in  the  gonangia,  which  are  attenuated  more  aradually  into  the 
peduncles,  and  in  the  size  of  the  hydrothecae,  which  reach  ovei-  .75 
mm.  in  lengtli,  while  those  of  .S'.  aiinpauular'Ki  i-arely  reach  .50 
mm.,  and  the  average  is  about  .40.  Hartlaub's  discription  of  the 
hydrorhiza  as  wide-meshcd  scarcely  applies  to  tliat  of  the  present 
species. 

The  forms  liei'e  described,  wliile  agi'eeing  closely  with  sonit'  othei" 
species  in  regard  to  rlie  ti'o])hosonie,  may  readilv  lir  distinguished 
l)y  tlie  gonothecae.  Wlu'tlu'r  the  thicc  Austvalian  forms  art-  jn'o- 
perly  i-eferred  to  a  single  species  is  perhaps  ((ncstionable,  and  lui-- 
ther  investigation  must  decide;- Imt  undoubtedly  rach  of  tlifin  ex- 
hibits occasional  resemblances  to  the  otlicrs,  as  in  tli</  size  :\.un  form 
oi  the  hydrotliecae,  the  pi-esence  of  veining.  and  other  rhaiactrrs. 
The  thick  pciisarc  of  the  hydrothecae  seems  to  vaiy  greatly  in 
density,  and  it  is  probable  that  much  of  the  difference  between  those 
of  var.  rotunda  and  var.  rt'iiosa  (the  two  cxtrein<'s)  may  be  siinjdy 
due  to  vai'ving  degrees  of  contraction  of  the  perisarc,  caused  by  the 


AiistroU,,,,,    Hildronls.  89 

.foiiilitioiis  of  liTuwth.  And  witli  ri'<rai(l  i«>  A',  nt tcuhttn ,  tin-  ihai- 
acttM-s  ascrihed  to  it  seeni  hardly  suttiiiciit  to  justify  its  sprritic- 
separation. 

Hil<iL'ndorf  says  that  the  specimens  tiaurcd  liy  \\\v  as  E.  cam /xnni- 
laria  aic  //.  hUdhidia  (Coutihtrey).  Of  tliis  I  am  v^ry  doul)ff\d. 
The  goiiano-iii  of  //.  hihiliiafd ,  airoi'din^'  to  l)oth  ('ou<ihtrry  and 
Hilgeiidorf.  art'  very  iinliki'  those  of  the  present  form.  Hilgendorf "s 
account  of  //.  hildhUitu  is  not  in  aeeord  witli  his  figui'e,  especially 
as  regards  the  jieduneles.  His  specific  diagnosis  is  a  copy  of  All- 
man's  description  of  //.  atiyrfi/dto,  including  tlie  measurement  (\ 
inch),  but  Pie  gives  the  height  afterwards  as  A  inch,  which  agrees 
with  Coughtrey's.  The  present  species  does  not,  I  think,  reach 
more  than  half  that  height,  and  I  suspect  that  //.  hildhiatd  may 
be  identical  with  the  Xew  Zealand  form  previously  leferred  to. 
w^hich  has  the  hydrothecae  and  hydranths  nuich  larger  than  those 
of  'S'.  catnpanularia,  and  agrees  well  with  Coughtrey's  figure. 
Neither  Coughtrey  noi-  Hilgeiidorf  give  any   indication   of  the  size 

•  of  the  hydrothecae  in  their  specimens.  The  former,  it  is  true,  says 
that  his  figures  are  magnified  fifty  times,  but  there  is  clearly  some 
mistake,  as  it  is  obvious  to  anyone  acquainted  with  some  of  the 
species  figured  that  the  magnification  is  not   nearly  fifty;   in   s(jme 

•  cases,   indeed,   it  is  not  twenty. 

SiLICtJLARIA    UNDULATA    (Muld(M-   and    Tiefiileock). 

Eucnpella  nnihdafd,  Mulder  and  Trebilcock.  (jeelong  Natura- 
list (2)  vi.,  1914,  p.  10,  pi.  ii.,  tigs.  5-7. 
This  appears  to  be  a  different  species  from  .S'.  cainpanularia.  be- 
ing distinguished  by  the  peduncles  and  the  gonothecae.  The 
former  are  thin-walled  and  undulated,  as  in  most  of  the  spLries  of 
Orthopyxiif.  though  often  becoming  thicker  and  smooth  at  l)oth 
extremities.  According  to  the  figures  the  base  is  not  conti'acted  at 
the  junction  with  the  hydrorhiza,  as  in  S.  campan  uhiria.  The 
gonothecae  are  decumbent,  i-oughly  orbicular  in  outline.  Hat  be- 
neath, convex  above,  with  faint,  transverse  iviuae.   and  with  a  snb- 

•  circular  aperture,  looking  upward.  The  hydiotheeae  are  similar 
to  those  of  .S'.  campatntlana. 

A  figure  of  the  hydranth  shows  it  leaning  over  the  higher  lip  of 
the  hydrotheca,  which  is  stated  to  be  its  position  when  living;  the 
inflation  of  the  opposite  side  is  noticeable,  and  the  oral  calyx  and 
the  annulus  are  also  shown.  As  the  latter  is  described  as  a  large 
.  cup-sliaped  proboscis,  it  would  seem  that  its  cliaracter  is  more  dis- 


90  W    M.  Bale: 

tinct  than  in  the  niouiitetl  specimens  of  .S'.  camptimdaria.  The 
tentacles  are  longer  than  tlmse  of  that  species,  a  difference  also 
perhaps  dependent  on  the  condition  of  the  specimens. 

ZVGOPHYLAX    RUFA    Bale. 

Campanularia  rufa,  Bale,  Cat.  Aust.  Hyd.  Zooph.,  1884, 
p.  54.  pi.  1,  tig.  1  ;  Trans,  and  Proc.  Roy.  Soc.  Vict., 
xxiii.,   1887,  p.  91. 

"  Campanidaria  '^  rufa,  Levinsen,  Vidensk.  Medd..  fra  den 
naturh.  Foren,  64,  1913,  p.  292. 
This  species  was  ranked  by  Billard  as  a  synonym  of  Lictorella 
antipathes  (Lamarck),  but  erroneously,  as  I  gather  from  the  same 
observer's  remarks  in  his  report  on  the  Bi-itish  Museum  collection, 
in  which  he  says  that  L.  antipathes  does  not  exhibit  the  slight 
distal  narrowing  of  the  hydrotheca,  nor  the  everted  margin,  both 
of  which  features  characterise  the  present  species  (as  mentioned  in 
the  original  description).  It  may  also  be  noted  that  L.  antipathes  is 
described  as  a  coarse,  woody,  and  rigid  form,  reaching  according 
to  Lamarck  and  Allman  about  four  inches,  and  according  to  Bil- 
lard fourteen  centimetres,  while  Ritchie  says  that  some  of  the 
specimens  of  which  he  obtained  portions  must  have  much  exceeded 
these  dimensions.  Z.  rufa,  so  far  as  it  is  known,  is  a  small,  deli- 
cate form,  under  an  inch  in  height,  with  the  fasciculation  limited 
to  a  few  tutes  on  the  stem  only.  The  original  Lafo'ea  halecioides 
of  Allman  (187.'3)  seems  to  resemble  Z.  rufa  more  than  does  L. 
antipathes,  but  it  differs  in  the  absence  of  a  perisarcal  diaphragm 
in  the  hydrotheca.  The  nearest  species  to  Z.  rufa  would  seem  to  be 
Lictorella.  concinna  Ritchie  (Mem.  Aust.  Mus.  iv.,  p.  823),  which 
is  of  similar  habit,  but  its  hydrothecae  differ  in  form,  especially 
in  the  much  elongated  stalk-like  condition  of  the  proximal  part, 
whieh  is  below  the  diaphragm. 

The  pinnae  of  Z.  rufa  are  sub-alternate;  between  every  two  on 
the  same  side  are  two  hydrothecae,  one  of  them  axillary.  The 
apophyses  are  distinct,  and  mostly  about  double  the  diameter  of 
the  hydrotheca  at  the  point  of  attachment.  There  is  usually  no- 
intervening  segment,  though  in  exceptional  cases  such  a  segment 
may  occur.  The  portion  of  the  hydrotheca  lielow  the  diaphragm 
or  "  floor  "  is  short,  genei'ally  about  one-sixth  of  the  whole  length. 
In  a  few  cases  the  apo]>hyses  wliich  support  the  axillary  hydrothecae 
are  narrowed  down  gradually  to  the  diameter  of  the  hydrotheca- 
base,  and  not  divided  fi-om  the  latter  by  a  distinct  joint. 


Australian  Hydro  Ids.  91' 

Tlie  pieseiK'L'  on  soiiir  of  {\\v  a])o]>liyses  of  a  sarc-othera,  or  a  pair 
of  tlieiii.  was  not  iiiciil  ioiied  in  tlie  original  description,  having 
Iteen  overlooked  by  nie.  an  omission  wliich  is  accounted  for  by  the 
fact  that  they  are  only  present  in  a  small  jd'opoi'tion  of  cases,  and 
that  rliey  are  so  small  as  to  he  readily  passed  over,  especially 
as  they  are  mostly  below  the  axillary  apophyses,  where  they  are 
more  apt  to  be  obscured.  In  fact,  I  could  only  find  three  or  four 
on  the  pinnae.  In  a  few  other  instances  marks  were  visible  where 
they  had  been  detached,  but  for  the  most  part  even  these  were  want- 
ing. These  little  calycles  are  not  unlike  the  hydrothecae  in  shape,, 
but   not  narrowed  at  all  towards  the  end. 

Thyroscyphus  mauginatus  Bale. 

Campanidaria   marginafa.    Bale,    Cat.    Aust.    Hydr.    Zooph.,. 

1884,  p.   54,  pi.   1,  fig.  2;  Proc.  Lin.  Soc.   N.S.W.  (2),. 

iii.,  1888,  p.  758.     Bartlett,  Geelong  Nat.,  (2)  iii.,  1907, 

p.   62,   fig.  — . 
"  Camijaindnrla  '^     niarginata,     Levinsen,     Vidensk.     Medd. 

fra  den  naturh.  Foren,  64,  1913,  p.  289. 
This  species,  which  on  account  of  its  possessing  hydrothecae  with' 
a  four-valved  operculum,  I  now  refer  to  the  genus  Thyroscyi^hus, 
is  nevertheless  of  peculiar  hal)it,  differing  from  that  of  the  otlier 
known  members  of  the  genus.  In  its  simplest  form  it  consists  of 
a  single  hydrotheca,  J)orne  on  a  peduncle  two  or  three  times  its  own 
length,  which  may  have,  near  tlie  base,  a  few  irregularly-placed 
joints;  it  therefore  differs  little  in  habit  from  such  species  as 
Orthopyxis  calicidata.  But  most  commonly  this  structure  is  re- 
peated two  or  three  times,  and  in  each  case  the  new  peduncle  is 
given  off  kterally  from  the  preceding  one,  immediately  below  the- 
summit  of  the  latter,  on  which  the  hydrotheca  is  borne.  The  distal 
end  of  the  peduncle  is  usually  a  little  curved,  and  the  next  peduncle 
springs  from  the  outer  side  of  the  curve.  The  curves  do  not  usually 
alternate;  frecjuently  two  or  thi-ee  in  succession  are  directed  to 
the  same  side.  Occasionally  two  new  peduncles  spring  side  by  side 
from  the  preceding  one. 

In  the  original  description  I  mentioned  that  I  had  only  seen  the 
operculum  in  a  fragmentary  condition,  and  so  delicate  is  its  nature 
that  I  have  not,  up  to  the  present,  seen  a  perfect  one.  However, 
I  have  specimens  sufficiently  well  preserved  to  show  that  the  oper- 
culum is  of  the  type  which  characterises  the  genus  Thyroscyphns. 
In  some  instances  all  trace  of  the  opeiculum  had  disappeared,  al- 
though the  hvdranths  still  survived. 


92  W.  M.    Bale: 

Levinseii  leiuarks  that  the  sub-marginal  V>and  is  douljtless  due  to 
a  regeneration;  tlie  fact,  however,  that  it  is  always  present,  and  is 
constant  in  its  position,  seems  in  itself  sufficient  to  negative  that 
view.  It  is.  like  the  marginal  liand.  a  thickened  ridge  surround- 
ing the  hydrotheca  internally,  and  it  not  iinconnnonly  corresponds 
to  a  slight  external  constriction.  It  varies  in  the  extent  to  which 
it  is  thickened.  Ijeing  sometimes  feebly  developed,  especially  in  the 
newly-formed  hydrothecae;  and  in  any  case,  it  is  somewhat  less 
robust  than  the  border-thickening,  at  least  in  the  vicinity  of  the  fotir 
marginal  points.  The  marginal  band  is  at  least  as  strongly  ma)-kcd 
at  these  points  as  elsewhere,  the  secondary  band  does  not  usually 
form  pionounced  points  like  the  marginal  one,  but  is  more  bluntly 
rounded  at  those  positions. 

The  hydrotheca  is  without  a  fully-developed  diaphragm.  l)ut  there 
is  an  internal  perisarcal  ring  just  above  the  base.  Higher  up  there 
is  a  zone  of  thinly  scattered  bright  points. 


EXPLANATION    OF    PLATES. 


Pl-\te  XT. 

Fig.    1. — Orthopyxis  caliciilata  (Hincks). 

Fig.    '1. — Orthopyxis  macrogona  (Von  Lendenfeld). 

Fig.    "5. — Orfhopy.rh  plat ycnrpo .  n.  sp. 

Fig.    -i. — Orthopyxis  a/n/alafa.  n.  sp. 

Fig.    5. — Orthopyxis  WiJxoni,  n.  sp. 

(All    magnified    -id   diameters). 


Plate  XII. 

Fig.    1. — Orthopyxis  caliculata  (Hincks). 

Fig.    2. — Orthopyxis  macrogona  (Von  Lendenfeld). 

Fig.    3. — OrfTiopyxis  plafycarpa,  n.  .sp. 

Fig.    4. — Orthopyxis  angulata,  n.  sp. 

Fig.   5. — OrtJiopyxis  Wilsoni,  n.  sp. 

(All    magnified   20   diameters). 


Vvnr.   U.S.   Victoria,   1911,        Plate  XI. 


I'ruc.  U.S.   Victoiiii,  1914.       Plate  XII. 


Pnx-.  K.S.   Victoria,  1914.        I'hitc  XIII. 


Australian   Ut/droith.  9J5- 


Platk  XIIT. 

FiL^    1. — SilicAilaria  campditularia  (Von  Leiidenfeld).   typi-. 

Fiir-    2. — Sil/'riihrrtfr  cti in jxt iiiilaria       (Von       Lendent't'ld  ).       var. 
v( iiottd.  \\.  var. 

Fi^v    .'5. — SiJiciihirid  c(iiii pdinilarid      (Von      Lendt'iit'eld),       var. 
rot  inula,  n.  var. 

(All  ni.-iLTuitit'd   40   diameters). 

Fi<r.    4. — Siliriilarin  rani  pan  iilaria       (Von       Lendeiifeld  i.       var. 
venosa,  n.  var. 

Fip:.    5. — Siliriilaria  cam  pan  nJaria    (Von    Lendenfeld ).    type. 

Fi^r.    6. — Silicvlaria  campanularia      (Von       Lendenfeld),       var.. 
rotunda,  n.  var. 

(All  magnified    20    diHineters)'. 


[Pboc.  Roy.  Soc.  Victoria,  27  (N.S.),  Part   I.,  1914]. 


Ar'I'.  VIII. — Oji  some  New  Species  of  Victorian  Marine 
Molki.sca. 


J.    H.    GATLTFF 

AND 

C.    J.    GABRIEL. 

(With  Plates  XIV.,  XV.,   XVI.). 

[Read  9th  July,  1914]. 

This  paper  contains  descriptions  of  five  neAv  species  of  univalves 
-and  two  new  species  of  bivalves. 

EULIMA    VICTORIAK,    Sp.    nov.  (PI.    XIV^    Fig.     1). 

Shell  small,  thin,  rather  attenuated,  subcylindrical.  opaque- 
white,  with  a  glossy  surface.  Whorls  seven,  commencing  with  a 
large,  blunt,  dome-shaped  apex  ;  the  whorls  are  flatly  convex,  and 
of  fairly  regular  increase.  Suture  scarcely  discernible.  Aperture 
ovate,  pointed  above.  Labrum  regularly  curved,  thin,  and  very 
prominent  about  the  centre.  The  labium  resolves  itself  into  a 
rather  broadly  reverted  lip. 

Dimensions  of  fype. — Length,  2.1;  breadth,  .6  mm. 

Locality. — Dredged  off  Wilson's   Promontory. 

Observation. — The  specific  differentiation  of  this  genus  is  one  of 
the  most  difficult  to  study,  requiring  patient  investigation  ;  how- 
ever, the  cylindrical  form  and  dome-shaped  apex  serve  to  dis- 
tinguish the  present  shell  from  its  Victorian  congenors.  The  nearest 
approach  is  perhaps  E.  fricata  Hedley  from  Tasman  Sea.  Rec. 
Aust.  Mus.  vi..  1907,  p.  2!)0.  pi.  Iv..  fig.  14. 

Type  in  Mr.  C.  J.  Gabriel's  collection. 

Lriostraca  kilcundae,  sp.  nov.       (Pi.    XTV.,   Figs.   2  and  3). 

Shell  minute,  light-brown  colour,  smooth,  shining,  sufficiently 
"transpai'eiit  to  view  the  axial-pillar.  It  is  tipped  with  a  distinctly 
rounded   doTue-sliaped   apex.      Following   this   are  five  flatly  convex 


Vietorldir  Marine   M,>lluHca.  95 

whoils,  itartcd  by  u  liiu'ur  suture.  The  colouratidii  of  the  wlioils 
is  fairly  uniforiu.  w  ith  no  indication  of  markings  as  in  the  previous 
species.  The  shell  is  hhu  li  lounded  anteriorly.  Aperture  pyriforrn. 
Labruin  thin,  .simple.      Lal)iaui  moderately  thick  on  the  Vjody. 

Dhnr/is/o/is  of  ti/pc. — Len<ith,    1.75;  breadth,  G  mm. 

LovaUfi/. — Kileunda,   in  shell  sand. 

Ohservntion. — This  is  the  smallest  of  our  Victorian  species,  and 
is  immediately  separable  by  its  squat  form,  dome-shaped  apex,  and 
uniform  colouration.  Its  nearest  ally  is  L.  joshuana,  GatlifF  and 
Gabriel,  which  is  here  refigured  for  comparison. 

Type  in  Mr.  C.  J.  Gabriel's  collection. 


Lkiostraca  STYLiFORMis,   sp.    uov.        (PI.   XIV.,    Figs.    4  and    5). 

Shell  minute,  acuminate,  smooth,  glassy.  Whorls  nine,  through 
Avhich  the  axial  pillar  may  be  plainly  seen.  Whorls  ai'e  slightly 
•convex;  suture  fairly  distinct  in  consecpience  of  the  slight  rounding 
of  the  whorls.  Tlie  generic  characteristic  is  indicated  in  the  later 
whorls  by  fairly  distinct,  but  irregular  orange-tinted  markings, 
more  numerous  and  more  pronounced  on  the  body-whorl.  Aperture 
somewhat  pyriform,  outer-lip  thin  and  roundly  prominent  at  the 
periphery.     Inner  lip  slightly  reflected. 

Dimensions  of  type. — Length,  2.5;  breadth,  8  mm. 

Locality. — Dredged  off  Wilson's  Promontory. 

Observation. — A  most  delicate  and  curious  little  shell;  its  distinct 
acuminate  form  .serving  to  distinguish  from  the  Victorian  members 
of  the  genus. 

Type  in  Mr.  C.  J.  Gabriel's  collection. 


■Cyclostrema  kilcundak,  sp.    nov.        (PI.    XV.,  Figs.   8,   9  and   10). 

Shell  very  minute,  white,  hyaline,  of  four  whorls  including  the 
smooth  globular  protoconch.  Discoidal,  spire  sunken,  widely  um- 
bilicated.  Ornamented  with  transverse  riblets,  aboiit  twenty-seven 
•on  the  body-whorl,  they  are  irregularly  spaced,  becoming  more 
•crowded  towards  the  mouth,  the  intervening  spaces  are  traversed  by 
very  fine  encircling  incised  lines.     Mouth  circulai-. 

Dimensions  of  ^5//?e.— Height,     '\>h  :  diametei-,  1  mm. 

Locality. — In  shell  sand,  Kilcunda. 

Observation. — Type  in  Mr.  J.  H.  Gatliff's  collection. 


GdJlif  and  Gahrid 


Cyclostrkma  vkrcoi,   sp.    nov.        (PI.    XV.,   Figs.    11,    12  and    13). 

Slifll  veiv  iriiiiutu.  wliite,  opaque,  of  foui-  whorl's  including  the 
l)iiitoc(incli.  Dise-oidal.  widely  umbilicated,  spire  sunken.  Whorls 
erosst'<l  l)_v  riljlets.  a])out  seventeen  on  the  last  whorl,  the  inter- 
vening spaces  are  smooth  with  the  exception  of  a  median  spiral 
thread  on  the  base.      Mouth  circular. 

Diiiu  iisioiiH  of  ti/pf. — Height,   .27;  diameter,   .75  mm. 

Lncdhti/. — Dredged   oft'   Wilson's   Promontory. 

()J,s,rr(itlon.—'Yyi)ii  in  Mr.  J.  H.  Gatlift"s  collection. 


Myodora  subalbida,   sp.   nov.        (PI.   XV.,   Fig.    14). 

Shell  white,  ol)long,  obliquely  truncated  posteriorly,  rounded 
autLTit.rly,  concentrically  ridged,  ridges  somewhat  rounded,  re- 
gularly spaced;  about  fourteen  in  number.  Umbos  central,  acute. 
Tlie  Aviiole  shell  is  covered  l)y  very  fine  radial  striae,  under  the 
mici-dscope  this  sculpture  is  divided  into  closely  compacted 
elongate,  flattened,  hexagonal  areas,  angularly  defined  posteriorly, 
see  figures  15  and  16.  Right  valve  convex,  with  an  angle  e.xtending 
from  the  umbos  to  the  margin,  and  defining  the  truncated  area.  Left 
valve  similar  to  the  right  valve,  but  rather  deeper.     Pearly  inside. 

Dimen.^ions  of  f ;i pc . — Length  antero-posterior,  10.  ;  undjo-ven- 
tral,  5.5  mm. 

Locnlifij. — Dredged   in  aljout  seven  fathoms.   Western   Port. 

Oh.^ervotio)! . — Resend)ling  M.  a/bida,  T.  Woods,  with  which 
species  M.  corrugata,  Verco,  is  conspecific.  Dr.  Verco  has  kindly 
compared  our  shell  with  his  type  and  confirms  our  opinion  that  it 
is  distinct  from  oui-  new  species. 

Type  in  Mr.  J.  H.  Gatlift"s  collection. 

DosiNiA  viCTORiAE,  sp.  uov.       (PI.   XVf,  Flgs.   17,   18  and  19). 

Shell  cream-coloured,  i-atlier  Iwittle,  inaequilatei'al,  the  anterior 
side  being  the  shorter.  Unibods  fairly  prominent,  slightly  in- 
curved, and  situated  at  about  one-tliird  of  the  whole  length  from 
the  anterior.  The  concentric  sculpture  resolves  itself  into  about  65 
excessively  thin  erect  lamellae,  the  interstices  of  which  are  micro- 
scopically striate.  The  interstices  are  further  sculpturd  by  fine 
ol)solescent  radial  riblets  which  are  not  seen  to  ascend  the  lamellae, 
and  are  a  little  less  froiiucnt  than  the  minute  striae.     Lunular  area 


Victoriaii  Mivr'ive  MoUiisca.  97 

of  a  brown isli  tiiii^e.  eloiigately-eordit'oriii,  medially  elevated,  and 
ornamented  with  imhricating  lamellae.  The  ligament  is  sunken, 
narroAv.  and  long.  Hinge  area  normal.  The  pallial  sinus  is  broad, 
well  defined  and  oblicjuely  ascending  to  about  the  centre  of  the 
valve.  The  surface  of  the  shell  has  four  sub-equally  spaced  rays 
of  brown,  arrow-sliaped  markings.  Further  colouration  may  be 
seen  on  the  post-dorsal  margin  in  four  conspicuous  brown  macula- 
tions. 

Dimensions  of  fypt- — Length,  36;  breadth,  34;  sectional  of 
closed  valves,  16  mm. 

Localitjf. — W/estern  Port,  5-10  fathorjis  type  taken  alive; 
dredged  off  Portsea,  Port  Phillip. 

Observation. — Under  the  name  of  D.  variegata,  Gray,  this  species 
was  recorded  from  Victoria  by  Pritchard  and  Gatliff,  P.R.S.,  Vic, 
xvi.  (new  series),  1903,  p.  133.  Careful  investigation  and  much 
correspondence  leads  us  to  the  conviction  that  this  is  manifestly  a 
wrongful  identification;  and,  further,  that  the  shell  is  an  un- 
descriljed  species.  /).  variegata  is  extremely  variable;  this  vari- 
ability with  the  figures  and  remarks  by  Reeve,  Conch.,  Icon.  vi. 
pi.  6,  fig.  33a,  and  Sowerby  Thes.  Conch.  II.,  pt.  13,  p.  675,  No. 
72,  pi.  U4,  fig.  83,  excusably  leading  Pritchard  and  Gatliff  to 
regard  the  Victorian  sliell  as  another  of  its  forms.  Close 
study,  however,  has  revealed  cliaracters,  suificiently  consistent  to 
warrant  our  separating  it  as  a  distinct  species.  From  D.  varie- 
gata, the  shell  may  be  readily  distinguished  by  its  flatness  (al- 
though in  this  respect  showing  slight  variation),  by  its  more 
elongated  lunule  and  in  the  character  of  the  radial  sculpture. 
Another  misapplied  name  is  D.  histrio  ((jimel),  var.,  an  appellation 
recognised  in  South  Australia.  From  typical  D.  histrio  it  is  quite 
distinct  as  depicted  in  the  well-executed  figures,  by  Romer.  Mono- 
granh  Dosinia,  p.   33,  pi.  vi.  figs.   2.  3. 

The  "Challenger"  Report  Laniell.  p.  152,  records  D.  Jiistrio 
(Gmel).  var.  from  Cape  York,  Flinders  Passage,  and  Arafura  Sea, 
E.  A.  Smith,  in  his  observations,  remarking  :  "  This  species  has 
received  several  names  from  various  authors.  It  is  the  Venus 
anstraJAs  of  Quoy  and  Gaimard,  the  Artemis  variegata  of  Reeve, 
Artemis  firafa  and  1  pnticidaris  of  Sowerby,  and  perhaps  the  Artemis 
scabra  of  Philippi.  The  specimens  from  station  187  (near  Cape 
York)  and  Flinders  Passage  resemble  the  variety  Artemis  lirata." 
Reference  to  Sowerby's  figure  of  Artemis  lirata  Thes.  Conch.,  pi. 
cxliv.,  fig.  85,  clearly  shows  that  our  shell  has  been  misunderstood 
in  S.  Australia.        D.    deshayesi,    A.    Ad.,    as  figured  in   "  Challenger  " 

s 


98  Gadif  and  Gabriel:    Marine  Mollusca. 

Report  Laniell.  pi.  1.  figs.  1 — le..  the  type  of  which  is  in  the 
British  Mus.  of  Nat.  Hist.,  is  soniewiiat  siuiihir.  We  deemed  it 
advisable  to  have  a  comparative  examination  of  our  new  species 
with  it,  and  forwarded  specimens  to  Mr.  G.  B.  Sowerhy,  who  re- 
plied as  follows,  8-1-1  i: — "I  examined  type  of  Dosinia  deshayesi ; 
I  can  understand  some  of  your  small  ones  j^assing  for  the  young 
of  it,  but  is  certainly  a  distinct  sjaecies;  its  form  is  different,  and 
it  is  iiattei-;  the  ligamentary  area  is  much  narrower,  and  the 
character  of  the  concentric  lamellae  different.  It  is  also  certainly 
distinct  fiom  D.  histrio,  which  runs  into  t^nrieriafa.  I  think  you 
may  safely  describe  it  as  a  new  species."  Further  confusion  has 
been  added  to  the  puzzle  since  one  of  us  i-eceived  from  a  South 
AuvStralian  correspondent  a  St.  Vincent  Gulf  left  valve  under  the 
name  of  D.  brazieri  ;  the  author  was  not  given,  and  diligent  seai'ch 
through  literature  failed  to  reveal  any  description  under  such 
name  :   we  conclude,  therefore,  that  D.   hrazieri  is  manuscript. 

A  medium-sized  specimen  has  been  selected  for  the  type.  The 
series  studied,  ranging  from  8  mm.  to  45  mm.  (paratype),  exhibit- 
ing some  slight  variation  in  contour.  The  colour  rays  in  some 
specimens  are  very  clearly  defined,  while  in  others  almost  absent. 

We  have  here  to  express  our  many  thanks  to  Mr.  F.  Chapman 
for  his  excellent   illustrations  of  the  species. 

Type  and  paratype  in  Mr.  C.  J.  Gabriel's  collection. 

EXPLANATION    OF    PLATES. 

Platk  XIV. 
Fig.    1. — Eulima  victoriae,  sp.  nov. 
Figs.   2  and  3. — Leiostraca  kilcundae,  sp.  nov. 
Pigs.   4  and  5. — Leiosti-aca  styliformis,  sp.   nov. 
Figs.    6  and  T. — Leiostraca  joshuana,  Gatliff  and  Gabriel. 

Plate  XV. 

Figs.  8,  9  and  10. — Cyclostreraa  kilcundae,  s]).  nov. 
Figs.  11,  12  and  13. — Gyclostrema  vercoi,  sp.  nov. 
Fig.    14. — Myodora  subalbida,  sp.  nov. 

Fig.    15  and   16. — Myodora  subalbida,  sculpture  magnified. 
All  of  the  al)ove  figures  are  variously  magnified. 

Platk  XVI. 

Figs.    17   and  18. — Dosinia  victoria?,  sp.  nov. 
Fig.    19.— Dosinia  victoriie,  paratype. 

Figures  natural  size. 


Proc.  E.S.  Victoria,  I'.U  t.       Plate  XIV. 


Proc.  K.S.  Victoria,  1914.       Plate  XV. 


Pioc.  U.S.  Vift..ri:i,  1914.      Plate  XVI. 


[Proc.  Rot.  Soc.  Victoria,  27  (N.S.),  Part    1.,  1914]. 


Akt.  IX. — Additions  to  the  Catalogue  of   the  Marine   Shells 
of  Victoria. 

BY 

J.     H.    GATLIFF 

AND 

C.    J.    GABRIEL. 

[Eead  July  9th,  1914]. 

In  this  paper  we  have  added  21  more  species  to  the  catalogue, 
including  two  neAv  genera,  namely,  Cithna  and  Foramelina.  and 
the  total  number  catalogued  now  reaches  1052. 

We  have  continued  to  use  the  generic  names  previously  adopted, 
as,  although  alterations  have  been  made  and  suggested  by  various 
writers,  we  defer  making  changes  until  a  pronouncement  has  been 
anade  by  recognised  authority  as  to  the  validity  of  the  alterations. 

Argobuccinum  retiolum,   Hedley. 

1914.      Argobuccinum    retiolum,    Hedley.       Zool.,    Common- 
Avealth   trawler    "  Endeavoui,"    vol.    ii.,    part    2, 
p.  73,  pi.   11,  f.  5. 
//o6.— Trawled  in  100-250  fathoms,  south  from  Gabo  Island. 
Observation. — Size  of  type:  Length,  130;  breadth,  60  mm.     This 
•species   very    closely    resembles    A.     oregonensis,    Redfield.    which    is 
found  in  Alert  Bay,  British  Columbia. 

VoLUTA  MAGNiFiCA,   Chemnitz. 

1795.     Voluta  magnifica,  Chemnitz.     Conch.   Cab.,  vol.  xi., 
p.  8,  pi.   174-175,  f.   1693-1694. 

1840.  Voluta  magnifica,  Chemnitz.     Swainson,   Malacology, 

pp.    105  and  317. 

1841.  Voluta   magnifica,    Chemnitz.      Kuster    Conch.    Cab., 

p.   154,  pi.   23  and  24. 
1844.      Voluta  magnifica,  Chemnitz.     Sowerby,  Thes.  Conch., 

vol.  i.,  p.  200,  pi.  54,  f.  103. 
1849.     Voluta   magnifica,    Chemnitz.      Reeve,    Conch.    Icon., 

vol.  vi.,  pi.  1,  f.  2. 

8a 


100  Gatlif  and  Gabriel  : 

1853.      C'ymbiola   inagnitica.    Chemnitz.      H.    and   A.    Adams- 

Genera,  vol.  i.,  p  163. 
1855.      Scapha  magnifica,  Chemnitz.     Gray,  Brit.   Miis.  List,. 

part  i.,  p.  10. 
1859. — Voluta     (Cymbiohi)     magnitica.     Chemnitz.       Chenu.. 

Man.  Conch.,  vol.  i.,  p.   188.  f.  959. 
1867. — Voluta      (Scapha)      magnifica,      Chemnitz.        Angas,. 

P.Z.S.,  Lon..  p.   193. 

1871.  Voluta   (Aulica)  magnifica,   Chemnitz.      Crosse,   Jour.- 

de  Condi.,  vol.   xix..  3rd  series,  p.  284. 

1872.  Voluta   (Scapha)  magnifica,    Cliemnitz.      Cox,   Distri- 

bution of  Australasian  Volutes,  p.   8. 

1903.     Voluta    magnifica,    Chemnitz.      Hedley,    Mem.    Aust.. 
Mus.,  vol.  iv.,  p.  371. 

1914.— Scaphella  magnifica,  Chemnitz.     Hedley,  Zool.     Com- 
monwealth trawler  "  Endeavour,"  vol.   ii.,  p.  2,. 
p.  72. 
Hah. — Trawled  in  100-250  fathoms,  south  from  Gabo  Island. 

MARCilNELLA    SCHOUTANICA,    May. 

1912.     Marginalia  schoutanica,   May.     P.R.S.,  Tas.,  p.   45,. 
pi.  2,  f.  2. 
Hab. — In  about  40  fathoms,  ofi  Ninety  Mile  Beach. 
Observation. — Size  of  type  :  Length,  4. ;  breadth,  2.5  mm.    "  From 
M.   -pygmapAi.,  Sowb.,    it  differs  in  being  narrower  with  the  plications 
reaching  much  higher  on  the  pillar." 

SCALA    PLATYPLEURA,     VerCO. 

1906.     Scala   platypleura,    Verco,    T.R.S.,    S.A.,    vol.    xxx., 
p.  145,  pi.  4,  f.  6. 
Eab. — Western  Port. 

Observation. — Size  of  type:  Length,  5.;  width,  2.3  mm.  "It 
differs  from  S.  jukesiana,  Forbes,  in  the  more  rapid  increase  of 
its  whorls,  its  fewer  and  much  more  solid  varices,  which  also  run 
forward  and  doAvnwards  instead  of  backward." 


EuLiMA  viCTOR[AK,   Gatliflf  and  Gabriel. 

1914.      Eulima  victoriae,  Gatliff  and  Gabriel.     Antea  page. 
Hab. — Dredged  oft'  Wilson's  Promontory. 


Additi.O)iK  to  CatiUogue  of  Shells.  101 

ILEIOSTRACA  KILCUNDAE,  Gatlift'  Hiid  Gabriel. 

1914.     Leiostraca    kilcundae,    Gatliff    and    Gabriel.      Antea 
page  94. 
Hab. — In   shell  sand,   Kikunda. 

Leiostraca  stylifokmis,  Gatliff  and  Gabriel. 

1914.       Leiostraca    styliformis,  Gatliff   and    Gabriel.      Antea 
page  95. 
Hab. — Dredged  off  Wilson's  Promontory. 

Stylifer  auricula,   Hedley. 

1907.     Stilifer     auricula,     Hedley.       P.L.S.,     N.S.W.,    vol. 
xxxii.,  p.  505,  pi.  18,  f.  36. 
Hab. — Ocean  beach.  Point  Nepean. 
Observation. — Size  of  type:  Height,  2.15;  breadth,   1.65  mm. 

Genus  Cithna,  A.  Adams,   1863. 
•CiTHNA  ANGULATA,  Hedley. 

1907.     Cithna    angulata,    Hedley.      Rec.    Austr.    Mus.,    vol. 

vi.,  p.  291,  pi.  55,  f.  16. 
1912.     Cithna  angulata,  Hedley.     May,  P.R.S.,  Tas.,  p.  42. 
Hab. — Dredged  off  Wilson's.  Promontory. 
Observation. — Size  of  type:  Length,  2.9;  breadth,   1.85  mm. 

-Cyclostrema  KILCUNDAE,   Gatliff  and  Gabriel. 

1914.     Cyclostrema  kilcundae,   Gatliff  and   Gabriel.      Antea 
page   95. 
Hab. — In    shell   sand,    Kikunda. 

'Cyclostrema  vercoi,  Gatliff  and  Gabriel. 

1914.     Cyclostrema  vercoi,  Gatliff  and  Gabriel.    Antea  page  96. 
Hab. — Dredged  off  Wilson's  Promontory. 

RiSSOA    PERTRANSLUCIDA,    May. 

1912.      Rissoa   pertranslucida.      May,    P.R.S.,    Tas.,    p.    48, 
pi.  2.  f.  8. 
Hab. — Kilcunda. 

Observation. — Size  of  type:  Length,  2.;  breadth,  1.5  mm.  A 
■conoid,  white,  smooth,  transparent  shell.  Our  specimens  are  rather 
smaller. 


102  Gatlif  (thd  Gabriel : 

KissoA  (Amphithalamus)  eruatica,  May. 

1912.      Ainpliithalainus  erratica.   May.      Id.,   f.    7. 

Hah. — Di-edged  off  Wilson's  Promontory. 

Observation. — Size  of  type:  Length,  2.;  breadth.  1.3  mm.  Shell' 
elongately  pyramidal,  or  wedge-shaped,  white,  trlassv,  and  hyaline. 

Phasianotrochus  rutilus,  a.  Adam.s. 

1851.      Elenchus  rutilus,  A.  Adams.      P.Z.S.,  Lond.,  p.   171. 

1889.  Cantharidus     rutilus,     A.     Adams.        Tryon,     Man.. 

Conch.,  vol.  xi.,  p.  136,  pi.  34,  f.  8. 

Hah. — Western  Port. 

Observation. — This  species  has  been  locally  united  by  collectors 
with  P.  irisodontes,  Q.  and  G.,  but  it  is  of  a  broader  form.  The 
dimensions  of  the  type  are:  Height,   17;  breadth,  10.5  mm. 

EUCHELUS    VIXUMBILICATUS,    Tate. 

1893.     Euchelus  vix-umbilicatus,   Tate.      T.R.S.,   S.A.,   vol. 

xvii.,  pp.  196  and  201,  pi.  1.  f.  4. 

Hab. — Dredged  off  Phillip  Island,  Western  Port,  about  7  fathoms. 

Observation. — Size  of  type:    Height,    5.5;    basal   diameters,    5.5 

and   5   mm.      "  Shell    similar   to    E.    scahriusculus,    but   relatively 

broader,  and  the  whorls  more  convex." 

LucAPlNELLA  CRUCis,   Beddonie. 

1883.     Fissurella  crucis.  Beddome.     P.R.S.,  Tas.,  for  1882, 
p.   169. 

1890.  Glyphis  crucis.  Beddome.     Tryon,  Man.  Conch.,  vol. 

xii.,  p.  293. 
1901.      Fissurella  (Lucapinella)  crucis,    Beddome.      Tate   and 
May,  P.L.S.,  N.S.W.,  vol.  xxvi..  p.  408,  f.  11,  in. 
text. 
Hah.— Vovtsea,  Port  Phillip. 

Observation. — Size  of  type:  Length,  9;  latitude,  5;  altitude,  2' 
mm.  Tate  and  May  place  this  as  a  synonym  of  M.  niyrita, 
Sowerby,  a  species  that  it  strongly  resembles,  but  it  may  be  dis- 
tinguished therefrom  by  its  much  finer  sculpture,  the  undulating 
outline  of  the  outer  edge,  and  it  is  usually  marked  by  "two  red 
lines  on  the  back  forming  a  cross."  We  therefore  consider  it 
worthy  of  rank  as  a  species. 

M.  nigrita,  was  well  known  to  Mi-.  Beddonie.  We  have  an  ex- 
tensive series  from  other  States,  and  have  no  difTiculty  in  separating 
it  from   M.  crucis. 


AJ,nfnnis    In    ('afa.l(>;/ar   o/    S/>f4ls.  105 

AcANTIlOCliriKS    HLBUOSI'liATlS,    T(»rr. 

■     1912.      Aeanthoc'liites  rubrostrntus.  Ton-.     T.R.S ,    S.A.,voL 
xxxvi.,  p.    IGi),  pi.  7.  f.  7,  ii-f. 
}ia/>. — Dredged  5  fathoms  Liiiieburners  Cliaimel,    iieai'   Sofrento, 
Port  Phillip. 

Ohfttrvatioii . — Size  of  type:  Dried  specimen,  length  11;  breadth, 
6  mm.  Our  identification  has  been  confirmed  by  the  author;  the 
specimen  was  obtained  on  a  tunicate;  when  alive  it  has  a  swollen 
girdle  like  A.    speciosiis,  A.  Adams. 

CORBULA    PIXIDATA,    Tate. 

1887.      Corbula  pixida'ta,   Tate.      T.U.S.,   S.A.,  vol.    ix.,   for 

1885-G,  p.  177,  pi.  17,  f.  12a,  12b. 
181)6.      Corbtda  compressa,  Verco.    Id.,  vol.   xx.,  p.   230,   pi. 
8,  f.  2,  2a,  2b. 
Nnh. — In  about  40  fathoms,  off  Ninety  Mile  Beach. 
Ohserration.- — We  wrote  to  Dr.    Verco   about  the  validity  of  his 
species,   and   he   replied  :    "I  have  examined  type  and   co-types  of 
C.  pixidaf.n,  Tate.      They  are  identical  with  my   C   compressa,   show- 
ing  slight   variations   in   validity  of  concentric   sculpture,    and    in 
transverse  diameter.'' 

The  type  is  a  fossil  obtained  "  in  the  Turritella  clays  at  Blanche 
Point,  Aldinga,"  South  Australia. 

DosiNIA   VICTORIAN,   (jJatlifF  and   Gabriel. 

1914.      Dosinia  victoriae,  UatlifT  and  Gabriel.       Antea  page  96. 
Hah. — Dredged  in  Port  Phillip  and  Western  Port. 

Myodora  subalbida,   GatlifF  and  Gabriel. 

1914.      Myodora  subalbida,  Gatliff  and  Gabriel.     Antea  page  96. 
Hah. — Dredged  in  a])out  seven  fathoms,  Western  Port. 

Gknus  Foramelina,   Hedley,    1914. 
Foramkliva  exempla,   Hedley. 

1914. — Foramelina    exempla,    Hedley    Zool.,    Commonwealth 
trawler    "Endeavour,"    vol.    ii.,    part    2,    p.    71. 
pi.   11-12.  f.   6-8. 
Hah. — Trawled   in    100-250   fathoms,   south   from  Gabo  Island. 
Ohserratio/i. — Size   (.f   type:    Height.    120;    length,    130   mm.      A 
shell  somewhat  resembling  an  oyster,  with  a  lateral  notch,  perforat- 
ing the  right  valve  at  the  umbo. 


[Pboc.  Eoy.  Soc.  VicTOKiA,  27  (N.S.).  Pt.  L,  1914]. 

Ah'I'.    X. —  Victorian    Grwptolltes,    Part    IV.;     Some     Neiv   or 
Little-Knoivn  Species. 

By    T.    S.     HALL,    M.A.,     D.Sc. 
(Lecturer  in  Biology,  in  the  University  of  Melbourne). 

(With  Plates  XVII.  and  XVIII). 

[Eead  July  9th,  1914]. 

The  present  paper  contains  the  descriptions  of  some  new  species, 
as  well  as  of  some  that  it  seems  advisable  of  re-figure.  Most  of 
the  specimens  are  from  my  own  collection,  others  were  collected  by 
the  officers  of  the  Department  of  Mines  at  localities  on  which  I 
have  reported.  Two  fine  specimens  are  the  property  of  the  National 
Museum,  Melbourne,  and  others  were  found  by  Mr.  T.  S.  Hart,  at 
Daylesford. 

DiDYMOGRAPTUS    KXTENSUS    J.     Hall.  (PI       XVIL    Fig.     1). 

For  synonymy  see  S.  L.  Tornquist,  Lunds  Univ.,  Arsskrift,  Bd. 
37  (1901),  Afd.  2,  No.  5,  p.  14;  Elles  and  Wood,  Mon.  Brit.  Grap. 
Pt.  1  (1902),  p.  8;  Ruedemann.  Giap.  N.  York,  Pt.  1  (1904), 
p.    668. 

The  following  description  is  drawn  up  from  examples  from  Burn's 
Reef,  Ghewton  : — 

Branches  diverging  at  180°,  so  that  even  from  the  beginning 
they  are  in  the  same  straight  line.  Width  over  first  theca  0.5  mm. ; 
at  3  cm.  L5  nun.,  the  increase  in  width  being  gradual  and  con- 
tinuous. Thecae  10  in  1  cm.,  inclined  at  35°  to  40o.  Apertural 
angle  100°  to  llOo.  The  gradual  increase  in  the  width  of  the 
branches,  and  their  lying  in  one  straight  line,  aie  very  charac- 
teristic of  this  species. 

Horizon. — Castlemainian. 

DlDYMO(iRAPTUS    HKRDITUS,    11.    sp.       (PI.     XVIL,    Fig.    2). 

Branches  diverging  directly  at  180^,  somewhat  lax,  and  perhaps 
somewhat  reclined.  Width  at  fir.st  theca  1  niiii..  at  4  cm.  1.3  nun. 
Thecae  7  or  8  in  1  cm.,  incline*!  at  about  'M)^.  l)roadly  expand- 
ing,   so    that    the    denticles    arc    boldly    salient.      Apertui-al    mai-gin 


Vlcturlan   (JraptoUh's.  105 

.at  1150.  Sicula  narrow,  curved,  2  111111.  li)ii<j;-.  The  branches  are 
given  off  near  its  apex,  so  that  its  pointed  base  projects  beyond  the 
line  of  the  thecal  denticles,  jj^iving  the  hydrosome  a  very  charac- 
teristic appearance  in  this  region.  Tlie  small  number  of  thecae 
.and  the  salient  denticles  are  also  peculiai-. 

Locality/. — Daphne  Reef,  Lost  (iully.   Chewton. 

Horizon. — Highest  zone  of  Bendigonian. 


DiDYiMofJKAPTUs  GRACILIS  Tomquist.        (Pi.   XVIT.,  Fig.   3). 

Tornciui.st.      Acta   l^niv.   Lund.   vol.    26,    1890,   pt.   2,   No.    4, 

p.    17,  pi.   1,  figs.  9-12. 
Hall.   Geol.    Mag.    1899,   p.    448. 

Hydrosome  slender,  about  1.3  mm.  long,  and  very  narrow,  with 
ii  very  delicate  virgula,  which  is  traceable  for  about  0.7  mm. 
Branches  extending  at  I8OO,  and  apparently  arising  at  very  dif- 
ferent levels  from  the  sicula,  the  left  side  of  which  projects  as  an 
acute  tooth.  The  left  brancli  is  given  off  from  about  its  middle, 
the  right  branch  appears  To  arise  at  the  level  of  the  a})erture. 
Dorsal  edge  of  the  branch  covexly  swollen  opposite  the  middle  of 
.each  theca.  Thecae  7  in  1  cm.  ;  slender,  outer  edge  .straight  and 
facing  somewhat  inwards,  the  two  edges  forming  an  acute  denticle. 
Breadth  of  branch  about  0.3  mm.  ;  width  of  theca  at  aperture  about 
the  same.  The  virgula,  or  nema,  is  visible  in  some  specimens,  but 
not  in  the  specimen  figured. 

The  figured  specimen  is  from  Bendigo. 

Horizon. — I'pper  Bendigonian. 


DiDYMOfiRAPTUS    AUREUS   n.    sp.         (Pi.    XVIL,  Fig.    4). 

Hydrosome  resembling  D.  eoctensu.^  in  form.  Branches  given  (jff 
from  the  sicula  at  I8OO,  straight,  and  scarcely  increasing  in  width. 
Width  at  first  theca  L2  mm.,  at  2  cm.  it  is  1.5.  Tliecae  8  in 
1  cm.  almost  straight-sided,  inclined  at  30°,  apertural  angle  12()0. 
Sicula  2.2  mm.  long,  slender,  the  branches  arising  near  its  l)ase. 
The  species  differs  from  J),  crtensus  in  its  more  even  with,  and  in 
the  number  of  thecae  in  a  given  length. 

Zocrt/^^y.— Bendigo  (T.S.H.);  Bald  Hill,  Dromana  (D.  J. 
Mahony). 

Horizon. — Lower  Bendigonian. 


106  T.  S.  Hall: 

DiDYIMOGRAPTUS    LATENS    n.    Sp.  (PI.    XVII.,    Fig.    5). 

IlyJnjsonie  small.  The  branches  curve  towards  one  another 
dorsally,  and  become  horizontal  about  the  region  of  the  fourth 
theca,  the  gentle  curvature  of  the  dorsal  edge  of  the  branch  being 
very  characteristic.  Sicula  broad  and  stout,  about  1.5  mm.  long, 
and  slightly  more  across  the  aperture.  Tliecae  10  in  1  cm.,  very 
slightly  expanding,  i^^clined  at  25°,  ovei'lapping  half  their  length. 
Apertural  edge  normal  to  the  thecal  axis. 

I  have  previously  referred  to  this  species  as  B.  aff.  decens 
Tqt.'  ;  but  the  form  of  the  sicula  is  different.  It  differs  similarly  from 
D.  suecicus,  Tullb. 

Locality. — The  type  is  from  Diamond  Hill,  Bendigo,  about  200 
yards  east  of  State  school. 

Horizon. — Upper  and  Middle  Bendigonian.  It  is  common,  and 
apparently  always  small,  at  many  localities. 

DiDYMOfiKAPTUs   PROCUMBENS  n.  sp.       (PI.  XVII.  Figs.   6  and  7). 

Branches  arising  at  right  angles  to  the  sicula,  and  then  almost 
imperceptibly  reflexed.  Breadth  at  first  theca  0.75  mm.  ;  at  1  cm., 
1.5  mm.;  at  2  cm.,  1.75  mm.  Sicula  2  mm.  long,  0.5  mm.  broad, 
its  aperture  almost  hidden  by  the  first  thecae.  Thecae  narrow, 
straight-sided,  8  in  1  cm.,  inclined  at  about  2()o  near  the  sicula, 
increasing  to  a  little  over  30o  at  1.5  cm.  Apertural  margin  from 
lOOo  to  120O. 

In  the  Bendigo  and  Lower  Castlemaine  series  the  size  of  the 
hydrosome  never  seems  to  be  more  than  1  cm.  in  length,  whereas 
in  the  slates  of  Victoria  Gully,  Castlemaine,  just  after  the  dis- 
appearance of  Fhyllograptus  fj/pus,  a  form  occurs,  which  I  regard' 
as  this  species,  which  reaches  a  length  of  4  cm. 

Locality/  of  type. — Diamond  Hill,  Bendigo. 

Horizon. — Bendigonian  to  Middle  Castlemainian. 

DlDYMOCRAPTIS    ADAMANTINUS    U.    sp.  (PI.    XVII.,   Fig.    8). 

liiiinches  about  1.5  cm.  huig,  and  lather  slendei- ;  widtli  about 
0.7  itim.  near  the  proximal  end,  increasing  to  1  nmi.  at  al)out  1  cm. 
from  origin.  Branches  diverging  at  15()o  to  160^,  and  almost 
straight.      Thecae  10  or   11    in   1  cm.,  slightly  expanding,   overlap- 

1.     Geol.  Mas.,  1SS!>- 


Victorian  Gi-a'ptol'ites.  107 

ping  about  halt'  llu'ir  length;  inclined  at  .'{OO,  apL-ituial  nuiigin  at. 
lOOO.  Sicula  I..")  mm.  long,  slender;  the  tirst  theea  arising  near 
its  apex. 

The  speeies  is  closely  allied  to  J),  nicholsoni.  Lap.,  hut  differs  a. 
good  deal  in  the  proportions  of  the  proximal  part. 

Locdlif;/. — The  type  is  from  Diamond  Hill,  Bendigo. 

//r;?-/:o/;.— Bendigonian. 


DiDYMOCRAPTUS    MUNDUS    n.    sp.         (PI.    XVII.,    Fig.    9). 

Branches  diverging  at  130o  to  150^  from  the  sicula,  and  at  ahout 
the  tenth  theca.  running  nearly  horizontally,  and  from  tAvo  to" 
six  cm.  in  length.  Sicula  rather  narrow,  about  1.5  mm.  long. 
Thecae  9  in  1  cm.  near  the  sicula,  and  about  8  in  1  cm.  distally, 
broadly  expanding,  overlapping  about  one-half  their  length. 
Apertural  margin  normal  to  the  thecal  axis,  inclined  at  ISQo. 
Outer  extremity  forming  an  acute  denticle.  Width  of  branch  over 
first  theca  1  mm.,  and  at  5  cm.  from  origin  1.7  mm.  Details  in. 
sicular  region   not  discernible    in  any  of  my  specimens. 

The  species  is  closely  allied  to  D.  nitichis,  and  has  generally 
been  referred  to  it.  McCoy,  Etheridge  and  myself  have  recorded' 
D.  nitidiis  from  various  localities,  but  I  now  venture  to  think  in- 
correctly. 1  have  changed  my  mind  several  times  about  it,  but 
have  decided  that  a  new  name  is  advisable.  D.  mimdus  differs 
from  D.  nitidus  in  its  slightly  larger  sicula,  in  the  smaller  number" 
of  thecae,  and  in  their  lower  inclination.  From  D.  euodus  Lap 
it  difter.s  in  its  greater  width  proximally,  and  smaller  width  dis- 
tally. though  it  agrees  with  it  in  several  other  characters. 

Locality. — It  is  widely  distributed,  and  characteristic  of  the- 
Upper  Bendigonian,  and  Lower  and  Middle  zones  of  the  Castle- 
mainian. 

DiDYMOCiKAPTUS    DILATANS    n.    sp.       (PI.    XVII.,    Fig.     10). 

Branches  3  or  4  cm.  long,  rigid,  straight,  diverging  at  about 
150O,  gradually  widening.  Width  over  first  theca  0.5  mm.,  and 
at  25  mm.  1.0  mm.  Sicula  narrow,  length  about  1.3  mm.  Thecae- 
8  or  9  in  10  mm.,  inclined  at  about  20o,  slightly  expanding,  over- 
lapping one-third  to  half  their  length.  Aperture  normal  to  axis 
of  branch. 

This  species  lias  the  habit  of  D.  nicfiohoui .  and  1).  serratuhia, 
but    differs  in    the    marked    increase    in  width    of  the    branches,  and^ 


fj08  T.  ^.  Hall: 

tlieii  different  angle  of  divergence.  I  have  previously  recorded  it 
as  D.  cf.  tiifholsoiii .  It  is  associated  Avitli  TctrtK/raptns  pendens, 
'Goniograptiis  thureivni,  etc. 

Locrt/i^i/.— Daylesford  (T.  S.  Hart,  Loc.  No.  :}.  1908,  Type), 
J^endigo  (Min.  Dep.,  Nos.  4191,  etc.). 

Horizon . — l^ppcr   Bendigonian. 

DlDVMOGKAPTUS    BIFIDU.S    J.    Hall.  (PI.    XVII.,    Fig.     11). 

(rrdpfolithus  hifidus  J.   Hall.      Grap.   Quebec   Group,   p.    73, 

pi.    1.  fig.   16-18.   pi.   3.  fig.   9,   10. 
Did t/niotivapfus  hifidu-s  Elles  and  Wood.      Mon.   Brit.  Grap., 

1901,  p.  42,  pi.  4,  f.   la-lf. 
Didymofirapfits    hifidiii^    Ruedenianii.      (xrap.    N.    York.    pt. 
1,  p.   689. 
Branches   of   hydrosome    10  to   .30   mm.    long,   slightly   increasing 
in   width  for  the  greater   part  of  their  length.      Dorsal  margin   of 
branch  straight,  thecal  margin  curved.     Branches  diverging  usually 
-at  from  20°  to  30o,   but  the   angle  sometimes  greater   in   a  small 
variety.     Thecae   11  or  12  in   1  cm.,   inclined  at  from  30^  to  50^, 
four  times  as  long  as  wide,  free  for  nearly  half  their  length.     Aper- 
tural  margin   normal  to  the   axis   of  the   branch,    concave,    with    a 
slightly  mucronate  denticle. 

The  description  is  drawn  up  from  Victorian  specimens.  1  have 
previously  recorded  D.  nn/rrhisoni  from  Basin  Creek,  (V)imadai, 
but  am  of  opinion  that  the  single  specimen  on  which  the  iec<»-d  was 
founded  is  D.  hifidus,  and  that  I  have  not  seen  D.  miirrliiaoni . 

Locality. — Wattle  Gully,  etc.,  Castlemaine,  Basin  Crick.  Coi- 
inadai,  Tarilta,  Daylesford  (T.  S.  Hart),  Steiglitz,  Bendigo. 

Horizon. — Confined  to  the  lowest  zone  of  the  Castlemainiaii  and 
uppermost  zone  of  the  Bendigonian. 

T)idvmo<;haptus  caduceus  var.   manubkiatus  var.   nov.      (PI.   XVII., 
Figs,    12,    13). 

Diffeis  from  the  typical  form  by  the  immense  size  of  the  sicula, 
whieli  at  tlie  point  of  sei)aration  of  tlic  l)raiiches  is  as  wide  as  the 
braiicii  itself.  Tliccae  10  in  1  cm.  Blanches  diverging  at  1-300  to 
14(lo.  and  varying  from  2  to  3  mm.  in  width.  Tliei'c  is  consider- 
•abU-  linigc  ill  the  widtli  of  the  branehes.  ainl  tlie  angle  of  diver- 
-geiiee.  bul  the  great  size  of  the  sicula  is  reinarkahle.  Tlie  variety 
iis  citniinon   at  tlie  recorded   localities. 


Victorian  Graj^tolifes.  109' 

l.ocaliti/. — -(^tuari'v  in  hard  l>lue  slate,  one  mile  west  of  school  on 
road  from  Woodend  to  Macedon  ;  in  similar  rock  Steiglitz  District 
(Min.  Dept.). 

Associates. — Goniof/rapfKs  spp.,  0/icor/rapfiis  npsiloii,  D  . 
caducens  (large  typical  variety),  I),  forcijyiformis,  etc. 

Horizon. — Castlemainian. 

Oncogkaptus  n.   gen. 

Hydrosome  at  first  biserial,  but  later  dividing  into  two  uniserial 
branches.     Thecae  long, 'narrow  and  slightly  curved. 

The  form  of  the  genus  is  quite  different  from  that  of  any  other 
graptolite.  The  form  of  the  thecae  and  tlie  great  width  of  the 
branches  seem  to  remove  it  from  the  Dicranograptidae. 

As  regards  its  origin  it  may  be  pointed  out  that  it  resembles 
D.  caduceus  in  the  form  of  its  thecae.  Concrescence  of  the  branches 
of  this  species  for  a  certain  distance  would  produce  a  somewhat 
similar  form.  The  thecae  of  the  uniserial  part  appear  to  be 
opposite,  and  not  alternate,  but  though  I  have  had  a  very  large 
number  of  specimens  before  me,  none  show  the  details  of  structure 
very  clearly,  and  I  have  waited  in  vain  for  a  long  time  for  better 
material. 

Oncograptus  upsilon,  n,  sp.       (Pi.  XVII.,  Fig.   14). 

Uniserial  portion  about  12  mm.  long.  Breadth  at  level  of 
bifurcation  10  or  12  mm.  Width  of  uniserial  branch  about  6  mm. 
Length  of  branch  10  mm.  These  are  the  dimensions  of  the  type. 
but  the  measurements  vary  a  good  deal  in  other  specimens.  The 
whole  polypary  has  the  form  of  an  aiiowliead. 

Thecae  9  in  1  cm.  Near  the  proximal  end  of  the  hydrosome 
they  are  at  right  angles  to  the  axis,  and  probably  at  the  proximal 
end  itself  have  turned  through  an  angle  of  90°,  and  are  in  a  line 
with  the  axis  of  the  undivided  portion.  At  the  distal  end  of  the 
uniserial  branches  they  are  inclined  at  about  30o.  The  apertures 
are  trumpet  shaped,  and  a  long  recurved  denticle  is  present.  The 
sicula  has  not  been  seen.     The  axil  seems  united  by  a  membrane. 

0.  upsilon  is  the  type  of  the  genus. 

Locality. — Frederick  the  Great  Mine,  Sebastian  (Type).  Quarries 
north  and  west  of  Gisborne;  Steiglitz;  Castlemaine  (Harri.s) ; 
Yapeen  (Ba.  90,  Quartersheet  15  N.E.),  in  National  Museum,  pro- 
bably collected  by  Ulrich  in  1864;  Ingliston  (quarry  near  42,i  mile 
viaduct  on  railway.     A.  E.  Kitson).  • 

Horizon. — Castlemainian,  but  exact  position  uncertain. 


.'110 


T.  S.  Hall 


GONIOGKAPTUS   MACER   T.    S.    Hall.         (PI.  XVII.,    Fig.    15). 
(Geo/  Mag.,  i8gg,  p.  449,  ^figs.  g,  10). 

"  Hydrosoine  slender.  Primary  branches  about  1  nun.  in  length, 
;and  forming  an  angle  of  180°  with  each  other.  Secondary  branches 
diverging  at  about  90°  from  each  other,  and  then  bending  in  a 
zig-zag  manner  at  intervals  of  about  1.5  nun.,  and  giving  off  ter- 
tiary branches  from  the  salient  angle.  Tertiary  branches  from 
two  to  four  in  number.  After  giving  off  the  final  tertiary  branches 
.the  secondary  branches,  as  well  as  the  tertiaries,  may  reach  a 
length  of  30  to  -40  mm.,  and  are  fairly  rigid.  Sicula  about  1  mm. 
in  length,  slender,  and  very  slowly  tapering.  Thecae  8  or  9  in 
10  mm.,  overlapping  by  half  their  length.  Apertural  margin 
slightly  concave,  forming  an  angle  of  about  IIQO  with  the  axis  of 
the  branch.  Outer  margin  inclined  at  about  25°  to  the  axis  of  the 
branch,  gently  curving  towards  the  distal  extremity." 

Horizon. — Rare  in  the  Upper  Bendigonian  series,  common  in  the 
lower  zones  of  the  Castlemainian. 

There  is  a  fine  slab  in  the  collecticm  of  the  Mining  Department 
(No.  9587),  from  Bendigo  (71  Bo.),  which  shows  about  twenty 
examples  of  the  species.     I  give  a  new  figure  of  the  type. 


GoNiOfjRAPTUS  sPECiosus  n.  sp.  (PI.  XVIIL,  and  Text  Fig.  1). 
Hydrosome,  when  complete  about  35  cm.  in  diameter,  since  the 
distance  from  the  sicular  position  to  the  extremity  of  the  final 
branch  given  off  is  17.5  cm.  United  length  of  the  primary  branches 
("  funicle  "")  is  3  mm.  Length  of  longest  branch  measured  (a 
final  branch)  is   14.5  cm.     The  number  of  tei-tiary  branches  in  the 


Thecae   ■<  7. 


Victorian  Graptolitc^.  )  1 1 

type  averages  6  uii  each  side  of  tin'  t'dur  see()ii<l:ii-v  Iji'aiuhes.  or 
about  48  in  all.  Width  of  branch  to  tip  (jf  denticle  •>  nun.  Thecae 
8  or  9  in  10  nun.,  inclined  at  40°  to  50o.  Apertural  margin  at 
130O.  Thecae  slightly  cnrved,  and  expanded  with  a  somewhat 
mucronate  dt'nticle,  and  overlapping  about  one-half  their  length. 
The  inner  end  of  the  outer  wall  reaches  as  far  Ijack  as  the  denticle 
■of  the  next  theca  but  one.  The  type  specimen  is  in  the  National 
Museum.  Melbourne,  and  is  perhaps  the  most  beautiful  graptolite 
known,  though  in  point  of  size  it  is  sui-passed  by  a  few  other 
species,  especially  of  ('lonor/rapf us. 

Locdlitj/. — Slate-quarry  about  <S  miles  S.W.  of  Woodend.  I 
have  a  less  perfect  specimen  from  the  same  locality.  A  fragment 
of  the  same  species  was  collected  at  an  unknown  locality  at  Bendigo. 

Horizon. — Castlemainian,  but  exact  position  uncertain.  On  the 
same  slab  as  the  type  occur  Goniograptus  fhureaui,  Bidyniorirapt kk 
■caduceus,  D.  caduceus  var.  manuhriatus,  Phi/llograj}tns  cf.  fijpKS, 
■Oncograptus  upsiloti,   and   apparently   a   Trignnograptus,   etc. 

The  type  was  found  by  Mr.  Neil  Johnson,  and  presented  to  the 
National  Museum  in    1889. 

GoNiOfiRAPTOS  CRiNiTUS  n.   sp.        (Text  Figs.   2  and  3). 

This  species  is  doubtfully  referred  to  Goniograpfus  as  a  com- 
plete hydrosome  is  unknown.  The  specimens  found  are  usually 
in  the  form  of  stout  branches,  which  are  bent  in  a  zig-zag,  the 
angular  bending  being  more  pronounced  towards  the  proxinuil 
•end.  At  times  two  or  three  branches  are  associated,  as  in  the 
figured  specimen.  The  angles  of  the  zig-zag  are  from  two  to  four 
mm.  apart,  and  from  the  salient  angles  are  given  off  fine,  theca- 
bearing  branches,  which  are  unbranched,  and  fairly  rigid.  These 
may  be  100  mm.  long  or  more.  The  main  branches  are  about  0.75 
mm.  in  diameter,  and  do  not  appear  to  be  theca -bearing.  The 
finest  branches  are  about  0.5  mm.  in  diameter,  measured  across 
the  aperture  of  the  theca.  The  thecae  are  raiely  preserved,  and 
when  not  visible  the  branch  is  about  0.25  mm.  wide,  and  about 
as  rigid  as  a  liorsehair.  The  thecae  number  11  in  10  mm.,  and  are 
straight-sided,  inclined  at  about  10°,  aperture  normal  to  their 
length.  At  first  sight  this  species  might  be  mistaken  for  a  T/iam- 
nograptus,  and  I  formerly  recorded  it  as  such.  The  ultimate 
branches  are.  however,  theca-bearing,  and  are  much  shorter  than 
those  figured  by  James  Hall.  Thamnogropfus  does  not  occur  in 
the  Bendigonian  or  Castlemainian  series. 


]  !-J 


T.  S.  Hall 


Prj.d 


G.  crinitus,  thecae    x  7. 


G.  crinitus 


As  stated  above,  I  am  not  sure  that  tlie  reference  to  Goniograptus 
is  correct,  l)ut  I  hesitate  to  form  a  new  genus  for  its  reception,  till 
a  complete  hydrosome  is  found.  The  form  of  the  thecae  is  much 
more  primitive  than  that  of  the  typical  species  of  Goriiograpfiis. 

Horizon. — Upper  Bendigonian  and  Lower  Castlemainian,  but 
commoner   in   the   loriner. 


Vietoriitii    Graptolites. 


\\?^ 


GoMOGUAPTUs   LAXUs  II.   sji.        (Text  Fig.   4). 

Hydi'osuine  slender.  In  the  type  two  branches  only  are  pre- 
served, and  these  are  in  the  one  straight  line,  and  reach  a  length  of 
35  mm.  Ultimate  branches  arising  at  a  distance  of  2  mm.  apart,^ 
and  mav  be  more  than  25  mm.  long.  No  thecae  are  visible. 


G    laxus   X    1. 

The  species  differs  from  G.  thureaui  in  the  more  slender  and  lax 
habit  of  the  ultimate  branches.  (Coll.  Min.  Dept.,  No.  8360.)  The 
counterpart  No.  8358  has  been  preserved. 

Locality  of  type. — Bendigo  (M.D.  38  Bo.  Near  Garden  Gully 
Mine). 

Honzoti. — Bendigonian   Upper  zones. 

TKTRAfiRAPTUS   HARTI    n.    sp.         (Text   Figs.    5,    6). 

Hydrosome  slender  and  rigid,  with  the  habit  of  T.  quadri- 
hrachiafus.  Sicula  unknown.  Primary  branches  in  same  straight 
line.  Secondary  branches  given  off  after  first  theca  of  primary 
branch,  diverging  at  about  OQO.  slender,  fairly  rigid.  Width  of 
secondary  branch  to  tip  of  denticle  at  2  mm.  from  origin,  0.5 
mm.;  at  35  mm.  it  is  1  mm.  Thecae  8  in  1  cm.,  narrow,  very 
slightly  expanding,  inclined  at  15^  to  axis  of  branch.  Aperture 
norma   to  axis  of  theca.      Overlap  slightly  over  one-third. 


T.  harti,  type,    x    1. 


T.  harti,  cotype,    x    l. 


114  T.  S.  HiOJ: 

Lorr///7//.— Beudigo  (M.  Dep.  79  Bo..  No.  9750,  Type);  Davles- 
ford,  Junction  of  Jim  Crow  and  Spring  Ci-eeks,  T.  S.  Hart  ;  Dayles- 
ford.  Min.  Dep.,  No.   12.820. 

lIor/:o/t. — Hiijrhest   Bendig^onian. 


TKTIlAaHAPTllS    VVrnTKLAWl    H.    .sp.         (PI.    XVII.,    Fig.    ]G). 

Hydrosome  slender.  Primary  branches  at  180°,  dividing  at  the 
fifth  theca.  Length  of  branch,  about  4.5  mm.  Secondaries  diverg- 
ing at  90°,  faii-ly  rigid.  Width  of  Itranclies  nearly  0.5  mm.  Sicula 
long  and  narrow,  length  1  mm.,  ])readth  0.2  mm.  Thecae  10  in 
1  cm.,  indenting  the  branch  about  half  its  width,  inclined  at  15^, 
very  slightly  expanding.     Apertui'e  normal  to  the  axis  of  the  theca. 

The  great  length  of  the  "  funicle,''  slightly  over  1  cm.,  and  the 
slender  nature  of  the  branches  are  well  marked  cliaracters. 

Locality. — Bendigo,  Sheepshea*!  Line  (7!)  lio. ),  Mining  De})art- 
ment.  No.  9756  Type.  Counterpart,  No.  9701.  Associated  with 
T.  serra,  (  =  T.   amii),    Go?)i(/rapf'i/s  laxux,  Didf/ntof/rapfns  cac/vceus. 

Horizon . — Upper   Bendigonian. 

MONOURAPTUS   APLINI   n.    sp,         (PI.    XV II.,    Fig.    17). 

Very  minute,  curved  towards  the  ventral  side.  The  most  com- 
plete specimens  from  an  open  U-shaped  figure.  Thecae  18-20  in 
10  mm.  ;  apparently  coiled  in  a  rounded  mass  and  i^pening  later- 
ally.    Sicula  about  1  ram.  long  and  narrow. 

This  is  tlie  commonest  graptolite  in  the  beds  just  below  the 
Keilor  bridge.  The  section  was  discovered  by  Aplin  in  1854.  and 
was  the  first  known  graptolite  locality  in  Australia.  Unfortunately, 
the  fauna  is  in  a  very  bad  state  of  preservation,  or  sixty  years 
would  not  have  elapsed  before  any  species  were  described  from  the 
locality. 

M.  aplini  is  closely  allied  to  M.  exigaits,  Nicholson,  and  .1/. 
nodifer,  Tornquist,  but  its  minute  size  separates  it  from  them. 

Locality. — Keilor,  Aplin 's  section. 

Horizon. — Silurian,    Melbournian. 

MoNOGKAPTUs  TUKRICULATUS   Baiiande.        (PI.  XVII. ,    l^'igs.    18,    19). 

The  conical  spiral  foi'm.  and  the  produced  aperturjvl  angle  of 
this  species  are  unmistakable.  The  only  two  specimens  I  liave  seen 
are  on  the  same  slab,   and   are  those  figured.      The  specimens   are 


Victorian  Graptolites.  115 

in   the  geological   collection    of   the   University   of    Melbourne,    and 
are  in  a  very  imperfect  state  of  preservation. 
Horizon. — Silurian,    Melbournian. 


MoNOGRAPTUS   PRIODON  Bronn.        (PI.  XVII.,   Fig.   20). 

Hydrosome  straight,  rigid,  nearly  2.5  mm.  wide.  Thecae  9  in 
10  nun.,  sigmoidally  curved  and  tapering  to  the  aperture.  The 
■distal  third  lient  back  to  form  a  strong  hook  like  portion.  Overlap 
about   two-thirds. 

The  description  is  drawn  up  from  a  fragment,  the  only  one  I 
have  seen.  It  is  in  relief,  but  merely  as  a  cast.  The  matrix  is  a 
whitish,  fine-grained  micaceous  sandstone. 

Locality. — Macclesfield. 

Horizon. — Probably  Melbournian. 

Triaenograptus  neglectus  n.  g.   et  n.  sp.        (Text  Fig.   7). 

Hydrosome  probably  circular  in  outline,  and  slightly  concave 
near  the  middle,  as  in  some  species  of  Dictyonema.  Branches 
radiating  from  the  centre.  These  branches  give  off  a  pair  of  lateral 
branches,  one  on  each  side  of  the  main  branch.  The  three  branches 
thus  formed  produce  a  trident-like  structure,  which  suggests  the 
generic  name.  The  laterals  from  one  branch  usually  unite  with 
corresponding  laterals  given  off  at  the  same  level  l)y  a  neighbour- 
ing branch,  and  then  run  on  as  a  new  single  branch.  This' in  its 
turn  gives  off  lateral  branches,  which  behave  in  the  same  way. 
Diameter  of  the  type.  -^5  cm.  Width  of  branches,  1.5  mm.  Inter- 
spaces or  fenestrae,  two  or  three  times  as  long  as  wide.  Thecae,  5 
•or  6  in  10  mm.,  only  outer  and  apertural  margins  visible.  Tliey 
•appear  to  be  straight-sided,  and  indent  the  branch  for  a  fifth  of 
its  diameter,  and  appear  to  be  inclined  at  about  20o,  but  are  so 
imperfectly  shown,  that  I  do  not  attempt  to  figure  them. 

The  symmetrical  method  of  branching  is  peculiar,  and  unlike 
tliat  of  any  other  graptolite  known  to  me.  Though  apparently 
allied  to  THcfyonema,  it  seems  worthy  of  generic  rank. 

The  present  specimen  was  found  stored  away  in  the  National 
Museum,  and  the  only  record  of  its  finding  is  contained  in  a  news- 
paper cutting  pasted  on  it.  This  states  that  a  fossil,  presumably 
the  present  one,  was  found  in  the  Paving  Company's  Quarry, 
Barker's  Creek.  This  can  only  refer,  I  think,  to  a  long-deserted 
•quarry  on  the  right  bank  of  the  creek,   nearly  opposite  the  late 


116 


T.  S.  Hall: 


f'S-1 


T.  neglectus    x   ^. 

Major  Ryland's  house,  and  just  below  the  Chinamen's  Gardens.. 
In  my  examination  of  this  quarry  many  years  ago,  the  only 
graptolites  I  found  were  Tetragraptus  serra,  Dichor/raptus  octo- 
hrachiatus  and  Didf/mograpfus  caduceus  (large  variety).  From' 
the  character  of  tlie  last-named  species,  I  should  judge  the  horizon 
to  be  well  up  in  the  Castleniaine  series,  and  the  geographical  posi- 


Victorian   Gruptolites.  117 

tion  ut'  the  (luairy  would  support  this  vieAv.  The  only  other 
graptolite  un  the  present  slab  besides  Triaemograptus  is  a  very 
indistinct  example  of  apparently  Didymograptus  extensus. 

Locality. — Barker's  Creek  Slate  Quarry,  North  Castlemaine. 
Mr.  W.  J.  Harris  has  found  a  couple  of  examples  in  badly  cleaved 
slate  from  about  the  middle  of  the  Castlemaine  series,  and  to  the 
south  of  the  town.  I  have  a  few  fragments,  which  long  puzzled  me 
from  similar  horizons  in  the  same  district,  which  I  am  now  able  to 
recognise  as  this  species. 

Horizon. — Middle  and  Upper  Castlemaine  series,  but  exact  posi- 
tion not  vet  definitelv  known. 


EXPLANATION    OF    PLATES. 
Plate  XVIL 

Fig.  L — Didymograptus  extensus  J.  Hall.  Burn's  Reef,  Castle- 
maine. 

Fig.  2. — Didymograptus  perditus  n.sp.  Daphne  Reef,  Lost  Gully 
Chewton.     (Type.) 

Fig.   3. — Didymograptus  gracilis  Tornquist.     Bendigo. 

Fig.    4. — Didymograptus  aureus  n.sp.     Bendigo.      (Type.) 

Fig.  5. — Didymograptus  latens  n.sp.  Diamond  Hill,  Bendigo. 
(Type.) 

Fig.  6. — Didymograptus  procumhetis  n.sp.  Diamond  Hill,  Ben- 
digo.    (Type.) 

Fig.  7. — Didymograptus  procumhens  n.sp.  Diamond  Hill,  Ben- 
digo.     (Co-type.) 

Fig.  8. — Didymograptvs  admanantivus  n.sp.  Diamond  Hill,  Ben- 
digo.    (Type.) 

Fig.    9. — Didymograptus  mitndus  n.sp.     Bendigo.     (Type.) 

Fig.  10. — Didymograptus  dilatans  n.sp.  Daylesford  (Sailors' 
Creek).      T.    S.    Hart.      (Type.) 

Fig.  U.— Didymograptus  hifidus  J.  Hall.  Wattle  Gully,  Castle- 
maine. 

Fig.  12. — Didymograptus  caduceus  var.  mauuhriatus  var.  nov. 
West  of  Macedon.     (Type.) 

Fig.  13. — Didymograptus  caduceus  var.  manuhriatus  var.  nov. 
Macphers^pn's  Creek,  Steiglitz  District.     (Co-type.) 

Fig.  14. — Oncograptus  upsilon  n.  gen.  et  n.sp.  Frederick  the  Great 
Mine,  Sebastian.     (Type.) 


118  T.  S.  Hall:     Victorian  Graptoiitei^. 

Fig.    15. — GouiograjJtux  inaciv  T.  S.  Hall.     (Type  retigurecl.) 

Fig.    16. — TetragrapfiiK     irhifelawi     n.sp.        Bendigo,      Sheepshead 

line.     (Type.) 
Fig.    17. — Monofirapf tix    a pli n i     n.sp.        Keilor     (Aplin's    section). 

(Type.)      X    :]. 
Fig.    18. — Monugnipfii-'i    fNrriciiIatii.<    Barrande.       Keilor    (Aplin's- 

section). 
Fig.    11). — MoNograptvK    fur-ricidatuit    Barrande.        Keilor     (Aplin's 

section). 
Fig.    20. — Moiiocfrcrptus  priodoii    Br-onn.      Macclesfield. 

[Note. — All  the  figures  on   this  plate   are    x     H.   except   fig.    17,. 
which   is    X    3.) 

Plate  XVITI. 
Gonigraptit9  speciosits  n.sp.     West  of  Macedon.     (Type.)- 


LIST  OF  INSET  BLOCKS. 

Fig.    1. — Goniograptus  speciosus  n.sp.     Thecae   x    7. 
Fig.    2. — Goniograptus  crinitus  n.sp.      x    1. 
Fig.    3. — Goniograptus  crinitus  n.sp.     Thecae    x    7. 
Fig.   4. — Goniograptus  laxus  n.sp.      x    1. 
Fig.   5. — Tetragraptus  harti  n.sp.    x    t. 
Fig.   Q. — Tetragiaptus  harti  n.sp.    x    1. 

Fig.   7. — Triaenograptus  neglectus  n.gen.  et  n.sp.    x   i.      (Traced    fromi 
a  photograph.) 


Proc.  E.S.  Victoria,  1914.       Plate  XVII. 


Proc.  U.S.  Victoria,  19U.       Plate  XVIII. 


[Pkoc.   Roy.   Sor.   Victoria,  27  (N.S.).    ^''Vht    I.,   I914.J. 

Art  XI. — The  Pctrolixjn  II  ml  Mini  III)  Geoloi/i/  of  the   Country 
near  Qiireiisfoivn. 

Bx    NORMAN    H.    JUNNER,    B.Sc. 

(Wyselaskie  Scholar  in  Geoloc^.y,  University  of  Melbourne,  1913;    1851  Scholar 
in  Geology,  Imperial  OoUeye  of  Science,  London  S.W.,  1914). 

(With  Plate  XIX). 

[Head  9th  July,   1914. j 

Contents. 

1.  Introduction  and  Previous  Literature. 

2.  General  Geoloj^y  : — 

(a)  Silurian  sediments. 

(b)  Quartz  diorite,  Yow  Yow. 

(c)  Alteration  of  the  diorite. 

(d)  Quartz  porphyry,  One  Tree  Hill. 

3.  The  Caledonia  Gobi  Field  :— 

(a)  History  and  production. 

(b)  One  Tree  Hill. 

(c)  Panton  Hills  (Oram's  Reef). 

(d)  Yow  Vow. 

(e)  Alluvial. 

(f )  Future  possibilities,  secondary  enrichment,  etc. 

4.  Summary  and  Conclusions. 

1.  — Introduction    and    Previous    Literature. 

The  following  contribution  is  descriptive  of  certain  features  in 
the  geology  of  portion  of  the  Parish  of  Queenstown.  Unfortunately, 
the  field-work  was  not  completed,  owing  to  the  transference  of  the 
writer  to  England,  and  as  a  result  no  geological  map  of  the  area 
has  l)een  prepared  liy  him.  Tlie  cliief  purpose  of  the  paper  is  to 
present  the  results  of  a  study  of  the  chemical  and  petrological  fea- 
tures and  metasomatic  alteration  of  an  hitherto  undescribed  in- 
trusion of  (juartz  diorite  near  Queenstown.  Furtlier,  attention  is 
drawn  to  the  former  richness  and  future  possibilities  of  an  almost 
forgotten  goldfield.  Previous  references  to  the  geology  of  this  area 
are  scant,  and  are  of  no  great  importance.     The  following  papers 


120  N.  R.  Junner: 

dealing  with  the  area  are  chiefly  concerned  with  the  mining  geohjgy, 
and  general  mining  features,  and  very  little  space  in  them  is 
devoted  to  purely  geological  questions. 

(1)  1855-56.     A.  R.  C.  Selwyn.— "  Repoit  on  the  Geological 

Structure  of  the  Colony  of  Victoria,  the  Basin  of  the 
Yarra,  etc."  Votes  and  Proc.  Leg.  Council,  Victoria, 
vol.   ii.,  pt.   1. 

(2)  1889.      J.   Stirling.—"  Report  on  the  Mining  and  Pros- 

pecting Operations  in  the  Gippsland  and  Castlemaine 
Districts."  Appendix  H,  Quart.  Reports  of  the  Mining 
Surveyors  and  Registrars  of  Victoria. 

(3)  1894.      R.   A.    ¥.    Murray. — "  Report   on   the  Auriferous 

Country  in  the  Neighbourhood  of  Queenstown."     Prog. 

Rep.  Vict.  Geol.  Surv..  No.  viii.,  pp.  67,  68. 
<4)   1894.      D.     B.     Walker.—"  j^^port    ..n    Neglected    Gold- 

iields."     Spec.  Rep.  Dep.  Mines,  Victoria. 
<5)   1895.      J.   Stirling  ct  0.   A.   L.   Whitelaw.— "  Reports  on 

Rapid   Surveys  of   the   Goldfields.    Pa)'ishes   of   Wanan- 

dyte,  Nillumbik,  Greensborough,  and  Queenstown  (with 

Map)."     Spec.  Rep.  Mines  Dept.,  Victoria. 
(6)   1899.      H.  S.  Whitelaw. — "  Antimony  Ores  in  Victoria." 

Prog.  Rep.  Vict.  Geol.  Surv.,  No.  X. 

2.— General  Geology. 

A. — Silurian   Sediiuents. 

These  are  the  northern  extension  of  the  same  folded  sei-ies  of 
sandstones,  shales,  and  gritty  beds  that  occur  near  Warrandyte  and 
Diamond  Creek,  and  with  the  exception  of  the  igneous  rocks  near 
Yow  Yow  and  One  Tree  Hill,  they  cover  the  whole  of  the  area 
described  in  this  paper.  The  strike  of  these  beds  is  consistently 
east  of  north,  varying  from  north  IQO  east  to  north  5()o  east.  As 
in  the  sediments  of  the  country  to  the  south  near  Wai-randyte  and 
Diamond  Creek,  fossils  are  relatively  .scarce,  and  the  only  ones 
found  by  the  present  writer  were  two  specimens  of  Chonetes  allied 
to  Chonetes  melbournensis,  wliich  latter  form  is  restricted  to  the 
Melbournian  division  of  the  Silurian.  These  fossils  were  discovered 
in  black,  sandy,  occasionally  gritty  shales  from  the  nmllock-tip 
of  a  shaft  on  the  Victoria  line  of  reef.  One  Tree  Hill.  Selwyn  has 
recorded  fossils  similar  to  those  occurring  in  the  gritty  beds  near 
Warrandyte,  from  Watson's  Creek  about  six  miles  north  of  War  ran- 


Pcti-ologi/   aiul    Grohx/;/    of    QurcnsfAnrit    Didrlct. 


121 


■dyte.  None  of  tliesr  fmiiis  linve  been  dt'scril)e«l.  and  tlierefore  they 
ai^ord  no  c-hie  To  tlic  pi-ocise  aire  of  these  beds.  In  t}n«  absence, 
tlien'fnre.  of  nioic  detailed  palaeontolo^ncal  work  in  this  area, 
nothinf;  definite  ean  l)e  said  at  j. resent  respecting  the  age  of  these 
sediments. 

On  stratigraphical  grounds,  in  the  assumed  absence  of  major 
fauhing  and  inversion,  the  relative  stiatigraphical  position  of  the 
beds  near  QueenstoAvn  can  be  fairly  well  gauged  from  sections 
afforded  by  two  traverses,  one  along  the  creek  road  from  Hurst's 
Bridge  to  Queenstown.  and  the  other  along  the  road  from  Kangaroo 
•Grounds  through  Christmas  Hills  to  Yarra  Glen.  Considering  in 
•  detail  the  first  section,  the  beds  near  Hurst's  Bridge  show  consider- 
able lithological  similarity  to  those  at  Diamond  Creek,  and,  further, 
the  Templestowe  anticline,  which  is  so  marked  a  feature  of  Diamond 
Creek,  is  seen  in  a  i-ailway  (.utting  immediately  south  of  the 
Hurst's  Bridge  railway  station.  Traversing  eastwards  from 
Hurst's  Bridge,  the  strata  dip  consistently  east,  at  an  average 
.angle  of  about  450,  uiitil  about  a  mile  and  a  quarter  beyond  Cottle's 
Bridge. 1  where  the  BuUeen  syncline  crosses  the  road  section.  This 
fold,  at  this  point,  is  not  the  important  feature  that  it  is  to  the 
south  near  Research  and  the  Yarra  River.-  The  strata  near  the 
axis  of  the  fold  are  much  steeper  than  they  are  further  south,  and 
soon  give  place  to  east-dipping  beds  with  an  anticline  between. 
This  anticline  is  the  northerly  continuation  of  a  fold,  not  named, 
but  shown  on  a  map  accompanying  the  author's  report  on  the  Dia- 
mand  Creek  area.'  Continuing  east,  the  beds  appear  to  dip  east 
until  close  to  Queenstown  township,  where  a  westerly  dip  is  pre- 
sent. It  is  evident,  from  this  section,  that  the  strata  near  Queens- 
.town  are  stratigraphically  much  superior  to  the  beds  of  the  Temple- 
:stowe  anticline  near  Hurst's  Bridge. 

The  Warrandyte  anticline,  devoid  of  its  minor  folds,  crosses 
Watson's  Creek  at  a  point  near  to  where  the  creek  changes  from  a 
X.E.-S.W.  course  to  one  nearly  east  and  Avest.  The  fold  con- 
tinues in  a  north-easterly  direction  to  One  Tree  Hill,  where  the 
structure  is  anticlinal,  and  the  beds  are  lithologically  similar  to 
those  of  Warrandyte.  Sections  along  the  road  from  Kangaroo 
'(4ii)und  to  Yarra  Glen  show  that  the  predominant  dip  is  an  easterly 


1  Vide,  Parish  plans  of  (;reensl>oroiij;li  and  l^ueenstow  n  for  this  and  other  local 
■r'mu:  ill  tliis  paper. 

2  Vide,  J.  T.  Jutson,  "The  Structure  and  General  Geology  of  the  Warrandyte  Goldfield  and 
adjacent  Country."     Proc.  Roy.  Soc.  Victoria,  vol.  xxiii.  (n.s.),  pt.  ii.,  p.  523,  1910. 

3  Proc.  Roy.  Soc.  Victoria,  vol.  wv.  (n.s.),  pt.  ii.,  1912 


122  .    AL  R.  J tinner: 

one.  after  cro.ssiii|JC  the  Warruudyte  antieline,  and  that  tlie  strata: 
of  this  fold  are  ^tratigraphically  much  inferior  to  the  Yeringian: 
beds  near  Yarra  Glen.  A  general  interpretation  of  the  structure, 
therefore,  indicates  that  the  beds  near  Queenstown  are  superior  to> 
those  of  the  Templestowe  anticline,  which  have  been  shown  by  the 
author  in  a  previous  papei-  to  l)c  pi'obably  Melbournian  or  oldei'  in 
age,i  and  to  be  inferior  to  the  Yeringian  strata  occuring  to  the 
east  of  this  area.  Recapitulating,  the  age  of  these  beds  near 
Queenstown  may  l)e  regarded  tentatively,  in  the  absence  of  furtlier 
palaeontological  evidence,  as  either  Melbournian  or  Yeringian  ; 
possibly  both  series  are  present  in  the  area  described. 


B. — QiKtrt:  Diorife,  Yoir  Yoir. 

On  tile  sjMir  sepai-ating  Salter's  (tuUv  from  Yow  Yow  Gully,  and 
about  one  and  a-half  miles  east  fi-om  Queenstown,  a  rather  tough 
bluish-coloured,  holocrystallinc  )-ock,  composed  chiefly  of  hornblende 
and  felspai-,  is  seen  to  outcrop.  About  the  surface,  scattered,  ex- 
foliated boulders  are  present  in  places,  but  more  frequently,  and 
especially  near  the  noithevn  and  southern  limits  of  this  rock,  it  is 
decomposed  to  a  lirownish  coloured  granular  mass.  The  depth  of 
surface  decomposition  varies,  extending  in  places  to  over  150  feet. 

The  intrusion  is  roughly  elliptical  in  plan  and  the  walls,  wliere 
examination  was  possible,  appeared  to  conform  approximately  in 
strike  and  dip  with  the  surrounding  sti-ata.  On  the  surface,  the 
sediments  in  juxtai>ositioii  with  the  intrusion  exhibit  very  little 
alteiiiton,  and,  in  fact,  the  sediments  near  Queenstcnvn  township 
and  Yow  Yow  Gully  away  from  the  intrusion,  ai'e  much  more 
indurated.  Aeconlim:  to  the  District  Mining  Surveyor,'-  ;i  tunnel 
driven  in  1S60  fi-om  Salter's  Gully,  passed  through  a  band  of 
hard  altered  sandstone,  rcsendiling  basalt,  l)efoi-e  reaching  the 
diorite.  Tliis  points  undoubtedly  to  hoi'nfels.  l)ut  apparently  the 
occurrence  of  this  lock  in  proximity  to  the  dioiite.  is  exceptional. 
In  its  a])proximate  conformity  Avith  the  strata,  alisence  of  marked 
contact  alteration,  petrological  and  chemical  charactei'istics.  and 
associated  auiifcrous  (piart/,  veins,  the  intrusion  is  very  closely 
allied  to  the  so-calle.l   "  dyke  bulges  "   of  the  Wood's  Point   district. 

CIk  iinviil  h'chifioHx. — A  chemical  analysis  of  a  tyj)ical  specimen 
of   the   diorite    fioiii   the   Caledonia    Mine,    Yow    Vow,    was    made    by 


1   0)>.  cit.  p.  S17. 

•J    \'i(k-,  .Milling  Sniv  t-v  ors'  Hi-ports,  ISIiO. 


Fetrolo;/;/   and    (leoUxjii    of   (Jveci.^toU'H    J)isfricf.         123' 

the  writer  at  tlir  Iniprrial  ('(.lU-s;e  of  Seieme.  London.  For  (uii-- 
poses  of  comparison.  t\v(.  vury  similar  analyses  of  ofher  Victorian 
diorites    are  appended. 

II.  III. 

49.65  52.03 

16.7a  23.57 

0.31  1.60 

8.99  6.90' 

5.88  5.39 

7.87  7.80 

0.80  1.34 

3.10  2.31 

2.50  1.2? 

0.14  0.26. 
1.08 
0.04 
0.14 

2.81  n.dt 
n.det>. 
NiO  tr. 

100.04.       99.60. 
2.91        2.855 

A  me  ricaii    Classifiaitivn. 

Maguiatic  Name  Bandose  tfes.sose  Hessose 

near  Hessose 

I.  Quartz  Diorite,  Caledonia  Mine,  Queenstown.  Analyst,  N.  R„ 
Junner. 

II.  Quartz  Diorite,  Morning  Star  Dyke,  Wood's  Rnnt.  Analyst,. 
N.  R.  Junner. 

III.  Quartz  Diorite,  Dargo.      A.  W.  Howitt.^ 

The  chemical  analysis  of  the  Queenstown  rock  confirms  its  micro- 
scopical determination  as  a  quartz  diorite.  The  marked  excess  of 
soda  over  potash,  and  the  relatively  high  percentage  of  lime,  finds 
expression  in  the  predominance  of  soda  lime  felspais  over  jjotasb 
felspars.  The  high  percentages  of  water  and  cail)on  dioxide  are 
due  to  the  presence  of  chlorite  and  calcite.  and  do  not  signify  that 
the  rock  has  suffered  weathering,  as  these  minei-als  are  regarded  as- 
being    formed    immediately    after    the    consolidation    of    the    rock_ 

1    Vidr,  Proc.  Roy.  Soc.  Viotoii.a,  1SS7. 


SiO., 

I. 

52.53 

A1.A 

18.78 

FeP, 

1.52 

Feb 

6.60 

MgO 

3.02 

CaO 

7.21 

K.,0 

1.73 

Na.,0 

2.54 

H.36  + 

2  24 

H.3O- 

0.53 

co., 

0.39 

P.O, 

0.32 

MnO 

0.14 

TiO., 

2.16 

s 

n.det 

(NiCo)O 

str.  tr 

99.71. 

Sp.  Gr 

.       2.81 

J  24  ^V.  M.  Janner : 

Further,  in  weathered  roeks.  ferric  oxide  always  predominates  ovei 
-ferrous  oxide,  whilst  in  the  Queenstown  rock  the  reverse  is  the  case. 
Petrology. — All  specimens  examined  (some  of  them  from  the 
-Caledonia  mine  coming  from  greater  depths  than  200  feet)  showed 
considera])le  alteration,  resulting  in  the  formation  of  such  secon- 
dary minerals  as  chlorite,  epidote,  sericite,  carbonates,  leucoxene, 
-pyrrhotite,  and  iron  pyrites.  In  hand-specimen,  the  rock  is  even- 
grained,  and  consists  of  about  equal  quantities  of  salic  and  femic 
minerals,  chiefly  hornblende  and  felspar.  Quartz  is  not  visible 
macroscopically.  Microscopically  it  is  a  holocrystalline,  medium 
and  even-grained  rock,  consisting  essentially  of  brown  hornblende, 
felspar  (both  orthoclase  and  plagioclase),  quartz,  ilmenite  apatite, 
and  the  above-mentioned  secondary  minerals. 

The  hornblende  is  the  brown  variety,  which  is  so  cliaiacteristic 
'of  the  igneous  rocks  of  the  Walhalla,  Wood's  Point  gold  belt.  In 
most  sections,  little  of  it  remains,  as  it  has  been  extensively  changed 
to  chlorite  and  epidote.  It  is  usually  hypidiomorphic  and  often 
includes  ilmenite  and  felspar,  showing  that  it  consolidated  later 
than  these  minerals.  Tremolitic  outgrowths  in  optical  continuity 
with  the  brown  hornblende  are  occasionally  present.  Twinning, 
-with  twin  and  composition  plane  parallel  to  the  orthopinacoid,  is 
not  uncounnon.  It  is  markedly  pleochroic,  exhibiting  the  following 
■colour  scheme : — 

X   light  yellow  brown. 

Y  fairly   dark  brown. 

Z  very  dark  brown. 

and  Z>Y>X  as  usual. 

Plagioclase  (Recurs  as  beautifully  zoned  crystals,  sliowing  the 
usual  albite  twinning,  and  occasionally  twinned  accoiding  to  the 
("arlsbad  and  Pericline  laws.  Certain  sections  of  zoned  plagioclase 
show  no  signs  of  the  albite  lamellae,  but  exhiliit  basal  cleavage,  and 
are  therefore  cut  approximately  parallel  to  010.  One  such  section 
gave  an  extinction  angle  of-16o  from  the  001  cleavage  for  the 
central  core,  and  -t-  21^  from  the  same  cleavage  fur  tlie  clear  outer 
zone,  indicating  a  kernel  of  labradorite  (Ab  An  ),  and  an  outer 
zone  of  albite.  Almost  invariably  the  refractive  index  of  the  clear 
exterior  zone  of  the  felspar  is  less  than  that  of  (}uartz.  jiroving  it 
to  be  albite.  Symmetrical  extinction  angles,  from  the  all)ite 
lamellae,  range  as  high  as  430  for  the  cores,  showing  phigioclase 
near  Bytownite.  A  few  phenocrysts  of  untwinned  oi'  sini])ly  twinned 
kaolinised    felspai-,    having    a    refractive    index    less    than    that    of 


Pf'troloc/f/  and    Geologt/    of   Queenstowii    J)isfrirf.        125' 

quartz,  are  ortliDe-lasf.  Cukulating-  the  percentage  of  t'elspai's  fi-oju 
the  clieniical  analysis,  aceorilin<j:  to  the  xVnierican  ntethod,  we  get 
the  following  result : — 

Orthoclase,    10.01%. 

Albite,  21.48%. 

Aiiorthite.   :n.69%. 

Quartz  is  interstitial,  and  oeeurs  in  irregular  shaped,  pellucid 
grains  characterised  by  fairly  abundant  Huid  inclusions  containing 
bubbles,  llnienite  is  farly  common,  and  is  present  in  skeletal  and 
malformed  crystals,  occasionally  showing  hexagonal  outlines.  It  is- 
associated  frequently  with  its  replacement  product,  leucoxene,  and 
the  triangular  parting  is  often  rendered  very  evident  by  relict 
ilmenite  bars  surrounded  by  leucoxene.  Extraction  of  any  magnetic 
particles  from  the  powdered  rock  by  a  weak  l;>ar  magnet,  showed 
that  only  an  inappreciable  amount  of  magnetite  was  present. 

The  accessory  minerals  include  apatite,  and  zircon  ;  the  latter 
in  chloritic  areas  is  often  surrounded  by  pleochroic  haloes. 

Of  the  secondary  minerals,  chlorite  is  the  most  abundant,  and  is 
usually  intimately  .associated  with  hornblende  and  epidote.  It  is 
undoubtedly  secondary  after  hornblende  in  nearly  all  cases,  and '. 
occasionally  idiomorphic  outlines  of  the  latter  mineral  are  preserved' 
in  the  chlorite  pseudomorphs.  The  chlorite  is  of  the  variety  pen- 
nine,  giving  ultra  blue  polarisation  colours.  It  is  decidedly  pleo- 
chroic X — Y,  apple  green.  Z.  yellow,  and  is  microspherulitic  in 
part.  Slightly  yellow  coloured  grains  of  epidote.  referable  to 
pistacite.  almost  invariably  accompany  the  chlorite  derived  from 
the  hornblende.  Some  of  the  epidote  is  present  as  radial  aggregates. 
Fibres  of  a  colourless  mineral,  having  a  refractive  index  between 
that  of  chlorite  and  epidote.  and  exhibiting  very  high  polarisation 
colours,  are  probably  calcite.  It  appears  the  most  of  the  mag- 
nesia, and  part  of  the  iron  of  the  original  hornblende,,  have  gone 
to  form  chlorite,  and  the  lime  and  the  other  portion  of  the  iron, 
with  some  alumina  and  water,  have  yielded  epidote.  Carbonate 
occurs  generally  in  massive  cleaved,  and  twinned  plates,  filling 
interstices  between  the  quartz  and  the  felsj^ar.  It  does  not  occur 
replacing  these  minerals  or  the  hornblende  to  any  marked  extent. 
Notew-orthy  is  the  fact  that  it  differs  very  markedly  from  the  meta- 
somatic  granular  and  dusty  carbonate  so  commonly  developed  in 
these  rocks,  as  a  result  of  hydrothermal  vein  alteration.  A  little 
sericite  replaces  plagioclase,  especially  along  cleavage  planes.  In 
all  sections  examined  a  little  sulphide  is  present,  shoAving  marked 


?126  lY.  E.  Junner: 

preference  for  areas  of  ihnenite  and  undoubtedly  replacing  the 
latter  mineral  in  many  cases.  The  sulphide  is  easily  recognised  as 
pyrrhotite  by  its  lighter  colour  than  ordinary  pyrites  in  reflected 
light,  and  by  its  irregular  outlines.  It  is  proved  without  doubt 
by  extracting  the  magnetic  minerals  from  the  powdered  rock,  and 
either  examining  the  separated  material  under  a  microscope,  or  by 
adding  a  little  hydrochloric  acid  to  the  separated  grains,  when 
stilphuretted  hydrogen  is  readily  detected.  A  very  little  iron 
pyrit-is  also  accompanied  the  pyrrhotite  thus  separated.  Pyrrhotite 
chough  present  in  practically  all  sections,  is  most  common  in  peg- 
matitic  veins  intersecting  the  diorite. 

Acid  Df/A-es  in  Diorite. — Numerous  small  aplitic  and  pegmatitic 

•dykes  intersect  the  diorite.  The  pegmatites,  in  general,  consist 
cliiefly  of  large  hornblende  prisms  and  colourless  felspar,  whilst 
in  the  aplite  dykes,  hornblende  is  rare  or  absent,  and  microscopic 
sections  show  that  orthoclase  predominates  over  plagioclase.  Speci- 
men No.  120,  Caledonia  Mine,  is  typical  of  these  aplites.  The  hand 
specimen  of  the  rock  is  of  a  light  yellowish  colour.  Abundant 
stibnite  and  pyrites  are  visil)le,  disseminated  throughout  the  speci- 
men. Microscopically,  it  is  a  fairly  even-grained,  holocrystalline 
rock,  with  granitoid  texture,  and  composed  of  the  following 
minerals  : — Quartz,  felspar,  muscovite.  iron  and  arsenical  pyrites, 
stibnite,  carbonate  and  sericite.  No  femic  minerals  are  present, 
and  quartz  is  in  slight  excess  of  the  total  felspar.  Orthoclase, 
generally  untwinned  and  greatly  kaolinised,  preponderates  over 
plagioclase,  which  is  also  much  weathered.  Sections  of  plagioclase 
occasionally  show  intersecting  lamellar  twinning  according  to  the 
albite  and  pericline  laws.  Zoning  is  rare,  and  in  nearly  all  sec- 
tions, the  mean  refractive  index  of  the  plagioclase,  determined  by 
the  Becke  method,  is  less  than  that  of  quartz,  indicating  oligoclase 

■  or  albite.  Maximum  extinction  angles  of  2()0  from  the  all)ite  twin 
planes,  prove  albite.  A  few  rectangular  sections  of  muscovite  with 
the  usual  separated  leucoxene  or  rutile.  iei»iesent,  without  doubt. 
hornblende  or  biotite  in  the  original  rock.  Most  of  the  mica,  how- 
ever, is  of  the  sericitic  type  and  occius  in  the  usual  aggregates  of 
foils,  sometimes  arranged  i-adially  and  often  leplacing  felspar. 
Veinlets  of  carbonate  and  quartz  cai-rying  stibnite.  travei-se  the 
rock.  Acicular  crystals  of  stibnite,  together  with  a  little  ordinary 
and  arsenical  pyrites,  also  occur  promiscuously  distiilmted 
throughout  the  section.  Certain  miscroscopic  veins  of  quaitz,  which 
intersect  plagioclase  crystals,   are  seoi  to  grade  insensilily  into  the 


Peti'oUxjif    tiiid    <7<'(>lo<ji/    of    (Jiweiisioirji     D'uslrici .        127 

piiiiiarv  ((uartz  <j:iaiiis  of  the  I'ouk,  and  are  tliei'el'ore  also  primary. 

Conijiarisou  of  (Jueeiti^toini  DIoiite  iritlt  the  MortiiiKj  Star  Dior/tc, 
U'liod'.-:  I'oinf. — The  eheiiiioal  analyses  of  these  rueks  show  elose 
siniilai-ities.  From  the  relative  pereentage  of  the  alkalies,  we  should 
expect  a  greater  j)i-opoi'tion  of  oi'thoelase  in  tlie  Queenstown  diorite 
than  in  the  Morning  Star  roek,  and  microscopieal  investigation 
•eonlirnis  this  I)elief.  Tlie  high  percentage  of  water  in  both  analyses 
is  expressed  hy  the  relative  abundance  of  chlorite  after  horn])lende. 
The  higher  jiereentages  of  ferrous  oxide  and  titanium  dioxide  in 
tlie  Moi-ning  Star  I'ock  indicate  relatively  more  hornblende  and 
ilmenite,  than  in  the  (^»ueenstown  lock. 

Mineralogieally  tlie  rocks  closely  reseml)le  one  another.  Especially 
•  characteristic  is  the  occurrence  of  brown  hornblende  in  each  of 
them.  Zoned  felspars  are  not  usually  piesent  in  the  Morning  Star 
■  dioi-ite.  and  epidote  is  uncommon.  Micropegmatite,  which  is 
•characteristic  of  the  Wood's  Point  rock,  is  only  present  in  i)etrma- 
titic  veins  at  Queen stown. 


C. — Alterotion  of  fhf  Diorite. 

Three  types  of  alteration  are  recognisable. 

I.  A  regional  propylitic  alteration  during,  or  immediately  after, 
the  consolidation  of  the  ]-ock,  at  relatively  high  temperature  and 
pressure,  resulting  in  the  formation  of  chlorite,  epidote,  leucoxene, 
-carbonate,  pyrrhotite,   and  a  little  sericite. 

II.  Hydrothermal  alteration  near  the  vein  Avails  at  mucli  lower 
■temperature  and  pressure,  resulting  in  extensive  cpriVitisation  and 
■carbonation,  and  in  the  disappearance  of  the  femic  minerals, 
hornblende,  chlorite,  and  pyrrhotite^  and  their  replacement  by 
muscovite,  carbonates,  and  pyrites. 

III.  Surface  decomposition  by  present-day  vadose  solutions. 
Kaolinisatiou  is  i-eferable  to  the  action  of  these  solutions. 

I.  On  most  mining  fields  where  ore  deposits  occur  in  igneous 
rocks,  a  regional  propylitic  alteration  of  the  country  rock  can  be 
recognised  in  addition  to  the  hydrothei^mal  alteration  near .  the 
veins,  but  differences  of  opinion  exist  as  to  the  cause  of  this  altera- 
tion, Propylitisationi  of  the  andesites  at  Tonopah,  Nevada,  has 
been  ascribed  by  Spurr2  to  the  vein-forming  waters  filtei-ing  thi-ough 

1  Propylitisation  is  here  used  in  the  sense  defined  by  Vogt,  "  Genesis  of  Ore  deposits,"  1901,  and 
liindgren,  "Mineral  Deposits,"  p.  446,  1913,  and  not  in  the  restricted  sense  of  other  writers. 

2  Geolo<,'y  of  the  Tonopah  Mining  District,  Nevada,  U.S.G.S.,  P.P.,  No.  42,  1905. 


128  K  B.  Junner: 

the  rocks.  According  to  Spurr,  there  are  transitions  between  the- 
propylitic  and  sericitic  facies.  According  to  Kirk,i  the  chloritic 
and  sericitic  phases 'of  the  alteration  of  the  Butte  Granite  merge- 
into  each  other  very  gradually.  Stelzner  and  Bergeat^  and  Schu- 
maclier^  consider  the  propylitisation  of  the  Tertiary  andesites  of 
TraUvSylvania  to  be  independent  of  the  vein  solutions  and  much 
earlier,  and  Finlayson^  comes  to  similar  conclusions  with  respect  tO' 
the  alteration  of  the  andesites  of  the  Hauraki  goldfield. 

The  author's  study  of  the  auriferous  diorites  of  the  Wood's  Point 
gold  belt,  and  also  of  the  related  rock  from  Queenstown,  has  con- 
vinced him  that  the  regional  propylitic  alteration  undergone  1)y 
these  rocks  is  independent  of  the  vein  solutions  and  that  the  effects 
of  the  latter  are  superimposed  upon  the  propylitisation.  The- 
propylitic  alteration  is  regional,  and  no  relation  appears  to  exist 
between  tlie  amounts  of  chlorite,  epidote  and  pyrrhotite,  and  the 
proximity  t(j  a  vein  fissure.  These  minerals  are  just  as  abundant 
20  feet  away  from  the  vein  fissure  as  they  are  two  feet  away  from 
it.  Certainly  no  transition  occurs  between  the  two  types  of  altera- 
tion such  as  (Spurr  has  described  at  Tonapah.''  Furtlier,  the 
minerals  developed  in  the  propylitic  facies  are  generally  charac- 
teristic of  high  temperature  deposits.  Both  clilorite  (Pennine)  and 
epidote  are  common  in  the  crystalline  schists,  and  contact  meta- 
morphic  ore  deposits,  which  are  formed  under  considerable  pressure 
and  at  relatively  high  temperatures.  The  vein  solutions  w^ere 
undoubtedly  moderately  strong  alkaline  charbonate  and  sulphide 
solutions,  and  both  the  above  minerals  appear  to  be  unstable  in 
the  presence  of  such. 

Significance  of  Pyrrhotite. — Pyrrhotite  is  usually  regarded  as  a 
high  temperature  mineral.  Its  occurrence  as  a  primary  mineral  in 
certain  basic  rcoks,  and  its  association  with  such  undoubted  high 
temperature  minerals  as  garnet  and  magnetite  in  contact  meta- 
morphic  ore  deposits,  clearly  support  this  view.  At  Queenstown, 
small  quantities  of  pyrrhotite  occur  distributed  through  the  propy- 
litised  diorite.  It  is  closely  associated  with  the  ilmenite  and 
leucoxene,  and  in  places  occurs  disseminated  through  these  minerals. 
In  one  section,   narrow  parallel  bars  of  ilmenite  traverse  an   irre- 

1  "  Conditions  of  Mineralisation  in  the  Copper  Veins  at  Butte,  Montana."  Economic  Geology, 
vol.  vii.,  1912. 

■2   "DieErzlagerstatten."     1905-1906. 

;{  Zeitschr,  f.  prakt.  Geol.,  pp.  1-8:"),  1912. 

4  "  Problems  in  the  Geology  of  the  Hauraki  Ctoldfielils.  New  Zealand."  Economic  Geology,  vol 
iv.,  No.  7,  1909, 

.S  Op.  Cit.  p.  210. 


Pctrologn  atid    Geolojjy    of    Qacnii^totCH.  129 

gular  shapL^d  grain  of  pyi'rliotite,  suggesting  an  intergrowtli  of  the 
two  niinerals.  However,  ai'ound  the  t'dges  of  the  pyrrhotite.  some 
leucoxene  is  seen,  strongly  suggesting  that  the  pyrrhotite  is  re- 
placing the  leucoxene,  and  that  tlie  bars  ai'e  relics  of  a  former 
ihuenite  grain.  The  iron,  set  free  from  the  ilmenite  in  the  change 
to  leucoxene,  lias  apparently  united  with  sulphur  from  hydrogen 
sulphide  in  the  gases  or  solutions,  causing  pi'opylitisation,  and 
pyrrhotite  has  formed. 

Of  late,  much  attention  has  been  devoted  in  the  laboratory  to 
the  study  of  the  iron  sulphides,  and  we  are  particularly  indebted 
to  American  chemists  for  valuable  syntheses  of  them.  Of  parti- 
cular interest  are  the  results  of  Allen,  Crenshaw,  and  Johnston  at 
the  Carnegie  Institute,  Wasliington.i  They  have  artificially  pre- 
pared pyrrhotite  by  the  direct  union  of  iron  and  sulphur  at  700o, 
and  have  shown  that  pyrite  dissociates  into  pyrrhotite  and  sulphur 
in  an  atmosphere  of  sulphuretted  hydrogen,  at  temperatures  above 
5650.  The  action  is  represented  by  the  following  equation  : — 
FeS2^FeS(S)„  +  (l-n)s 
Pyrite  Pyrrhotite  Sulphur. 
Above  565°  the  forward  action  proceeds,  and  below  565^  pyrrhotite, 
in  an  atmosphere  of  hydrogen  sulphide,  passes  into  pyrites.  The 
formation  of  pyrrhotite,  and  not  pyrites  in  the  Queenstown  diorite, 
apparently  by  the  attack  of  hydrogen  sulphide  on  the  ilmenite, 
should  therefore  have  taken  place  at  high  temperature;  however, 
not  necessarily  as  high  as  565, o  as  the  dissociation  temperature  is 
dependent  on  the  pressure.  Pyrrhotite  has  also  been  foi-med  synthe- 
tically by  these  authors  in  an  acid  environment,  at  temperatures 
between  80o  and  225, o  but  the  syntheses  ai-e  undoubtedly  inap- 
plicable in  our  case,  since  the  solutions  causing  propylitisation 
must  have  been  alkaline. 

Recapitulating,  it  is  seen  that  tlie  minerals  formed  during  the 
propylitisation  of  the  diorite,  are,  in  their  geological  occurrence, 
usually  fairly  high  temperature  minerals.  Microscopic  and  field 
evidence  show  that  the  propylitisation  and  sericitisation  are  inde- 
pendent, and  that  the  effects  of  the  latter  alteration  are  superim- 
posed upon  those  of  the  former.  The  chemical  analysis  of  the  rock 
shows,  further,  that  the  gases  or  solutions  causing  the  alteration 
must  have  contained  water,  carbon  dioxide,  and  sulphides.  The 
composition   of   the   original    rock    does   not   appear   to   have   been 


1    "The  Mineral  Sulphides  of  Iron."    Anier.  Jour.  Sci.,  4th  sen,  vol.  xxxii.,  1911. 

10 


130  ^V    it*.  Jmincr: 

greatly  changed  as  a  result  of  the  alteration.  It  appears  very 
likely  that  the  niineralisers  had  their  origin  in  the  cooling  niaguia, 
and  that  their  escape  was  made  possible  Ijy  the  relief  of  pressure 
during  the  inti-usion  of  the  diorite.  Tlie  gases  thus  expelled  from 
the  magma  would  permeate  the  solidifying  rock,  and  cause  such 
alteration  as  has  been  described. 

II.  Hydrothermal  alteration  adjoining  vein  fissures.  Narrow 
veins  of  auriferous  cjuartz,  generally  only  an  inch  or  two  in  width, 
but  as  much  as  twelve  inches  wide  in  places,  traverse  the  diorite. 
On  either  side  of  these  veins,  the  coimtry  rock  has  been  bleache(l 
for  varying  distances,  generally  less  than  one  foot,  and  rendered 
nuich  finer  grained.  Considerable  development  of  pyritt-  and 
arsenopyrite  together  with  some  stil)nite,  has  taken  place  in  close 
pi-oximity  to  the  quartz  veins.  These  sulphides  are  most  abundant 
along  the  vein  wall,  and  decrease  in  amount  outwards.  That  the 
bleaching  is  a  result  of  the  alteration  of  the  diorite  by  the  vein 
.solutions,  is  certain. 

Specimen  No.  140,  Caledonia  Mine,  Yow  Yow,  shows  an  inter- 
mediate stage  in  the  alteration.  Macroscopically,  it  is  a  fairly  even 
grained  rock,  greenish  in  colour,  and  showing  fairly  abundant 
pyrites  scattered  through  it.  A  section  of  the  rock  examined  micro- 
.scopically  shows  no  hornblende  or  felspar.  The  hornblende  remain- 
ing from  the  propylitic  alteration  has  not  been  first  changed  to 
chlorite,  and  then  to  carbonates  and  muscovite,  but  apparently  it 
has  in  part  passed  directly  to  carbonate,  and  in  part  to  a  whitish 
or  yellowish,  cloudy,  nondescript  material.  Idiomorphic  outlines 
of  hornblende  are  occasionally  preserved  in  this  material.  The 
carbonate  is  dolomitic  or  ankeritic  in  character,  as  dilute  hydro- 
chloric acid  has  very  little  action  on  the  powdered  rock  in  the  cold. 
Chemical  analyses  of  similar  carbonates  developed  in  the  diorites 
near  Wood's  Point  have  shown  them  to  be  varying  compounds  of 
the  carbonates  of  lime,  magnesia,  ferrous  oxide,  and  manganous 
oxide.  Chlorite  still  remains  in  considerable  amount,  Init  epidote 
has  disappeared,  having  apparently  succumbed  to  the  action  of  the 
carbonate  solutions.  Local  patches  of  carbonate  in  the  chlorite  are 
closely  allied  in  shape  to  the  epidote  grains  in  the  propylitic  rock, 
and  undoubtedly  replace  the  latter  mineral.  Some  of  the  chlorite 
is  beginning  to  })ass  to  colourless  mica  (muscovite),  and  carbonates 
have  been  intruded  along  the  cleavage  planes,  and  replace  the 
chlorite  in  part.  The  felspars  have  been  almost  completely  re- 
placed    by     closely     packed     sericite     flakes.        Under    high    powers, 


Petrology  and    Geology    of  Queenstown. 


131 


tliese  ureas  of  sericite  are  resolved  into  a  mixture  of  quartz  and 
sericite.  Carbonates  are  notably  present  in  only  very  small  amounts 
in  the  altered  felspar. i  The  extent  to  which  sericitisation  has  taken 
place  in  the  wall  rock,  is  shown  by  an  analysis  made  for  the  alkalies. 
Thus  :— Na^O  0.21%. 
K^b  3.45%. 
It  will  be  lemembered  that  in  the  original  rock,  soda  was  in  marked 
excess  of  potash,  and  hence  it  must  have  been  leached  out  during 
the  alteration  whilst  tlie  potash  was  fixed  and  probably  more  intro- 
duced. It  is  often  assumed  that  the  waters  causing  such  sericitisa- 
tion were  relatively  rich  in  salts  of  potassum  and  contained  little 
sodium  salts.  I  see  no  reason,  however,  for  this  assumption,-  and 
since  the  vein  solutions  have  passed  through  the  diorite  on  their 
way  to  the  surface  they  should  presumably  become  richer  in  soda, 
and  correspondingly  weaker  in  potash,  owing  to  sericitisation,  as 
they  approaclied  the  surface.  Hence,  even  if  the  original  uncon- 
taminated  waters  were  richer  in  potash  salts  than  soda  salts,  tlie 
relative  proportions  of  these  constituents  should  soon  become  re- 
versed. Probably  the  correct  explanation  is  that  under  the  conditions 
of  temperature,  pressure  and  concentration,  existing  at  the  time  of 
the  alteration,  no  stable  sodium  mineral  could  form.  Paragonite 
and  albite,  for  instance,  are  usually  high  temperature  minerals, 
found  in  the  crystalline  schists  and  contact  metamorphic  deposits, 
and  are  very  rarely  formed  under  conditions  of  hydrothermal  vein 
alteration.  The  potash  mica  corresponding  to  paragonite — namely, 
sericite,  however,  has  a  wide  range  of  existence,  occurring  exten- 
sively in  the  crystalline  schists,  and  almost  invariably  in  rocks 
affected  by  vein  solutions,  and  in  the  presence  of  the  latte)-.  it 
appears  to  be  particularly  stable.  A  very  little  pyrrhotite  remains, 
but  iron  pyrites  has  increased  considerably  in  amount.  It  is  scat- 
tered through  the  rock,  and  shoAvs  no  preference  for  regions  where 
chlorite  and  ilmenite  are  most  common.  Quartz  has  suffered  very 
little  change  as  a  result  of  these  alterations.  Its  peculiar  parallel 
cracks  simulating  a  cleavage,  still  remain.  On  close  examination 
under  the  high  power,  these  cracks  are  seen  to  be  not  regular  and 
straight,  but  to  be  occasionally  curved  and  branching.  Apatite,  in 
general,  is  little  changed.  Occasionally  it  is  fractured  and  replaced 
by  carbonates.     Ilmenite  is  "almost  entirely  replaced  by  leucoxene. 

1  Rosenbasch,  "  Eleniente  der  Gesteinlehre,"  1898,  pp.  70-71,  states  that  ealcite,  sericite,  and 
•quartz,  are  the  products  of  the  attack  of  carbonated  waters  on  plagioclase  felspars. 

I   It  might  be  susf'ested  since  sericitisation  is  accompanied  by  partial  dehydration  of  the  rock, 
that  the  ^•ein  solutions  contained  very  little  water  ;  yet  presumably  this  is  not  so. 

10a 


132  N'.  R.  J  miner  .- 

Specimen  No.  138,  illustrates  the  extremely  altered  wall  rock  near" 
the  veins.  In  hand-sj^ecimen,  it  is  a  greenish  coloured  fine-grained 
rock,  greatly  impregnated  with  pyrites,  and  veined  by  quartz 
carrying  a  little  stibnite  and  carbonate.  None  of  the  original 
minerals  of  the  diorite  are  recognisable.  Microscopically  chlorite 
has  entirely  disappeared,  and  is  replaced  by  massive  mu,scovite, 
giving  a  biaxial  figure  and  having  a  fairly  wide  axial  angle. 
Streaks  of  carbonate  have  formed  along  the  cleavage  planes.  Iron 
pyrites,  arsenical  pyrites,  and  stibnite  are  all  abundant  in  the 
altered  wall  rock.  The  iron  pyrites  is  often  present  in  irregular 
shaped  grains,  and  when  idiomorphic  its  form  is  usually  the  cube, 
or  a  combination  of  the  cube  and  octahedron,  and  more  rarely,  the- 
pyritohedron.  Arsenical  pyrites  is  more  abundant  than  the  iron 
pyrites  close  to  the  veins,  and  is  readily  distingushed  from  the 
latter  mineral  by  its  silvery  lustre  in  reflected  light,  and  by  its 
idiomorphic  outlines.  Common  forms  are  combinations  of  the  unit 
prism  and  the  brachydome,  giving  wedge-shaped  and  hexagonal 
sections.  Cruciform  twinning,  which  is  so  common  in  the  arseno- 
pyritei  from  the  Diamond  Creek  Dyke,  is  only  rarely  seen  in  the 
present  case.  Stibnite  occurs  singly  in  prismatic  and  acicular 
crystals  and  as  a  network  of  these  fibres.  When  massive,  it  is  silver- 
grey  in  reflected  light.  Some  of  this  material,  appearing  metallic 
in  reflected  light,  is  deep  red  in  transmitted  light. 2  It  is  most 
common  in  the  vein  quartz,  and  in  the  quartz  grains  adjoining 
the  vein  walL  These  three  sulphides,  although  independently 
crystallised,  are  undoubtedly  essentially  contemporaneous  in  origin. 
Quartz  still  remains  clear,  but  the  grains  are  embayed,  and  partly 
replaced  by  carbonates.  The  ilmenite  has  entirely  disappeared,  and 
very  little  leucoxene  remains  anywhere  in  the  section.  Little 
pyrites,  either  the  iron  variety  or  the  arsenical  type,  is  present 
in  the  vein  quartz,  and  the  assumption  is  that  the  ilmenite  and 
the  chlorite  have  supplied  the  necessary  iron  to  form  the  pyrites 
so  abundant  in  the  wall  rock. 

Summary  of  the  effects  of  the  vein  solutions  : — In  the  absence  of 
a  chemical  analysis  of  the  wall  rock,  no  definite  conclusions  can  be 
drawn  with  regard  to  chemical  migrations  of  the  original  consti- 


1  In  the  author's  petrologlcal  description  of  the  Diamond  Creek  dyke,  arseiiopyrite  i.s  mentioned' 
as  being  possibly  present.  Further  examination,  however,  shows  it  to  be  abundant  near  the  vein 
fissures.     Vide,  N.  R.  Junner,  Proo.  Koy.  Soc.  Victoria,  vol.  xxv..  p.  339,  1912. 

2  Professor  MiKj^e  was  able  to  prove  that  stibnite  showed  straijfht  extinction  by  examination 
of  very  thin  flakes  of  the  mineral  between  crossed  nicols  in  direct  sunlight.  Vide  Neues.  Jahrb. 
Min.,  vol.  i.,  p.  12,  1898. 


I'l'fro/o;/!/   (1 11(1    (u'oloijii    of  Qvft'iisfoivn.  \'.Vi 

tuonts  of  tilt'  rock.  Tlic  luicToscope,  however,  reveals  the  fact  thut 
sericite,  cai  hoiiates.  and  jtyritcs  ai'e  the  ultiuiiite  products  of  the 
original  minerals.  It  is  evident  that  the  solutions  causing  the 
alteration  must  have  been  rich  in  alkaline  carbonates  and  sulphides. 
That  they  also  contained  arsenic  and  antimony,  is  apparent  from 
the  abundance  of  arsenopyrite  and  stibnite  neai-  the  veins.  The 
solutions  undoubtedly  were  acjueous,  yet  the  rock  has  probably 
suffered  dehydration,  which  is  explained  by  the  disappearance  of 
■chlorite  containing  about  13%  water,  and  its  i-eplacement  by  seri- 
cite containing  only  about  4%.  A  chemical  analysis,  of  the  wall 
rock  adjoining  a  quai-tz  vein  in  the  Morning  Star  diorite,  showed 
that  the  percentage  of  total  water  was  2.64  in  the  propylitised  rock, 
.and  only  0.96  in  the  sericitised  and  carbonated  facies.  The  efficacy 
•of  moderately  strong  alkaline  carbonate  solu^tions  to  dissolve  rock- 
forming  minerals  is  well  known.  Therefore,  the  extreme  metaso- 
matic  alteration  undergone  In-  the  original  rock  is  easily  explained 
as  a  result  of  the  attack  of  such  solutions.  Gold  is  known  to  be 
soluble  in  alkaline  sulphide  solutions,  and  it  was  probably  in  such 
.solutions  that  the  gold  in  the  veins  at  Yow  Yow  was  introduced. 

D. — Quartz  l'orph\ir\j,  One  Tree  Hill. 

The  eight  inch  to  one  mile  geological  map,  published  by  the  Vic- 
torian Mines  Department,  shows  an  outcrop  of  porphyrite  at 
Smyth's  Gully.  The  author  is  not  aware  of  any  such  rock  there, 
and  apparently  the  rock  intended  to  be  shown  is  the  One  Tree  Hill 
porphyry.  This  rock  is  seen  on  the  surface,  at  the  summit  of  One 
Tree  Hill,  adjoining  the  Buck  line  of  reef,  and  is  here  decomposed 
to  a  mass  of  kaolin  containing  abundant  quartz  grains.  It  can 
also  be  seen  on  the  track  leading  from  the  hill  to  the  battery  in 
Fern  Tree  Gully,  and  a  tunnel  driven  from  this  gully  into  the  hill 
to  cut  the  Buck  and  Swedish  reef  intersected  it.  Where  seen  on  the 
surface,  the  lock  appears  to  l)e  a  dyke,i  but  the  relations  as  revealed 
by  the  tunnel  section,  although  not  very  clear,  seem  more  suggestive 
of  an  intrusive  pipe.  The  rock  is  greatly  brecciated  in  places,  and 
xenoliths  of  black  slate,  sandstone,  and  quartz  porphyry  are  often 
included  in  it.  Breccia  and  an  agglomerate  occur  on  the  surface 
near  the  head  of  Fern  Tree  Gully,  and  also  in  the  tunnel,  but 
their  relation  to  the  normal  igneous  rock  was  not  evident.  The 
pebbles  of  tlie   agglomerate   are  chiefly  quartz  porphyry,    and   are 

1  The  189.")  geologically  coloured  parish  plan  of  Queenstown  shows  a  diorite  dyke  at  One  Tree 
Hill. 


134  A\  R.  Jimner: 

usually  sub-angular  in  shape,  and  larelv  more  than  three  inches 
in  diameter.  In  the  absence  of  field  evidence  to  the  contrary,  it  is 
possible,  but  not  probable,  that  these  supposed  volcanic  l)reccias  and 
agglomerates  have  originated  Ijy  faulting.  The  rock  is  intrusive, 
and  the  flow  structure,  which  is  characteristic  of  similar  rocks 
from  Liljdale,  Steel's  Creek,  and  north  of  the  Black  Spur,  is  absent 
in  this  case.  Probably  the  rock  fills  what  was  once  a  volcanic  con- 
duit extruding  rhyolitic  lavas,  which  are  now  entirely  denuded  aAvay,^ 
Hand-specimens  of  the  rock  are  leucocratic  and  porphyritic.  and 
show  phenocrysts  of  quartz  and  altered  felspar.  A  little  pyrite  is 
also  present.  Examined  microscopically,  the  rock  is  seen  to  have 
been  a  quartz-felspar-porphyry,  but  its  pristine  characters  are  now 
greatly  masked  l)y  extensive  sericitisation,  carbonation  and  occa- 
sional secondary  silicification. 

Section  No.  I':i2.  'J'he  rock  consisted  originally  of  large  clear 
panidiomorphic  phenocrysts  of  quartz,  fairly  large  euhedral  crystals 
of  felspar,  and  numerous  crystals  ot  a  femic  mineral,  probal)ly 
biotite.  in  a  microcrystalline  ground-mass  of  the  same  minerals. 
Apatite  and  zircon  are  accessories.  As  in  the  similar  rocks 
described  from  Diamond  Creek,  quartz  is  the  only  minei-al  which 
has  withstood  the  action  of  the  hydrothermal  solutions  which  have 
caused  the  alteration,  to  any  mai-ked  extent.  It  is  generally  clear. 
a)id  is  often  rounded  and  embayed  by  the  ground  mass.  Such  coi- 
rosion,  however,  is  pr()bal)ly  magmatic,  and  occurs  in  many  volcanic 
and  intrusive  rocks  not  hydrothermally  altered — e.g.,  Healesville 
dacites.  Isolated  inclusions  of  the  ground  mass,  and  numerous 
glass  inclusions  containing  liquid  bubbles,  are  present  in  the  quai'tz 
phenocrysts.  Cracks  occur  about  some  of  these  glass  inclusions 
exactly  as  figured  in  Idding's  "  Rock  Minerals,"  fig.  37b,  p.  71. 
Pyiamidally  tern\inated  crystals  of  zircon  are  also  seen  in  the  grains 
of  quartz.  The  felspar  phenocrysts  have  been  extensively  metaso- 
matically  replaced  by  dusty  carbonates  and  microscopic  flakes  of 
.sericite.  with  a  little  quartz.  The  alteration  of  the  felspar  has 
been  so  great  in  many  sections  that  it  can  only  be  recognised  by 
its  well-preserved  idiomorphic  outline.  Where  the  alteration  has  not 
been  extieme,  it  can  be  generally  proved  without  doubt  that  the 
felsi)ar  is  predominantly  orthoclase.  Numerous  included  crystals  of 
apatite,  zircon,  and  muscovite  occur  in  the  felspar.  The  original 
femic  mineral  was  probably  biotite.  It  is  now  replaced  by  mus- 
covite,  and  rutile  has  separated  out,i  however,   not  in  the  form  of 


1   Biotite  frequeiitl.v  contains  a   considerable  percentajfe  ot  TiOj.      A    hiot.ite   from   tlie    l)an- 
ilenons:  (iacite,  analysed  by  H.  C.  Kic-liards,  contained  TO.'i",  Ti02 


FefroUxji/   (IikJ    (icobniii    of    (Jiwensfon-ii.  135 

sagenitic-  webs  as  in  the  similar  rock  from  Diamond  Creek.  Idio- 
morphie  outlines  of  original  felspar  are  abundant  in  the  ground 
mass  of  the  rock.  They  are  now  replaced  by  carbonates  and  sericite, 
and  it  is  manifestly  impossible  to  tell  whether  they  are  orthoclastic 
or  plaj.Moclastic.  Abundant  granular  impellucid  carbonate  occurs 
throughout  the  section  replacing  both  plienocrysts  and  minerals  of 
the  gi'ound  mass.  Tlie  powdered  rock  effervesces  readily  when 
dilute  hydroihloric  acid  is  added  in  the  cold,  proving  that  the  car- 
bonate is  chiefly  calcite.  Iron  pyrites  is  present  in  nearly  all  sec- 
tions. It  is  often  idiomorphic,  consisting  of  the  following  forms  : 
— 110,  100,  and  combnations  of  100  and  111.  The  crystals  are 
often  surrounded  by  a  rim  of  secondary  quartz  arranged  radially 
with  respect  to  the  crystal  edges.  Such  quartz  may  possibly  repre- 
sent recrystallised  silica,  formed  by  the  attack  of  sulphuretted 
hyrogen  <>r  alkaline  sulphide  solutions  on  the  original  iron  mag- 
nesium silicates. 

Section  No.  135.  Brecciated  porphyry.  One  Tree  Hill.  The 
felspars  in  this  section  are  not  so  greatly  altered.  Phenocrysts  of 
both  <r,t]ioclase  and  plagioclase  are  present,  but  the  former  mineral 
predominates.  It  is  frecjuently  very  greatly  sericitised  and  car- 
bonated, and  appeai-8  to  contain  microperthitic  intergrowths  of 
albite.  One  plagif)clase  phenocryst  gave  symmetrical  extinctions 
of  200  fvoin  the  albite  twin  lamellae,  and  had  a  refractive  index 
greater  than  quartz,   indicating  felspar  near  andesine. 

Section  No.  125.  Xenolithic  fragments  of  sandstone  are  present 
in  places  in  this  section.  They  show  no  resorption,  and  are  com- 
posed of  angular  and  sub-angular  quartz  grains,  flakes  of  muscovite, 
and  a  little  zircon,  and  brown  tourmaline. 

Ihhiifd  rockx  from  iJit-  coti/ifrt/  east  of  Melbourne. — Acidic  dyke 
i-ocks  (quartz  poipliyry.  felsite,  and  diorite  dykes,  of  various 
writers)  aie  faiily  common  in  Victoria,  associated  with  intrusions 
of  granite  and  gianodioiite.  East  of  Melbourne  they  are  fairly 
numerous,  and  are  known  from  Diamond  Creek,  Warrandyte, 
Tomplestowe,  Frankston.  Kinglake,  Ringwood.  and  several  other 
places.  Similar  locks  neai-  Steel's  Creek,  Lilydale  and  Mount 
(Tiaham  are  prt)bal)ly  the  extrusive  facies  of  the  same  magma. 
These  dykes  are  usually  altered  metasomatically.  in  much  the  same 
mannei-  as  in  the  rock  described  above,  from  One  Tree  Hill,  and 
are  <'ften  traversed  by,  or  associated  with,  auriferous  quartz  veins 
wliieh  almost  invariably  contain  stibnite.  Auriferous  dykes  a:  u^ 
known    at    Diamond    Creek.    Warrandyte,    Templestowe,    Kinglake, 


136  N.  R.  Junner: 

Scotchman's  Creek,  near  Warburton,  and  elsewhere.  About  tlnee 
miles  north  of  Steel's  Creek,  an  apparently  extrusive  mass  of 
rhyolite  is  traversed  by  quartz  veins  carrying  abundant  stibnite, 
which  is  auriferous  in  places. 

3.— The    Caledonia    Gold    Field. 

A. — History  and  Production. 

Although  now  abandoned  and  unknown  to  most  people,  the  reefs 
and  alluvial  of  this  field  have  yielded  more  gold  than  the  better- 
known  Warrandyte  reefs.  The  gold  obtained  from  the  Caledonia 
field  has  come  almost  exclusively  from  the  reefs  at  One  Tree  Hill. 
Panton  Hills,  and  Yow  Yow,  and  from  tlie  alluvia  of  the  creeks 
draining  these  areas.  The  field  was  being  worked  at  least  as 
early  as  1855,  although  no  official  records  prior  to  1859  are  extant. 
The  report  of  the  Mining  Surveyor  for  September,  1859,  states  that 
there  were  420  miners  on  this  field.  In  the  late  fifties  and  early 
sixties  the  One  Tree  Hill  reefs,  particularly  the  Swedish,  yielded 
exceptional  returns,  but  they  soon  gave  place  as  producers  to  more 
consistent  reefs  like  Oram's  reef,  Panton  Hills,  and  except  for 
occasional  very  rich  yields,  later  outputs  have  been  unimportant. 
Oram's  reef  was  a  very  consistent  producer  from  the  time  of  the 
discovery  in  1859  until  about  1885.  During  this  period  it  averaged 
three  ounces  to  the  ton  (a  record  equalled  on  very  few  mining 
fields),  and  at  the  greatest  depth  reached,  the  yields  were  even  riche)- 
than  those  from  the  upper  workings.  By  far  the  greater  part  of 
the  gold  won  from  Panton  Hills  came  from  this  line  of  reef.  Such 
others  as  the  Napoleon  reef,  Boomer's  reef  and  Doctor's  reef,  have 
yielded  only  a  small  quota.  The  reefs  at  One  Tree  Hill  and  Panton 
Hills,  and  also  those  near  Queenstown,  are  all  in  clo.se  proximity 
to  anticlinal  fractures,  but  those  at  Yow  Yow  are  of  a  differc^ii 
type.  These  reefs  occur  in  the  intrusive  diorite  and  in  the  fractured 
country  rock  adjoining  the  intrusion,  and  although  they  have  not 
been  so  rich  as  Oram's  leef  or  the  Swedish  reef,  they  have  never- 
theless at  various  times  contributed  largely  towards  the  district 
total.  Another  important  asset  to  this  field  was  the  discovery  of 
coarse  gold  in  the  alluvium  of  certain  creeks,  particularly  in  those 
at  Happy  Valley,  Fern  Tree  Gully,  and  Whisky  Gully,  which  have 
their  source  in  One  Tree  Hill.  These  creeks  affoided  remunerative 
employment  to  numerous  miners  for  many  years,  and  some  fairly 
large  nugget,s  (one  of  them  weighing  ove»'  100  ozs.)  were  unearthed. 


Pcfrohx/!/   (1 11(1    (ieologi/    of    QucciiKfoici).  \'M 

The  alluvial  digging.s,  Imwrvei-,  were  soon  exhausted,  and  after 
about  the  year  1880,  this  source  of  gold  became  unimportant. 

Production  : — In  compiling  statistics  of  gold  production,  tlie 
author  has  made  considerable  use  of  the  Quarterly  Reports  of  the 
Mining  Surveyors  and  Registrars  from  1859  to  1891,  and  of  the 
Annual  Reports  of  the  Mines  Department  from  1891  to  1011.  As 
the  latter  publication  gives  only  isolated  rich  yields,  and  not 
the  complete  returns,  for  the  greater  part  of  the  above  period,  any 
statistics  so  obtained  are  necessarily  incomplete.  The  records  show 
that  up  to  1890,  nearly  25,000  ozs.  of  gold  were  won  from  the 
><juartz  reefs,  distributed  thus  in  round  figures  :  — 

Panton    Hills      9000  ozs. 

One  Tree  Hill      7500  ozs. 

Yow  Yow 7500  ozs. 

Valued  at  £4  an  ounce;  this  is  equivalent  to  nearly  £100,000  worth 
of  gold.  Two  thousand  ounces  is  a  very  conservative  estimate  for 
the  production  between  1890  and  1912.  so  that  the  total  yield  from 
the  field,  exclusive  of  the  yield  from  the  alluvial,  is  well  above 
£100,000.  No  complete  returns  of  the  gold  obtained  from  alluvial 
.sources  are  possible,  as  the  records  are  far  from  being  complete. 

/  B.—One  Tree  Hill. 

The  productive  reefs  at  One  Tree  Hill  \\\n  parallel,  and  at  short 
•distances  apart,  all  outcropping  at  the  top  of  the  hill,  within  u 
width  of  200  yards.  The  strike  of  these  reefs  varies  from  N.  15^  E. 
to  N.  ^Oo  E.,  corresponding  closely  to  the  strike  of  the  contiguous 
sedimenrv  which  are  here  chiefly  brown  and  white  sandstones,  in 
places  indurated  and  changed  to  quartzite.  At  the  south  end  of 
the  hill  one  or  two  small  quartz  reefs  strike  across  the  country  rock, 
but  as  far  as  the  author  is  aware  very  little  gold  has  been  obtained 
from  them.  The  most  important  reefs  worked  at  One  Tree  Hill 
aie  from  east  to  west,  the  Buck,  Moonlight,  S^vedish,  and  the  Home- 
ward Bound.  Further  east  than  the  Buck  line  are  one  or  two 
•other  reefs,  the  most  important  of  which  is  the  Victoria  reef.  It 
was  prospected  in  the  late  fifties  and  early  sixties,  but,  according 
to  the  records,  little  gold  was  obtained.  All  these  reefs  dip  at  fairly 
«teep  angles,  frequently  approaching  the  vertical,  and  cut  across 
the  strata  in  depth.  In  this  respect  they  resemble  the  reefs  at 
Warrandyte.  The  Buck  line  of  reef  has  been  extensively  developed 
by  means  of  a  tunnel  driven  from  Fern   Tree  Gidly.     This  tunnel 


138  iV.   R.  Junner: 

intersects  the  porpliyry  above  described,  and  the  Buck  reef  occurs, 
at  the  contact  of  this  rock  with  the  Silurian  sandstones,  and  dip& 
very  steeply  to  the  west.  -The  reef  is  here  composed  of  compact 
milky  quartz,  slightly  mineralised.  Pyrites  is  the  dominant  sul- 
phide, and  stibnite  is  relatively  rare,  as  compared  with  its  abund- 
ance in  the  reefs  at  Yow  Yow.  Native  lead  has  been  recorded 
from  the  Homeward  Bound  reef,^  pointing  to  the  presence  of  a 
fairly  easily  reduced  lead  mineral.  It  is  interesting  to  note  that 
native  lead  has  also  been  recorded  from  the  quartz  reefs  at  Warran- 
dyte,2  and  from  the  Ringwood  antimony  mine.3  According  to  the 
Mining  Surveyor  for  the  division,  the  Buck  reef  was  the  widest  and 
poorest  reef  at  One  Tree  Hill.  Its  average  width  was  about  three 
feet  although  it  was  as  much  as  six  feet  wide  in  places.  The  Reports 
of  the  Mining  Surveyors  show  that  from  this  reef  2126  ozs.  of 
gold  were  obtained  from  .3.31.3  tons  of  quartz  crushed,  between  the 
years  1866  and  1873.  This  practically  represents  the  total  yield 
recorded  from  tlie  Buck  reef,  although  not  the  total  gold  won,  as 
the  records  are  undoubtedly  incomplete,  and  the  Reports  mention 
it  as  being  reworked  in   1866,  after  having  been  abandoned. 

The  Swedish  reef  was  one  of  the  earliest  developed  in  this  field. 
It  is  well  defined  on  the  surface,  and  strikes  N.  25o  E.  to  N.  30o  E.. 
and  dips  to  the  south-west,  at  about  60o.  Numerous  shafts  have- 
been  sunk  on  its  outcrop,  but  practically  none  of  them  descend  to- 
greater  depths  than  200  ft.,  and  the  majority  are  less  than  100  ft. 
deep.  The  Swedish  reef  gained  notoriety  in  18.59  and  1860,  owing 
to  the  discovery  of  some  very  rich  patches  of  gold  near  the  surface. 
A  few  of  the  earliest  recorded  yields,  undoubtedly  from  picked 
spec-imens,  may  Ije  (junted  to  illustrate  the  extraordinary  richness  of 
the  quartz,  and  the  nuggety  character  of  the  gold. 

The  early  records  are  far  from  complete,  and,  according  to  the- 
Mining  Sniveyoi-,  many  of  the  miners  were  unAvilling  to  divulge 
the  retuiMis.  Tlie  discrepancy  between  recorded  and  actual  yields 
is  well  illustrated  by  the  Mining  Surveyor's  Report  for  January, 
1861.  He  says,  speaking  of  the  Swedish  reef  :  "  The  former  owners 
were  al)Out  to  abandon  No.  2  South,  on  tlie  eve  of  their  finding 
quartz,  yielding,  from  a  few  patches.  al)nut  £8000  worth  of  gold." 
At  £4  an  ounce  tliis  gives  2000  ozs.  of  gold,  yet  the  recorded  yield 
amounted   to   only   620   ozs.      Apart   from  these  very   rich   patches. 


1  Annual  Report,  Sec.  Mines,  Victoria,  1911. 

2  Vide,   J.    Atkinson  :    A   locality   list  of    all   the  niineials  liitliei-to   leconled    from   Victoria, 
Proc.  Hoy.  Soc.  Victoria,  \ol.  ix.  (n.s.),  p.  96,  1896. 

;;    Vi.le,  Mineral  .Statistics  of  Victoria,  1877. 


Petrolvyy    and    Geology   of  Queendoirii. 


139' 


Date. 

Depth 

yuartz. 
crushed. 

Total  Yield 
of  gold. 

Average  ozs. 
per  ton. 

June, 

1859 

21 

90  lljs. 

144  ozs. 

3584 

August, 

1659 

21 

60  lbs. 

240  ozs.* 

8960 

January, 

1860 

64 

1  bucket  of 

ore 

80  ozs.* 

— 

March, 

1860 

— 

57  lbs. 

272  ozs.* 

10680 

March, 

1860 

— 

specimen 

48  ozs.* 

— 

1864 



65  tons 

780  ozs. 

12 

1865 

50 

16| tons 

349  ozs. 

21.2 

1865 

50 

13  tons 

134  ozs.  7  dwts. 

10.3 

1865 

— 

2  tons 

86  ozs. 

43 

1865 

— 

8  tons 

138  ozs. 

22.9 

1865 

— 

10  tons 

125  ozs. 

12.5 

*  Recorded  in  pounds 
days  to  weijfh  the  gold  in 

weight,  probably  pounds  a\  ( 
pounds  avoirdupois. 

airdupoii 

■1,  as  it  was  usual  in  tin 

e  early  mining 

much,  gold  was  obtained  from  the  inferior  grade  quartz,  wliich 
aveiaged  4  ozs.  to  the  ton.  at  65  ft.  The  brilliance  of  the  Swedish 
reef  was  short-lived,  and,  after  1870,  little  more  was  heard  of  it. 


C— Panto/)  Hills  (Orayn's  Reef). 

As  previously  mentioned,  productive  quartz  mining  at  Panton 
Hills  has  lieen  almost  entirely  confined  to  one  line  of  reef — namely, 
Oram's.  This  reef  was  first  opened  up  during  1859.  and  it  yielded' 
fairly  consistently  until  1885.  After  this  isolated  rich  yields  were 
obtained,  mostly  from  the  ground  previously  worked  over.  The 
reef  outcrops  on  the  east  side  of  the  main  road  from  Kangaroo- 
Grounds  to  Queenstown  and  Kinglake.  It  strikes  approximately 
N  250  E_  and  dips  to  west.  Its  width  varies  from  two  inches  to- 
three  feet,  and  it  fconsists  of  laminated  white  quartz,  rarely  crystal- 
line. Oram's  reef  has  been  developed  to  a  depth  of  nearly  400  ft.. 
and  longitudinally  for  a  distance  of  about  half  a  mile,  and  has 
yielded  approximately  9000  ozs.  of  gold ;  more  than  8000  ozs.  of 
which  were  obtained  between  the  years  1865  and  1885.  No  gradual 
change,  and  certainly  no  decrease  in  values,  occur  in  depth,  as  is; 
evident  from  the  following  table  compiled  from  returns  recorded 
in  the  Mining  Surveyor's  Reports  between  1866  and  1885.  Only 
those  returns  were  used  which  gave  the  depth  from  which  the  ore- 
was  obtained. 


140  .V.    Ix.  J  tinner 


li.-l.tli  fniin 
Surface. 

Toiinau'o 
Crushed. 

I'oul   Yiol.l 

Av. 

per  ton. 

0-    59  ft. 

120i 

249. 

iizs.     4  dwts. 

2 

OZS. 

1   (Iwt. 

aO-lOO  „ 

23  li 

564 

„      ^ 

■1 

„ 

9  (Iwts. 

ioo-i:)0  „ 

197^ 

901 

t?     ^ 

4 

,, 

11  dwt. 

150-200  „ 

278 

1  207 

„      -i 

4 

„ 

"       )) 

200-250  „ 

358i 

S64 

:,     12 

2 

,, 

^          M 

250-300  „ 

67  4  ^ 

2369 

M    17 

3 

10     „ 

300-370  „ 

— 

— 

5 

OZS. 

'I'Ik-.vl-  ii'tuiiis  sliow  thiit  tlio  riilu'st  ori'  was  obtaiiuMl  fidiii  hftwet'ii 
l(»<l  aii.l  2(1(1  ft.,  and  that  tlu'  ore  from  shallow  dcjiths  was  pooivr 
ill  valui'  than  tliat  from  the  <k'OiH>i-  workin'rs.  No  infefeiu-es  i-an 
l>i'  drawn  with  safety  from  those  yields,  respecting  the  effec-t  of 
seiondary  eiii  iihment  on  the  auriferous  quartz.  The  ground  water 
level  oeenrs  at  a  de})th  of  about  200  ft.,  and  the  richest  (luartz  caiue, 
therefore,  fiom  above  this  level;  although  the  300  ft.  level  alone 
yielded  2000  ozs.  of  gold,  eqtiivalent  to  nearly  one-fourth  of  the 
total  gold  won  from  this  reef. 

D.—Tou-  Toil'. 

Several  quartz  veins  have  been  prospeeted,  with  varying  success, 
near  the  Yow  Yow  diorite  intrusion.  The  best  known  of  these  reefs 
are  Allen's.  Eureka.  Comet,  Murray's.  .  No.  5.  and  Hirr's  reefs. 
The  records  slu)w  that  Allen's  reef  was  the  largest  producer  of  these, 
but.  owing  to  the  multipilicity  of  names  of  claims  and  reefs,  it  is 
manifestly  impossible  to  calculate  the  yields  from  i)uli\  idual  reefs 
with  any  degree  of  exactness.  AlU-n's  reef  varied  in  width  from 
IW(.  to  three  inches,  up  To  the  corresponding  nnmlvr  of  feet,  and 
was  not  Worked  at  greater  depths  than  200  ft.  The  reef  occurs 
within  the  diorite.  and  according  to  the  Mining  Surveyor,  the  yields 
from  tlie  hard,  undecomposed  roik  weri'  jnst  as  ricli.  or  even 
richer,  than  those  from  near  the  surface.  With  the  excejttion  of 
tlie  Caledonia,  none  of  these  reefs  have  been  worked  behnv  200  ft. 
At  this  mine  a  shaft  has  Ix^en  sunk  l>etween  200  and  300  ft.  in 
depth,  and  several  very  thin,  nearly  vertical  dipping,  veins,  have 
been  worked.  These,  however,  were  unprofitable  in  depth,  not  ite- 
•cause  of  any  dei.'rease  in  values,  but  owing  to  the  great  amotint  of 
very  resistant  diorite  wjiieh  had  to  l)e  extracted  with  the  quartz. 
Stibnite   is  the   jiredominant    vein    svdphide.    and   pyrites   and    mis- 


Petrolo(ju    and    Geul<>(j>/   o/'   Quef'iisfi,iri,.  Ul 

pitktrl  :iiu  sometimes  present.  Massive  stibnite  occurs  in  seveial  of 
these  reefs,  especially  those  situated  on  the  west  and  north-^\e8t  sides 
of  the  iliorite.  Calcite  is  a  fairly  common  gangue  mineral.  The 
gohl  is  of  a  high  degree  of  fineness,  as  is  usual  elsewhere  in  Vic- 
toria, where  stibnite  is  the  predominate  vein  sulphide,  and  is 
generally  valued  at  more  than  £1  an  ounce.  Neaily  all  these  reefs 
strike  between  north  and  north-east,  and  dip  at  steep  angles.  An 
approximate  estimate  of  the  gold  recorded  from  Yow  Yow  may  he 
stated  as  8000  ozs.,  of  which  total,  more  than  one-third  (about 
2700  ozs.)  has  been  recorded  from  Allen's  reef.  The  Eureka  was 
also  an  important  contributor,  and  over  1500  ozs.  were  won  from 
this  line  of  reef.  Certain  of  these  auriferous  veins,  worked  within 
the  diorite,  pass  out  into  the  sediments,  and  have  been  found  to 
be  payably  auriferous  for  some  distance  from  the  intrusion. 

E. — Alluvial. 
The  bulk  of  the  alluvial  gold  from  this  field  came  from  the  creeks, 
draining  One  Tree  Hill;  and,  compared  \\^th  the  gold  oljtained 
fiom  them,  other  returns  are  unimportant.  The  gold  was  almost 
invariably  of  the  nuggety  type,  and  one  nugget  of  103|  ozs.  was  un- 
earthed in  Cobbler's  Gully.  The  occurrence  is  of  interest,  since 
elsewhere  in  Victoria  large  nuggets  are  generally  associated  with 
Ordovician  strata,  and  nuggets  of  over  100  ozs.  have  been  recorded 
in  only  two  other  areas — namely,  Alexandra,  and  Wood's  Point. i 
where  undoubted  silurian  sediments  are  the  country  rock.  The 
following  is  a  list,  proVjably  not  complete,  of  nuggets  recorded  from 
the  alluvial  near  One  Tree  Hill  : — 

A. — Cohhler'it  (hdhj.  or  Happy  Valley. 

^^'"&»'*-  fro,n?urface.  Reference.  Ke.narks. 

lOSiozs.  6  feet  Q.R.M.S.  Dec.    1874'^    lOOozs.  12dwts. 

fine 
88      „  —  „         Sept.    I860 

84      „  Shallow  „  Oct.     1860     78  ozs.  tine. 

83      „   6  dwt.s.  6  inches  „  Mar.    1870' 

7-2      „  —  „  Oct.     1860       .Severnl  small 

nuggets 
42      „  -  „  Nov.    I860 

1  Vide  list  of  nuggets  found  in  Victoria.     Mem.  Geo.  Surv.,  Victoria,  No.  12,  1912. 

2  Quarterl3-  Reports  of  the  Miniiifc  Surveyors  and  Re^strars  of  Victoria. 

'6  Mixed  with  quartz.     Found  in  the  alluvial  of  the  Swedish  reef,  cOozs.  fine. 


(d42 


iV.  K  Ji 


Weight. 


Depth 
from  siii-faee. 


40 

,, 

— 

•Sept.    1860 

32 

„    12g,-.s.^ 

— 

Aixg.    1860 

28 

„    lldwts. 

6  feet 

Prog.  Rep.  No.  3,  1875       Estimated 

17oz.s.  12dwt.s. 

17 

„  1^  „' 

12    „ 

Q.R.M.S.  Dec.     1874 

11 

15    „   6  in. 

„    '     May     1860 

5 

„  n  ,: 

12    „ 

Dec.     1874 

B. — Fern   Tree    Gully. 


Weight. 


Depth. 


Reference. 

Remarks. 

Q.R.M.S.  Dec.   1880     In 

two  nuggets. 

Mar.  1862 

Jan.    1862 

R.B.  Smyth,  Gold  Fields 

of  Victoria,     1868 

M.S.R.      ^Feb.    1861 

Jan.    1861 

Jan.    1861 

Jan.    1861 

56  ozs. 

32    „    1. 
24    „ 
20    „ 

10    „ 
10   „ 


8  „ 

.,          Jan. 

1861 

C- 

-Whiskey    Gully. 

Weight. 

Depth. 

Reference. 

Remarks. 

34  ozs.  13dwts.        11  feet        Q.R.M.S.    June  1869 
9    „  „         Sept.  1861 

3    ,,       5  dwts.  ^         ,,  „         June  1869 

According  to  the  district  Mining  Surveyor,  other  large  nuggets 
-were  found  and  not  reported  by  the  finders.  The  evidence  is 
absolutely  convincing  that  these  nuggets  have  been  shed  from  the 
reefs,  and  that  they  have  not  grown  in  situ.  Firstly,  it  is  a  Avell- 
known  fact  on  this  field  that  the  richest  alluvial  has  always  been 
found  in  close  proximity  to  fairly  rich  reefs — e.g.,  One  Tree  Hill. 
Further  in  Cobbler's  Gully,  nuggets  have  been  found  in  all  posi- 


1  Recorded  from  Fern  Tree  Gully  or  Happy  Valley. 

2  Possibly  identical  with  the  preceding  nugget. 

3  Probably  Fern  Tree  Gully,  as  all  nuggets  from  Cobbler's  Gully   were  obtained  ut   shallow 
-  depths. 

4  Mining  Surveyor's  Reports. 


I'd I'olo;/!/    uiul    (rfohHjji    of    Qaeeiisfotrii.  143 

rions.  tiDiii  veil  ildwii  the  uully  ritilit  up  to  the  outcTDp  of  thr  I'cofs 
on  One  Tire  Hill.  The  dislritt  Mining  Surveyor  in  ISTl)  ii'ixuts 
the  tindinu'  of  a  rieh  spniineii  of  (piartz  (8-3  ozs.  (J  dwts.  ijross 
wciiiht.  ")()  t)zs.  fine)  six  iiu-lics  lielow  tlii'  surt'aee  leef.  and  un- 
doutedly  derived  from  this  I'eef.  The  nuggets  found  ni'aiest  the 
reefs  are  generally  mixtures  of  tjuartz,  linionite  and  gold,  and  show 
little  signs  of  rounding.  ('obl)ler's  gully  has  yielded  the  largest 
nuggets,  and  there  is  every  i-eason  to  believe  that  tlioy  have  1)een 
derived  from  the  Swedish  reef,  which  has  been  shown  to  l)e  a 
nuggety  reef,  and  much  of  the  gold  olitained  fiom  it  would  be 
best  described  as  nuggets.  For  instance,  a  specimen  of  ipiartz 
from  tliis  reef,  having  a  maximum  dimension  of  3  inches,  was 
found  to  yield  48  ounces  of  gold.l  Mr.  Hirt,  who  has  had  a  very 
intimate  acquaintance  with  this  field,  told  the  writer  in  private 
•c-onversation  that  a  nugget  40  ozs.  in  weight,  and  associated  with 
quartz  and  limonite,  was  got  from  a  dei^th  of  nearly  100  feet  in  a 
claim  on  the  Homeward  Bound  line  of  reef.  It  will  be  agreed,  I 
think,  that  the  evidence  allows  of  no  other  conclusion  than  that  the 
nuggets  have  been  derived  by  the  breaking  doAvn  by  denudation  of 
the  former  upward  extension  of  such  reefs,  as  the  Swedish  at  One 
Tree  Hill. 


F. — Future  possibilities,  Secondary  enrichment .  etc. 

Oram's  is  the  only  reef  on  this  field  developed  at  greater  depths 
than  300  feet,  and  the  majority  of  the  workings  have  not  penetrated 
below  the  ground  water  level.  Notwithstanding  the  shallowness  of 
the  workings,  there  is  apparently  nothing  to  show  that  the  values 
have  not  been  maintained  in  depth,  as  is  seen  from  the  figures 
given  above  for  Oram's  reef.  Of  the  geological  factors  that  may 
have  influenced  the  values  near  the  surface,  secondary  enrichment 
is  the  most  important.  The  recognition  of  its  effect  on  auriferous 
quartz  veins,  is  frequently  difficult,  and  this  is  especially  so  in 
Victoria.  Victorian  gold  is  generally  of  a  high  degree  of  fineness, 
and  usually  free  from  sulphides  of  the  base  metals  w^hich  are  easily 
leached,  and  either  oxidised  or  redeposited  at  lower  levels  as  secon- 
dary sulphides.  Further,  most  of  these  mines  were  developed  before 
secondary  enrichment  was  studied,  and  practically  no  facts  relevant 
to  the  question  are  now  obtainable  from  the  records.  The  yields 
from  various   depths   aid   us   little,    as   is  seen   from   the   tabulated 

1  Vide,  supra,  p.  36. 


144  N.  R.   Jutmer  : 

yield  of  Oram's  reef.  Hence,  no  conelusions  can  be  drawn  with 
certainty  regarding  the  effects  of  secondary  enrichment  on  these 
reefs,  but  the  evidence,  such  as  it  is.  suj^ports  the  conclusion  that 
the  values  liave  not  been  greatly  affected.  The  thin  character  of 
the  reefs,  combined  wtili  their  compai-ative  density,  tends  to  inhibit 
extensive  circulation  of  surface  solutions,  and  hence  to  prevent 
solution  of  the  gold.  The  rich  patches  found  near  the  surface  at 
One  Tree  Hill  might  be  considered  as  suggestive  of  secondary 
enrichment,  but  the  evidence,  although  not  conclusive,  does  not 
support  such  a  view.  It  appears  fairly  evident  from  the  nuggets 
found  in  the  alluvial  at  Cobbler's  Gully,  that  the  former  upward 
extension  of  the  Swedish  reef  was  as  rich,  or  even  richer,  than  the 
portion  now  exposed  to  denudation  and  vadose  solutions.  It  seems 
very  likely,  therefore,  that  the  distriliution  of  the  gold  in  the 
Swedish  reef  near  the  surface,  is  not  due  to  the  present-day  vadose 
circulation,  but  is  due  to  conditions  determining  the  primary  de- 
position of  the  gold.  Of  such  factors  influencing  the  primary 
deposition,  decrease  of  temperature  and  pressuie,  admixture  with 
surface  solutions,  and  indicator  effects  are  the  most  important. 
There  is  fairly  good  reason  to  believe  that  the  formation  of  these 
reefs  took  place  soon  after  the  folding  of  the  sediments,  and  it  is 
certain  tliat  several  thousands  of  feet  of  these  have  been  denuded 
away.  Hence  the  assumj^tion  does  not  seem  to  be  unwarranted 
that  tlie  primary  deposition  of  the  gold,  in  the  portion  of  the  reef 
now  exposed,  was  not  affected  by  admixture  with  surface  solutions, 
and  presumably  not  to  any  marked  degree  by  reduction  of  tem- 
perature and  pressure.  We  are  left  to  deal  with  the  effects  of 
indicators.  At  Ballarat  East,  where  nuggety  gold  occurs  in  the 
reefs,  often  at  considerable  depths,  the  nuggets  are  localised  to 
near  the  intersection  of  the  vein  quartz  Avith  tlieir  seams  termed 
"  indicators."  Unfortunately,  the  Swedish  reef  at  One  Tree  Hill 
was  not  being  worked  at  the  time  of  my  visit,  and  the  records  do 
not  mention  the  mode  of  the  occurrence  of  the  gold,  so  that  positive 
evidence,  bearing  on  this  question,  is  not  forthcoming.  However, 
Mr.  Hirt,  Avho,  as  previously  mentioned,  has  lieen  on  this  field  most 
of  his  life,  and  whose  word  I  have  no  reasoji  to  doubt,  has  informed 
me  that  the  ricli  patches  of  gold,  from  the  Swedish  reef,  were 
generally  localised  to  near  the  intersection  of  the  main  reef  with 
rather  flat  leaders  of  pinkish  coloured  quartz,  two  inches  or  so  in 
width.  If  this  is  so,  there  appears  to  me  to  be  no  valid  reason 
why  other  "  indicator  "  veins  and  rich  patches  of  gold  should  not 
])e  found  in  depth.     A.s  far  as  I  am  aware,  tlie  Swedish  reef  has  not 


PetroLxjii   and    Geoloyi/   of  Qiiee/ttstuivn.  145 

hocii  ju-ospeeteil  1)l'1(iw  2(M>  i'oi't ,  altlum^'h  the  records  mention  the 
driving  of  :i  tunnel  fnuii  I-'ein  Tree  (iully  to  prospect  the  Swedish 
reef  in  depth,  hut  it  is  (h>ui)lfiil  whether  they  ever  worked  this  reef. 
Messrs.  Hirt  nnd  (terhuli  liavt'  recently  driven  a  timnel  from  the 
head  of  I'ohhler's  (iully  to  cut  the  Swedish  reef,  hut  at  the  time  of 
my  visit,  they  a)>peared  to  have  not  Ijeen  successful  in  locating  it. 
It  is  at  least  certain  that  there  is  no  geological  evidence  in  s\ipport 
of  the  view  that  the  gold  docs  not  go  down,  and  in  the  case  of  the 
Swedish  reef  the  possible  occurrence  of  other  rich  patches  of  gold  in 
depth,  has  not  been  disproved.  From  the  birth  of  this  field  the 
reefs  have  been  worked  almost  entii-ely  by  individual  miners  or 
small  parties,  and  companies  were  practically  unknown.  This  is 
prol^ably  one  important  reason  why  the  mines  were  abandoned  at 
such  shallow  depths.  The  presence  of  water  and  the  need  of  pump- 
ing macliinery.  harder  ground,  increased  liaulage,  and  the  ditli- 
culty  of  following  such  nari'ow  reefs,  all  contended  against  the 
enterprising  individual,  but  such  mines  could,  in  many  cases,  Ijc 
worked  at  a  profit  by  small  companies,  with  judicious  expenditure 
and  economical   methods  of  woi-king. 

4.— Summary  and  Conclusions. 

Until  further  palaeontological  work  has  been  attempted  in  this 
area,  no  definite  opinion  can  be  expressed  relative  to  the  age  of 
these  beds,  near  (^ueenstown.  A  stratigraphical  comparison  with 
the  strata  at  Diamond  Creek  and  Yarra  Glen,  suggests  that  they 
are  intermediate  in  age  between  those  at  the  above  places,  and 
aie.  theiefore,  either  Melbournian  or  Yeringian.  It  is,  however, 
possible  that  both  series  are  i-epresented  in  the  area  dealt  with  in 
this  paper. 

Although  diorite  is  a  popular  field  name  for  many  rocks  in  Vic- 
toria, chemical  and  petrological  examination  show  that  true  dioiites 
are  exceptional.  The  association  of  hornblende  diorites.  with  gold- 
bearing  quartz  in  Eastern  Australia,  is  not  uncommon.  The  ex- 
tensive nietasoniatic  changes  undergone  by  these  rocks  frequently 
accompanies  the  introduction  of  the  auriferous  quartz.  The  Queens- 
town  diorite  has  been  shown  to  Ijc  closely  allied  to  the  Moining 
Star  diorite.  Wood's  Point,  and  has  suffered  similar  alteratioi,. 
Two  independent  types  of  metasomatic  alteration  can  be  recognised 
in  the  Queenstown  diorite — (1)  A  pi-opylitic  alteration  at  relatively 
high  temperature  and  pressure,  resulting  in  the  formation  of 
chlorite  and  epidote  after  hoi-nblende ;  the  development  of  pyrrhotite 

11 


146 


iV.  JU.  Jwnner 


Geological  Sketch  Map  of  poiLiou  of  the  Parishes  of  Queenstown  and 
Greensborough.  Repi-oduced  from  Mr.  O.  A.  L.  Whitelaw's 
maps  of  these  Parishes. 


true.  R.S.  Victoria,  I'Jl  i.       Piute  XlX. 


Fm.I. 


Fi^.n 


Fit^.in. 


Fii^.IV. 


Pch-u((>(ji/   ((till    (rn>lo(/>/   of   QiieeustoiVn.  14/ 

after  ilmeuite,  and  iIil'  I'diinat  ion  of  calcito  and  a  little  seriidle. 
(.'heinieal  chan^'es  in  the  roek  are  sliglit.  (2)  Alteration  i)y  the  vein 
.solutions.  The  chief  effeets  are  extensive  developinent  of  seiieite 
after  felspar,  and  of  carbonates,  pyrites  and  niuseovite.  after 
chlorite  and  remaining  hornblende,  ('lieniical  migrations  are  prt,- 
bably  great.  The  relative  proportions  of  the  alkalies,  foi-  in.staneo. 
are  reversed. 

The  latter  part  of  the  j»a))er  deals  with  certain  characteristics  of 
an  important,  but  now  forgotten,  gold  field.  Of  particular  inteiest 
was  the  occurrence  of  large  nuggets  at  One  Tree  Hill,  clearly  derived 
frotii  the  Swedish  reef  which  was  known  to  be  nuggety  near  the  sur- 
face. 

In  concluson.  the  writer  wishes  to  record  his  indebtedness  to  Mi-. 
A.  M.  Howitt.  of  the  Victorian  Geological  Survey,  for  drawing  his 
attention  to  the  record  of  alluvial  nuggets  found  on  this  field  ; 
to  Ml',  (.'hapman,  foi'  identification  of  a  few  fossils;  and  to  Messrs. 
Tallin  and  Mann,  of  the  Imperial  College  of  Science,  Lond(tn.  and 
the  Melbourne  University,  Geological  Departments,  respectively, 
for  numeious  rock  sections,  and  Professor  Skeats  and  the  Secre- 
tai-y  for  Mines  of  Victoria,  for  help  in  obtaining  Parish  Plans  of 
the   a lea. 

EXPLANATION    OF    PLATE    XIX. 

Eig.  1. — Microphotograph  of  <,)uaitz  Diorite,  Caledonia  Mine, 
<^ueenstown,  x  10,  ordinary  light.  The  black  areas 
represent  ihnenite,  and  tlie  striated  phenocryst  is  horn- 
blende partially  altered  to  light  coloured  chlorite  and 
epidote. 

Eig.  2. — .Microphotograph  of  (,)uartz  Diorite.  Cale<Ionia  Mine. 
Queenstown,  x  20,  crossed  nicols ;  showing  well-zoned 
plagioclase  phenocrysts. 

Eig.  ;}. — Microphotograph  of  highly  metasomatically  altered 
Diorite.  near  a  quartz  vein.  Caledonia  .Mine.  <^)ueens- 
town,  X  16,  ordinary  light.  Q=quartz.  E  =  highly 
sericitised  felpar.  M  =  niuseovite  and  carbonate  replacing 
chlorite  after  hornI)lende.  P  =  pyrite.  As  =  arsenopyrite, 
S  =stibnite. 

Fig  i. — Microphotograph  of  metasomatically  altered  Quartz- 
Felspar-Porphyry.  One  Tree  Hill,  X  11,  ordinary  light; 
.showing  phenocrysts  of  colourless  quartz.  idiouKjrphie 
sericitised  and  carbonated  orthoclase,  and  rectangular 
sections  of  niuseovite  aftei-  I)iotite. 


KND     OF     V^OLUME     XXVII.,     PART     I. 

[Published   September,  1914'.] 


[Proc.  Rot.  Soc.  Victoria,  27  (N.S.),  Part   II.,  1914]. 

Art.  XU.—  Studies  iv  the  Physical  Chemistri/  of  Essential  Oils. 

Part  I.  —  The   Physical   Properties  of  mixtures  oj   two   l^erjiene  sub- 
stances ill  relation  to  those  of  the  constituents. 

BY 

R.    BARRY    DREW,    M.Sc, 

AND 

E.    IVAN    ROSEN  BLUM,    M.Sc. 

(Communicated  by  W.  Hebei-  Green). 
[Read  9th  July,  1914). 

It  is  of  considerable  interest  to  regard  the  mixture  of  organic 
bodies  which  is  presented  to  us  by  an  essential  oil  from  a  physico- 
chemical,  as  well  as  from  the  ordinary  systematic  point  of  view. 
We  have  here  a  class  of  mixtures,  easily  obtainied  in  quantity, 
whose  constituents  are  mostly  well-known,  and  of  allied  structure; 
conditions  v>^hich  suggest  a  novel  method  of  attacking  the  general 
theory  of  solution,  and  should  also  give  us  valuable  data,  for  judg- 
ing the  general  composition  of  an  oil  from  its  physical  constants 
— a  problem  of  interest,  both  from  the  commercial  and  from  the 
scientific  standpoint. 

As  sliowing  the  questions  which  meet  us  here  we  may  cite  as  an 
instance  two  eucalyptus  oils  from  the  same  species,  which  yielded 
the  same  percentage  of  phellandrene  [a=  — 69°]  and  contained  no 
other  optically  active  substance,  whose  rotations  were  as  far  dis- 
tinct as  —2.30  and   —  44o  respectively. 

The  major  portion  of  an  essential  oil  usually  consists  of  one  or 
more  terpenes.  These  may  be  considered  as  simple  examples  of 
non-ionising,  unassociated  solvents,  and  it  will  be  Avell,  therefore, 
to  start  our  inquiry  into  essential  oil  equilibria  by  the  study  of 
these  simple  substances,  adding  progressively  more  complex  or  more 
reactive  constituents,  such  as  oxygenated  derivatives,  etc.,  and 
essaying  to  evaluate  the  new  solution  factors  as  they  occur. 

An  ideal  invest ig:at ion,  then,  would  start  from  the  simplest 
case — a  mixture  of  tw(j  terpenes — proceed  through  increasing  com- 
plexity in  the  number  and  nature  of  the  components,  and  finally 
reach  that  complicated  equilibrium  presented  by  a  natural  essen- 
tial oil,  such  as  that  of   Eucalyptus   globulus. 


150  -R.  B.  Drew  and  E.  I.  Rosenblum  : 

The  following  results  are  of  a  preliminary  natui'e,  and  are 
concerned  with  the  simpler  cases  of  sueh   an   inquiry. 

Exveri men  till. 

The  method  followed  in  the  measurements  hei-e  recorded  was  to 
make  mixtures  of  various  concentrations  from  materials  prepared 
as  freshly  as  possible.  The  density,  refractive  index,  and  rotation 
of  these  were  taken  at  25°  C,  with  such  methods  and  precautions 
as  accurate  physicochemical  Avork  suggests. 

The  pyknometer  held  about  6  c.c's.,  and  the  temperature  adjust- 
ment was  correct  to  .Olo.  The  rotations  were  taken  in  a  100  mm. 
*ube  in  a  Schmidt  and  Haensch  polarimeter.  and  the  refractivia 
indices  in  a  Zeiss  refractometer,  and  for  eacli  of  these  the  diver- 
gence in  temperature  did  not  exceed   .1°. 

The  mixtures  themselves  were  made  up  by  successive  additions  of 
one  constituent  to  a  definite  amount  of  the  other — a  method 
economical  of  material — and  the  results  have  shown  it  to  be  justi- 
fied, for  any  systematic  error  arising  from  this  cause  would  in- 
crease with  each  addition,  and  such  increases  have  not  appeared. 

Cnlculafion    of   Restdfs. 

We  may  comment  here  on  the  methods  emphiyed  for  calculating 
the  theoretical  value  of  any  physical  property  of  a  liquid  mixture'. 
If  the  property  under  consideration  is  additive,  and  no  anomaly 
is  present,   Ave  have — - 

P  ^   m,V,  +  urj", 

(calc.)  ^   yn^n,'^ 

where  P,,  P.j,  are  the  Values  of  tlie  pi-operty  considered,  fur  the 
individual  substances,  and  m^  and  u/.^  are  the  masses  of  these  sub- 
stances in  the  mixture.  If  the  additive  relationshiji  does  not  hold, 
however,  we  must  modify  the  formula  to  express  the  effects  of  the 
molecules,  atoms  oi-  ions,  wliich  are  the  disturbing  factor.  Thus, 
if  the  molecules  are  the  reacting  entities  to  be  considered,  we  have 
[Ml,    M2     1)eing  the  molecular  weights]  — 

m,Pi     ^/..Po 

P  _  M7      M., 

(calc.)  rn.2     m,^ 

Ml    M, 

Since  many  factors  in  liquid  mixtures  are  influencing  a  par- 
ticular property,  it  is  necessary  to  introduce  more  and  more  terms 
before  we  can   attain  concordance.      But   since  tlie  diflficultv  of   in- 


Physical  Chemistry  of  Essential  Oils.  151 

terpreling  the  equations  so  obtained,  makes  this  rather  a  waste 
of  labour,  it  suffices  at  present,  where  properties  are  atomic  (e.g., 
Refractivity)  to  use  the  first  of  these  equations,  while  for  those 
where  the  molecular  influence  is  introduced  (e.g.,  Density)  the 
second  formula,  giving  what  is  known  as  the  Molar  Fraction, 
serves  as  some  correction. 

Hence,   these  two  methods  of  calculation   are   all  that  have  been 
employed  in  the  present  research. 


7'/(e   System   l-pinene — d-pinene. 

In  considering  the  purity  of  the  terpenes  mentioned,  it  must  be 
remembered  that  where  suitable  solid  derivatives,  from  which  a 
terpene  may  be  regenerated  in  quantity,  are  wanting,  the  only 
means  of  purification  is  repeatedly  to  distil  under  diminished  pres- 
sure. The  product,  of  course,  may  be  parti)-  racemised,  or  may 
contain  some  of  its  optical  isomers.  For  tliis  reason  the  physical 
properties  of  two  optical  isomers,  such  as  d-  and  l-pinene,  are  not 
numerically  identical,  a  point  which  is  of  little  significance  in  the 
present  research,  since  these  well-fractionated  terpenes  are  "  pure" 
from  the  practical  point  of  view.  Indeed,  the  l-pinene  of  rotation 
—  390  is  almost  free  from  I'acemate,  while  the  +  25°  rotation  of 
the  d-pinene  is  quite  as  high  as  other  workers  have  usually,  ob- 
tained. In  the  mixture  of  these  two  isomers,  from  our  stand- 
point, the  simplest  case,  we  should  anticipate  no  constitutive  ef- 
fects, and  indeed,  the  observed  properties  of  the  mixtures  a<gree 
excellently  with  those  calculated  by  (1),  the  simple  mixture  for- 
mula, and  the  slight  deviations  whicli  occur  n\ay  be  taken  as  indi- 
cative of  the  magnitude  of  the  exijerimental  error  in  the  other 
systems  as  well. 

The  pineries  were  obtained  from  oils  from  Eucalyptus  dextro 
pinea  and  E.  laevopinea,  which  were  generously  given  us  by  Mr. 
Smith,  of  the  Sydney  Technological  Museum.  He  has  w-orked  out 
their  composition,  and  his  results  we  have  confirmed,  and  by  dis- 
tilling iii  a  rod  and  disk  apparatus  at  10  mm.  pressure  we  have 
obtained  pinene  fractions  with  the  following  properties  : — 

At25°C.  d-Pinene.  1-Pinene. 

Rotation  ...  +25.40°  -39.64° 

Refractive  Index  L4640  1.4639 

Density  ...  .8604  .8646 


152 


R.  B.  Drew  and  E.  I.  Rosenblum 


The  System  d-pinene — l-pinene. 


1-pinene. 
l-pinene 
Concentra- 
tion 100 


Found 
Calc. 


Found 
Calc. 


Found 
Calc. 


86.82  75.04  50.87  28. 


Eotation- 


E.  d-pinene. 

15.92  0 


-39.640      -31.390      -23.60o        -  7.80o  +6.45°  +15.02°       +25.40° 

-31.370      -23.660        -7.83o  +6.51°  +15.05° 

Refractive  Index — 

1.4639          1.4641         1.4640         1.4640  1.4641         1.4640         1.4640 

1.4640         1.4640         1.4640  1.4640         1.4640        ... 

Density — 

.8646           .8639           .8633           .8626  .8614           .8610           .8604 

.8640           .8636           .8625  .8616           .8611       ... 


The  Si/stems  l-Pii^eiie-Cineol  and  d-Pinene-Gineol. 

Of  greater  complexity  is  the  case  involving  a  partial  replacement 
of  one  of  the  terpenes  by  an  oxygenated  substance  of  allied  struc- 
ture. Cineol  is  such  a  substance,  and  with  it  the  deviations  from 
the  simple  proportionately  become  noticeable. 

These  deviations,  as  in  the  case  of  the  specific  rotatory  power, 
may  be  due  to  a  disturbance  of  the  equilibrium,  between  active 
and  racemic  terpene,  brought  about  by  the  cineol,  a  possibility 
supported  by  the  fact  that  the  refr activity  is  not  affected. 

It  is  in  the  density,  however,  that  the  divergences  from  the 
simple  proportionality  become  most  marked,  and  here  it  can  be 
shown  that  the  influence  is  molecular  rather  than  structural,  by  the 
fact,  that  when  the  theoretical  densities  .are  calculated  from  the 
molar  fractions  they  again  agree  with  the  observed.  In  the  simpler 
case  of  d-  and  l-pinene  the  molar  and  weight  fractions,  of  course, 
coincide,  since  the  two  molecular  weights  are  the  same. 

The  cineol  was  obtained  from  Bosisto's  01.  Eucalyptus  B.P.  by  con- 
version into  the  phosphoric  acid  compound  and  regeneration  with 
soda,  after  squeezing  out  the  terpenes  under  pressure.  The  pro- 
duct was  then  distilled  with  steam,  and  its  constants  were — 

a    =±0.00^ 
/A25=  1.4579 


K. 


.9220 


Physical  Gliemistry  of  Essential  Oils. 


ir>3 


Thk  System  i.-pinene— cineol. 


Mol.  p.c. 
Wt.    p.c. 

Found 
Wt.  p.c, 
Mol.  p.c. 

Found 
Wt.  p.c. 

Found 
Wt.  p.c. 
Mol. p.c. 


Concentration  1-pinene. 

l-l>ii)tiic. 

A. 

B.                  C. 

D. 

E. 

ciiieol. 

100 

82.46 

51.36         36.26 

16.34 

11.69 

0 

100 

80.26 

48.24         33.44 
Rotation — 

14.71 

10.47 

0 

$9.64''     - 

-  32.38° 

-19.650    -13.670 

-  5.980 

-  4.250 

0( 

... 

-32.130    . 

-19.310     -13.380 

-  5.890 

-^4.19o 

... 

-33.000 

-20.56O    -i4.51o 

-6.540 

-  4.670 

Refractive  Index  — 

1.4639 

1.4629 

1.4608       1.4600 

1.4587 

1.4585 

1.4579 

1.4628 

1.4608       1.4600 
Den.sity — 

1.4588 

1.4585 

.8646 

.8751 

.8931         .9016 

.9128 

.9166 

.9220 

.8760 

.8944         .9029 

.9136 

.9169 

.8747 

.8936         .9012 

.9127 

.9164 

The  System  d-pinene — cineol. 


Wt.  p.c. 
Mol.  p.c. 

Found 
Wt.  p.c. 

Found 
Wt.  p.c. 

Found 
Wt.  p.c. 
Mol.  p.c. 

Found 
Calc. 


fl-pineiie. 
10ft 
100 


29.510 


Concentration  d-pinene- 
A,  B.  C. 

82.84  64.18  46.85 

84.54  66.98  49.95 


21.220 
21.04O 


Rotation- 
16.560 
16.300 


12.07O 
11.90O 


Refractive  Index- 


1.4630 
1.4630 


1.4618 
1.4620 


1.4609 
1.4609 


Density — 

.8807  .8915 

.8825  .8931 

.8805  .8913 

Specific  Rotary  Power — 
24.390         18.800         13.54o 
24.450         18.940         13.83o 


.8700 
.8709 
.8699 


30.12 
32.80 


7.780 
7.650 


1.4598 
1.4597 


.9019 
.9034 
.9018 


8.620 
8.890 


E. 
17.91 
19.81 


4.600 
4.550 


1.4586 
1.4588 


.9095 
.9110 


5.06O 
5.290 


cineol. 
0 
0 


1.4579 


.9220 


Tlie  Si/stem   Cineol-Cifral. 

Here  one  of  the  constituents  of  the  mixture  has  an  open  chain. 
Unfortunately,  the  refractivities  lie  too  close  together  for  differ- 
ences to  be  detected,  and  both  substances  are  inactive. 

The  densities  show  fair  agreement  when  calculated  from  molar 
tractions,  but  apparently  other  factors  are  introduced  by  th'e 
wider  structural  differences. 

The  citral  was  from  Merck's,  and  was  characterised  as  follows — 
8,5=    .8900 
/^,,=  1.4780 


154  R.  B.  Dreiv  and  E.  I.  Rosenhlum . 

The  System  cineol-ciiral. 


Density — 

Citral. 

A. 

13.                C 

I). 

E. 

y. 

ciiieol. 

Found 

.8900 

.8946 

.9001       .9021 

.9066 

.9096 

.9124 

.9220 

Wt.  p.c.        . 

.8949 

.9008       .9030 

.9063 

.9101 

.9127 

Mol.  p.c.      . 

.8948 

.9007       .9026 

.9063 

.9099 

.9126 

Concentration  cineol— 

Wt.  p.c. 

O 

15.24 

33.73       40.-35 

50.98 

62.62 

70.70 

100 

Mol.  p.c.      . 

o 

15.07 

33.43       40.03 

50.65 

62.30 

70.42 

100 

The    Fhellandrene    Comj)lex. 

We  hoped  by  these  methods  to  obtain  from  the  rotation  of  a 
Eucalyptus  oil  an  indication  of  the  amount  of  phellandrene  it 
contained,  and  a  series  of  l-pliellandiene-cineol  mixtures  were 
made  up.  The  preparation  of  the  phellandrene  has  been  else- 
where^  described,  and  its  constants  were — 
a  =  -68.35° 
tx^,=  .8454 

8.,5=        1.4747 

The  results  were  rather  surprising,  for  we  found  that  if  the 
measurements  be  taken  immediately  after  mixing,  the  density  and 
rotation  agree  closely  with  the  calculated  values,  and  the  refrac- 
tive index  exactly,  but  the  mixtures  are  unstable,  rapidly  decreas- 
ing in  rotation,  and  increasing  in  density  and  refractive  index. 

This  change  goes  on  most  rapidly  in  the  presence  of  light  and 
oxygen,  more  slowly  in  the  dark,  and  not  at  all,  as  far  as  we  were 
able  to  make  out,  in  the  absence  of  oxygen. 

Phellandrene  itself  rapidly  changes  under  similar  conditions, 
attaining  equilibrium  when  its  rotation  is  about  -|-3o.  We  hope 
to  discuss  this  matter  more  fully  in   a   future  paper. 

The  System  l-phellandkene — cineol. 


Phellandrene. 

A. 

B. 

Rotation- 

c. 

I). 

E. 

Calc. 

-  13.630 

^  27.540      - 

^41.43o 

54.750 

40.760 

Obs.  201irs. 

-68.350 

-  12.900 

-25.150 

39.850 

-52.50O 

-  40.06O 

Obs.  48hrs. 

-  12.600 

-  21.630 

36.750 

-  46.820 

Refractive  I 

ndex — 

Calc. 

1.4627 

1.4659 

1.4688 

1.4719 

1.4688 

Obs.  Ihr... 

1.4747 

1.4628 

1 .4659 

1.4688 

1.4719 

1.4688 

Obs.  44  hrs. 

1.4631 

1.4678 
Density- 

1.4699 

1.4734 

Calc. 

.8980 

.8845 

.8714 

.8585 

.8719 

Obs.  ]  liv. 

.8986 

.8858 

.8728 

.8595 

.8726 

Obs.  44  hrs. 

.9018 

.8956 

.8776 

.8678 

.8764 

Concentra- 

tion. 

10(  1 

19.94 

4( ).:{(; 

60.62 

80.10 

59.64 

1.4579 


.9202 


R.  Barr.v  Drew.     Australian  Association  for  the  Advancement  of  Science.    Report  1913. 


Fhysicat  Chemistry  of  Essential  Oils.  155 

Summary. 

Simple  mixtures  of  two  terpens  compounds  follow  the  "  Mix- 
ture Law"  quite  closely.  The  divergences,  at  any  time  small,  are 
eliminated  by  the  use  of  the  "  Molar  Fraction  Fox-mula." 

For  such  mixtures  the  proportions  of  the  constituents  can  be 
calculated  from  the  properties  of  the  mixture,  but  whex'e  one  con- 
stituent is  niistal)le.  as  in  phellandrene  oils,  such  deductions  are 
unreliable. 

These  measurements  w^ere  made  in  the  research  laboratories  of 
the  University  of  Melbourne,  for  the  use  of  which  we  have  to  thank 
Professor  Masson. 

Our  thanks  are  also  due  to  Professor  Osborne  for  the  use  of  his 
polarimeter.  and  especially  to  Mr.  H.  G.  Smith  for  his  generous 
gift  of  pinene  eucalyptus  oils. 


Part   II. — 7%e  Physical  Constants  of  some   Terpenes  and  oxygenated 
derivatives  thereof,  and  their  variation  with  temperature. 


E.    IVAN    ROSEN  BLUM,    M.Sc. 

(Comnmnicated  by   VV.  Heber  Green,  D.Sc). 

[Read  9th  July,  1914). 

Some  measurements  which  had  been  made  in  the  course  of  the 
last  paper,  and  the  fac-t  that  he  had  on  hand  samples  of  a  number 
of  terpenes  prepared  for  that  research,  led  one  of  the  authors  to 
make  a  so-ies  of  measurements  on  the  influence  of  temperature 
change  on  the  three  chief  physical  constants  of  terpenes — Density, 
Kefractive  Index,   and  Rotation. 

The  terpenes  employed  are,  in  the  main,  those  whose  purifica- 
tion has  been  described  in  the  joint  paper ;  the  others  were  as  sup- 
plied by  Merck  and  Kahlbaum,  and,  with  two  exceptions,  their 
purity  as  indicated  by  their  constants  and  by  the  usual  tests  was 
such  as  to  render  it  unnecessary  to  submit  them  to  the  somewhat 
uncertain  processes  involved  in  further  purification. 


156  E.  I.  Roseiihlurii: 

The  density  and  refractive  index  of  the  terpineol  indicate  that 
it  is  mainly  the  isomer  of  M.  Pt.  350-.'36o  C,  Avhile  the  high  den- 
sity and  diminished  rotation  of  the  d-limonene  point  to  some 
modification  having  occurred  since  it  was  originally  prepared  by 
Kahlbaum. 

Although  the  uncertain  purity  which  is  inherent  to  the  terpenes 
renders  these  results  less  valuable  from  the  point  of  view  of  physico- 
chemical  theory,  they  may  none  the  less  be  regarded  as  standards 
bv  workers  in  the  fascinating  field  of  Essential  Oils. 


Substance. 

Souroe. 

C;onstaiits  at  20*( 

3. 

8 

n 

a 

1-phellandrene  . 

d-pinene 

1-pinene 

pinene 

d-limonene 

. .    Eucalyptus   dives  oil 
..    E.   dextropinea   oil 
..    E.   laevopinea  oil 
.    American   turpeutine 
. .    Kahlbaum 

.8551 
.8682 
.8668 
.8603 
.8922 

1.4783 
1.4659 
1.4665 
1.4690 
1.4814 

-65.110 
+  25.140 
-  39.810 
+  .1.00 
+  81.950 

cineol 

..    Bosisto,   Melbourne 

.9239 

1.4598 

±  O.OOo 

eugenol 
safrol 

..    Merck          

..    Merck          

1.0667 
1.1003 

1.5415 
1.5385 

-0.03O 
2=  O.OOo 

terpineol 
citral 

..    Merck          

..    Merck          

...    .9354 

.8912 

1.4835 

1.4889 

H  0.04O 
d=  O.OOo 

(1)  The  Density. 

The  densities  were  measured  at  ten  degree  intervals  between  10° 
and  60O  by  means  of  a  pyknometer  holding  about  6  c.c,  and  a 
bath,  which  could  be  maintained  at  any  required  temperature, 
while  a  measurement  was  in  progress.  Incidental  errors  due  to 
expansion  of  the  glass  of  the  pyknometer,  etc.,  were  eliminated 
by  taking  a  series  of  pyknometer  values  for  distilled  water  over 
the  temperature  range,  calculating  the  specific  gravity  from  these, 
and  then  deriving  the  density  as  referred  to  water  at  4°  (\  from 
the  tables  of  the  density  of   water. 

These  densities  at  ten-degree  intervals  are  shown  in  the  accompanying 
table. 

It  will  be  observed  that,  while  the  coetficients  of  expansion  are 
in  all  cases  close  together,  they  fell  into  two  groups,  the  oxy- 
genated substances  cineol,  safrol  and  eugenol  expanding  to  a 
greater  degree  than  the  hydrocarbons. 

Citral,  the  only  straight  chain  terpene,  and  terpineol,  are  ex- 
ceptional. The  relation  of  temperature  to  density  is  strictly  linear 
except  in  the  case  of  the  ever-exceptional  1-phcllandrene,  whore  a 
slight  divergence  is  shown. 


Physical  Ghemlsfri/  of  Kssentiol  OiU 


'J'hk  Densities. 


Substance. 

lO" 

20o 

30" 

40" 

.500 

60» 

C'oefT. 

l-phellandrene 

.8635 

.8551 

.8469 

.8387 

.8306 

.8224   .. 

.  .000826 

d-pinene 

.8763 

.8682 

.8602 

.8522 

.8442 

.8361   .. 

807 

l-pinene 

.8750 

.8668 

.8586 

.8504 

.8422 

.8340 

821 

pinene 

.8685 

.8603 

.8521 

.8439 

.8356 

.8274 

822 

d-limoneue  •■• 

.9004 

.8922 

.8840 

.8759 

.8679 

.8599   . 

811 

cineol 

.9324 

.9239 

.9153 

.9067 

.8982 

.8896   . 

857 

■eugenol 

1.0754 

1.0667 

1.0579 

1.0492 

1.0404 

1.0316 

876 

saf  rol 

1.1090 

1.1003 

1.0915 

1.0828 

1.0740 

1.0652   . 

876 

terpineol 

.9432 

.9354 

.9276 

.9198 

.9120 

.9042 

780 

citral 

.8992 

.8912 

.8832 

.8752 

.8671 

.8891 

800 

(.2)  Tlie  Refractive  Index. 

Of  recent  papers  on  the  relation  between  refractive  index  and 
temperature  the  most  interesting  are  those  of  Falk^,  who  found  a 
linear  relation  for  those  substances  he  examined,  none  of  which, 
however,  were  terpenes. 

In  the  present  research  in  every  case  there  are  found  divergences 
from  this  simple  proportionality,  the  temperature  coefficient  in- 
creasing with  the  rise  of  temperature  except  in  the  cases  of  cineol 
and  of  l-pinene,  where  it  decreases,  and  the  divergences  bein^" 
most  marked   in  the   results  for  l-phellandrene. 

Like  the  coefficients  of  expansion,  these  temperature  coefficients 
varv  only  within  narrow-  limits  from  .000402  for  d-pinene  to 
.000480  for  l-phellandrene.  Since  the  coefficients  for  those  organic 
substancs,  whose  refractive  indices  are  tabulated  in  Landolt- 
Bornstein,  vary  from  .0003  to  .0008,  this  magnitude  appears  to 
be  a  constitutional  one.  The  measurements  of  refractive  index 
between  lOo  and  60^  are  tabulated  in  the  table.  They  were  ob- 
tained in  a  Zeiss  refractometer,  fitted  wuth  a  constant  temperature 
device,   which  ensured  constancy  to   at  least    .1°. 

Three  formulae  have  been  suggested  for  calculating  the  refractive 
power — 

(1)    n-\ld     (2)    n'-\:d   and    (3)    ir  -  \ ; {n^  + '2)d 

and  Falk  found  that  ir-ijd  gave  values  that  decreased  as  the 
temperature  I'ose,  tr  —  \j{>r  -\-'2d)  values  that  increased,  while,  when 
n  —  \jd\yA>i  used  for  the  calcidation.  they  increased  in  some  cases 
and  decreased  in  others. 


1   J.  Amer.  Cheni.  Soc,  1909,  31.  86,  806. 
Zeit.  Physik.  Cheiu.,  1913,  82,  504. 


158 


E.  I.  RosenUum 


This  has  been  confirmed  for  the  terpenes  used  in  the  present 
research,  and  since  the  n-l/d  figures  approach  more  closely  to 
constancy  than  those  based  on  tlie  other  two  formula?,,  they  have 
been  adopted  for  comparing  the  molecular  refractive  powers. 

The  constants  are  calculated  by  the  three  formulae  for  cineol, 
1-phellandrene  and  1-pinene  are  shown  in  a  table,  and  the  values 
of  «- l/c?x  M  are  shown  for  all  tlie  substances,  plotted  against  the 
temperatures. 

These  curves  do  not  show  much  agreement  with  one  another,  the 
greatest  deviations  being,  as  usual,  shown  by  1-phellandrene;  but 
it  will  be  seen  that  the  influence  of  temperature,  though  small,  is 
regular,   and  gives  smooth  curves. 

Eisenlohri  has  recently  obtained  as  accurately  as  possible  a  series 

Refractive  Indices. 


Substance. 

lllo 

•20o 

30" 

40" 

50o 

60o 

Average 
coeff. 

1-phellaiidreue 

1.4822 

1.4783 

1.4742 

1.4695 

1.4642 

1.4582     .. 

.      .0(K)480 

d-pinene 

1.4698 

1.4659 

1.4619 

1.4578 

1.4537 

1.4497     . 

.      .000402 

1-pinene 

1.4713 

1.4665 

1.4617 

1.4570 

1.4525 

1.4481      .. 

.      .000464 

pinene 

1.4734 

1.469() 

1.4645 

1.4598 

1.4549 

1.4499     . 

.      .00047a 

d-limonene    ... 

1.4857 

1.4814 

1.4769 

1.4723 

1.4677 

1.4630     . 

.      .000454 

cineol 

1.4648 

1.4598 

1.4550 

1.4505 

1.4462 

1.4420     .. 

.     .000456 

eugenol 

1.5455 

1.5415 

1.5374 

1.5329 

1.5282 

1.5236     . 

.      .0004 

saf  rol 

1.5425 

1.5385 

1.5343 

1.5300 

1.5252 

1.5205     . 

.     .000440 

terpineol 

1.4878 

1.4835 

1.4792 

1.4748 

1.4706 

1.4664     . 

.     .000428 

citral 

1.4929 

1.4889 

1.4848 

1.4802 

1.4752 

1.4700     . 

.     .000458 

Eepbactive  powers  by  various  formulae. 


l-X>hellandrene. 

l-pinene. 

t" 

m2  -  i/d 

a     l/rf 

n'i-l/(«'i  +  2)d 

t" 

„-i-l/d 

n-l/d     tii 

-l/(na  +  2)d 

10 

13868 

5584 

3302 

10 

13321 

5386 

3198 

20 

13851 

5593 

3312 

20 

13280 

5382 

3199 

30 

13849 

5598 

3323 

30 

13234 

5378 

3199 

40 

13827 

5597 

3324 

40 

13206 

5374 

3203 

50 

13770 

5588 

3318 

50 

13178 

5372 

3206 

60 

13696 

5571 

3319 

60 

13152 

5372 

3210 

Cineol. 

Citral. 

t" 

n'i  -  i/d 

n-m 

«-J-l/(n2+2)d 

to 

/(••2     I/d 

n  ■-  yd     ivi 

-l/(».-2-2)d 

10 

12290 

4985 

2964 

10 

136.63 

5482 

3231 

20 

12242 

4976 

2963 

20 

13653 

5485 

3238 

30 

12205 

4971 

2964 

30 

13639 

5488 

3244 

40 

12175 

4968 

2967 

40 

13605 

5487 

3247 

50 

12150 

4968 

2970 

50 

13565 

5481 

3248 

60 

12135 

4967 

2976 

60 

13515 

5472 

3249 

1    Zeit.  Fhysik.  Oieni.,  1011,  75,  58;"). 


Physical  Chemistrt/  of  Essential  Oils. 


159 


Molecular  Kefkactive  Power  n-lld.M 


Substance. 

lOo 

20" 

300 

40« 

50" 

60" 

1-phellandrene 

75.94 

76.06 

76.13 

76.12 

76.00 

75.77 

d-pineue 

72.92 

72.96 

73.03 

73.08 

73.12 

73.16 

1-pinenc 

73.24 

73.18 

73.14 

73.08 

73.06 

73.05 

pinene     

74.14 

74.15 

74.14 

74.11 

74.05 

73.96 

d-limoueue 

73.36 

73.38 

73.37 

73.33 

73.29 

73.23 

cineol       

76.76 

76.62 

76.54 

76.50 

76.49 

76.48 

eugenol 

83.2U 

83.26 

83.32 

83.30 

83.26 

83.23 

safrol       

79.26 

79.29 

79.32 

79.30 

79.24 

79.18 

terpineol 

79.66 

79.61 

79.57 

79.52 

79.48 

79.44 

citral       

83.32 

83.37 

83.42 

83.40 

83.31 

83.18 

Molecular  Eefractions  at  20° 

a.  Found  [w^  -  l/(n2  +  2)rf .  M  formulaj 

b.  Calculated  from  Atomic  liefractionsi 


Substance. 
1-phellandrene 
d-pinene 
1-pinene 
pinene 
d-limonene 
cineol 
eugenol 
safrol 
terpineol 
citral 


45.05 

45.25 

43.37 

43.51 

43.48 

43.51 

44.03 

43.51 

43.42 

45.25 

45.63 

45.62 

48.35 

47.37 

46.08 

45.40 

46.45 

45.04 

49.22 

46.78 

of  atomic  refractions,  and  these  have  been  used  to  calculate  the 
theoretical  molecular  refractions.  As  will  be  seen,  these  are  in 
excellent  agreement  with  the  experimental  values  in  some  cases,  but 
in  others,  as  in  that  of  citral,  where  the  constants  of  the  sample 
showed  it  to  be  of  quite  satisfactory  purity,  the  large  divergence  is 
difficult  to  account  for.  In  the  cases  of  eugenol,  safrol,  and  ter- 
pineol, it  may  be  due  in  part  to  the  unknown  influence  of  ring 
formation. 

The  value  for  phellandrene  lends  some  support  to  Wallach's 
formula  for  that  terpene,   in  that  it  indicates  two  double  Ijonds. 

(3)  The  Rotation. 

Considerable  attention  has  been  devoted  to  the  influence  of  tem- 
perature on  rotation,  and  from  the  work  of  a  number  of  chemists 
it  appears  that  the  rotation   of  solids  dissolved   in   non-active  sol- 


1   Eis^nlohr.     Zeit.  Physik.  Chem.,  1911, 


160  E.  I.  Rosenblum  : 

vents  increases  when  the  temperature  rises,  while  that  of  optically 
active  liquids  decreases. 

Guye  and  Astonl  examined  some  fifty  organic  liquids,  and  found 
that  in  all  cases  except  that  of  amyl  alcohol  the  rotatory  power 
diminished  with  rise  of  temperature.  This  exceptional  case  they 
explained  by  the  dissociation  of  i:)reviously  associated  molecules. 

The  rotations  of  the  only  four  terpenes  which  were  optically 
active  were  measured  over  a  range  of  from  20°  to  60^  by  means 
of  a  Ptilfrich  polarimeter,  fitted  Avith  a  device  for  varying  the 
temperature  of  the  tube  by  means  of  a  bath,  and  the  experimental  values 
are  .shown  in  the  accompanying  table,  while  the  molecular  rotatory 
powers  -  ajlAld.M.-  have  also  been  calculated  and  plotted  against  the 
temperature. 

The  rotations  of  d-  and  1-pinene  are  little  affected  by  tempera- 
ture change,  but  slowly  decrease  as  the  temperature  rises.  That 
of  d-limonene  falls  0.134O  for  every  degree  rise  of  temperature, 
while  phellandrene  again  shows  its  abnormal  character  by  a  marked 
increase  of  rotation. 

In  every  one  of  its  physical  properticvS  then,  the  curious  nature 
of  this  terpene,  as  obtained  from  the  oil  of  Eucalyptus  dives,  is 
expressed.  It  appears  as  if  it  must  either  be  a  mixture  of  two 
terpenes  inseparable  by  distillation,  whose  equilibrium  is  upset  by 
temperature  change,  or,  as  seems  more  probable,  the  molecules  may 
be  associated  at  the  lower  temperatures,  as  in  the  case  of  amyl 
alcohol. 

Furtlier  work  may  shed  more  light  on  this   interesting  terpene. 

Rotation. 


to 

1-phelIandrene. 

d-pineiie. 

d-limonene. 

I-pinene. 

150 

-AO.Olo 

20O 

-65.110 

+  25.11° 

+  81.92° 

-.39.860 

250 

-  65.550 

+  25.09° 

+  81.44° 

-.39.6.30 

300 

-  66.080 

+  25.05° 

+  80.74° 

-39.460 

40O 

^67.020 

+  24.92° 

+  79.19° 

-39.090 

50o 

-87.930 

+  24.78° 

+  77.66° 

-  38.760 

600 

-69.020 

+  24.62'^ 

+  76.49° 

-  38.440 

70O 

-70.000 

+  74.85° 

... 

Molecular  Eotations  -  .  -  .  M 

I     d 


Substance. 

200 

30O 

40" 

.500 

600 

1-phellandrene 

103.56 

106.12 

108.73 

111.34 

114.08 

d-pinene 

39.38 

39.54 

39.72 

39.90 

40.08 

1-pinene 

62.42 

62.52 

62.58 

62.63 

62.69 

d-limonene 

124.93 

124.33 

123.48 

122.43 

121.30 

1    Conipt.  Rend.,  1897,  124,  194197. 
Compt.  Kend.,  1897,  126,  819-821. 


Physical  Gheinistt-y  of  Essential  Oils.  IGl 


0° 


I. 

Molecular   Kefkactivk    Power    — ^^ 

10°  20°  30°  40°  50'  GO' 


70°    T 
S3. 


83 


^^^^ 

««— 

o-.*...,^^^ 

LUGEA 

OL 

ClTRAl 

-1 



■ 

lERPlN 

:oL 

S^^M 

1L 

--     i-i^ 

^^ 

L 

ClNLQl 

.^^ 

.— ^            "^ 

l.-eHCL 

LKNIiT^ 

tNL 

^^ 

■■             ■• 

PlNLNi 

- 

d-UK 

DNENt 

— — 

r-. 

=»«- 

i-?it 

lEMt 

l-Pi 

iLNt 

re.s 


76 


162 


E.  I.  Rosenbliun 


II. 

MOLECTTLAR     EOTATOBT     PoWER. 

30°  40''  50' 


CO"  70°     T 


ll'3 


"^ 

--^ 

i- LLin 

OTLETVe, 

^^ 

\ 

/ 

/ 

/ 

/ 

/ 

in.Tid 

rene 

i 

/ 

/ 

/ 

L-Klti 

iTiE 

■ ■ 

d-jlLTl 

ETia 

Physical  Chemistry  of  Essential  Oils. 


COEFFICIKNTS. 

Substance. 

Density. 

Refr. 

Index. 

notation. 

1-phellandrene 

.(K)0826 

.000480 

+  .097 

d-pincne 

807 

UYl 

-  .01:? 

1-pinene 

821 

464 

-  .034 

pinene 

822 

470 

d-limonene 

811 

454 

-.132 

cineol 

857 

456 

eugenol 

876 

458 

saf rol 

876 

44(J 

terpineol 

780 

428 

citral 

802 

458 

SuDiinnri/ . 

1.  The  influence  of  temperatuie  change  on  tlie  density,  refrac- 
tive index,  and  rotation  of  a  nunil)er  of  terpenes  and  allied  sub- 
stances has  been  studied. 

2.  In  the  cases  of  density  and  refractive  index  the  temperature 
coefficients  all  lie  close  together,  while  the  divergences  from  a  linear 
relation  are  slight. 

3.  Laevo-phellandrene,  as  obtained  from  the  oil  of  Eucalyptus 
dives,  is  in  all  its  relations  somewhat  abnormal,  and  the  suggestion 
is  made  that  it  may  form  associated  molecules  at  the  lower  tempera- 
tures. 

The  thanks  of  the  author  are  due  to  Dr.  Heber  Green  for  the 
interest  he  has  shown  in  this  research. 


[Proc.  Koy.  Soc.  Victoria,  27  (N.S.),  Pt.  II.,  1914]. 

Art    XIII. — Singular   Parameter    Values   in   the   Boundary 
Problems  of  the  Potential  Theory. 

By   C.    E.    weather  burn,    M.A.,    B.Sc. 

(Ormond  College,  University  of  Melbourne). 

[Read  9tli  July,  1914]. 

The  method  of  integral  equations  has  been  successfully  applied 
to  the  boundary  problems  requiring  the  determination  of  poten- 
tials, Vs{p)  and  \(p)  satisfying  the  boundary  relations^  — 

i^&>-'-£V)]-KS<'-»-£<->]='(" 

respectively,  whether  the  potentials  are  ordinary2  corresponding  to 
Laplace's  equation,  or  "  generalised  "  corresponding  to  the  equa- 
tion— 

(•2)  v-'U-FU  =  0 

The  latter  potential  I  have  considered  in  a  paper^  recently  com- 
municated to  the  Quartei-ly  Journal.  It  is  shewn  that  solutions  to 
the  problems  can  be  uniijuely  determined,  except  for  certain  singu- 
lar values  of  the  parameter,  in  the  form  of  potentials  of  double  and 
simple  strata  respectively,  given  by'* — 

(3)        i  W{r>)^/i{t)n{tp)dt 

\  Y{'p)=/(A{pt)t{t)dt. 
At  a  singular  i^a'-ivnietei'  value  A,,,  however,  the  solutions  become 
intinite,  since  each  of  thy  functions  ii(fp)  and  (^{pt)  has  a  simple 
pole,  unless  certain  conditions  are  satished.  It  will  be  sliewn  that 
the  parts  H{tp)  and  (T{pt)  of  these  functions  remaining  finite  at  the 
pole  Ay,  form  tlie  corresponding  functions  for  the  solutions  at  this 
pole  of  the  problems  (1),  which,  however,  must  be  modified"'  in  their 
second  members.  The  residues  P(^//)  and  <.}(pf)  of  B.{t p)  and  G:{pt) 
respectively,  also  play  an  important  part  in  the  following  argu- 
ment. 


1  Poineare.     " Sur  les  Equations  fie  la  Physique."     Rendicoiiti,  Paleinio,  ISiU. 

2  Plemelj.     Moiiatsfefte  \\\v  Math,   umi  Physik,  Bd.   1.5,  .S.  ;«7-4U  (1!»U4):    Brt.   18,  8.   180-211 
(1907). 

3  "  Boundary     ]irol)leiiis     for     tlic     <;eiK'iaHsed    potential     coiiesponfliny    to      tlie     equation 
V2u-A;-U  =  0."      Quarterly  Journal,  vol.  4G,  \^\^.  «(J-S2. 

4  The  integ-ration  throujrhout  is  e.xtended  over  the  boundary  of  tlie  resiou  considered,  uidess 
otherwise  stated.     The  notation  of  my  previous  payier  is  adhered  to. 

5  Weatherburn,  loc.  eit.  §  0  ;  also  Plemelj,  loc.  cit.,  S.  iO\-U. 


Pdva/meter    Values  of    Potential  Theory.  165 

Pleiuelj's  work'  is  (.(HitiiitMl  to  the  ordinary  potential  and  deals 
chiefly  with  the  pole  \=+l.  The  present  paper  extends  the  in- 
vestigation to  the  generalised  potential,  and  also  to  the  general 
pole  Ao.  For  this  charaeteristic  number,  which  may  be  any  what- 
ever, more  general  relations  are  established  connecting  the  resi- 
dues and  the  functions  H{tj))  and  G(pq),  which  correspond  to  the 
modified  problems.  The  boundary  discontinuities  of  these  func- 
tions and  their  derivatives  are  investigated,  and  also  certain 
theorems  of  reciprocity.  Expansions  for  the  various  functions  are 
found  as  power  series  in  the  parameter  A. 

In  the  tirst  part  of  the  paper  the  investigation  applies  to  the 
ordinary  and  generalised  potentials  alike.  In  the  second  part 
the  ordinary  potential  is  considered  separately,  and  results  pecu- 
liar to  Laplace's  equation  are  obtained  which  depend  either  upon 
the  fact  that  A=±l  are  here  characteristic  numbers,  or  upon  the 
special  value  of  the  integral  of  h(tp)  extended  ovei-  the  boundary. 
Values  for  the  boundary  integrals  of  the  different  functions  are 
investigated.  Further  from  the  convergence  of  the  above  expan- 
sions when  |Al  =  l  a  value  is  deduced  for  the  conductoi'  potential. 
It  will  also  be  shoAvn  that  the  solutions  of  thti  second  boundary 
problem  for  the  inner  and  outer  regions  ai'e  expressible  in  terms 
of  a  single  function. 

Finally  the  case  of  the  generalised  potential  is  considered 
separately.  The  value  is  found  of  the  integral  of  Ii(tp)  extended 
over  the  boundary,  in  terms  of  the  potential  of  a  space  distribu- 
tion of  matter.  Further  relations  are  found  connecting  the  boun- 
dary integrals  of  the  other  functions  involved. 

I. — Ordindry  and  (jeneralised  poientials. 

^1.  Solntions  and  flieir  p(dex.  The  solutions  of  the  boundary 
problems  as  given  by  (o),  when  expressed  in  terms  of  the  resolvent 
H(^s)  become^ — 

(3')  \  W(p)  ^fi{l)[k{fp)  +  \rR{te)h{(Jp)d6]df. 

'.  V(p)=/[gU>t)  +  \/\j{p6)K{et)dd]Uf)df 
where 

h{ep)=fy{ep) 

6  being  a  point  on  the  boundary,  and  {/  (p>/)  is  a  particular  solu- 
tion of  Laplace's  ecjuation  if  the  potential  is  ordinary,  and  of  the 
equation  (2)  if  it  is  genei'alised.  The  value  of  this  function  is 
given   by — 

1  Cf.  also  "  PotentialUieoreti&che  Untersuchunfjen,"  Teubner,  Leipzig  (1911). 

2  Cf.  Weatherbuin.     Loc.  cit.  §  2. 


166  G.  E.   Weatherhurn: 

'    '  V  yiP'j)  =    log    ^01'  t-lie  logarithmic  potential 

y{p'l)  =  ^'      ^or  the  Newtonian  potential 
which  are  solutions  of  Laplace's  equation;  and 
^^'^  I  il(.P<])  ^  -/U''-)  fo>"  tlie  plane 


(  !?(y"7)  =   -    •«"*'■/*■  ^O''  •'^P^c^ 


■when  the  potential  is  generalised  correspduding  to  the  equation 
(2).  In  this  /•  is  the  radius  vector  joining  the  i)(>ints  /;  and  q, 
and  f{z)  has  the  same  meaning  as  in  my  paper  already  referi-ed 
to.  The  functions  H(</j)  and  G(^0  '^'^'^  equal  to  tlie  correspond- 
ing expressions  of  (3')  in  st|uare  brackets.  The  foiiuer  is  an  ex- 
tension of  the  solving  function  in  which  any  ])oint  y  rejilaces  the 
boundary  point  .*;.  The  latter  may  be  defined  more  generally  for 
any  two  points  pq  by — 

G(m)  =  'An)  +  Vi/(p^)H(%)f^« 

This  function  is  the  Green's  functicni^  for  the  lioundary  problems 
(1).  It  will  be  seen  that  H(#/;)  can  be  expressed  in  terms  of  it  by 
normal  differentiation,  so  that  both  solutions  (•))  can  be  given 
in  terms  of  it  by  a  representation  of  Green's  type.  It  is  easily 
verified   that 

j'g{qt)VL{tp)dt  =  /'G  {q()h{tp)dt 
.so  that  the  equations  defining  and  connecting  these   tinutions   aie — 

(5)  j  liitp)  -  hilp)  =  XJ'h{l6)\l{ep)dd=\i  H{/0)h{dp)d& 

\  G{qp)~g{qp)^\/cj{qd}K{dp)d6  =  k/\;(qO)h{6p)d6 

Now  when  X.  is  ecjual  to  a  characteristic  number  (singular  value) 
Ao,  each  of  the  functions  'il{tp)  and  G{qp)  has  a  simple  pole."^  The 
solutions  expressed  by  (3)  are  therefore  infinite,  and  cease  to  have 
.a  meaning.     Since  the  pole  is  simple  we  mav  write — 

where  IHjp)  and  <'(/j[')  are  functions  of  A,  which  depend  on  A,, 
and  remain  tinite  when  A— A,, ;  the  residues  !'(//>)  and  A„  Qiqp) 
-do  not  involve  A  but  depend  on  A„.  It  iiow  v.e  siiiistitute  from 
.(6)    in    (5),    multiply    l)y     (Ay-A)    and    pr<icecd    to    the    limit     A=A,„ 

we  obtain  tlie  following  relations  : — 

(7)  (  ¥{tp)  =  \jTite)h{0p)de  =  Xj7,{tt^)V{Up)dO 

)  Q(qp)=/y{q6)'P{dp)de  =  XJ-q(q(J)hidp)de  

1  Of.  VVeatheibuni.     "Green's  Functions  for  the  equntioii    A  "-^  (/-/.-'.!(( =0,   etc."      (^Hiarterly 
Journal,  vol.  4G.     The  remaining  references  are  to  my  earlier  paper. 
•2    Weatherburii.     Loc.  cit.  §  3. 


Parameter   Values  of  Potential  Theory.  167 

If  again  we  substitute  from  (6)  in  (5)  and  use  tlio  i-elations  (7) 
we  find — 

^^^    J  xfh{td)H{ep}d6=x/ii{te)h{ep)do=ii{tp)-.h{tp)  +  ~  .p(^;>) 

I  \fg{qd)H{dp)d  e=  \rG{qe)  h{dp)d  6=  G{qp)  -  cj{qp)  V  Q.{qp) 
These  relations  are  more  general  than  those  found  for  the  ordinary 
potential  by  Plemelj,  who  considers  mainly  the  pole  A=  +1.  They 
play  an  important  part  in  our  argument. 

The  value  of  'P{ts)  is  known,  being  the  residue  of  tlie  resolvent 
for  the  simple  pole  Xq-  I^  '"■  ^^^  the  order  of  multiplicity  of  the 
root  Ao  of  the  determinant  D{/\),  P(^s)  may  be  expressed  as  the 
sum 

(9)  P{te)  =  <^,(0<Al(«)  +  Ut)Hs)  +    •   .   •    +  <t>m{t)^m{s) 

where  the  functions  ^i,  i//i(i=:l,  2,  .  .  .  .  m)  are  the  m  linearly 
independent  solutions  of  the  homogeneous  integral  equations. 

<ji{t)=Xo/h{te)<f>{e)de 

x(f{t)  =  ko/^{0)h{dt)de 
satisfying  the  usual  orthogonal  relations.     Hence  the  values  of  P{tp) 
.and  Q,{qp)  are  given  by 

(9')         j  -P{tp)  =cfy,{t)4,,{p)+ +<f>mmm{p) 

\  Q{qp)  =  ^i{q)hip)+ +^m{?)MP) 

where  ^(q)  is  the  potential  of  a  simple  stratum  of  density  (j>{t)  over  the 
boundary,  and  i/^Qj)  is  that  of  a  double  stratum  of  moment  Xa^(t). 
If  we  introduce  the  functions 

^^^)         jk{tp)  =  h{tp)-\-P{tp) 

we  are  enabled  to  express  (8)  in  a  form  exactly  similar  to  (5).  For 
if  in  the  first  of  (8)  we  replace  p  by  0,  multiply  throughout  by 
V(Op)  and  integrate  over  the  boundary,  we  find  in  virtue  of  (T) 
that 

/H(te)V{ep)dd  =/F{td)H{Op)de  =  o. 

Similarly  it  may  be  proved  that 

J  G{qd)V{dp)dd  =/Q{qe)H{ep)d6  =  0. 

These  integrals  may  therefore  be  combined  with  the  integrals  in  (8) 
without  altering  their  values,  so  that  the  relations  may  be 
Avritten 

(11)      (  \j'k{tO)H{ep)de = xf  H{td)k{ep)dd  =  H(tp)  -  k{tp) 

1  Xfl{qB)H{ep)dd  =  \fG{qd)k{ep)de^G{qp)-l{qp) 
which  are  of  the  same  form  as  (5);  but  G^qj)),  as  will  be  seen,   is 
the  Green's  function  for  the  modified  problems,   and  H  {tp)  bears 
the  same  relation  to  it  that  H(#j5)  bears  to  G(5'jp). 

3a 


168  C.  E.    Weatherburn  : 

^2. — Bouiuhtnj  discqut inuifitx. — The  second  of  equations  (9) 
shows  that  Q  {qj)).  regarded  as  a  function  of  r/,  is  the  potential 
of  a  simple  stratum  of  density  ^(Op).  From  the  boundary  pro- 
perties of  such  it  follows  that 

Adding     and    subtracting     we     find     for    the     normal     derivative     of 
Q{qp)  on  either  side  of  the  boundary 

1ao|q(^»  =  (1-A,)P(^^.) 

Regarded,  however,  as  a  fuiictiou  of  p,  Q  (qp)  is  a  double  stratum 
potential  of  moment  X^Qi?^)-     Henco 
)  i[Q(^^+)-Q(g<-)]  =  A„Q(<?0 

» lSQ{qt-)  +  Q{qi+)]  =  xjQ{qe)h{et)dd=q(qt) 

Adding  and  subtracting  we  have  for  the  values  of  Q  (qp)  on  either 
side  of  the  boundary 

(13)  jQ{qt  +  ):={i+K)Q{qt) 

\  Q{qt-)  =  {l-K)Q{^f) 

Similarly  P  (sp)  as  a  function  of  p  is  a  double  stratum  of 
moment  X(,^{sO)  ;  and  its  values  on  either  side  of  the  boundary  are- 
found  in  the  same  way  to  be 

(14)  I  F{st+)  =  {]+X,)-P{st) 
\-p{.sf.-)  =  {\-X,)P{sl) 

From  the  second  of  equations  (10)  G(qp),  regarded  as  a  function 
of  ^  is  the  sum  of  potentials  g(qp), —Q,{qp),  and  a  simple  stratum 
of  density  Xff(Op).  From  the  behaviour  of  tliese  at  the  boundary, 
and  in  virtue  ..f  (12),   it  follows 

ir^,a^f~p)+  lG(t^p)']  =  X/HW)H{Op)dO  +  /,{tp)-T{tp)/X, 
Lan  ail  J 

^H{tp) 
Addiiiir    and   sul)sti-actin<'-  we   find 


(15) 


\^!^ 


{t~r)  =  {\+x)iJ{tp)-V(fp) 


^a{f+p)  =  {l-X)H(tp)  +  F{tp) 


Parameter   Values  of  Potential  Tlieory  :  1  69 

Regarded,  however,  as  a  function  of  p,  G(qp)  is  a  double  stratum 
potential  of  moment  XG{gB),  together  with  potentials  g{qp)  and 
—  Q(gp).     From  the  boundary  properties  of  these  we  deduce 

(16)  ^G{gt  +  )={1  +  \)G{gt)  -  XMi^t) 
lG{qt    )  =  {l-\)G{qt)+XMqt) 

Finally  H{sp)  regarded  as  a  function  of  p  is  the  sum  of  potentials 
h{sp),  —'P(sp)IXg,  and  a  double  stratum  of  moment  X/I(s$).  From 
which  it  follows,  in  virtue  of  (14)  that 

(17)  I  H{st + )  =  ( 1  +  X)II{  St)  -  V{st) 
il{{st-)  =  ( 1  -X)II(.st)  +  P{st) 

§3. — Solution  regular  at  a  singular  parameter  value. — We  are 
now  in  a  position  to  find  solutions  to  the  boundary  problems  (1), 
with  second  members  modified,  having  no  singularities  for  the 
characteristic  number  X^.  If  we  define  the  functions  W{p)  and 
V{p)  Ijy 

(18)  ^w{p)=/i{d)H{ep)de 
lv{p)=fG{pd)i{e)de 

we   find    on  suljstituting  the   values  of   H{Op)  from  (8)   that    W{p)  is 
the    sum   of  potentials  of  double  strata  of  moments  f(;;), -/"f  (^)P^0^^5 
and  X/'i{6)JI{6t)d6  respectively. 
Hence  we  find  that 

h[W{t+) -  ir(^-)]  -u[ir(^+)+  w{t^)] 

=  i(t)  -/i{e}F{et)dd + xfi  {6)H{et)  do 

-  xf{  f  {(f>)h{(f>t)  -ft  {d)F(e(f>)h{cf>t)de + xfi{e)H{0(fi)h{(jit)de]dcf> 

In  virtue  of  (8)  the  second  member  disappears  except  for  the  first 
two  terms.      So  that  W(p)  satisfies  the  boundary  condition. 

(19a)    i,[Wit+)-  n'{t-)] - hx[ W{t+)  +  w{t-)]=f{t) -fi(e)F{dt)dd 

In  this  all  the  function.s  are  regular  when  A=/\„  ;  so  that 
this  equation  admits  the  solution  W{p)  which  is  regular  even 
when  X  is  put  e(|ual  to  the  singular  value  A^.  It  has  been  shown 
elsewhere^  tliat  for  this  value  of  the  parameter  tlie  first  problem  (1) 
does  not  admit  a  solution  by  double  stratum  unless  the  condition 

/f(^)P(^0^^  =  0 
is  satisfied,   in  whicli  case  the  solution   is  obviously  TI  (/?). 

Similarly  substituting  the  value  of  G{pd)  given  by  (8)  we  find 
that  V{p)  is  the  sum  of  potentials  of  simple  sti'ata  of  densities  i{t), 
-j"P{te)i{e)d6  and  X/H(te)i  (0)dO.  From  the  boundary  pro- 
perties of  simple  strata  it  follows  that 

=  i{t)  -f  P{td)i{e)de-\-xfH{te)  f  {e)de 

-  xf/i{tcf>)  [f  (<^)  -/'P{ci>e)t(6)dd+x/Ji(<fiO)i{0)dO]d<f> 

1   Weathevburn.     "  Boundary  Problems,  etc,"  J  (J. 


170  C.  E.   Weatherhurn 

In  virtue  of  (7)  and  (8)  the  second  member  reduces  to  the  first  two- 
terms;  so  tliat  V(p)  satisfies  the  boundary  problem. 

All  the  functions  involved  are  regular  for  the  singular  value  X  =  Ao, 
so  that  F(/j)  is  the  solution  of  the  problem  (19b)  regular  even  when 
X  is  equal  to  this  singular  value.  The  problem  (lb)  does  not 
admit  a  solution  by  simple  stratum  only,  Avhen  X=Ap,  unless  the 
condition 

/F{te)i{e)d$=:0 

is  satisfied,  in  which  case  the  required  solution  is  obviously  V(p), 
Tlie  problems  (19),  derived  from  (1)  by  altering  the  second  member, 
we  shall  speak  of  as  the  modified  problem  for  the  singular  value  Ao- 
The  functions  H(t-p)  and  G{2)t)  bear  the  same  relation  to  the  solution 
of  the  modified  problems  that  'H.(fp)  and  G{pf)  bear  to  the  original 
problems  (1). 

iil. — Expansions. — From  the  formulae  (8)  and  (18)  we  may  ob- 
tain, by  the  method  of  successive  approximations,  expansions  for 
the  various  functions  in  ascending  powers  of  X.  These  are  cer- 
tainly true  for  |  X  |  <  1,  and  in  particular  cases  even  for  jXl^l. 
For  the  present  we  shall  assume  that  the  absolute  value  of  X  is  less 
than  unity. 

Thus  from  (8)  in  virute  of  (7)  we  find 

(20)         [H{ts)=^[]i{ts)  -  IP(^«)]  +x[a,(<s)  -  \-;P{ts)] 

G{ps)=[g{ps)  -q{ps)-\  +  x]^l,{ps)-  ^  q{ps)\ 

+  >^'[0.{ps)  -\.^{Vs]+  •••• 
where  the  suflixes  denote  functions  formed  by  successive  operations 

h,{ts)  = /h{t6)h{es)de, 
h.lts)=/K{te)h{es)dd,  etc. 
and 

g,{ps)=/c,(j^e)h{e.)d6, 

r,.Xps)=/g,{p$)Hes)de,  etc. 
If  Ave  extend  the  notation   and    repbue  •>-•   by  any   point  p  we  may 
write 

h^(t/>)=/ h(te)h(ep)d6, 
h,,{fp)=/hn^,{fe)/i{ep)de,  etc. 


Pantiiietrr    Vulues  of  Potential  Theory.  171 

and  the  tirst  c(|uati()n  ("iO)  becomes 

("^')     |^(^y;)=.[/K//>)-|T(<;.)]+A[A,(/;>)-lp(/p)]+  ... 

Introducinp'  these  values  in  (18)  we  have,  for  the  solutions  of  the 
boundary  problems  (li)) 

(21)  I  w{p)=/no){[h{ep)^lF{ep)']  +x[a,(^p)-1p(p^)]  +  ..  }d^. 

)  np)==/{[y{j>0)-Q{pe)]  +  x[g,ip6)-lQ{j>0)'^  +..]HO)dO. 

We  may  further  obtain  expansions  for  the  moment  i'(/,),  and  the 
density  [ji{t)  of  the  strata  satisfying  (19);  for  these  are  solutions  of 
the  integral  equations 

(  v{t)  -  Xfv{6)h{$t)de=i{t)  -/i{0)F(Ot)dO=^{t),   say 
I  ix{t)  -  X/h{tO)fjL(d)dd=i{t)  -/P{tO)  iiO)dd  =  F{t),  say, 

and  are  therefore  given  by  the  expansions 

(22)  I  v(0=E(0+AEi(0  +  A%(0+  .... 

)  fM{i)=F{t)+\F,'{t)+X,F,'{t)+  .... 

where  the  successive  functions  are  given  by 

E,{t)=/F40)h(ef)dH 

E.,(t)=rE,{6)h{6t.)d6,  &c. 
and 

¥,'(()=/ h{te)F{6)de 

F.J{f)=/h{td)Fi'{0)de,  &c. 
If  we  evaluate  these  functions  we  find 

Ea{t)=/l(e)h„,_-^(6t)dO-\/i{0)F{ef.)dO 

Fn'(0  =J'K- imi {0)de -  ^/P{fO) HO)dB 

If  now  we  form  double  and  simple  strata  with  moment  and  density 
given  by  (22)  we  find  exactly  the  series  (21)  over  again. 

§5. — Forimd(E  of  Reciprocity. — The  Green's  function  G(p5) 
admits  certain  theorems  of  reciprocity.  The  argument  used  to 
establish  these  for  the  ordinary  potential^  is  equally  valid  for  the 
generalised,  the  symbols  having  their  altered  significance.  These 
relations  may  be  stated 

i.   If  the  points  p  and  q  are  both  in  the  same  region  or  both  on 
the  Ixiuiidary 

(23)  G(/^)  =  C(y/) 


1.   Pleraelj.    F.oc.  fit.,  S.  39fi-3i)8. 


172  C.  E.   Weatherbuim  : 

ii.    If  p   is  a  point  of  the  iuiier  region,  </  of  the  outer,   and  t  a 
point  on  the  boundary. 

(24)  (1+A)G(;.^)=(1-X)G(^/.) 

G(tp)  =  {l-\-X)G{pt) 
G{t^)={l-k)Q{^t) 
From  (23)  and  (6)  we  deduce  immediately  that  if  p  and  q   are 
both  in  the  same  region,  or  both  on  the  boundary, 

(25)  (  Q{p^)  =  QU/p) 

If,  however,  p  and  ^  are  in  the  inner  and  outer  regions  respectively, 
we  find  on  substituting  from  (G)  in  the  first  of  (24),  multiplying  by 
Aq— A  and  putting  A=:Ao 

(26)  ^{\+X,)Q(p^)  =  {l-X,)q{^p) 

I  (1+a)6'(m)=(1  -^)G(^p)+j^^-Q(n') 

Similarly  from  the  second  and  third  of  (24)  we  find 

(27)  (  Q{tp)  =  (l+X,)Q(pf,) 
I  Q(^.;)==(l-A„)Q(./0 

and  thence 

(28)  S  0{fp)  =  {\  +X)G(pt)-X,q(pt) 
(  G{t^)  =  {l-k)G{^/t)+X,Q{^/t) 

II. — The   ordinary  pofeiti led. 

§6. — Integral  Relatione. — The  preceding  properties  are  common 
to  ordinary  and  generalised  potentials.  We  know,  however,  that 
while  the  values  A:=  +  l,  Avhich  correspond  to  the  problems  for  the 
inner  and  outer  regions  separately,  may  both  be  characteristic 
numbers  for  the  ordinary  potential,  they  are  nofl  singiilar  for  the 
generalised.  The  properties  arising  from  the  existence  of  these 
poles  are  then  peculiar  to  the  ordinary  potential.  Other  special 
relations  arise  from  the  fact  that  foi'  this  potential  the  function 
h(tp)  satisfies  ihe  integral  relation2 

(29)  /h{tp)dt=2,  1,  or  0 

according  as  p  is  within  the  closed  surface,  on  the  l)oundary  or 
outside,  and  the  integration  is  extended  over  the  boundary.  W© 
shall  find  furthci-  on  a  cori-esponding  formula  for  the  generalised 
potential  from  which  tliis  may  be  deduced  by  putting  A;=0. 

Let  us  suppose  that  tiie  boundary  consists  of  m  independent 
surfaces  each  possessing  at  every  ])oint  a  definite  tangent  plane 
and    two    definite    principal    radii    of     curvature.       The     value     A=l 

1.  Weatherburu.    Loc.  cit.,  §  3. 

2.  I'lemelj.    Noc.  cit.,  S.  ^41-4.     Another  proof  is  1).\  (Jrecn's  TheoriMii  as  in  S  i)  of  this  pujier. 


Parameter  Values  of  Potential  Theory.  173 

is  always  sinj^ular.  We  shall  assume  that  the  surfaces  are  all 
exterior  to  one  another,  so  that  X.  =  —  1  is  not  a  characteristic 
number.  The  functions  P(^s)  and  Q{ts)  assume  simple  values  at  the 
pole  Ao=l.  For  the  functions  i/'i(«),  ^i{s),  •  .  •  ,  >/'/«(*)  are  such  that 
i/',.(,s-)  is  equaP  to  +  1  over  the  rth  surface  and  zero  over  all  the 
other  surfaces;  while  4)r{t)  is  a  distribution  of  electricity  over 
the  surfaces  giving  constant  values  over  each  of  the  surfaces 
and  rli)-oughout  each  of  the  vi  inner  regions.  This  distribution 
<f)r(/)  has  a  total  charge  +1  over  the  rth  surface,  and  zero  over 
each  of  tIic  otlieis.  It  tliere-fore  represents  the  electric  distribution 
over  the  ;/(  surfaces  regarded  as  conductors,  due  to  unit  charge  on 
the  rth  sui-face.  Hence,  if  we  use  an  index  to  denote  the  particular 
value  of  the  pole   A..,. 

F+^{ts)  =  (f>y{t)  rr^l,  2,  ....  Ill 

according  as  .»>•  is  on  the  1st.  2nd,  wth  surface.  Fui'ther,  the  func- 
tion if/r(p),  being  ecpial  to  the  potential  of  a  double  stratum  of  unit 
moment  over  the  rth  sui'face.   is  given  bv 

(30)  if,,{/>)=jli{tp)</t  =  '2,  1,  or  0 

according  as  />  is  within  the  rth  surface,  on  its  boundary,  or  out- 
side that  surface.  The  jjotential  <I>r(^)  due  to  the  distribution 
<f>r(^)  is  the  conductor  jxitential  refei'red  to.  We  shall  denote  it  by 
rr(^).     So  tliat 

(31)  i  F  +  Uj.p)  =  2cl>,{f),  ^At),  or  0 

)  Q  +  \>/p)  =  2Vr{(j),  VrW),  or  0 
according  as  p  is  witiiin  the  rth  surface,  on  its  boundary,  or  in  the 
outer  region.  This  of  course  is  a  particular  case  of  (13)  and  (14). 
We  may  prove  several  interesting  properties  of  the  functions  in- 
volved in  (5),  (7)  and  (8),  making  use  of  the  relation  (29).  If  in 
the  first  of  (7)  we  replace  p  by  a  boundary  point  «,  multiply  by  dt 
and  integrate  over  the  boundary  we  find 

/P(fs)dt  =  XjP{Os)dO 
Hence 

(32)  /P(ts)dt=0  Ao±l. 

By  the  .same  process  we  deduce  from  (5)  thaf^ 

(33)  {l~\)/H(ts)dt=\ 

Substituting  from  (6)  and  putting  Ay  =  1  we  have 
(33')  (1  -\)/  H+\ts)dt  +  jP  +  \ts)dt=l 


1.    Plemelj.    Loc.  cit.,  Kap.  16. 

*   In  (32)  X  may  be  replaced  by  a  i)oiiit  p.     The  same  may  be  done  in  (33)  and  (34')  provided  the 
second  member  be  changed  to  2  for  p  in  the  inner  reyion,  and  to  0  for  p  in  the  outer  region.  Cf.  §  10. 


174  C.  E.   Weatherbiirn  : 

This  is  an  identity  in  A,  and  P+^(<s)  does  not  contain  X.  We  may 
therefore  put    X—  1   giving 

/P+Hts)dt=l 
which  may  also  be  deduced  from  (31)  in  virtue  of  the  properties  of 
the   distribution     <^r(0-        This    last    relation    combined    with  (33') 
shows  that 

(34)  /H+Hts)d(=0 

while  from   (32)  and  (33)  it  follows  that 

(34')  {1-Xyil[ts)dt  =  l  A,±l. 

This  may  also  be  proved  from  the  first  of  (8),  multiplying  by  df 
and  integrating  over  the  boundary. 

^7. — Expansions. — The  second  member  of  the  equation  (19a) 
assumes,   when   X,,  =1.   the   form 

E(0  =  f  (0  -./■£  {0)<l>riO)de  =  f  (0  -  Gr 
r=  I,  2,  .  .  .  .  ,  m 
according  as  f  is  on  the  1st,  2nd   .    .    .   ?»th  surface. 

The  series  (22a)  now  becomes,  by  (29) 

(35)  v{t)  =  [i{t)-Gr]  +  X[f,{t)-Gr]+X\Ut)-Cr]+    .... 

and  since  v(^)  noAv  possesses  no  pole  at  X=  +1,  while  X=  —  1  is  not 
a  singular  value,  this  series  is  convergent  for  |Aj  =  l.  The  terms 
therefore  decrciise  indefinitely,  and  we  have  for  the  constant  Or 
the  value! 

n=  cc 

=Lt  j'i{6)hn{et)de 

n=cc 

whei-e  f  is  on  tlie  rth  surface.  The  constant  C,-  assumes  m  different 
constant  values,  one  on  eacli  of  the  surfaces. 

In  (35)  we  may  put   A=  + 1    and  tluis   obtain  tlie  moments   of  the 
strata,   which  satisfy  i-espectively  the  boundary  problems. 
W(<-)=-[f(0-C,] 

W{t+)=i{t)-Or 

The  singular  value  A  — I  also  corresponds  to  the  second  problem 
for  the  inner  region.  The  second  member  of  (19b)  for  this  pole 
takes  the  form 

V{t)=i{t)-/'P{te)i{e)d6 

^i{f)-MnfHO)dO  =  i(t) 
provided  the  usual  condition  for  the  inner  region,  viz., 

/i{e)dO  =  0 
be  satisfied.     The  function  /u(^)  represented  by  (22b)  now  becomes 

(36)  fL{t)  =  i{t)  +  Xi,'{t)-i-X\'{t)+ 

1   Cf.  Plemelj.     Potentialtheorctische  lliitersuch\iiigeii,  S.  60. 


Parameter   Values  of  Potential  Theory.  1  7.> 

It  lias  no  piilf  at  /\=  +1,  while  \=  —  1  is  not  a  singular  value. 
The  series  is  therefore  convergent  for  |A.1=1-  In  (36)  we  may  put 
\=±1  and  thus  obtain  the  densities  of  the  simple  strata  which 
satisfy   respectively   the   boundary   problems 

da 

The  series  for  the  solutions  (21)  may  be  obtained  from  that  equa- 
tion by  substituting  the  values  of  PC'^p)  and  Q(pO).  Further,  if 
Ao=I,  the  functions  II+^{ts)  and  Cr-^^{ps)  given  by  (20)  have  no 
pole  at  \=1,  while  \=i  — 1  is  not  a  singular  value.  The  series  are 
therefore  convergent  for  jA|  =  l,  so  that  the  terms  decrease  indefi- 
nitely.    It  follows  that 

giving  the  electric  distribution^.  <j>r{t)  in  terms  of  the  iterated 
functions  hn(ts) :  the  limit  assuming  one  of  m  different  values, 
according  to  the  surface  upon  which  -'j  lies:  Similarly  fiom  the 
convergence  of  the  second  series  (20)  for  lA|=l,   it  follows  that 

II  =  » 

i.e. 
(37)  V,.{t)=U  g,,{ts) 

'll  =  CC 

giving  the  conductor  potential  Vr(fj  as  the  limit  of  the  sequence 
gi{ts),  g^i^-'^)-  ■  ■  ■  which  assumes  m  different  values  according  to 
the  surface  on  which  s  lies. 

§8. — Solution  of  fhe  second  hnundary  problem  for  both  inner 
and  outer  regions  in  terms  of  (t  single  function. — In  the  second 
boundary  proljlem  the  values  A=±l  correspond  to  the  inner  and 
outer  regions  respectively.  The  former  of  these  values  is  the  only 
pole  involved.  The  boundary  problem  (19b)  becomes,  for  Ao=U 
and  A=±l    equivalent  to  the  sepai-ate  problems  represented  by 

^      '         ^  ^(t+)=~i(t)  for  A=+l 

dn 

'^^{r)=HO  for  A=:-l 

where  in   the  former  the  boundary   function    i{t)   is  subject  to  the 
usual  integral  condition.     The  solutions  to  the  problems  given  by 
(18)  may  be  written 
(39)  r(p)=/Gll(pO)i(e)dO 

and 

v{p}=/vtl(pe)t(e)de 


1  Cf.  Potentialtheoretische  Untersuchuiiuen  S.  5S>. 


176  G.  E.   Weatlierhurn  : 

respectively,  where  the  index  represents  the  pole  Xq=  +  1  and  the 
suffix  the  particular  value  of  A.  As  noAv  the  pole  Xo=  +  1  is  the 
•only  one  to  be  considered  we  may  drop  the  index  in  what  follows. 
These  two  solutions  are  expressed  in  terms  of  different  functions 
<T  +  \{ps)  and  G^iips).  It  is  our  object  to  express  both  of  these  in 
terms  of  a  single  function.  By  means  of  the  second  equation  (8) 
w^e  may  write 

(40)  (  G^,{ps)^/G^,{pe)h{6s)d6=g{j^s)-T{r) 

»  G-,{vs)+/G^,{pe)h{e.^)de^g{ps) - v{p) 

If    we    put 

{1B{ps)  =  G^r{ps)  +  G   i(;«) 

\  2R,{ps)  =  G^,{ps)-G ^,{ps) 
we  obtain  from  the  preceding  by  adding  and  subtracting 

(41 )  (  R{ps)-fR,Xpe)h{es)de=g{ps)  -  Tip) 
'  Ri{p^^)-/R{pO)h{0s)de=O 

This  last  equation  expresses  B^ps)  in  terms  of  B(ps};  hence  we 
may  determine  both  G  +  i(ps)iind  G-.\{p^)  in  terms  of  the  single 
function  S(ps).  From  (41)  we  find  rliat  F{p.<i)  satisfies  the  integral 
equation 

B(ps)  -/R(pe)h,{Os)dd=<j(ps)  -  T{p). 

As  in  §4,  by  the  method  of  successive  approximations,  this  integral 
•equation  gives  us  an  expansion  for  R{ps)  and  hence  for  R^(ps).  We 
find 

(  R{ps)  =  lffip.)-V{p)]  +  \!UP'^)-r{p)]  +  [ff,{ps)-T(p}]+  .  . 
\  Ii,{P^^)=[y,{px)-V{p)]-\-[g.,lps)-T(p)]+  .  .  . 
Avhich  are  both  convergent,  being  identical  with  tliose  obtained  by 
adding   and   subtracting  the  absolutely  convergent  sei'ies  for  G  +  i{ps) 
«-nd  G-  lips). 

The  solutions  of  the  second  boundary  problem  for  both  the  inner 
and  the  outer  regions  could  also  be  expressed  in  terms  of  the 
function  K(ts)  introduced  by  Plemelj.i     For  from  (8)  we  find 

G  +  \ps)  -  \l\j{pe)U^^ds)d6=z<i{ps)-T{p) 
In    this    we    may    putAr:r±l     in    turn,    and    thus    obtain     G  +  iips) 
and    G-iips)    in    terms    of   H+i{ts)    and    7/_i(te)     respectively,     and 
hence  in  terms  of  li(fn).      Introducing  the  values  of  tlie   functions 
we  find 

G  +  i{ps)=y{ps)-   Tip)  +/;/(]>e)\  K(Os)  +/h{6(r)K{crs)dcT\de 
=  yips)-Tip)  +/g(pe)K(ds)d6  +/g,(pO)K{Os)dO 
Similarlv 

G_,ips)=;,{ps)--Tip)  -/(/ip6)Ki0s)d0+/;/,{pe)Ki0s)d6 

So  that  the  solutions  for  both  legions  may  be  expressed  in  terms 
of  K(ts). 

1.   Potent.  Unter.     S.  79. 


Paraweter   Values  of  Potential   Theory.  177 

III. — The  (jeneralised  potential. 

§9. — Fundaweutal  formula. — Tlif  siiiipk'  forms  taken  bv  the  in- 
tegrals of  §6  depend  upon  tlio  fonnidu  (2i)),  whieh  is  true  only  for 
the  ordinary  jjotential.  1  now  propose  to  find  the  value  of  the 
integral 

n,{tp)dt 

when  the  potential  is  -generalised.  corres{)ondin^  to  the  equation 
(2).     In  Green's  formula 

put  U  =  l,  and  \=y[qj)),  q  being  a  variable  point  and  y  a  fixed 
point.  If  in  (42)  the  integration  is  extended  over  a  closed  surface 
and    }}    is    outside    the    surface    we    find,    since  r/iqp)  satisfies  (2) 

(43)  fh{tp)dt=  -  }^/<j{qp)dg 

where  dq  is  the  element  of  volume  at  q.  The  integration  in  the 
second  member  being  extended  throughout  the  volume  enclosed  by 
the  surface,  the  integral  represents  the  potential  at  p  due  to  a 
uniform  distribution  of  mass  of  unit  density  throughout  that 
volume.     We  shall  denote  this  potential  by  X(/>). 

If,  however,  p  is  inside  the  closed  surface  we  must  surround  j^  hy 
a  small  sphere  Q,  of  radius  ?•,  the  surface  integration  of  (42)  now- 
including  the  surface  of  this  sphere,  and  the  volume  integration 
extending  only  throughout  the  volume  between  the  sphere  and  the 
original  surface.  At  the  small  sphere  the  positive  direction  of  the 
normal  is  that  of  /•  increasing,  so  that  (42)  becomes 

/h{tp)dt  +  ky{gp)d^=-J^,g(sp)ds=:l/2^Je-'^'{  l+^.jds 
il  il 

and  when  the  radius  of  the  sphere  becomes  vanishingly  small  the 
second  member  is  equal  to  2.  Hence  when  /;  is  within  the  closed 
surface 

(44)  fh{tp)dt  =  -2-ky'g{q2y)dq='2-k^X{p) 

the  volume  integral  of  the  second  member  being  convergentl  since- 
the  subject  of  integration  becomes  infinite  at  p  —  q  only  as  \ir. 

To  find  the  value  of  fh{ts)dt  where  s  is  a  point  on  the  boundary 
we  observe  that  fh{tp)dt  is  a  double  stratum  potential  of  unit 
moment  over  the  boundary.  Hence  its  value  at  a  point  on  the 
surface  is  the  mean  of  its  values  at  points  infinitesimally  close  to- 
this,   one  just  inside  and  the  other  just  outside.     So  that 

(45)  fh{ts)dt=  1  -hrfg{gs)dq 

=  l-A;^X(s)  

1  Cf.  Leathern.  "  Volume  and  surface  intejrrals  used  in  Physics,"  p.  H  (Canibrid<fe  Tract,  19U5)- 


178  C.  E.   Weatherburn :     Parameter   Valines. 

1^10. — Further  relations. — By  means  of "  the  preceding  results  we 
may  obtain  relations  corresponding  to  those  of  §6  for  the  ordinary 
potential.  From  the  first  equation  (7)  we  find  on  multiplying  by 
dt    and   integrating  over  the  boundary, 

/F{tp)dt=Xj[l-Ic'X{6)]F(dp)dO 
that  is, 

(46)  (1  -Ao  yFitp)dt=  -k-'\JX{d)V{dv)dd 

which  reduces  to  (•■32)  when  /.-^  is  put  equal  to  zero.     Similarly  from 
the  first  of  (8)  we  find  on  integration  with  respect  to  t 
)^/[\-k'X{d)]H(ej7)d$=/B(tp)dt-c-^lc'X{p) 
-l/F{tp)dt 
-or 

(47)  {i-xyn{tp)d(=c-k:'X(p)-xkyx(0)iJ(ep)d6 

^J^---/x{e)Fi0p)dd 

1— Afl 

where  c  has  the  value  2,  1,  or  0,  according  as  p  is  Avithin  the  inner 
region,  on  the  boundary,  or  in  the  outer  region.  This  relation 
reduces  to  (33)  when  k  is  zero  and  p  on  the  boundary. 

Tliese  might  have  been  derived  from  (5),  the  first  of  wliicli  be- 
comes  on    integration 

(48)  {l-X)/H(f.p)df=c-PX{p)-X/rrX(0)Ji{ep)de 

Substituting  from  (6),  multiplying  by  (A.,,  — A)  and  proceeding  to 
the  limit  A=Ao  "^^'e  arrive  at  (46).  Then  substituting  from  this 
in  (48)  we  find  (47). 

The  preceding  investigation  deals  with  the  singular  parameter 
values  of  the  first  two  boundary  problems  only.  In  another  paper  ^ 
the  author  considers  the  third  boundary  problem  for  the  equation 
(2),  requiring  the  determination  of  a  solution  satisfying  the  rela- 
tion 

^(^+)=A/?(ov(^^)-^(OU(o 

The  singular  parameter  values  for  this  problem  are  there  discussed. 

1  Weatherburn.  "The  mixed  boiuuiai-y  problem  for  the  geiieraUsed  potential  correspond  in;.;- 
to  the  equation   y -i  m-  A:-2it  =  0."    Qniirterly  .Journal,  vol.  46,  pp.  83-04. 


[Proc.  Rot.  Soc.   Victoria,  27   (N.S.),   Part   II.,  1914.] 

Art.    XIV.— O/j.    the.  Geographical  DistrihvAion  of  the  Sea- 
Grasses. 

A   Premminaky  Communication. 


By    0.    H.    OSTENFELD 

(Copenliag-en,  Denmark). 

Ooimuiinieated  by  Professor  A.  J.  Ewar 
[Read  October  8tli,  1914.] 


For  several  years  I  have  been  studying  the  geographical  distri- 
bution of  the  Marine  Flowering  Plants,  as  it  seemed  to  me  that  it 
miglit  have  some  general  value  hoth  from  a  phylogenetic  and  a 
geological  point  of  view. 

We  owe  most  of  our  kiiowledge  on  these  plants  to  the  late  P. 
Ascherson,  who,  during  a  series  of  years,  contributed  to  their 
study,  and  A\as  much  interested  in  their  geographical  distribution. 

Some  considerations  will  show  why  I  think  this  phytogeographical 
study  may  be  of  more  general  interest. 

The  marine  flowering  plants — or  sea-grasses — belong  to  two 
monocotyledonous  families — viz..  Hydrocharitaceae  and  Potamo- 
(jetonaceae,  Iwth  of  which  are  included  in  the  cohort  Helohime. 
Tliis  cohort  consists  of  several  families,  nearly  all  of  which  are 
water-plants  (or  swamp-plants).  They  are  very  distinct  from  the 
other  monocotyledons,    and   undoubtedly  represent   old  types. 

Sometimes  it  has  been  urged  that  from  this  cohort  most  of  the 
othei-  Monocotyledons  and  Dicotyledons  have  originated.  Be  that 
as  it  may,  the  Helobieae  fni'm  an  especially  well-marked  group 
within  which  the  families  show  a  progi'ession  from  types  with 
many  fi'ee  superior  carpels  to  otheis  with  one  syucarpous  infei'ior 
ovary.  In  all  the  families,  genera  witli  one  or  a  few  species  pre- 
vail, and  within  the  whole  cohort  only  one  genns.  Potamogeton  (the 
Pondwoed).  is  really  rich  in  species.  It  seems  as  if,  in  most  cases, 
the  developing  power  of  the  genera  has  been  checked. 

The  sea-grasses  belong  to — 

(1.)  3  genera  of  Hydrocharitaceae — viz.:  Halophila,  Enhalus 
And  Thulassia,  all  widelv  different  from  one  another:  and  to 


180  C.  H.   Ostenfeld: 

(2)  5  genera  of  Fofamogetonaceae — viz.  :  C ymodocea,  Diplarv 
thera,  Posidonia,  Zostera,  and  Phyllosjjodix.  The  tAvo  first  and 
the  two  last  respectively  are  closely  related  to  each  other.  Thus- 
it  might  be  possible  to  classify  these  5  genera  also  into  three 
groups,  each  group  widely  differing  from  the  others. 

The  systematic  position  of  tlie  sea-grasses,  their  aquatic  habitat, 
and  the  great  structural  differences  between  the  genera,  all  point 
to  their  great  phylogenetic  age. 

The  natural  agent  of  dispersal  of  the  sea-grasses  is  the  sea  cur- 
rents, as  the  fruits  in  no  case  ripen  above  the  water.  The  Potamo- 
getoriaceae  have  droupe-like  fruits,  the  epicarp  of  which  is  a 
rather  thin,  fleshy  cover  of  inconspicuous  colour.  The  Hydro- 
charitaceae  have  a  berry,  also  of  inconspicuous  colour,  containing 
either  many  small  seeds  (//alojdrila).  oi-  a  few  large  ones  {Enhalus^ 
and  y // ala.su io).  In  Zosfera  (of  the  Potamogetonaceae)  the  epi- 
carp, but  in  Enhalus  and  Thahisx/a  tie  -whole  j-eritarp  splits- 
open,  and  ill  all  the  genera  the  "  stones,"  or  seeds,  then  drop  out. 
As  the  fruits  or  seeds  of  the  .sea-grasses  do  not  possess  a  floating 
apparatus,  they  are  always  heavier  than  water,  and  consequently 
the  migration  of  the  species  must  be  very  slow. 

Besides  tliis  transportation  by  means  of  currents,  it  is  possible 
— but  not  very  probable— that  certain  fishes,  and  sea-mammals, 
such  as  the  Dugong  and  Manatee,  and  turtles,  may  eat  the  fruits 
and  thereby  contribute  to  their  distribution. 

Tlie  dispersal  by  means  of  detached  shoots,  which  float  in  the 
water,   is  almost  negligible,  as  they  do  not  live  long  when  floating. 

Being  green  antotiophous  plants,  the  sea-grasses  can  grow 
only  in  shallow  water  where  the  light  is  sufficient  for  assimilation 
— i.e.,  they  grow  only  along  the  coasts.  The  depth  at  which  they 
grow  varies  in  the  different  species  and  in  different  seas.  In 
northern  seas  (cf/.,  Davish),  the  deeper  limits  of  .^'os^^/y/ lie  at  about 
10  meters.  In  tlie  Mediterranean,  J'oxido/iia  grows  at  greater- 
depths,  though  I  cannot  accept  without  further  evidence  the  record 
of  its  occurrence  at   a  depth  of  about  ")()    meters. 

The  slow  manner  oi  dispersal  and  the  necessity  of  sliallow  water 
are  factors  which  restrict  the  ai-ea  of  occun-ence  of  the  sea-grasses. 

Of  the  8  genera  mentioned  above,  Enhalus  is  monotypic.  It 
occurs  in  the  wliole  of  the  tropical  Indopacifir  region.  Tlip  Zostrra 
genus    consists   of  two  or  more  sjiecies. 

With  the  exception  of  PJn/llo.spadi.i,  a  younger  type  derived  from 
Zostera,  and  restricted  to  the  northern  Pacific,  each  genus  inhabits. 


raphical  DiMrihution  of  Sea-Grasses.  1  H 1 

both  tlie  Iiidopatilic  and  the  Atluiitic  regions.  And,  as  nearly  all 
are  tropical,  sub-tropical,  or  warm-temperate  plants  (Zosfera  being 
the  only  one  which  reaches  the  cold  regions),  the  occurrence  of  the 
same  genus  in  l)oth  regions  indicates  that  the  genera  are  so  old 
that  tliey  originated  at  a  time  when  the  distribution  of  sea  and 
land  was  very  different  from  tliat  at  pi'esent — this  time  being  at 
least  not  later  than  Early  Tertiary. 1  It  is  not  probable  that  such 
heat-requiring  plants  could^  have  migrated  from  the  Indopacific, 
where  they  most  probably  originated,  into  the  Atlantic,  through 
the  cold  waters  either  around  the  Cape  of  Good  Hope  or  Cape 
Horn. 

Thus  their  distribution  seems  to  indicate  the  great  age  of  the 
sea-grasses,  as  does  their  low  place  in  the  natural  system  of  the 
Phanerogams. 

Hence  it  will,  I  think,  be  obvious-  that  a  detailed  study  of  the 
geographical  distribution,  bearing  in  mind  their  systematic  affini- 
ties, may  possibly  throw  some  light  on  the  evolution  of  the  sea- 
grasses,  on  the  distribution  of  sea  and  land,  and  on  the  age  of 
the  present  land-bridges  or  land-barriers  separating  the  oceans. 

The  8  genera  of  sea-grasses  contain  altogether  only  30  species, 
most  of  them  having  a  wide  distribution,  as  is  often  the  case  with 
water  plants. 

It  will  be  convenient  to  arrange  them  into  several  groups  accord- 
ing to  their  geographical  distribution,  instead  of  treating  each 
species  separately. 

1. — Indopacific  grovp  (7  species),  i.e..  species  which  grow  in 
the  Red  Sea.  along  the  coasts  of  East  Africa  and  of  tlie  East- 
African  Isles,  along  the  south  and  south-eastern  coasts  of  Asia,  in 
the  Malay  Archipelago,  the  islands  of  the  Pacific,  and,  in  some 
cases,  also  on  the  tropical  coast  of  Australia. 

II. — Malayan  group  (4  species),  /.^.,  species  found  in  the  Malayan 
region  :  south-eastern  coast  of  Asia,  Malay  Archipelago,  and  the 
tropical  coast  of  Australia. 

III. — East-African  group  (2  species),  i.e..  species  found  only  in 
the  Red  Sea,  along  the  coasts  of  East-Africa  and  of  the  East- 
African   isles. 

IV. — Carihhean  group  (6  species),  i.e.,  species  occurring  along 
the  coasts  of  the  islands  of  the  Caribbean  Sea,  Florida,  and  the 
north-coast  of  South  America,  some  extending  as  far  as  the  Ber- 
mudas. 


idunia,  perhaps  even  Upper  Cretaceous. 


182  C.  H.  Ostenfeld: 

V. — Australia fi  r/roiip  (5  species),  i.e.,  species  found  along  the 
western  and  southern  coasts  of  Australia  and  all  round  Tasmania, 
some  extending  as  far  as  Queensland  and  New  Zealand. 

VI. — Mediterranean  groirp  (2  species),  i.e.,  species  occurring  in 
the  Mediterranean  and  reaching  the  Atlantic  coasts  at  the  numtli 
of  the  Mediterranean. 

VII. — North-Facific  (jronp  (2  species),  i.e..  species  occurring 
along  the  North-Pacific  coasts  of  North  America,  and  (one  species) 
also   along  the  coasts  of  Japan. 

VIII. — North-ttmperate  group  (2  species),  i.e..  species  occurring 
in  the  northern  (cold  and  temperate)  parts  of  both  the  Atlantic 
and  the  Pacific  oceans. 

Of  these  eight  groups.  I. -IV.  are  tropical.  V.-VI.  icann-femperate 
(or  subtropical),   and  VII. -VIII.   temperate. 

I.  The  Indo pacific  yronp  consists  of  7  species — viz.  :  Halophila 
ovalis;  Enlialus  acoroides;  Thalassia  Hemprichii ;  Cymodocea  isoeti- 
folia;  Cymodocea  rutundata ;  Cymodocea  serrulata ;  Diplanthera 
uninervis 

Halophila  ovalis  has  the  widest  area  of  distribution,  as  it  reaches 
the  western  and  southern  coasts  of  Australia.  Taken  as  a  whole, 
the  geographical  area  of  this  group  is  larger  than  that  of  any  other 
(perhaps  except  that  of  Zostera  marina).  It  is  probable  that  the 
group  represents  the  direct  offspring  of  tlie  old  types  of  sea-grasses 
and  that  it  inhabits  their  old  area. 

II.  The  Malayan  group  has  four  species,  viz.  :  Halophila  devi- 
piens,  Halophila  ovata,  Halophila  Beccarii,  Halophila  spinulosa. 
All  these  species  are  rare,  being  found  only  in  a  few  places,  but 
it  is  pi'obal)le  that  further  search  will  show  that  they  have  a  wider 
distiibution.  so  that  the  group  may  perhaps  be  included  in  the 
Indopacific  one. 

[It  is  worth  noting  that  //.  spinulosa  differs  widely  from  all  other 
species  of  Halophila.  and  is  probably  of  great  age.  Being  of 
quite  characteristic  habit,  and  also  conjparutivcly  cuns])ieuous.  it 
is  not  probable  that  it  has  been  overlooked  im  the  continiental 
coasts  of  the  Indian  Ocean,  from  which  it  has  not  yet  been  re- 
ported; it  seems,   in  fact,  to  be  restricted   to  the   .Malay  legion.] 

HI.  The  East-African  group  has  only  two  niciiibers — viz.  :  Halo- 
phila stipulacea,  Cymodocea  ciliata.  They  aic  routined  to  the 
Red  Sea  and  the  western  side  of  the  Indian  Oeean.  (C.  ciliata  has 
been   reported  from  .Australia   in  eiror  for  ('.   .^erndata.) 


Geographical  Distribution  of  Sea-Grasses.  18o 

The  two  gioups.  II.  and  III.,  are  naturally  placed  as  ^slll)divi^S 
fiions  of  group  1..  and  i-epresent  two  lines  of  differentiation  finiii 
the  main  l)ody  of  species,  with  its  wider  distiihution. 
They  show  species,  which  have  not  yet  attained  their  limits 
of  distribution,  as  it  seems  hard  to  understand  that  a  species  dis- 
tributed along  the  shores  of  the  lied  Sea  and  the  western  side  of 
the  Indian  Ocean,  should  not  be  able  to  live  along  the  Asiatic  and 
-Malay  coasts,  and  rice  versa .  The  absence  of  llalopJtila  spiniilosa 
from  the  Indian  Ocean,  and  that  of  //.  xtipulacea  and  C i/itiodocea 
viliata  from  the  Malay  Archipelago,  are  further  indicative  of  the 
slow  rate  of  niigration  of  the  sea-grasses.  These  Avell  characterised 
species  must  have  existed  as  such  for  a  long  time,  probably  as  long 
as  a  connection  between  the  Indian  and  the  Pacific  oceans  existed. 

IV.     The  Caribbean  group. 

Halophila   Aschersonii. 

Halophila  Engelmanii. 

Halophila  Baillonis. 

Cymodocea  manatorum. 

Diplanthera  Wrightii. 

Thalassia  testudinum. 

This  group  contains  4  genera  with  6  species.  Four  of  these  (one 
of  each  genus — are  so  nearly  related  to  4  species  of  the  Indopacitic 
group,  that — at  least,  in  some  cases — the  characters  distinguishing 
them  from  one  another  are  quite  slight. 

The  4  pairs  of  species  are  the  following  : — 

indopacific : 

Halophila  decipiens. 

Thalassia  Hemprichii. 

Cymodocea  isoetifolia. 

Diplanthera   uninervis 

Caribbean : 

Halophila  Baillonis. 

Thalassia  testudinum. 

Cymodocea  manatorum. 

Diplanthera  Wrightii. 

I  think  it  is  advisable  to  draAv  the  conclusion  that  these  4  pairs 
originated  from  4  parent  species,  which  were  widely  distributed 
in  the  tropical  seas,  and  that  the  present  differentiation  was  sulj- 
sequent  to  an  alteration  in  the  extension  of  sea  and  land — in  otiier 
words  :  the  Caribbean  species  arose  in  their  present  area  from 
ancestors  which  came  to  the  Caribbean   Sea   from  the   Indopacific 


184  C.   H.  Ostenfeld: 

at  a  time  when  the  isthmus  of  Panama  was  not  finally  formed. 
From  geological  evidence,  it  is  usually  agreed  that  the  isthmus  is 
of  Tertiary  age.  and  the  differentiation  of  the  Caribbean  species 
is  consequently  more  recent.  The  close  resemblance  of  each  species 
to  an  Indopacific  one  agrees  very  well  with  this  supposition. 
Their  i-estricted  geographical  areas  may  be  similarly  explained. 

Two  of  them  have  reached  the  Bermudas,  and  this  migration 
accords  with  the  direction  of  the  Gulf  Stream  drift,  which  has 
a  very  strong  flow  from  the  coast  of  Florida  towards  the  north- 
west, washing  on  its  way  the  shores  of  the  Bermudas.  With  this 
exception,  none  of  the  Caribbean  species  has  yet  become  distributed 
in  the  Atlantic  outside  the  Caribbean  region.  Although  it  may 
be  admitted  that  our  knowledge  of  the  sea-coast  flora  of  South 
America  is  imperfect,  it  is  hardly  likely  that  any  rich  sea-grass 
vegetation,   if  existing,  could  have  remained  unreported.! 

Besides  the  4  Caribbean  species  having  their  Indopacific  partners, 
two  species  of  Halophila  also  occur  in  the  Caribbean  region,  one 
in  the  northern  part  (Florida  and  Bahamas),  and  the  other  in  the 
southern  parts  (Antilles  to  Pernambuco).  They  are  very  closely 
allied,  and  must  have  come  from  a  common  ancestor.  On  the  other 
hand,  they  are  quite  distinct  from  other  species  of  Halophila,  and 
no  allied  species  has  yet  been  found  in  the  Indopacific  region.  It 
is  possible  that  such  a  form  may  yet  be  found,  but  it  is  also  pos- 
sible that  it  has  had  its  day  and  then  died  out  there,  and  that  the 
Caribbean  forms  are  the  only  remnants  now  existing  of  this  par- 
ticular section  of  the  genus. 

V.  The  Australian  groujj.  I  have  referred  5  species  to  thig 
group,  but  it  is  not  so  homogeneous  as  I  could  wish  : 

Cymodocea   antarctica. 

Posidonia  australis. 

Zostera  capricorni. 

Zostera  Mueller i. 

Zostera  tasmanica. 

The  systematic  value  of  the  three  species  of  Zostera  is  somewhat 
uncertain.  It  is  possible  that  they  ought  to  be  reduced  to  two.  and 
even  one  of  these  might  perhaps  be  united  with  Z.  nana.  Their 
area  of  occurrence  is  along  the  east  coast  of  Australia,  from  Cape 
York  southwards  to  Tasmania,   and  along  the  eastern  part  of  the 

1.  Anioiipst  the  sea-jfrasses  on  record  from  the  -Afrie^an  .side  of  the  Atlantic,  there  is  a  sterile 
species  of  Diplantlwia,  found  at  Loanda  (Guinea).  Whether  it  is  the  Caribbean  D.  Wrightii  or, 
more  probably,  the  Indopacific  D.  uninervig,  already  recorded  from  the  East-coast  of  Africa,  it 
is  impossible  to  say. 


Geog rap] ileal  Dif<tribut!on  of  Sf'a-Grasses.  IS-") 

south  coast  (how  far  \vest\Yards  1  do  not  know);  also  in  New  Zea- 
land and  in  one  place  on  the  coast  of  Chili.  Thus  the  area  covers 
the  temperate  part  of  the  South-Pacific,  with  an  outpost  in  the 
Tropics  at  Cape  York. 

The  discussion  of  the  orifi:in  of  this  part  of  the  Australian  group 
will  be  postponed  and  taken  together  with  that  of  other  species 
of  Zostera. 

The  other  section  of  the  Australian  group  consists  of  two  species. 
The  first — Cymodncea  anforcfica — stands  somewhat  isolated  with- 
in the  genus.  It  is  quite  different  from  its  nearest  ally,  the  East- 
African  C  ciliofa,  and  it  must  be  supposed  to  be  an  old  species. 
The  other — Fosidonm  ausfralls — has  only  one  congeneric  species, 
P.  oceanicn,  of  the  Mediterranean.  Thus,  these  tAvo  species,  which 
make  up  the  isolated  genus  Posidonia,  inhabit  widely  separated 
and  comparatively  small   areas  of  a  Avarm-temperate  charactei-. 

The  species  are  quite  distinguishable  from  one  anothei',  in  good 
agreement  with  their  I'emote  areas  of  occurrence. 

The  marked  specific  differences,  as  Avell  as  the  isolated  place  of 
the  genus  within  the  Potamogetonaceae,  indicate  their"  great  age. 
The  following  more  detailed  explanation  of  their  distribution  is 
only  a  Avorking  hypothesis.  In  former  times  the  genus  inhabited 
&  continuous  area,  of  Avhich  the  present  tAvo  isolated  areas  are  the 
only  remnants.  It  seems  as  if  the  genus  is  noAV  no  longer  fit  for 
true  tropical  conditions,  while  the  ancestors  of  the  present  species 
did  occur  in  the  Tropics.  Tropical  conditions,  tlien,  have  driven 
Posidonia  toAvards  the  north  and  south;  and  the  Australian  south- 
coast  and  the  Mediterranean  are  the  last  refuge  for  a  dying  genus, 
Airhich,  to  judge  from  identifications  of  leaves  from  Tertiary -.'and 
Cretaceous  times,   is  one  of  the  oldest  floAvei'ing  plants. 

VI.    The  Mediterranean    group  contains   only   tAvo    species — viz.  : 

Cymodocea  nodosa. 

Posidonia  oceanica. 

The  tAVo  species,  Zostera  marina  and  Z.  nana  also  uceur  in  the 
Mediterranean,   but   are   not   lestvicted   to   it. 

We  have  already  dealt  Avith  I'osldonla  oceanica.  Avhen  treating 
of  the  Australian  /'.  australis.  Neither  Posidonia  nor  Cymodocea 
goes  into  the  Black  Sea,  probably  because  its  waters  are  neither 
Avarm  nor  saline  enough;  Zostera  marina  and  Z.  nana,  on  the 
other  liand,  having  greater  ability  of  adaptation,  penetrate  into 
the  Black  Sea. 


186  C.  H.  Ostenfeld: 

Posidonia  and  Cymodocen  have  migrated  through  the  Straits  of 
Gibraltar  out  along  the  nearest  Atlantic  coast,  Posidonia  going 
northwards  along  the  Iberian  peninsula  as  far  as  the  head  of  the 
Bay  of  Biscay,  and  Cymodocea  northwards  to  Cadiz  and  south- 
wards alongl  the  African  coast  to  Senegambia  and  the  Canaries. 
These  interesting  extensions  of  distribution  are  slight,  and  the  two 
species  are  essentially  Mediterranean  in  type. 

As  explained  above,  Posidonia  has  its  only  allied  species  in  Aus- 
tralian Avaters.  C ymodocea  nodosa  is  nearest  allied  to  C.  rotun- 
data.  one  of  the  Indopacific  species.  Therefore  it  seems  justifiable 
to  consider  the  Mediterranean  species  as  derived  from  the  Indo- 
pacific one;  or,  perhaps  more  correctly,  to  derive  both  from  an 
Indopacific  ancestor.  The  main  point,  however,  is  that  both  Poii- 
donia  and  C ymodocea.  must  be  supposed  to  have  come  to  the  Medi- 
terranean from  the  Indopacific  region,  and  that  this  happened  at 
a  comparative  early  time,  since  the  two  Mediterranean  species  have 
developed  so  far  along  their  own  line  of  evolution,-  and  are  now 
specifically  well  characterised. 

On  the  other  hand,  Zostera  marina  and  Z.  nana  came  into  the 
Mediterranean  from  the  north  and  west,  through  the  Straits  of 
Gibraltar. 

VII.  The  North-Pacific  group  consists  of  the  genus  Phyllo- 
spadix.  with  its  two  very  closely  allied  species — viz.  :  Phyllospadiz; 
Sroulcri  and  P.   Torreyi. 

Tlie  genus  Pliylloxpadi.r  lias  arisen  from  Zostera.  It  differs  in 
being  dioecious  and  having  a  short,  contracted  rhizome  (not  the 
long,  straggling  rhizome  of  Zostera).  The  two  species  are  so  close 
togt'thcr.  that  an  American  lx)tanist,  W.  K.  Dudley,  who  has 
studied  tliem  in  situ.  doul>ts  if  they  are  really  distinct.  The  one  {P. 
Scouleri)  is  very  varial)le.  while  the  other  (P.  Torreyi)  is  not.  and 
tlie  amplitude  of  the  variatitjn  of  the  first  species  includes  that  of 
tlie  second  one.  Botli  species  inhabit  the  same  part  of  the  west 
coast  of  Xo)-th  America,  from  southern  California  to  British 
Colunihia  ;  and  tlie  variable  (probably  older)  species  occurs  in 
Japan,  also  making  it  probable  that  it,  too,  may  be  found  in  the 
intermediate  i-egion,  along  the  shores  of  the  Aleutian  islands  and 
the  south  coast  of  Alaska. 

The  genus  l)eing  resti-icted  to  the  northern  Pacific,  and  derived 
from  Zostera,  lias  })robably  originated  not  in  the  tropics,  but  in 
its  present  liome,  and  at  a  comparatively  late  time. 

Phyllospa/7ir  serrulatu.s  Rupr.,  of  doubtful  standing,  came  from 
Alaska. 


Geographical  Distribution  of  Sea.-Orassfin.  1  87 

VIII.      TJtr  North-Tnnpcrale  group: 

Zostera  marina  and  Zostera  nana. 

Tliis  <,M-()up  has  really  (uily  one  typical  representative — viz.  :  Z. 
mariitti,  but  the  other  wide-spread  species,  Z.  na?ia,  comes  perhaps 
also  best  in  here,  as  an  irregular  member.  Its  distribution,  to- 
gether with  that  of  the  Australian  Zosferas,  gives,  I  think,  the  key- 
to  the  evolution  of  the  genus. 

Zostera  is  a  very  much  reduced  type,  which  is  supposed  to  have 
come  from  Potamofjrton-  and  Rupjna-Wke  ancestors.  The  flower- 
ing axis  bears  flowers  on  one  side  only,  and  the  flowers  are  naked; 
but  on  the  outer  side  of  each  flower  we  find  a  scale — the  so-called 
r e.f iliac iihi III.  This  scale  is  sometimes  supposed  to  be  a  reduced  peri- 
anth. It  is  present  in  Zostera  nana,  and  apparently  also  in  the 
Australian  species,  while  wanting — ordinarily — in  Z.  marina.  Its 
presence  in  Z.  nana,  and  allied  species,  seems  to  indicate  that 
they  are  tlie  older  types,  and  Z.  marina  the  younger.  The  distri- 
bution of  Z.  nana  and  of  its  allies  strengthens  this  view.  Z.  nana 
is  known  along  the  coasts  of  Europe,  from  Southern  Scandinavia 
southwards  into  tlie  Mediterranean,  where  it  penetrates  into  the 
Black  Sea;  further,  it  is  found  on  the  Atlantic  coast  of  Morocco 
and  in  the  Canaries.  It  does  not  occur  along  the  tropical  west- 
coast  of  Africa,  but  re-appears  in  South  Africa  and  in  Madagas- 
car. It  is  reported  with  doulit  from  the  Seychelles  also.  Lastly,  we 
have  records  of  it  from  Tonkin  and  Japan.  Now  it  must  be  ad- 
mitted that  the  identity  of  the  plants  from  all  these  regions  is  not 
certain,  as  it  is  known,  with  flowers  and  fruits,  from  Europe  only, 
and  tlie  vegetative  organs  show  no  specific  distinctions. 

Owing  to  the  uncei'tainty  of  some  of  the  records,  I  find  it  better 
to  err  on  the  side  of  caution,  and  to  liiake  the  more  general  state- 
ment : — that  a  narrow-leaved  and  small  Zostera  has  been  found 
in  the  above-mentioned  areas.  I  would  associate  with  this  form 
the  closely-allied  three  Australian  species,  the  distribution  of 
which  1  have  already  given.  In  this  way  we  get  one  group  of 
narrow-leaved  and  small  Zosteras,  wdth  an  almost  word-wide  dis- 
tribution. It  is  worth  noting  that  this  gi-oup  is  absent  from  both 
coasts  of  North  America,  and  that  the  records  are  very  scanty  as 
regards  tropical  localities.  The  distribution  has  some  resemblance 
to  that  of  the  genus  Posidonia,  but  it  is  less  restricted.  And  I 
think  the  same  explanation  holds  good  here — viz.  :  the  Zostera 
group  originated  in  the  Tropics,  and  migrated  both  northwards 
and  southwards,  nearly  disappearing  in   its  original  home.     Mean- 


188  C.  H.   OHtenfeld: 

wliile  the  extinction  in  the  Tropics  of  Zostera  has  not  been  as  com- 
plete, as  is  the  case  with  Pusidonia ;  and  Zof^fera  does  not  show 
8uch  marked  signs  of  waning  as  it  does. 

The  younger  type  of  the  genus,  Z.  marina,  is  distributed  along 
the  coasts  of  Europe,  from  the  Black  Sea  and  the  Mediterranean 
in  the  south  to  Lapland  (Murman  coast)  in  the  north.  From  the 
British  Isles  it  has  reached  the  Faeroes  and  Iceland ;  and  it  is  also 
found  at  one  locality  on  tlie  western  side  of  Greenland.  But  its 
occurrence  here  is,  I  think,  due  to  accidental  transport  by  man, 
as  it  is  near  places  inhabited,  onwards  to  the  present  time,  from 
the  time  of  the  old  Xorse  colonists.!  Along  the  Atlantic  coast  of 
America  we  find  Z.  marina,  extending  from  the  Gulf  of  St.  Law- 
rence to  Virginia.  Quite  separated  from  its  Atlantic  area  is  the 
North  Pacific  one,  which  on  the  American  side  extends  from 
Southern  Califoi-nia  to  Alaska,  while  the  Asiatic  side  includes  the 
coasts  of  Manchuria  and  Japan. 

Z.  marina  is  tlius  distributed  along  all  the  coasts  of  the  North 
Atlantic  and  tlie  North  Pacific,  but  it  is  wanting  in  the  intermedi- 
ate area,  the  Arctic  Ocean  (with  the  above-mentioned  exception  of 
Greenland).  The  question  now  naturally  ai-ises  :  How  has  it  come 
to  liave  this  discontinuous  distribution?  The  possibility  that  it 
originated  during  a  warmer  climate  in  the  Arctic  sea,  and  was 
driven  southwaids  by  a  deterioration  of  the  climate,  is  hardly  prob- 
able. 

The  origin  of  the  genus  was  supposed  to  be  tropical,  and  it  is 
more  probable  than  Z.  niarina  also,  which  is  ])y  no- means  young, 
in  spite  of  being  younger  than  the  Z.  nana  gioup,  originated  in 
a  Avarm  ocean  and  migrated  northwards;  but  tlie  evidence  is  not 
sufficiently  clear  whethei-  tliis  home  was  the  Pacific  or  the  Atlantic. 
As  it  is  not  probable  tliat  the  one  species  originated  in  botli  oceans, 
a  migration  from  one  ticean  to  the  other  seems  necessary.  We  have 
then  two  ways  of  migiation  :  (1)  Eithei-  it  migrated  through  a 
sea-connection  v.hich  dot's  not  now  exist — f'.(j..  through  the  Carib- 
bean connection  (just  as  it  is  pi'obable  tliat  the  ('ari])bean  group 
of  sea-grasses  did);  (2)  or,  it  migrated  by  way  of  the  An-tic  ocean 
at  a  time  Avhen  its  waters  were  Avarm.  The  latter  way  of  migra- 
tion seems  moie  probable  from  a  biological  point  of  view,  and  is 
better  in  accord  with  tlie  present-day  c<ui(litions  life  of  the 
species. 

Much  of  wliat  has  hen  said  liere  about  tlu'  evolution  of  the  sea- 
gra.sses  and   tlifir   iiiigiations  is,   of  coursi-.   only  hypothetical,    and 


Geographical  Bistrihution  of  Sea-Grasses.  1  89 

may  be  wrong.  Still,  it  seems  to  me  that  the  existing  facts  of  the 
distribution  of  the  genera  and  species  make  deductions  of  that 
kind  allowable.  They  are  a  help  in  gaining  an  idea  of  how  these 
interesting  remnants  of  the  older  types  of  Flowering  Plants  at- 
tained their  present  areas  of  distribution. 

The  peculiarities  of  distribution  of  the  sea-grasses  are  not  with- 
out parallel.  Amongst  the  Marine  Algae  similar  cases  have  been 
reported,  (rtorge  Murrai/  (l(S7-3)  has  pointed  out  that  tliero  is  a 
g:reat  resemblance  between  the  algal  flora  of  the  C'ari))bean  Sea 
and  that  of  the  Indopacific  region.  He  supposes  it  to  be  explicable 
by  a  migration  by  way  of  the  Cape.  A.  Svedel/iis  (1906)  agrees 
with  Murray  as  to  the  great  resemblance  of  the  floras,  which  he 
has  himself  studied,  especially  in  Canhrjja  (surely  a  very  old  type); 
but  his  explanation  necessitates  a  water-connection  where  the 
Isthmus  of  Panama  now  is.  This  is  essentially  the  same  explana- 
tion as  that  I  have  offered  with  regard  to  the  origin  of  the  Carib- 
bean sea-grasses. 

///.  Summary. 

1.  The  Marine  Flowering  plants,  the  sea-grasses,  belong  to  two 
families  of  the  old  monocotyledonous  cohort,  the  Helohiecip.  Tliey 
are  reduced  and  specially  adapted    ancient  types. 

2.  With  one  exception  (the  monotypic  Enhalus).  the  genera  all 
occur  in  the  Indopacific  and  the  Atlantic  regions.  This  distribu- 
tion indicates  that  the  origin  of  the  genera  goes  back  to  a  time 
when  the  relation  of  sea  and  land  was  different  from  that  now — • 
viz.   to  the  earlier  part  of  the  Tertiary  period. 

3.  The  dispersal  of  the  sea-grasses  is  restricted  and  slow.  It 
is  mainly  due  to  sea-currents,  but  the  seeds  are  not  able  to  float, 
and   detached   pieces  of   rhizomes   do   not  live  long. 

4.  The  8  genera  contain  altogether  only  30  species,  which  can 
be  arranged  into  8  groups,  according  to  their  geographical  distri- 
bution— viz.  :  (a)  4  Tropical:  Indopacific,  Malayan,  East-African 
and  Caribbean ;  (b)  2  W arm-temperate  (or  sub-ti'opical)  :  Austra- 
lian, Mediterranean;  and  (c)  2  Temperate:  North-Pacific  and 
North-Temperate. . 

5.  The  Indopacific  group  contains  the  majority  of  the  species, 
especially  when  we  include  the  Malayan  and  East-African  groups 
as  sub-divisions  (13  species).  The  parent  home  of  the  sea-grasses 
lies  within  the  geographical  area  of  this  group. 

6.  The  Caribbean  group  (6  species)  has  4  species,  each  of  which 
is  closely  allied  to  an  Indopacific  one,   and  it  is  probable  that  the 


190  Ostenfeid:    Distribution  of  Sea-Grasses. 

whole  group  migrated  from  the  Indopacific  to  the  Caribl>ean  Sea 
at  a  time  when  there  was  a  connection  between  them  through  the 
Isthmus  of  Panama.  Two  of  these  species  have  reached  the  Ber- 
mudas, but  elsewhere  they  are  not  found  outside  the  Caribbean 
region,  the  Atlantic  Ocean  being  very  poor  in  sea-grasses. 

7.  The  genus  Posidonia  has  at  the' present  time  one  species 
along  the  south  coast  of  Australia,  and  the  other  in  the  Mediter- 
ranean. It  is  supposed  that  they  represent  the  last  remnants  of 
a  genus  whose  home  was  somewhere  in  the  Indian  region,  and 
that  it  w^as  driven  away  towards  the  north  and  the  south. 

8.  The  other  species  of  the  Mediterranean  group,  Cymodocea 
jiodosa,  also  migrated  from  the  south-east  into  the  Mediterranean, 
while  the  two  Zosteras  of  this  sea  came  from  the  north. 

9.  The  genus  Phi/llospadix  is  restricted  to  the  North  Pacific. 
Its  morphological  characters  indicate  its  derivation  from  Zostera. 

10.  The  narrow-leaved,  small  Zosteras  (Z.  nana,  and  the  three 
Australian  species)  are  supposed  to  be  the  older  type  of  the  genus, 
as  they  still  have  the  "  retinaculum  "  (the  scale  attached  to  the 
flower).  When  taken  together,  their  distribution  is  "  bipolar," 
with  a  few  outposts  in  the  Tropics. 

11.  It  is  supposed  that  the  genus  Zonfera  originated  in  a  warm 
sea  and  migrated  towards  the  north  and  the  south. 

12.  The  younger  type,  Zostera  marina,  is  yet  an  old  species. 
It  is  supposed  that  it  also  originated  in  a  warm  sea  (perhaps  in 
the  Indopacific  region),  wandered  northwards,  and  in  one  manner 
or  another  came  from  the  Pacific  into  the  Atlantic,  or  vice  versa. 

13.  With  the  exception  of  Phyllospadix,  which  originated  in  the 
North-Pacific,  and  arose  from  Zostera,  all  the  genera  of  sea-grasses 
are  supposed  to  have  arisen  in  the  Tropics,  where  the  home  of  most 
of  them  still  is,  Zostera  marina  being  the  only  species  which  extends 
into  the  Arctic  Sea. 

14.  The  distribution  of  the  species  still  requii-es  investigation. 
This  applias  especially  to  the  three  Australian  Zosteras,  which  are 
little  known,  both  systematically  and  geographically. 


[Proc.  Rot.  Soc.  Victoria.  27  (N.S.),  Pt.  H.,  1914]. 

Art.  XV.— Bitter  Pit  and  Sensitivity  of  Apples  to  Poisons, 
An  Answer  to  Prof.   A.   J.    Ewart. 

BY 

H.   G.   BREIDAHL,    B.Sc. 

AND 

A.   C.   H.   ROTHERA,   M.A,   D.Sc. 

[Read  8tli  October,  1914]. 

This  opportunity  has  kindly  been  given  us  of  replying  to  a  paper 
by  Prof.  A.  J.  Ewart,  appearing  in  the  Proceedings  of  this  Society, 
Vol.  XXVI.,  p.  228,  March,  1914,  in  which  he  criticises  a  paper  by 
R.  H.  Greenwood  and  A.  C.  H.  Rothera,  forming  portion  of  the 
Second  Progress  Report,  issued  by  Mr.  D.  McAlpine. 

The  position  briefly  is  this  : 

A  theory  that  Bitter  Pit  might  be  due  to  poisoning  of  certam 
cell  groups  in  the  apple  was  put  forward  by  Dr.  Jean  White,  and 
strenuously  supported  by  Prof.  Ewart.  This  theory  included  the 
statement  that  the  apple  cells  of  the  areas  affected  with  pit  have 
their  diastatic  enzymes  destroyed — or  inhibited — by  the  poison  be- 
fore the  cells  themselves  are  killed.  It  is  logical,  if  this  be  so,  to 
attempt  to  show  that  bitter  pit  tissue  contains  some  poison  capable 
of  inhibiting  diastatic  action,  and  Greenwood  and  Rothera  searched 
first  for  such  a  poison  in  a  soluble  form,  second  in  an  insoluble 
form.  They  were  unable  to  get  any  evidence  of  inhibition,  their 
results  either  showing  no  effect,  or  in  the  case  of  malt  diastase  an 
acceleration  with  both  normal  pulp  and  pitted  material.  This 
acceleration  was  assigned  to  the  beneficial  effect  which  traces  of 
organic  acids  exert  upon  malt  diastase,  which  explanation  is  still 
held  to  be  the  correct  one  for  this  }-esult.  since  it  naturally  accounts 
for  the  slightly  greater  acceleration  produced  by  healthy  pulp  cells 
than  by  ])itter  pit,  and  also  for  the  greater  retardation  of  ptyalin 
(wliicli  is  injui'ed  by  slight  acidity),   by  the  foi-mer  than  tlie  latter. 

Against  these  expevimental  results  Prof.  Ewart  raises  various 
criticisms. 

His  fir.st  is  a  complete  denial.  He  writes  :  "  On  repeating  these 
experiments  with  filtered  solutions  of  malt  diastase  dissolved  in 
distilled  water.  I  am  alik'  to  give  them  emphatic  contradiction. 
Prolonged   contact   with   pounded   apple   pulp,    boiled   or    unboiled. 


192  BreiddJd  and  Rather  a  : 

bitter  pit,  or  normal,  practically  destroys  diastase  in  one  to  three 
days." 

But  in  the  next  paragraph  it  appears  that  20  grms.  of  pounded 
pulp  were  added  to  only  10  c.c.  of  1%  Taka  diastase.  No  experi- 
ments are  quoted  which  are  comparable  with  Greenwood  and 
Rothera's,  in  which  1  grm.  of  pounded  pulp  was  used  with  5  c.c. 
•of  a  5%  malt  diastase,  and  the  emphatic  contradiction  is  therefore 
most  unjustifiable. 

The  second  criticism  is  that  the  observed  accelerating  action  on 
malt  diastase  was  not  an  acceleration,  but  only  an  apparent  accele- 
ration, due  to  an  experimental  pitfall. 

Owing  to  actions  of  tannic  acid  on  starch  solutions  causing  pre- 
cipitation of  the  starch,  and  also  to  the  influence  of  tannic  acid 
upon  the  starch  iodine  test  employed.  Greenwood  and  R  other  a  are 
assumed  to  have  been  misled  into  taking  the  digestion  of  the  starch 
as  complete,  when  it  really  was  still  incomplete. 

Though  convinced  that  a  real  acceleration  of  malt  diastase  had 
been  obtained  with  both  normal  apple  tissue  and  bitter  pit 
material,  and  that  the  experimental  technique  employed  excluded 
the  pitfalls  suggested  by  Prof.  Ewart,  it  was  decided  to  carefully 
investigate  the  criticism  raised  as  to  the  action  of  tannic  acid. 

Freely  acknoAvledging  full  indebtedness  to  Professor  Ewart  for 
bringing  the  tannic  acid  complications  to  our  notice,  we  find  that 
such  complications  cannot  be  applied  to  refute  the  experimental 
results  of  Greenwood  and  Rothera. 

Tn  the  first  place,  though  the  blue  colour  produced  by  starch 
with  a  small  amount  of  iodine  can  be  destroyed  by  tannic  acid, 
the  proportions  of  the  reagents  are  quite  different  to  those  of  the 
experiments  of  Greenwood  and  Rothera,  in  which  the  maximum 
tannic  acid  could  not  exceed  .002%  final  concentration,  and  in 
wliicli  the  iodine  was  always  used   in  large  excess. 

For,  in  following  a  starch  digestion,  it  is  <_ustoniarv  to  remove 
1  drop  of  the  starch  solution,  which  is  then  mixed  with  1  drop  of 
a  1%  iodine  solution,  and  the  blue  colour  ])rodueed  under  such 
conditions  is  uninfluenced  by  tannic  acid  in  concentrations  up 
to  1%. 

Only  when  the  (|uantity  of  tannic  acid  is  large,  and  tlie  iodine 
vei-y  little  in  amount,  does  the  decolourising  power  of  the  tannic 
acid  become  inqioitant. 

Then  again,  we  find  that  Ewait  is  unfortunate  in  his  second 
point  that  tannic  acid  inhibits  diastatic  action  by  forming  a  com- 
pound with  starch  wliirli  is  resistant  to  the  ferment. 


Bitter  Pit  in  Afrples  19:^ 

Although  tannic  acid  (in  the  concentrations  with  which  we  ar& 
concerned,  when  dealing  witli  apple  tissue  or  juice)  does  produce 
a  slight  cloudiness  in  a  1%  filtered  starch  solution,  this  does  not 
render  the  starch  any  less  readily  digested  by  diastase.  With  the 
weaker  tannic  acid  solutions  (as  Prof.  Ewart  points  out)  the  cloudi- 
ness vanishes  at  .35°  C. 

In  fact,  with  tlie  taka  diastase  (Merck)  in  the  possession  of  the 
laboratory,  the  presence  of  small  amounts  of  tannic  acid  caused 
an  acceleration  of  the  enzyme  action,  and  a  slowing  was  only  ob- 
tained when  the  tannic  acid  concentration  was  approximately  five 
times  as  great  as  in  apple  juice. 

It  proved  a  most  fortunate  circumstance  for  us  that  the  taka 
diastase  preparation  in  our  possession  (the  same  as  that  used  by 
Greenwood  and  Rothera)  showed  this  acceleration,  for  it  permitted 
us  to  show  that  (at  least  for  the  tannic  acid  concentrations  up  tO' 
.25%)  tannic  acid  does  not  foi-m  a  starch  compound  of  less  digesti- 
bility, and  that  where  it  does  inhibit  diastatic  action  it  does  sO' 
by  precipitating  the  enzyme  as  suggested  by  Payen.i 

Solutions  of  the  taka  diastase  in  our  possession  gave  no  imme- 
diate precipitate  with  dilute  tannic  acid,  but  in  some  of  our  ex- 
periments, in  which  a  weak  enzyme  solution  was  used,  a  precipitate 
did  form  after  two  hours,  and  w^as  accompanied  by  a  slowing  of 
the  rate  of  action. 

This  slowing  apparently  depended  upon  the  flocculation  of  the 
enzyme  per  se,  and  was  not  proportional  to  the  amount  of  tannic 
acid  present.  In  fact,  a  slightly  greater  amount  of  tannic  acid 
produced  less  slowing,  probably  because  the  accelerating  factor  was 
present  simultaneously. 

Careful  tests  were  made  in  order  to  be  certain  that  the  tannic 
acid  acceleration  was  not  due  to  an  influence  exerted  upon  the 
starch  iodine  colour. 

Greenwood  and  Rothera  used  strong  solutions  of  taka  diastase, 
and  in  the  light  of  present  results  the  very  small  amount  of  tannic 
acid  extracted  from  healthy  apple  pulp,  or  pitted  cells,  could  only 
have  had  a  slight   accelerating  influence. 

With  the  malt  diastase  (Merck)  (the  same  preparation  as  that 
used  by  Greenwood  *ind  Rothera)  tannic  acid  solutions,  even  when 
dilute,  always  gave  a  precipitate,  with  solutions  of  the  enzyme, 
accompanied  by  a  retardation  of  action.  In  Greenwood  and 
Rothera's    experiments    with    malt     diastase,     accelerations     were 

1.  Quoted  from  Cza)v  o  Rionhemie  dei-  Pflanzeii,  vol.   i.,  p.  .•i4.5 


194  Breidahl  and  Rothera  .- 

obtained,   so  that  the  invoking  of  the  tannic   acid   retardation    is 
not  applicable. 

We  therefore  maintain  (i)  that  Ewart's  tannic  acid  complica- 
tions are  not  applicable  to  the  experiments  of  Greenwood  and 
Rothera;  (ii)  that  Ewart  is  incorrect  in  assigning  the  tannic  acid 
retardation  to  an  action  upon  the  starch;  and  (iii)  that  experimen- 
tal results  obtained  under  quite  different  conditions  and  with  quite 
different  proportions  of  reagents  have  been  used  in  a  wholly  un- 
justifiable manner,  as  though  applicable  to  Greenwood  and 
Rothera's  conditions,    and    reagent  coticentrationa. 


1. — Action   of  Tannic  Acid  on   Filtered  Starch  Solutions. 

1%  tannic  acid  solution  was  added  to  1%  starch  solution  in  the 
proportions  of  1:1;  1  :-3 ;  1:7;  and  1:15  respectively,  the  final 
•concoctions  of  tannic  acid  being  0.5%;  0.25%;  0.125%,  and 
0.0625%  respectively.  They  were  mixed  and  kept  at  room  tem- 
perature. 

The  first  two  gave  a  cloudiness  immediately,  which  became  dense 
on  standing;  but  after  eighteen  hours  there  was  no  sign  of  a 
precipitate. 

The  third  gave  a  very  slight  cloudiness  on  first  mixing,  but  this 
became  more  marked  on  standing. 

The  fourth  showed  no  appreciable  change  from  a  control  to  which 
an  amount  of  water  equal  to  the  tannic  acid  solution  had  been 
added,  but  after  standing  eighteen  hours  there  was  a  just  per- 
ceptible difference. 

In  the  course  of  one  of  the  expeiiments.  to  be  described  later, 
1%  tannic  acid  and  1%  filtered  starch  solutions  were  mixed,  so  that 
the  final  concentrations  were  .2%  tannic  acid,  and  .8%  starch  re- 
spectively. The  starch  solution  had  been  made  up  five  days  previ- 
ously, and  had  not  been  filtered  in  the  meantime. 

A  cloudiness  developed 'anunediately  on  mixing,  which  was  done 
at  room  temperature. 

This  was  then  placed  in  a  water  bath  kept  at  38o — 4()0C.,  with 
a  control.  At  the  temperature  of  the  bath  it  became  much  cleai-er. 
being  but  little  denser  than  the  control  (which  contained  .8% 
starch  solution),  and  at  the  end  of  twenty-thiee  hours  there  was  a 
slight  transparent  precipitate  at  the  bottom  of  both  tubes,  being 
slightly  greater  in  that  containing  tlie  tannic  acid. 


Bitter  Fit  in  Apples.  105 

2. — The  Action  of  Tannic  Acid  on  the  iodine  tent  for  dextrins 
formed  during   diastatic   action    o?i   starch. 

A  final  concentration  of  1%  tannic  acid  was  found  to  have  no 
effect  on  this  test,  as  used  in  Greenwood  and  Rothera's,  and  the 
following  experiments.  This  is  because  the  conditions  involve  an 
excess  of  iodine.  The  interference  of  tannic  acid  with  the  starch 
and  dextrin  colours  is  due  apparently  to  its  forming'  a  combination 
with  the  iodine,  and  naturally  ceases  when  the  iodine  is  in  excess. 

3. — Action   of  Tannic   Acid  on    the  diastatic   hi/droli/sfs   of  starch. 

Filtered  starch  solution  was  used  throughotit  the  expei-iments, 
which  were  done  at   a  temperature  of  38^ — 40^0. 

Experiment  1.     (Tubes  each  contained   15  c.c.   of  mixture.) 

Using  a  2.5%  solution  of  taka  diastase,  which  proved  rapid  in 
action,  the  following  mixtures  were  made  up,  and  tested  for  com- 
parative rates  of  action. 

Tannic  Acid 
(final  concentration). 


.starch  (1°,). 

Diastase  (2.5'J. 

a  (control)     - 

10  c.c. 

1  c.c. 

h 

10  c.c. 

1   C.C. 

c 

10  c.c. 

]    C.C. 

d 

10  c.c. 

1    C.C. 

.25% 
.125% 

c  and  d  were  finished  in  about  5|  minutes,  and  a  about  2 
minutes  later.  f>  still  gave  a  strong  red-brown  at  the  end  of  20 
minutes. 

Experiment  2.     (Tubes  each  contained  10  c.c.  of  mixture.) 

This  was  done,  using  taka  diastase,  with  weaker  concoctions 
of  tannic  acid  than  those  used  in  Experiment  1. 

starch  (1%).         Diastase  (2.5%).       (fi„aT'concentrL«on). 


a  (cont 

;rol)    - 

8  c.c. 

- 

1  c.c. 

- 

0 

b 

- 

8  c.c. 

- 

1  c.c. 

- 

.1% 

c 

- 

8  c.c. 

- 

1  c.c. 

- 

.05% 

d 

- 

8  c.c. 

Ice. 

- 

.025% 

In  2  minutes,  the  control  a  .still  gave  a  red-violet,  whilst  the 
others  were  all  red.  b  was  finished  in  5  minutes,  c  and  d  in  about 
8  minutes,   and  control  a  in   12  minutes. 


196  Breidahl  and  Rothera  : 

Experiment  3.     (Tubes  each  contained   10  c.c.  of  mixture.) 
Usinof  malt  diastase. 


Starch  (1°,). 

Diastase  (•2.5;„ 

'•       (final ' 

Liniiic  AC 
concenti 

a  (control)    - 

S  c.c. 

1  c.c. 

0 

b 

8  c.c. 

1  c.c. 

.1% 

c 

8  c.c. 

1  C.c. 

- 

.05% 

d 

8  c.c. 

1  C.C. 

.025 '/i 

Altliougli  the  acid  and  staix-li  solutions  were  mixed  before  add- 
ing to  the  dia.stase,  the  concentrations  of  tannic  acid  were  strong- 
enough  to  cause  a  precipitate  to  form  in  the  diastase  solution. 
(This  Avas  //of  the  case  with  taka  diastase  in  Experiment   1.) 

In  12  minutes  the  control  a  was  well  into  the  red,  while  the 
olhe)-8  were  all  ))hR'.  In  20  minutes  d  was  beginning  to  show 
traces  of  violet,   the  others  being  still  l)lue. 

The  effect  on  saliva  was  parallel,  a  precipitate  being  formed  br 
.025%   of  tannic   acid. 

Experiment  J/.      (Tuljes  each  contained   lO  c.c.   of  mixture.) 
This  was  done  with  weak  taka  diastase. 


Starch  (1;^), 

Diastase  (.-25".). 

Tannic  Acid. 

a  (control)    - 

8  C.C. 

1    C.C. 

0 

h 

8  C.c. 

1   c.c. 

.3% 

c 

8  c.c. 

1  c.c. 

.16% 

d 

8  c.c. 

1   c.c. 

.1% 

These  were  left  in  a  water  bath  overnight.  The  temperature- 
started   at   40OC..   but   fell  to   36oC.    during  the   night. 

On  te.sting,  after  18.\  hours,  the  control  a  liad  finished,  d  gare 
a  very  slig\ht  colour,  r  gave  more  colour  (red),  whilst  h  gave  a 
very  red  l)rown. 

In  this  experiment,  ctnicentrations  of  tannic  aiid,  which  gave 
an  acceleration  in  the  short  expei-iments.  heio  gave  a  very  definite 
retardation. 

The  following  experiments  were  done  to  determine  whether  this 
retardation  was  due  to  actiiui   (ni   the  ferment   oi-  on   the  starch. 

Experiment  5.     (Tubes  eath  contained    10  c.c.   of  mixture.) 

Taka  Diastase  Tannic  Acid 

(-2.,%).  (final  concentration). 


a 

8  c.c. 

- 

.2% 

h 

8  c.c. 

.05% 

c   (control)     - 

8  c.c. 

- 

0 

Bitlev  Pit  in  Applet.  197 

These  wfiv  kept    in  a   water  bath  at  :^80— 4()0('. 

In  2  houis  a  hue.  dispersed  eoafjuliim  liad  appeared  in  about 
equal  amounts  in  a  and  h. 

This  had  sli<rhtly  increased  and  settled  out  at  the  end  of  23 
hours,  and  l)y  tliis  time  a  slijjfht  precipitate  had  appeared  in  the 
control  c.     a  and   }>  were  also  darker  in  colour  than  r. 

a.  />.  and  c  were  shaken  thoroughly,  and  1  c.c  of  each  was  tested 
on  5  c.c.  of  starch  solution  (1%). 

The  control  finished  in  1\  minutes,  a  in  4  minutes,  and  h  in  5i 
minutes. 

Although  a  had  been  in  contact  with  a  greater  percentage  of 
tannic  acid,  yet  its  action  was  quicker -than  that  of  h. 

This  may  be  explained  by  supposing  that  the  formation  of  a 
coagulum  was  the  sole  inhibiting  factoi-,  and  that  the  acceleration 
was  caused  by  the  presence  of  .04%  of  tannic  acid  in  the  final 
starch-diastase  mixture,  in  the  case  of  «,  whereas  only  .01%  was 
present  when   testing   h.    [No   acid   being  present   in   control.] 

Experiment  6.     (Tubes  each  contained  10  c.c.  of  mixture.) 


Starcli  (1%). 


Tannic  Acid 


(final  concentration). 
a  -         8  c.c.  -  .2% 

h  -         8  c.c.         -  .05% 

c  (control)     -         8  c.c.         -  0 

In  testing  these,  it  was  obviously  necessary  to  compare  them  with 
the  control  in  the  presence  of  a  corresponding  amount  of  acid, 
hence  the  control  was  divided  into  two. 

The  following  tubes  were  made  up  (each  containing  5  c.c.  of 
mixture). 

starch.  Diastase. 

(1      3  C.c.  of  a  1  c.c.  1%  Taka  diastase 

a  J  ' 

'-2      3  c.c.  of  c  (control)  ., 

,    ^  3      3  c.c.  of  h  „ 

'  4      3  c.c.  of  c  (control)  ,, 

1  and  2  then  contained  .12%  of  Tannic  Acid 
and  3  and  4       „  „  .03% 

It  was  found  that  1  and  2  went  neck  and  neck  (6  minutes),  and 
at  a  faster  rate  than  3  and  /f,  which  also  went  neck  and  neck  (10 
minutes). 

This  experiment  shows  that  the  prolonged  action  of  .2%  tannic 
acid  on  .8%  filtered  staixh  solution  does  not  materially  affect  its 
subsequent  hydrolyses  by  taka  diastase. 


Tannic  Acid. 

HiO. 

0 

1  c.c. 

.6  c.c.  of  1% 

.4  c.c. 

0 

1  c.c. 

.15  c.c.  of  1% 

.85  c.c. 

[Proc.  Eoy.  Soc.   Victokia  27  (N.S.),  Part  II.,  1914. 

Ar']'.  XVI. — Notes  on  Australian  and  Tasmanian.  Scydmaenidae, 
ivitk  Descriptions  of  New  Species.   ' 

By    ARTHUR   M.    LEA. 

[Read  November  12tb.  191 4]. 

Xu  family  of  beetles  of  equal  extent  in  Australia  and  Tasmania 
has  been  so  much  neglected  as  the  Scydin-aenidae.  Probably  this 
has  been  largely  on  account  of  the  unsatisfactory  descriptions  by 
the  late  Rev.  R.  L.  King.  So  that,  apart  from  the  species  named 
by  him,  very  few  liave  been  recorded  from  Australia.  The  refer- 
ences are  as  follows  : — 

1.  King,  Trans.  Ent.   Soc.  N.S.  AVales.   I.,  pp.   91-99. 

2.  Macleay,  I.e.  II.,  y>.   155. 

3.  Sharp,  Trans.  Ent.  Soc.  London,  1874,  p.  515. 

4.  Lea,  Proc.  Roy.  Soc.  Victoria,  1905,  p.  ."577. 

5.  Lea,  I.e.   1907,  p.  153. 

6.  Lea,  I.e.,    1910,  pp.  181-189. 

7.  Lea,  Proc.  Linn.  Soc.  N.S.  Wales.  1911.  p.  456. 

Some  years  ago  I  carefully  examined  all  of  King's  and  .Macleay's 
types,  now  in  the  Ansti-alian  Museum;  and  received  from  that 
institution  most  of  their  species.  But  for  these  circumstances  I 
should  probably  have  had  to  pass  over  all  l>ut  a  few  of  the  species 
here  described. 

On  prepai'ing  to  work  at  a  particular  group  of  insects  I  usually 
write  to  many  of  my  entomological  correspondents,  requesting  the 
loan  of  specimens  of  the  group ;  but  with  the  Sej/dmaenidae  the 
species  in  external  appearance  are  so  much  alike,  and  the  prepara- 
tory work  is  so  extensivel,  and  often  unsatisfactory, 2  that  I  felt 
indisposed  to  do  so  in  tliis  instance.  Mr.  H.  H.  D.  Griffith,  how- 
ever, allowed  me  to  examine  his  collection  of  the  family,  and  to 
retain  such  specimens  as  1  desired.  From  Mr.  H.  W.  Davey  and 
others  some  ants'  nest  species  were  obtained,  but  these  were  noted 
elsewhere  ;3  a  few  were  obtained  from  correspondents  in  the  ordinary 
course  of  exchange,  and  a  few  sent  from  the  British  Museum  for 

1.  The  majority  of  Australian  collectors  at  present,  iiiifortuiiatel.'s',  seldom  set  out  the  legs 
and  anteimae  of  their  beetles. 

2.  With  siii!;?le  specimens  it  is  often  difficult  to  jiidnc  wliutlier  tlie  absence  of  clothingf  from 
certain  parts  may  be  natural  or  due  to  abrasion. 

3.  In  I'roc.  Koy.  Soe.  Victoria,  lOtO,  pp.  ISl-lSit. 


Australian  and  Tasmanian  Scydtnaenidae.  1 '.•'.• 

examination.  I  also  examined  all  the  Australian  specimens  of  the 
family  in  the  Macleay  Museinu.  hut  as  most  of  these  were  taken 
nuiny  years  ago,  and  many  are  uniciue  and  difficult  to  clean,  many 
were  returned  unnamed.  Some  of  my  own  specimens  are  also  left 
unnamed,   altliough  almost  certainly   new. 

The  majoiity  of  the  specimens  from  New  South  Wales  were  taken 
during  floods,  and  it  is  likely  enough  therefore  that  some  of  them 
are  ants'  nest  species.  From  Tasmania  a  large  percentage  of  the 
species  were  taken  from  mosses,  lichens  and  tussocks  ;i  and  it  is 
extremely  j)robable  that  when  mosses,  etc.,  are  well  worked  in  other 
parts  of  Australia,  undescribed  species  w^ill  be  obtained  in  abun- 
dance. So  far  New  South  Wales  and  Tasmania  are  the  only  two 
States  that  have  been  (comparatively)  well  worked  for  species  i>f 
the  family. 

Ifeferopnathus  armitagei,  King. 

Of  this  species  King  says,  "  Thorace  fossula  transversa  basali  "; 
on  a  co-type  before  me,  however,  there  is  at  the  base  of  the  pro- 
thorax  a  close  series  of  punctures,  but  they  are  separated,  and  not 
combined  to  form  a  transverse  depression,  although  at  a  hasty 
glance  they  appear  to  be  so. 

Heterognathus  gracilis.   King. 

Additional  localities  for  this  species  are  Tweed  River.  Forest 
Reefs  and  Glen  Innes. 

Heferognathii.^   geniculatvs.    King. 

Additional  localities  for  tliis  species  are  Glen  Innes  and  Forest 
Reefs. 

Heterognathus  rohustus,  n.sp. 

Of  a  rather  dark  reddish  castaneous,  suture  slightly  infuscated. 
Rather  densely  clothed  with  subei-ect,  stramineous  pubescence  or 
short  hairs. 

Head  moderately  wide,  with  small,  partially  concealed  punctures. 
Eyes  of  medium  size,  latero-frontal  and  fairly  prominent.  An- 
tennae, for  the  genus,  rather  stout;  club  conspicuously  three- 
jointed.  Prothorax  moderately  convex,  about  as  long  as  wide, 
sides  rather  strongly  rounded,  but  becoming  oblique  to  base; 
punctures  vei-y  indistinct.  Elytra  rather  short  and  wide,  across 
base  wider  than  widest  part  of  prothorax,   but  across  middle  not 

1.   Some  of  these  also  are  perhaps  inquilines,  as  many  ants  are  to  be  taken  in  such  situations. 

5a 


200  Arthur  M.  Lea  : 

twice  as  wide;  sides  rather  strongly  and  evenly  rounded,  with  small, 
dense  punctures,  only  partially  concealed  by  clothing.  Legs  rather 
long  and  stout;  hind  coxae  moderately  separated.     Length,  2  mm. 

Hab. — Queensland;  Mulgrave  River  (H.  Hacker). 

A  robust,  densely  pubescent  species,  allied  to  gracilis,  but  larger 
and  stouter,  and  elytra  with  dense  and  fairly  distinct  punctures. 
Considerably  stouter  than  carinatus,  ninth  joint  of  antennae 
larger,  and  prothorax  not  carinated,  etc. 

The  second-eighth  joints  of  antennae  are  of  almost  even  width, 
but  gradually  decrease  in  length,  from  slightly  longer  than  wide 
to  moderately  transverse,  the  ninth  joint  is  somewhat  smaller  than 
the  tenth,  and  about  twice  as  long  and  twice  as  wide  as  the  eighth, 
the  eleventh  is  subconic'al,  slightly  wider  and  distinctly  longer  than 
the  tenth. 

Two  rather  dirty  specimens  from  Brisbane,  in  the  Macleay 
Museum,  probably  belong  to  this  species,  but  differ  in  having  the 
abdomen  slightly  less  convex;  the  clothing  also  is  somewhat  sparser, 
bTit  this  is  probably  due  to  abrasion. 

Scydmae7ius  kingensis,  Lea. 

Tasmanian  specimens  of  this  species  have  the  longitudinal  impres- 
sion on  each  side  of  the  suture,  near  the  base  more  distinct  than  on 
the  type;  so  that  conjoined  they  appear  as  a  rather  large  depres- 
sion, with  the  suture  elevated  in  the  middle  of  same.  The  antennae 
were  originally  described  as  with  the  "  last  four  (joints)  forming 
an  elongate  and  loosely  jointed  club."  Having  had  occasion  to 
examine  many  species  recently,  this  now  appears  incorrect  to  me, 
and  the  joints  should  be  regarded  as  subcontinuous,  and  not  form- 
ing a  club;  a  distinction  readily  apparent  on  examining  numerous 
species,  whose  antennae  have  the  two,  three,  or  four  apical  joints 
conspicuously  clavate. 

Scydniaenus  gulosus.  King. 

This  species  may  be  taken  in  abundance  during  floods  on  several 
New  South  Wales  rivers.  There  is  also  a  specimen  in  the  Macleay 
Museum  from  South  Australia,  and  two  from  Victoria. 

On  most  of  the  specimens  the  head  and  prothorax  are  of  a  deep 
shining  black,  but  two  specimens  in  the  Macleay  Museum  from 
Sydney  and  Ash  Island,  and  one  in  my  own  collection  from 
AVindsor,  have  the  parts  named  not  much  darker  than  the  elytra. 

The  front  tibiae  are  dilated  only  in  the  male. 


Australian  and  Tasmanian  Scychnaenidae.  201 

Sci/(h/ia<-/iiis  parrnmattensis,  King. 

Additional  localities  for  this  species  are  Clarence  River,  Windsor 
and  Tannvorth. 

Scijdmaoiua  clarus.   n.sp. 

<?■  Bright  reddish  castancous  ;  head  prothorax  and  suture  some- 
■what  darker  than  elsewiiere ;  palpi  and  tarsi  flavous.  Sides  at 
base  of  head,  and  sides  of  prothorax,  with  moderately  dense, 
flavous   hairs;    rest   of   upper   surface   entirely   glabrous. 

Head  transverse;  obtusely  bilobed  between  antennae.  Eyes  small 
and  prominent.  Antennae  rather  long;  club  four-jointed.  Pro- 
tJwrar  about  as  long  as  wide,  moderately  convex;  each  side  of  base 
with  a  small  deep  fovea,  the  outer  basal  margins  also  foveate. 
Ehffra  at  base  scarcely  wider  than  base  of  prothorax,  sides  dilated 
to  near  the  middle;  and  then  rounded  to  ajjex;  basal  impressions 
wide  and  conspicuou.s.  Mctasttrnum  rather  widely  concave'  at 
middle  of  apex.  Legs  rather  long;  hind  coxae  rather  distant; 
femora  rather  stout,  the  front  pair  stouter  than  the  others.  Length 
If  mm. 

?  Differs  in  having  the  metasternum  depressed  only  in  middle  of 
extreme  apex,  femora  thinner  and  antennae  somewhat  thinnei-  and 
shorter. 

Hah. — Tasmania  :  Mount  Wellington,  Frankford,  from  fallen 
leaves  and  moss.  (A.  M.  Lea.) 

In  appearance  fairly  close  to  r/lahripennis.  but  antennae  rather 
stouter,   and  prothoracic  impressions  and  clotliing  different. 

At  a  glance  the  club  appears  to  be  subcontinuous  with  the  other 
joints  of  the  antennae,  but  the  eighth  joint  is  longer  and  suddenly 
(although  not  much)  wider  than  the  seventh,  althougli  as  the  follow- 
ing joints  slightly  increase  in  width,  and  the  seventh  is  itself 
slightly  Avider  than  the  sixth,  the  clubbing  is  not  so  pronounced  as 
in  many  other  species.'  The  basal  foveae  of  the  prothorax  from 
most  directions  appear  to  be  completely  isolated,  but  from  others 
a  vague  connecting  depression  is  visible;  the  outer  (Uies  are  quite 
concealed  from  above. 

On  this  and  on  all  the  following  species  of  the  genus  the  elytral 
punctures  are  so  extremely  sparse  and  faint  that  they  are  quite 
useless  for  purposes  of  identification ;  on  the  head  and  prothorax, 
if  present  at  all,  they  are  seen  with  difficulty,  and  only  from  certain 
"directions. 


2 1 12  Arthur  M.  Lea  : 

Sct/dmaenus  setmniger,    n.sp. 

Black;  elytra  dark  tastaneous,  suture  still  darker,  under  surface 
dark  reddish-brown  or  black,  abdomen  generally  pale;  legs  and 
palpi  fiavous,  antennae  somewhat  darker.  Upper  surface  glabrous, 
except  for  numerous  hairs  at  sides  of  prothorax,  and  a  fascicle  on 
each  side  of  base  of  head. 

Head  moderately  transverse,  convex,  rounded  between  antennae. 
Eyes  small  and  prominent.  Antennae  moderately  long  and  rather 
thin  ;  club  conspicuously  four-jointed,  but  seventh  joint  distinctly 
longer  and  wider  than  sixth,  although  decidedly  narrower  and 
slightly  shorter  than  eighth.  Prothorax  about  as  long  as  wide ; 
base  with  two  small  deep  foveae.  Elytra  rather  wide  and  depressed ; 
base  slightly  wilder  than  base  of  prothorax,  the  basal  impressions 
comparatively  small ;  sides  gently  dilated  to  beyond  the  middle,  and 
then  regularly  rounded  to  apex.  Legs  moderately  long,  hind  coxae 
moderately  separated;  front  tibiae  somewhat  inflated  towards  apex 
in  male.     Length,   1^  mm. 

Hah. — Victoria  (Macleay  Museum),  Portland  (H.  W.  Davey); 
N.S.W.  :  Forest  Reefs;  Tasmania  :  Jordan  River,  abundant  in  flood 
debris,  New  Norfolk,  in  tussocks,  Holjart,  in  moss,  Launceston  (A. 
M.  Lea). 

The  size  and  outlines  are  almost  exactly  as  in  bifascicidatun,  but 
the  colours  and  habits  are  very  different.  In  general  appearance, 
colours,  etc..  it  is  much  like  glabrijjennis  in  miniature;  gulosus  is 
frequently  like  it  in  colour,  but  is  considerably  narrower,  with  the 
elytra  clothed.  The  black  head  and  prothorax  readily  distinguish 
it  from  most  of  the  species  having  the  elytra  glabrous. 

The  prothoracic  foveae  from  some  directions  appear  to  be  con- 
nected together  by  a  strong  transverse  impression,  but  from  other 
directions  this  impression  appears  rather  faint ;  from  some  it 
causes  the  base  to   appear   quadrifoveate. 

Some  specimens,  from  the  Tweed  River,  differ  in  luvving  some 
sparse  straggling  hairs  about  the  basal  third  of  the  elytra,  but  I 
can  find  no  other  differences. 

Sci/dniueniis  f itnbri colli. •<,    n.sp. 

Bright  castaneous,  elytra  (sutuie  not  at  all)  very  little  paler 
than  head  and  prothorax.  antennae  somewhat  ]ialei- ;  femora  and 
tibiae  almost,  the  taisi  and  ])ali)i  (|uitc',  flavons.  Upper  surface 
glabrous,  except  for  numerous  stramineous  hairs  at  sides  of  pro- 
thorax, and  a  small  fascicle  on  each  side  of  base  of  head. 


Australian  and  Tasmanian  Scydmaenidae.  208 

I/ead  moderately  transverse,  feebly  bilobed  between  antennae. 
Eyes  small  and  very  prominent.  Antennae  i-ather  long;  club  four- 
jointed.  Prothora.r  about  as  long"  as  wide;  base  with  two  small, 
deep  and  i-atlier  distant  foveae.  Elytra  at  extreme  base  no  wider 
than  base  of  protliorax ;  sides  moderately  dilated  to  just  before 
the  middle,  tlience  narrowed  to  apex.  Legs  rather  long;  hind 
coxae  separated  almost  t'lie  width  of  impression  at  apex  of  metas- 
ternum.     Length,  1^  mm. 

Ilah. — Tasmania  :  Jordan  River,  in  flood  debris,  Hobart,  Mount 
Wellington,  in  moss.  Waratah.     (A.  M.  Lea.) 

Larger  than  casfo/ieo(/labe/\  elytra  slightly  longer  in  proportion, 
and  prothorax  conspicuously  fringed.  Bifasciculafus,  Avhich  has 
a  similar  fringe,  is  shorter,  with  wider  elytra  and  slightly  shorter 
and  tliinner  antennae.  In  general  appearance  rather  like  small 
specimens  of  c/anis,  but  antennae  thinner,  although  not  longer,  the 
joints  (if  the  club  less  closely  articulated,  and  basal  impressions  of 
prothorax  not  quite  the  same. 

The  club  is  certainly  four-jointed,  but  as  its  joints  slightly  in- 
crease in  width,  and  as  the  seventh  is  distinctly  wider  and  some- 
what longer  than  the  sixth,  from  some  directions  it  almost  appears 
to  be  five-jointed.  From  some  directions  a  rather  shallow  impres- 
sion connecting  the  protlioracic  foveae  is  visible;  but  from  others 
these  appear  to  be  completely  isolated. 

Srj/d)uaein(s  fiavoapicalts,   n.sp. 

Bright  castaneous;  elytra  slightly  paler,  but  becoming  flavous  at 
apex;  legs  and  palpi  flavous.     Clothing  as  in  preceding  species. 

Head  moderately  transverse;  rounded  betAveen  antennae.  Eyes 
rather  small  and  prominent.  Antennae  rather  thin;  club  dis- 
tinctly four- jointed.  PrntJmrar  slightly  wider  than  long,  with  two 
deep  l)asal  foveae.  Elytra  moderately  wide,  at  base  slightly  wider 
than  base  of  prothorax.  sides  regularly  rounded  and  widest  just 
befoi-e  middle.  Leyx  long;  hind  coxae  moderately  separated. 
Length,    ]|    mm. 

Hah. — N.S.  Wales  :  Ropes  Creek,  Sydney  (Macleay  Museum), 
Clarence  River,   Forest  Reefs,  Tamworth,  Windsor    (A.   M.   Lea.) 

Slightly  larger  than  castaneoglahtr,  and  prothoracic  impressions 
connected  across  base;  that  species  also  has  not  a  conspicuous 
lateral  fringe  of  hairs.  From  the  preceding  species  it  differs  in 
being  slightly  smallei-.  elytra  rather  less  narrowed  at  base,  and 
antennae  shorter  and  thinner. 


204  Arthur  M.  Lea  : 

The  flavous  portion  of  the  elytra  varies  from  about  one-fifth  to 
about  one-third;  although  very  distinct,  it  is  not  sharply  limited. 
The  prothoracic  foveae  from  some  directions  appear  to  be  con- 
nected by  a  strong  transverse  impression ;  from  other  directions, 
however,  the  impression  seems  rather  feeble,  although  it  is  always 
traceable. 

Numerous  specimens  differ  in  having  the  head  and  protliorax 
almost  or  quite  black,  and  such  specimens  sometimes  have  tlie 
apex  of  elytra  scarcely  flavous;  but,  as  I  can  find  no  differences  in 
clothing  or  structure,  I  presume  they  represent  varieties  only. 
They  are  coloured  much  as  ne.miniger ,  except  that  the  under  sur- 
face is  not  dark;  but  their  size  is  very  slightly,  although  consis- 
tently, smaller  than  that  of  that  species,  and  are  also  somewhat 
narrower. 

Scydtyiaenus  flauipes,  n.sp. 

Bright  castaneous  ;  elytra  (suture  excepted)  somewhat  paler ;  legs 
and  palpi  flavous.     Clothing  as  in  two  preceding  species. 

Head  (excluding  neck)  almost  as  long  as  wide,  bilobed  between 
antennae.  Eyes  small  and  moderately  prominent.  Antennae  long 
and  thin;  club  conspicuously  four-jointed.  Prothorai  slightly  longer 
than  wide;  depressed;  base  with  two  small  deep  foveae.  with  a 
conspicuous  connecting  impression.  Elytra  fiat  and  comparatively 
narrow;  widest  about,  middle ;  basal  impressions  rather  small. 
Legs  long;  hind  coxae  moderately  separated.     Length   1^  mm. 

Hah. — W.   Australia  :   Swan   River.      (A.    M.   Lea.) 

A  small,  depressed  species,  narrower  thau  most  of  those  having 
glabrous  elytra.  Except  for  the  glabrous  elytra,  which,  however, 
are  rather  wider,  it  is  much  like  atroph'us. 

Scydmaetius  si/hr/labrij)e/i/i/s,    n.sp. 

Castaneous.  elytra  (suture  excepted)  somewhat  i>alef  :  legs  and 
palpi  flavous.  Upper  surface  glal)r(ius.  cxrcpt  toi'  numerous 
stramineous  hairs  at  sides  of  protliorax,  a  few  ahout  Ijase  (including 
sides)  of  elytra,  a  few  at  sides  of  head,  and  a  fascii'le  on  each  side 
of   its   base. 

//ead  moderately  transverse,  rather  strongly  rounded  between 
antennae.  Eyes  (foi-  the  genus)  lather  large.  Antennae  rather 
long  and  thin;  club  four-jointed.  I'rotliora.c  al)out  as  long  as 
wide,  moderately  convex;  base  Avith  two  small  deep  foveae.  Elytra 
rather  short   and   wide;    at   base   distinctly   wider   than    prothorax, 


Australian  and  Tasmanian  Scydmaenidae.  'H)'> 

and  thrice  as  wide  alxmt  the  middle.     J.e(/s  loiij^;  hind  eoxae  mode- 
rately separated.     Length,  1^  mm. 

//«/>.— Queensland  :  Dalby.    (Mrs.  F.  H.  Hobler.) 
The  outlines  are  mueh   as  in   ylahripennis ,   but  the  colours   and 
clothing  are  different,  and  elub  somewhat  thinner,  etc.     The  elytral 
clothing,  although  not  dense,  is  fairly  distinct,  so  I  think  it  should 
not  be  placed  with  the  species  having  glabrous  elytra. 

The  seventh  joint  of  the  antennae  is  distinctly  longer  and  Avider 
than  the  sixth,  but  as  it  is  vei'y  decidedly  narrower  and  shorter 
than  the  eighth,  it  cannot  l)e  regarded  as  forming  part  of  the 
club.  The  basal  foveae  of  the  prothorax  ai'e  connected  by  an  im- 
pression that  from  some  dii'ections  appears  to  be  deep  and  distinct, 
but  fi-om  othei-s  is  scarcely  traceable. 

Scydmaeiuis   ohscuricontlti,    n.sp. 

Dark  reddish  castaneous;  suture  and  eighth,  ninth  and  tem 
joints  of  antennae  deeply  infuscated;  legs  rather  dark,  tai-si  and 
palpi  pale,  but  scarcely  flavous.  Elytra  with  sparse,  suberect, 
and  moderately  long,  pale  hairs;  prothorax  densely  clothed  at 
sides,  and  glabrous  else^vhere;  head  very  sparsely  clothed,  but  Avith 
a  loose  fascicle  on  each  side  of  base. 

Head  almost  as  long  as  Avide;  feebly  bilobed  betAveen  antennae. 
Eyes  rather  small  and  moderately  prominent.  Antennae  rather 
long  and  thin  ;  club  conspicuously  four-jointed.  Froihorax  about 
as  long  as  Avide;  foveae  and  connecting  impression  as  in  preceding 
species.  Elytra  moderately  long,  at  extreme  base  no  Avider  than 
prothorax,  sides  regularly  rounded  and  Avidest  at  about  middle. 
Legs  long;  liind  coxae  moderately  separated;  femora  subclavate. 
Length.   1^  nnn. 

Hah. — Tasmania  :  Hobart  (A.   M.  Lea). 

In  size  and  shape  like  insignivenfris,  but  club  dark  and  otherAvise 
different.  The  depression  connecting  the  foveae  together  is  very 
shalloAv  (it  is  ([uite  invisible  from  certain  directions),  and  very 
different  to  tliat  o/  denliventris.  The  elytra  are  decidedly  narroAver 
than  in  the  preceding  species,  and  the  club  is  much  darker.  The 
outlines  are  someAvhat  as  in  Kiagensis,  but  the  antennae  and  cloth- 
ing are  different.  The  outlines  approach  those  of  glabripennis , 
but  that  species  has  the  elytra  entirely  glabrous,  and  head  a;  . 
prothorax  much  darker. 

The  seventh  joint  of  the  antennae  is  very  little  longer  or  wider 
than  the  sixth,  and  is  only  about  half  the  width  of  the  eighth. 


206  Arthur  M.  Lea: 

A  specimen,  taken  from  under  rotting  leaves  in  the  National 
Park  (N.  S.  Wales),  appears  to  belong  to  this  species,  but  differs  in 
having  the  elytral  clothing  confined  to  the  basal  third  (perhaps 
from  abrasion),  and  the  elytra,  undei-  surface  and  legs  somewhat 
paler. 

Sci/dnine/iu.<!   hrerisefostis,   n.sp. 

Bi-ight  reddish-castaneous,  elytra  very  little  (the  suture  not  at 
all)  paler  than  liead  and  prothorax ;  legs  and  palpi  flavous. 
Elytra  with  very  short  and  indistinct,  but  almost  evenly  distributed 
setae  (scarcely  pubescence) ;  sides  of  prothorax  with  rather  dense 
stramineous  hairs,  similar  hairs  forming  a  fascicle  on  each  side  of 
base  of  head. 

Head  about  as  long  as  wide,  feebly  bilobed  between  antennae. 
Eyes  small  and  prominent.  Antennae  comparatively  short  and 
stout;  club  distinctly  four-jointed.  Prothorax  slightly  transverse; 
each  side  of  base  with  two  small  foveae.  Elytra  at  base  slightly 
wider  than  prothorax;  basal  impressions  smallei-  than  usual;  sides 
moderately  dilated  to  near  the  middle,  and  then  narrowed  to  apex ; 
Lef/a  rather  long  and  stout  ;  hind  coxae  moderately  separated. 
Length,  \\  mm. 

Hah. — Tasmania  :  Mount  Wellington,  four  specimens  from  moss. 
(A.  M.  Lea.) 

The  elytra  at  first  appear  to  be  glabrous,  but  on  looking  at  then^ 
sideways  some  very  fine  suberect  setae  become  noticeable.  The 
first,  second  and  eleventh  joints  of  the  antennae  aie  longer  than 
wide,  all  the  others  being  transverse,  the  eighth,  ninth  and  tenth 
are  fully  twice  as  wido  as  long;  the  seventh  is  just  perceptibly 
longer  and  wider  than  the  sixth.  The  prothoracic  foveae  are  all 
connected  together  by  a  transverse  impression  that  varies,  accord- 
ing to  the  point  of  view,  fi-om  faint  to  strongly  defined;  the  lateral 
foveae  are  only  partially  visil)le  from  a])ove,  but  from  the  sides 
each   is  seen  to  mark  the  l)ase  of   a  longitudiiial   im])ression. 

ScydiiKteitiix  hrevi pilix,    n.sp. 

Bright  reddish-castaneous  elytra  (suture  excepted),  very  little 
paler;  legs  almost,  the  tarsi  and  palpi  quite  flavous.  Elytra  with 
short  and  rather  spaise,  l)ut  very  distinct  pale  pubescence;  pro- 
thorax with  dense  hairs  at  sides,  and  a  few  at  base  and  sides  of 
disc,  biit  middle  of  disc  glabrous;  head  with  a  small  loose  fascicle 
on  each  side  of  base,  and  sparsely  clothed  elsewhere. 


Austvidiaii,  and  Tasmaaian  Scydmaenidae.  207 

/lead  sliglitly  loii^aT  than  wide,  soniewhat  rounded  and  flattened 
betAveen  antennae.  Eyes  small  and  rather  prominent.  Antennae 
rather  long  and  thin ;  club  four-jointed.  Prothorax  distinctly 
longer  than  wide,  rather  convex;  base  with  two  rather  large  foveae. 
Elytra  moderately  long,  extreme  base  no  wider  than  prothorax,  but 
almost  twice  as  wide  across  middle.  Tjei/s  long;  hind  coxae  rather 
widely  separated;  femora  subclavate.     Length,    If  mm. 

Hah. — Tasmania  :  Mount  Wellington,  Waratah,  common  in  moss- 
and  fallen  leaves.      (A.   M.   Lea.) 

About  the  size  of  tenuiconiisi,  but  rather  narrowei',  antennae- 
not  abnormally  long,  and  elytral  clothing  unusually  short  for  the 
family.  It  is,  however,  more  noticeable  than  in  the  preceding 
species,  from  which  it  also  differs  in  being  larger,  appendages 
longer  and  thinner,  and  prothorax  not  quite  the  same.  From 
Phagonophana  ahundans,  the  most  abundant  of  all  the  moss  fre- 
quenting species  in  Tasmania,  it  is  readily  distinguished  by  its 
smaller  size,  distinctly  clubbed  antennae,   and  shorter  clothing. 

The  seventh  joint  of  the  antennae  is  slightly  wider  but  no  long" 
than  the  sixth;  and  decidedly  nanower  than  the  eighth;  the  latter 
is  slightly  narrower,  but  no  shorter  than  the  ninth,  the  two  follow- 
ing combined  are  about  as  long  as  the  eleventh.  The  protlioracic 
foveae  are  larger  and  closer  together  than  usual;  they  are  connected 
by  a  transvei'se  impression  that  varies  in  apparent  depth  with  the 
point  of  view;  each  also  is  more  or  less  distinctly  connected  with  a 
lateral  fovea,  or  longitudinal  impression,  that  is  quite  invisible 
from  directly   al)(>ve. 

Scydmaenus  teniticoruis,    n.syj. 

<?  Castaneous,  elytra  scarcely  or  not  at  all  jjaler  than  elsewhere; 
antennae  and  legs  somewhat  paler,  tarsi  and  palpi  flavous.  Elytra 
with  faii-ly  numerous,  and  ratlier  long,  suberect  pale  hairs;  \)V0- 
thorax  ratlier  densely  elutlied  at  sides.  \n\t  gi'eater  portion  of  disc 
glabrous;  head  sparsely  clothed  and  without  fascicles. 

Head  moderately  transverse;  feebly  impressed  between  antennae. 
Eyes  of  moderate  size,  but  very  prominent.  Antennae  unusually 
long  and  thin;  clul)  four-jointed.  Pro'thorax  slightly  longer  than 
wide,  widest  across  apical  third;  with  two  large  basal  foveae,  and 
a  smaller  longitudinal  one  on  each  outer  margin,  the  four  more  or 
less  distinctly  connected  by  a  transverse  impression.  Elytra  rather 
long,  at  extreme  base  slightly  narrower  than  widest  part  of  pro- 
thorax, sides  evenly  rounded  and  widest  almost  in  exact  middle. 
Metasternnm  flattened  along  middle  or  verv  feeblv  concave.     Abdo- 


208  Arthur  M.  Lea: 

men  with  fourth  segment  eoncave  in  middle,  the  eoncave  portion 
bounded  on  each  side  by  a  eonspieuous  ridge  that  terminates  as  an 
obtuse  tooth.  I^egs  long;  hind  coxae  moderately  separated;  femora 
siibclavate;  front  tibiae  hooked  at  apex.     Length,  1  4/5  mm. 

2  Differs  in  having  the  metasternum  gently  convex,  abdomen 
with  fourth  segment  simple,  head  bifasciculate,  antennae  and  legs 
somewhat  shorter,  and  front  tibiae  not  hooked. 

Hah. — Tasmania:  Stanley,  in  tussocks  on  sunniiit  of  ''Nut," 
Hobart,  in  fallen  leaves,  Huon  River.     (A.  M.  Lea.) 

Tlie  long  and  thin  antennae,  witli  peculiar  abdomen  and  front 
tibiae  of  t'he  male,  render  this  species  very  distinct.  Each  joint 
of  the  antennae  is  at  least  tw'ice  as  long  as  wide,  except  the  three 
basal  joints  of  the  club,  which,  however,  are  distinctly  longer  than 
wide;  the  seventh  is  about  as  long  as  the  eighth.  l)ut  distinctly 
narrower. 

Scydmaenus  dentiveitfrix,   n.sp. 

c?  Dark  castaneous,  elytra  somewhat  paler,  antennae  slightly 
paler  than  elytra,  legs  somewhat  paler  still,  tarsi  and  palpi  iiavous. 
Elytra  with  moderately  long  and  i-atlier  sparse  stramineous  liairs; 
on  prothorax  and  head  somewhat  shortei-  and  darker,  on  the  former 
condensed  at  sides,  and  on  the  latter  forming  a  loose  fascicle  on 
each  side  of  base;  abdomen  more  densely  pubescent  than  usual. 

Head  moderately  transverse,  flattened  between  antennae.  Eyes 
moderately  large  and  rather  prominent.  Antennae  long  and  thin; 
club  distinctly  four-jointed.  Frothorar  feebly  transverse;  base 
foveate  and  impressed.  Elytrn  moderately  wide  and  rather  de- 
pressed, base  wider  than  prothorax,  sides  evenly  rounded,  and 
widest  across  middle.  Metasternum  ratlier  convex.  Abdomen  with 
fouith  segment  tridentate.  J^egs  ratliei'  long;  hind  coxae  rather 
distant;  front  trochanters  triangularly  dentate.     Length,   Xlj  nan. 

?  Differs  in  having  fourth  segment  of  aVxlomen  simple,  front 
trochantei-s  unarmed,   and  eleventh  joint  of  antennae  shorter. 

11  at). — Tasmania  :  Hobart,  fronj  sods  of  grass,  Huon  River,  in 
tussocks,  Swansea,  Stanley;  N.  S.  Wales:  Glen  Innes.  Tamworth, 
Wollongong,  Windsor  (A.    M.   Lea),   Nepean  River  (A.   J.   Coates). 

The  colour  is  much  as  in  the  typical  form  of  f/iilax/is,  and  in 
general  appearance  it  is  close  to  latehricola,  but  readily  distin- 
guished from  tliese  by  the  basal  impressions  of  prothorax.  and  the 
abdomen.  The  teeth  on  the  abdomen  of  the  male  ai-e  of  even  length, 
and  very  much  smaller  than  in  insigni rent ris.  with  the  outer  ones 
more    distant    from    the    margins.      Seen    directlv    from    above,    the 


Australian  and  Tasmanian  Scydmaenidae.  2(»1> 

fourth  segment  iippears  bifoveate,  with  the  teeth  marking  the  boun- 
daries of  the  foveae;  looking  at  them,  from  the  direction  of  tlie 
head  they  appear  as  three  rather  acute  teeth;  from  some  directions. 
they  appeal-  as  slioi-t  acutL'ly  tciininated  ridges,  on  the  same  phme 
as  the  base  of  the  segment. 

The  seventli  joint  of  the  antennae  is  slightly  larger  than  tlie  sixtli, 
and  conspicuously  smaller  than  tlie  eighth,  the  eighth,  nintli  and 
tenth  are  each  sliglitly  dilated  to  tlie  apex,  the  eleventh  is  sliglitly 
longer  than  the  ninth  and  tenth  combined.  The  basal  prothoracic 
foveae  and  the  connecting  impression  are  somewhat  variable,  the 
foveae  sometimes  are  rather  large,  shallow,  and  two  in  number, 
with  the  connecting  impression  rather  feeble.  On  other  specimens, 
the  impression  appears  more  distinct,  and  with  two  or  four  foveate 
expansions.  It  is  connected  on  each  side  with  a  longitudinal 
impression  that   is  quite  invisible  from  above. 

One  of  the  Hobart  specimens  has  the  elytra  darker  than  the 
others,  and  with  a  faint  infuscation  along  suture.  The  Swansea 
ones  are  also  so  coloured.  Two  females  from  Cunnamulla  .(Qld.), 
taken  by  Mr.  Hardcastle,  appear  to  belong  to  the  species,  but  are- 
of  a  rather  light  castaneous,  with  the  elytra  still  paler.  A  speci- 
men from  South  Australia,  in  the  Macleay  Museum,  appears  to. 
belong  to  the  species,  but  is  abraded;  and,  as  it  is  somewhat  dirty, 
I  have  not  been  able  to  examine  it  satisfactorily. 


Scydmaenus  tridentatus,  n.sp. 

J'  Bright  castaneous,  head  and  prothorax  somewhat  darker  tha^j 
elsewhere,  tarsi  and  palpi  flavous.  Clothing  much  as  in  preceding 
species. 

Head  moderately  transverse,  very  feebly  bilobed  between  an- 
tennae, with  two  very  indistinct  impressions  close  to  each  eye.  Eyes-, 
small  and  prominent.  Antennae  slightly  shorter,  but  otherwise 
much  as  in  preceding  species.  Prothorax  lightly  transverse;  base 
foveate  and  transversely  impressed.  Elyfro  moderately  wide,  and 
gently  convex,  base  distinctly  wider  than  prothorax,  sides  regularly 
rounded  and  widest  just  before  middle.  Abdomen  with  fourth 
segment  armed.  Legs  rather  long;  front  coxae  rather  di.stant; 
femora  stout,  especially  the  front  pair.     Length,  If  mm. 

?  Differs  in  having  the  antennae  shorter,  front  femora  not  quite 
so  stout,  and  abdomen  unarmed. 

Hah. — W.  Australia  :  Swan  and  Vasse  Rivers.    (A.  M.  Lea.) 


210  Arthur  M.  Lea: 

The  teeth  on  the  fourth  segment  of  the  iibdonien  of  the  male 
^re  intermediate  between  those  of  insif/n/ renfris  and  dentiventris, 
•differing  from  the  former  in  being  sliorter,  not  quite  as  close  to 
the  margins,  on  the  same  plane  as  the  base  of  the  segment,  and 
the  median  tooth  quite  distinctly  a  tooth,  and  not  a  slight  thicken- 
ing of  a  membranous  flap,  although  remnants  of  such  a  flap  are 
present.  From  the  latter  species  it  differs  in  the  outer  teeth  being 
•decidedly  longer  than  the  middle  one,  more  distant  from  each  other, 
and  conspicuously  projecting  as  teeth  over  the  fifth  segment.  To 
see  them  most  clearly  they  should  be  examined  from  the  direction 
of  the  head,  as,  in  this  species  and  in  rhntiveiitrls,  they  are  some- 
what obscured  by  clothing. 

The  base  of  the  prothorax  is  transversely  impressed,  with  the 
imj^ression  foveate,  but  the  depressed  parts  are  somewhat  obscured 
by  clothing. 

A  female,  possibly  belonging  to  this  species,  differs  in  being  some- 
■\vhat  wider,  elytra  more  densely  clothed,  head  with  rather  dense 
clothing  across  base,  and  femora  and  tibiae  almost  flavous. 

Scydmaenus  fiiiihriatus,  n.sp. 

Of  a  rather  dingy  castaneous,  suture  somewhat  darker  than  rest 
■of  elytra;  tarsi  and  palpi  flavous.  Elytra  with  rather  short  and 
depressed  stramineous  hairs,  prothorax  rather  densely  clothed  at 
sides,  and  sparsely  elsewhere;  not  at  all  on  middle  of  disc;  head 
sparsely  clothed,  except  at  sides  and  in  middle  of  base,  where 
the  clothing  is  dense. 

Head  feebly  transverse;  moderately  bilobed  Ijetween  antennae. 
Eyes  small  and  moderately  prominent.  Antennae  moderately 
long;  club  conspicuously  four-jointed.  Prothorax  lightly  transverse; 
base  foveate.  Elytra  not  very  wide,  base  distinctly  wider  than  pro- 
thorax, sides  regularly  rounded  and  widest  across  middle.  Legs 
rather  long;  hind  coxae  moderately  separated;  femora  suliclavato. 
Length,   Ifmm. 

Hah. — N.  S.  Wales  :    Ourimbah,  from  rotting  leaves.      (A.  M.  Lea). 

The  general  shape  and  appearance  is  much  like  liiat  of  Hete/rofi- 
nathus  robusfus,  but  the  club  is  distinctly  four-jointed.  At  a 
glance  it  appears  close  to  the  preceding  species.  l)ut  tlie  l>ases  of  tlie 
prothorax  and  elytra  are  different;  the  elytra  and  their  rlothim: 
are  not  as  in  hrevijrilis. 

The  cephalic  fascicles  are  not  separated  the  entire  width  of  the 
base,  but  appear  extended  round  and  almost  drawn  .together,  caus- 


Australian  and  Tasmanian  ScydnKtenidae.  2 1  1 

ing  the  lioiul  to  lie  iikut  densely  clotlied  at  the  base  tliuii  is  usual, 
HO  that  it  is  leally  witlmut  tiue  fascicles.  The  seventh  joint  ot  the 
niiteiinae  is  very  little  lar^ei-  than  the  sixth,  and  not  half  the  nidrh 
of  the  eighth,  the  latter  is  practically  the  same  size  as  the  ninth  or 
tenth.  These  combined  are  the  length  of  the  eleventh.  At  the  base 
of  the  prothoi-ax  there  are  two  small  round  foveae,  somewhat  closer 
together  than  is  usual  ;  there  is  also  anothei'  fcjvea  on  each  margin, 
but  partly  visible  from  above;  all  four  are  connected  by  an  im- 
pression that  varies  in  apparent  depth  according  to  the  point  of 
view;  the  lateral  foveae  are  each  connected  by  mi  oblique  impies- 
sion.  The  elytra  are  suppled  with  faii'ly  numerous  punctures,  of 
small  size  certainly,  but  readily  visil)le  under  a  Coddington  lens, 
in  which  respec't  they  differ  from  the  other  species  here  descj'ibc<l. 

Sci/dniatnu.s  a/itplipennis,   n.sp. 

S'  Bright  castaneous,  head  and  pi'othorax  somewhat  darker  than 
-elsewhere,  tarsi  and  palpi  Havous.  Elytra  with  rather  sparse  and 
not  very  long  stiamineous  hairs;  prothorax  not  very  densely  clothed 
at  sides,  and  glabrous  elsewhere;  head  very  spai-sely  clothed  and 
without  fascicles. 

Head  slightly  longer  than  wide,  feebly  bilobed  between  antennae. 
Eyes  small  and  prominent.  Antennae  moderately  long;  club  in- 
conspicuously four-jointed.  I'rothorar  distinctly  longer  than  wide; 
base  with  two  somewhat  irregular  foveae.  Elytra  at  base  wider 
than  prothorax,  and  rather  more  than  twice  as  wide  about  the 
middle,  subobliquely  dilated  to  near  the  middle,  and  then  rounded 
to  apex.  Metasternum  lightly  convex.  Abdomen  with  fourth  seg- 
ment bidentate.  Legs  long;  hind  coxae  rather  widely  separated; 
front  trochanters  triangularly  dentate.     Length,    If  mm. 

2  Differs  in  having  abdomen  simple,  and  legs  somewhat  shorter, 
with  the  front  trochanters  unarmed. 

//«?>.— N.  S.  Wales  :  Sydney.  (Macleay  Museum),  Forest  Reefs. 
(A.  M.  Lea.) 

Readily  distinguished  from  most  species  of  the  genus  by  the  com- 
paratively small  prothorax,  large  elytra  and  bidentate  abdomen. 
The  second  to  seventh  joints  of  antennae  are  practically  of  even 
width,  and  the  seventh  is  not  much,  certainly  not  conspicuously  so, 
narrower  than  the  eighth,  so  that  the  antennae  might  almost  faiidy 
be  regarded  as  having  the  joints  of  subcontinuous  width,  and  with 
the  club  rather  feebly  defined;  still  it  is  defined,  and  this,  with  the 
separation   of   the  hind  coxae,   evidently   distinguishes  the   species 


212  Arthur  M.  Lea: 

from  I'liaf/oiiophaiia,  to  several  species  of  wliieh  it  is  ratlier  close  in 
general  appearance. 

From  certain  directions  the  head  appears  to  have  a  small  but  very 
distinct  fovea  close  to  each  eye;  from  other  directions,  however,  it 
appears  no  more  than  a  very  shallow  and  indistinct  impression. 
The  basal  foveas  of  the  prothorax  are  somewhat  transverse,  closer 
together  and  less  rounded  than  usual,  and  with  a  feeble  connecting- 
impression  ;  the  impression  continued  to  connect  with  a  longi- 
tudinal impression  on  each  side.  The  teeth  on  the  fourth  abdominal 
segment  of  the  male  are  moderately  large  and  close  together,  and 
project  backwards  on  the  same  plane  as  the  rest  of  the  segment; 
from  certain  directions  they  appear  to  be  connected  l>y  a  basal 
membrane,  but  there  is  no  trace  of  a  smaller  median  tooth. 

Svi/diiKtenus  tennicoUis,    n.sp.    or  var. 

Head  and  prothorax  rather  dark  reddish-castaneous;  ehi;ra 
about  base  and  basal  half  of  suture  not  much  paler,  but  decidedly 
paler  elsewhere,  and  l)ecoming  almost  flavous  posteriorly ;  legs  and 
palpi  flavous.     Clothing  much  as  in  preceding  species. 

Head  and  antennae  as  in  preceding  species.  Prothorar  and 
d]ttra  narrower.  ])ut  otlierwise  much  the  same.  Legs  long;  hind 
coxae  rather  widely  separated.      Length,   If  mm. 

Hah. — Tasmania  :   Huon   Kiver.      (A.    M.   Lea.) 

In  general  appearance  very  close  to  the  preceding  species,  of 
which  it  is  perhaps  a  variety,  but  the  prothorax  and  elytra  are 
slightly  narrower,  and  the  latter  are  somewhat  paler.  I  am  ac- 
quainted with  liut  a   single  specimen,  evidently  a  female. 

Scydmaenus  inastersi,  n.sp. 

<?  Of  a  i-atlier  dingy  castaneous,  legs  paler,  tarsi  and  palpi 
flavous.  Elytra  with  sparse  and  short  depressed  hairs,  prothorax 
rather  densely  clothed  at  the  sides  in  front  l)ut  sparsely  elsewhere, 
head  sparsely  clothed   and  without  fascicles. 

Head  moderately  transvei'se;  feebly  bihilied  l)et\veen  antennae. 
Eyes  rather  small  and  prominent.  Antennae  moderately  long;  club 
distinctly  four-jointed.  J'rothorax  about  as  long  as  wide;  base  with 
two  strong  foveae.  El i/t ra  ratlicr  wide  and  convex  ;  at  base  wider 
than  prothoi'ax,  and  acinss  middle  fully  twice  as  wide,  sides  rather 
strongly  and  evenly  rdunded.  Metaxfeniinn  moderately  convex. 
Legs  moderately  long:  hind  coxae  distinctly,  but  not  very  widely 
separated;  front  ti))iae  somewhat  intiated  towards  apex.  Lengtli. 
1^  mm. 


Australidn  and  Tasmnnian  Scydmaenidae.  213 

$  Differs  in  having,'  the  UR'tastfrnuiii  ruthoi-  inoro  (.'onvex,  and 
front  tibiae  thinner,  with  the  legs  in  general  somewhat  shorter. 

f/ah. — N.  S.  Wales  :  Tweed  River  (Macleay  Museum  and  A.  M. 
Lea);  Clarence  River,   Tamworth   (Lea). 

Allied  to  (/iilosiis,  and  with  the  front  tibiae  also  inflated  in  the 
male;  but  liead  and  jiruthorax  paler,  size  slightly  smaller  and 
clothing  sparser,  etc.  .Smaller  than  the  pale  form  of  denfivenfris, 
and  pruthorax  different  at  l)ase.  Wider  than  rlvularis  and  pro- 
thoraeic  impressions  and  colours  different.  Narrower  than  depre$- 
sns  and  yrijfitlti,  elytra  less  depressed,  and  different  at  base,  and 
prothoracic    foveae   different. 

The  colour  of  the  upper  surface  is  usually  of  a  uniform  dingy 
castaneous,  but  on  some  specimens  the  elytra  (suture  excepted) 
are  slightly  paler  than  the  prothorax  and  head.  The  seventh  joint 
of  the  antennae  is  somewhat  larger  than  the  sixth,  but  is  slightly 
shorter  and  conspicuously  narrower  than  the  eighth.  The  pro- 
thoracic  foveae  are  connected  by  an  impression  that  is  not  very 
distinct,  although  traceable,  from  some  directions,  but  very  dis- 
tinct,  and  apparently  deep,  from  others. 

Sci/dmaeuus  usitatus,  n.sp. 

Of  a  rather  bright  reddish-castaneous,  elytra  sometimes  slightly 
paler  than  head  and  prothorax;  legs  and  palpi  flavous.  Elytra 
with  fairly  numerous  but  rather  short,  suberect  pale  hairs;  pro- 
thorax rather  densely  clothed  at  sides;  head  with  a  distinct  but 
rather  loose  fascicle  on  each  side  of  base. 

Head  moderately  transverse;  feebly  bilobed  between  antennae. 
Eyes  small  and  prominent.  Antennae  moderately  long;  club  con- 
spicuously four- jointed.  Prothorax  slightly  longer  than  wide,  base 
bifoveate.  Elytra  moderately  long,  at  extreme  base  the  width  of 
prothorax,  but  about  once  and  one-half  as  wide  across  middle,  sides 
moderately  and  regularly  rounded.  Legs  moderately  long;  hind 
coxae  moderately  separated;  front  tiljiae  with  apical  half  some- 
what  inflated.      Length,    1|    mm. 

$  Differs  in  having  the  metasteriium  more  strongly  convex;  legs 
somewhat  shorter,  and  front  tibiae  less  inflated  towards-apex. 

Ilah. — -Tasmania  :  Stanley,  in  tussocks  at  summit  of  "  Nut." 
Hobart,   in  moss,  Waratah,   (A.   M.   Lea.) 

From  the  preceding  species  distinguished  by  having  elytra  de- 
cidedly narrower,  with  the  hind  coxae  more  noticeably  separated; 
the  clothing  and  prothoracic  sculpture  are  also  not  the  same.      It 


214  Arthur  M.  Lea: 

is  certainly  close  to  gulosus,  hnt  the  head  and  piothorax  are  not 
shining  black  as  in  that  species,  and  the  inflation  of  the  front 
tibiae  is  somewhat  different.  It  is  smaller  and  liairier  than  colo- 
bopsiti,  more  densely  clothed  than  depifHsus  and  f/riffitlii,  less 
depresseti  ;  elytra  and  prothorax  not  tpiite  the  same  as  base,  ana 
antennae  soniewhat   shorter. 

The  eighth  joint  of  the  antennae  is  fully  twice  the  width  of  the 
seventh.  The  basal  fovcae  of  the  prothoiax  are  larger  and  closer 
together  than  usual;  connecting  them  is  a  short  impi'ession  that 
appears  (juite  absent  from  some  directinns,  Ijut  from  other  causes 
than  to  appear  confiueut ;  the  impression  is  continued  to  eacll  side, 
where  it  joins  in  with  a  'lateral  impression,  which,  however,  i.s 
partially  concealed  by  clothing. 

One  specimen  has  the  metasternum  and  alxlomen  ahnost  l)lack. 

Scydmaenus  pilosicoUi.^,    n.sp. 

Dark  castaneous,  elytra  slightly  palei-  than  prothorax,  legs  pale 
castaneous,  tarsi  and  palpi  flavous.  Elytra  with  moderately  dense, 
suberect,  short,  pale  hairs;  prothorax  densely  clothed  at  sides,  and 
sparsely  elsewhere;  head  rather  spai-sely  clothed,  l)ut  with  a  loose 
fascicle  on  each  side  of  base. 

Head  moderately  transverse;  very  indistinctly  l)ilol)ed  betweer; 
antennae.  Eyes  small  and  prominent.  Antennae  moderately  long; 
club  four-jointed.  Prothomx  slightly  longer  than  wide;  base  with 
two  large  and  almost  confluent  foveae  in  middle,  and  one  on  each 
side.  Elytra  with  outlines  as  in  preceding  species.  Legs  mode- 
rately long;  hind  coxae  distinctly,  but  not  very  widely  sepaiated. 
Length,  1^  nmi. 

Hah. — Tasmania  :  Hobart,  from  moss,  Lc^ng  Bay.  (A.  M.  Lea.) 

Slightly  larger,  hairier,  and  with  slightly  stouter  and  less  con- 
spicuous club  than  in  the  preceding  species,  and  prothoracic  im- 
pressions deeper.  Larger,  hairier,  and  wider  than  nrularis. 
Slightly  smaller  than  colobopsis,  nariower.  more  convex  and  more 
densely  clothed,  and  basal  parts  of  prothorax  and  elytra  not  quite 
the  same. 

The  disc  of  the  pronotum,  although  not  densely  clothed,  is  not 
glabrous  as  in  so  many  species  of  the  genus.  The  seventh  joint  of 
the  antennae  is  slightly  larger  than  the  sixth,  and  almost  two-thirds 
of  the  width  of,  and  somewhat  shorter  than,  the  eighth;  the  latt<ir 
is  somewhat  narrowei'  than  tlie  ninth,  so  that  the  club  is  not  very 
conspicuously  four- jointed,   although  <|uite  decidedly  so.     The  pro- 


Aitstralian  and  Tasmanian  Scydmaenidae.  21") 

thoracic  foveae  are  umistially  large,  and  the  lateral  ones  are  par- 
tially vsiible  from  above;  they  are  all  so  close  together  that  there- 
is  not  room  for  a  conspicuous  connecting  impression,  but  fi'om  some 
directions  the  base  appears  to  l)e  conspicuously  traversed  by  a 
rather  deep  impression. 

Scydinatii us   latebricola,    n.sp. 

Black,  under  surface  piceous;  pruthorax  diluted  with  red  at 
base;  elytra  dark  castaneous,  antennae  paler;  palpi  and  legs 
tiavous,  knees  slightly  infuscated.  Elytra  Avith  rather  long,  sub- 
erect,  pale  hairs;  prothorax  densely  clothed  at  sides  and  glabrous 
elsewhere;  head  with  a  loose  fascicle  on  each  side  of  base,  very 
sparsely  clothed   elsewhere. 

Head  slightly  longer  than  wide;  very  indistinctly  bilol)ed  between 
antennae.  Eyes  small  and  prominent.  Antennae  of  moderate 
length;  club  conspicuously  four-jointed.  Prothorax  distinctly 
longer  than  wide;  with  two  round,  moderately  deep,  but  not  very 
large  foveae,  isolated  from  each  other,  but  each  connected  with  one 
on  the  side.  Elytra  moderately  long;  base  distinctly  wider  than 
prothorax,  and  almost  twice  as  wide  across  middle,  sides  mode- 
rately and  evenly  rounded.  Legs  moderately  long;  hind  coxae  dis- 
tinctly but  not  very  widely  separated.     Length,   1^  mm. 

Hah. — Tasmania  :  New  Norfolk,  in  tussocks,  (A.  M.  Lea.) 

Very  close  to  gitlosiis,  but  a  trifle  larger,  club  somewhat  stouter 
and  shorter,  head  more  densely  clothed,  prothorax  more  densely 
clothed  at  sides,  and  elytra  darker,  with  longer  clothing.  From 
clientulus  it  differs  in  being  larger  and  darker,  club  stoutei-,  and 
clothing  longer  and  darker.  It  is  rather  like  a  large  specimen  of 
the  preceding  species,  but  the  prothoracic  foveae  are  different,  and 
the  hind  coxae  are  a  trifle  closer  together. 

The  eighth  joint  of  the  club  is  the  length  of,  but  slightly 
narrower  than,  the  ninth,  but  is  fully  twice  the  width  of  the 
seventh,  the  latt-er  is  very  little  larger  than  the  sixth.  The  lateral 
foveae  of  the  prothorax  are  partially  visible  from  above;  the  im- 
pression connecting  each  with  one  of  the  medio-basal  foveae  is  very 
conspicuous  from  some  directions,  but  apparently  absent  frmn 
others. 

One  specimen  has  the  entire  upper  surface  of  a  dark  castaneous. 

Scydmaenus    walkeri,    n.sp. 
Bright  reddish-castaneous,  legs  somewhat  paler,  tarsi  and  paljii 
flavous.      Elytra    with   rather    short    and   subdepressed   pale   hairs; 


216  Arthur  M.  Lea: 

prothonix    sparsely   clothed    at    the    sides    and    glabrous    elsewhere; 
head  glabrous,  even  at  the  sides. 

Head  modeiately  transverse;  rounded  between  antennae.  Eyes 
small  and  moderately  prominent.  Antennae  moderately  long  and 
thin;  club  distinctly  four-jointed.  Profhorax  rather  convex, 
about  as  long  as  wide;  base  bifoveate.  Elytra  rather  wide,  at  base- 
distinctly  wider  than  prothorax,  and  more  than  twice  as  wide 
across  middle;  sides  rather  strongly  and  evenly  rounded.  Legs 
long;   hind  CDxae  moderately   separated.      Length,    1^   mm. 

J/ah.—y.  W.  Austialia  :  Upper  Ord  River  (R.  Helms),  Adelaide 
River  (Bi-itisli  Museum,  t'roni:  J.   J.   Walker). 

Rather  close  to  uiasfersi,  but  antennae  longer  and  thinner,  and 
prothorax  not  quite  the  same. 

At  a  glance  the  antennae  appear  to  have  the  joints  of  subcon- 
tinuous  width,  but  the  eighth  joint,  although  distinctly  narrower 
than  the  ninth,  is  almost  twice  the  width  of  the  seventh;  the  latter 
is  distinctly,  but  not  much,  larger  than  the  sixth.  The  prothoracic 
foveae  are  rather  small;  from  some  directions  a  fairly  distinct 
connecting  impression  is  visible,  but  from  others  it  appears  to  be 
entirely  absent. 

Scydmaenus  calvicejjs,  n.sp. 

Colours  and  clothing  much  as  in  preceding  species,  except  that  on 
the  elytra  the  hairs  are  slightly  shorter. 

Head  moderately  transverse,  flattened  and  almost  straight  be- 
tween antennae.  Eyes  of  moderate  size  and  moderately  prominent. 
Antennae  rather  short;  club  conspicuously  four-jointed.  Frothorary 
about  as  long  as  wide;  base  with  two  rather  large  round  foveae, 
close  together,  but  without  a  connecting  impression.  Elytra  with 
outlines  much  as  in  preceding  species.  Metasternum  rather  con- 
vex. Legs  moderately  long;  hind  coxae  closer  together  than  usuaU 
although  distinctly  separated;  front  tibiae  somewhat  inflated  in 
male.     Length,   1^  mm. 

Hab.—^.  S.  Wales  :  Tweed  River.  (A.  M.  Lea.) 

From  the  many  similarly  coloured  species  readily  distinguished 
by  the  isolation  of  tlie  prothoracic  foveae,  and  the  rather  sliort  an- 
tennae, with  stouter  club  than  usual ;  the  clothing  also  is  decidedly 
shorter  than  usual.  From  the  pale  foi-m  of  gulosus,  which  has  the 
foveae  similarly  isolated,  the  much  shorter  antennae  are  sufiicently 
distinctive.  In  appearance  it  is  close  to  mastersi,  but  is  slightly 
smaller,  and  antennae  shorter,  with  club  decidedly  stouter;  the 
prothoracic    foveae    are    also    somewhat    different.      In    general    ap- 


A  ustralian  and  Tasmanian  Seydmaenidae.  -2 1  7 

pfaiaiKe  it  is  voiv  close  to  tlie  preceding  species,  but  antennae  ai-e 
decidedly  sliortcr,  witli  the  ninth  and  tenth  joints  distinctly  twice 
as  wide  as  long,  instead  of  not  nuuli  wider  tlian  long.  The  eighth 
joint  is  as  long  as  the  ninth,  bnt  slightly  narrower,  and  is  fnlly 
twice  the  width  of  the  seventh,  the  latter  is  scarcely  perceptibly 
larger  tliaii   the  sixth. 

Sci/(I iiKicintx  (le prtssiis,    n.sp. 

Bright  pale  castaneous,  sntui-e  slightly  darker  than  the  rest  of 
the  elytra  ;  legs  and  palpi  Hav(nis.  Elytra  with  sparse,  subde- 
pressed.  pale  hairs,  prothorax  moderately  clothed  at  sides,  and 
glabrous  eUewhere ;  liead  with  a  feeble  fascicle  on  each  side  of 
base;   very  sparsely   clothed   elsewhere. 

Head  moderately  transverse,  very  feebly  bilobed  between  an- 
tennae. Eyes  small  and  prominent.  Antennae  j-atlier  long;  club 
conspicuously  four-jointed.  L'ruihorar  almost'  as  long  as  wide; 
base  bifoveat<?.  Elytra  wide  and  somewhat  depressed;  base  distinctly 
w^der  than  prothorax,  and  more  than  twice  as  wide  across  middle; 
sides  strongly  and  evenly  rounded.  Metasternnni  more  convex  than 
usual.  Legs  long;  hind  coxae  moderately  separated;  femora  sub- 
clavate.      Length,    1    mm. 

Hah. — South  Australia  (Macleay  Museum),  Adelaide,  (H.  H.  D. 
Griffith). 

A  small  depressed  species  with  comparatively  wide  elytra,  long 
-antennae  and  legs,  and  sliort  clothing.  It  is  fairly  close  to  tnas- 
tersi,  but  is  more  depressed,  and  the  antennae  are  stouter,  with 
the  club  sliorter.  It  is  rather  wider  than  ralvlcf/is,  and  the  jiro- 
thoracic   impressions   are   different. 

The  eighth  joint  of  the  antennae  is  feebly  ti-anvei-se,  about  twice 
the  width  of  the  seventli.  and  slightly  narrower  than  the  ninth,  the 
lattei-  in  turn  being  slightly  narrower  than  the  tenth;  the  eleventh 
is  briefly  ovate,  and  very  decidedly  sliorter  than  the  two  preceding 
combined;  the  seventh  is  very  little  larger  than  tlie  sixth,  the 
basal  foveae  of  the  prothoi-ax  are  rather  moi-e  widely  separateil  than 
usual;  connecting  them  is  an  impression  that  is  only  moderately 
distinct  from  soma  directions,  but  which  from  others  causes  the 
base  to   appear  transversely  sulcate. 

Sct/dmaetius  f/riffithi,  n.sp. 

Dark  castaneous,  elytra  (suture  excepted^  generally  somewhat 
paler;  under  surface  piceous  or  black;  legs  and  palpi   castaneous. 


218  Arthur  M.  Lea: 

Elytra  with  not  very  numerous  and  rather  sliort,  subdepressed. 
pale  hairs;  prothorax  moderately  clothed  at  sides,  great  portion  of 
disc  glabrous;  head  sparsely  flotlied.  without  basal  fascicles. 

Head  about  as  long  as  wide ;  feebly  bilobed  between  antennae. 
Eves  of  moderate  size  and  rather  prominent.  Antennae  long  and 
rather  thin ;  club  conspicuously  four-jointed.  Prothorax  slightly 
longer  than  wide;  base  with  two  foveae  of  moderate  size,  and  con- 
nected by  a  rather  strong  impression.  Elytra  moderately  long, 
base  .slightly  wider  than  prothorax,  and  almost  twice  as  wide  across 
middle;  sides  moderately  and  evenly  idunded.  Leris  moderately 
long;  hind  coxae  distinctly  but  not  very  widely  separated;  front 
tibiae  dilated  to  apex  in  male.     Length,   1   1/6  mm. 

Hah.— ^out\\  Australia  :  Adelaide,  (H.  H.  D.  Griffith.) 

Darker  than  the  preceding  species,  with  longer  antennae  and 
with  narrower  and  longer  elytra;  the  suture  is  subdepressed  to- 
wards the  base,  as  it  is  also  in  that  species,  although  this  charac- 
ter is  not  of  much  use  in  distinguishing  species.  It  is  a  trifle 
larger  than  rlvularis,  joints  of  club  luore  rounded,  prothoracic 
foveae  less  sharply  defined,  more  distant,  and  with  a  feeble  con- 
necting depression ;  and  the  head  and  prothorax  not  shining  black 
as  in  that  species.  The  antennae  are  decidedly  longer  and  thinner 
than  in  ii  si  fat  us.  The  head  has  a  shallow  impression  close  to  each 
eye.  l:mt  from  certain  directions  each  of  the  impressions  appears 
like  a  small  fovea,  much  as  in  amplipeiinis,  a  species  which  other- 
wise it  has  little  in   common    with. 

One  female  lias  tlie  body  entirely  pale  castaneous.  with  the 
appendages  flavous,    but   it   is   probably   immature. 

Scydmaenus  fuscipalp/s,    n.sp. 

Dark  castaneous.  suture  still  darker,  under  surface  black,  femora 
deeply  infuscated,  tibiae  and  palpi  paler,  tarsi  flavous.  Clothing 
much  as  in  the  preceding  species,  except  that  the  entire  disc  of  the 
pronotum  is  glabrous,  and  that  the  liead  has  a  loose  fascicle  on 
each  side  of  the  base. 

Head  moderately  transverse;  very  indistinctly  bilobed  between 
antennae.  Eyes  small  and  prominent.  Antennae  long  and 
moderately  thin  ;  clul)  four-jointed.  Prothorax  distinctly  longer 
than  wide,  base  hifovcatc.  I'Uytra  somewhat  depressed;  outlines 
as  in  preceding  species.  Legs  moderately  long;  hind  coxae  mode- 
rately separated.      Length,    1^  mm. 

I/ab.—S.  Australia  :  Adelaide  (H.   H.   D.   Griffith). 


Austndian.  and  Tasmanian  Scydnnaenidae.  219 

Like  an  <.'nlai;j:f(l  tdnii  of  the  piuci'din;^'  sjtfeies,  hut  darkcM\  even 
as  to  the  le^'s.  it  is  due  (/f  the  very  few  .speeies  whose  palpi  are  not 
entirely   tluvons. 

Tlie  eluh  is  ilistiiietly  foiir-jointed,  the  eighth  joint  of  the  an- 
tennae, however,  is  distinetly  nnnower  and  iiioie  lonnded  than  the 
ninth,  and  scarcely  twice  the  width  of  the  seventh,  the  latter  is 
slightly  larger  than  the  sixth;  the  eleventh  is  almost  as  long  as  the 
ninth  and  tenth  conihined.  The  basal  foveae  of  the  prothorax,  are 
fairly  large,  close  togetlier,  and  with  a  connecting  impression,  that 
is  always  traceable,  but  varies  in  apparent  depth  with  the  point  of 
view. 

Srt/dmaenua  evanidux,  n.sp. 

Of  a  rather  l)i-ight  castaneous,  antennae  somewhat  paler;  legs 
and  palpi  Havous.  Elytra  with  short,  sparse  pale,  depressed  hairs 
(almost  pubescence);  prothorax  sparsely  clothed  at  sides,  and 
glabrous  elsewhere ;  head  almost  glabrous,  without  basal  fascicles. 

Head  moderately  tiansverse;  gently  rounded  between  antennae. 
Eyes  rather  small  and  moderately  prominent.  Antennae  long  and 
rather  thin;  club  conspicuously  four-jointed.  Frothorax  somewhat 
depressed,  slightly  longer  than  wide;  base  bifoveate.  Elytra  de- 
pressed, base  distinctly  wider  than  prothoiax  and  aljout  twice 
as  wide  across  middle;  sides  moderately  and  evenly  rounded. 
MefasfeniiuN  ratliei'  lightly  convex.  Li'f/s  moderately  long;  hind 
coxae  moderately   sejjavated.      Length,    4/5th  nun. 

Hah.—^.   S.  Wales:   Tamworth  (A.    M.   Lea).  % 

A  minute,  depressed  species,  ■with  thin  antennae.  In  general 
appearance  it  is  close  to  Scydmaenilla  pusdla.  but  antennae  with 
the  club  four-jointed,    and   liind  coxae  distinctly  separated. 

The  eighth  joint  (.>f  tlie  antennae  is  scarcely,  if  at  all.  narroAver 
tlian  the  ninth,  and  twice  the  width  of  the  seventh;  the  latter  is 
slightly  but  noticeably  larger  than  the  sixth.  The  prothoracic 
foveae  are  round  and  rather  deep,  but  not  very  large,  from  some 
directifins  tliey  appeal'  to  be  isolated,  Imt  from  others  a  faint  con- 
necting   inqtression    is   traceal)le. 

Scf/di/iae/iits  ri rularis,  n.sp. 

Black;  elytra  and  extreme  base  of  prothorax  deep  reddish-cas- 
taneous;  antennae  and  abdomen  someAvhat  paler;  legs  and  palpi 
Havous.  Elytra  with  fairly  numerous  and  rather  short,  subde- 
pressed,  pale  iiairs;  prothorax  densely  clothed  at  sides  and  glabrous 
elseAvhere;  head  sparsely  clothed;  eacli  side  of  l)ase  with  a  feeble  fas- 
cicle. 


220  Arthur  M.  Lea  : 

Head  lightly  transverse;  feebly  bilobed  between  antennae.  Eyes 
small  and  prominent.  Antennae  moderatly  long  and  not  very  thin; 
club  conspicuously  four-jointed.  Prothorar,  slightly  longer  than 
wide;  base  with  two  rather  small,  round,  deep  foveae,  close  to- 
gether, but  without  a  connecting"  impression;  each  side  with  a 
small  fovea,  also  isolated  from  the  median  ones.  Elytra  i-ather 
long,  base  not  much  wider  tlian  prothorax,  and  not  twice  as  wid  ■ 
across  middle,  sides  moderately  and  evenly  rounded,  -/vf.r/.s  mode- 
rately long;  hind  coxae  distinctly  but  not  widely  separated;  tibiae 
soiViewhat  stouter  in  male  than  in  female.     Length,  \\  mm. 

Hah. — Victoria;  N.  S.  Wales:  Sydney  (Macleay  Museum),  Nepean 
River  (A.  J.  Coates),  Tweed,  Clarence,  Hawkesbury  and  Peel 
Rivers,  abundant  in  flood  debris  (A.   M.   Lea). 

The  prothoracic  foveae  are  more  sharply  defined  and  closer  to- 
gether than  usual.  The  colours  are  mucli  as  in  (julosiis,  but  that 
species  is  somewhat  larger  and  wider,  prothoracic  foveae  separated 
almost  twice  the  distance,  Ijase  of  elytra  not  quite  the  same,  and 
joints  of  club  more  globular.  Poramaffe/is/s  is  also  larger  and 
wider,  antennae  longer,  and  club  and  base  of  elytra  different.  The 
eighth  joint  of  the  antennae  is  very  decidedly  narrower  than  the 
ninth,  although  almost  twice  the  width  of  the  seventh. 

On  an  occasional  specimen  the  metasternum  is  not  much  darker 
than  the  elytra  ;  and  one  specimen  has  the  entire  body  pale  cas- 
taneous,  with  the  appendages  still  paler,  but  it  is  probably  im- 
mature. 

Scydmaeiiiis  foveidisfa/is,    n.sp. 

(?  Dark  castaneous;  metasternum  almost  or  quite  black;  legs  and 
palpi  flavous,  antennae  somewhat  darker.  Elytra  with  moderately 
numerous,  short,  subdepressed  hairs,  prothorax  not  very  densely 
clothed  at  sides  and  sparsely  elsewhere,  only  middle  of  disc  glab- 
rous; head  sparsely  clothed,  basal  fascicles  very  fecltle  and  indis- 
tinct. 

Head  about  as  long  as  wide;  gently  rounded  between  antennae 
Eyes  small  and  prominent.  Antennae  moderately  long;  elul)  con- 
spicuously four-jointed.  Prothorax  about  as  long  as  wide;  base 
bifoveate.  Elytra  moderately  long,  extreme  base  no  wider  than 
prothorax,  and  across  middle  less  than  twice  as  wide;  sides  rather 
lightly  and  evenly  rounded.  Metasternum  rather  lightly  convex. 
Legs  moderately  long;  hind  coxae  distinctly  but  not  widely  sepa- 
rated; front  coxae  inflated.     Length,   1  mm. 


Australian  and  Tasmania^  Scydmaenidae.  221 

5  DiffiMs  in  liavin*,'  the  inetasteniuin  more  euiivex,  tlio  appeii- 
<Iages  somewhat  shorter,  with  the  front  tibiae  tliinner. 

I/ab. — N.  S.  Wales;  Nepean  River  (A.  J.  Coates),  Tamwoitli. 
Windsor  (A.   M.   Lea). 

Smaller,  darker,  wider  and  more  depressed  than  the  precedin<; 
species,  and  prothoracie  impressions  different;  the  basal  foveae  are 
rather  small  and  widely  separated,  but  with  a  connecting  impres- 
sion that  appears  very  distinct  from  some  directions,  although 
ratlier  feeble  from  others.  It  is  considerably  smaller  than  manfersi, 
usitatus  and  yidoxus. 

The  eighth  joint  oi  the  antennae  is  about  twice  the  width  of  the 
seventh,  and  almost  the  width  of  the  ninth.  The  front  coxae  of  tli  ■ 
male  are  distinctly  inflated  from,  near  the  base  to  near  the  apex, 
but  then  decrease  to  the  apex  itself,  as  a  result  their  outer  edge 
has  a  somewhat  rounded  outline. 

One  specimen  has  the  elytra  darker  than  the  prothorax,  a  re- 
versal of  the  usual  colours  in  species  of  the  genus. 


Sci/dmae/nis   apj}ropitiqiia?ift.    n.sp. 

Very  dark  brownish  castaneous,  elytra  (sutuie  excepted)  generallv 
slightly  paler;  metasternum  black;  abdomen  usually  black,  but  tip 
obscurely  diluted  with  red;  antennae  and  legs  of  a  rather  dingy 
pale  castaneous,  tarsi  and  palpi  paler,  but  scarcely  flavous.  Elytra 
with  short,  sparse,  depressed  hairs  or  pubescence;  prothorax 
rather  sparsely  clothed  at  sides,  and  glabrous  elsewhere;  head  almost 
glabrous,  Avithout  basal  fascicles. 

Head  about  as  long  as  Avide,  very  indistinctly  bilobed  between 
antennae.  Eyes  small  and  not  very  prominent.  Antennae  slightly 
longer,  but  otherAvise  mucli  as  in  preceding  species.  Prothorar 
about  as  long  as  Avide;  base  Avith  two  shaiply  defined  foveae  of 
moderate  size,  closer  together  than  usual,  and  with  a  very  feeble 
connecting  impression.  Elytra  subdepressed  and  rather  Avide;  base 
distinctly  Avider  than  prothorax,  and  aljout  tAvice  as  Avide  across 
middle;  sides  rathei-  strongly  and  evenly  rounded.  Ltga  mode- 
rately long;  hind  coxae  lightly  l)nt  distinctly  separated,  front  tibiae 
8omeAvhat  st(niter  in  male  than  in  female.     Length,   1  mm. 

llah. — W.   Australia  :   Vasse  River,   in  flood  debris  (A.   M.   Lea). 

Close  to  rtrularix,  but  soniCAvhat  smaller,  pi'othoracic  foveae 
someAvhat  different,  antennae  shorter,  and  joints  of  club  smaller. 
Also  close  to  the  preceding  species,   but   prothoracic   foveae   larger 


222  Arthur  M.  Lea.- 

and  much  closer  together,  with  the  connecting  impression  scarcely 
traceable  from  certain  directions,  and  not  at  all  from  others. 

The  elytra,  although  always  dark,  are  usually  somewhat  paler 
than  the  head  and  prothorax. 

A  specimen  in  the  Macleay  Museum,  from  Victoria,  is  very  close, 
to  if  not  identical  Avith  this  species;  its  elytra  are  rather  darker, 
l)ut  I  can  find  no  other  differences. 

»  Scydinaenus  afrojihiis,   n.sp. 

Bright  castaneous,  antennae  and  legs  somewhat  paler,  tarsi  and 
palpi  flavous.  Elytra  with  rather  short,  sparse,  pale,  depressed 
hairs  or  pubescence;  prothorax  sparsely  clothed  at  sides,  greater 
portion  of  disc  glabrous;  head  very  sparsely  clothed,  a  few  hairs  on 
each  side  at  base,  but  scarcely  forming  fascicles. 

Head  lightly  transverse ;  feebly  bilobed  between  antennae.  Eyes 
small  and  prominent.  Antennae  rather  long;  club  conspicuously 
four-jointed.  Prothorax  somewhat  depressed,  and  slightly  longer 
than  wide;  base  bifoveate.  Elytra  long,  at  extreme  base  no  wider 
than  prothorax,  and  scarcely  once  and  one-half  across  middle;  sides 
gently  and  evenly  rounded.  Metasternum  rather  longer  than  usual, 
and  moderately  convex.  Legs  moderately  long;  hind  coxae  dis- 
tinctly but  not  very  widely  separated;  front  tibiae  rather  stouter 
in  male  than  in  female.     Length,   1  mm. 

Hab. — W.  Australia  :  Swan  and  Vasse  Rivers  (A.  M.  Lea). 

A  small,  narrow,  species,  in  build  close  to  the  preceding  species, 
but  slightly  narrower,  much  paler  and  prothoracic  impressions  dif- 
ferent; the  basal  foveas  are  distinctly  transverse,  rather  large, 
distinctly  (at  least  from  certain  directions)  connected  with  one  on 
each  side,  but  indistinctly  connected  with  each  other.  It  is  smaller 
and  distinctly  narrower  than  duplicatiis  and  grijfithi,  and  the 
prothoracic  impressions  are  different.  It  is  much  the  size  and 
colour  of  Sci/dmaetiilla  2^f'silla,  but  the  club  and  liind  coxae  are 
different. 

The  eighth  joint  of  the  antennae  is  twice  the  width  of  the 
seventh,  and  fully  as  wide  as  the  ninth. 

Phagonophana  sutu rails,   n.sp. 

Dark  reddish-castaneous;  elytra  (sutu)-o  excepted)  and  ajipen- 
(lages  paler.  Hather  densely  clothed  with  niodei'ately  long,  sub- 
t'l'cct.   straiuiiieoiis  liairs. 


Australian  and  Tasmanian  Scydmaenidae.  22."> 

Head  luodcratelv  luii^'.  Eyes  small,  latero-frontal  and  promi- 
nent. Antennae  fairly  stout,  passing  middle  coxae,  joints  of  sub- 
continuous  widtli.  Prothorax  slightly?  longer  than  wide;  base  with 
i)regular  foveae,  partially  obscured  by  clothing.  Elytra  at  ex- 
treme base  the  width  of  prothorax,  but  considerably  wider  across 
middle,  sides  strongly  and  evenly  rounded;  each  side  of  base  with 
two  rather  large  impressions,  of  which  the  inner  one  is  the  smaller ; 
narrowly  striated  on  basal  fourth  close  to  suture;  with  small,  irre- 
gularly distributed  and  usually  indistinct  punctures.  Leffs  stout 
and  rather  long;  hind  coxae  almost  touching;  femora  not  peduncu- 
late.    Length,  2  mm. 

Hab. — Tasmania  :  Mount  Wellington,  in  moss  (A.  M.  Lea). 

Considerably  smaller  and  somewhat  narrower  than  ladpennis, 
with  denser  and  paler  clothing,  and  femora  approaching  the 
normal.  It  is  stouter  than  the  following  species,  antennae  stouter, 
clothing  denser  and  longer,  and  elytra  with  sides  regularly 
rounded. 

The  clotliing  is  denser  on  head  and  sides  of  prothorax  than  else- 
where, on  the  head  almost  entirely  concealing  its  sculpture.  The 
eyes  are  on  a  lower  plane  than  usual,  so  that,  although  distinctlv 
projecting  from  their  surroundings,  they  are  not  very  conspicuous 
from  above.  The  second  joint  of  the  antennae  is  shorter  than  the 
first,  but  longer  than  the  third,  the  latter  is  about  as  long  as  wide, 
but  with  the  front  edge  narrowed  to  its  junction  with  the  fourtli, 
the  fifth  to  tenth  have  their  apices  similarly  narrowed, i  the  tenth 
is  about  twice  as  wide  as  the  third,  but  the  intervening  joints  so 
regularly  decrease  in  size,  that  the  antennae  cannot  be  regarded  as 
having  a  club;  the  eleventh  joint  is  subconical,  and  slightly  longer 
than  the  two  preceding  combined.  Close  to  the  base  and  imme- 
diately on  each  side  of  the  suture  there  is  impressed  a  verv  fine 
stria,  inmiediately  outside  of  which  there  is  a  still  finei-  stria, 
which  is  continued  for  a  short  distance  beyond  the  first ;  but  they 
are  rather  indistinct  from  some  directions.  Seen  from  the  direc- 
tion of  the  liead  the  hind  coxae  appear  rather  widely  sepaiated,  but 
when  examined  from  along  the  abdomen  they  are  seen  to  be  almost 
touching. 

I'hagonopliaiia  abundans.   n.sp. 
(?  Dark   castaneous,   elytra,    abdomen   and   appendages   somewhat 
paler,   palpi   and   tarsi  flavous.      Moderately  clothed  with   not   very 
long,   suberect,   stramineous  hairs. 


1.   Similarly  shaped  joints  in  the  PseJaphidae  are  described  by  M.  Raffray  as  trapezoidal. 


224  Arthur  M.  Lea  : 

Head  moderately  long,  with  a  sniall  and  latlier  shallow  impres- 
sion close  to  each  eye.  Eyes  small,  latero-fronta]  and  prominent. 
Antennae  rather  long  and  thiin^  second  to  sixth  joints  of  even  width, 
the  others  slightly  and  regularly  increasing  in  width,  and  not  dis- 
tinctly clubbed,  eleventh  subconical,  slightly  longer  than  two  pre- 
ceding joints  combined.  I'rotliora.i  strongly  convex,  and  very  de- 
cidedly longer  than  wide;  l)ase  with  foui-  impressions,  the  two 
outer  marginal  and  longitudinal,  l)ut  partially  visible  from  above, 
the  two  inner  round  and  fairly  large  f oveae ;  the  space  between  them 
appearing  almost  as  a  carina.  Elytra  at  extreme  base  the  width  of 
prothorax,  sides  strongly  obliquely  dilated  to  the  basal  two-fifths, 
where  the  width  is  more  than  twice  that  of  the  prothoi-ax.  then 
rounded,  and  then  somewhat  oblique  to  apex  ;  each  side  of  base 
depressed,  the  depression  causing  each  side  to  appeal'  like  a  small 
projecting  tooth;  with  sparse,  rather  small,  and  more  or  less  con- 
cealed punctures.  Metasterinim  somewhat  flattened  across  middle 
of  apex.  Abdomen  with  fourtli  segment  having  a  strong  raised 
double  ridge  on  each  side  of  middle,  the  middle  of  its  apex  exca- 
vated, and  with  a  smaller  ridge  or  tooth.  Leys  long;  liiud  coxae 
moderately  separated;  femora  subclavate.     Length,  1  4/5-2  mm. 

?  Differs  in  having  metasternum  more  convex,  abdomen  simple, 
and   appendages  somewhat   shorter. 

Hah. — Tasmania  :  New  Norfolk,  Hobart.  Mount  Wellington, 
numerous  specimens  from  moss  and  several  from  fallen  leaves. 

Seen  from  the  side  the  fourth  abdominal  segment  of  the  \\va\q 
appears  to  have  on  each  side  of  its  middle,  a  strongly  elevated 
narrow  ridge,  highest  towards  its  l)ase,  with  its  l)asal  end  vertical, 
and  witli  its  apex  projecting  as  a  tiuncated  tooth  beyond  the  apex 
of  the  segment.  From  an  oblicjue  tliiection  each  lidge  is  seen  to  1)l' 
distinctly  double,  with  the  separate  parts  conjoined  at  apex.  Seen 
directly  fi-om  behind  each  appears  as  two  narrow  ve)-tical  teeth. 

I'hayo n  oph a n  a  h  irt  iceps ,  n .  sp . 

Moderately  dark  castaneous.  elytra  slightly  paler,  legs  slightly 
paler  still,  tarsi  and  palpi  almost  flavous.  (^lothing  much  as  in 
preceding  spei'ies,  except  that  it  is  densei-  on  rhc  lioad. 

Head  moderately  wide.  Eyes  snndl,  latero-fi-ontal  and  promi- 
nent. Antennae  long  and  i-ather  thin,  second  joint  slightly  shorter 
than  first,  slightly  stouter  than  third  and  almost  as  long  as  thiid 
and  fourth  combined,  third  to  sixth  of  even  widtli,  the  others 
slightly   and    regularly    increasing     in     width,    eleventh    sul)ci>nical. 


Australian  and  Tasmanian  Sci/chnaenidae.  225 

slightly  longer  than  ninth  and  tenth  combined.  Frof/iora.r  strongly 
convex,  distinctly  k>nger  than  wide,  widest  across  apical  third ; 
near  base  with  two  rounded  t'oveae,  the  space  between  almost  cari- 
nated.  Kli/fra  with  outlines  much  as  in  preceding  species;  a  nar- 
row stria  close  to  each  side  of  the  suture  on  the  basal  fifth;  punc- 
tures spai-se  and  indistinct.  Lec/s  long  and  rather  stout;  hind 
coxae  rather  Avidely  separated.     Length,   2   1/6  mm. 

Hah. — Tasmania  :   Southport  (A.   M.   Lea). 

In  general  appearance  close  to  the  preceding  species,  but  an- 
tennae stouter,  elytra  less  suddenly  inflated,  and  the  shades  of 
colour  of  prothorax  and  elytra  less  strongly  defined.  The  separa- 
tion of  the  hind  coxae  is  also  more  noticeable,  but  the  two  species 
are  so  obviously  close  together  that  it  is  inadvisable  to  generically 
separate  them,  although  the  separation  is  certainly  more  pro- 
nounced than  in  any  other  species  of  Phagonophana. 


Phagonophana  crassipes,   n.sp. 

Colour  and  clothing  as  in  ahundans,  except  that  on  the  head  and 
prothorax  the  clothing  is  denser. 

Head  moderately  long,  with  fairly  numerous  but  more  or  less 
concealed  punctures.  Eyes  small,  latero-frontal,  and  moderately 
prominent.  Antennae  moderately  long  and  not  very  thin,  joints 
of  subcontinuous  Avidth,  eleventh  joint  subconical,  as  long  as  ninth 
and  tenth  combined.  Prothorax  rather  strongly  convex,  distinctly- 
longer  than  wide,  widest  across  apical  third;  base  with  four 
strong  impressions.  Elytra  at  extreme  base  no  wider  than  base  of 
prothorax,  but  almost  twice  as  wide  across  middle,  sides  strongly 
and  evenly  rounded ;  each  side  of  base  with  two  impressions,  appear- 
ing confluent  from  some  directions;  with  small,  and  rather  sparse, 
more  or  less  obscured  punctures.  Legs  long  and  rather  stout ;  hind 
coxae  almost  touching;  femora  not  pedunculate.     Length,  If  mm. 

Hah. — Tasmania  (Macleay  Museum  and  H.  H.  D.  Griffith), 
Hobart,  Mount  Wellington,  in  moss  (A.  M.  Lea). 

Somewhat  smaller  than  ahundans  and  clothing  shorter,  and 
elytra  more  regularly  rounded  and  different  at  base;  the  basal 
impressions  on  the  prothorax  are  much  the  same,  but  they  are 
partially  obscured  by  the  clothing.  The  antennae  are  somewhat 
shorter  than  in  the  three  preceding  species,  the  ninth  and  tentli 
joints  are  fully  twice  as  wide  as  long,  the  others  gradually  decrease 
in  width,  so  that  the  third  is  just  perceptibly  transverse. 


526  Arthur  M.  Lea  : 

When  viewed  straight  from  behind  the  hind  coxae  are  seen  to  be 
sliglitly  separated,  but  from  other  directions  they  appear  to  l)e 
touching. 

PJiagonopho/Ki  pedu/iculnto,  n.sp. 

Of  a  rather  dai'k  reddish-castaneous,  abdomen  and  legs  some- 
what paler,  tarsi  and  palpi  almost  flavous.  Elytra  moderately 
<-lothed  with  not  very  long,  subdepressed,  stramineous  hairs,  denser 
on  head  and  sides  of  prothorax;  disc  of  the  latter  glabrous. 

J/e(ir/  moderately  wide.  Eyes  small,  latero-frontal  and  promi- 
nent. Antennae  moderately  long  and  not  very  thin.  Prothorar 
moderately  convex,  slightly  longer  than  wide;  base  with  four  im- 
pressions. Eh/fra  at  base  distinctly  wider  than  prothorax,  and 
almost  twice  as  wide  across  middle,  sides  rather  strongly  and  evenly 
rounded;  with  moderately  sparse  and  small  punctures.  Legs  long 
and  rather  thin;  hind  coxae  touching;  hind  femora  pedunculate, 
the  others  much  less  so.     Length,   1^  mm. 

Hah. — N.  S.  Wales  :  Sydney  (Macleay  Museum),  Clarence  River 
(A.  M.  Lea). 

Rather  close  to  the  preceding  species,  but  sliglitly  smaller, 
antennae  a  trifle  longer  (although  stouter  than  most  species  of  the 
genus),  prothorax  with  the  basal  impressions  somewhat  different; 
and  legs  longer  and  of  different  shape. 

The  third  to  fifth  joints  of  antennae  are  of  even  width,  the  sixth 
is  a  trifle  wider,  the  seventh  is  rather  suddenly,  although  not  much, 
wider  than  the  sixth,  the  others  feebly  and  regularly  increase  in 
width,  so  that  it  is  somewhat  diflicult  to  decide  as  to  whether  the 
antennae  should  be  regarded  as  having  the  joints  of  sub-continuous 
width  or  as  having  a  five-jointed'  club.  The  four  basal 
impressions  of  the  prothorax  consist  of  two  rather  small 
median  foveae,  and  a  longitudinal  impression  on  each  side,  con- 
necting them  all  is  an  impression  that  appears  rather  feeble  from 
some  directions,  but  from  othei-s  appears  almost  as  a  deep  continu- 
ous groove.  The  elytral  punctures,  although  small,  are  fairly  dis- 
tinct where  the  surface  has  been  abraded. 

The  pedunculate  femora,  contiguous  hind  coxae  and  joints  of 
antennae  of  subcontinuous  width,  or  almost  .so,  would  appear  to 
■denote  that  this  species  belongs  to  Fhagonophana.  Two  of  the 
main  characters,  relied  upon  by  King  for  distinguishing  that  genus 
from  others,  are  the  biarticulate  labial  palpi,  and  mandibles  with 
two  teeth  and  membranous  edge;  but  to  see  these  it  is  necessary  to 


Australian  and  Tastnanian  Scydmaenidae.  227 

mount  speeiiuens,  after  treatiueiit,  in  Canada  balsam,  and  smh 
treatment  destroys  specimens  for  ordinary  examination;  so  that 
where  but  few  specimens  are  available  it  is  not  advisable  to  so  treat 
them.  While  not  contend in,ii[  that  liidden  characters  should  never 
be  used  for  the  definition  of  genera,  it  certainly  appears  preferable 
to  use  such  characters  as  can  be  made  out  by  the  use  of  an  ordinarx 
lens,  or  l)y  aid  of  tlie  microscope,  without  the  destruction  of  type 
specimens. 

PJuu/oiiopJunta  parvicollis,   n.sp. 

Bright  castaneous.  abdomen  tarsi  and  palpi  somewhat  paler. 
Moderately  clothed  witli  not  very  long,  subde^^ressed.  stramineous 
hairs  or  pubescence,   disc  of  prothorax  glabrous. 

Head  about  as  long  as  wide.  Eyes  rather  small,  latero-frontal 
and  moderately  prominent.  Antennae  moderately  long.  Prothoror 
moderately  convex,  slightly  longer  than  wide;  base  with  four 
moderate  impressions.  FAyira  at  base  distinctly  wider  than  pro- 
thorax,  and  fully  thrice  as  wade  across  middle;  sides  strongly  and 
evenly  rounded,  each  side  of  base  with  two  impressions;  punctures 
rather  dense  and  distinct.  Legs  long  and  rather  thin  ;  hind  coxae 
touching;  four  hind  femora  pedunculate.     Length,   1^,  mm. 

Eah. — N.  S.  Wales  :  Sydney,  Ourimbah  (A.  M.  Lea). 

The  prothorax  is  unusually  small  in  comparison  with  the  elytra, 
a  character  which  at  once  distinguishes  it  from  the  preceding 
species. 

The  elytra  have  a  few  rather  lon^  hairs  scattered  amongst  the 
ordinary  ones,  but  they  are  not  very  distinct  except  from  tlie 
sides.  The  second  joint  of  the  antennae  is  distinctly  longer  than 
the  third,  the  latter  is  briefly  cylindrical,  the  fourth  to  sixth  are 
more  or  less  globular,  and  of  even  width,  the  seventh  is  slightly 
longer  and  distinctly  wider  than  the  sixth,  the  others  gradually 
increase  in  size,  and,  as  also  the  seventh,  are  more  or  less  trape- 
zoidal; the  eleventh  is  subconical  and  distinctly  shorter  than  the 
ninth  and  tenth  combined.  The  antennae  therefore  could  fairly  be 
regarded  as  having  a  rather  loose  five-jointed  club,  although  at  a 
glance  the  joints  appear  to  be  of  subcontinuous  width.  The  medio- 
basal  impressions  of  the  prothorax  are  transverse,  the  lateral  ones 
are  oblique,  and  all  are  more  or  less  feebly  connected  together  bv 
a  transverse  impression.  The  elytral  punctures  are  quite  distinct, 
even  before  abrasion. 


228  Arthur  M.  Lea  : 

Vhagonoplianti   anthicoidti>,   n.sp. 

Of  a  uniform  and  l)right  castaneous,  tip  of  abdomen,  tarsi  and 
l>ulpi  very  little  paler.  With  short,  depressed,  and  rather  sparse, 
stramineous  hairs  or  pubescence. 

Head  distinctly  transverse;  with  a  siiort  transverse  antennary 
ridge  on  each  side,  and  a  small  fovea  behind  each  ridge.  Eyes 
rather  small,  latero-median  and  pronjincnt.  Antennae  not  very 
long,  joints  of  subcontinuous  Avidth.  Frothorar  somewhat  de- 
pressed, distinctly  longer  than  wide,  widest  close  to  apex;  base  with 
two  small  foveae  and  a  more  distinct  one  on  each  side,  although 
only  partially  visible  from  al)ove.  Ehjfvd  depressed,  base  wider 
than  base  of  prothorax,  but  not  wider  than  near  its  apex,  sides 
moderately  rounded  and  widest  at  about  basal  two-fifths;  with 
fairly  numerous,  and.  foi-  the  genus,  rather  coarse  punctures  on 
basal  half,  becoming  smaller  posteriorly.  Ltgs  moderately  long; 
hind  coxae  feebly  separated;  hind  femora  decidedly  pedunculated, 
the  others  much  less  noticeably  so.     Length,   1  2/3  mm. 

Hah. — N.  8.  Wales  :  Sydney,  Glen  Innes  (A.  M.  Lea). 

A  depressed  species,  in  general  appearance  like  several  species 
of  Heterognathus,  but  the  hind  coxae  are  almost  touching.  The 
elytral  punctures  are  stronger  than  in  the  pi-eceding  species.  The 
shape  and  general  appearance  are  decidedly  suggestive  of  some  of 
the  pale  species  of   Anthicus. 

The  second  to  sixth  joints  of  antennae'  are  of  even  width,  the 
others  regularly  increasing  in  width,  but  as  the  ninth  and  tenth, 
in  addition  to  being  wider,  are  somewhat  longer  than  the  seventh, 
the  antennae  might  be  regarded  as  having  a  three-jointed  club;  the 
eleventh  joint  is  subconical.  and  almost  as  long  as  the  ninth  and 
tenth  combined. 

Phni/ottopJiaiKi   orij>f/i/iis.   u.sp. 

Of  a  rather  dark  reddish-castaneous,  abdomen  and  appendages 
somewhat  paler,  tarsi  and  palpi  almost  flavous.  Moderately  clothed 
with  suberect  and  moderately  long  stramineous  hairs,  becoming 
dense  on  sides  and  base  nf  iiiothorax,  and  of  head. 

//f^ad  rather  long  and  tliin  ;  with  a  somewhat  obscured  drpiessinn 
close  to  each  eye.  Eyes  small,  latcro-frontnl  and  moderately  pi'o- 
minent.  Antennae  moderately  long.  /'rof/iora  r  about  once  and 
one-half  as  long  as  wide;  base  with  four  rathei-  large  foveae.  Khftra 
elongate-ovat'C,  extreme  base  the  width  of  prothorax,  across  middle 
almost  twice  the  width,   sides   regulaily   roumh'd  ;   punctures  small. 


Auatralian  and  Tasmankui  Scydiniaenidae.  229 

sparse  and  indistiml.  Ltf/s  long  and  moderately  stout;  hind  coxae 
lightly  separated  ;  feiudra  scarcely  pedunculate.      Length,   1^  mm. 

Hah. — Tasmania  :  Waratah,  in  moss  (A.  M.  Loa). 

The  eleventh  joint  of  the  antennae  is  sul)conical,  distinctly  wider 
than  tenth,  and  about  as  long  as  nintli  and  tenth  combined,  these 
are  strongly  transverse  \\\t\\  the  ninth  narroAver  than  the  tenth,  the 
eighth  and  seventh  regularly  decrease  in  width,  so  that,  although 
the  antennae  miglit  fairly  be  regarded  as  having  a  three-jointed 
club,  they  might  just  as  fairly  be  regarded  as  having  the  joints  of 
subcontinuous  width.  The  basal  foveae  of  the  prothorax  are  rather 
large  and  close  together,  the  lateral  ones  being  partially  visible 
from  above,  but  tliey  are  all  partially  obscured  by  clothing.  The 
hind  coxae  are  so  close  together  that  it  is  only  from  certain  direc- 
tions that  they  can  l)e  seen  to  be  separated.  » 

This  and  the  foUo^wing  are  peculiarly  narrow,  convex  species, 
and  it  is  possible  that  they  should  be  regarded  as  belonging  to  a 
new  genus,  but  as  their  maxillary  palj^i  and  hind  coxaei  appear  to 
be  as  in  Fhagonophana,  and  as  I  have  seen  but  a  single  specimen 
of  each,  it  is  certainly  inadvisable  to  treat  them  so  as  to  render  the 
mouth  parts  visible. 

Phagonophana  tenuis,  n.sp. 

Bright  castaneous,  appendages  somewhat  paler.  Rather  lightly 
clothed  with  short  depressed  hairs  or  pubescence. 

Head  (including  neck)  about  twice  as  long  as  wide,  with  a  short 
transverse  antennary  ridge  on  each  side  in  front.  Eyes  very  small 
and  latero-frontal.  Antennae  moderately  long.  Prothorax  dis- 
tinctly longer  than  wide,  sides  lightly  and  uniforndy  rounded;  base 
with  four  small  foveae,  the  median  ones  rather  close  together, 
the  lateral  ones  partially  concealed  from  above.  Elytra  and  legs 
much  as  in  preceding  species.     Length,    l\  mm. 

Hah. — Tasmania  :   Mount  Wellington,   in  moss  (A.   M.   Lea). 

In  appearance  like  a  pale  miniature  specimen  of  the  preceding 
species,  but  base  of  prothorax  with  smaller  foveae,  terminal  joints 
of  antennae  differently  proportioned  and  clothing  shorter  and 
sparser,  etc. 

The  antennae  should  perhaps  be  regarded  as  having  the  joints 
of  subcontinuous  width,  but  if  regarded  as  clubbed  it  would  not 
be  easy  to  decide  whether  the  club  consists  of  two  or  of  three  joints. 
The  eleventh  is  decidedly  larger  than  usual,  being  considerably 
wider   than    tlie   tenth,    and    as   long   as    the   three    preceding   com- 

7 


230  Arthur  M.  Lea  : 

billed,  the  tenth  is  short,  strongly  transverse,  and  distinctly  wider 
than  ninth,  the  latter  is  moderately  transverse  and  somewhat 
larger  than  the  eighth. 

Coatesia,  n.g. 

Head  small,  partially  concealed  from  ajjove.  Eyes  small,  medio- 
lateral  and  rather  jDrominent.  Antennae  moderately  long,  clubbed 
^it  apex.  Maxillary  palpi  apparently  three-jointed,  but  fourtli 
joint  small  and  conjoined  to  apex  of  third,  causing  the  latter  to 
appear  rather  large.  Labial  palj^i  minute.  Frothorax  strongly 
transverse.  Scutellnm  minute.  FAytra  wide.  Mesosternuin  with 
an  acute  intercoxal  keel.  Metasternum  moderately  long.  Abdomen 
about  as  long  as  ineso-  and  metasterpum  combined.  Legs  rather 
long  and  thin ;  hind  coxae  moderately  separated ;  tibiae  feebly 
dilated  to  apex;  tarsi  very  thin. 

The  minute  species  upon  which  it  is  proposed  to  found  this 
genus  is  much  wider  in  proportion  than  any  other  of  the  family 
actually  known  to  me,  or  that  I  have  seen  figured.  Its  prothorax 
also  is  Avithout  any  trace  of  the  medio-basal  foveae  so  common  in 
the  family,  although  the  lateral  ones  are  present. 

I  cannot  speak  as  to  its  position  in  the  family  generally,  but 
amongst  the  genera  occurring  in  Australia  it  should  be  placed  next 
to  Megaladerus,  from  which  it  differs  in  having  prothorax  decidedly 
Avide,    and  hind  coxae  much  closer   together. 


Goatesla   lata,    n.sp. 

Bright  reddish-castaneous,  tip  of  abdomen,  tarsi  and  palpi  some- 
what paler.  Clothed  with  moderately  dense,  not  very  long,  de- 
pressed stramineous  pubescence. 

Head  across  eyes  less  than  half  the  width  of  base  of  prothorax. 
Antennae  passing  middle  coxae,  seven  basal  joints  rather  thin, 
eighth  slightly  larger  than  seventh,  ninth  distinctly  larger  than 
eighth,  but  not  very  large,  tenth  transverse,  distinctly  longer  and 
wider  than  ninth,  eleventh  large,  wider  than  tenth,  and  as  long 
as  three  preceding  combined.  Prothorax  moderately  convex,  fully 
twice  as  wide  as  long,  sides  strongly  rounded  in  front  and  almost 
parallel  toAvards  base,  base  more  than  tAvice  the  Avidth  of  apex; 
hind  angles  flattened,  and  each  Avith  a  vague  foveate  impression  ; 
punctures  minute  and  partially  concealed.  Elytra  about  once  and 
one-third  as  long  as  wide,  Avidest  at  extreme  l)ase,  Avhich  is  closely 
applied  to,  and  the  exact  Avidth  of  base  of  prothorax,  sides  feebly 


Australian  and  Tasmanian  Scychnaenidae.  231 

diminishing  in  width  to  near  apex,  and  then  strongly  rounded  ; 
each  side  of  base  with  a  fairly  large  depression ;  with  dense,  small 
and  partially  concealed  punctures.      Length,    1   mm. 

Hab. — N.  S.  Wales;  Nepean  River  (A.  J.  Coates),  Clarence 
River,  in  flood  debris  (A.   M.  Lea). 

The  elytral  punctures,  although  small,  are  fairly  distinct,  where, 
through  abrasion,  they  can   be  closely  examined. 


[Proc.  Rot.  Soc.   Victoria,  27  (N.S.).  Pt.  II.,  1914]. 

Art.  XVII. — Notes  on  Amy  derides,  ivitJi  Descriptions  of 

New  Species. 

[Pakt  XL] 

By    EUSTACE   W.    FERGUSON,    M.B.,    Ch.M. 

[Read  November  12th.  191-i]. 

A. — Notes  on   t/ie  disfribufion  of  the  suhfamily  in  Victoria. 

The  study  of  the  distribution  of  most  of  the  groups  of  our 
Australian  insect  fauna,  is  as  yet  only  at  a  beginning.  In  the 
Coleoptera  many  thousands  of  species  have  been  described  and  are 
being  described  yearly,  and  yet,  so  far,  little  work  has  been  done 
towards  the  correlation  of  the  facts  of  distribution,  their  depen- 
dence on  natural  barriers,  food  supply  and  other  factors.  It  is 
true,  of  course,  that  much  is  known  about  the  habits  and  distribu- 
tion of  mjany  groups ;  thus  the  Carenides,  as  also  the  Helaeides,  are 
well  known  to  be  interior  forms,  lovers  of  the  inland  slopes  and 
dry  plains  of  the  interior,  whole  other  forms  such  as  Notonomus 
and  Cardiothorax  are  denizens  of  the  well-watered  eastern  slopes 
and  coastal  scrubs.  Viewed  thus  broadly  the  Amycterides  are 
typical  inland  forms,  rich  in  species  on  the  mountain  ranges, 
fewer  in  species,  but  widely  distributed,  over  the  inland  plains. 
It  is  not  my  purpose  here  to  discuss  in  detail  the  distribution  of  the 
subfamily;  but  certain  facts  or  deductions  may  be  mentioned,  in 
order  to  facilitate  a  discussion  of  the  distribution  in  Victoria.  In 
this  connection  it  may  be  mentioned  that  much  light  will  probably 
be  brought  to  bear  on  the  subject  by  the  application  of  Mr.  R.  J. 
Tillyard's  scheme  of  Specific  Contours ;  so  far  lack  of  sufficient 
data  has  prevented  more  than  a  very  general  outlining  of  the 
contours. 

From  a  consideration  of  the  present  distribution  it  is  obvious 
that,  while  the  subfamily  originally  developed  from  a  common 
source,  secondary  zoocentres  have  now  developed,  resulting  in 
several  types  of  distribution,  all  of  them,  according  to  Mr. 
Tillyard's  scheme,  entogenic  in  character. 

The  genus  G uhicorrhynchus  represents  the  most  generalised  type 
of  distribution,  it  occurs  in  all  the  States  and  appears  to  be  equally 


Notes  on  Amycterides.  26'^ 

rich  in  species  in  all.  Acaittlioloplnta  also  is  generally  disl  riliuteil. 
but  is  undergoing  development  along  separate  lines  in  tlic  East  and 
in  the  West.  A  second  type  of  distribution  is  exemplified  by  the 
genus  Fsalicluro ;  this  has  its  headquarters,  oi'  zoocentre.  in  the 
Main  Dividing  Ivange  of  Northern  X.S.Wales,  spi'eading  thence 
along  the  Avhole  eastern  motmtain  system  and  down  tlic  wu'steiii 
slopes.  Scleroriiius  is  an  example  of  a  thiid  type,  radiating  from 
a,  zoocentre  in  the  neighbourhood  of  the  Jiead  of  Spciuer  (ridf.  in 
South  Australia.  A  western  distribution  with  its  head(Hiaitcis  in 
the  south-west  of  West  Australia  probably  also  exists,  tlie  <lisliil)n- 
tion  of  the  "  Euomides  "  suggests  this;  while  the  genus  Xofnimpht's 
suggests  the  existence  of  a  noi'th-western  type. 

In  turning  now  to  Victoria,  it  will  ])e  seen  that  its  geographical 
position  is  between  the  zoocentres  of  the  second  and  tliird  types  of 
■distribution  outlined  above,  t'onsequently  we  would  expect  to  find 
the  predominant  species  in  eastern  Victoria  closely  allied  to  Xew 
South  Wales  species,  and  in  western  Victoria  to  South  Australian 
species.  Unforttinately,  as  yet,  too  little  detail  is  known  about  the 
habitats  and  range  of  many  of  the  Victorian  species,  to  enable  an 
■exact  determination  of  their  distribution;  in  the  main,  howevci-. 
the  species  are  distributed  as  above  indicated. 

Many  regions  of  Victoria,  however,  appeal-  to  have  been  almost 
completely  neglected  from  an  entomological  point  of  view.  This 
is  the  more  to  be  deplored,  since  with  the  advent  of  settlement,  the 
breeding  grounds  are  being  destroyed,  and  the  extinction  of  many 
local  forms  is  not  beyond  the  bounds  of  possibility. 

The  distribution  of  the  Amycierides  in  Victoria  may  perhaps  be 
best  approached  by  a  discussion  of  the  distrilnition  of  the  different 
genera. 

PsALiDURA. — Of  the  11  groups  iitto  which  this  genus  has  lieen 
subdivided,  but  three  are  known  to  occur  in  Victoria. 

P.  approximata  has  been  recorded  from  Mt.  Buffalo  ;  it  is  tlie 
most  southerly  representative  of  the  horned-jaw  gioup  (mira- 
group),  which  extends  northward  as  far  as  Southei-n  (.Queensland. 
It  is  of  interest  as  being  more  closely  allied  to  /-'.  tniracula,  which 
occurs  in  the  Blue  Mountains  in  N.S.Wales  than  to  I',  carterl  (Mt. 
Kosciusko),  or  P.  mira  (var.  Edenensh:  Eden). 

P.  flavosetosa  is  a  species  belonging  to  the  candata-group,  and 
appears  to  have  entered  Victoria  from  the  west.  The  candata- 
group  consists,  as  at  present  known,  of  but  three  species,  but  these 
are    spread    over    an    immense    extent    of    counti-y.     fi-om    Centi-al 


234  Eustace   W.  Ferguson: 

Queensland  to  South  Australia.  The  range  of  F.  flavosetosa  ex- 
tends from  Fowler's  Bay  in  South  Australia  to  the  Mallee  country 
in  north-west  Victoria  (Ouyen,  Sea  Lake). 

The  bulk  of  the  Victorian  species  of  Psalidura  belong  to  the 
mirahiinda  group,  a  group  which  is  typically  Victorian  though 
overlapping  into  surrounding  States.  F.  mirahunda  is  almost  cer- 
tainly the  original  Curculio  mirabilis  of  Kirby,  and  that  name 
should  take  precedence;  the  names  impressa,  cremdala,  Howitti 
and  Helyi  have  already  been  relegated  to  synonymy.  Tasmania 
ia  embraced  in  the  range  of  the  species,  and  it  appears  to  be  com- 
mon along  the  southern  portions  of  Victoria;  I  have  records  of  th© 
following  Victorian  localities  : — Thorpdale,  Flinders,  Ferntree 
Gully,  Mordialloc,  Melbourne  and  Wallan.  Most  of  the  specimens 
I  have  seen  Avex'e  labelled  merely  Tasmania  or  Victoria.  Of  its 
western  limit  I  am  uncertain.  I  have  never  received  it  from  Port- 
land. Vjut  there  is  a  specimen  in  the  National  Museum  labelled 
South  Australia. 

P.  monticola  Avas  described  from  specimens  taken  by  Mr.  T.  G. 
Sloane  at  Mt.  Buffalo,  I  have  recently  received  a  specimen  from 
Mr.  J.  E.  Dixon  from  Tallangatta,  while  specimens  in  the  National 
Museum  are  from  the  Victorian  Alps.  The  range  of  the  species 
therefore  includes  the  north-eastern  mountains,  but  its  limits  are 
at  pi-esent  unknoAvn. 

P.  cultratfv  was  described  from  material  originally  in  the 
Castlenau  collection.  I  have  a  note  that  one  specimen  was  labelled 
Melbourne,  but  it  is  strange  that  T  have  never  seen  specimens  from 
another  source. 

/*.  Helmsi  Avas  described  from  Benalla  (R.  Helms). 

P.  flavovarin  occurs  at  Portland  and  in  South  Australia,  the 
specimens  from  the  latter  State,  that  I  have  seen,  were  without 
locality  labels.      A  variety  of  this  species  occurs  at  Mt.   Macedon. 

Tlio  locality  of  F.  Leal  (herein  described)  is  unknown. 

TaI;Aitrinus. — The  distribution  of  this  genus  has  not  yet  been 
satisfactorily  worked  out;  probably  because  the  genus,  as  at  present 
constiuted,  is  extremely  complex  and  requires  subdivision.  In  the 
main,  however,  the  tuberculate  and  costate  sections,  which  com- 
prise the  typical  species,  correspond  in  their  distribution  to 
Psalidura:  with,  in  the  case  of  the  tuberculate  forms,  a  secondary 
200centre  in  South-west  Australia.  The  distribution  of  the  granu- 
late forms  is  much  more  puzzling;  almost  absent  in  N.S.  Wales, 
wliero  tlio  tulierculate  and  costate  forms  are  most  abundant,  they 
are    common    in    Victoria.    South    Australia,    to    a    less    extent    in 


NofC'S  on  Amycterides.  235 

Western  Australia,  and  conunon  also  in  Queensland.    Of  this  sec-tion 
of  the  genus,  Victoria  possesses  7  si)ecies. 

2\  Rirerinae,  Macl..  enjoys  a  wide  range  from  the  Riverina  in 
New  South  Wales,  through  the  north  of  Victoria  to  Port  Lincoln 
in  South  Australia;  it  is  common  in  the  Mallee  country  in  Victoria, 
and  probably  occuis  througliout  the  country  north  of  the  Dividing 
Range. 

T.  fomefitosii.^  Boisd.  occurs  along  the  southern  sea-board,  from 
South  Australia  to  Wilson's  Promontory;  I  have  also  seen  it  from 
King  Is. 

1\  penicilldfiis  Macl.  is  tlie  Tasmanian  representative  of  T. 
tomentosus.  and  is  lather  doubtfully  distinct.  I  have  a  spec-imen 
labelled  as  Victorian. 

T.  fenehrirosiis  Ferg.  occurs  chiefly  in  the  southern  portion  of 
the  State;  it  is  common  about  Melbourne,  and  I  have  specimens 
from  Benalla. 

T.  Hoivitfi  Macl.  also  occurs  in  the  neighbourhood  of  Melbourne. 

T.  simpliciiJfs  Lea  was  described  from  South  Australia,  but  is 
common  in  western  Victoria  and  as  far  east  as  Melbourne. 

Of  the  tuberculate  section  8  species  occur  in  Victoria. 

T.  tuherculatiis  Macl.  occurs  in  the  vicinity  of  Melbourne.  T. 
fi//sfri.r.  a  closely  allied  species,  is  herein  described  as  new  from 
Portland. 

T.  t>/picus  Macl.,  or  a  new  species  closely  allied  to  typicus,  1 
have  seen  from  Benalla. 

T.  acutipennJs  Fei-g.,  a  closely  allied  species,  occurs  at  Mel- 
bourne and  Mt.  Macedon. 

T.  //itlanr/iolio/s  Lea  is  also  from  Mt.  Macedon. 

The  distribution  of  these  species  is  interesting,  as  in  almost  all 
the  cases  they  aie  nearly  allied  to  New  South  Wales  foim  not 
recorded  from  the  intervening  country.  Thus  2\  tuhercidatus  and 
T.  Ju/xtrij-  find  their  nearest  allies  in  T.  fernico-sus,  from  central 
eastern  X.S.  Wales,  and  2\  halmnfurinuK  from  Kangaroo  Island; 
and  furthermore  the  Kangaroo  Island  species  is  more  nearly  allied 
to  the  NeAv  South  Wales  species  than  it  is  to  the  Victorian.  T. 
neufipeniiis  is  most  nearly  allied  to  T .  fy picas,  but,  as  noted  above, 
this  species,  or  one  very  closely  related  to  it,  comes  as  far  south 
as  Benalla.  T.  inelauchol'tcKH  is  related  to  T.  fur  tier  i  from  Mt. 
Kosciusko. 

7\  a/if/iisftis  Ferg.  rnu/  T.  perpJerux,  n.sp.,  are  two  closely  related 
fui-ins  allietl  to  the  hucephalus  grouj).     T.  (ingustus  occurs  at  Mt. 


236  Eustace   ^¥.  Ferguson  : 

Macedon,  Ballarat  and  Gleuample,  and  probably  elsewhere,  most  of 
my  specimen  being  labelled  Victoria.  T.  perplexus  is  from  Port- 
land. 

T.  scaher  Boisd.,  an  aberrant  tuberculate  form,  occurs  inland  in 
Victoria. 

The  costate  section  is  represented  in  Victoria  by  several  fine 
species. 

T.  impressicoUis  Macl.  (syn.  T.  hiscipennis),  I  have  from  Dande- 
nong  and  Narracan.      I  believe  it  also  occurs  at  Warburton. 

T.  laevicoUis  Pasc.  has  a  similar  distribution,  most  of  the  speci- 
mens I  have  seen  were  labelled  Gippsland. 

T.  costipetinis  Ferg.  occurs  among  the  Dandenong  Ranges,  and 
probably  near  Melbourne;  I  have  never  seen  it  fi-om  Mt.   Macedon. 

T.  carinatus  Ferg.  is  found  at  Portland.  It  is  closely  allied  to 
T.  laevicoUis  and  T.  costipe/mis,  and  also  to  T.  Kirht/i  from  New 
South  Wales. 

ScLERORiNus. — This  genus  is  represented  in  Victoria  by  species 
belonging  to  4  distinct  groups.  The  most  abundant  species  belong 
to  the  Adelaidae-group ;  and  three  species'  have  been  described.  Of 
these  S.  llowitfi  is  conspecific  with  S.  frisfis,  while  S.  obliferatus 
is  somewhat  doubtfully  distinct.  But  the  species  of  this  group 
present  such  variation  in  size  and  structure  that  it  is  extremely 
difficult  to  find  good  specific  distinctions.  S.  fri.sfiii  occurs  along 
the  southern  sea-board  and  is  also  found  in  Tasmania  and  South 
Australia.  Of  the  locality  of  .S'.  nUiferafus,  I  am  uncertain,  l^ut, 
if  I  am  correct  in  my  identification,  it  occurs  at  Mt.  Buffalo  and 
in  the  Australian  Alps. 

(S*.  i?iornatus,  n.sp.,  is  closely  allied,  and  is  from  (iippsland ;  but 
a  closely  related  form  occurs  at  Portland.  Several  other  species 
of  this  group  also  probably  exist  in  Victoria,  as  a  number  of 
single  specimens  have  passed  through  my  hands,  which  I  have  been 
unable  to  certainly  identify  with  any  dcse-i'iljed  form. 

Including  these  forms,  the  gi'oup  appears  to  extend  over  the 
greater  part  of  Victoria  with  the  exception  of  tlie  north-west.  The 
group  is  essentially  a  South  Austi'alian  one,  and  the  A'ictorian 
species  are  more  nun\erous  in  the  western  i)art  of  tlie  State,  but 
follow  the  mountain   i-anges  right  into  New  South  Wales. 

The  sabulosus  group  is  represented  by  .S'.  Diuoni  and  S.  Goiidiei, 
two  species  herein  described,  and  1)oth  closely  related  to  .S'. 
sabulosiift.  Of  these  S.  Dironi  occurs  at  Ouyen  and  Kow  Plains,  and 
.S'.  Goudiei  at  Biichip.  A  third  repi-esentative  of  this  group  is 
S.  amj/vttroide.s,  of  which  all  the  specimens  I  have  seen  came  from 
Portland. 


Notes  on  Amycte rides.  237 

The  vestitiis-<,'roui)   has  st-vcral    rei)roseiitatives. 

S.  vestitus  Mad.,  otcuis  in  the  Mallei'  eouiitfy,  my  specimens  ai-e 
from  Birchip  and  Sea  Lake. 

S.  suhUneafus  alsd  oeeurs  in  the  Mallee.  ami  I  iiave  received  it 
from  Melbourne.  Both  of  these  species  are  common  in  South 
Australia,  they  appear  to  have  spread  across  into  the  north-west  of 
Victoria,  and,  so  far,  1  have  not  seen  specimens  from  the  south- 
west corner  of  that  State. 

S.  dlplfola  Ferg.  from  the  Victorian  Alps  is  the  soutliei'n  t'oi-m  of 
S.  iiiconatans  Lea,  from  Mt.   Kosciusko. 

S.  tubercufosus  Mad.  was  descrilied  from  Victoria,  l)ut  I  am 
unacquainted  with  its  exact  liabitat.  S.  luiirroiififtis  is  probably  a 
synonym. 

.S'.  itiacroui  penniA  Fei'g.  occurs  at  Xelson,  in  the  south-west 
corner  of  Victoria.  Both  of  these  species  are  related  to  S.  Germari 
from  South  Australia,  and  appear  to  have  spread  into  Victoria  by 
a  more  southerly  route  than  .S".  vestitiix. 

S.  dilaticollis  Macl.  occurs  about  Mellxtnrne,  and  .S'.  biibolus 
extends  from  South  Australia  to  Tasnuinia.  These  two  species  are 
representatives  of  a  fourth  group  of  tlie  genus,  which  is  now 
Biore  characteristic  of  New  South  Wales  than  of  South  Australia. 

.S'.  Riverinae  Macl.,  an  aberrant  species,  is  widespread  north  of 
the  Dividing  Range  and  extends  into  New  South  Wales. 

Opetiopteryx. — This  genus  was  described  fiom  a  single  specimen 
- — 0.  fii(/i(Ja  Blackb. — taken  on  one  of  the  higher  mountains  in 
the  Victorian  A.lps.  The  genus  is  unknoAvn  to  me,  but  is  probalily 
allied  to  Sclerorinus. 

AcANTHOLOPiirs. — The  Victorian  species  of  this  genus  arc  more 
■characteristic  of  the  eastern  forms  than  of  the  western.  So  far 
comparatively  few  species  have  been  recorded  from  Victoria  ;  doul)t- 
less  more  remain  to  be  discovered. 

Ac.  spiriif/er  Macl.  has  a  wide  range,  extending  into  New  South 
Wales.  Of  its  Victorian  range  I  am  uncertain,  most  specimens  I 
have  seen  were  labelled  Victoria.  I  believe  it  occurs  in  the  vicinity 
of  Melbourne. 

Ac.  appro.rimatus  is  widely  distiibuted.  1  have  or  have  seen 
specimens  from  Bullarook.  Araiat,  Dandenong  Ranges,  Gippsland 
and  the  Grampians.  It  is  allied  to  Ac.  Addnidat  of  South  Aus- 
tralia. 

Ac.  Di.voni,  n.sp.,  and  Ac.  auf/ust icoJlis,  n.sp.,  both  herein 
described,  occur  at  Portland. They  probably  l»oth  belong  to  the  same 
group. 


2o8  Eustace   W.  Ferguson  : 

Ac.  squamo.^us  Macl.  occiu's  in  the  mountains  to  the  north-east 
of  Melbourne.  My  specimens  are  from  Narl)ethong,  I  have  seen  it 
also  from  Warragul. 

Ac.  siildobafus  Macl.  was  founded  on  a  <?  of  Ac.  nquamos^ts  and 
a   ?    of  Ac.  approximatus. 

Ac.  denticollis  Macl.,  or  its  variety  scrraticollis.  occurs  in  Vic- 
toria; I  have  seen  specimens  from  Benalla. 

An  undescribed  Acantliolop/tus  is  also  in  my  collection  from  the 
Victorian  Alps. 

Ac.  brericor/n's.  hei-ein  described,  is  a  geographical  race  of 
Ac.  dumosiix  Bohem..  wliich  occurs  at  King  George  Sound  in  West 
Australia.      Ac.  hrevicornin  is  from  Portland. 

CuBicoRRHYNCHUs. — This  genus  is  widespread  throughout  Aus- 
tralia; it  is  a  lover  of  the  slopes  and  plains,  and  is  rare  in  the 
mountain  districts.  The  genus  is  still  in  a  considerable  degree  of 
confusion,  and  probably  Victoria  will  ])e  found  to  possess  more 
species  than  are  here  noted. 

C.  inaculatut^  Macl.  This  species  is  widely  distributed  over 
eastern  Australia  west  of  the  Dividing  Range,  and  is  common  in- 
land in  Victoria.  G.  hrevipes  Lea,  described  as  a  variety  of  C. 
nutculatus  appears  also  to  be  common  in  Victoria. 

G .  glohicollis  Lea  occurs  at  Melbourne  and  probably  elsewhere  in 
the  State.     I  have  a  specimen  from  Albury  in  New  South  Wales. 

G.  sterilis  Pasc,  described  from  Victoria,  I  have  never  identified. 

Of  the  Euomid  genera  Victoria  has  five  representatives. 

Tetralophus. — Three  species  at  least  occur  in  Victoria.  T. 
gcnlptnrafiis  Waterhouse  I  have  seen  from  Portland  and  Mel- 
boui-ne. 

T.  rncamin  Pasc.  described  from  Victoria,  is  unknown  to  me. 
The  third  species  is  represented  by  a  single  specimen  in  my  col- 
lection from  Portland,  it  is  undescribed.  T.  elevatus  Pasc.  prob- 
ably also  occurs  in  Victoria. 

DiALEPTOpus  lias  one  representative — 1).  ferreus,  described  by 
Pascoe  from  Victoria;  I  have  not  seen  a  Victoi'ian  specimen.  The 
genus  is  common  in  South  Australia. 

Mythites. — Three  Victorian  species  have  been  described.  Of 
these  M.  tttherculntux  Lea  appears  to  be  widespread;  M.  por- 
opteroules  Lea  is  from  Geelong;  while  .1/.  rirnnulntns  Lea  is,  I 
l)elieve,  found  near  Melbourne.  BiihariR  pifhecius,  a  New  South 
Wales  species,   also  nrcurs   in   Victoria. 

Sos>/fclti.<  nn/icolli.'i  Lea  is  another  New  Soutli  Wales  species 
which  occurs  in  Victoria.      1   liave  no  precise  lecords  of  the  locali- 


Notes  on  Amycterides.  239 

ties  where  the  Victniiiui  spec-imeiis  of  the  last  two  spe<-ies  were 
taken 

In  addition  to  tlie  jibove  list  two  others — Aca/if/io/ophtis  con- 
vexiicsculus  and  AmorphorrJiinus  australis — probably  also  occu*, 
I  believe  I  liave  seen  Victorian  specimens,  but  cannot  now  ti-ace  the 
record. 

Viewing  tlie  problem  broadly,  it  appears  to  me  probable  that  the 
Amycterid  fauna  of  Victoria  has  developed  as  the  result  of  emigra- 
tion from  more  than  one  zoocentre.  The  genus  Psalidura  has  prob- 
ably spread  into  Victoria  from  the  north-east.  Probably  the 
granulate  forms  first  emigrated  and  by  their  isolation  in  different 
mountain  ranges  have  now  evolved  the  various  speciesi  of  the  mira- 
bunda-group.  The  costate  forms,  represented  by  P.  opprox/'mata^ 
have  only  reached  the  north-east  corner,  while  no  representatives 
of  the  tuberculate  forms  have  yet  been  recorded.  The  tuberculate 
and  costate  sections  of  the  genus  Talaurimis  appear  to  have  fol- 
lowed similar  lines;  in  the  case  of  the  costate  forms  they  have  not 
yet  reached  into  South  Australia,  though  the  tuberculate  forms 
have  proceeded  as  far  as  the  south-west  of  West  Australia,  where 
they  have  evolved  a  secondary  zoocentre. 

A  second  line  of  invasion  appears  to  have  been  from  the  west, 
and  there  is  some  evidence  to  show  that  two  routes  have  been 
followed.  The  fauna  of  the  Mallee  country  is  typically  South  Aus- 
tralian, and  such  forms  as  Sclerorinus  dixoni  and  Sclerorinus 
vestituti  are  characteristic.  The  fauna  of  the  south-west  contains 
equally  typically  South  Australian  forms,  but  of  a  different  type, 
and  is  exemplified  by  such  forms  as  Sclerorinus  frisfis,  Sclerorinus 
miicronijjemiis  and  Talaurinus  simplicipes.  I  have  written  the 
above  with  some  hesitation,  as  though  familiar  with  the  Amycterid 
fauna  of  the  Mallee  country  and  of  Portland  in  the  south-west,  I 
have  seen  few  species  from  the  mid-western  parts  of  Victoria. 

The  species  of  Cubicorrhi/uchus  and  to  a  less  extent  of  Acantho- 
lophus  are  so  widespread  that  it  is  difficult  now  to  trace  their 
emigrations.  Probably  they  are  representatives  of  a  branch  split 
off  before  the  evolution  and  different ation  of  the  genera  of  the 
Psalidura-Talauriuus-Sclerorinus  complex.  Too  little  has  been 
done  in  regard  to  the  distribution  of  the  Euomid  genera  to  enable 
one  to  form  an  accurate  conception  of  their  mode  of  spread;  prob- 
ably, however,  most  of  the  Victorian  forms  came  from  the  west. 

Many  points  of  interest  in  tlie  distribution  of  these  insects 
suggest   themselves    as   worthy   of    further   study,    but   too    little    is 


240  Eustace   W.  Ferguson  : 

known  at  present  of  local  faunas  to  enable  any  Init  very  broad 
lines  to  be  indicated.  The  correlation  of  distribution  Avitli  physio- 
graphic features  and  geological  changes  also  requires  investigation. 
Much  interesting  is  also  the  question  of  the  invasion  of  Tasmania 
l>y  these  insects,  but  that  cannot  be  touched  on  heie. 

I  have  purposely  dealt  solely  with  the  Aniycterides  in  this  discus- 
sion, but  it  is  possible  that  other  groups  will  be  found  to  have 
followed  similar  lines  of  distribution. 

In  the  case  of  wing  insects  the  factors  governing  distribution 
iiVQ  so  different  that  the  result  is  likely  to  be  quite  different.  The 
Amycterides,  however,  are  typically  wingless  ground  forms,  which 
have  travelled  a  long  Avay  in  a  very  long  time.  Possibly  a  close 
study  of  their  distribution  may  enable  some  light  to  be  thrown  on 
the  geological  history  of  our  country. 

B. — ])excn ptioiis   of   new   species,    irifJi    some    notes    on    previously 
described  forms. 

PSALIDURA    VESTITA,    U.  sp. 

$  Elongate,  elliptical-ovate;  size  large.  Black;  rather  densely 
clothed  with  dingy  yellow  subsquamose  pubescence;  clothing  more 
or  less  uniform  above,  except  on  prothoracic  granules  and  elytral 
interstices;  below  clothing  present  on  sternal  segments,  on  the  first 
abdominal,  at  sides  of  the  second,  and  at  bases  of  the  other  ventral 
segments;  legs  more  or  less  clothed.      Setae  rather  light  brown. 

Head  and  rostrum  as  in  P.  Masfersi.  Prothorax  (6.5  x  7  mm.) 
very  similar  to  P.  Masfersi,  slightly  more  elongate;  granules,  if 
anything,  slightly  smaller.  Elytra  (14  x  S  mm.)  in  shape  similar 
to  P.  Mastersi;  the  foveae  regular,  somewhat  obscured  by  the  cloth- 
ing, the  intervening  ridges  fairly  regular,  in  the  more  lateral  striae, 
each  ridge  with  a  definite  setigerous  gianule  in  the  middle;  inter- 
stices subcostiform,  Avith  obsolete  granules,  these  becoming  more 
definite  on  the  more  laterally  placed  interstices.  Beneath  as  in 
P.  Masfersi:  the  forceps  thin,  very  similar,  slightly  more  incurved 
to  apex. 

$  Larger  and  more  robust;  the  protlioracic  granules  rather 
■coarser;  elytral  foveae  less  definite,  the  intervening  ridges  setigero- 
granulate  in  all  the  striae.  Beneath  convex,  without  anal  excava- 
tion or  forceps. 

Dimensions. —  J"  23  x  8  mm.  ;    ?  25  x  !).5  nun. 

Except  for  the  clothing,  there  is  nothing  to  distinguish  the  present 
species  from  /'.  Mastersi.     The  clothing  is,  however,  quite  distinc- 


Notes  on  Amycteridcs.  241. 

tive  ami  appears  to  l>e  constant.  The  contrast  between  the  rather 
nitid  F.  Masters/,  with  hardly  a  vestige  of  clothing,  and  this  dull, 
densely  clothed  species  is  too  great  to  allow  me  considering  them  as 
otherwise  than  specifically  distinct. 

The  type  ^  is  from  Richmond  Downs,  Queensland,  and  is  in  the 
collection  of  the  Queensland  Museum;  the  type  $  in  my  own  col- 
lection, and  a  second  $  in  the  National  Museum,  Melbourne,  came 
from  Mr.  ('.  French,  and  are  labelled  Queensland,  without  a  definite 
locality. 

PSALIDURA    LKAI,    n.   Sp. 

^Elongate,  subparallel.  Black,  legs  diluted  with  reddish; 
clothing  absent;  setae  black,  decumbent. 

Head  strongly  convex,  partially  concealed  by  prothorax,  mode- 
rately closely  setigero-punctate.  Rostrum  vei'y  short,  wide;  internal 
ridges  prominent,  somewhat  convergent,  separated  at  base  by  a 
distinct  median  notch;  median  area  strongly  depres.sed  in  front; 
sublateral  and  basal  sulci  continuous,  rather  deeply  impressed. 
Submentum  with  median  tooth,  forwardly  directed.  Prothorax 
(6x6  mm.)  evenly  rounded  on  sides,  median  lobe  produced  over 
head  to  some  extent ;  subapical  construction  faint  but  traceable  -^ 
disc  somewhat  flattened,  with  median  line  feebly  impressed;  closely 
set  with  small,  rounded,  contiguous,  setigerous  granules,  these  some- 
what smaller  towards  centre.  Elytra  (13  x  8  mm.)  evenly  rounded 
from  behind  base  to  apex,  apex  abruptly  rounded,  mucronate  at 
suture;  humeral  angles  thickened,  out-turned.  Disc  foveo-striate ; 
striae  moderately  deep;  foveae  small,  punctiform,  slightly  trans- 
verse, and  ill-defined,  ridges  between  foveae  little  raised,  each  with 
a  fine  setigerous  granule;  interstices  moderately  prominent,  the 
third  and  fifth  slightly  more  so,  set  Avith  small  depressed  umbilicate 
setigerous  granules,  in  double,  frequently  in  triple,  series,  on  the 
fourth  and  sixth  in  single  series,  duplicated  in  the  middle.  Meta- 
sternum  transversely  concave,  more  deeply  depressed  in  middle 
along  intercoxal  process;  at  sides  on  a  level  with  middle  coxae. 
Fifth  segment  strongly  excavate,  anterior  wall  of  excavation  almost 
vertical;  excavation  reaching  to  anterior  margin  of  segment  in  the 
middle;  preanal  fossa  deeply  set,  slightly  transverse.  Fascicles 
moderately  large,  separated  about  1.5  mm.  Forceps  longer  than 
in  P.  citltrata,  projecting  beyond  apex  of  elytra  when  not  ex- 
tended, broad  at  base,  gradually  narrowing  beyond  insertion  of 
laminae;  apex  somewhat  obtusely  pointed;  with  a  ridge  or  setose 
hair  down  centre  of  inner  surface.     Laminae  inserted  behind  setose 


242  Eustace   W.  Ferguson  : 

ridge,  very  long,  parallel-sided,  apices  broadly  rounded;  slightly 
•curved  inwards.  Dimensions:  <?  20  x  8  mm.  Hah. — Victoria] 
Type  in  A.  M.  Lea's  collection. 

Close  to  F.  cultrata  but  distinguished  by  its  longer  forceps;  there 
are  also  differences  in  the  elytral  sculpture.  In  P.  cultrata  the 
length  of  the  forceps  beyond  the  insertion  of  the  laminae  is  1.5  mm., 
in  P.  Leai  2.5  mm.  In  the  type  the  genitalia  are  partly  extruded 
and  in  c(jnsequence  the  laminae  overlap,  in  another  specimen  the 
genitalia  are  at  rest  and  the  apices  of  the  forceps  mei'ely  touch.  In 
my  table  this  species  would  fall  beside  P.  Sloanei,  but  the  absence 
of  clothing  together  with  shape  of  the  forceps,  not  twisted,  will 
separate  it. 

Talaurinus. 

Through  the  kindness  of  Mr.  K.  G.  Blair  of  the  British  Museum, 
who,  at  my  request,  made  an  examination  of  Bohemann's  types  in 
the  Hope  Collection,  I  am  now  able  to  clear  up  the  question  of  the 
identity  of  the  species  comprised  in  the  semispifiosus-gvonp.  The 
species  constituting  that  group  are  all  very  closely  allied  and  also 
very  variable,  so  that  it  is  difficult  to  find  reliable  features  for 
separating  the  species.  It  is  quite  possible  that  some  of  these 
species,  here  regarded  as  distinct,  are  not  really  so;  but  I  think  it 
iidvisable  to  attach  names  to  the  most  distinctive  types,  although  in 
some  cases  there  may  be  intermediate  forms  tending  to  link  them 
up.  The  puncturation  of  the  external  rostral  ridges  and  of  tlie 
liead,  I  have  found  of  some  importance.  The  clothing  is  on  the 
whole  fairly  constant.  The  tuberculation,  both  of  the  prothorai 
and  elytra,  though  to  a  certain  extent  variable,  can  also  be  made 
use  of. 

Talauriniis  Roei  Bohem.  This  is  not  the  species  redescribed  by 
me,  but  is  identical  with  T.  funereus  Pascoe.  It  differs  from  all 
others  of  the  group  in  the  much  more  closely  and  rugosely  punctate 
head  and  external  rostral  ridges,  the  latter  being  distinctly  con- 
vergent posteriorly.  The  head  and  rostrum,  as  viewed  in  profile, 
are  not  in  the  same  plane  above ;  the  prothorax  is  closely  and  firtely 
granulate;  the  elytra  have  the  tubercles  more  acute,  and  more 
spinelike,  than  in  any  other  of  the  group.  Of  this  species  I  have 
an  extensive  series  taken  by  Mr.  H.  J.  Carter  at  Gingin,  Western 
Australia,  and  it  is  not  too  much  to  say  that  no  two  specimens  are 
•alike.  The  chief  variation  is  in  the  number  of  the  elytral  tul^ercles ; 
the  head  and  rostrum  and  the  prothorax  are  constant  in  their 
•sculpture. 


Notes  on  Amycterides.  243 

Tnlauriniia  semisp'niosus  Bohem.  ;  T.  past  ilia  >•/' as  Bohem.  ;  2\ 
pustidatun  Pasc.  From  Mr.  Blaii-'s  notes  these  names  apjjeai"  to 
belong  to  but  one  species.  It  is  peihaps  the  connnonest  species  in 
Western  Australia,  and  is  veiy  variable.  The  type  of  T .  pasfillariu.'i 
was  not  examined,  this  should  be  in  the  Stockholm  Museum;  Init 
specimens  so  labelled  in  the  Hope  Coll.,  were  considered  by  Mr. 
Blair  to  be  conspecific  with  7\  setnisj^inosiis.  The  puncturation  of 
the  rostral  ridges  is  fairly  close,  but  not  as  in  T.  Roei.  The  pro- 
thorax  is  fairly  closely  granulate,  but  is  variable  in  this  respect, 
the  median  granules,  or  tubercles,  in  some  specimens  being  more 
spaced  out  and  slightly  transverse.  The  elytral  tubercles  are  vari- 
a,ble  in  number,  and  also  in  size,  particularly  on  the  more  lateral 
interstices;  as  a  rule  they  are  of  moderate  size,  and  the  apical  and 
lateral  ones  subconical. 

T .  simulator  Pasc.  Compared  with  the  last  species  T .  simulator 
has  the  tubercles  rounded,  shiny,  and  more  .numerous  on  the  fourth 
and  fifth  interstices.  Specimens  identified  for  me  by  Mr.  Blair 
have  the  head  and  rostral  ridges  almost  impunctate,  only  a  few 
obsolete  punctures  being  traceable.  My  specimens  came  from 
Kellerberrin,  Western  Australia.  Other  specimens  from  Eucla  and 
Eyre's  Sandpatch  are  smaller  and  possibly  distinct. 

Talaurinus  echinops  Pasc.  Though  described  as  a  Sclerorinus, 
this  species  is  certainly  congeneric  with  T.  semis2)inosus.  It  is  a 
more  densely  clothed  species,  with  more  numerous  tubercles.  The 
head  and  rostral  puncturation  is  much  as  in  T.  semispinosus,  and 
the  prothoracic  granules  are  small  and  closely  placed.  In  general 
appearance  it  is  not  unlike  T.  Roei,  but  the  head  and  rostrum  are 
in  the  same  plane  above,  the  rostral  punctures  are  different,  and 
the  elytral  tubeixles  are  stouter. 

T .  validus,  n.sp.  This  species  may  be  distinguished  by  its  strong 
elytral  tubercles,  much  larger  than  in  T .  semispinosus.  The  punc- 
tures of  the  head  and  rostrum  are  obsolescent.  The  prothoiacic 
tubercles  are  large  and  widely  separated. 

Talaurinus  Leai,  n.sp.  Close  to  the  last  species  and  with  simi- 
lar strong  elytral  tubercles,  it  differs  in  the  more  closely  punctate 
head  and  rostrum,  and  in  the  smaller,  much  more  closely  placed 
protTioracic  tubercles. 

Talaurinus  Westwoodi  Bohem.  The  type  of  this  species  was 
also  examined  by  Mr.  Blair,  and  it  proves  to  be  synonymous  with 
T.  hucephalus  Olivier. 

Talaurinus  excavatus  Bohem.  Mr.  Blair  has  kindly  sent  out 
specimens  compared  with  the  type  in  the  Hope  collection.     It  is  the 


244  Eustace   W.  Fergvmn  : 

speeies  I  have  re-described  as  T.  ruyifer  Boisd.      I  have  now  little 
doubt  that  tliis  synonymy  is  correct. 


SCI.KUORRHINELI.A. 

S.  Mangiest  Bohem.  Mr.  Blair  has  examined  the  type,  and  has 
determined  my  specimen  as  correctly  named. 

-s'.  /nelaiiopsis  Pasc.  A  specimen  compared  with  the  type  of  T. 
itielanopsifi,  has  l)een  sent  out  for  examination.  It  is  certainly  a 
SclerorrhintUa  and  distinct  from  S.  Manglesi.  The  sjDecies  may  be 
recognised  by  its  strong  closely  set  elytral  tubercles,  and  by  its  lack 
of  clothing.     The  specimen  sent  is  a  male,  and  measures  14x6  mm. 

TaLAURINUS    GRANtJLATUS,    U.  Sp. 

c?  Ovate,  general  facies  that  of  T.  Riverinae.  Black;  densely 
clothed  above  witli  brown  subpubescence ;  head  and  prothorax  trivit- 
tate.  elytra  irregularly  maculate  with  white,  the  wliite  clothing 
predominating  on  sides;  ventral  segments  feebly  maculate  wnfh 
yellowish  setae  in  centre  and  with  white  laterally;  legs  mottled 
white.  Setae  dark  brown.  Head  and  rostrum  as  in  T.  Riverinae . 
Prothorax  ("j.r)  x  4.5  mm.)  rotundate ;  with  deep  post  ocular 
emargination  and  prominent  ocular  lobes;  closely  set  with  small, 
but  prominent,  rounded,  umbilicate,  setigerous  granules,  partially 
concealed  by  clothing,  and  larger  than  in  T .  Riverinae.  Elytra 
(9x7  mm.)  rather  widely  ampliate,  strongly  declivoiis  posteriorly; 
apex  subtruncate ;  base  gently  arcuate,  the  humeri  marked  by  a 
small  granule,  not  prominent.  Disc  puncto-striate,  the  punctures 
shallow,  indefinite,  intervening  ridges  low,  each  with  a  smalt 
setigerous  granule;  interstices  closely  granulate  thi-oughout  in 
single  series,  the  granules  prominent,  umbilicate,  partially  obscured 
by  clothing,  larger  than  in  T .  Riverinae.  Undersurface  as  in  T. 
Riverinae. 

$  More  elongate-ovate ;  the  undersurface  eonvex,  fifth  segment 
with  u  slight  transverse  impression  near  middle,  not  excavate. 

Dimenxiom. —  c?  I'i  x  7  mm.  ;  o+     W  \  G  nun.   , 

Hah. — Purnong  R.,  Muiray  River,  South  Australia  (S.  W. 
Fulton).  Type  in  National  Museum,  Melbourne.  Close  to  T. 
Riverinae,  l)ut  with  the  granules  both  on  prothorax  and  elytra 
evidently  larger  than  in  that  species. 


Not  en  on  Ainijcterides.  2  I-. 


TALAl'HINr 


^  Small,  eloiiji-atf-dvati',  in  <,a'iic'ral  t'arifs  ]ik<'  T.  //uiciili/jen/iis. 
Black,  densely  clothed  with  greyish  subpuhescence,  prothorax  trivit- 
tate,  elytra  maculate  with  lighter  grey.      Setae  bright  yellow. 

Head  and  rostrum  niucii  as  in  7'.  niaciili pciiiiiK :  antennal  scape 
long.  Prothorax  (3  x  4  mm.)  rounded  on  sides,  apical  margin 
feebly  rounded  above,  with  moderately  definite  post  ocular  emargina- 
tion  ;  subapical  construction  moderately  well  marked;  closely  set 
with  small,  rounded,  setigerous  granules,  sides  also  granulate. 
Elytra  (7x5  mm.)  elongate,  at  base  not  quite  so  wide  as  prothorax, 
gradually  widening  backwards;  base  generally  arcuate;  humeri  not 
produced.  Disc  with  series  of  small  shallow  foveiform  punctiires, 
the  intervening  ridges  setigerous,  not  definitely  granulate;  inter- 
stices with  small  obscure  setigerous  granides  in  single  series;  sides 
Avith  granules  obsolete.  Intermediate  ventral  segments  rather  long; 
apical  segment  with  a  broad  shallow  depression  in  middle,  running 
into  a  deeper  transverse  sulcus,  depression  bounded  on  either  side 
by  a  strongly  raised  somewhat  obliquely  set  ridge  or  tubercle. 
Tibiae  simple,  without  subapical  emargination.  Dimensions: 
$  12.5  X  5  mm. 

Kah. — South  Australia,  Warburton  Ranges  (Hacker);  Ouldea 
(South  Australian  Museum).     Type  in  A.  M.  Lea's  collection. 

In  general  appearance  remarkably  close  to  T .  maculipennis,  but 
readily  distinguished  by  the  simple  tibiae.  T.  simplicipes  is  a 
shorter  insect  with  different  rostral  sculpture,  shorter  and  stouter 
antennal  scape  and  different  apical  excavation.  T.  Howitti  also 
differs  in  the  structure  of  the  excavation.  T.  flaveolus,  inter  alia, 
has  very  different  clothing  and  an  almost  obliterated  elytral  sculp- 
ture. This  species  Avas  amongst  the  Amycterides  in  the  South 
Australian  Museum,  but  was  not  described  as  new  until  it  could 
be  compared  with  T .  corhonarius ;  Mr.  Blair  of  the  British  Museum 
his  since  infoi'med  me  that  it  is  not  that  species. 

Tai.aurinus  pkrplexus,   n.  sp. 

(?  Size  moderately  large,  elongate-ovate.  Black;  densely  clothed 
with  obscure,  mingled  brownish  and  golden,  subpubescence;  feebly 
trivittate  with  light  grey  on  prothorax,  vittate  along  disc  of  elytra, 
internal  to  fifth  interstice;  ventral  segments  maculate  in  middle 
with  yellow,  forming  an  almost  continuous  vitta.  Setae  dark,  red- 
dish brown. 


246  Eustace   W.  Feigiisou  : 

Head  contimious  in  pi-otile  with  the  rosti-um ;  forehead  feebly 
flattened.  Itostrnni  moderately  deeply  exeavute;  external  ridges 
subparallel;  internal  I'idges  prominent,  long,  slightly  convergent, 
not  meeting;  median  area  moderately  deeply  depressed,  narrow, 
fiulciform;  sublateral  sulci  long,  moderately  deep.  Scrobes  open 
posteriorly.  Eyes  large,  ovate.  Antennal  scape  moderately  long. 
Prothorax  (3.75  x  4  mm.)  little  wider  than  long,  rather  feebly 
rounded  on  sides;  apical  margin  rounded  above,  with  moderately 
marked  postocular  emargination,  but  with  lobes  indefinite;  trans- 
verse subapical  impression  well  marked,  median  impression  feeble, 
more  marked  posteriorly.  Disc  rather  closely  set  with  small  round 
granules,  smallest  about  centre,  larger  along  subapical  impression ; 
sides  also  granulate.  Elytra  (11  x  6  mm.)  elongate,  at  base  as 
wide  as  prothorax,  gently  widened  from  base  backwards;  ]>ase 
gently  emarginate,  humeri  very  slightly  produced.  Disc  with  punc- 
tures indefinable,  but  with  intrastrial  granules  distinct,  often  con- 
fused with  the  interstitial  tubercles;  interstices  with  small  tubercles, 
for  the  most  part  hardly  larger  than  granules;  second  with  about 
eight  isolated  ones,  small  at  base;  becoming  larger  posteriorly,  one 
or  two  being  on  declivity;  third  with  small  granuliform  tubercles, 
irregularly  arranged  in  double  series  from  base  to  middle,  thence 
in  single  series,  tubercles  not  reaching  to  apex;  fourth  with  one  or 
two  small  tubercles  about  middle;  fifth  with  tubercles  similar  to 
third  but  inconstant  in  arrangement,  basal  tubercles  generally  in 
double  series;  sixth  with  a  single  row  of  from  six  to  ten  small 
tubercles,  not  extending  to  base  or  apex.  Sides  with  interstitial 
granules  in  single  series.  Beneath  flat;  intermediate  segments 
long;  fifth  segment  with  a  feeble  subquadrate  impression,  with  a 
small  tubercle  on  either  side  near  apex,  partly  obscured  by  setae. 

^  Rather  more  ovate  than  $  ;  elytral  sculpture  similar,  but  even 
more  confused;  beneath  gently  convex,  fifth  segment  without  im- 
pression. 

Dimensions. —  ^  17  x  6  mm. ;    ?    17  x  6.5  mm. 

Hah. — Victoria,  Portland  (J.  E.  Dixon,  also  from  National 
Museum  and  British  Museum). 

Of  this  interesting  species,  I  have  recently  received  26  specimens, 
from  J.  E.  Dixon,  of  Melbourne.  Though  I  believe  it  to  belong  to 
the  tuberculate  section  of  the  genus,  the  tubercles  are  so  fine  as  to 
be  mere  granules.  It  is  most  nearly  allied  to  T.  a?igustus,  also  a 
Victorian  species,  and  the  elytra!  tubercles  are  fine  in  both  species, 
but  the  differences  in  arrangement,  and  especially  the  conspicuous 


Notes  on  Aniycf^ruhs.  2  1<7 

intrastrial  granules,  will  not  permit  nie  regardiiifx  tlieni  as  eon- 
specific.  I  have  described  the  clothing  from  a  spL-cimen  in  good 
preservation,  most  of  the  series  before  me,  howevei,  liave  a  more  or 
less  unifo]-m,  dingy  clothing.  The  elytral  sculpture  varies  con- 
siderably, particularly  in  regaid  to  the  degree  of  duplication  of 
the  tubercles  on  the  third  and  fifth  interstices.  On  the  fifth  the 
basal  tubercles,  for  perhaps  a  quarter  of  the  length  of  the  interstice, 
are  generally  arranged,  sometimes  in  single,  sometimes  in  double 
series,  in  a  slight  arc,  with  convexity  outwards;  the  succeeding 
tubercles  are  in  a  more  or  less  straight  line,  sometimes  in  single 
series  throughout,  sometimes  in  irregular  double  series,  for  another 
quarter  of  the  length  of  the  interstice ;  the  remaining  portion  is 
always  tuberculate  in  single  series. 
Type  in  author's  collection. 

Talaurinus  hystrix,  n.  sp. 

^  Size  moderately  lai'ge,  elongate,  suboblongate.  Black,  without 
clothing;  setae  black. 

Head  convex;  forehead  slightly  depressed  in  front,  the  depression 
bounded  on  either  side  by  a  short  ridge,  the  continuation  backAvards 
of  the  external  rostral  ridges.  Rostrum  short,  deeply  excavate; 
external  ridges  prominent;  moderately  closely  setigero-punctate ; 
internal  ridges  obsolete;  median  area  not  raised;  sublateral  sulci, 
short,  subtriangular,  foveiforni,  situated  at  extreme  base  of  rostrum 
and  connected  across  base.  Scrobes  open  belli nd,  reaching  almost 
to  eyes.  Eyes  subovate,  almost  rotundate.  Prothorax  (5x6  mm.) 
rather  strongly  dilate;  apical  border  with  moderately  prominent 
ocular  lobes.  Disc  strongly  convex  transversely;  subapical  con- 
struction barely  traceable;  without  median  impression,  but  with 
indefinite  sublateral  impressions ;  moderately  closely  set  with  rather 
strong,  rounded  tubercles,  smaller  in  immediate  centre,  and  also 
along  sublateral  impressions.  Sides  with  granules  obsolete.  Elytra 
(11  X  7  mm.)  not  greatly  widened  on  sides;  base  arcuate,  humeri 
marked  by  outwardly  projecting  tubercles.  Disc  without  evident 
punctures,  but  with  numerous  conspicuous  granules,  not  definitely 
traceable  into  series;  interstices  strongly  tuberculate,  tubercles  sub- 
conical  basally,  large  and  acutely  conical,  almost  spinose,  pos- 
teriorly and  laterally;  sutural  interstices  wdth  a  row  of  fine 
granules,  and  a  few  larger  confluent  ones  at  base;  second  with,  as 
a  rule,  from  two  to  four  (in  type-form),  about  middle;  third  with 
a  row  from  base  to  halfway  down  declivity,   varying   from  six  to 


248  Eustace  W.  F&^ 


^gu.i 


eleven  in  number ;  fourth  with  from  one  to  three,  anterior  to 
middle;  fifth  with  from  five  to  nine;  sixth  with  from  six  to  eight 
strong,  more  outwardly  directed,  tubercles.  Sides  Avith  tubercles 
subobsolete.  Apical  ventral  segment  with  a  median  excavation,  sub- 
divided into  two  deeper,  suboval,  longitudinal  depressions,  by  a 
somewhat  raised  median  ridge,  fringed  at  extreme  apex  with  dense 
hirsute  setae;  with  a  small  tubercle  on  each  side  of  the  excavation 
near  apex,  slightly  projecting  over  excavation.  Anterior  femora 
with  a  short  ridge  on  the  lower  surface. 

<?  In  appearance  and  sculpture  very  similar  to  male ;  slightly 
more  ovate;  beneath  convex,  fifth  segment  with  a  /\  shaped  impres- 
sion, enclosing  a  somewhat  raised,  rather  closely  punctured  area. 

Dimensions. —  <?   17.5  x  7;    ?   17  x  7  mm. 

Hah. — Victoria,  Portland  (J.  E.  Dixon). 

Of  this  fine  species  I  have  before  me  a  series  of  60  specimens,  all 
sent  by  Mr.  J.  E.  Dixon.  This  long  series  has  enabled  me  to  take 
into  consideration  questions  of  variation  in  size  and  tul^erculation. 
In  regard  to  size  there  is  not  an  extreme  range,  the  smallest  male 
measures  15  x  6  mm.,  and  the  largest  female  18  x  8  mm. 

I  have  given  the  general  range  of  the  number  of  tubercles  on  each 
interstice  in  the  description,  but  as  a  rule  the  highest  and  lowest 
numbers  are  exceptional.  In  regard  to  the  second  interstice,  occa- 
sionally five  tubercles  may  occur,  while  in  one  specimen  there  are 
none  on  that  interstice.  In  the  type  <?,  on  the  .second  interstice 
immediately  above  the  apex,  occurs  a  short  tubercle  or  spine;  this  is 
as  a  rule  absent,  being  present  in  only  12  out  of  60  specimens,  and 
in  6  of  these  it  occurs  on  one  side  only.  It  is  not  a  sexuail 
character,  though  the  tubercles  seem  to  occur  rather  oftener  in  the 
male. 

Of  previously  described  species,  the  present  one  is  most  closely 
allied  to  T.  tuherculaUis,  Macl.  The  apical  excavation  is  similar 
in  type  in  the  two  species;  in  T.  tuherculatus,  however,  it  is  wider, 
and  the  secondary  depressions  are  farther  apart,  and  not  so  deep. 
Apart  from  the  anal  excavation,  however,  T.  hystrix  differs  from 
T.  tuherculatus  in  its  relatively  short,  more  robust  form,  and  in  the 
complete  absence  of  the  variegate  clothing  so  characteristic  of  T. 
tuherculatus. 

Talaurinus  Leai    n.  .sp. 

<?  Large;  elongate,  subparallel.  Black,  without  clothing  above, 
a  narrow  line  of  silaceous  scales  on  each  side  of  median  line  and 
marginal  plate  of  rostrum.     Setae  black. 


Notefi  on  A  my  derides.  249 

Head  and  rostrum  continuous  aljove  in  profile;  foreliead  sli^ditly 
depressed  at  base  of  rostrum;  head  and  rostrum  moderately  closely 
punctate,  punctures  distinct,  rounded,  nowhere  confluent,  coarse)- 
and  rather  closer  together  on  lostrum.  Rostruin  excavate,  external 
ridges  subparallel;  median  area  not  raised,  but  with  a  narrow 
median  laevigata  line;  internal  ridges  ol)solete ;  latcro-l)asal  sulci 
subtriangular,  deep,  foveiform.  Prothorax  (5.5  x  7  mm.)  )-at]iei- 
strongly  ampliate,  widest  in  front  of  middle;  apical  maigin  with 
post-ocular  emargination  but  with  lol^es  indefinite  ;  subapical  con- 
striction indistinct.  Rather  closely  set  with  moderately  small  rounded 
granules,  slightly  larger  along  constriction,  and  very  feebly  trans- 
verse in  middle;  sides  granulate.  Elytra  (12  x  7  mm.)  subparallel; 
humeri  strongly  tuberculiform,  outwardly  projecting;  base  between 
humeri  gently  concave,  and  with  thickened  basal  border,  absent  in 
middle;  derm  granulate-punctate  between  the  tul)ei'cles,  no  definite 
arrangement  into  striae.  Tubercles  strong,  acutely  conical  pos- 
teriorly, less  prominent,  somewhat  elongate  on  the  second  and 
third  interstices  at  base;  second  with  six,  not  extending  down 
declivity;  third  with  eight,  at  intervals,  from  Ijase  to  apex,  the  last 
two  or  three  on  declivity  in  line  with  second  interstice;  fourth 
without  tubercles;  fifth  with  eight,  at  intervals,  from  base  down 
declivity;  sixth  with  six,  rather  closer  together,  strongly  conical 
and  outwardly  directed ;  lateral  interstices  nodulose.  Ventral  seg- 
ments flattened ;  basal  segments  finely  strigose,  suture  between  them 
depressed;  intermediate  segments  smooth,  rugosely  punctate  at 
sides,  less  so  in  middle;  apical  segment  rugosely  punctate,  with  a 
feeble  triangular  depression  at  apex,  slightly  deeper  along  posterior 
margin,  depression  with  short,  thick,  setose  hair.  Anterior  femora 
with  a  feeble  ridge  beneath. 

?  More  ovate;  convex  beneatli;  apical  ventral  segment  with  a 
short  transverse  impression  at  apex. 

Dimensions :   J"  20  x  7  mm.  ;    ?    18  x  7  mm. 

Hah. — West  Australia,  Swaii  River,  Darling  Ranges. 

Type  in  A.  M.  Lea's  collection. 

Closest  to  T .  semispinosvs  but  considerably  larger,  more  parallel, 
with  considerably  stronger  tuberculation  of  elytra.  The  prothoracic 
granules  are  about  the  same  size,  but  not  (piite  so  depressed,  and 
the  prothorax  is  notably  larger  and  more  transverse.  The  rostral 
punctures — a  fairly  constant  feature  in  this  group — are  similar. 


2')0  Eustace   ^Y.  Ferguson: 


Talaurinus  validus,  n.  sp. 

2  Large,  robust,  elongate-ovate.  Black,  dull;  practically  with- 
out clothing  above;  sides  of  elytra  maculate  with  white  in  depres- 
sions. 

Head  convex,  front  shallowly  concave,  in  middle  slightly  raised;, 
profile  of  head  continuous  with  that  of  rostrum.  Rostrum  short, 
excavate;  external  ridges  subj^arallel,  continued  on  to  head,  bordei-- 
ing  the  concavity;  median  area  sublaevigate,  not  raised;  internal 
ridges  obsolete;  lateraY  l>i\sal  suk-i  shor.t,  deep,  ti-iangularily 
foveiform,  not  meeting  across  base;  punctures  of  head  and  rostrum 
obsolescent.  Sci'obes  open  posteriorly.  Eyes  small,  subrotundate. 
Prothorax  (5.5  x  7  mm.)  widest  somewhat  in  front  of  middle;: 
apical  margin  with  moderately  deep  postocular  emarginatiou ;  sub- 
apical  impression  not  clearly  defined;  disc  convex,  set  with  large, 
isolated,  rounded  tubercles,  the  central  ones  very  slightly  transverse. 
Sides  with  tubercles  smaller.  Elytra  (14x9  mm.)  evenly  and  gently 
rounded  on  sides;  ajicx  moderately  strongly  lounded  ;  base  rather 
strongly  emarginate.  the  humeri  strongly  produced,  tulierculiform, 
the  basal  margin  thickened  on  each  side  of  suture  owing  to  the 
confluence  of  the  Ijasal  tubercles  of  the  second  and  third  interstices. 
Disc  of  elytra  granulose  between  the  tubercles,  punctures  not  defi- 
nitely traceable.  Suture  with  small  granules,  obsolete  posteriorly, 
becoming  larger  towards  base  and  merging  into  basal  border  on 
eithei-  side,  leaving  a  marked  depression  at  junction  of  suture  with 
base.  Othei-  interstices  strongly  tuberculate,  tulDercles  large,  sepa- 
rate, rounded  anteriorly,  becoming  conical  posteriorly  and  laterally;: 
second  with  five  from  base  to  edge  of  declivity;  third  with  nine, 
from  Ijase  practically  to  apex,  the  last  two  or  three  on  declivity, 
approximated  towards  middle,  so  as  to  be  almost  in  line  with  second 
interstice;  fourth  witli  one  on  basal  bordei-,  and  one  or  two  nearer 
middle  of  interstice;  fifth  with  strong  humeral  tubercle,  and  six 
strong  conical  tubercles,  extending  doAvn  declivity;  sixth  witli  seven 
strong  Lonival  tubercles,  outwardly  directed.  Sides  with  depres- 
sions more  defined  and  arranged  in  series,  the  interstices  nodulose. 
Beneath  convex ;  depressed  along  suture  between  first  and  second 
segments,  basal  seginents  minutely  transversely  strigose;  fifth 
segment  witli  shallow  transverse  impression  at  extreme  apex. 

/Jiit/r/isions. —  5    21x9  mm. 

Hah.  —  West  Austi'alia,  Esperance  Bay.  Swan   River. 

Type  in  A.    M.   Lea's  collection. 


2i(>t<'s  on  Amycterides.  251 

Allied  to  T.  !<e/iii.</)i/i()siis  Imt  witli  largei'  and  much  stronger 
tubercles,  particularly  on  the  protliorax  and  on  the  niore  lateral 
elytral  interstices.  It  is  possible  that  a  long  series  of  T.  semi- 
spi/wsiia  might  show. forms  linking  up  the  two  species,  but  even  in 
that  case  I  think  this  form  well  worthy  of  a  distinctive  name. 

'r.VLAlRINUS    CARINATIOR,    1).   sp. 

S  Large,  elongate-ovate.  Black;  rather  densely  clothed,  except 
on  costae,  Avith  minute,  muddy-grey  subpubescence,  hardly  squames; 
median  vential  vitta  dark  brown  ;  setae  black. 

Head  convex,  slightly  ridged  on  either  side  in  continuation  of 
the  external  rostral  ridges;  forehead  feebly  depressed  in  front. 
Kostrum  excavate;  external  ridges  somewhat  nodulose,  traversed  by 
two  slight  transverse  impressions,  and  separated  from  head  by  slight 
impression;  internal  ridges  less  prominent  than  external,  con- 
vergent, apices  not  quite  meeting;  median  area  depressed;  sub- 
lateral  sulci  narrow,  rather  shallow,  running  into  transverse  depres- 
sion at  base  of  rostrum.  Scrobes  ending  far  from  eyes.  Eyes 
ovate.  Protliorax  (5  x  5  mm.)  little  widened  on  sides;  apical 
margin  feebly  rounded  above,  with  slight  post-ocular  emargination. 
Disc  -with  an  ill-defined,  transverse,  subapical  constriction,  and 
rather  broad  median  area,  free  from  granules;  with  rounded 
granules,  moderately  large,  not  closely  set.  varying  in  size;  tending 
to  run  together  on  either  side  of  median  line ;  sides  granulate. 
Elytra  (14  x  8  mm.)  elongate-ovate,  widest  behind  middle,  apex 
rounded,  feebly  mucronate  at  suture;  base  gently  arcuate,  humeri 
thickened,  somewliat  out-turned.  Disc  with  three  broad  sulciform 
striae,  each  composed  of  a  double  series  of  foveae;  in  each  series 
foveae  small,  rather  shallow,  not  confluent  with  those  above  or 
below,  less  marked  off  from,  though  not  absolutely  confluent  with, 
those  of  the  adjacent  series.  Interstices  two,  four,  and  six  not 
raised;  three,  five  and  seven  strongly  raised,  costiform ;  sutural 
less  prominent  with  ;i  row  of  more  or  less  confluent  granules,  more 
strongly  costate  at  base;  third  vei-y  strongly  raised  and  costiform, 
narrow,  somewhat  crenulate;  fifth  almost  as  strongly  raised  as 
third;  seventh  showing  some  tendency  to  resolve  into  its  component 
granules.  Sides  foveo-striate  in  single  series;  interstices  with  sub- 
obsolete  granules.  Intermediate  ventral  segments  long;  fifth  with 
shalloAv  median  depression,  and  a  moie  strongly  depressed  pit  at 
extreme  apex.     Anterior  femora  simple.     Diincnxiojix  :    <^   22  x  8  mm. 

//r/';.-New  South  Wales,  Coramba  (W.   Heron  per  H.  J.  Carter). 

TvpL'   in    autlior's  collection. 


252  Eustace   W.  Ferguson  : 

Close  to  2\  itiveo-rittatus,  but  differing  in  the  colour  of  the 
clothing;  the  prothoracic  granule^  are  also  smaller  and  less  con- 
fluent, and  the  elytral  interstices  narrower,  more  raised  and  less 
crenulate. 

Talaurinus  posticalis,    n.  SJ). 

<?  Elongate,  narrow,  size  moderately  large.  Black,  with  muddy- 
grey  clothing  in  depressions,  giving  insect  a  dingy  appearance. 
Setae  few,  mostly  absent  from  elytra,  of  a  light  l)rownish  colour. 
Beneath  with  a  broad,  golden-brown,  liirsute  vitta,  extending  the 
length  of  abdomen. 

Head  and  rostrum  in  the  same  plane  above ;  forehead  feebly 
concave.  Rostrum  moderately  long,  deeply  excavate,  external  ridges 
with  a  light  sinuation  about  middle,  slightly  thickened  at  base; 
internal  ridges  short,  little  prominent,  convergent  but  not  meeting; 
median  area  deeply  depressed,  sulciform  posteriorly,  widening  out 
in  front;  sublateral  sulci  short,  not  very  dcej),  running  into  depres- 
sion at  base  of  rostrum,  behind  the  internal  ridges.  Scrobes  simple, 
ending  far  from  eyes.  Eyes  ovate.  Antennal  scape  moderately 
long,  rather  strongly  incrassate,  slightly  curved  backwards.  Pro- 
thorax  (4.5  X  4.5  mm.)  subcylindrical,  little  rounded  on  sides; 
apical  margin  lightly  sinuate  above,  more  deeply  at  sides;  sub- 
apical  imjiression  ill-defined,  irregidar;  disc  with  irregular  depres- 
sions and  nodulose,  irregular,  confluent  elevations,  and  more 
definitely  granule.?  laterally;  sides  witli  flattened  granules.  Elytra 
(11  X  7  mm.)  slightly  wider  at  l)ase  than  prothorax,  thence  evenly 
and  gently  rounded  on  sides;  base  lightly  emarginate,  hum<'ii 
marked  by  thickened  nodule.  Disc  with  three  broad  foveolate  sulci, 
foveae  extremely  irregular  and  ill-defined,  not  marked  off  from  each 
other  laterally,  but  separated  at  irregular  intervals  above  and  below 
by  irregular  thickened  ridges;  the  outer  sulcus  with  foveae  smaller. 
more  punctiform  but  still  ill-defined.  Interstices  two,  four  and  six 
quite  obsolete,  the  others  costiform;  first  not  elevated  except  at 
bottom  of  declivity,  where  it  is  raised  into  a  strong  rounded  ridge; 
third  interstice  very  prominent  and  costiform,  .soniewhat  flexuous 
in  outline,  extending  from  base  to  halfway  down  declivity;  fifth 
somewhat  less  elevated,  showing  a  slight  tendency  to  break  up  into 
its  component  granules,  extending  from  humeral  angle  to  edge  of 
declivity;  seventh  forming  lateral  boundary,  costiform,  less  \n-o- 
minent,  also  showing  tendency  to  break  up  into  granules.  Sides 
foveo-striate,  foveae  small,  punctiform;  interstices  slightly  elevated, 
hardly  costate,  and  not  definitely  granulate.      Beneath  with  ventral 


Notes  oil  Amycterides.  258 

segments  long;  Hfth  segment  with  a  median  depression,  ubseured  by 
vitta.      Anterior  femora  simple.      /Ji/iu/isions :    J    1!)  x  7  nun. 

J/ab. — New  South  Wales,  Corandja  (W.  Heron  per  H.  J.  Carter.) 
A  typical  member  of  the  costate  section,  I  know  of  no  other 
species  with  which  1  can  compare  it  except  T.  crenulatns.  From 
that  species  it  differs  in  its  much  larger  size,  and  different  clothing, 
inter  aim  itiulta.  In  general  appearance  it  is  not  unlike  a  species 
of  Mythites,  but  it  is  a  typical  Talaurinus. 
Type  in  author's  collection. 

SCLEKORINUS    DiXONI,     11.   sp. 

cT  Elongate,  large.  Black;  densely  clothed  with  golden  brown 
squamosa  subpubescence,  prothorax  feebly  trivittate  with  lighter, 
elytra  with  a  few  whitish  maculae;  median  ventral  vitta  dark 
golden-brown;  setae  dark. 

Head  and  rostrum  as  in  S.  sahulosus.  Prothorax  (7x8  mm.) 
widely  ampliate;  apical  margin  lightly  rounded  above,  with  rather 
•deep  post-ocular  emargination ;  subapical  impression  rather  well 
marked;  median  line  free  from  granules  but  not  deeply  impressed, 
disc  set  Avith  small,  more  or  less  round,  granules,  smaller  in  centre, 
somewhat  flattened,  and  variable  in  size  and  to  some  extent  in 
shape.  Sides  with  granules  becoming  progressively  smaller  towards 
coxae,  but  not  obsolete  except  posteriorly.  Elytra  (15  x  8  mm.) 
elongate,  very  little  widened  on  sides,  narrowed  to  apex  from  level 
of  declivity,  apex  rounded;  base  feebly  arcuate,  humeral  angles 
marked  by  a  small  tubercle;  seriate  punctures  small,  obscure,  each 
subtended  by  a  small,  but  definite,  setigerous  granule;  interstices 
tuberculate,  sutural  with  small  granules,  somewhat  larger  near 
base;  second  with  three  or  four  small  isolated  tubercles;  third  witli 
a  continuous  row  of  about  twenty-one  small  tul)ercles,  or  granules, 
feebly  subconical,  slightly  more  so  posteriorly,  closely  set.  and 
extending  from  base  almost  to  apex;  fourth  with  one  or  none; 
fifth  and  sixth  each  with  a  continuous  row  of  about  sixteen  similar 
to  third ;  lateral  interstices  with  small  tubercles,  not  at  all  pro- 
minent. Beneath  as  in  ,S'.  sahulosus.  Anterior  femora  ridged 
beneath. 

$  Shorter  and  more  ovate  tlian  tlie  S  ;  prothorax  slightly  less 
ampliate;  elytra  with  tubercles  more  numeious  and  rathei-  smaller, 
second  with  six,  third  with  a  continuous  low  as  in  the  $,  but  a 
number  of  the  middle  tubercles  duplicated,  fourth  with  five,  fifth 
with  twenty,  sixth  with  sixteen. 


254  Eustace  W.  Ferguson  : 

Dimensions. —  3    23  x  8  lum. ;    ?    22  x  9  mm. 

Hab. — Victoria,  Ouyen  (J.  Dixon,  Searce,  Mellor),  Kow  Plains. 

Of  this  species  I  Lave  seen  a  large  number  of  specimens  sent  to 
me  by  Mr.  J.  Dixon  and  by  the  National  Museum.  All  of  the  speci- 
mens agree  in  having  constantly  small  tubercles,  noticeably  smaller 
than  in  S.  sabulosus.  From  that  species  it  also  differs  in  the 
different  clothing  and  in  the  more  granulate  sides  of  the  prothorai. 
The  median  vitta  in  the  3  is  also  narrower  and  darker.  The 
differences  in  the  elytral  granulation  are  more  marked  between  the 
females  of  the  two  species,  than  in  the  case  of  the  opposite  sex. 

Type  in  author's  collection. 

SCLERORINUS    GOUDIEI,    n.   sp. 

3"  Close  to  S.  Di.voui  and  with  similar  clothing. 

Head,  rostrum  and  prothorax  as  in  .S'.  Diro/ii.  Elytra  (15  x 
8  mm.)  with  tubercles  notably  larger  than  in  S.  Dixoni  (also  larger 
than  in  .S'.  sahuloxus).  the  number  of  tubercles  on  the  interstices  2 
to  6  being  5,  21.  3,  17.  and  16,  on  the  left  side  of  the  type;  on  the 
third  interstice  tubercles  becoming  slightly  transverse,  the  posterior 
ones  conical.      Otherwise  as  in  S.  Dixoni. 

3  Differs  from  ?  in  usual  manner;  compared  with  female  of 
S.  Dixoni.  the  tubei'cles  are  noticeably  larger,  fewer  in  number  and 
not  duplicated  on  the  third  interstice,  and  with  none  on  the  fourtlu 

Dimensions. —  (?    23  x  8  mm.  ;    ?    22  x  9  mm. 

//fl7>.— Victoria,  Birchip  (J.  C.  Goudie). 

Type  in  author's  collection. 

Though  compared  with  S.  Dixoni,  I  regard  this  species  as  close  to 
S.  sahulosus.  It  differs  from  the  latter  in  the  larger  elytral 
tubercles  of  both  sexes,  as  well  as  in  the  clothing  and  sides  of  pro- 
thorax.  Three  specimens  from  the  National  Museum  labelled  Wes- 
tern District  should  perhaps  be  regarded  as  distinct.  They  differ 
in  the  elytral  tubercles  Ijeing  slightly  larger  and  fewer  in  number 
on  the  third,  fifth  and  sixth  interstices,  the  tubercles  are  also  rather 
more  conical.  The  tubercle  index  is.—  3  5.  15,  5,  13,  11;  ?  6,  17, 
4,  16,  13.  Their  dimensions  are.— <?  22  x  7.5  mm.  ;  ?  22  x  9  mm. 
At  present  I  think  it  l>6tter  to  consider  these  as  forms  of  S.  Qoudiei. 

SCLEROKINUS    INORNATUS,    n.   sp. 

cT  Elongate-ovate,  rather  small.  Black,  legs  diluted  with  red; 
above  moderately  densely  clothed  with  minute,  black  subpubescence,. 
and  with  long,  black  setae;  l)eneath  witli  scattci-ed.  black  setae. 


Notes  oil  Aniycterides.  25."> 

Head  gently  convex  above,  continuous  with  rostrum.  Kostruni 
little  excavate;  external  ridges  subparallel;  median  carina  distinct, 
continued  as  a  bare  line  up  forehead,  point  of  junction  marked  by 
a  round,  punctiform  fovea;  lateral-basal  sulci  triangular,  mode- 
rately deep.  Scrnbes  simple.  Eyes  ovate.  Prothorax  (4x4  mm.) 
little  rounded  on  sides;  apical  margin  slightly  sinuate  above,  with 
deep  post-ocular  emargination.  ocular  lobes  well  defined.  Disc  with 
moderately  distinct  subapical  constriction  and  rather  indistinct 
median  line;  almost  smooth,  except  for  some  nearly  obliterated 
longitudinal  setigerous  ridges;  sides  obsoletely  granulate  above. 
Elytra  (9  x  6)  gently  widened  on  sides ;  base  subtruncate,  humeral 
angles  subrectangular,  not  prominent;  disc  convex,  strial  punctures 
obsolete;  interstices  feebly  raised,  with  a  few  isolated,  almost 
obliterated,  tubercles,  on  third  interstice  extending  down  declivity; 
sixth  interstice  with  tubercles  smaller,  slightly  more  definite  and 
mucli  closei-  together.  Sides  with  seriate  punctures  more  evident, 
interstices  witli  almost  completely  obsolete  granules,  closely  set,  and 
indicated  mainly  by  the  setae.  Beneath  laevigate,  with  scattered 
setigerous  punctures.  Apical  segment  with  a  shallow^  rather  broad, 
median,  channel,  but  without  tubercles.  Anterior  tarsi  witli  three 
basal  segments  transverse,  the  second  and  third  spongiose  beneath 
except  along  median  sulcus;  intermediate  and  posterior  tarsi  with 
segments  more  elongate,  not  spongiose. 

?  Somewhat  larger,  more  ovate,  more  produced  at  apex,  the 
elytra  separately  acuminate;  sculpture  similar,  but  interstices  not 
raised,  and  tubercles  slightly  more  distinct.  Beneath  convex; 
apical  segment  with  a  narrow  median  impression,  not  quite  reach- 
ing anterior  margin,  deeper  posteriorly;  apical  margin  raised  and 
bisinuate  in  middle.      Anterior  tarsi  not  spongiose. 

Dimensions. —  <?    1")  x  6;    ?    16  x  7  mm. 

Hah. — Victoria,  Gippsland  (C.  French). 

Types  in  National  Museum,  Melbourne. 

Two  males  in  the  museum  collection,  from  Portland  and  Western 
Districts,  differ  in  the  lighter,  more  brownish,  clothing,  and  in  the 
less  obliterated  sculpture. 

The  species  is  undoubtedly  close  to  .S'.  obliteratus,  but.  if  I  am 
correct  in  associating  that  name  with  a  species  found  in  the  Vic- 
torian Alps,  the  present  species  is  readily  separated  by  the  apical 
ventral  segment  being  without  tubercles  in  the  male.  The  sculpture 
is  also  more  obliterated  in  S.  innrnafus,  compared  with  the  type 
5)    of  S.  ohlite.ratus. 


256  Eustace  W.  Ferguson  : 

ACANTHOLOPHUS    DiXONI,    11.   Sp. 

cT  Elongate,  suboblongate,  flattened  above;  size  moderately  small. 
Black.  Moderately  densely  covered  with  dark  grown  subsquamose 
clothing;  with  a  light  grey  median  vitta,  and  sqiiames  of  similar 
colour,  lightly  scattered  on  the  more  lateral  elytral  tubercles ;  with 
white  almost  silvery  squames,  forming  two  small  maculae  on  the 
sides  of  the  prothorax,  and  forming  a  moderately  distinct  vitta. 
with  a  few  macules  above  it  posterioi'ly,  on  the  sides  of  the  elytra; 
beneath  with  greyish  squames  lightly  sprinkled  over  metasternum. 
and  at  sides  of  ventral  segments;  legs  with  similar  squames,  and 
with  a  moderately  distinct  whitish  band,  about  one-third  from  the 
apex  of  the  femora. 

Rostrum  short,  the  upper  surface  feebly  concave,  almost  flat,  with 
a  median  fovea  or  pit;  lateral  margins  little  raised,  not  tubercu- 
late  or  angulate  in  front,  gently  convex  in  profile  and  continued 
back  to  supraocular  crests.  Head  with  a  single  crest  over  each 
eye,  strongly  curved  backwards  and  upwards,  the  apex  sharpliy 
pointed ;  the  crest  joined  at  base  across  head  by  a  strong  ridge, 
with  a  median  ridge  running  forward  from  it,  and  almost  immedi- 
ately liifmcating,  tlii>  limbs 'running  forwards  and  outwards  to 
join  the  lateral  rostral  margins  near  the  base,  and  enclosing  with 
them  a  deep  fossa  on  each  side.  Forehead  concave  behind  the  ridge 
joining  the  crests.  Scrobes  short;  a  deep  groove  running  up  from 
in  front  of  eye,  on  to  the  side  of  the  crest.  Pi'othorax  (3.5  x  4.5). 
slightly  emarginate  behind  eyes,  ocular  lobes  )atlier  feebly  deve- 
loped. Disc  with  a  strong  transveise  impression  behind  apex,  and 
a  similar  one  immediately  in  front  of  base;  with  median  and  lateral 
groups  of  tubercles  on  each  side;  with  median  area  longitudinally 
furrowed.  Median  tubercles  moderately  large,  about  six  on  each 
side,  the  apical  pair  larger,  more  elongate,  situated  in  fi-ont  of  sub- 
apical  impression,  the  other  tubercles  varying  in  size,  not  all  in 
line,  the  third  from  the  front  situated  further  out  than  the  others. 
Lateral  tubercles  large,  flattened  above,  obtusely  pointed,  out- 
wardly directed,  with  a  feeble  inclination  backwards;  consisting  of 
three  larger  and  a  few  smaller  tubercles ;  two  of  the  larger  tubercles 
situated  in  front  of  middle  and  conjoined  at  base,  the  hinder  of 
the  two  the  larger,  the  third  large  tubercle  situated  behind  middle, 
Bmaller  than  the  larger  of  the  two  anterior  tubercles;  a  small 
tubercle  situated  anterior  to  subapical  impression,  one  situated 
between  and  below  the  larger  tubercles,  and  two  situated  posteriorly. 
Sides  somewhat  rugosely  strigose.      Elytra  (8.5  x  5  mm.)  little  wider 


Notes  on  Am.ycterides.  257 

than  prothurax;  little  rounded  on  sides.  Disc  with  three  rows  of 
spinoee  tubercles,  the  intermediate  interstices  rather  coarsely" 
granulate,  suture  granulate,  the  granules  not  extending  down 
declivity;  first  row  with  eight  or  nine  tubercles,  the  basal  ones 
small,  rounded,  becoming  progressively  larger,  the  last  three  or  four 
spinose,  the  last  one  the  largest;  second  row  not  quite  reaching  to 
base,  running  obliquely  backwards  and  outwards,  about  seven  to 
eight  in  number,  the  tubercles  small  at  base,  becoming  progressively 
larger  and  more  spinose,  the  last  four  or  five  strong,  outwardly 
directed,  spines,  reaching  slightly  beyond  first  row;  third  row 
extending  from  shoulder  back,  with  a  slight  inclination  outwards, 
consisting  of  five  large,  outwardly  directed,  spines,  the  basal  two 
more  or  less  conjoined,  larger  than  the  others,  the  rest  sub- 
equal.  Sides  with  two  upper  interstices  granulate.  Beneath  rather 
closely,  somewhat  rugosely,  punctate,  the  basal  segments  trans- 
versely strigose.  Legs  simple;  tarsi  spongiose  beneath  except  along 
median  groove. 

$  Resembles  c? ,  but  is  much  larger ;  elytra  wider  than  prothorax ; 
spines  on  elytra  somewhat  smaller,  the  two  humeral  spines  almost 
completely  conjoined  to  form  an  oblique  humeral  crest ;  convex 
beneath,  basal  segments  more  lightly  strigose,  other  segments  hardly 
rugose. 

Dimensions. —  S  12  x  5  mm.;  ?  16  x  7  ;  P.  4.5  x  5.5;  E.  10  i 
7  mm. 

Hah. — Victoria,  Portland  (J.  E.  Dixon).      Type  in  Coll.  Ferguson. 

Described  from  2  (?  c?  and  11  ?  $.  In  the  type  3'  the  humeral 
tubercles  are  separate,  except  at  base,  in  the  other  <?  and  in  all  the 
females,  these  are  almost  completely  conjoined. 

In  appearance  a  very  ordinary  Acantholophus  the  present  species 
may  be  separated  from  most  by  the  simple  supraocular  crests.  Of 
the  described  species  with  simple  crests,  it  differs  from  all  except 
A.  gladiator  and  A.  aureolus,  in  having  the  intermediate  tibiae 
simple  and  not  notched  at  apex.  From  the  other  two,  it  is  bo 
utterly  different  that  no  comparison  is  necessary.  Apart  from  the 
simple  crests,  the  present  species  strongly  resembles  many  of  the 
Adelaidae-group. 

Acantholophus  brevicornis,  sub.  sp.  nov. 

(?  Moderately  large,  elongate,  suboblongate ;  very  close  to  Ac. 
dumosus.  Black;  sparsely  clothed  with  brownish  squames  above, 
sides  maculate  with  greyish. 


258  Eustace   W.  Ferguson  : 

Rostrum  gently  concave  above,  with  a  shalloAv  median  groove; 
lateral  margins  subangulate  in  front,  lowest  at  base;  basal  ridges 
— intercristal  and  oblique — moderately  distinct,  basal  foveae 
rather  shallow.  Supraocular  crests  simple,  very  short,  obtusely 
pointed,  projecting  at  right  angles  to  the  upper  surface  of  head, 
with  no  outward  or  backward  tendency.  Prothorax  (4  x  5  mm.) 
transverse;  disc  with  subapical  and  sub-basal  constrictions;  median 
tubercles  relatively  small,  anterior  pair  larger,  more  elongate,  sub- 
cristiform,  other  tubercles  not  arranged  in  single  line,  middle 
tubercles  smaller,  more  outwardly  placed,  penultimate  tubercles 
rather  larger,  somewhat  backwardly  projecting;  lateral  tubercles 
dentiform,  broad  at  base,  outwardly  projecting,  2  large  conjoined 
tubercles  anterior  to  middle,  one  posterior  to  middle,  also  a  small 
tubercle  anterior  to  subapical  constriction.  Elytra  (10  x  G  mm.) 
subparallel,  not  greatly  wider  than  prothorax.  With  three  rows  of 
tubercles,  the  other  interstices  moderately  coarsely  granulate  :  first 
row  with  nine  tubercles,  the  basal  ones  small,  rounded,  the  last 
four  spinose,  becoming  progressively  larger;  tubercles  ending  at 
edge  of  declivity,  two  or  three  small  spicules  present  on  declivity, 
the  last  subapical,  larger,  almost  spines  :  second  row  with  six 
tubercles,  the  basal  ones  small,  the  last  three  larger,  outwardly 
projecting,  and  extending  more  posteriorly  than  the  first  row  : 
third  row  Avith  five  or  six  from  shoulder  to  about  middle,  strong 
outwardly-directed  spines,  the  second  somewhat  larger  than  the 
rest,  the  others  subeqiial  or  decreasing  slightly  in  size.  Beneath 
■coarsely,  rugosely  punctate,  the  punctures  longitudinally  confluent. 
Middle  tibiae  with  strong  subapical  notch. 

?  Somewhat  more  ovate,  more  convex  beneath,  intermediate 
tibiae  simple. 

Dimensio7is. —  c?   16  x  6  mm.  ;    ?    16  x  7  mm. 

//a6. ^Victoria,  Portland  (J.  E.  Dixon). 

Described  from  a  series  of  9  specimens  sent  by  Mr.  J.  E.  Dixon  ; 
type  in  author's  collection.  Closely  allied  to  Ac.  dumosiis  Bohem.. 
of  which  I  regard  it  as  a  geographical  race  or  subspecies.  It 
'differs  from  specimens  of  Ac.  duniosus  from  King  George  Sound  in 
(a)  more  parallel  sided  form,  (b)  shorter  supraocular  crests,  (c) 
rather  larger  prothoracic  tubercles,  (d)  the  presence  of  subapical 
elytral  spicules.  These  latter  are  smaller  than  in  Ac.  apicalix.  from 
whi<h  species  it  also  differs  in  the  stronger  elytral  tubercles. 


Notes  on  Amyctcrides.  251) 

ACANTIIOLOPHUS    AN(UTS'I'ICOI,IJS,     II.   sp. 

<?  Elongate,  ovate;  size  inoderate.  Bhuk  ;  iiKKlerately  doiisely 
covered  with  brown  subsquamose  clothing,  the  larger  apical  and 
lateral  elytral  tubercles  with  lighter  greyish  clothing  on  the  upper 
surface;  abdominal  segments  with  a  few  gi-eyish  setae  at  sides; 
femora  wi_th  grey  subapical  patch  on  outer  surface,  forming  an 
incomplete  ring. 

Kostrum  somewhat  nairower  than  head,  rather  strongly  concave 
above,  Avith  a  moderately  deep,  narrow  median  impression  pos- 
teriorly; lateral  margins  strongly  angulate  in  front  of  middle, 
sloping  anteriorly  to  apex,  and  posteriorly  to  base  of  supra- 
ocular crests.  Crests  simple,  broad  antero-posteriorly,  the  upper 
edge  rounded  in  front,  feebly  notched  above,  and  produced  to  a 
small  degree  backwards  and  upwards,  the  apex  somewhat  obtusely 
pointed.  Intercristal  and  oblique  ridges  somewhat  prominent,  the 
basal  foveae  rather  deep.  Forehead  feebly  concave  in  front. 
.Scrobes  ending  far  from  eyes;  a  moderately  deep  groove  running 
from  in  front  of  eye,  on  to  side  of  crest,  as  far  as  notch  in  upper 
margin.  Prothorax  (3.5  x  4  mm.)  not » greatly  transvere,  apical 
margin  somewhat  feebly  emarginate  behind  eyes,  lobes  indefinite. 
Subapical  constriction  distinct,  sub-basal  less  so.  With  median 
and  lateral  groups  of  tubercles;  intervening  spaces  somewhat 
sparsely  granulate,  median  area  Avith  a  narrow^  impression,  deepest 
in  middle.  Tubercles  of  median  group  rather  small,  slightly  elon- 
gate, about  six  in  number,  with  three  oi'  four  smaller  ones  about 
middle,  more  outAvardly  placed;  anterior  pair  hardly  cristiforni, 
situated  in  front  of  subapical  constriction,  the  second  pair  bridging 
■over  the  constriction.  Lateral  tubercles  triangularly  dentiform, 
broad  at  base,  flattened  above,  outwardly  projecting;  a  conjoined 
pair  in  front  of  middle  and  a  single  one  posterior  to  middle;  also 
a  small  rounded  tubercle  anterior  to  constriction.  Ehi:ra  (10  x 
5.5  mm,)  gently  Avidened  posteriorly;  disc  with  three  rows  of 
tubercles,  the  other  interstices  rather  conspicuously  granlate.  Fii-st 
row  of  tubercles  about  ten  in  number,  the  basal  ones  small  rounded, 
the  last  three  becoming  progressively  larger  and  spinose;  second 
roAV  Avith  about  ten,  not  quite  reaching  l)ase,  running  backwards 
and  outAvards  and  reaching  beyond  level  of  first  row,  the  basal 
tubercles  small,  becoming  progressively  larger,  the  last  four  or  five 
spiniform,  outAvardty  directed,  the  apical  tAvo  slightly  smaller  than 
the  immediately  antecedent  ones,  and  all  smaller  than  the  apical 
tubercles  of  the  first  roAv;  third  roAv  Avith  f)-om  eight  to  ten,  largest 


2(iO  EuMace,    W.  Ferguwn  :    Notes  on  Aruycte rides. 

iilKnit  huiufral  anglo  (but  still  smaller  than  the  spines  of  the  other 
i-o\vs).  spinose,  l)ecoming  smaller  posteriorly  and  passing  into  mere 
granules.  Sides  with  the  upper  three  interstices  distinctly  granu- 
late. Beneath  subglabrous,  with  small,  setigerous  punctures;  fifth 
segment  more  strongly  convex  than  the  others.  Legs  simple,  tibiae 
not  notched,  tarsi  spongiose  beneath. 

2  Of  more  ovate  form;  with  elytral  tubercles  smaller,  those  of  the 
first  row  more  numerous,  and  the  anterior  ones  reduced  to  mere 
granules;  apical  ventral  segment  with  a  strongly  raised  rounded 
prominence,  highest  in  middle,  but  occupying  nearly  the  whole 
segment. 

Dimensions. —  <?  15  x  5.5  mm.  ;    2   16x7  nan. 

Specimens  of  this  species,  taken  by  Mr.  T.  G.  Sloane  at  Portland, 
Victoria,  in  1887.  have  been  long  in  my  collection,  and  lately  Mr. 
J.  E.  Dixon  has  forwarded  me  a  long  series  (48)  from  the  same 
locality.  Though  variable  to  a  slight  extent  in  size,  there  is  little 
other  difference  to  be  detected  in  the  series.  The  crest  over  the 
eye  at  first  sight  appears  single,  but  I  believe  it  is  really  composed 
of  two  conjoined  tubercles;  the  species  being  therefore  related  to  Ac. 
Adelaidae  and  Ac.  approximatxis. 

It  differs  from  all  of  this  group  in  the  relatively  narrower  pro- 
thorax,  and  in  the  more  numerous  and  more  closely  set  elytral 
tubercles. 

Type  in  author's  collection. 


[I'Roc.   K'oY.  S<H.   Victoria  27  (N.8.),   Pt.   II..  19U]. 

Art.  XVIII. — TJte  Petrology  of  the  Igneous   HocLs  near 
HeaUsville  and  Narhetli()t)g. 

By    NORMAN    R.    JUNNER,'  B.Sc. 
(Caroline  Kay  Scholar  in  Geology,  University  of  Melbourne,  1913). 


(With  Plate  I.). 

[Kead  12th  November,   l<>]-4 

1. 

Introduction  and  Physiography. 

2. 

Previous  Literature. 

3. 

Upper  Silurian  Sediments. 

4. 

Petrology. 

(a)    Granodiorites. 

(b)    Dacites. 

(c)    Andesites. 

(d)    Pyroclastics. 

(e)     Ehyolitea. 

(f)    Metasomatically  altered  Rocks. 

5.  i'ield  Relations  and  Origin  of  the  Eocks  : — 

(a)  Eelationship  of  the  Granodiorite  to  the  Sedi- 

mentary and  Volcanic  Rocks. 

(b)  Relationship   of   the   Volcanic   Rocks   to   one 

another. 

(c)  Origin  of  the  Rocks. 

6.  Conclusions. 

1. — Introduction  and   Physiography. 

The  area  described  in  this  paper  consists  chiefly  of  an  elevated 
series  of  ancient  volcanic  rocks,  probably  Devonian  in  age.  The 
relief  is  marked,  Mount  Donna  Buang  and  other  peaks  rising  to 
more  than  4000  feet  above  sea-level,  Avhilst  the  bed  of  the  Yarra  at 
Healesville  is  less  than  300  feet  above  the  same  datum.  The  Silurian 
sediments  on  the  north  side  of  the  Victorian  Main  Divide  which 
passes  through  this  area,  have  an  average  elevation  of  between  1000 
and  1200  feet,  but  they  rise  to  more  than'  2000  feet  above  sea  level 
in  places.  Within  the  area  described  the  divide  is  entirely  in 
volcanic  rocks.  The  northern  streams,  of  which  the  most  important 
is  the  Acheron  river,  flow  into  the  Goulburn  river,  whilst  the 
Bouthern  streams  all  drain  into  the  Yarra  river.  Waterfalls  are 
present  near  the  heads  of  most  of  the  streams.  They  are  principally 
determined  by  joint  planes  in  the  volcanic  rocks,  e.g.,  Stevenson's 
falls  and  the  Acheron  falls.     The  Mever's  creek  falls,  however,  are 


262  N.   R.  .fanner: 

of  a  different,  nature,  being  <letermine(l  by  a  mass  of  liurnfels  with 
softer  unindurated  sediments  upstream  and  downstream  from  the 
hornfels. 

The  rocks  are  usually  covered  by  dense  undergrijwtli,  especially 
so  in  the  valleys,  which  ai-e  often  impassal)le.  The  soil  covering- 
is  very  deep  in  places,  and  hill-slip  material  is  often  abundant, 
rendering  geological  mapping  very  difficult.  Coarse  bouldery 
gravels  are  present  in  the  upper  reaches  of  all  the  streams,  and  in 
inaccessible  country  of  this  nature  they  afford  valuable  infor- 
mation as  to  the  character  of  the  rocks  within  the  watershed  of  the 
streams. 

The  dacitic  rocks  from  this  area  possess  many  features  in  common 
with  the  dacites  described  from  Mount  Macedon  by  Professor 
Gregory,!  and  by  Professor  Skeats  and  Dr.  Sunmiers.2  Rhyolites 
and  pyroclastic  rocks  of  (?)  Devonian  age  are  apparently  absent  at 
Macedon,  although  they  are  jjresent  at  various  points  in  the  Heales- 
ville  district.  It  was  with  the  primary  purpose  of  studying  these 
less  well-known  rocks  in  the  latter  area,  that  the  present  research 
was  undertaken  by  the  writer. 

2.— Previous   Literature. 

In  1854  Sir  A.  R.  C.  Selwyn^  pi-epared  a  geological  map  of  por- 
tion of  the  country  to  the  east  and  south-east  of  Melbourne.  The 
Healesville  igneous  rocks  are  roughly  delineated  and  referred  to  as 
trap.  In  the  accompanying  report  Selwyn  stated  that  hornblendlc 
granite  passed  into  porphyry  near  Mount  Monda. 

In  1894  J.  C.  Newbery*  described  rocks  from  the  Blacks'  Spur 
and  Fernshaw  as  mica  porphyrite  and  felspar  porphyrite  respec- 
tively. 

In  1901  E.  G.  Hogg-'*  bi-iefly  described  the  microscopical  charac- 
teristics of  a  granitic  rock  from  the  Watts'  river  aqueduct.  He 
determined  it  to  be  a  fine-grained  granitite  composed  of  felspar, 
with  plagioclase  in  excess  of  orthoclase,  quartz,  biotite,  apotite. 
chlorite,  calcite  and  muscovite. 

In  1902  Professor  Gregory, 6  in  an  important  contribution  deal- 
ing with  the  Macedon   igneous   rocks,   briefly   described   the   allied 

1  Vide  infra,  p.  3. 

2  "The  Geology  and  Petrology  of  the  Macedon  District."    Bull.  Vict.  Oeol.  Siirv.,  No.  24,  1912. 

3  "  The  Geology,  Paleontology  and  Mineralogy  of  the  Country  situated  between  Melbourne, 
Western  Port  Bay,  Cape  Schaiick,  etc."     Kep.  Geol.  Siu'v.  \'ict.,  Nov.  1S54. 

4  "  Descriptive  Catalogue  of  the  specimens  of  Rocks  of  \'ictoria,  in  the  Industrial  niid  Techno- 
logical Museum,  Melbourne,"  1894. 

5  "  Petrology  of  Victorian  Granites."    Proc.  Roy.  Soc.  Victoria,  vol.  xiii.  (n.s.),  1001. 

6  "  The  Geology  of  Mount  Macedon."    Proc.  Roy.  Soc.  Victoria,  vol.  .\iv.  (n.s),  Pt.  ii.,  1002. 


Igneous  Rocks.  2(V6 

dacitic  rocks  from  near  Healesville.  He  believed  tliat  the  dacites 
were  either  of  late  Mezozoic  or  early  Tertiary  age,  and  he  stated 
that  "  At  the  northern  foot  of  the  Blacks'  8pui-,  the  dacites  rest  on 
granodiorite. "  He  described  the  microscopical  features  of  a  lock 
with  flow  banding  from  near  Lindt's  gateway,  and  conclnde<l  that 
it  was  a  weathered  dacite. 

In  1904  F.  Chapmani  contributed  a  feAv  petrological  notes  on  the 
igneous  rocks  to  the  south  of  the  area  dealt  with  in  the  present 
paper.  He  determined  a  gneissic  banded  rock  consisting  of  plagio- 
clase  (?  oligoclase),  augite  enwrapped  by  brown  hornblende,  and 
hypersthene,  from  the  Don  river  valley  as  a  granulitic  diorite.^ 
Brief  petrological  notes  on  the  granodiorite  and  dacite  are  also 
given. 

A.  E.  Kitson^  believed  that  the  dacite  series  was  Upper  Mezozoic 
or  Lower  Cainozoic  in  age. 

In  1908  Professor  Skeats''  summarised  certain  of  the  salient 
features  in  the  petrography  of  the  dacitic  rocks  near  Healesville, 
Narbethong  and  Marysville.  He  determmed  the  volcanic  and  in- 
trusive rocks  to  be  dacites,  quartz  porphyrites,  quartz  porphyries 
and  granite  porphyries,  and  he  stated  that  "  At  Dandenong  Hills, 
Narbethong,  Marysville  and  the  Strathbogie  Ranges,  the  dacites 
appear  to  pass,  by  the  increase  of  quartz  and  the  diminution  or 
disappearance  of  hypersthene,  into  quartz  porphyries  and  quartz 
porphyrites.  No  sharp  junctions  have  been  noticed  and  it  is 
inferred  that  the  change  is  a  gradual  one." 

In  1908  J.  Easton,^  of  the  Victorian  Geological  Survey,  made  a 
rapid  survey  of  the  boundaries  of  the  dacite  series  near  Heales- 
ville, Warburton,  Narbethong,  etc.  In  a  brief  report  mention  is 
made  of  the  presence  of  normal  biotite  dacite,  tuffs,  granodiorite 
and  trachyphonolite.  He  records  finding  the  latter  rock  at  two 
points  near  Warburton,  but  his  determination  of  the  rock  is,  with- 
out doubt,  erroneous,  as  alkaline  rocks  appear  to  be  entirely  absent 
from  this  area. 


1   "  Excursion  to  Lauching  Place."    Victorian  Naturalist,  vol.  xx.,  No.  9,  1904. 

■2  In  view  of  Professor  Skeats'  later  work  on  the  relations  of  the  dacites  and  granitic  rocks  near 
•Gembrook,  it  is  probable  that  this  rock  is  a  gneissic  dacite.  Granodiorite  and  dacite  come  into  re- 
lation near  the  Don  river  valley. 

3  "  Excursion  to  Warburton."    Victorian  Naturalist,  vol.  xxii.,  No.  8,  1905. 

4  "  The  Volcanic  Rocks  of  Victoria."  Pres.  Add.  Sect.  C,  Aus.  Assoc.  Adv.  Sci.,  Brisbane, 
1909. 

0  "Boundaries  of  Formations  between  the  head  of  the  Acheron  and  Yea  Rivers  and  the  Varra." 
Rec.  Vict.  Geol.  Surv.,  vol.  ii.,  Pt.  4,  1908. 


264  N.  M.  Junner: 

3.— Upper  Silurian  Sediments. 

The  basal  beds  of  the  Healesville  area  are  a  folded  series  of  f airly 
shallow  water  marine  sediments,  consisting  chiefly  of  sandstones 
and  shales.  Two  fossiliferous  conglomerates  were  found  by  the 
Avriter  near  Narbethong,  one  on  either  side  of  the  main  road  from 
Healesville  to  Marysville.  The  western  conglomerate  was  seen  in 
densely  overgrown  country,  at  a  point  about  one  and  a-l^alf  miles 
east  of  the  above-mentioned  road,  and  about  two  miles  from  St. 
Fillans.  The  conglomerate  outcrops  on  a  low  ridge  trending 
approximately  north  and  south,  and  is  well  jointed.  It  dips  east 
at  about  70°  and  strikes  about  north  and  south,  and  contains 
numerous  poorly  preserved  fossils.  The  pebbles  are  mostly  rounded 
and  sub-angular  in  shape,  and  consist  almost  entirely  of  sedi- 
mentary  rocks,  vein  quartz  and  quartzite  being  most  common,  and 
chert  and  sandstone  relatively  uncommon. 

The  eastern  conglomerate  is  visible  along  the  now  disused  road 
from  Narbethong  to  Marysville.  It  consists  of  exactly  the  same 
types  of  pebbles  as  occur  in  the  w^estern  conglomerate,  and  contains 
casts  of  fossils,  chiefly  corals  and  crinoid  stems.  The  direction  of 
dip  of  the  conglomerate  was  not  determinate,  but  the  sediment* 
near  by  are  west  dipping,  and  presumably  the  conglomerate  also 
dips  in  this  direction.  It  seems  likely,  from  the  structure  of  this 
portion  of  the  area  and  from  the  lithological  similarity  of  the  two 
conglomerates,  that  they  are  on  the  same  stratigraphical  horizon. 
The  abundant  pebbles  of  milky  vein  quartz  are  interesting,  suggest- 
ing the  occurrence  in  Victoria  of  quartz  veins,  possibly  auriferous, 
pre-Upper  Silurian  in  age. 

The  Silurian  sediments  at,  and  to  the  east  of  Melbourne,  strike 
fairly  consistently  east  of  north.  Near  Healesville,  however,  the 
beds  swing  round  and  the  strike  changes  to  the  west  of  north,  and 
this  direction  is  maintained  as  far  east  as  Wood's  Point.  In 
Healesville  township  the  strata  trends  N.  20o  W.  approximately, 
and  dip  about  70o  to  the  west.  In  the  northern  portion  of  the  area, 
near  Narbethong  and  Marysville,,  the  average  strike  is  between  20<^ 
and  30o  west  of  north.  No  explanation  is  suggested  for  this  change 
of  strike.  Clearly  the  effect  is  regional  and  no  explanation,  involv- 
ing local  causes,  e.g.,  the  effect  of  the  intrusion  of  the  igneous  rocks, 
faulting  or  cross-folding  can  be  valid. 

The  precise  age  of  these  beds  is  doubtful.  Fossils  are  very  rare, 
and  with  the  exception  of  the  poorly  preserved  fossils  in  the  above- 
mentioned    conglomerates,    and   certain    plant    remains    which    the 


Igneous   Rocks.  205 

writer  found  in  reddish-coloured  sandstones  and  mudstoues  in  tJio 
north  of  the  area,  no  other  fossils  have  been  seen  or  recorded.  Mr. 
Chapman  has  kindly  examined  these  plant  remains  for  me.  and 
has  referred  them  to  Haliserites  Dechenianus,  (Toppei-t,  a  fossil 
■characteristic  of  his  Tangilian  division  of  Ihc  Silui'ian,  and  which 
is  very  abundant  in  the  Tangilian  beds  at  Wood's  Point.  The 
presence  of  Haliserites,  the  occurrence  of  fossiliferous  conglomerates 
and  the  general  lithology  of  these  beds,  all  point  to  a  close  similarity 
with  the  shallow  water  marine  or  estuarine  beds  near  Wood's  Point. 
Tangilian  mai-ine  fossiliferous  strata  occur  at  Starvation  creek  and 
McMahon's  which  are  approximately  on  the  continuation  of  the 
same  line  of  strike  as  the  beds  near  Narbethong  and  Marysville. 
The  evidence  at  hand,  therefore,  although  not  conclusive,  supports 
the  belief  that  the  sediments  to  the  north  of  the  volcanics  near 
Narbethong  are  Tangilian,  i.e..  Upper  Silurian,  in  age.  In  the 
Al>sence  of  fossils  from  the  beds  near  Healesville  nothing  definite  can 
be  said  respecting  their  age. 

Locally,  near  the  intrusions  of  granodiorite,  the  sediments  have 
been  metamorphosed  and  changed  to  hornfels.  Such  alteration, 
however,  is  never  very  extensive. 

Auriferous  quartz  veins  traverse  the  sediments  in  places  in  this 
Area,  but  none  of  them  have  been  economically  important. 

4.  — Petrology. 
A.  Granodioritt. 

Granodiorite  and  granodiorite  porphyry  occur  as  small  intru- 
sions at  several  points  around  the  periphery  of  the  extrusive  rocks. 
The  most  important  localities  in  which  these  rocks  outcrop  are 
Malory's  falls;  the  Maroondah  aqueduct,  north  of  Healesville;  west 
of  the  road  from  Healesville  to  Toolangi,  near  Meyers'  falls;  Nyoia 
and  in  the  ranges  west  of  Narbethong. 

Malory's  falls. — At  Malory's  falls  at  a  height  of  about  2000  feet 
above  sea  level,  is  found  a  rather  coarse  grained,  occasionally 
porphyritic,  rock  composed  of  quartz,  felspar,  biotite  and  garnet. 
Numerous  pits  are  developed  on  the  weathered  surface  of  the  rock 
due  to  the  removal  of  the  felspar.  Biotite  occurs  in  fine  six-sided 
lustrous  plates.  Euhedral  crystals  of  pink  garnet  (almandine)  are 
fairly  common.  Examined  microscopically,  the  rock  is  seen  to  Ije 
rery  similar  to  the  granodiorite  described  from  the  Macedon  area. 
by   Professor   Skeats   and   Dr.    Summers.^     It   is    a   holocrystalline 


26H  '  N.  B.  Junner: 

rook,  showing  a  tendency  towards  a  porphyritic  structure.  Zoned 
plagioclase,  having  a  nucleus  of  oligoclase  or  oligoclase-andesine, 
and  an  outer  zone  of  albite,  greatly  predominates  over  orthoclase. 
Several  traverses  of  this  section  showed  that  the  ratio  of  plagioclase 
to  orthoclase  was  approximately  ."3  :  1.  One  plagioclase  phenocryst 
shoAved  a  highly  sericitised  idiomorphic  core  surrounded  by  finely 
zoned  pellucid  felspar.  Orthoclase  is  present  in  simply  twinned 
phenocrysts,  including  a  small  quantity  of  microperthitic  albite.  It 
is  apparently  identical  with  the  type  present  in  the  neighbouring 
rhyolites.  Titaniferous  biotite  occurs  as  deep  brown  idiomorphic 
plates.  Some  of  the  biotite  has  been  bleached,  and  r utile  needles^ 
have  separated  out  in  the  form  of  sagenite  webs.  Pleochroic  haloes 
due  to  inclusion  of  zircon  are  very  noticeable  in  the  altered  mica. 
Inclusions  of  ihnenite  are  also  common.  A  little  muscovite  is  also- 
present,  but  it  is  undoubtedly  secondary.  Zircon  and  apatite  a]e 
common  accessories.  Tlie  garnet  crystals,  which  appear  to  be 
homogeneous  in  hand  specimens  are  seen  under  the  microscope  to  be- 
greatly  fractured  and  to  include  unaltered  and  chloritised  biotite, 
quartz,  ilmenite  and  apatite.  Rims  of  biotite  often  surround  the- 
garnet  crystals. 

Maroondah  (iqutdnci ,  north  of  Uealesvillt. — Granodiorite  out- 
crops on  the  ridge  seijarating  Meyer's  creek  and  Donnelly's  creek, 
The  rock  is  greatly  decomposed  near  the  surface,  but  fresh  speci- 
mens are  obtainable  froui  the  tips  formed  from  the  rocks  taken  out 
in  tlie  tunnelling  of  the  above-mentioned  ridge  for  the  Maroondah 
aqueduct.  At  the  western  end  of  the  tunnel  contorted,  steeply 
dipping  Silurian  mudstones  and  .shales  outcrop.  Near  the  contact 
the  sediments  have  been  changed  to  liornfels.  Xenoliths  of  meta- 
morphosed sediments  are  common  in  the  granodiorite  near  the 
coiitact. 

In  hand  specimen  the  rock  is  medium  and  even  grained,  and 
consists  of  colourless  quartz,  felspar  and  abundant  biotite.  Pink 
garnets  are  not  uncommon.  Fine-grained  rocks  (microgranite  or 
aplite)  are  occasionally  present. 

Section  No.  HlOO,  contact  of  granodiorite  with  sedimentary 
Xenolith,  from  tunnel  in  Maroondah  aqueduct. — The  mineralogical 
composition  of  tliis  granodiorite  is  very  similar  to;  that  of  the  rock 
from  near  Maloi-y's  falls.  The  felspai-s.  however,  are  greatly  re- 
placed by  scrii-itc  and  carl)onatcs,  and  the  brown  biotite  crystals 
are  greatly  chloritised,  and  sagenitic  webs  of  rutile  have  separated 
o\it.  A  fail-  amount  of  granular  ilmenite  occurs  throughout  the 
section.  Near  the  contact  pyrrhotite  makes  its  appearance  in  con- 
siderable quantities,  and  the  place  of  the  granular  ilmenite  is  taken 


I  (/neons  Rocks.  267 

by    a    prismatic-    variety.      Latlis   of   clear,    zoned,    acid    plagioclase, 
apparently  all)ite.  are  very  al)undant  in  the  altered  rock  . 

The  granodiorites,  from  the  other  localities  mentioned,  are  very 
eiinilar  to  these  rocks  described  above,  and  they  do  not  call  for 
further  attention. 

B. — Dacites. 
Tlie  majoi-  portion  of  the  area  desci'ibed  in  this  paper  is  covered 
by  a  series  of  fairly  normal  dacites.  They  show  considerable 
variation  in  colour  and  granularity,  although  their  mineral  com- 
position is  usually  very  uniform.  Nevertheless,  in  the  dacites  from 
the  Blacks'  Spur,  quartz  phenocrysts  are  abundant  and  garnet  is 
often  present,  and  hypersthene  is  apparently  wanting,  Avhilst  in  the 
dacites  from  the  summit  of  Mount  Juliet  and  from  the  ranges  at  the 
head  of  the  Acheron  river,  hypersthene  is  relatively  abundant  and 
macro.scopic  quartz  phenocrysts  are  absent.  Flow  structure  is  rare 
in  hand  specimens  of  the  dacites,  althougli  not  infrequently  visible 
in  thin  sections  of  the  Blacks'  Spur  dacite.  Vesicles  are  usually 
absent,  and  mineralisers  were  apparently  rare,  as  these  rocks  are 
relatively  little  altered.  These  facts,  considered  in  conjunction 
with  the  great  thickness  of  these  lavas,  probably  point  to  a  high 
degree  of  viscosity  for  the  extruded  magma.  Numerous  xenoliths  of 
fine-grained  andesites  resembling  liornfels,  and  white  porcelainous 
rocks  occur  in  the  cTacites  from  the  Blacks'  Spur.  Lenticular 
patches  of  more  coarsely  crystallised  dacite,  often  rich  in  garnets, 
are  also  common  in  the  finer  grained  rock  from  this  locality. 
Jointing  is  Avell  developed,  both  in  the  dacites  and  in  the  rhyolites. 
Sections  along  Blacks'  Spur  road  in  dacite  ,and  at  Archer's 
Look-out  in  rhyolite,  illustrate  this  jointing  very  Avell.  The  aver- 
age specific  gravity  of  the  dacites  is  2.71.  A  chemical  analysis 
by  Mr.  F.  Stone  of  a  specimen  of  dacite  from  the  Blacks'  Spur 
gave  the  following  result  : — 

SiOs  65.80 

AI265         16.87 

FeoOs        3.97 

FeO  1.08 

MgO  1.76 

TaO  3.16 

KoO  3.46 

Na^O  2.54 

I-I.6  1.05 

MnO  tr. 

Total      99^68 


268  iV^.  Ji.  Junner: 

.The  analysis  is  very  similar  to  many  others  of  Victorian  dacites, 
and  calls  for  no  special  remarks. 

Specimen  No.  H45,  from  near  the  source  of  the  Acheron  river, 
resembles  closely  the  normal  dacites  described  from  the  Macedon 
and  Dandenong  areas.  It  consists  of  phenocrysts  of  zoned  plagio- 
clase  (labradorite  Aljj  Anj),  greatly  corroded  quartz,  biotite,  and 
occasional  crystals  of  hypersthene,  in  a  microcrystalline  ground  mass 
composed  of  quartz,  plagioclase,  ilmenite  and  ( ?)  potash  felspar. 
Zircorn  and  apatite  are  accessories.  Occasional  phenocrysts  of 
untwinned  felspar  may  be  orthoclase.  The  biotite  phenocrysts  have 
been  attacked  by  the  solidifying  magma,  and  as  a  result  they  are 
often  fretted  and  contain  internal  cavities  filled  with  quartz  and 
felspar.  The  hypersthene  is  decidedly  pleochroic  and  includes 
ilmenite,  felspar  and  biotite.  The  absorption  scheme  is  as 
follows  : — 

X  light  brown  with  a  trace  of  pink. 
Y  brownish  yellow. 
Z  light  green. 

Sections  cut  parallel  to  010  give  a  biaxial  figure,  having  a  mode- 
rately large  axial  angle.  Ilmenite  occurs  as  idiomorphic  crystals 
in  the  ground  mass  of  the  rock,  and  inclnde<l  in  biotite  and 
hypersthene. 

Of  particular  interest  is  the  occurrence  in  this  section  of  two  or 
three  irregular  shaped  phenocrysts  of  cordierite  sliowing  the  charac- 
teristic trilling. 

One  section  in  particular  (vide  plate  I.,  figure  4)  shows  the  trill- 
ing very  finely.  The  cordierite  has  a  refractive  index  greater  than 
the  balsam  (/x=  1.532),  and  is  distinctly  biaxial.  It  is  not  greatly 
altered,  but  contains  numerous  linearly  arranged  inclusions  in 
certain  cases. 

Specimen  No.  H44,  Blacks'  Spur  road,  is  typical  of  the  hypers- 
thene free  dacites.  It  consists  of  phenocrysts  of  colourless  quartz, 
beautifully  zoned  plagioclase  (chiefly  labradorite  Abj  Auj),  and 
deep  brown  six-sided  biotite  in  a  cryptocrystalline  ground  mass. 
Accessory  and  secondary  minerals  are  garnet,  tourmaline,  zircon, 
pyrrhotite,  ilmenite  or  magnetite  (?)  opal,  chlorite,  sericite, 
quartz  and  sillimanite.  Plagioclase  phenocrysts  are  numerous. 
They  are  usually  well  zoned,  and  show  both  albite  and  pericline  twin 
lamellae.  Maximum  symmetrical  extinction  angles  of  about  27o 
indicate  labradorite  near  Abj  An^.  Biotite  is  greatly  chloritised, 
noticeablv  so  close  to  the  garnet  crystals.      It  is  concentrated  round 


Igneous  Rod's.  2(5'.) 

the  margin  of  the  hitter  niineruL  The  garnet  is  seen  under  the 
microscope  to  consist  of  irregular  granular  aggregates,  resembling 
the  "  siebstructure  "  of  Weinschenck.  Inclusions  of  biotite, 
pyrrhotite  and  ilmenite  are  present  in  the  garnet,  and  it  is  asso- 
ciated with  secondary  quartz,  zircon  and  tourmaline.  A  few  lath- 
ehaped  sections  are  seen  of  a  colourless  mineral  having  moderately 
high  refractive  index,  but  much  less  than  that  of  zircon,  and 
exhibiting  bright  pinks  and  greens  of  the  third  order  between 
crossed  nicols.  The  mineral  shows  straight  extinction,  and  deter- 
mination of  its  sign  by  a  quartz  wedge  proves  it  to  be  positive. 
It  is,  therefore,  undoubtedly  sillimanite,  although  its  polarisation 
colours  are  rather  high  for  this  mineral.  Occasional  laths  of  a 
fibrous,  strongly  pleochroic  (blue  or  violet  to  almost  colourless) 
tourmaline,  having  a  negative  sign  and  normal  absorption,  are 
present  in  the  section.     Apatite  and  zircon  are  accessories. 

Section  No.  H73,  dacite,  from  near  Donnelly's  Aveir,  consists  of 
large  fractured  phenocrysts  of  colourless  corroded  quartz  and  fairly 
large  plagioclase  crystals,  showing  both  Carlsbad  and  xA.lbite  twin- 
ning, in  a  fine-grained  pilotaxitic  ground  mass  composed  of  labra- 
dorite  laths,  chlorite  and  a  little  quartz.  One  or  two  vesicles, 
infilled  with  chlorite  and  epidote,  are  present  in  this  rock.  Biotite 
is  rare,  being  greatly  chloritLsed. 

Assimilation. — Assimilation  of  either  aluminous  sediments  or 
igneous  rocks,  has  undoubtedly  occurred  to  some  extent,  as  is  proved 
by  the  presence  of  cordierite,  sillimanite  and  garnet  in  certain  of 
these  rocks.  Numerous  undigested  sedimentary  and  igneous  xeno- 
liths  are  also  seen  in  the  dacites. 

A.  Bergeatl  has  recently  described  an  interesting  case  of  the 
melting  up  and  assimilation  of  an  andalusite  bearing  rock  by  an 
andesite,  with  the  formation  of  cordierite,  sillimanite,  garnet, 
biotite,  orthoclase  and  spinel.  All  these  minerals,  with  the  excep- 
tion of  the  last  named,  are  present  in  the  Healesville  dacites. 

Origiti  of  the  garnet. — Pink  garnet  is  relatively  widespread  in 
(?)  Devonian  igneous  rocks  in  Victoria.  It  occurs  in  granite  or 
granodiorite  near  Toora,  Wilson's  Promontory,  Mount  Taylor, 
Beechworth,  Healesville  and  elsewhere;  and  in  intrusive  and  extru- 
sive rocks,  porphyries,  porphyrites,  daxites,  etc.,  from  near  Mans- 
field, Strathbogie  ranges.  Mount  Dandenong,  Healesville  and  War- 
burton.     The  occurrence  of  the  garnet  in  these  rocks  under  such 


1  "  Der  cordieritaudesit  von  Lipari,  seine  Andalusit  fiihreiiden  einscliliisse  mid  die  genetiselien 
veziehungen  zwisclien  deni  Andalusit,  Silliinanit,  Biotit,  Cordierit,  Orthoklas  und  Spinell  in  deni 
letzteren."    Neues.  Jalieb.  Min.  Geol.  (Beil.  Bd.)  .30,  pp.  57.1-657,  1910. 


270  N.  R.  Junner: 

varied  conditions,  strongly  suggests  that  it  is  a  primary  mineral. 
Although  only  rarely  visible  macroscopically  in  the  rocks  from  the 
Healesville  area,  microscopic  examination  has  revealed  its  presence 
in  granodiorites,  dacites.  rhyolites,  and  tuffs.  Its  occurrence  in 
these  rocks  (both  plutonic  and  extrusive)  certainly  suggests  that 
it  was  an  original  mineral  in  the  magma  from  which  these  rocks 
were  derived.  Microscopical  examination  of  these  garnet-bearing 
rocks,  however,  leads  one  to  doubt  the  primary  origin  of  the 
garnet  for  the  following  reasons  : — 

1.  The  apparently  homogeneous  crystals  of  garnet,  occurring  in 
hand  specimens  of  the  rocks,  are  seen  under  the  microscope  to  b« 
aggregates  of  garnet  grains  associated  with  secondary  quartz, 
pyrrhotite,  chlorite  after  biotite,  sericitised  felspar,  and  in  on» 
case  with  blue  tourmaline. 

2.  The  association  of  garnet  with  pyrrhotite  and  chloritised 
biotite  is  characteristic.  Rims  of  pennine  occasionally  surround 
the  garnet  aggregates.  Pyrrhotite  is  often  a  contact  metamorphic 
mineral,  and  has  been  noticed  in  the  altered  sediments  adjoining 
granodiorite  at  the  Maroondah  aqueduct. 

3.  Garnet  is  apparently  absent  in  the  hypersthene  bearing 
dacites;  at  least  this  is  so  in  all  the  sections  of  these  rocks  that 
I  have  examined.  Sir  Thomas  Holland  has  described  certain  rocks 
in  Avhich  garnet  apparently  replaces  hypersthene,  but  in  otir  case 
sufficient  evidence  is  not  available  to  determine  whether  such 
replacement  has  taken  place. 

Contact  metamorphism  of  the  volcanic  rocks  only  becomes  marked 
near  certain  of  the  granodiorite  intrusions,  and  garnet  is  invari- 
ably absent  from  the  contact  rocks,  so  that  it  is  improbable  that  tlie 
garnet  is  a  contact  metamorphic  mineral. 

Abyssal  magmatic  assimilation  might  possibly  account  for  the 
presence  of  the  garnet  in  the  Healesville  igneous  rocks.  Cordieriie, 
sillimanite  and  garnet  have  been  previously  mentioned  as  forming 
at  Lipari  owing  to  the  assimilation  of  an  andalusite  bearing  rock 
by  an  andesite. 

Summing  up,  no  definite  conclusion,  respecting  the  origin  of  the 
garnet,  can  be  arrived  at,  and  it  is  left  for  future  investigators  to 
make  a  more  detailed  study  of  the  question. 

(J . — Andesifex. 
Quartz  free  andesites  are  rarely  met  with  \u  the  Healesville  area, 
Tlie  best  example  of  these  rocks  seen  by  the  writer  occurs  at  a  point 

1    "Geology  of  the  iifii;hl)oiiflioo(l  of  Salem,  etc'     Moinoir,^  (Jfol.  Suiv,  Inrlia,  vol.  x.\x.,  1900 


Ii/ncoiis  Rocks.  27 T 

about  two  miles  alnng  the  Don  road,  nortli  of  Launcliinf;  Place. 
The  rock  is  very  tough  and  fine  grained,  and  felspar  is  the  only- 
mineral  visible  niegascopically. 

A  thin  section  of  the  rock  examined  under  the  microscope,  con- 
sisted of  phenocrysts  of  felspar  in  a  fine-grained  andesitic  ground 
mass  of  laths  and  stunted  prisms  of  plagioclase,  microcrystalline 
quartz  and  magnetite  dust.  Chlorite,  sericite  and  epidote  (pistacite) 
are  alternation  products.     Original  femic  minerals  are  lacking. 

Recrystallisation  has  taken  place  in  the  ground  mass  of  tha 
original  rock,  and  a  mosaic  of  quartz  grains  has  been  formed. 
Occasional  vesicles  filled  with  chlorite  and  quartz  ai*e  also  present. 
The  panidioniorpliic  plagioclase  phenocrysts  are  well  zoned,  and 
give  maximum  symmetrical  extinction  angles  of  36o  from  the  albite 
lamellae,  indicating  plagioclase  near  labradorite-bytownite  (Ab?, 
Ang).  Most  of  them  are  highly  sericitised,  and  a  little  secondary 
epidote  has  been  developed  in  the  felspar  in  places.  The  ground 
mass  laths  are  generally  only  simply  twinned  and  are  referable  to 
labradorite. 

Section  No.  H2,  from  near  Wade's  Look-out,  is  a  fine-grained 
andesite  consisting  of  zoned  phenocrysts  of  rather  basic  labradorite, 
and  chloritisecl  femic  mineral,  in  a  pilotaxitic  ground  mass  com- 
posed of  plagioclase  laths,  biotite,  chlorite  and  ilmenite.  Quartz 
is  absent.  The  section  of  this  rock  is  very  similar  to  sections  of 
certain  black  andesitic  xenoliths  present  in  the  dacites. 

►Section  No.  H79,  biotite  andesite,  M.M.B.W.  pipe  line  to  Badger 
Creek  Weir. — A  thin  section  of  the  rock  examined  microscopically 
shows  abundant  phenocrysts  of  zoned  plagioclase  (andesine  or  acid 
labradorite).  chloritised  biotite  and  ilmenite  in  a  yellowish  coloured 
devitrified  glassy  ground  mass.  Quartz  is  almost  entirely  absent. 
Abundant  granular  ilmenite  occurs,  included  in  biotite,  and  in  the 
ground  mass  of  the  rock  some  of  the  ilmenite  is  replaced  by  pyrites. 
A  little  epidote  replaces  biotite. 

A  Pyroclastics. 

Section  iitar  Wade's  Look-out. — The  best  section  of  these  frag- 
mental  rocks,  in  the  area  described,  occurs  in  cuttings  along  the 
Don  road  from  Healesville  to  Launching  Place,  above  Wade's  Look- 
out. Near  the  Look-out,  the  pyroclastics  are  seen  resting  on  east- 
dipping  Silurian  sediments.  The  former  consist  here  of  tuffs,  and 
volcanic  agglomerates  containing  rounded  and  sub-angular  pebbles 
of  rhyolite  or  quartz  porphyry.     About  one-third  of  a  mile  above 


272  N.   R.  Junner: 

Wade's  Look-out,  two  cuttings  for  road  metal'  have  exposed  good 
sections  of  these  fragmental  rocks.  The  following  section  is  seen  in 
one  of  these  cuttings  : — 

A. — Dense,  black,  aphanitic  asli  resembling  chert;  width  about 
7  feet. 

•  B. — Coarser  grained  tuff  or  ash  containing  occasional  agglomer- 
atic  pebbles  of  rhyolite.  It  is  well  bedded,  and  dips  steeply  to  the 
east;  width  about  5  feet. 

C. — Partially  unconsolidated,  finely  bedded  tuff  resembling  a 
mudstone;  width  about  2^  feet. 

Examined  under'  a  lens,  numerous  flakes  of  biotite  and  a  few 
grains  of  quartz  and  altered  felspar,  and  a  little  pyrite  and 
muscovite  are  discernible  in  the  rock.  The  tuff  is  ripple  marked  in 
places,  but  it  is  impossible  to  determine  whether  these  markings  are 
due  to  water  action  or  wind.  No  fossils,  either  marine  or  fresh 
water  forms,  were  found  in  these  tuffs,  and  they  appear  to  bt* 
Entirely  sub-aerial  in  origin. 

D. — Another  band  of  black,  flinty  ash. 

These  pyroclastic  rocks  all  appear  to  dip  at  fairly  high  angles  to 
the  east,  but  they  ai-e  well  jointed  and  it  is  possible,  but  not  prob- 
able, that  jointing  and  bedding  were  confused  by  the  author.  It 
is  possible  tKat  these  tuffs  and  ashes  were  originally  deposited  on 
some  fairly  steep  slope,  but  the  more  probable  explanation  of  their 
high  dip  is  that  they  have  been  sul>jected  to  later  earth  movements. 

Section  No.  HI,  black  cherty  ash,  referred  to  above  as  A. — Under 
the  microscope  angular  pieces  of  quartz  and  occasional  fragments 
of  beautifully  zoned  plagioclase  can  be  recognised  in  a  crypto- 
crystalline  matrix.  A  little  biotite  is  also  present,  and  finely 
divided  iron  oxide  is  plentiful.  Bedding  is  distinctly  visible. 
The  bedding  planes,  however,  are  not  straight,  but  occur  in  the  form 
of  waves,  suggesting  rippling. 

Section  No.  H3,  bedded  tuff,  partially  unconsolidated,  referred 
to  as  D. — Microscopically  it  consists  of  numerous  angular  and 
oval-shaped  fragments  of  igneous  rocks  largely  dacitic  in  composi- 
tion. One  or  two  xenolites  of  sandstone  are  present  in  the  section. 
The  bulk  of  the  rock,  however,  consists  of  finely-divided  rock  dust, 
and  fragments  of  crystals,  of  quartz,  felspar,  biotite,  chlorite  and 
colourless  garnet.  The  whole  of  the  felspar  appears  to  be  plagio- 
clase, and  none  of  the  orthoclase,  so  characteristic  of  the  tuffs  near 
Malory's  falls,  is  present.  Chalcedonic  silica  is  well  developed  in 
places. 


Igneous  Rocks.  27:^ 

Section  No.  H30,  xenolith  in  tuff,  one-third  of  a  mile  above 
Wade's  Look-out. — A  leucocratic,  porphyritic  rock,  consisting  of 
phenocrysts  of  quartz,  microperthitic,  ortboclase,  acid  plagioclase 
and  niuscovite  in  a  cryptocrystalline  ground  mass  composed  of  the 
same  minerals.  Orthoclase  is  in  excess  of  plagioclase.  The  pheno- 
crysts of  niuscovite  usually  show  included  needles  and  sagenitic 
M'ebs  of  rutile,  and  occasionally  include  a  little  epidote.  They  un- 
doubtedly replace  original  biotite.  Quartz  grains  are  plentiful. 
They  remain  clear,  although  often  greatly  corroded.  Leucoxene  is 
fairly  abundant,  and  one  or  two  twinned  sections  of  epidote  are 
also  present.  The  rock  may  be  described  as  a  quartz  porphyry  or 
rhyolite.  The  presence  of  the  microperthitic  orthoclase,  so  charac- 
teristic of  the  rhyolites,  is  interesting. 

Section  No.  H15,  xenolith  in  tuff,  one-third  of  a  mile  above 
Wade's  Look-out. — The  rock  is  an  altered  quartz  porphyry  consist- 
ing of  large  phenocrysts  of  quartz,  highly  sericitised  and  kaolinised 
felspar,  and  occasional  biotite  crystals,  in  a  microcrystalline 
ground  mass.  The  idiomorphic  outlines  of  the  felspar  and  the 
absence  of  twinning  suggest  orthoclase.  A  little  yellowish-brown 
opal  occurs  in  places,  and  brown  iron  oxides  are  rather  common,, 
showing  that  the  rock  is  much  weathered. 

Track  to  Malory's  falls. — Tuffs  are  well  developed  near  the 
northern  foot  of  the  Blacks'  Spur,  and  they  can  be  seen  at 
numerous  points  along  the  track  from  near  Lindt's  Hermitage  ta 
Malory's  falls.  They  are  generally  light  coloured,  white  or  grey, 
but  are  occasionally  stained  with  hydrated  oxides  of  iron.  Certain 
of  the  tuffs  still  remain  loose  and  cavernous,  but  the  majority  have 
been  secondarily  silicified  and  rendered  more  compact.  Cubes  of 
pyrite  are  common.  The  lapilli  present  in  the  tuffs  are  usually 
small,  being  rarely  more  than  half  an  inch  in  diameter.  Examined 
microscopically,  these  tuffs  are  seen  to  consist  chiefly  of  fragments 
of  rhyolitic  rocks.  Lapilli  of  sedimentary  rocks  are  very  rarely 
present.  Especially  characteristic,  in  these  pyroclastics,  is  the 
microperthitic  orthoclase  so  abundant  in  the  rhyolite  lavas. 

Specimen  No.  114,  track  to  Malory's  falls.— Numerous  fragments 
of  banded  rhyolite  are  seen  in  hand  specimens  of  this  rock. 
Crystals  of  quartz  and  altered  orthoclase  are  also  visible  mega- 
scopically.  Examined  microscopically  phenocrysts  of  altered  micro- 
perthitic orthoclase,  acid  plagioclase,  and  colourless  quartz,  are 
immediately  recognised.  Chloritised  biotite  occurs  in  small 
amount.  The  matrix  of  the  rock  appears  to  consist  largely  of 
microcrystalline    silica    and    sericitised    felspar.     That     secondary 


274  N.  R.  Junncr: 

eilicification  lias  taken  i^lace  is  evident  from  the  silica  added  to  some 
of  the  quartz  phenocrysts.     The  rock  is  a  rhyolite  tnff. 

Section  No.  HSl,  from  near  H4,  is  again  composed  ahnost  entirely 
of  rhyolitic  debris. — Rectangular  sections  of  muscovite,  secondary 
after  biotite,  are  numerous  and  clear,  simply  twinned  laths  of  acid 
plagioclase  are  not  uncommon.  Microperthitic  orthoclase  occurs  as 
fragments  of  crystals,  much  corroded  and  greatly  sericitised  in 
places.  The  matrix  is  chiefly  finely  granular  silica,  chalcedony, 
and  sericitised  felspar.  Certain  colourless  isotropic  cubes,  of  a 
mineral  having  a  refractive  index  much  less  than  that  of  the 
ground  mass,  are  undoubtedly  fluorite. 

Section  No.  H9,  track  to  Malory's  falls,  is  made  up  of  lapilli  of 
andesitic  and  rhyolitic  rocks  and  fragments  of  chlorite,  secondary 
after  biotite,  quartz,  plagiolcase,  biotite  and  highly  sericitised 
orthoclase  in  a  matrix  composed  chiefly  of  quartz  and  sericitised 
felspar.  Abundant  leucoxene  and  zircon  occur  scattered  through 
■the  section.  Microperthitic  orthoclase  is  almost  entirely  absent. 
One  or  tAvo  fragments  of  garnet  are  also  present. 

Section  No.  H39,  immediately  west  of  the  Blacks'  SjDur  road,  on 
the  track  to  Malory's  falls. — Fluorite  cubes  are  again  present  in  this 
section.      The  rock  is  a  normal  rhyolite  tuff. 

M.M.B.W.  pipe  line  to  Badger  Greek  Weir,  S.S.W .  of  Mount 
Riddell. — Ashes,  tuffs  with  fine  lapilli,  and  coarse  agglomerates  are 
all  present  in  the  rocks  from  this  locality.  The  agglomerate  pebbles 
are  usually  small,  being  rarely  more  than  three  inches  in  diameter, 
and  are  mostly  sub-angular  in  shape.  They  consist  almost  entirely 
of  a  yellowish-green,  aphanitic,  pyritised  rock  resembling  in  hand 
specimen  the  Diamond  creek  dyke  rock.  No  signs  of  bedding  are 
visible  in  any  of  the  tuffs.  They  are  frequently  honeycombed,  and 
secondary  carbonates,  sericite  and  pyrites  have  been  developed  in 
them. 

Specimen  No.  H88,  pebble  in  agglomerate,  S.S.W.  of  Mount  Rid- 
dell, is  a  leucocratic,  aphanitic  rock  showing  "minute  grains  of 
quartz,  felspar  and  a  little  pyrite  in  hand  specimen.  Micro- 
scopically, it  consists  of  phenocrysts  of  altered  felspar,  quartz  and 
a  little  chloritised  femic  mineial,  in  a  ground  mass  of  quartz, 
felspar  laths  and  occasional  ilmenite.  Carbonates,  sericite.  Lhlorite, 
rutile  and  leucoxene  are  secondary  minerals.  Veinlets  of  quartz 
and  carbonates  traverse  the  rock.  The  felspar  phenocrysts  are  pre- 
dominantly orthoclase;  highly  sericitised  in  general  and  often 
carbonated.  The  plagioclase  phencrysts  are  of  albite  or  albite- 
oligoclase,  and  are  not  zoned.     The  grains  of  quartz  are  pellucid  as 


hfuc.oiis  Rocks.  21  h 

tisual,  but  are  often  greatly  fractured  and  corroded.      The  rock  is  a 
metasomatieally  altered  rhyolite  of  quartz  porphyry. 

Section  No.  H91,  xenolith  in  tuffs,  S.S.W.  of  xMount  Riddell.  is 
&  slightly  luetaniorphosed  granodiorite.  Biotite  is  greatly  replaced 
by  chlorite  (pennine)  and  rutile  has  separated  out  as  sagenitic  webs. 
Abundant  pyrrhotite  occurs  throughout  the  section,  replacing  much 
of  the  original  ilinenite'.  The  felspars  are  greatly  altered,  but 
plagioclase  appears  to  be  in  excess  of  orthoclase. 

Section  No.  H94,  andesite  tuff,  from  same  locality  as  preceding 
specimens.  Under  the  microscope  the  rock  is  seen  to  consist  largely 
of  fragments  of  andesite  showing  fine  pilotaxitic  texture.  The 
original  biotite  crystals  have  been  replaced  by  strongly  pleochroic 
chlorite  (pennine)  and  epidote  (pistacite),  and  leucoxene  has  sepa- 
rated out.  Quartz  phenocrysts  are  rare,  but  the  bulk  of  the 
matrix  of  the  rock  appears  to  be  silica,  some  of  which  is  chalcedonic. 
Occasional  crystals  of  colourless  isotropic  garnet  are  seen  in  the 
section.  The  felspar  phenocrysts  and  ground  mass  laths  appear  to 
be  almost  entirely  plagioclase,  often  well  zoned. 

Track  to  Marooiidah  weir. — Doubtful  fragmental  rocks  occur  near 
Maroondah  weir.  Specimen  No.  Jl,  metasomatieally  altered 
rhyolite  tuff  or  rhyolite,  one  mile  south-west  of  Maroondah  weir, 
is  typical  of  these  rocks.  Hand  specimens  are  brecciated,  consist- 
ing of  fragments  of  a  light-coloured  rock  in  a  darker  coloured 
matrix.  Thin  sections  of  the  rock  examined  microscopically  show 
that  silicification,  carbonation  and  sei'icitisation  have  greatlv 
affected  the  original  rock.  The  primary  minerals  include  simply 
twinned  orthoclase,  plagioclase,  corroded  and  fractured  quartz, 
garnet,  zircon,  sphene,  apatite  and  a  (?)  femic  mineral  which  has 
been  entirely  replaced.  Muscovite,  carbonates  ('I  dolomite),  chal- 
cedony, quartz  pyrites,  (?)  opal  and  brown  iron  oxides  are 
secondary.  Most  of  the  plagioclase  has  a  refractive  index  less  than 
that  of  quartz,  and  appears  to  be  albite,  but  certain  zoned  sections 
give  symmetrical  extinction  angles  of  22°  from  the  albite  lamellae, 
indicating  andesine.  Massive  cleaved  carbonates  and  flakes  of  seri- 
cite  replace  much  of  the  felspar.  A  little  secondary,  radially 
arranged,  albite  has  been  developed  in  one  place  in  the  section. 
Yellow-brown  aggregates  and  double  wedge-shaped  sections  of 
sphene,  showing  bright  pinks  and  greens  of  the  third  order  under 
crossed  nicols,  are  not  uncommon.  The  garnet  is  rarely  idio- 
morphic,  occurring  more  often  in  corroded  and  irregular-shaped 
grains.  Microspherulitic  chalcedony,  showing  a  black  cross  under 
crossed  nicols,  occurs  throughout  the  section.  Minute  veins  of 
quartz  traverse  the  rock. 


276  ^\    R.  Junver: 

Section  No.  HlOl,  one  mile  S.W.  of  Muroondah  Weir. — Sharp 
rhombs  of  dolomite  occur  in  places,  associated  with  secondary 
quartz  and  iron  oxides.  Microscopic  veinlets  of  banded  silica  and 
carbonates  intersect  the  rock. 

Fragmental  rocks,  tuffs  and  flinty  breccias  whose  fragmental 
character  is  only  revealed  on  weathering,  also  occur  to  the  south 
and  south-west  of  Mount  St.  Leonard. 

E . — Rhyoliies. 
With  the  single  exception  of  Professor  Skeats'  reference  to  quartz 
l^orphyries  and  porphyrites  occurring  near  Narbethong  and  MaryB- 
ville,  there  is  no  mention,  in  the  literature  of  the  area,  of  extrusive 
rocks  more  acid  than  the  dacites.  However,  at  Archer's  Look-out, 
St.  Ronan's  Well,  near  Lindt's  Hermitage,  the  Acheron  river 
above  St.  Fillan's,  and  at  several  other  points  north  of  the  main 
divide,  normal  rhyolites  outcrop.  These  rocks  are  characterised  in 
hand  specimens  by  abundant  quartz  phenocrysts,  and  by  the  paucity 
of  femic  minerals.  Rhomb-shaped  sections  of  glassy  or  pearly  ortho- 
clase  can  be  recognised  in  nearly  all  hand  specimens  of  these  rocks. 
Fluxion  banding  is  often  well  developed.  A  chemical  analysis  of 
the  rhyolite  from  Archer's  Look-out  was  made  by  the  writer  in  the 
geo-chemical  laboratory  of  the  Royal  College  of  Science,  London^ 
and  gave  the  foUoAving  result  : — 


I. 

TI. 

SiO^ 

74.39 

78.64 

ALA 

14.28 

9.85 

Fe,0, 

0.52 

0.54 

Feb 

1.09 

2.00 

MgO 

0.27 

0.10 

CaO 

0.24 

0.80 

K.,0 

5.33 

5.16 

Na^O 

2.78 

2.03 

H..0  + 

0.22 

0.40 

H2O- 

0.56 

0.14 

CO., 

abs. 

— 

TiO, 

0.29 

0.67 

P.O.. 

tr. 

tr. 

BaO 

n.  det. 

— 

MaO 

11.  det. 

— 

Total 

99.97 

100.33 

Sp.  (4r.         2.49 
I.    Khyolito,  Archer's  Lookout.     Analyst,  N.  K.  Junuer. 
II.    Rhyolite,  Mount  Wellington.      Analyst,  E.  O.  Thiele. 


Igneous  Rocks.  277 

Using  H.  C.  Richards'  analysis  of  the  biotite  from  the  dacite 
near  Mount  Dandenong,  with  slight  adjustment  of  the  relative  pro- 
portions of  FeO  and  MgO  to  fit  the  percentages  of  these  constituents 
in  the  rock,  we  can  determine  approximately  the  mineral  composi- 
tion of  the  rock.     Thus  : — 


Quartz 

37.20 

Orthoclase 

•29.47 

Albite  (Ab^^An^) 

24.69 

Biotite 

3.65 

Ma(,'netite 

0.70 

Excess  AljO;, 

3.47 

Excess  H,0 

0.67 

Total  99.85 

Much  of  the  felspar  is  changed  to  kaolin,  so  that  this  mineral  will 
account  for  a  certain  amount  of  the  surplus  AUOg  and  H^O.  The 
percentages  of  iron  oxides,  magnesia,  and  lime  are  all  low,  and 
there  is  a  corresponding  small  percentage  of  lime-bearing  felspar 
and  femic  minerals  present  in  the  rock.  Microscopical  examination 
shows  that  the  felspar  phenocrysts  are  orthoclase,  containing  micro- 
perthitic  inclusions  of  soda  felspar,  accounting  for  the  moderately 
high  percentage  of  soda  in  the  rock. 

Microscojyical  relations. — A  section  of  the  rock  analysed  showed 
phenocrysts  of  quartz  and  kaolinised  orthoclase  in  a  microcrystal- 
line  ground  mass  consisting  of  quartz,  orthoclase  and  biotite. 
Zircon  and  apatite  are  accessories.  Secondary  minerals  include 
chlorite,  kaolin,  hematite,  sericite  and  a  little  biotite,  tourmaline 
and  brown  opal.  A  micrometric  analysis  of  the  rock  showed  that 
the  ratio  of  ground  mass  to  phenocrysts  was  approximately  1.1  :1. 
The  orthoclase  phenocrysts  are  often  idiomorphic  and  are  sometimes 
rounded  by  corrosion  of  the  ground  mass.  They  occasionally  show 
the  characteristic  cross  fracture  of  sanidine.  Carlsbad  twinning  is 
not  uncommon.  The  phenocrysts  of  quartz  are  occasionally  hex- 
agonal in  section,  but  are  more  often  rounded  and  embayed  by 
the  ground  mass.  Numerous  cracks  and  abundant  glass  inclusions 
are  present  in  the  quartz.  Biotite  occurs  sparingly  as  phenocrysts, 
but  is  abundant  in  aggregates  of  minute  flakes,  in  the  ground  mass 
of  the  rock. 

Section  No.  H50,  Archer's  Look-out,  shows  phenocrysts  of 
quartz,  sanidine,  and  altered  biotite  in  a  microcrystalline  ground 
mass  consisting  of  the  same  minerals,   together   with   tourmaline. 


278  N.  R  Jaiimn-: 

sericite,  and  a  very  little  ilmenite.  The  texture  is  i^orphyritic. 
Flow  banding  is  very  well  developed,  yet  the  ground  mass  is 
thoroughly  crystalline. 

A  beautiful  blue  tourmaline  occurs  scattered  through  the  section 
in  mossy  aggregates.  These  aggregates  examined  under  the  high- 
power  resolve  into  groups  of  acicular  crystals  and  hexagonal  cross 
sections  of  these  needles.  Pleochroism  is  very  marked,  varying  from 
ultramarine  to  yellowish  or  greenish-brown.  An  anomalous  feature 
of  this  mineral  is  that  its  strongest  absorption  is  in  the  same 
direction  as  in  biotite,  which  also  occurs  in  the  same  section.  It 
seems  probable  that  the  tourmaline  replaces  biotite  and  that  it  has 
retained  the  original  form  of  the  mica. 

Minute  flakes  and  prismatic  sections  of  biotite  occur  throughout 
the  section.  These  are  probably  secondary  in  origin.  The  original 
biotite  differs  from  them  in  having  much  larger  sections,  and  in  its 
corrosion  by  the  magma  and  separation  of  oxides  of  iron  and 
titanium.  A  brown,  isotropic  mineral,  having  a  refractive  index 
Isfia  than  the  balsam  and  occurring  in  small  amount  in  the  section, 
is  opal.      It  is  fringed  with  secondary  biotite  in  places. 

Section  No.  H57,  Acheron  River,  above  St.  Fillans. — This  rock 
consists  of  phenocrysts  of  deeply  embayed  colourless  quartz,  turbid 
microperthitic  orthoclase,  and  a  little  biotite  and  albite,  in  a 
cryptocrystalline  ground  mass  which  was  originally  glassy  and 
microspherulitic.  Minute  spherulites,  preserved  in  quartz,  are  not 
uncommon  in  the  ground  mass  of  the  rock.  Chlorite  and  brown 
iron  oxide  replace  the  original  femic  mineral  which  was  probably 
biotite.  Prisms  of  tourmaline,  showing  normal  absorption,  are 
associated  witli  chlorite  or  serpentine  in  places. 

Section  No.  H49,  Acheron  River,  above  St.  Fillans.- — Aggregates 
of  blue  tourmaline  showing  anomalous  absorption  are  present  in 
this  section.  The  tourmaline  occurs  associated  with  muscovite  and 
replaces  biotite,  whose  form  it  retains.  Plagiocluse  phenocrysts  are 
absent,  but  a  little  albite  occurs  in  the  ground  mass  of  the  rock. 

Section  No.  H67,  banded  rhyolite  from  near  Malory's  falls. — 
Chalcedonic  silica,  with  nuclei  of  slightly  yellow  coloured,  appa- 
rently isotropic  material,  having  a  refractive  index  nmch  greater 
than  the  chalcedony,  occurs  in  places  in  this  section. 

Certain  obscure  flinty  rocks  occurring  near  Mount  St.  Leonard 
may  be  best  described  under  the  heading  of  rhyolites,  although  the 
writer  is  quite  prepared  to  admit  the  possibility  of  tlieir  being 
silicified  tuffs. 


Igneous  Rocks.  279 

Section  No.  H77,  from  Meyer's  creek  road,  soutli-we.st  of  Mount 
Jit.  Leonard,  is  typical  of  these  rocks.  It  consists  of  phcnocrysts  of 
<}uartz  and  occasional  highly  sericitised  crystals  of  orthoclase  and 
plagioclase,  in  a  microcrystalline  ground  mass  of  quartz,  biotite 
and  altered  felspar.  The  structure  of  the  rock  is  homogeneous. 
Radial  aggregates  of  secondary  biotite  have  been  developed  in 
association  with  mosaics  of  secondary  quartz  and  a  little  pellucid 
felspar. 

Section  No.  H72,  from  same  locality  as  the  preceding  specimen. — 
Microscopically  it  consists  of  occasional  phenocrysts  of  pellucid  very 
rounded  quartz,  and  a  few  panidiomorphic  phenocrysts  of  highly 
altered  felspar  in  a  micromosaic  of  quartz,  felspar,  sericite,  iron 
oxides,  biotite  and  pyrite.  One  rather  rounded  and  broken  crystal 
of  slightly  pink  garnet  occurs  associated  with  a  little  biotite  and 
muscovite.  Irregular  shaped  grains  of  pyrite  are  seen  replacing 
felspar  in  places  in  this  section. 

F. — Metasoinatically  altered  rocks. 

The  dacites  in  the  Healesville  area  are  remarkably  fresh,  and 
-except  for  the  occasional  presence  of  chlorite,  epidote,  sericite  and 
very  rarely  tourmaline,  they  remain  unaltered.  It  has  been  pre- 
viously suggested  that  the  dacitic  lavas  were  very  viscous  and  poor 
in  mineralisers;  hence,  perhaps,  the  minor  alteration  of  these 
rocks.  The  basal  volcanic  rocks, — the  rhyolites,  and  tuffs, — how- 
ever, have  been  greatly  altered  in  places.  These  metasomatically 
altered  rocks  are  best  seen  along  the  aqueduct  from  the  Badger 
river,  south-west  of  Mount  Riddell.  Here,  a  greenish-coloured, 
compact  rock,  veined  with  carbonates  and  quartz  are  locally  greatly 
pyritised,  outcrops.  Examined  under  a  lens,  some  of  the  limon- 
itised  pyrites  appears  to  contain  native  gold.  In  the  absence  of 
assays  of  the  pyrites,  however,  one  cannot  assert  definitely  that 
gold  is  present  in  these  rocks.  The  fact  that  gold  has  been  won 
from  the  Badger  creek,  near  by  here,  is  perhaps  significant.  Ac- 
cording to  Professor  Skeats,  gold  has  been  obtained  from  creeks 
passing  only  over  dacites  near  Marysville  and  Gcmbrook.  but  its 
mode  of  occurrence  is  not  known. 

Specimen  No.  H80,  from  south-west  of  Mount  Riddell,  is  typical 
of  these  propylitised  rocks.  Hand  specimens  are  compact  and 
aphanitic,  and  of  a  greenish-grey  colour.  The  specific  gravity  of 
the  rock  is  2.80.  Examined  microscopically  it  is  seen  that  the 
original   rock  has   been   greatly   r^laced   by  carbonates,    chlorite, 


280  N.  R.  Junner  : 

sericite  and  pyrites,  much  of  which  has  been  oxidised  to  limonite 
and  hematite.  One  large,  simply  twinned,  phenocryst  of  orthoclase 
remains.  It  is  partly  replaced  by  sericite  and  granular  chloritfe 
and  a  little  carbonate. 

Other  idiomorphic  felspar  crystals  are  seen  to  be  entirely  re- 
placed by  carbonates,  chlorite  (pennine),  and  sericite.  The  quartz 
phenocrysts  still  remain  clear,  although  greatly  corroded  and  par- 
tially sericitised  in  places.  Small  lenticular  vesicles,  infilled  with 
carbonates  and  quartz,  are  occasionally  present.  Veinlets  of  car- 
bonates, chlorite  and  a  little  quartz  traverse  the  rock.  Carbonates 
are  abundant  throughout  the  ground  mass  of  the  rock,  especially 
replacing  felspar  laths.  The  alteration  of  the  tuffs  and  agglome 
rates,  that  occur  near  by  here,  has  been  previously  described. 

Near  the  Echo  tunnel,  in  the  Maroondah  aqueduct,  and  also  near 
the  Maroondah  weir,  carbonation,  sericitisation  and  pyritisation 
have  taken  place  in  the  basal  volcanic  rocks  underlying  the  normal 
dacites. 

Secondary  tourmaline  and  biotite  have  been  mentioned  as  forming 
in  the  rhyolites  near  Archer's  Look-out,  and  in  the  tuffs  near  here 
fluorite  is  occasionally  present. 

This  alteration  has  been  ascribed  by  the  writer  to  the  action  of 
vapours  released  from  the  neighbouring  granodiorite. 

5.— Field   Relations  and  Origin  of  the  Igneous  Rock. 

A. — Eelationshijy  of  the  gronodiorift   to   the  sedimentary  and 
volcanic  rocks. 

Wlierever  seen  the  granodiorite  is  intrusive  into  the  Silurian 
sediments,  and  has  altered  the  latter  for  some  distance  from  th» 
junction.  Xenoliths  of  hornfels  are  also  common  in  the  grano- 
diorite near  the  contact. 

The  relationship  of  the  plutonic  rock  to  the  igneous  rocks,  how- 
ever, is  not  so  evident.  Selwyn  stated  that  hornblende  granite 
passed  into  porphyry  near  Mount  Monda,  and  Ferguson  also 
believed  that  there  was  a  gradual  passage  between  the  plutonic  and 
volcanic  rocks  near  Gembrook.i  However,  Professor  Skeata  has 
Bhown  clearly  that  near  Gembrook  and  Macedon,  the  granodiorite 
is  intrusive  into  the  normal  dacite,  and  that  the  latter  rock  has 
been  rendered  gneissic  in  places  near  the  contact.  Whenever  the 
two  rocks  come  into  relation  in  the  Healesville  area  marked  con- 

1  "  Notes  on  certain  Geological  Features  of  the  Parishes  of  Geniltrook  North  and  Naugana." 
Prog.  Rept.  Vict.  Geol.  Surv.,  No.  8,  1894. 


Tg neons  Rocks.  281 

tact  alteration  of  the  dacite  is  usually  absent.  However,  near 
Nyora  the  dacite  contiguous  with  the  granodiorite  has  been  ren- 
dered gneissic,  and  in  the  ranges  to  the  west  of  Narbethong  a 
gneissic  dacite  was  seen  by  the  writer  near  the  contact  with  grano- 
diorite. Clearly,  in  the  Healesville  district  as  elsewhere  in  Vic- 
toria, the  intrusion  of  the  granitic  rock  took  place  after  the 
extrusion  of  the  dacite. 

Near  Malory's  falls  rhyolite  is  apparently  superposed  on  grano- 
diorite. No  alteration  of  the  rhyolite  near  the  contact  is  visible  in 
hand  specimens.  However,  thin  sections  of  the  rhyolite  show  the 
development  of  secondary  biotite  and  blue  tourmaline,  and  the 
writer  attributes  this  alteration  to  the  action  of  vapours  given  off 
from  the  cooling  plutonic  rock.  Fluorite  has  also  been  formed  in 
the  tuffs  near  Malory's  falls.  More  certain  evidence  of  the  subse- 
quent intrusion  of  the  granodiorite,  e.g.,  apophyses  or  dykes  from 
it  passing  into  the  rhyolites  was  not  obtainable.  In  tlie  sequel,  it 
will  be  show^n  that  the  dacite  is  younger  than  the  rhyolite,  adding 
further  support  to  the  sequence  suggested  above. 

Secondary  biotite  has  also  been  formed  in  the  obscure  flinty 
rocks,  probably  rhyolites.  from  near  Mount  St.  Leonard.  Grano- 
diorite outcrops  on  the  east  Vjank  of  Meyer's  creek,  close  by  here,  and 
it  is  probable  that  the  alteration  in  the  rhyolite  was  brought  about 
■owing  to  the  intrusion  of  the  plutonic  rock. 

B. — Relatio/isli/ps  of  the  volcanic  rockt<  to  one  another. 

That  the  pyroclastic  rocks  were  associated  with  the  rhyolitic  out- 
burst, and  were  previous  to  the  dacitic  activity  is  certain  from 
the  following  facts  : — 

1.  Everywhere  in  the  area,  the  tuffs  occur  marginal  to  the 
dacites,   and  clearly  underlie  them  at  certain  points. 

2.  Near  Wade's  Look-out  and  Badger  weir,  quartz  porphyry 
.and  rhyolite  pebbles  and  lapilli,  from  the  agglomerates  and  tuffs, 
.are  often  seen  to  have  been  caught  up  in  the  lowest  layers  of  the 
dacite. 

3.  The  tuffs  throughout  the  area  are  composed  of  rhyolitic 
debris,  and  andesitic  or  dacitic  ejectmenta  are  generally  absent 
from  them. 

A  traverse  up  the  Acheron  river  from  St.  Fillans  shows  that 
the  dacites  overlie  the  rhyolites  in  this  area.  The  latter  rocks, 
which,  near  their  contact  with  the  Silurian  sediments  contain 
little   biotite.    become   richer    in    this   mineral    close   to   the   dacites. 


282  N.  R  Junner: 

yet,  they  appear  to  be  sharply  defined  from  one  another.  The 
superposition  of  the  dacites  on  the  rhyolites  near  the  Acheron 
River,  and  the  inclusion  of  fragments  of  the  latter  rock  in  the 
former  at  certain  places,  are  sufficient  to  prove  the  subsequent 
extrusion  of  the  dacites.  The  position  of  the  quartz  free  andesites^ 
is  not  certain.  They  occur  marginal  to  the  dacites  near  Launching- 
Place,  suggesting  that  the  latter  rocks  overlie  them.  Numerous 
xenoliths  of  andesite  occurring  in  the  Blacks'  Spur  dacite,  may 
also  indicate  a  subsequent  origin  for  the  dacite.  However,  in 
the  absence  of  mora  certain  evidence  it  is  better  to  leave  the  ques- 
tion of  the  age  of  the  andesites  unanswered.  The  evidence  brought 
forward  is  sufficient  to  establish  the  following  sequence,  from  older 
to  newer — 

Rhyolites  and  rliyolitic  tuffs, 

Andesite, 

Dacites, 

Granodiorite. 
The  sequence,  viewed  broadly,   shows  the  order  of  extrusion  to  be 
one  of  increasing  basicity. 

C- — Origrn  of  the  rocks. 
Without  much  doul^t  all  these  rocks  have  been  derived  by  dif- 
ferentiation from  a  connaon  magma.  Whether  the  differentiation 
is  of  a  serial  or  complementary  type,  cannot  however  be  deter- 
mined Avith  certainty  in  the  absence  of  chemical  analyses  of  all 
these  rocks.  The  qviestion  of  differentiation  has  been  attacked 
exhaustively  in  the  Macedon  area  by  Professor  Skeats  and  Dr. 
Summers,  and  at  Dandenong,  by  Mr.  Morris,  and  their  conclu- 
sions leave  no  room  for  doubting  that  the  granodiorites  and  dacites 
in  these  areas  are  consanguineous.  If  any  further  evidence  i» 
needed  in  the  Healesville  area  to  establish  the  comagmatic  origin 
of  the  rocks,  the  striking  similarity  in  their  mineralogical  com- 
position and  their  intimate  association  in  the  field  may  be  put 
forward  in  support  of  this  view.  Especially  significant  is  the 
occurrence  of  zone  plagioclase  and  microperthitic  orthoclase  in 
the  granodioi'ite,  and  exactly  the  same  types  of  felspar  in  the 
dacites  and  rhyolites.     Garnet  is  also  present  in  all  of  these  rocks. 

6,  — Conclusions. 

1.  Folded  Upper  Silurian  shallow  water  marine  sediments 
form  the  basal  bods  of  the  Healesville  area.  Fossils  are  rare. 
Haliserites   Dechenianus,  Goppert,   was   found   in   the   north   of  the 


Igneous  Rochft.  288 

area,  determining  the  age  of  the  beds  as  probably  Tangilian. 
Poorly  preserved  corals  and  ci'inoids,  occur  in  conglomerates  from 
near  Narbethong. 

2.  The  vulcanieity  in  this  area  commenced  in  1  Devonian 
times,  after  the  folding  and  uplift  of  the  sediments.  Extrusion  of 
rhyolites,  accompanied  by  minor  explosive  outbursts,  inaugurated 
the  cycle  of  volcanic  activity.  The  expiring  rhyolitic  vulcanieity 
was  marked  by  the  passage  of  hydrothermal  solutions,  containing 
alkaline  carbonates  and  sulphides,  in  solution,  through  the  pre- 
viously consolidated  igneous  rocks. 

3.  A  great  thickness  of  dacitic  rocks,  including  quartz  free 
andesites,  biotite  dacites,  and  hypersthene  biotite  dacites  suc- 
ceeded the  rhyolites  and  pyroclastic  rocks,  and  covered  up  most 
of  them.  The  latter  rocks  are  now  only  visible  around  the 
periphery  of  the  dacites,  where  denudation  has  been  greatest. 
There  is  good  reason  to  believe  that  the  dacitic  magma  was  very 
viscous.  Steam  cavities  are  almost  entirely  absent,  and  mineral- 
isers  which  would  have  decreased  the  viscosity  were  apparently 
ecaroe. 

Later  still,  granodiorite  was  intruded  at  several  points.  Subse- 
quent denudation,  which  has  been  greatest  around  the  margins 
of  this  volcanic  pile,  has  exposed  certain  of  these  intrusions. 

The  volcanic  activity  appears  to  have  been  entirely  sub-aerial. 
There  is  no  evidence  present  anywhere  in  the  area  of  lacustrine 
or  marine  sediments  associated  with  the  igneous  rocks. 

4.  It  is.  very  probable  that  all  the  igneous  rocks  described  are 
congeneric.  The  more  complete  evidence  available  from  other 
areas  in  Victoria,  e.g.,  Macedon  and  Dandenong,  where  somewhat 
similar  rocks  are  present,  supports  this  belief.  The  sequence  of 
eruption  was  apparently  one  of  increasing  basicity. 

5.  Magmatic  fusion  and  assimilation  of  aluminous  rocks  by  cer- 
tain of  the  dacites  has  taken  place,  and  as  a  result  cordierite, 
sillimanite  and,  possibly,  garnet,  have  been  formed. 

6.  The  origin  of  the  garnet  remains  unsolved,  but  it  seems 
very  likely  that  it  is  a  primary  mineral  in  the  rocks.  Its  exten- 
sive occurrence,  in  granites,  porphyries  and  dacites  elsewhere  in 
Victoria,  supports  this  contention. 

In  conclusion,  the  writer  desires  to  express  his  indebtedness  to 
Professor  "Watts,  for  many  facilities  granted  him  in  the  carrying 
out  of  this  research  at  the  Royal  College  of  Science,  London  ;  and 
to  Professor  Skeats,   for   advice  and  suggestions. 


284 


i\^.  R.  Junner 


//AL!S£f!lT£.S 


Granodiorite 

EIZ]  RhYOLITE(R)  and   DAClTEiD) 

L5_l  Silurian  ^ 


Geological  and  locality  sketch  map  of  the  Healesville  and  Narbethong  area.      The  junctions 
of  the  rhyolites  and  dacites  are  not  shown  owing  to  the  mapping  of  their  boundaries  not 

being  completed. 


Piw.   K.S.   Victoria,    HM4.        l'lat<-    I. 


Tif 

^^S 

r 

'.  ,  i 

Hi  '■0'    t  <^nl 

u 


Igneous  Roch 


EXPf.ANATION    OF    PLATES, 

Platk    I. 

Fig.   1. — Microphotograph  of  a  fractured  garnet  crystal  occurring 
in  dacite  from  the  Blacks'  Spur.     Inclusions  of  colourless 
■  quartz  and  black  pyrrhotite  are  visible.      Ordinar}-  light, 
X  14. 

Fig.  2. — Microphotograph  of  cherty  ash,  from  a  cutting  in  the 
road,  one-third  of  a  mile  above  Wade's  Look-out.  Kude 
bedding  planes  are  visible  in  this  section.  Ordinary  light 
xl2. 

Fig.   3. — Microphotograph    of    a    finely    corroded,    originally  idio- 

morphic,   quartz   jjlienocryst,   occurring   in    rh3'^olite,  from 

the    Acheron    River    above    St.     Fillans.       Ordinary  light 
x31. 

Fig.  4. — Microphotograph  of  a  cordierite  trilling  in  dacite,  from 
near  the  head  of  the  Acheron  River.  Crossed  Nicols, 
x50. 

Fig.  5. — Microphotograph  of  andesite,  from  the  Don  road,  2  miles 
north  of  Launching  Place.     Ordinary  light   x  25. 

Fig.  6. — Microphotograph  of  porphyritic  rhyolite,  from  Archer's 
Look-out,  Narbethong.  Flow  structure  around  an  idio- 
morphic  phenocryst  of  quartz  is  well  seen.  Ordinary 
light  X  25. 


[Proc.  Rot.  Soc.  Victoria,  27  (N.S).,  Part  II.,  1914]. 


Art.  XIX.— 0?i  the  Occurrence  of  Igneous  Pehhles  in  a  Con- 
glomerate of  Upper  Silurian  Age  from  near    Walhalla. 

By    NORMAN    K.    JUNNER,    B.Sc. 

(With  Plate  II.) 
[Read  12th   Novemlier,  1914]. 

Introduction. 

During  a  short  visit  made  to  Walhalla  in  June,  1913,  with  the 
primary  purpose  of  studying  the  relations  between  the  auriferous 
quartz  reefs  and  the  intrusive  rocks  there,  my  attention  was 
drawn,  through  the  medium  of  a  description  in  Mr.  Herman's 
report  on  the  Walhalla  Gold-field, i  to  an  interesting  conglomerate, 
containing  pebbles  of  igneous  rocks,  which  was  interbedded  with 
limestones,  shales  and  grits  of  Yeringian  age.  It  was  at  onc^ 
evident,  from  a  cursory  examination  of  the  conglomerate,  that 
Mr.  V.  R.  Stirling's  idea^,  of  an  immense  fault  and  associated 
fault  breccia  was  untenable;  and  further  that  the  igneous  pebbles 
had  no  genetic  connection  with  the  so-called  diorite  dykes  which 
are  so  characteristic  a  feature  at  Walhalla. 

Many  of  the  pebbles  showed  very  little  in  hand  specimens,  and 
it  was  only  after  sectioning  them  that  their  interesting  nature 
was  revealed.  Unfortunately,  the  time  at  my  disposal  was  rather 
limited,  and  my  examination  of  the  conglomerate  and  collection 
of  pebbles  were  not  as  detailed  and  thorough  as  they  might  have 
been . 

Previous    Literature. 

In  1878,  Mr.  R.  A.  V.  Murray^  noted  the  presence  of  grits 
associated  with  the  limestone  near  the  Thomson  river,  but  did 
not  mention  the  occurrence  of  igneous  detritus  in  the  grits. 

In  1899  Mr.  V.  R.  Stirling*  described  a  belt  of  bieccia  occur- 
ring   near    the   Thomson    river   copper    mine.      According    to    him 


1    "  Report  on  the  Walhalla  Gold-Field."     Spec.  Rept.  Dept.  Mines,  Vict.,  1901. 

'i  "Notes  on  alleged  Copper  Occurrences  at  Cooper's  Creek."  Monthly  Pro(f.  Rep.  Vict.  Geol. 
Siuv.,  No.  2,  1899. 

;i   I'log.  Rep.  Vict.  Geol.  Surv.,  No.  .1,  p.  4". 

4  "Notes  on  alleged  Copper  Occurrences  at  (.'oopei's  Creek."  Moiithly  I'luy  Kep.  \ict.  Surv. 
No.  2,  1899. 


Igneous  Pebbles.  287 

it  consisted  of  sub-angular  and  rounded  fragments  of  quartzite, 
decomposed  diorite,  limestone,  etc.,  in  a  dark-coloured  siliceous 
matrix  in  part  calcareous,  and  was  associated  with  a  decomposed 
dyke  and  a  belt  of  limestone.  He  concluded  from  the  following: 
evidence  : — 

(a)  The  direct  association  of  the  breccia  with  the  decom- 
posed dyke; 

(b)  The  appearance  of  presumably  the  same  belt  of  breccia 
and  dyke,  first,  on  one  side  of  the  limestone,  and  then 
on  the  other; 

(c)  The  occurrence  of  included  fragments  of  limestone  in 
the  breccia  ; 

that  the  breccia  was  probably  of  volcanic  origin,  occupying  an 
immense  strike  fault  in  the  silurian  rocks. 

In  1901.  Mr.  H.  Herman^  described  in  some  detail  the  relations 
l^etween  the  beds  near  the  Thomson  river.  He  states  that  "  A 
gradual  transition  in  texture  can  be  traced  from  the  coarse  fossili- 
ferous  conglomerate  .  .  .  through  fossiliferous  shales  with 
crinoid  stems,  to  highly  calcareous  encrinital  shales,  and  finally 
to  encrinital  limestone  or  marble."  He  regarded  the  conglomerate 
as  a  normal  shore  line  deposit,  and  explained  the  presence  of 
limestone  pebbles  in  it,  as  either  due  to  contemporaneous  erosion 
or  thouglit  possibly  that  they  may  have  been  derived  from  a  pre- 
existing formation.  Mr.  F.  Chapman^,  in  1907,  described  the 
fossils  occurring  in  the  limestone  near  the  Thomson  River  copper 
mine.  He  mentioned  the  occurrence  of  flakes  of  biotite  and 
chlorite,  and  contorted  bands  of  tuffaceous  andesitic  ejectmenta, 
in  sections  of  the  limestone,  and  suggested  that  volcanic  activity 
took  place  contemporaneously  with  the  deposition  of  the  limestone. 

Field    Relations    neap   the    Thomson    River,    Walhalla. 

The  Silurian  sediments  near  Walhalla ^  consist  lithologically  of 
sandstones,  shales  and  slates,  for  the  major  part,  but  lenticular 
bands  of  limestone  associated  with  gritty  and  conglomeratic  beds 
are  not  unusual.  The  structure  is  geosynclinal  with  thin  bedded, 
highly  cleaved,  shales  and  slates  in  the  centre  of  the  geosyncline, 
and  more  coarsely  grained  sandstones  and  gritty  beds  towards 
the  margins. 

1  Op.  cit.,  p.  12. 

2  "The  fossiliferous  limestones  and  cong:lonierates  of  the  Thomson  and  Tveis  rivers  and  Marble- 
creek,  Gippslaiid."     Records  Vict.  Geol.  Surv.,  vol.  ii.,  pt.  1. 

3  For  geological  map  and  sections  of  the  locality  dealt  with,  vide  Herman,  op.  cit. 


^88  N.  R.  Junner: 

Near  the  Thomson  River  copper  mine  the  beds  dip  easterly, 
^t  angles  between  SO.o  and  70o,  and  strike  N.  15o  E.  to  N.  20° 
E. ;  and  the  general  stratigraphical  succession,  from  the  west  to 
«ast,  starting  from  a  point  about  half  a  mile  west  of  the  Thomson 
River,  is  as  follows  : — 

(1)  Normal  shallow  water  marine  sediments  chiefly  shales  and 
sandstones. 

(2)  A  band  of  conglomerate  and  gritty  beds,  well  seen  in  sec- 
tions on  the  track  from  the  Copper  Mine  township  to  the  Jubilee 
Mine,  and  also  in  cuttings  near  the  limestone  quarries  in  Cooper's 
•Creek. 

(3)  Overlying  these  conglomerates  and  fossiliferous  grits  in  the 
Cooper's  Creek  section,  occurs  a  lenticular  mass  of  dense  black 
limestone,  highly  fossiliferous,  and  traversed  by  veins  of  calcite. 
The  limestone  matrix  weathers  more  rapidly  than  the  fossils,  and 
as  a  result  the  latter  are  often  seen  in  fine  relief  on  the  weathered 
surface  of  the  rock.  The  forms  present  are  chiefly  corals,  crinoids, 
brachiopods,  and  polyzoa,  and  they  are  very  similar  to  the  fossils 
■occurring  in  the  Yeringian  limestone  at  Lilydale.  Bedding  is  not 
very  evident  in  the  massive  limestone,  but  occasional  shale  bands 
•serve  to  define  it.  This  band  of  limestone  is  not  present  in  the 
flection  along  the  road  from  the  Copper  Mine  township  to  the 
Jubilee  Mine.  The  corresponding  strata,  in  this  section,  overlying 
the  conglomerate,  consist  of  grits  and  calcareous  shaly  beds,  and 
one  or  two  narrow  bands  of  black,  lioneycombed  chert,  which 
undoubtedly   replaces   fossiliferous  gi'itty   beds. 

4.  Another  outcrop  of  similar  black  limestone  occurs  not  far 
east  of  the  above  mentioned  beds.  At  the  time  of  my  visit  to  the 
locality,  it  was  being  cjuarried  immediately  to  the  north  of  Cooper's 
creek,  near  its  junction  with  the  Thomson  river.  This  patch  of 
limestone  does  not  extend  far  to  the  soutli,  for  sections  on  the 
same  line  of  strike  at  the  Thompson  River  show  that  the  massive 
limestono  is  absent,  and  that  its  place  is  taken  by  calcareous,  fos- 
siliferous grits  containing  pebbles  of  quartzite,  and  limestone 
nodules  composed  in  some  cases  almost  entirely  of  corals.  No 
igneous  pebbles  were  seen  by  the  wiiter   in  this  conglomerate. 

Pebbles  of  igneous  rocks  are  very  numerous  in  the  first  men- 
tioned conglomerate.  The  majority  of  these  pebbles  are  well- 
rounded,  and  they  are  generally  small,  being  rarely  more  than 
three  inches  in  diameter,  although  Mr.  Herman  mentions  that 
pebbles  up  to  6  inches  or  8  inches  in  diameter,  are  occasionally 
present.     They  are  partly  set  in  a  fine  brownish  coloured,  granular 


Igneous  Pebbles.  28i> 

matrix,  resembling  decomposed  igneous  material.  The  pebbles 
appear  to  be  chiefly  volcanic,  but  occasionally  coarsely  crystalline 
rocks,  plutonic  and  metamorphic  in  character,  are  seen.  Accord- 
ing to  Mr.  Herman!  diorite  pebbles  are  predominant;  but  in  my 
limited  examination  I  came  across  no  such  pebbles.  Microscopical 
examination  of  thin  sections  of  these  rocks  shows  that  many  of 
them  are  closely  related  to  one  another;  and  in  the  specimens  col- 
lected by  the  author,  all  stages  are  represented  between  horn- 
blende diabase,  and  the  spherulitic  facies  of  the  same  rock,  or 
variolite.  No  acid  igneous  rocks,  either  plutonic  or  volcanic,. 
Avere  found. 

Section  near  the  steel  bridge  over  the  Thomson  river,  about  txvo^ 
miles  north  of  its  junction  with  Stringer's  Crpplc'—The  river,  which 
has  followed  the  strike  of  the  sediments  for  some  considerable  dis- 
tance below  here,  at  this  point,  cuts  across  the  strike,  and  good 
sections  are  available,  especially  so  on  the  east  bank  of  the  river 
Avhere  cuttings  made  by  the  Long  Tunnel  Company  for  a  tram 
track,  have  uncovered  the  sediments. 

Fossiliferous  grits  and  calcareous  beds  w^ith  occasional  patches 
of  limestone  occur  at  intermediate  points  between  Cooper's  Creek 
and  the  steel  bridge,  and  are  again  present  further  north  of  this 
point.  These  outcrops  are  all  in  east  dipping  beds,  and  are  on 
the  same  line  of  strike  as  the  Copper  Mine  series  of  limestones 
and  conglomerates,  and  are  undoubtedly  the  northern  continua- 
tion of  the  same  beds. 

The  section,  near  the  steel  bridge,  shows  that  the  beds  consist 
of  hard,  indurated  black  and  grey,  fine  grained  sandstones  and 
shales,  interbedded  with  well  cleaved  slates,  and  coarse  grit  bands 
and  conglomerate;  all  dipping  east  at  50°  to  70o.  The  beds 
throughout  the  section  are  calcareous,  and  locally  contain  highly 
fossiliferous  lenticles  and  nodules  of  limestone.  A  fairly  gradual 
passage  can  be  traced  from  gritty  sandstones  into  coarse  fossili- 
ferous grit  and  conglomerate.  The  grits  are  often  honeycombed 
owing  to  the  removal  of  the  fossils.  In  the  more  calcareous  beds 
the  fossils  are  preserved  in  their  original  calcareous  matrix. 
Corals  (Favosites  chiefly)  and  crinoids  appear  to  be  the  most  com- 
mon fossils  in  these  beds. 

The  band  of  conglomerate  is  well  seen  on  the  north  side  of  a 
small  creek  entering  the  Thomson  River  from  the  east.  Pebbles 
of  quartzite  are  most  common   in  this  conglomerate,    and   igneous: 

i   Op.  cit.,  p.  12. 


290  K  R  Junner: 

pebbles  are  not  numerous.  Others  of  vein  quartz,  sandstone,  slate, 
limestone  and  rarely  chert  were  found  by  the  writer.  These 
pebbles  are  usually  small  and  rounded.  Some  of  them  are  well 
jointed  by  planes  perpendicular  to  their  longest  axes,  and  these 
joint  planes  are  occasionally  covered  with  a  film  of  pyrites.  Un- 
•doubtedly  this  conglomerate,  like  the  one  near  Cooper's  Creek, 
is  a  normal  marine  shore  line  deposit. 

The  author  saw  no  evidence  anywhere  of  the  immense  fault  re- 
ferred to  by  Mr.  Stirling,  and  he  feels  convinced  that  no  such 
fault  exists.  No  slickensides  or  gouges  were  seen ;  and  the  shape 
•of  the  pebbles  does  not  support  the  view  that  they  have  originated 
by  faulting.  No  great  disturbance  of  the  strata  has  taken  place, 
and  there  is  no  evidence  of  any  displacement  of  the  beds.  Thei 
petrological  characters  of  these  pebbles  disprove  of  the  idea  that  they 
were  formed  by  the  brecciation  of  the  associated  dyke,  referred 
to  by  Mr.  Stirling,  and  forcibly  suggest  that  they  were  derived 
from  pre  Upper  Silurian  igneous  rocks.  The  only  series  of  vol- 
canic rocks  in  Victoria,  known  to  be  pre  Silurian  in  age,  are 
the  Heathcotian,  and  hornblende  diabase  and  associated  pyro- 
clastic  rocks  are  characteristic  of  this  series.  The  pebbles  of 
gneiss  in  the  conglomerate  must,  undoubtedly,  have  come  from  the 
pre  Cambrian  metamorphics  of  eastern  Victoria,  and  the  large 
felspar  crystals,  referred  to  by  Mr.  Stirlingl,  may  have  come  from 
the  same  source. 

Further,  Mr.  Stirling's  strong  point  of  the  occurrence  of  the 
breccia  first,  on  the  east  side  of  the  limestone  near  the  Copper 
Mine  township,  and  on  the  west  side  of  it  further  south,  can  be 
explained  away  when  it  is  recognised  that  the  limestone  bands 
are  lenticular,  and  are  not  persistent  in  strike,  and  that  there 
may  be  two  or  more  lenticular  patches  of  limestone  not  quite  on 
the  same  line  of  strike. 

Moreover,  tlie  evidence  at  hand  does  not  support  Mr.  Chap- 
man's belief  in  contemporaneous  andesitic  vulcanicity.  It  seems 
to  me  more  probable,  as  Professor  Skeats2  has  suggested,  that  the 
volcanic  debris  included  in  the  limestones,  is  detrital.  The  as- 
sociated conglomerates  and  grits  contain  abundant,  undoubtedly 
•detrital,  igneous  pebbles,  and  it  is  quite  natural  to  expect  that 
some  of  this  material  should  be  deposited  with  the  limestones.  The 
field  relations  do  not  lend  any  support  to  Mr.   Chapman's  sugges- 


1  Op.  cit. 

2  "The  Volcanic  Rock  of  Victoria."    Pres.  Add.,  Sect.  C,  .\iis.  Assoc.  Adv.  Sci.,  I90». 


Igneous  Fehhles.  291 

tion,  and  therefore,  inferences  drawn  from  the  results  of  a  micro- 
scopic examination  of  thin  sections  of  these  rocks,  must  be  accepted 
with  caution.  Associated  interbedded  lavas  or  tuffs  are  absent, 
and  the  igneous  fragments  present  in  the  limestone  can  be  most 
easily  explained  on  the  assumption  that  they  were  derived  from 
the  same  source  as  the  detrital  igneous  pebbles.  No  indubitable 
Silurian  igneous  rocks  have  been  recognised  in  Victoria,  and  moro 
definite  evidence  than  that  brought  forward  by  Mr.  Chapman,  is 
needed  to  establish  Silurian  vulcanicity.  The  present  writer  agrees 
with  Mr.  Herman  that  the  conglomerates  and  grits  are  normal 
ehore  line  deposits,  and  that  the  included  igneous  pebbles  are  de- 
rived from  pre-existing  formations. 

Petrology. 

Honihlende   yiieiss. 

Specimen  Wl,  pebble  in  rduglomei-ate,  section  on  road  to  Jubilee 
Mine. 

The  hand  specimen  of  the  rock  is  coarse  grained.  Felspar  and 
hornblende  can  be  recognised  megascopically. 

Examined  microscopically,  the  rock  shows  very  well  the  effects 
of  mechanical  dynamic  metamorphism.  Strain  polarisation  has 
been  developed  in  the  quartz  grains,  and  they  are  considerably 
mylonitised.  The  horneblende  is  almost  entirely  light  green  actino- 
lite.  The  prisms  and  plates  of  this  mineral  are  very  rarely  idio- 
morphic,  and  are  often  twisted  and  bent  in  all  directions.  ■  The 
elongation  of  the  hornblende  crystals  is  parallel  to  the  direction 
of  foliation  of  the  rock.  They  are  occasionally  twinned  according 
to  the  usual  law;  w4th  twin  and  composition  plane  100.  One 
idiomorphic  basal  section  showed  an  excentric  emergence  of  an 
optic  axis.  Determination  of  the  axial  plane  showed  that  it 
bisected  the  obtuse  angle  between  the  cleavages,  and  that  it  was 
parallel  to  the  clinopinacoid,  as  is  usual  for  hornblende.  It  is 
moderately  pleochroic,  giving  the  following  colour  scheme  : — 
X  light  yellow  green. 
Y  light  green. 
Z     bright  green,  and  Z>Y>X  as  usual. 

The  maximum  extinction  angle  from  the  prismatic  cleavage  is  15o. 
The  felspar  is  greatly  kaolinised,  and  has  suffered  a  considei-able 
amount  of  mechanical  deformation.  Plagioclase  appears  to  be 
in  excess  of  orthoclase.     The  refractive  index  of  the  plagioclase  is 


292  N.  R.  Jv/nner:- 

at  times  greater,  and  at  other  times  less  than  that  of  the  quartz, 
and  hence  it  appears  to  be  oligoclase  or  oligoclase-andesine. 
Sphene  is  not  uncommon  as  irreguhir  shaped  dusty  masses. 
Rarely  it  is  present  as  double  wedge  shaped  crystals.  A  little 
chlorite  occurs  replacing  the  hornblende;  quartz  is  not  abundant. 
Apparently  the  original   rock   was   an   intermediate   plutonic   rock. 

Horiihlende   diabase    (Epidiorife). 

Section  W2.  Pebble  in  conglomerate  near  the  Thomson  River 
copper  mine,  is  a  holocrystalline,  fairly  even  grained  rock  with 
pilotaxitic  fabric.  There  is  a  tendency  towards  an  ophitic  tex- 
ture in  places,  but  it  is  never  very  pronounced.  Plagioclase  and 
actinolite  constitute  almost  the  whole  rock,  but  there  is  also  a 
little  quartz,  ilmenite,  chlorite  and  zircon  present.  The  actinolite 
occurs  usually  in  anhedral  grains  and  masses.  It  is  moderately 
pleochroic,  varying  in  colour  from  light  green  to  almost  colourless. 
It  is  ophitically  penetrated  by  the  felspar  in  places.  Most  of  the 
felspar  laths  are  either  simply  twinned,  or  untwinned.  Owing 
to  their  extensive  sericitisation,  it  is  frequently  impossible  to 
determine  their  original  characters.  Extinction  angles  as  high 
as  350  from  the  twin  planes  were  measured  on  certain  felspars, 
indicating  a  rather  basic  labradorite.  Interesting  outgrowths  have 
taken  place  around  the  original  felspar  laths.  Their  idiomorphic 
outlines  are  generally  visible  as  greatly  altered  cores,  surrounded 
by  a  clear  outer  zone  of  albite  showing  ragged  boundaries. 

One  interesting  case,  of  additional  material  being  added  to  a 
former  idiomorphic  crystal  of  felspar  at  two  different  periods,  was 
visible  in  this  section.  By  the  first  addition  tlie  idiomorphic 
crystal  became  rectangular  in  outline.  Both  the  original  crystal 
and  the  added  material  Avere  now  completely  sericitised,  and  a 
second  marginal  addition  of  pellucid  felspar  took  place.  The 
twinning  of  the  original  felspar  extends  through  the  clear  ex- 
terior zone,  showing  that  the  addition  has  been  in  crystallographic 
continuity  with  the  primary  felspar.  The  method  of  formation 
of  these  outgrowths  has  been  masked  in  the  present  case  by  thdl 
great  changes  undergone  by  the  rock.  Professor  Judd,i  from  a 
study  of  similar  outgrowths  on  felspar  crystals  from  the  Western 
Isles  of  Scotland  and  elsewhere,  came  to  the  conclusion  that  the 
majority  of  such  additions  took  place  Avhilst  the  felspars  were 
fresh  and  unaltered,  and  that  in  the  Scotch  case  the  outgrowths  took 

1  Quarterly  Journal  of  the  Oeoloffical  Society,  London. 


/(/neons   Pehhle.s.  298 

place  at  the  expense  of  the  original  glassy  ground  mass.  He  men- 
tions that  in  certain  specimens  of  rocks  from  New  South  Wales 
received  by  him  from  Professor  David,  the  outgrowths  apparently 
took  place  after  advanced  kaolinisation  of  the  original  crystals. 
In  the  Walhalla  specimens,  the  latter  remarks  apply  equally  well, 
with  the  substitution  of  sericitisation  for  kaolinisation. 

A  moderate  amount  of  interstitial  quartz,  containing  fluid  and 
glass  inclusions,  is  present  in  this  section.  It  is  doubtful  whether 
the  quartz  is  primary  or  not.  Considerable  changes  have  taken 
place  in  the  rock,  and  it  is  possible  that  the  quartz  was  formed 
at  the  time  of  the  amphibolitisation  of  the  original  femic  mineral 
which  Avas  probably  augite.  A  little  chlorite  (pennine)  occurs 
replacing  the  hornblende,  specimen  W4,  from  same  locality  as 
W2.  This  rock  resemljles  the  preceding  one  very  closely.  Quartz 
however  is  rare.  Sub-ophitic  hornblende,  and  plagioclase  laths 
predominate.  The  plagioclase  appears  to  be  present  in  two  genera- 
tions. An  analysis  of  this  rock  for  silica  and  alkalies  gave  the 
following  result  : — 

SiO^    52.99  per  cent. 

Ko  0    2.09   per  cent. 

Nao  0  ...  3.21  per  cent. 
The  analysis  confirms  the  microscopical  determination  of  the  rock 
as  a  hornblende  diabase,  or  according  to  Barker's  nomenclature, 
a  hornblende  dolerite.  Since  the  hornblende  is  secondary,  pre- 
sumably replacing  augite,  the  rock  may  be  described  as  an  epi- 
diorite.  No  unequivocal  potash  felspar  is  present  in  the  section, 
so  that  the  relatively  high  percentage  of  potash  indicated  in  the 
analysis,  is  probably  due  to  the  extensive  sericitisation  undergone 
by  the  original  felspars. 

Basic  spherulite   {1  variolite). 

In  hand  specimen,  this  rock  is  compact  and  aplianitic,  and  green 
in  colour.  No  vesicles  are  seen  even  with  the  aid  of  a  lens,  and 
in  only  one  specimen  collected  was  there  any  evidence  of  varioles. 

Section  W6,  pebble  in  conglomerate;  section  on  road  to  the 
Jubilee  Mine.  Examined  microscopically,  it  is  seen  that  the  rock 
is  composed  almost  entirely  of  beautifully  developed,  sheaf  and 
fan  like,  and  occasionally  spherulitic  aggregates  of  hornblende 
and  felspar.  Phenocrysts  are  practically  absent,  as  are  also  true 
varioles  marked  off  from  the  ground  mass.  According  to  the  de- 
finition of  Professors  Cole  and  Gregory, ^  "  a  variolite  is  a  devitri- 

11 


294  iV.  B.  Jiinner: 

fied  spherulitic  tachylyte,  typically  coarse  in  structure."  The 
■latter  phrase  of  which  was  interpreted  by  Miss  Raisin^  to  prob- 
ably mean  that  spherulites  were  visible  niacroscopically.  The 
Walhalla  rock  therefore  differs  from  the  typical  variolite  in  the 
absence  of  macroscopic  ally  visible  spherulites  or  varioles.  The 
hornblende  is  entirely  actinolite,  and  it  usually  occurs  as  long 
niicrolites  frequently  crossing  one  another.  Examined  under  the 
high  power,  many  of  these  niicrolites  are  seen  to  be  skeleton  crys- 
tals, and  they  very  often  enclose  a  tubular  core  of  ground  ni/ass 
material  showing  very  low  polarisation  colours.  The  edges  of  the 
microlitea  are  often  greatly  serrated,  and  they  usually  fork  at  the 
ends,  and  pass  gradually  into  the  ground  mass  of  the  rock.  Cross 
sections  of  these  laths  of  actinolite  occur  in  the  form  of  small 
jjarallelograms,  with  central  inclusions,  corresiionding  to  the 
tubular  inclusions  present  in  the  niicrolites.  The  actinolite  laths 
show  a  characteristic  cross  fracture  at  right  angles  to  their  length, 
and  more  rarely  a  cleavage  parallel  to  their  elongation.  Twinning 
according  to  the  usual  law  is  not  infrequently  j) resent.  Both 
these  niicrolites  and  the  spherulites  appear  to  be  essentially  con- 
temporaneous in  origin.  At  times  the  laths  intersect  the 
spherulites,  but  often  the  reverse  is  true,  and  the  spherulites  cut 
across,  or  project  into  the  actinolite  laths.  Chlorite  replaces  much 
of  the  actinolite.  The  felspar  laths  gi-ve  maximum  extinction 
angles  of  25^.  They  exhibit  undulose  extinction,  and  are  serici- 
tised  in  places. 

Section  W8,  of  pebble  from  same  locality  as  the  preceding  speci- 
men. This  is  an  intermediate  type  between  the  normal  diabase 
and  the  spherulitic  rock.  Microscopically,  it  consists  almost  en- 
tirely of  hornblende  and  felspar  laths,  with  secondary  chlorite. 
The  long  niicrolites  of  actinolite  show  the  characteristic  serrated 
edges,  and  the  central  tul)ular  inclusion  of  the  ground  mass.  One 
or  two  grains  of  the  hornblende  retain  the  rectangular  ilcavage 
of  augite,  clearly  proving  the  secondary  origin  of  the  former 
mineral.  The  felspar  laths  are  usually  only  simply  twinned,  and 
they  are  occasionally  zoned.  Extinction  angles  are  generally  low. 
but  angles  as  great  as  40^  were  measured  on  isolated  sections. 
The  felspar  in  places  includes  hornblende,  and  in  others  pene- 
trates the  femic  mineral,  showing  that  both  minerals  are  essen- 
tially contemporaneous  in  origin.  The  chlorite  is  markedly 
pleochroic,   in  shades  of  green   and  yellow.      One  section   gave   an 

1  "The  Vaiiolitic  Rocks  of  Mont  Genevre."     Q.J.G  S..  Loiirtoii.  I8!K),  p.  3:^0. 

2  "  Variolite  of  the  Lleyn  and  associated  Volcanic  Rocks."     (|».J.(;.S.,  I-oiidoii,  1893,  y>.  ir>.'i. 


Igneous  Pefthles.  2 *.»•'> 

extinction  angle  of  7  degrees  from  the  001  cleavage.  It  is  dis- 
tinctly biaxial,  having  a  fairly  wide  axial  angle;  is  negative;  and 
is  referable  to  clinochlore.  A  little  disseminated  pyrites  occurs 
throughout  the  section,  and  is  associated  with  brown  iron  oxide. 
True  spherulites  are  absent  from  the  rock,  but  j)lumuse  aggregates 
of  hornblende  and  felspar  are  common. 

Section  W5  is  practically  identical  with  W6,  except  that  the 
spherulitic  structure  is  not  so  well  developed.  Veinlets  of  quartz 
and  chlorite,   with   a  little  brown   oxide,   traverse  the   rock. 

Section  W3,  of  a  pebble  from  same  locality  as  the  foregoing 
specimens.  Microscopically,  the  texture  is  aphanitic,  with  the  ex- 
ception of  a  few  porphyritic  crystals  of  felspar.  These  appear 
to  be  entirely  calcic  felspar,  giving  maximum  extinction  angles  of 
430  from  the  twin  planes.  The  basis  of  the  rock  is  not  easily 
deciphered,  but  it  appears  to  consist  of  plagioclase,  grains  of  Ijlack 
iron  oxide,  and  ?  augite.  Vesicles  infilled  with  chlorite  are  rarely 
present.  The  rock  is  probably  a  basic  volcanic,  approaching  a 
basalt. 

Section  W9,  pebble  in  conglomerate,  near  steel  bridge  over 
Thomson  River,  is  a  highly  chloi'itised.  sericitised  and  carbonated 
rock,  probably  a  diabase.  Apparently  both  plagioclase  and  ortho- 
clase  are  present  in  the  section ;  chlorite  (pennine)  replacing  ? 
femic  mineral;  quartz  showing  strain  effects  and  a  little  biotite  and 
ilmenite. 


Summary. 

A  series  of  conglomerates,  grits,  and  limestones,  containing 
igneous  pebbles  and  debris,  occurs  near  the  Thomson  river,  Wal- 
halla.  Certain  previous  explanations,  of  the  origin  of  the  con- 
glomerate, and  of  the  igneous  material,  appear  to  be  unsatisfac- 
tory. It  is  shown  that  the  explanation,  which  maintains  that  tlje 
conglomerate  is  derived  by  post  Silurian  faulting  and  brecciation 
of  an  accompanying  dyke,  is  at  variance  with  the  field  relations; 
and  also  that  there  is  little  evidence  of  vulcanicity  contemporaneous 
with  the  deposition  of  the  sediments.  The  Avriter  concludes  that 
the  conglomerate  is  a  normal  marine  shore  line  deposit,  and  that 
the  igneous  debris  present  in  the  conglomerates  and  limestones 
is  derived  from  pre-existing  igneous  rocks. 

Petrologically,  the  pebbles  show  considerable  similarity.  All 
intermediate  stages  between  a  hornblende  diabase  (epidiorite),  and 
the    spherulitic    type    of    the    same    rock    are    represented    in    the 

llA 


29(i  N.  B.  Junner :    Igneous  Pebbles. 

pebbles  collected.  Pel)ble8  of  hornblende  gneiss,  quartzite.  lime- 
stone, slate,  sandstone  and  chert  are  also  present  in  the  con- 
glomerate. 


EXPLANATION  OF   PLATE. 

Plate  II. 

Fig.  L — Microphotograph  of  hornblende  diabase  pebble.  No. 
W2,  showing  two  successive  outgrowths  from  an  idio- 
morphic   felspar   phenocryst.      Ordinary  light  x  25. 

Fig.  2. — Microphotograph  of  spherulitic  diabase.  No.  W6. 
Ordinary  liglit   x  25. 


rroc.  K.S.   Victoriii,    I  it  11.       Plat.>  II. 


Fig.    1. 


Fig.   2. 


[Proc.  Roy.  Soc.  Victoria,  27   (N.S.),   I^t.  II.,   i5>l4.] 


Art.   XX. — (Jontributioiii^  to  the  Flora  of  Anstiulla,  No.  22} 

By    ALFRED    J.    EVVART,    J).Sc.,    Ph.D. 

(< government  Botanist  of   Victoiia  and  Professor  of   Botany  and 
Plant  Physiolog-y  in  the  University  of  Melbourne). 

[Kead    12th  November,  1<)14.]. 

.\na(;allis  akvknsjs,   Ty.      '*Pimperiiel."      (Priuuilaceae). 
Recently  responsible  for  the  death  of  23  cage  birds  at  an  aviary 
in   Mentone.      The  birds  were  given   a   few  handfuls  of  cliickweed. 
containing   Pimpernel.      Next  morning   23   out   of   about    100  liirds 
were  dead. 

Anthistiria  imberbis,  Retz  (1779-91),  (A.  australis,  R.  Br.,  1810), 
(A.  FoRSKALii,  KuNTH.,  1835),  (Thkmeda  Forskalii,  Hackel, 
1885).       (Gramineae).       "Common  Kangaroo  Grass." 

A  native  to  Australia,  South  Africa,  and  Asia.  This  peren- 
nial grass  is  given  under  A.  ciliata,  L.  in  Bentham's  Flora  Aus- 
tralieusis,  but  Linnaeus'  species  is  an  annual  Indian  plant.  It 
has  also  been  termed  A.  vulgaris  In*  Hackel  in  Engler's  Pflanzen 
Familien.  11.  Teil.  2.  Abt.  p.  29,  1887,  but  the  oldest  name  has 
priority.  The  plant  has  had  five  different  scientific  names  in  100 
years,  but  the  popular  name  has  remained  constant  during  the 
same  period. 

Antirrhinum  Orontium,  L.      "Lesser  Snapdragon." 
(Scrophulariaceae). 
Ballarat.       W.     H.     Bacchus;     Camberwell,     C.     French     (jnr.). 
October,   1913. 

Previously  recorded  as  a  garden  escape,  but  now  appears  to 
maintain  itself  when  wild,  and  may  be  considered  as  naturalised. 
It  is  a  native  of  Europe,  Asia  and  Africa. 

Artkmlsia  vulgaris,    L.       "Mugwoi-t."      (Conipositae). 

Coode  Island,  Victoria.  J.  R.  Tovey  and  C.  French  (jnr.). 
March,   1912. 

Apparently  in  process  of  naturalisation.  It  is  a  native  of  N. 
Temperate   regions. 

1.  No.  21  in  Proc.  Roy.  Soc.  Victoria,  vol.  xxvi.  (n.s.),  p.  152,  1913. 


298  Alfred  J.  Eicart  : 

AsTKR  SUBUT.ATUS,   Miclix.      " Shrub  Aster."     (Compositae). 

Otukai,  New  Zealand.     H.  Carse,  April,   1914. 

A  native  of  North  America,  widely  spread  as  a  naturalised 
alien  in  Victoria  and  New  South  Wales,  but  has  not  been  hitherto 
recorded  as  growing  wild  in  New  Zealand. 

Atropis  magellanica  or  Atropis  stricta?      (Hook).      Des\. 
(Grauiineae). 

Gerniantown,  near  Geelong,  Victoria.  H.  B.  Williamson, 
N'ovember,   1910. 

This  grass  is  a  native  of  the  southern  part  of  South  America,, 
has  only  recently  appeared,  and  is  apparently  sufficiently  estab- 
lished to  be  considered  naturalised,  at  least  near  Germantown. 
In  regard  to  it  Professor  Hitchcock  writes: — "The  species  of  thi» 
genus  are  in  great  confusion,  and  it  is  difficult  to  identify  them 
with  certainty,  until  the  group  has  been  inonographed.  The  three 
nerved  upper  glume  of  A.  magellanica  is  unusual."  This  species 
has  at  different  times  been  placed  under  Catabrosa,  and  also  under 
Glyceria.  The  grass  appears  as  though  it  would  be  of  some  value 
as  a  pasture  plant,  but  nothing  definite  appears  to  be  known  from 
this  point  of  view  in  regard  to  it.  It  has  no  injurious  properties 
so  far  as  is  known  at  present. 

Dr.  Stapf  writes: — "The  spikelets  agree  very  well  with  those 
of  a  specimen  of  Glyceria  stricta,  collected  l)y  Adamson.  near  Mel- 
bourne, in  1856,  and  fairly  well  with  those  of  Hooker's  type  ot 
Glyceria  stricta  from  New  Zealand,  except  that  the  joints  of  the 
rhacilla  are  generally  longer,  and  the  spikelets  therefore  laxer ; 
but  we  have  no  samples  Avith  panicles  equally  loose.  I  wonder 
whether  it  can  be  a  shade  form.  This  could  only  be  decided  in  the 
field  or  by  experiment.  Meanwhile  the  grass  might  Ix-  marked  as 
Glyceria  (Atropis)  stricta,  f.  perlaxa." 

Professor  Hackel  considers  it  to  be  Atropis  stricta.  Hack.  var. 
tenuispica,  Hack,  ined  (Glyceria  tenuispica  Steud.).  a  species  found 
in   Australia   and   New   Zealand. 

The   ])ositi()ii   of   this   grass   is   for   the   present    uncertain. 

AvENA   15ARBATA,    Brot.       "Barbed   Oat  Grass"       (Graniiiieae). 

Govcniiiiciit   Domain.    Melbourne.      Edwin    Cheel,    9/1/1913. 
A  native  of  Aral)ia.  Asia  Minor,  and  the  Mediterranean  Regions, 
not  vet  sufficientlv  established  to  l)e  considered   naturalised. 


1 


Floni  of  Aiu^tralni.  299 


Caladenia  con(;K!sta,  K.  Br.      "Slender  Cfilfidein.-i."     (Orchidaceae). 

Mt.  Difficult.  (Iranipiaus.      J.  W.  Audas,  30/10/1;^ 
Tho   specimens   have   bronze   to    purple    flowers.      Bentliani    gives 
the    tloAvers    as    1-2    and    pink.       Luxuriant    specimens    also    occur 
with   pale  or   puiplish   pcriantlis,   and  they   may  have  up  to  three 
or  four  flowers. 

Cexti  NCULi's   MiviMU.s,    L.      "Chaff  Weed  "      (Prinndaceae). 

This  tiny  plant  is  not  recorded  in  Bentham's  Flora  Austra- 
liensis,  and  in  Baron  von  Mueller's  Census  is  recorded  as  Aus- 
tralian. In  the  Key  to  Victorian  Plants,  it  is  given  with  the  native 
plants,  Init  with  the  proviso,  "  possibly  immigrated."  The  plant 
was  first  collected  in  1883  at  Mt.  Macedon  as  Anagallis  centunculus, 
and  since  then  has  been  found  as  Hawkesdale  (1899,  F.  M.  Reader 
and  H.  B.  Willianison,  and  at  Mentone,  C.  R.  Roberts,  1910). 
It  is  possibly  more  widely  spread,  but  overlooked  on  account  of  its 
small  size.  There  can  be  no  doubt  that  it  is  a  naturalised  alien 
in  Victoria,  and  not  an  original  member  of  the  native  flora. 
In  Engler's  Pflanzenreich  (Primulaceae,  1905),  it  is  recorded  from 
Europe,  Asi.i,  Africa,  North  and  South  America,  but  not  from 
Australia. 

CoNRiNOiA   oKiEXTAMs,    iJonii.       " Haie's    Ear."      (Cruciferae). 

Warracknabeal,  Borung  Shire,  Oct.,  1913.  St.  Eloy  Dalton, 
Nov.,  1904. 

First  i-ecorded  a  garden  escape,  near  Qimlwola,  and  now  ap- 
parently naturalised.  A  freely  seeding  annual,  apt  to  smother 
seedlings  in  cultivated  land,  but  not  poisonous,  or  specially  in- 
jurious. 

Cynosurus   ECniNAius,    Fi.      "  Rougli    Dog's  tail."      (Graniineae). 

Drouin.  February,    1913.      W.  C.   Anders.. n   and  H.   J.   Lindsay. 

This  grass  is  a  native  of  Europe,  whicli  appears  occasionally 
on  the  shores  of  Great  Britain.  It  appears  to  have  definitely  estab- 
lished itself  as  a  naturalised  alien,  and  to  be  giowing  plentifully 
in  at  least  one  district  of  Victoria.  The  plant  is  an  annual,  and 
less  valuable  as  a  pasture  grass  than  the  Crested  D 
(Cynosurus  cristatus,   L.),  which  is  a  perennial. 


ujlLIBRARYJaoj 


.-v 


300  Alfred  J.   Ewwrt : 

DiURls  MACULATA,   Sill.      "Leopard   Oicliid."      (Oichideae). 
.Vereker  Range,   Wilson's  Promontory.     J.    W.   Audas.      August, 
1914. 

Previously  recorded  for  Sealer's  Cove  by  F.   v.  Mueller. 

Eragrostis  curvula,   Nees,   var.   valida,   Stapf.      "  African   Love 
Grass."       (Grainineae). 

Between  Drouin  and  Warragul.  Vict.  W.  (i.  Anderson,  Fel).. 
1913. 

This  puzzling  grass,  which  could  for  a  long  time  not  be  referred 
to  any  described  species  of  Eragrostis,  is  considered  by  Mrs.  Agnes 
Chase  to  be  the  variety  described  by  Stapf.  It  is  a  native  of  South 
Africa,  and  the  ordinary  forms  are  sometimes  grown  as  fodder 
plants.  When  old,  however,  the  stems  are  rather  fibrous  and  the 
foliage  scanty.  It  can  hardly  as  yet  be  regarded  as  definitely 
naturalised. 

Krechtitks  Atkinsoniak,  F.   v.   M.      (Conipositae). 
Otukai,  New  Zealand.     H.  Carse,  April,  1914. 

Not  previously  recorded  as  growing  wild  in  New  Zealand.  It  is 
a  native  of  New  South  Wales  and  Queensland. 

Ehkchtitks  valkrtanakfolta,    1).   C.       (Coiiiposirae). 

Otukai,    New    Zealand.      H.    Carse,    April.     1914.      A    native    of 

North    America    not    previously    recorded    as    introduced    in    New 

Zealand.      This  plant  lias  been   recorded   as  a   naturalised   alien    in 

New  South  Wales,  but  has  not  yet  made  its  appearance  in  Victoria. 

Erigkron  caxadknsk,    L.       "Canadian   Fleab.ine."     ((^onipositae). 
Orbost.      N.  Wellington,  23/3/1914. 

A  widely  spread  naturalised  alien  first  recorded  as  naturalised  in 
1908,  and  which  has  now  reached  the  Orbost  district. 

(tladiolus  grandis,   Thunberg.      (Iridaceao).      The  liH rge-floweied 
Cladiohis. 

A  native  of  S.  Africa,  which  was  recorded  as  a  spreading  garden 
escape  at  Eltham  in  1911,  and  has  now  appeared  in  thousands 
along  a  drain  at  Digger's  Rest,  on  the  Bendigo  line.  (C.  French, 
Jr.,  Oct.,   1914.) 

The  perfume  is  very  strong,  not  unlike  the  scent  of  primroses. 
The  plant  does  not  seem  to  have  any  obnoxious  qualities,  but  many 


Flora,  of  Ansfraliti.  301 

of  the  Irideae  are  poisonous,  and  hence  objectionable  in  pastures. 
It  may  now  be  regarded  as  an  established  naturalised  alien. 

GoMPHRKNA   CANESCENS,    K.    Bi'.      ( Amaraiitaceae). 

Herbert  Bros.'  Station,  No.  2,  Darwin.  G.  F.  Hill,  28/5/]:!. 
This  plant  has  reddish-purple  heads  and  seems  worthy  of  garden 
cultivation.  The  heads  of  the  ordinary  form  are  usually  pale  in 
colour. 

Helipterum  Guilfoylki,    Evvart.   Proc.    Roy.    Soc.  Victoria,    vol.    xx. 
(n.s.),  p.  82.  1907  =  H.  Zacchkus^,    8.    le    Moore.     (Compositae). 

Mr.  Spencer  le  Moore  writes  that  the  achenes  of  this  plant  differ 
only  from  those  of  H.  Zaccheus,  S.  le;  Moore,  in  lieing  rich  brown 
instead  of  dark  slate  colour  and  slightly  shorter,  and  also  finds 
the  same  peculiar  mucilaginous  layer  in  H.  Zaccheus  that  was  first 
described  for  H.  Guilfoylei.  The  latter,  therefore,  becomes  a 
synonym  to  the  former. 

Hydrocotyle  medicaginoides  Turcz.      "Trefoil   Pennywort." 
(Umbel  life  raft). 
Miss  J.   E.  Tilden,  No.  811.     Point  Lonsdale,   Nov.,   1912.      Not 
previously  recorded  for  the  south  of  Victoria. 

Hyoscyamus  albus,   L.      "White   Henbane."      (Solanaceae). 

Williamstown,  Victoria.     C.  French,  junr.,  Oct.,   1913. 

Noted  as  a  garden  escape  at  Cashel  nearly  20  years  ago,  and 
now  definitely  naturalised.  The  fruit  is  peculiar,  opening  by  a 
lid.  In  ancient  times  this  plant  was  regarded  as  a  sacred  plant, 
and  sometimes  smoked  like  tobacco  as  a  preventative  for  toothache. 
It  belongs  to  a  poisonous  genus,  and  contains  a  hypnotic  and 
deleriant  poison,  hyoscyamin,  but  appears  to  be  much  less  poisonous 
than  the  black  Henbane,  Hyoftct/amns  niger. 

LiNAKiA   ELATINK,   li.       "Hairy  Toad  Flax."     (Scrophulariaceae). 

Spreading  in  the  Werribee  district.  C.  French,  junr.,  Oct., 
1913.     ■ 

LiPPiA  NODIFLORA,   Mich,   var.   SARMENTOSA.      ( Verbcuaceae). 

Williamstown.     J.  R.  Tovey,  Jan.,  1914. 

The  plant  grows  in  dense  mats  in  the  gutters  and  has  evidently 
been    introduced    by    foreign    shipping.      It    is    a   common    tropical 


302  Alfred  J.  Ewart : 

weed,   and  has  been   used  for  lawns  in   Egypt,   where  grasses  and 
ordinary  h\wn  plants  fail. 

MoRGANiA.  GLABRA,  R.  Br.  "Smooth  Morgania."  (Scrophulariaceae). 
Myall,  near  Kerang.  Miss  Sheehan  (H.B.W.  No.  1465.) 
Not  previously  recorded  as  Victorian.  Baron  von  Mueller  in- 
cluded all  the  species  of  Morgania  Avith  Stemodia  viscosa  as  Stemodia 
Morgania,  and  hence  the  distribution  of  the  species  of  Morgania 
now  recognised  is  not  easy  to  trace,  but  no  previous  specimens  of  it 
or  records  of  it  from  Victorian  localities  can  be  found. 

Olkaria  ramulosa,   Benth.,   var.   intkrmkdia,    A.  J.   Ewart. 
New   variety.       (Conipositae). 

J.  W.  Andas.      (xrampians,  1914. 

This  form  has  the  leaves  of  the  type  and  the  small  heads  of 
(Aster)  Oltaria  microjihylla,  Vent.,  thus  justifying  Bentham's  inclu- 
sion of  this  species  as  a  varietj/  of  0.  ramulosa.  Baron  von 
Mueller  maintained  both  species  in  the  Census,  although  Bentham 
noted  the  small  flower  heads  of  the  Grampians  form. 

It  is  apparently  a  mountain  variety,  whereas  other  intermediate 
forms  which  come  nearer  to  the  variety  microphylla  are  coastal 
plants  (Portland,  etc.). 

Ononis  spinosa,  L.      (Conipositae). 

Cobden,   C.    A.   Ogilvie,    1913. 

This  weed,  the  "  Spiny  Restbarrow,''  a  native  of  Europe,  may 
now  be  considered  to  be  definitely  naturalised.  Though  practically 
useless  as  a  fodder  plant,  it  usually  grows  on  the  poorer  soils,  and 
since  it  is  easily  destroyed  by  cultivation,  is  hardly  to  be  regarded 
as  a  serious  weed. 

Orthocekas  stkictum,    K.    Br.      "  Crow  Orchid."     (Orcliidaceae). 

Head  of  Barry's  Creek,  Wilson's  Promontory.  Messrs.  Pitcher 
and  Audas,  Dec,  1912.  Not  previously  lecorded  for  the  National 
Park. 

PnY.SALls   VISCOSA,  L.      "Sticky  Cape  Goo.seberry  or  (i round  Cherry." 
(Soliinaceae). 
C.  C.  Brittlel)ank,   .Marcli.   1913. 

Growing  in  sucli  al)undanci'  as  to  be  almost  a  pest.  The  plant, 
which  has  already  been  recorded  as  an  exotic,  may  now  be  regarded 
as  definitely  naturalised. 


Flont  oj  Australia.  :>(>:> 

PiNUS  INSIGNIS,    Doug.      Monterey  Pine."      (Coniferae). 

Between  Beaconsfield  and  Emerald.  J.  W.  Auda.s  and  E.  E. 
Pescott.  1913.      Upper  Beaconsfield.     J.  R.  Tovey,  August,  1914. 

This  tree  is  now  evidently  establishing  itself  as  a  naturalised 
alien  in  many  parts  of  Victoria,  especially  in  the  Beaconsfield  and 
Emerald  districts.  It  spreads  from  wind-borne  seeds  developed  on 
planted  trees. 

Prasophyllum  flavum,   R.  Br.      "Yellow  Leek  Orchid.'' 
(Orchidaceae). 
Mt.  Baw  Baw.     C.  French,  junr.,  January,  1914. 
A   native  of   New  South   Wales   and   Queensland   not   previously 
recorded  for  Victoria. 

Pkasophyllum  Suttoni,  Rogers  and  Rees.     "Alpine  Leek  Orchid." 
(Orchidaceae). 
Mt.  Baw  Baw,     C.  French,  junr.,  January,   1914. 
A  native  of  Victoria  previously  only  recorded  from  the  Buffalo 
Plateau. 

Prostanthera  denticulata,   R.  Br.     "Rough  Mint  Bush." 
(Labiatae). 
Hall's  Gap.  Grampians,   Victoria.      Miss  J.    E.   Tilden,   No.   962, 
Dec,  1912. 

In  Mr.  Campbell's  "Census  of  Grampian  Plants"  (Vict.  Nat., 
Vol.  XXVIII..  p.  108.  1911)  footnote,  it  is  stated  that  this  species 
does  not  occur  in  tlie  Grampian  Mountains.  It  was,  however,  re- 
corded from  the  Grampians  by  Baron  von  Mueller,  and  still  grows 
in  fair  abundance. 

Ranunculus  ophioglossifolius,  Vil.  "Snake  tongue  Ranuncukis." 
(Ranunculaceae). 

Haddon.  between  Linton  and  Ballarat.  H.  B.  Williamson,  Dec, 
1912. 

This  Briti.sh  plant  is  a  native  of  West  Europe  and  the  Mediter- 
ranean regions.  The  plant  is  growing  wild  in  fair  abundance  and 
may  be  regarded   as  definitely  naturalised. 

Reseda  lutea,  L.      "Cut-leaved  Mignonette."     (Resedaceae.) 
Ptegnella.  Sth.  Australia.     T.  G.  Osborn.  Sept..   1913. 
This  plant   is   a  native  of   Europe,    especially   in   limestone   dis- 
tricts.    This  is   a  nevs-  record  for  South  Australia,   but   Profes.sor 


304  Alfred  J.  Euutrt :    Florn,  of  Australia. 

Osborn  informs  me  he  has  since  visited  tlie  locality  and  rooted  out 
the  plant.  It  will  be  interesting-  to  see  whether  it  reappears  in  the 
same  or  other  localities. 

Salix  Caprea,  L.      "Sallow  Willow."     (Salicaceae). 

Leongatha.     J.  M.  Molloy,   15/8/14. 

A  native  of  Europe  and  Asia,  growing  usually  near  water.  It  is 
occasionally  planted  and  has  thence  run  wild,  appearing  to  hold  its 
own  in  the  native  scrub,  particularly  on  river  banks  or  near  water. 

Thiclymitra  vknosa,  R.  Br.     "Veined  Hood  Orchid."    (Orcliidaceae). 

Mt.  Baw  Baw.  J.  G.  O'Donoghue  and  C.  French,  junr.,  Jan.. 
1914. 

A  native  of  New  South  Wales  and  South  Australia,  not  previously 
recorded  for  Victoria. 

Thitonia   mneata,   Ker.      "Pencilled   Tritonia."      (Irideae.) 

Charlton,  Nov.,  1913. 

Already  recorded  as  a  garden  escape  at  Geelong,  and  apparently 
in  process  of  becoming  naturalised. 

Vicia   tetrasperma,  Moench.     "Slender  Vetch."     (Leguminosae). 

Along  the  railway  enclosure  at  Glen  Iris,  fairly  abundant  and 
away  from  cultivation  paddocks.     W.  G.  Anderson,  Nov.,  1912. 

The  plant  has  previously  been  recoided  as  an  exotic  and  may  now 
be  regarded  as  definitely  naturalised.  It  is  a  native  of  Europe  and 
W.  Asia,  from  Mediterranean  to  Arctic.  The  present  form  ap- 
proaches towards  the  variety  i/roc/I/'s.  l)nt  has  the  shorter  pods  of 
the  type. 

Zycjopiivllum   ovatum,   Ewart  and   White.       "Dwarf  Twinleaf." 
(Zygophyl  laceae). 

Ouyeii.      H.  B.  Williamson.  No.  1468,  Sept.,  1913. 


11  certain  Oceanic  Languages. 


[Proc.  Rot.  Soc.  Victoria,  27  (N.S.),  Part  II..  191tJ. 

Akt  XXI. —  Certain  ISuffixes  in  Oceanic  Laagumje,^ 

By    W.    G.    I  yens,    M.A. 

(Comuumicated  by  R.    D.    Boys,    M.A.). 

1.  —  Nature  of  the  Enquiry. 
Four  Tables  have  been  compiled  by  the  writer,  showing  : — 
Table  I.— Verbal  Suffixes 
Table  II. — Noun  Suffixes 
Table  III.— Passive  Suffixes 
Table  IV.— Adjectival  Suffixes  I 
After   each   Table   instances   are  given   of   words   which   show    tlu 
presence  of  such   Suffixes   witli   remarks   thereupon,    and    such   con- 
clusions are  drawn  as  seem  to  be  warranted  by  the  evidence  adduced. 

2.— Object  of  the  Enquiry. 

(a)  To  collect  instances  of  Verbal  and  Noun  Suffixes  occurring 
in  languages  where  their  presence  has  not  been  recognised  hitherto, 

(b)  To  form  a  theory  that  will  give  a  satisfactory  explanation  of 
the  formation  of  the  Gerundives  and  of  the  Passive  Suffixes  in 
Polynesian. 

Note. — n  is  sounded  as  ng  in  singer.  Abbreviations  :  v. — verb; 
v.i. — verb  intransitive;  v.t. — verb  transitive;  adj. — adjective;  n— 
noun;  adv. — adverb;  prep. — preposition;  Pol. — Polynesian. 

TABLE  I. 

Verbal  Suffixes. 
This  Table  is  founded  on  the  Table  of  Verbal  Suffixes  in  Dr. 
Codrington's  "  Melanesian  Languages,"  p.  180.  New  features 
in  it  are — (1)  Nguna,  (2)  Gilbert  Islands,  (3)  Rotuma,  (4)  Maori. 
(5)  Samoan,  (6)  Tongan,  Tahitian,  Hawaiian,  (7)  Malay  (8)  Ulawa, 
Sa'a,  Wango  lists  have  been  amplified,  (9)  Lau,  (10)  Melanesian 
New  Guinea  (Expedition  to  Torres  Straits,  Vol.  iii.,  p.  458),  (11) 
New  Britain. 

Consonantal.  Syllabic. 

(;i)    Loyalty    Islands. 
Nengone     -  -     ?ie,  ///',  // 

Lifu  .  .     ft 


:]0(3 


W.  G.  Ivens 


Consonantal. 

(b)    New    Hebrides. 


Anaiteui 

1  - 

- 

rai,  raig;  jai,  jaig;  /mix  • 
taig;  haig 

J^'ate 

/,  ki,  H,  SI,  ti 

- 

aki,  faki,  tnaki,  naki,  raki 
sai,  saki,  /aki 

.8esake 

- 

i,  ki,  ti,  vi 

- 

raki 

Nguna 

- 

i,  gi,  ki,  mi,  ni,  si, 
vi 

a. 

raki,  sai 

Aniljiym 

- 

ta 

Espiritu 

.Santo  - 

ni,  vi 

tag 

Ai-aga 

- 

i 

- 

mai,  rai,  tai 

<Jba 

hi,  si 

tagi 

Mae  wo 

- 

gi,  si 

- 

nagi.  va,  vagi 

(c)    Banks' 

Island 

5. 

Merlav 

«,  r,  t 

la,  na,  ra,  va 

Oaua 

- 

o,  n,  n,  /',  s,  t,  V 

g^g\  /<^g',  »(^g\  f^g,  sag,  tag 

A-^anua  Lava 

g,  71,  n,  r,  t 

me,  leg,  re,  se,  te,  teg,  ve 

Mota 

- 

g,  n,  n,  r,  s,  t,  v  {na. 

- 

"g^g'^g^  ^'K^^  '"''g^  'i^\^^  "«AS 

sa) 

rag,  sai;,  tag,  vag 

Motlag 

- 

.?• 

- 

keg,  geg,  teg,  veg 

Volow 

g,  r 

Ilea,  nia,  rea,  tea,  vea 

Ureparapara 

n,  V 

ran,  sa,  tc 

Torres  Is 

ands     - 

g,  J,  t 

- 

ga,  te 

((])    New     Britain. 
k,  n,  t 

(e)    Fiji. 
a,  ca,  ga,  ka,  m.i,  na,      -     caka,     kaka,    laka,    maka, 
ra,  ta,  va,  wa,  ya  raka,  vaka,  waka,  yaka 

(i)   Gilbert    Islands. 
a,  '/,  ka,  na,  ta,  da         -     Ini'i 


ki 


(g)    Rotu. 


(h)    Maori. 
/,  ///,  ki,  mi,  ni,  \\i,  pi, 
ri,  ti(ta,  na,  rana) 

(i)    Sanioan. 
/',  V,  yf,  //,   ni,   ni,  si, 
ti,  VI  (ta,  va) 


a^i,   Ja^i,  ga'i,    ma'i,    na'i, 
/a'i,  sa'i,  ta'i,  tani,  va'i 


l^uffixt'.s  hi  Oceanic  Languages. 


:{()' 


Consonantal. 

(j)    'longan. 
/,  ki\  hia,  »ii,  ji 

(k)    Tahit.iaii. 
/',  hi,  mi 

(I)     Hawaiifin. 

/,  ki,  II  i 

(in)    Malay. 
/,  k,  III,  t,  si,  kan 


(ii)    Solomon    Islands. 
'/,  /«■,  //,  mi,  ni,  ni,  ri,     -     a'i,     d'iiii,     hci'iiii,      hxiiii. 


si  (la,  na) 


Sa'a    - 

-     '/,  hi,  Ii,  mi,  ni,  ni,  ri, 

si  (la,  na) 

Lau    - 

-     ^i,fi,  Ii,  mi,  ni,  \\i 

Fagani 

-     si 

Waiigo 

-     '/',  hi,   mi,   ni,  ni,  ri. 

• 

si 

Vatui-anga- 

-     hi,  Ii,  mi,  ni,  si,  ?;/ 

Florida 

-     hi,  Ii,  mi,  ni,  ni,  si,  ii, 

vi 

8avo  - 

-     Ii 

Bugotu 

-     hi,  ni,  ri,  ti,  vi 

Gao    - 

-     ni,  z 

Duke  of  York 

-     i,  m 

ma  till,      na  ini,      ra  iiii, 

ia^ini 
d'i,     a'iiii,     ha'ini,     Uiini, 

md'ini,     na'ini,     na'ini, 

ra'ini,  ta'ini 
a'i,  fa'ini,    ma'ini,    na'ini, 

to' ini 
vagi 
a'i,    fa  ini,    iiia'ini,    na'ini, 

ta'ini 
vahi 
hagi,  lai^i,  fiagi,  sagi,  vagi 


hagi,  lagi,  vagi 
pai,  iai,  rai,  iiai 


(o)    Melanesian  New  Guinea. 


Roro 

-     na,  ni 

Mekeo 

-     ni 

Notu 

-     i,    hi,   di,   Ii,   ni,    ri, 

(a,  ta,  na,  sa) 

Suau 

■     i 

Kiriwina     - 

-     ki 

Wedau 

-     ai,  ei,  oi,  ni,  gi,  ni 

Tavara 

-     ii  e 

Mukawa 

-     i,  ni,  si,  vi 

bai,  dai,  hai,  Iai,   mai,  nai, 
rai,  tagi,  agi,  gingt 


:308  W.   G.  Ivens: 

NOTES,    ETC.,    ON   TABLE    I. 

Dr.  Codrington,  "  Melanesian  Languages,"  p.  177,  gives  the 
following  definition  of  the  use  and  the  nature  of  Verbal  Suffixes. 
"  The  Verbal  Suffix  marks  the  word  as  a  Verb.  All  Verbs  have  not 
Suffixes;  a  Suffix  is  added  to  a  Verb  to  change  in  some  way  its 
signification.  It  may  very  well  be  that  a  Verb  with  a  suffixed  termi- 
nation may  be  found  in  a  language  in  which  the  Verb  without  a 
Suffix  is  not  found  at  present,  but  the  stem  is  a  Verb,  and  the 
signification  of  the  Suffix  will  be  felt  in  the  meaning  of  the  word." 
This  quotation  applies  directly  to  the  use  of  these  Suffixes  in  the 
Melanesian  languages.  While  the  same  Suffixes  may  be  clearly 
seen  attached  to  Verbs  in  the  Polynesian  languages,  yet  it  is  very 
evident  that  the  Polynesian  peoples  do  not  regularly  employ  these 
Suffixes  in  the  same  way  or  to  the  same  extent  in  which  they  are 
employed  in  Melanesia.  However,  instances  given  Wow  from 
Samoan  and  from  Maori  show  certain  uses  of  the  Verbal  Suffixes 
directly  corresponding  to  uses  in  the  Melanesian  languages. 

The  Verbal  Suffixes  are  attached  in  the  Melanesian  languages  to 
Verbs,  Nouns,  Adjectives,  Adverbs,  their  function  being  to  make  a 
Neuter  Verb  definitely  transitive,  or  to  increase  the  transitive 
signification  of  a  Verb  already  transitive,  or  to  fix  its  action  on  to 
a  certain  object,  or  to  mark  a  word  as  a  Verb.  In  this  latter 
capacity  the  Verbal  Suffixes  are  attached  to  Nouns,  Adjectives  and 
Adverbs.  No  instance  has  been  collected  of  a  Verbal  SuflSx  added 
to  an  undoubted  Adjective  in  any  Polynesian  language,  and  it  may 
well  be  that  the  Adjectives  in  Sa'a  and  Ulawa,  to  which  Verbal 
Suffixes  are  added,  imine  big,  xwainxti  small,  haora  (Ulawa),  small, 
are  really  Verbs,  and  that  the  Verbal  Suffixes  are  not  really  added 
to  pure  Adjectives,  and  in  all  probability  the  so-called  Adverbs  to 
which  the  Suffixes  are  added  are  really  neuter  Verbs. 

It  is  unnecessary  for  the  purpc^se  of  this  enquiry  to  quote  the 
examples  of  Verbal  Suffixes  that  are  given  in  the  languages  treated 
by  Dr.  Codrington  in  "  Melanesian  Languages,"  and  accordingly 
examples  will  be  given  in  those  languages  only  which  the  writer  has 
himself  added  to  the  Table,  or  which  have  been  amplified. 

(1)   Verhal  Sii-ffi.res  in    tlie  htnguage  of  Ngima. 

These  have  been  collected  from  the  translation  of  the  Gospels 
according  to  S.S.  Matthew  and  John. 

Maworawora  adj.  broken,  7nairori  to  break,  (c.f.  Mel.  Lang.,  p. 
461);  muiiu  v.i.  to  drink,  niunuc/i  to  drink  of;  marimatagi  v.t.  to 


Siifjixf's  in   Oceanic  Laiigu<i<i<'s.  809 

prepare.  (Motu  iiKttemafe  ready);  inafoiiki  v.t.  to  fear  (Ulawa 
ma'aa,  ma'au/ii);  tinnnii  to  swallow;  roronil  to  love,  (Mota  lolo 
Iieart,  affections):  i<aina!<(iina  ii.  <j:1oiv,  sd/tidsania/ii  to  glorify; 
pitnusi  prep,  to,  v.t.  to  see.  fc.f.  Ulawa  lonsi,  and  Florida  pitnnsi) ; 
pululi  to  seal  (Uliiwa  puhi  n  pitili.  piihi'i  to  pitch);  tntauo  to 
beseech,   fafauori  to  ask. 

Certain  Vcihs  in  Xgiina  seem  to  have  Suffixes  compounded  of 
two  forms;  /lafi  to  throw,  lutfiki  and  natihiiii  to  cast,  noa  to  say,  to 
speak,  Doasai  and  iioalixdi  to  declare.  Dr.  Codrington  ("  Mel. 
Lang..""  p.  465)  cpiestions  whether  ki  in  Sesake  is  a  Verbal  Suffix, 
and  in  the  following  instance  separates  ki  from  the  Verb  sajjura, 
soro  sapui-a  kiiia  lepa,  sweep  away  the  dirt.  He  adds,  however,  that 
snpuraki  resembles  the  Mota  savrag,  and  is  used  in  Nguna  as 
meaning  to  sow;  sarrar/  itself  being  made  up  of  sav  to  sow,  and 
rag,  Verbal  Suffix.  Since  ki  occurs  in  Nguna,  a  neighbouring 
island,  it  probably  occurs  also  as  a  Verbal  Suffix  in  Sesake,  and 
raki  certainly  occurs  in  Nguna  as  a  Verbal  Suffix,  and  liniraki  to 
leave,  abandon,  shoAvs  an  undoubted  instance  of  iriTci  as  a  Syllabic 
Suffix,  c.f  Sa'a  liki  to  cross,  go  beyond,  leave;  Florida  liligi  beside, 
to  pass  by. 

(2)   Verbal  Suffixes  in  the  language  of  Neir  Britain. 

Arik  to  split,  Mota  ari ;  felek  to  peck  at,  Mota  tere;  likun  to  bend, 
Mota  luk;  kolot  to  scold,  Mota  gol. 

(3)  Verbal  iSuffixes  in  the  language  of  the  Gilbert  Islands. 

Mata  XI.  eye.  inatai  to  look  covetously  at;  boha  to  trade  in  oil, 
bobai  to  trade;  ma,\\a  a  branch,  manai  a  spear  with  branches; 
nruurti  to  engage  in  destroying,  iiriia  to  destroy,  xirubaH  to  engage 
in  destroying;  okai  a  house  for  storing  coconuts,  okaia  to  store  coco- 
nuts; kauka  to  open,  (Sa'a  hu'e  to  open,  hu'esi,  Samoan  sua  to 
grub  up,  Maori  hnaki  to  open);  )noti  adj.  broken  off,  motika  to 
break;  biUi  to  go  along,  butika.  to  meet  (c.f.  Sa'a  odo  to  journey 
on,  odo'i  to  meet);  ua  to  swim,  nana  to  swim  out  to;  tabu  to  forbid, 
tabuna  to  make  taboo;  ruo  to  descend,  ruona  to  descend  to;  inoa  a 
namesake,  inoana  to  name  after;  rao  a  companion,  raona  to  asso- 
ciate with;  kori  v.t.  to  scratch,  korita  v.t.  to  scratch;  raba  adj. 
secret,  rabata  to  approach  cautiously  in  order  to  seize;  bono  adj. 
shut,  bonata  to  close;  rabata  n.  the  body,  v.t.  to  embrace,  rabata 
v.t.  to  embrace;  urina  to  remember,  urinaba  to  remember  with 
affection  or  sorrow. 


310  W.   G.  Ivens: 

All  of  these  instances  are  tlioroughly  after  the  Melanesian  style, 
and  Verbs,  Nouns,  and  Adjectives  have  the  Vei'lial  Suffix  attached. 
The  Adjectives  are  probably  neuter  Verbs. 

(4)  Verbal  Suffixes  in   tlie  laiKjuayi    of  lioiuma. 

In  the  grammar  of  Rotuma  ("  Mel.  Lang.."  p.  406)  Dr.  Codring- 
ton  says  : — "  The  transitive  suffix  ki  appears  in  the  Verb  alaki 
kill,  from  ala  to  die." 

(5)   Verbal  Suffixes  in  Maori. 

The  Verbal  Suffixes  can  be  clearly  seen  in  Maori  and  are  found 
attached  to  Verbs,  Nouns,  and  so-called  Adjectives.  They  have 
never  been  recognised  by  the  Maori  grammarians,  and  Dr.  Cod- 
rington  ("  Mel.  Lang.,"  p.  181)  says  that  there  is  no  suffix  to  the 
Verb  in  Maori.  But  as  will  be  seen  from  the  examples  appended 
here,  certain  Verbal  Suffixes  have  similar  functions  in  Maori  and 
in  the  Melanesian  languages,  though  the  impression  given  by  a 
general  study  of  the  words  in  Maori  which  show  the  presence  of  a 
Verbal  Suffix  is  that  they  are  not  used  with  anything  like  the  force 
and  power  which  they  have  in  Melanesia,  that,  in  fact,  they  have 
ceased  in  the  main  to  be  "  Transitive  Suffixes,"  nor  does  their 
addition  to  a  word  necessarily  mark  it  as  a  Verb.  Both  Mota  and 
Sa'a  afford  examples  of  the  addition  of  the  Transitive  Suffixes  to 
the  Verb  without  thereby  conveying  a  definite  Transitive  force; 
Mota  vura  to  spring  forth,  vuras  to  come  forth,  vuratag  to  spring- 
forth  forcibly;  goro  to  pass  over,  of  sound,  gorot  v.i.  to  strike,  come 
to  the  ears;  tale  to  go  round;  ialLuj,  v.i.  to  turn;  qoro  to  throw 
down  something  heavy,  qoron  to  encounter  anything  severe.  Sa'a 
hure'i  to  gush  forth,  Mota  vura  as  above. 

Examples  :  mana  a  branch,  manai  mouth  (Fiji  mawa  a  mouth, 
c.f.  Motu  haga  to  gape,  liagai  to  open  the  mouth,  Lau  faga  mouth, 
Mota  wana  to  gape,  wanai,  a  gaping,  wanara  to  branch,  wanarai  a 
branch);  taka  to  fasten  a  fish  hook,  fakai  to  wrap  round;  uku  to 
wash  with  clay,  ukui  to  rub;  horoi  to  wash,  (Tongan  holo  to  wash, 
Samoan  solo  soloi  towel) ;  pao  to  strike  with  a  hammer,  paoi  to 
pound  (c.f.  Sa'a  horo  to  kill,  horo'i  to  hit);  inoi  to  beg,  pray 
{Samoan  inoino  to  demand,  Lau  ino  to  beseech);  punui  adj.  close 
together  (Samoan  punupunu  a  cluster  of  parasitical  plants,  Sa'a 
hunu  a  bunch);  vjhawha  to  lay  hold  of,  what  settled,  possessing; 
pu  to  blow,  puhi  to  blow  (Ulawa  'uhi);  taka  to  fall  off,  roll,  takahi 
to  trample;  aro  to  face,  arohi  to  examine;  ara  a  path,  arahi  to 


SiLffixes  in  Oceanic  Languages.  311 

lead.  These  last  two  examples  are  quite  in  the  Melanesian  style, 
(c.f.  Ulawa  na'o  to  face,  naohi  to  lead,  to  direct);  fapa  to  pul- 
verise, tnpahi  to  chop  (Sa'a  tajm  to  strike,  tapali  to  cut  off,  reap); 
hua  to  raise  with  a  lever,  huaki  to  open,  uncover,  (Sa'a  hu'e  to 
lever  hu'csi.  to  open,  Samoan  sua  to  grub.  Tahitian  huai  to 
uncover  oven);  mata  eye,  ?nafaki  to  watch,  matai  to  seek  to  obtain 
by  artifice,  (Mota  mata  eye,  mafag  to  watch) ;  kaha  a  rope,  kahaki 
a  strap,  a  master,  (Tongan  kafa  sinnet,  kafakafai  to  bind);  niahi 
to  vomit,  (Mota  lulua  v.i.  to  vomit,  luag  v.t.,  Marquesas  ua,  uaki, 
Malay  luat  to  loathe);  nunumi  to  disappear  behind,  (Sa'a  nunu 
shadoAv) ;  horo,  horomi  to  swalloiv.  (Samoan  folo  to  swallow);  hau 
to  hew,  to  chop,  haiimi  to  join,  a  joint;  fanu  to  bui'v,  tanumi  to 
fold  double,  to  disappear  behind,  (Samoan  tarnima'i  to  cover  up 
with,  tanu  to  bury);  koro  a  noose,  korori  adj.  twisted,  v.  to  stir 
round;  faro  adv.  a  little  while,  farori  to  pass  away  quickly,  (c.f. 
Sa'a  ha'atau  far  off,  ha'atauli  to  be  far  off);  hokai  adj.  spread  out, 
hokari  to  stretch  out  the  legs,  to  move  by  stretching  the  legs, 
(Florida  voka  to  be  open,  Sa'a  hoka  to  come  apart,  hokasi  v.t.  to 
burst  open);  kopa  adj.  bent,  kopnni  to  shut  to,  a  lid,  kopaki  to 
wrap;  kapi  to  be  covered,  kapiti  adj.  enclosed;  apiapi  adj.  close 
together,  apiti  to  place  side  by  side  (Samoan  apiapi  narrow,  Sa'a 
apiepi  to  be  contiguous  to,  Malay  apit  side  by  side);  ho  to  pout, 
Jwai  to  sniff,  to  rub  noses  (Tahitian  ho7ni  to  sniff',  Mangareva 
aka-hoho  to  lick,  c.f.  Sa'a  nono  to  sniff,  nono'i  to  kiss);  po  night, 
poniponi  adj.  dim;  titoni  to  peck  (Hawaiian  kiko  to  dot,  Mar- 
quesas, Tahitian  tito  to  peck,  Mota  tit  to  strike  off  flakes);  meatinia 
the  passive  of  mea,  shows  a  compound  Suffix  made  uj)  of  ti  and  n^; 
rau  a  leaf,  raupi  to  cover  over. 

Remarks. — There  can  be  no  doubt  that  the  Verbal  Suffixes  appear 
in  Maori,  since  the  above  examples  definitely  prove  their  existence. 
The  use  of  such  words  as  hokai,  kapiti,  punui,  as  Adjectives,  may 
easily  find  a  parallel  in  Melanesia,  Sa'a  pele  adv.  by  mischance, 
pde'i  adv.  by  mischance,  pelena'ini  to  do  by  mischance,  lae  to  go, 
laehi  v.t.  to  travel  through,  laelae'i  adv.  ere  laelae'i  wayside  talk; 
^hu  to  be  complete,  ahu'i  prep,  with  suffixed  pronoun,  around; 
and  as  will  be  seen  below  the  Syllabic  Suffixes  are  used  in  Sa'a  to 
form  Participles,  which  may  be  considered  as  Adjectives.  Melanesia 
offers  no  parallel  to  the  use  of  such  a  word  as  kahaki  as  a  Noun 
(c.f.  however  yapuhit ,  glue,  in  Mota,  where  the  final  t  is  the  Verbal 
Suffix),  Init  it  is  not  difficult  to  see  how  its  use  as  a  Noun  has  come 
about.     Many  words  in  Maori  classed  as  Adjectives,  e.g.  apiapi,  ar» 


812  W.  G.  Iveris: 

evidently  Verbs  (c.f.  Mota  vanam.eag  waste,  useless,  Avhere  ag  is  a 
Verbal  Suffix);  while  a  word  like  taro  a  little  Avhile,  which  is  classed 
as  an  Adverb,  seems  rather  to  be  a  Vei'b,  also  ha'atau  in  Sa'a  which 
has  ]>een  instanced  above  is  rather  a  Verb,  ha' a  the  Causative  and 
tan,  verb,  to  be  far  off,  and  the  conclusion  may  be  drawn  that  the 
so-called  Adverbs  to  which  the  Verbal  Suffixes  are  attached  are  really 
Verbs  (c.f.  Mota,  niwaninag  adv.  bumping  up  and  down,  nina  to- 
knock). 

Both  classes  of  the  Sufhxes  are  used  in  Melanesia  to  form  Parti- 
ciples, or,  as  they  may  be  considered,  Adjectives,  Sa'a  ^^e/e'i  (as 
above),  oro  to  stoop,  uroma'i  bowed  together,  luhe  to  loose,  luhefa'i 
loosed,  inou  to  be  broken,  moufe'i  only,  single. 

Maori  seems  to  use  more  than  one  Suffix  with  the  same  Verb, 
e.g.  kopa,  kopani,  kopahi;  mata,  matai,  mataki ;  this  may  b& 
paralleled  by  Ulawa,  siki  to  come  off,  be  detached,  sikili  to  tw^ang 
with  the  fingers,  xikihi  to  undo,  lae  to  go,  loehi  to  go  through,  laeli 
trahi  to  make  an  oi-ation;  Mota  sogo,  sogoti,  sogov;  but  as  a  rule  in 
^Felanesian  each  Verb  is  used  with  its  own  particular  Suffix. 

It  will  also  be  noticed  that  a  common  use  of  these  Suffixes  in 
Maori  is  to  convey  thereby  a  slightly  different  signification  to  the 
meaning  of  the  Verb,  e.g.  fapa  and  tapahi,  this  may  be  paralleled 
by  Mota  sala  to  boil,  salag  to  cook  with  hot  stones,  but  the  common 
Melanesian  use  of  these  Suffixes,  viz.,  to  make  a  neuter  Verb 
definitely  transitive,  etc.,  is  not  so  common  in  Maori,  though  oro, 
arohi  is  an  example  of  it. 

Our  conclusion  is,  therefore,  that  with  the  one  exception  of  Verbs 
formed  from  Adjectives  by  the  addition  of  the  Verbal  Suffixes  (Sa'a 
paine  big,  painesi  to  be  too  big  for)  all  the  various  characteristic 
uses  of  the  Verbal  Suffixes  in  Melanesia  are  found  also  in  Maoris 
while  in  addition  Maori  has  employed  the  Suffixes  to  form  Nouns. 

(6)  Verbal  Suffixes  in  Samoan . 

The  Samoan  use  with  regard  to  the  Consonantal  Verbal  Suffixes 
approximates  very  closely  to  the  use  of  the  same  Suffixes  in  Mel- 
anesia. "  In  Samoan  the  termination  ta'i  or  sa'i  adds  the  sense 
of  'with'  to  the  verb;  7110010' e  to  run,  mo'eta'i  to  run  witfi  a 
thing;  'a' an  to  swim,  'ausa'i  to  swim  with  a  thing."  ("Mel. 
Lang.,"  p.  181.)  But  ta'i  also  conveys  a  particular  transitive 
force,  lafi  to  hide  oneself,  lafifa'i  to  hide  away,  to  conceal.  In  Sa'a 
we  notice  that  the  Syllabic  Suffix  also  conveys  the  sense  of  "  with," 
hum  to  run,  hurune'ini  to  run  with  a  thing;  olo  to  swim,  olohi  to 


Sujffixes  hi,  Ocennic  LaiH/iKu/cs.  :]]:] 

«wim  for  and  get,  olohaini  to  swim  with  and  rarrv  ('c.f.  Mota  fag. 
^ag,   vag ;  Fiji  caka,  taka). 

Examples. — muo  first,  niaai  to  bo  first  (Malay  iiniJ(uinil<i  first. 
mulai  to  be  first,  also  Mota  anioa  formerly  dkxiI  to  l)f  first); 
inamafa  weighty,  honoured,  mamaf,  to  be  hoiioiued  (c.f.  "  Mel. 
Lang.,"  p.  415  :  Maewo  weda  to  be  heavy,  ivedei  to  be  heavy  up(jii ; 
also  p.  465.  Sesake  mairura  broken,  niairori  to  be  l)i-okeH);  a/a 
sinnet,  afaafai  to  bind  with  sinnet ;  iiofo  to  sit,  iiofoi  to  l)e  in  a 
sitting  posture;  mawa  branch,  /nanai  to  sit  astride;  fnpu  to  make 
sacred,  fapui  a  sign  of  tapu,  to  prohibit  by  a  tapu  mark  ;  sapasapa/' 
to  take  in  the  arms  (Mota  sapa/r,  Sa'a  \ipala);  pola  a  plaited  foco- 
nut  leaf,  polnni  to  carry  on  a  pola;  fusa  to  be  equal,  tusani  to 
•divide  equally;  lavalava  a  loin  cloth,  lavasi  to  tie  rotmd  and 
round;  motu  broken,  motusi  to  break  (Sa'a  mo'u,  to  be  broken. 
mo'usi  to  break);  pulvti  to  pitch,  to  glue  (Sa'a  puhi  pitch,  pulu' i 
to  pitch);  mat  a  ey^e,  mataf,  to  be  swept  away  as  clotids,  to  be  open, 
clear;  poniponi  twilight,  poponi  to  scowl,  begin  to  be  blind  (Poly- 
nesian po  night);  inomo'e  to  sleep,  mo'' egci  i  to  carry  over  night,  i.e. 
to  sleep  with  ;  -s///  adv.  exceedingly,  xilifa" i  to  go  beyond  (Sa'a  sill 
to  enter,  sdihtl  to  insert);  (do  to  cijiiceal,  alofa' i  to  conceal; 
punipuni  to  shut  in,  punita' i  to  stop  up  with  anything;  noga  to  be 
quiet,  7wgafa'i  to  desist;  tanu  to  bury,  tanuma'i  to  cover  up  with; 
nofo  to  sit,  nofoa'i  to  sit  and  talk  over  news. 

Verbs  with  the  reciprocal  prefix  fe  have  si,  fi,  iii,  a' i ,  fa' i,  tna'i, 
ta'i,  na'i,  va'i,  as  Syllabic  Suffixes,  and  i,  fi,  iii,  *■/,  as  Consonantal 
Suffixes;  fe'ausi  to  swim,  fetauofi  to  take  hold  of;  felaani,  to  go  two 
together;  fealofani  to  love  one  another;  lata,  to  be  near,  felata'i  to 
be  near  together;  felamata'i  to  watch  for  one  anotlier  (c.f.  Ulawu 
he'itotori) }  fetalia'i  to  give  answer  (c.f.  Sa'a  ala  v.i.  to  answer, 
alami  to  answer  anyone,  he' ialama' i  to  answer  one  another); 
gagaiia  to  speak,  fegaganava  i  to  speak  to  one  another;  utti  to  draw 
water,  feutufa'i. 

The  Noun  Suffix  na  may  be  added  to  tlie  Verb  when  used  with 
either  the  Consonantal  or  the  Syllabic  Stiffix,  nofo  to  sit,  nofoa'i^ 
nofoa'iua  a  sitting;  afi  to  do  up  in  a  bundle,  afisi  to  carry  under 
the  arms,  afsina  an  armful;  but  in  Melanesia  tTie  Noun  Suffix  is 
attached  only  to  the  Consonantal  Verbal  Suffix.  Sa'a  usu  to  push, 
iisuue'i  to  send,  usune'lne  a  commandment.  But  if  Dr.  Macdonald's 
example  from  Fate  be  correct,  na  hulutiaii  nl  na  sunia  tho  plaster- 
ing of  the  house,  then  the  Samoan  use  has  a  perfect  parallel  in 
Melanesia. 


814  ^y.   a.  IveiiH: 

Our  conclusion  is  that  all  the  various  characteristic  uses  of  th& 
Verbal  Suffixes  in  Melanesia,  with  the  same  exception  noted  in 
Maori.,  viz.,  Verbs  formed  from  Adjectives  by  the  addition  of  the 
Verbal  Suffix,  are  found  also  in  Samoan.  In  addition  Ave  note  the 
use  of  the  Consonantal  Suffix  with  the  reciprocal  fe  (seen  alsiO  in 
Sa"a),  and  the  Consonantal  Suffix  forming  a  Noun  from  a  Verb, 
tapii).  poniponi.  This  last  use  can  be  readily  accounted  for  as  in 
Maori  l)y  the  word  thus  formed  being  used  to  deseril)e  both  the 
action   and  also  the  name  of  the  action. 

(7)  Yerhal  Susies  in  TougoH,  Tahifiaii,  and  IJairaiinn . 
Tongan, 

holo  to  wipe,  lioloi  to  wipe;  kafa  sinnet,  kafakafai  to  wrap 
sinnet  round  anything;  huai  to  turn  up.  Iitiahiiai  to  uncover 
(Samoan,  sua  to  dig,  etc.);  buaki  to  vomit  (Maori  />ita  foaming); 
mafaki  to  spy  (Oceanic  niata  eye);  Iionii  to  sniff  (Maori  ho,  honi,  as 
above);  anuhia  to  spit  on  (Mota  anus,  Samoan  unusa) ;  nla  to  touch, 
alaf,  to  feel  after  the  hand.  Mr.  Ray,  "  Common  origin  of  the 
Oceanic  peoples,"  gives  aki  as  a  Verbal  Suffix. 
Tahitian, 

iapah'h  to  split  breadfruit  (Maori  to  pa  to  pulverise,  tapahi 
to  chop;  Sa'a  tapa  to  strike,  fa  pal/  to  cut  off);  ruai  to  vomit 
(Mota  lulua,  luag;  Maori  ruaki);  mat  ait  ai  to  examine  (Oceanic 
mata  eye);  homi  to  sniff  (Maori  ho,  honi);  horomi  to  swallow  (Maori 
hnro,  horomi). 
HaAvaiian, 

puai  to  spout  (Maori  pua  foaming);  luai  to  vomit;  huai  to 
open;  holoi  to  wash;  kaluii  to  bind,  girdle  (Polynesian  kaha 
sinnet);  kiko  a  dot,  kikokikoi  irregularly;  honi  to  smell;  iniki  to 
pinch  (Oceanic  gini,   'iiii). 

(8)  ]  crhal  Sujjires  in  Mala//. 

Minum  to  drink  (Sa'a  'inu,  'inumi;  Nguna  nivnu,  munugi);  apif 
to  lie  side  by  side  (Maori  apiapi;  Sa'a  apie.pi);  apit-kan  a  press; 
luat  to  loathe;  amhnsi  to  puff  out  from  the  mouth  (Mota  pupus  Pol. 
pupuhi);  m/ilamida  at  first,  mulai  to  be  first;  susu  milk,  sitsui  to 
suckle;  panas  hot,  panasi  to  heat;  penoh  full,  pe//ohkaii  to  fill; 
lapix  a  fold,  lapiskan  to  line;  tangis  to  Aveep  {Po  taxxi). 

Dr.  Codrington  ("  Mel.  Lang.,'"  p.  181)  says  that  the  Verbal 
Suffixes  aie  looked  for  in  vain  in  Malay,  and  that  they  are  not 
appai-ent  in  Tongan.  and  that  he  has  no  knowledge  of  their  exist- 


Siiffi.reti   ill   Ocediiic  LaiKjaages.  815 

ence  in  Taliitian  and  Hawaiian.  However,  the  above  examples 
clearly  show  the  presenee  of  those  Suffixes  in  all  the  four  languages. 
But  there  can  be  no  (l()ul)t  tliat  the  Suffixes  do  not  play  the  im- 
portant part  in  these  four  languages  which  they  play  in  Melanesia, 
or  in  Samoan.  * 

(8)   Verhol  Suffices  in  the  Solomon  Island  Languages. 

For  tlie  purpose  of  this  Paper  it  will  not  be  necessary  to  give 
instances  of  words  show^ing  the  ordinary  way  in  which  the  Verbal 
Suffixes  are  used  in  the  Solomon  Island  languages;  a  full  account  of 
their  use  in  Florida  is  given  in  "  Melanesian  Languages,"  and  the 
present  Avriter  has  done  the  same  for  Sa'a  and  Ulawa  and  Lau  in 
his  grammars  of  those  languages. 

No  very  satisfactory  explanation  can  be  given  of  the  termination 
ni  in  the  Syllabic  Suffixes  in  Ulaw-a,  Wango,  Sa'a,  Lau,  Florida. 
Dr.  Codrington  ("  Mel.  Lang.,"  p.  532)  speaking  of  its  use  in 
Florida  with  the  Verbal  Suffixes,  calls  it  a  Preposition  and  refers  to 
the  use  of  ni  in  Oba,  where  it  is  compounded  with  the  Preposition 
gi  (Polynesian  /./).  The  Florida  ni  occurs  also  as  an  Instrumental, 
but  in  the  Eastern  Solomons  in  Sa'a,  etc..  ni  is  used  only  as  a  Geni- 
tive, the  Instrumental  being  ana  or  a7ii.  It  is  possible  that  the 
Instrumental  ani  may  be  formed  from  nia  by  metathesis,  and  that 
nia  is  compounded  of  ni  prep,  and  a  suffixed  pronoun. 

Lau  and  Wango  use  the  Syllabic  forms  in  an  Active  sense,  i.e.,  a 
Pronoun  is  added  as  an  anticipatory  Object,  without  the  necessity 
of  adding  ni  to  the  Suffix;  Lau  gonifa^i  v.t.  to  receive;  gwoutaH  or 
gu'outa'ini  to  incline  the  body;  oalana'i  to  distribute;  fatolama'i 
to  command  (Sa'a  haafolana'vni);  Wango  poofa'i  to  beseech.  In 
Ulawa  and  Sa'a  when  ///  is  omitted  after  the  Suffix  the  Verb  has  no 
transitive  force.  Jcire  ho  kelite'i  honoiamu  they  stand  in  a  circle 
round  you;  ^«>  to  raise,  fa'ela'i  v.i.  to  set  out.  start,  make  a  be- 
ginning; and  when  the  Verb  with  Suffix  is  separated  from  its 
Object  the  ni  is  dropped  and  the  Possessive  is  used  as  the  Object 
instead  of  the  Suffixed  Pronoun;  kire  ke  su'uhe'i  niano  ada  they 
will  completely  destroy  them;  xwanc  'o  ha'apolahd'A  saewasu  ana 
mane  i'oe  chast-en  not  thy  servant  in  thy  displeasure. 

In  Ulawa,  Wango,  Sa'a  and  Lau,  there  is  an  adjectival  or  parti- 
cipal  use  of  the  Syllal)ic  forms  in  «'/  without  ni  added;  Sa'a 
honide^i  Wango  Jiontira'i  full  of;  Sa'a  fekela'i,  Lau  tegela'i  lost, 
tarau  continuously,  straight  on,  taraure^i  continuously.  Also 
ha'ideuie'i  till  daylight.      Also   in   Lau  the  Syllabic  forms  without 


316  W.   G.  Ivens: 

ni  are  added  to  certain  Verbs  (active  or  neuter)  without  conferring 
a  definite  transitive  force  on  them,  'eli  to  dig,  nia  'elio  si  'a?w  he 
dug  the  ground,  nia  'elifai  lohoro  he  dug  deep  ;  oil  to  )'eturn,  come 
back,  olifa'i  v.i.  to  return. 

'In  Sa'a,  Ulawa,  Wango,  there  is  a  separation  of  the  SyUabic 
Suffix  ta'i  (used  with  ?ii  added)  fi-om  the  Verb;  Wango  a  nonia 
heia  ai  ta  e  huraa  wou  i  liaka  ta'inia  /  one  he  asked  him  to  thrust 
out  the  ship  from  the  land;  Sa'a  w<ii  e  mapipi  olie  ofo  ta'inie  kolune 
vaakana  whether  the  waters  had  I'cceded  from  tlie  surface  of  tlie 
land;  Ulawa  ani  noto  nuuwa  te'inilemiu  in  refraining  yourselves. 
This  Suffix  ta'i  thus  used  may  be  paralleled  by  the  use  of  the  separ- 
able Suffix  vag  in  Mota,  "  Mel.  Lang.,"  p.  281. 

The  Noun  Suffix  \\a  may  be  attached  in  Sa'a  and  Ulawa  to  the 
Syllabic  Suffix,  nsuneine  commandment.  The  Xouu  Suffix  na  is 
not  attached  to  the  Consonantal  Suffix,  l^it  always  to  the  Verb 
itself,  but  where  a  Verb  is  made  up  of  a  Noun  and  a  Verb  used 
with  a  Consonantal  Suffix  the  Noun  Suffix  is  added  to  the  Verb  so 
formed,  sae  uinihi  to  grudge,   .sy/(^   u/ia/n'we   a  grudging  spirit. 

(9)   Verbal  Suffi.res  in   Mela  ne  si  an   New  Guinea. 
The  following  examples  have  been  collected  from  Mr.  Ray's  work, 
"Expedition  to  Torres  Straits,"  Vol.   iii.,  p.  458: — 

Roro. 

Tlie  Verb  takes  a  Suffix  na  or  ///  when  diiectly  governing  the 
Pronoun;  ita  to  see,  ne  ifa/ia'u  he  ses  me;  /la  ?fa/i/o  I  see  j/oii, 
hau  na  itana  men  I  see  them. 

Mekeo. 

Mikinnle  malele  ip.'i-lounui-i  aiii  missionary  teaches  tlie  men  to 
read  {pa-lnno  make  heai;). 

Molu 

Haga  to  gape,  Jiagai  to  open  the  moutli,  lat/a  to  graze,  /aqa/ii  to 
strike  something  in  falling;  hoi  to  call,  hoi/i  to  call  a  person; 
kanudi  to  spit  (Samoan  anu);  rani  to  be  overtaken  by  (hiylight  (Pol. 
ra  day);  di  aild  ni  are  not  quoted  as  Suffixes  by  Mr.  Ray.  Noho  to 
stay,  nohori  to  delay,  gugu  to  clasp,  guguha  to  hold  tight,  gugnhai 
to  squeeze;  gege  to  surround,  hegegcdai  to  go  round;  lao  to  go, 
laohai  to  go  away  with;  heagi  to  boast,  heagilai  to  pi-aise  ;  vaxi  to 
go  iK'ar,  rasi/fii,  to  take  near;  ahi  to  take,  ahilai  to  take  with; 
mataniatd  new,  niatatnatai  to  begin  ;  (/(Uia  a  lump,  lieqaqanai  to 
stumble;  dina  sun,  dav,  liedinarai  to  i-onfess. 


Snjffixes  in  Oct'dnie  L<i iKjiKigcs.  ol7 

Keapaia  aiul   Hula. 
Ila   to   speak.    /f(ir/i   to    speak    to;    ao    to    go,    aof/a/    to    go    witli  ; 
gegelciffi  to  surround  (c.f.  Motu  (jef/e  to  surround);  reaniai  to  l)riiig, 
veamaiagi  to  come  witli ;  horoyingi  to  1)6  a  substitute  for  (c.f.  Motii 
boloa  a  substitute,  hehoJo  to  be  a  substitute). 

8uau. 
Saha  what?  ;/  sahaigu  wliat  have  vou  to  do  with  me?  atai  to  know 
about,  guiaii   vasnna  i  afaiei  the  chief  his  word  he  knew  it. 


Kiri 


wina. 


/  saopo  he  tell  lies,  /  saojxili  he  deceives,  /  Kdopakaigu  he  de- 
ceives me;  ilili  he  goes  to  him. 

Wedau. 
Bawauci  a  bundle,  fxnrni  to  cavi'V  in  a  bundle;  gudii  door,  gudui 
to  close  a  door;  riwa  to  say,  rlwei  to  tell;  vipeuni  to  drop  some- 
thing {vi  Causative  pen.  to  drop);  qa  to  be  finished,  viqai  to  finish; 
kiala  to  sit,  ktalei  to  sit  on  something;  galo  to  be  in  soak,  vigaloi 
to  soak  something;  viai  to  be  clean,  u  ta  viaini-u  you  (may)  clean 
me. 

Tavara. 

koekoeama  false,  koeame-hi  deceive  them;  kuku  near,  lei-kukui 
to  make  near;  hanapii  wise,  hanapugeni  to  know. 

Miikawa. 

waba  a  name,  wahei  to  name;  6o^^^,  to  come,  hotuvi  to  bring; 
tomatomci  drinking,  tomani  to  drink  something;  iiagari-si  fear 
them,  /cepfa  /v;e  nagara  do  not  fear ;  wona  to  say,  (i'o/ii  to  tell ; 
gaigaire  clean,  gaireni  to  cleanse. 

Remarks. — The  above  instances  show  the  addition  of  the  Verbal 
Suffix  to  Verbs,  Nouns,  and  Adjectives,  but  no  instance  is  given 
of  the  Suffix  added  to  an  Adverb.  In  Suau  the  Suffix  is  attached  to 
saha  what?  but  as  shown  by  Dr.  Codrington  ("Mel.  Lang.,"  p. 
134),  this  Pronoun  common  to  the  Oceanic  Languages  saha.  sa, 
sava,  taha,  is  a  Noun. 

(10)  Other  Suffvres  to  Verbs. 

Ta;  Motu  nuihuta  to  sleep  (Sa'a  maahu);  Samoan  faufili  a  cord 
to  fasten  a  bundle,  faufilita  to  come  back  empty  using  the  faufili 
to  beat  off  tlie  flies;  viafuta  to  be  aroused  from  sleep;  ' apata  to  clap 


318  W.  G.  Ivens: 

the  wings  (Sa'a  apa  wing);  Maori  kapekapeta  to  flutter  (Sa'a 
h/uhiu  kape  to  flutter,  a  wagtail,  c.f.  Maori  kapokapa,  Mota  lopa- 
lapn  to  flutter). 

Possibly  fa  in  the  above  instances  is  the  same  as  ta  the  adjectival 
Suflix. 

Sa;  Sa'a  loloku  to  be  bent,  lokuna  v.t.  to  bend;  qao  to  do, 
qaona  to  appoint;  duu  to  move  v.i.  duu7ie  to  move  a  thing  up;  ata 
to  move,  atana  to  move  a  thing  slightly;  Motu  pisili  spray,  pipisina 
to  splash  (Sanioan  pid  to  splash,  Sa'a  qisi  v.i.  to  splash,  qisili  v.t.); 
Mota  tiana  to  be  pregnant,  tia  belly. 

Sa ;  Samoan  anusa  to  spit  (Mota  anu-x  spittle);  po  night,  ponisa 
to  be  dark;  ranu  water,  ranusa  to  bale  water  (see  "  Mel.  Lang.,"  p. 
181.)     Mota  maru  to  sink,  subside,  maruso  to  subside. 

Va;  Samoan  musumusu  to  whisper,  musiiva  to  whisper  together. 

La:  Samoan  ua  rain,  uala  to  be  rainy  with  sunshine;  Sa'a  'apala 
to  carry  in  the  arms,  'apa' apa  wing,  shoulder;  Mota  sapan  Samoan 
sapasapai  to  carry  in  the  arms,  probably  show  sapa  with  a  Verbal 
Suffix.  Dr.  Codrington  connects  sapan  with  panel  hand.  Mota 
ivanara  branch,  may  show  ra  as  a  Verbal  Suffix,  wana  to  open  the 
mouth. 

Na;  Samoan  to' ana  to  settle  down,  to  frequent,  to' a  to  settle; 
Maori  kapu  to  close  the  hand,  kapuna  to  take  up  with  both  hands. 
In  these  two  instances  the  Suffix  no  is  probably  the  Noun  Suffix. 

Rana;  Maori  pu  a  heap,  piirana  to  heap  up;  hua  to  raise  with  a 
lever,  huarana  to  transplant;  kapu  to  close  the  hand,  kapurana  to 
take  up  by  handfuls  (Marquesas  kapu  hand).  This  termination 
rana  is  probably  the  gerundival  Suffix. 

In  some  of  the  Oceanic  languages  a  is  used  as  a  Verbal  Suffix  : — 
Samoan  tane  man,  tanea  having  to  do  with  men;  lele  to  fly,  lelea 
to  be  carried  off  by  the  wind;  sili  exceedingly,  silia  to  let  pass;  lat 
the  westerly  wind,  lata  to  be  blighted  by  the  westerly  wind;  Motu 
lokua  to  be  folded  (Sa'a  loloku  bent).  This  termination  a  is  prob- 
ably the  same  as  the  adjectival  Suffix  a  (see  below  under  Table  IV.), 
Niue  niu  coconut,  niue  possessing  coconuts;  Sa'a  niuniue  tasting 
of  coconuts.  The  Suffix  la  in  Samoan  uala  is  also  probably  the 
same  as  the  adjectival  Suffix  la,  Sa'a  'iisu  dog.  'usule  possessing 
dogs. 

TABLE    IL 
Noun  S^iffixes. 

Dr.  Codrington,  in  "  Melanesian  Languages,"  give  no  Table  of 
Noun  Suffixes.     The  Melanesian  examples  in  this  Table  have  been 


Sufjixei^  ill  Oceanic  Languages. 


•m) 


compiled  from  the  various  ^nammars  in  Dr.  Codrington's  book;  the 
Sa"a  and  Ulawa  lists  have  been  amplified;  the  Malagasy  examples 
are  from  Richardson's  "  Malagasy  Grammar  ";  the  Melanesian  New 
Guinea  have  been  copied  from  "  Torres  Straits  Expedition,"  Vol. 
iii. 

Abstract  Nouns.  Independent  Nouns. 


Nengone 


(1)  with  n  (2)  without  n        (1)  with 

(a)    Loyalty  Islands. 

-     ue 

(b)    New  Hebrides. 

n 
na 


Anaiteuni 

- 

- 

Nguna     - 

-    ana 

Sesake     - 

-     na 

Epi 

-    ena 

Pate 

-    ana. 

ena 

an, 

en 

►Santo 

-     a 

Araga 

-    ana 

Oba 

-    ana 

Maewo    - 

-    ana, 

na 

■     a 

(^•) 

Banks'  Islands. 

Merlav    - 

-     ne 

-    a,  ia,  va 

Lakona    - 

- 

-    e^g 

Gog 

- 

-    <?>  h 

Vanua  Lava 

- 

-    a,  e,  ea,  g,  r 

Mota 

-    a,  ia,  ga,  ra,  va 

-    {ta,  i,  s) 

Motalava  - 

-    e,  r,  g,  V 

Torres' 

-    i,  r,  ve 

Islands 

(2)  without  n 


I,  in,  HI, 

g' 

'\  gi 

g' 

gi 

-    i,  in,  ui,  ei 

n,  ne    -   ge 


(d)    Fiji. 


(e) 

Maori. 

-    (a)  na 

-    (/3)  Gerundives,     na, 

-    a,  ha,  i 

ana,  kana,  rana. 

/ana 

(f) 

Samoan. 

-    (a)  na 

- 

-    (j3)  Gerundives,     na, 

-    a,  laa,  ta 

ana,  lana,  mana 

tana,  sana 

320 


W.   G.  Ivens 


Abstract  Nouns 


Independent  Nouns. 


uT 

with 

n 

(2)    without  a 

(g)    Malagasy. 

oT 

with  n             ( 

i)  without 

-    ancj,  na 

-    tra,  ka 
(h)    Malay. 

-    na 

-    n,  an 

(i)    Tongan. 

-    na 

-    (For  Gerundives  see  -    a 

-    na 

Sana  can) 

(j)    Rotuma. 

-    na,  m, 

n\ 

(k) 

Solomon  Islands 

Fagani 

-    ua 

-    fa 

- 

Wango 

-    na 

-    a,  ha 

-    na 

Ulawa 

-    (a)  na 

-    ha,  la,  ta 

ia- 

-    na 

Sa'a 

-    (c)  na 

-    a,  ha,  la,  ta. 

-    na 

- 

-    {P)la-,le-, 

ta- 

- 

Lau 

-    {V)na 

-   a,  fa,  la,  ta 

-    na 

Florida 

-     a 

-    na,  ni - 

Bugotu 

-     a 

-    na,  ni  - 

8avo 

- 

^« 

(1) 

Mel 

anesian  New  Guinea. 

Motu 

-     na 

- 

-     na 

a 

Panaieti 

-     na 

-     n 

Wedau 

na 

-     ra,  va 

-     na 

i 

Dobu 

- 

. 

-     na 

NOTES,   ETC.,    ON   TABLE   II. 


"  In  the  Melanesiau  languages  thei-e  are  two  classes  of  VerV)al 
Substantives,  those  Avhich  may  i»i'  called  Gerundives,  which  are 
rather  more  Verl)al  than  Nominal,  and  others  which  are  more  pro- 
perly Abstract  Nouns.  Tlie  first  class  are  such  words  as  '  thinking,' 
the  second  such  words  as  'thought.'  .Mclanesian  languages  do  not 
generally  appear  to  have  both  kinds  of  Verbal  Substantives  to- 
gether. Polynesian  languages  do  not  appeal-  to  have  the  second 
class  at  all."      ("  Mel.  Lang.,"  p.    138.)     Dr.  Codiington  instances 


Suffi^xes  in  Oceanic  Langiuu/es.  ;32I 

only  Fagani  and  Merlav  as  having  both  classes,  but  Maewo  will  be- 
seen  to  possess  both,  and  three  Solomon  Island  languages  in  the 
Table  besides  Fagani  have  both,  and  Maori  and  Samoan  have  both  ; 
c.f.  infra.  Wedau  also  has  both  forms.  The  first  class  of  these 
Noun  Suffixes,  the  gerundival.  has  //  as  a  constant  letter,  in  the- 
second  class  /i  does  not  appear. 

In  the  Melanesian  languages  the  form  of  the  Gerundive  is  not 
always  the  same,  as  the  Polynesian  has  the  termination  7iga  (na). 
Mate  is  commonly  "to  die,"  but  matea  in  Florida  is  "dying." 
Galea  in  Mota  may  mean  either  deceit  or  being  deceived,  na  galeana 
what  deceived  him.  In  Fiji  mate  without  change  is  "  to  die,"  and 
"  death  "  as  it  is  in  Maori.  But  when  the  Maori  uses  heino  for  "  to- 
die,"  "death"  in  hemona    dying.     ("Mel.  Lang.,"  p.   138.) 

The  Suffixes  la,  le,  ta,  ha,  are  used  in  Sa'a  and  Ulawa  with  the 
Personal  Pronoun  ahvays  suffixed  to  form  Gerundives;  with  neuter 
Verbs  ni  or  i  is  always  added;  horo  to  kill,  horoH  to  kill  anyone, 
horo'ilana  his  being  killed.  The  sense  of  the  Gerundive  in  Ulawa 
and  Sa'a  is  either  Active  or  Passive,  tohulana  the  chopping  of  it,  its 
being  chopped;  Ulawa  ha'aurifaku  my  being  saved,  a  ha'auritaku 
my  saviour.  In  Ulawa  na  with  the  suffixed  Pronoun  may  be  used 
as  a  Gerundive;  lae  to  go,  laewa  a  going,  laenana  his  going.  With 
the  Maori  Gerundive  the  action  may  be  either  Active  or  Passive. 

In  Florida  Verbal  Substantives  are  formed  by  suffixing  a  to  Active 
Verbs,  and  the  sense  of  these,  which  may  be  called  Gerundives,  is 
often  Passive.  Bosa  to  speak  is  also  a  Noun,  and  hosagu  is  ray 
speaking;  but  hosaagu  is  my  being  spoken  to.  In  Ysabel  it  is  the 
same,  gotigotihi  to  break  in  pieces,  na  gotigotihiadia  their  being^ 
broken  in  pieces.     {"  Mel.  Lang.,"  p.  524,  139.) 

The  Ulawa  word  wala'ana  speech,  needs  a  little  explanation. 
Dr.  Codrington  ("  Mel.  Lang.,"  p.  138)  gives  wala'ana  as  an  in- 
stance of  ana  used  as  a  Noun  Suffix,  but  no  other  such  instance 
occurs  in  Ulawa,  and  the  Verb  is  wala  or  wala'a  to  speak;  ha' i 
wala  a  word,  walana  his  word,  kira  ahuni  wala  they  took  counseV 
together,  wala  odoodo  to  repudiate  in  speech,  'o  si'e  walawala'a 
do  not  speak.  A  form  walani  also  occurs  meaning  to  effect  a 
magical  charm  by  means  of  words.  The  second  form  of  the  Verb, 
wala'a,  may  possibly  be  made  up  of  wala,  and  'a  the  adjectival 
Suffix,  and  accordingly  ivala'a  would  mean  dealing  in  words,  wordy. 
This  Suffix  'a  is  added  to  certain  Verbs  in  Ulawa  and  Sa'a  to  form 
Nouns;  usi  to  barter,  usVe  market;  kalite'i  to  encircle,  ro  kalife'i'a 
double  strands.     With  wala'ana  may   be  compared   roro'ana   debt,. 


322  W.  G.  Ivens: 

which  is  formed  from  the  Verb  roro'a  to  be  liable,  and  this  again 
is  formed  from  roro  to  tie  tightly  and  '«  the  adjectival  Suffix.  A 
Noun  walana  appears  in  Sa'a  in  compounds,  mu  tale'i  sulu  walana 
mere  verbose  repetitions. 

In  UlaAva  and  Sa'a  certain  words  .show  the  Noun  Sulhxes  fa,  ha ^ 
but  are  used  only  with  the  suffixed  Pronoun  or  with  the  Possessive 
-attached;  hono  to  close,  honotana  against,  to  meet,  him;  walahada 
tlieir  word;  i  lado'ihaana  in  a  straight  line  with;  in  the  last 
example  H  the  Verbal  Suffix  has  been  added;  paiuahaana  its  big- 
ness. This  points  to  ta  and  ha  having  a  gerundival  force  in  these 
words.  In  na'nnehume  a  seat  {naku  to  sit),  me  (nia)  appears  to  l)e 
a  Noun  Suffix. 

In  both  Samoan  and  Maori  Noun  Suffixes  of  the  second  class  are 
found;  Samoan  fua  fruit,  fiiata  crop,  as  well  as  fuana;  tau  to  fight, 
taua  Avar,  fauna  a  fighting;  faida  an  anchor,  fau  to  anchor; 
f,ee  to  prop  up,  feela  a  boom;  mafuta  dwelling  together,  may  show 
the  Suffix  ta  (c.f.  Motu  inahufa  to  sleep,  Sa'a  ino'ahu),  nofo  to  sit. 
nofoa  a  seat. 

Maori  :  puaha  the  mouth  of  a  river,  puaJii  to  come  forth  (Samoan 
pua  the  mouth  of  a  fish  trap) ;  kareha  the  day  after  to-morrow,  the 
day  before  yesterday,  may  possibly  be  composed  of  kai'e  and  ha 
(c.f.  Mota  risa,  Florida  valiha,  Samoan  alivu  long  ago,  Ulawa  wali 
long  ago,  walita  day  after  to-morrow);  tatau  to  assault,  taua  war 
party;  ahu  to  heap  up,  ahua  form,  appearance  (for  ahu  as  "to 
tend,"  "  to  heap  up,"  "  to  be  mature,"  c.f.  Sa'a  ahu  to  be  per- 
fect, ahuH  to  surround,  protect,  ahui  ola  a  parcel);  kagu  to  put 
on,  surface,  garment,  kahua  form,  appearance;  Ao/m?' herd,  Samoan 
laju  herd. 

Mota  appears  to  have  other  Noun  Suffixes  besides  those  given  by 
Dr.  Codrington;  lumuta  moss.  Sa'a  luniu  and  lumute;  anus  spittle. 
Motu  kanudi,  Samoan  anu;  puasa  lizard,  vua  crocodile,  Sa'a 
huasa  crocodile,  Samoan  puaa  animal;  kurut  dog,  Sa'a  'usu, 
Maori  kuri,  Malagasy  alika. 

It  is  unnecessary  to  give  here  instances  of  the  use  of  the  Noun 
Suffixes  in  Melanesia,  they  may  all  be  found  in  "  Melanesian 
Languages." 

Noun  Suffixes  in  Melanesian  Nezv  Guinea. 
Motu, 
doko  to  finish,  dokona  the  end;  rami  water,  ranuna  juice;   hero 
to  wound,  berona  a  wound. 

Panaieti, 
rohu  to  condemn,  rohuna  condemnation. 


Su^.rfs  In   Oc('<iru<!  La/ngiuiyrx.  :\-I'.) 

Wedaii, 
am  to  eat,  ainna  the  eating;  hairai  to  carry  in  a  bundle,  hairana 
a  bundle.  In  Wedau  na  is  added  to  tlie  root  of  a  transitive  Veib, 
i.e.  to  the  Verb  without  the  transitive  ending;  hahani  to  talk, 
bahana  the  subject  discussed.  Noun  endings  of  the  second  class 
without  n  are  seen  in  Wedau,  tigura  a  thorn,  tiguri  to  pick  out  with 
a  thorn;  utuva  a  flood,  ufuvi  to  water;  iuwa  fruit,  uwei  to  bear 
fruit.      ("  Expedition  to  Torres  Straits,"  Vol.   iii.  p.   440.)  •• 

Noun  Sujfixes  in  Malagasy. 

Vono  to  kill,  ronoana  murder;  ravina  leaf  (Mota  naui,  Poly- 
nesian rail,  Malay  dau.?i;)  hatsara  good,  hatsarana  goodness; 
havitra  fish  hook  (Malay  kawit,  New  Guinea  gahu,  Mota  gau); 
laaka  aperture  (Polynesian  lua,  rua.  hole),  bono  to  cover,  bonoka 
a  covering. 

N 01171  Su-ffixes  in  Malay. 

Dauii  a  leaf  (Motlav  ran,  Fiji  drau,  Maori  ran);  ujan  rain 
(Lau  usa,  Maori  ua);  ikan  a  fish  (Pol.  ika) ;  kumis  mustache  (Mota 
wunui  Maori  kumikumi) ;  arus  current  (Mota  arte);  mataku  to 
fear,  yanhutan  fear;  tidor  to  sleep,  partidoran  sleep;  kata  to 
speak,  parkataan  speech ;  lumiit  moss  (Maori  lumidumu) ;  laut  sea 
shore  (Mota  laii);  kawit  fish  hook;  simor  ray  of  light  (Melanesian 
sitia  to  shine). 

Remarks.— The  terminations  shown  above  in  Malagasy  and  Malay 
show  definitely  the  connection  between  them  and  the  other  Oceanic 
languages  given  in  the  Table,  but  it  can  hardly  be  said  that  these 
two  languages  use  the  Noun  Suffixes  as  freely  as  the  Melanesian 
languages  use  both  classes  of  the  Suffix,  or  the  Polynesian  the  first 
class. 

Tongan  appears  to  have  a  form  in  a;  huhu  breast,  huhua  milk. 

The  Gerundives  in  Maori. 

The  Verbal  Substantives  in  Maori  denote  the  taking  place  of 
an  action,  the  place  of  the  action,  the  time  of  its  taking  place. 
The  action  may  be  either  Passive  or  Active.  ("  Mel.  Lang.,"  p. 
138.)  However,  no  is  suffixed  in  Maori  to  form  Abstract  Nouns, 
just  as  it  is  in  Melanesia;  kawe  to  carry,  kaiuena  a  burden  (c.f. 
Sa'a  tola  to  carry,  tolana  a  burden);  ako  to  learn,  akona  a  learner; 
keokeo  peaked,  keokeona  a  peak;  ra/ii  big.  rahina  bigness  (Sa'a 
paine    big,    pianana    size);    koi    sharp,    koina    point,    edge;    tika 


824  W.  G.  IveuH: 

straight,  fikana  rule,  plan  (Sa'a  odo  straight,  odoodona  straiglrk- 
iiess),  r/fe  like,  rifeua  likeness.  In  the  same  way  ana  and  tana 
form  Noun  Substantives;  7ioho  to  sit,  nohoana  a  seat;  kawiti  to 
taper,  kaivititana  the  wrist;  hua  to  bear  fruit,  huhuatana  excel- 
lence;  also  imported  words  kinitana  dominion;  kawenatana  gov- 
ernment; kapu,  to  close  the  hand,  makes  both  kapuna  palm  of  the 
hand,  and  kaptirana  handful,  and  each  of  these  words  serves  either 
as  a  Noun  or  a  Verb.  Still  it  is  plain  that  the  suffixing  of  na 
conveys  even  in  these  examples  in  Maori  more  of  the  idea  of  a 
Gerundive    than   of   an  ordinary  Abstract   Noun. 

The  Gerundives  in  Maori  are  composed  of  the  Noun  Suffix  na 
by  itself,  or  of  the  Suffix  ana,  either  by  itself  or  with  h,  /.•,  //?,  /•,  t, 
€<f)eXKV(TTLK(n',  where  the  Consonunt  in  each  CHse  is  tlie  .same  as 
the  Consonant  of  the  Verbal  Suffix.  When  the  Passive  is  formed 
In'  adding  ia  to  the  root  Verb  then  ana  is  suffixed  to  the  root  Verb 
to  form  tlie  Gerundive;  ko  to  plant,  kola  planted,  koana  sowing 
time.  The  Suffix  ana  itself  does  not  occur  as  a  Noun  Suffix  any- 
where, but  ana  occurs  frequently,  and  there  is  no  radical  difference 
in  form  between  ana  and  ana,  or  between  na  and  na,  since  n  is 
only  nasalized  n. 

It  seems  to  be  evident  that  the  gerundival  forms  with  the  Con- 
sonant ((fteXKva-TiKoi'  are  composed  of  two  part.s,  and  since 
the  initial  Consonant  is  the  same  as  the  Consonant  of  the  Verbal 
Suffix  it  would  seem  that  the  construction  of  these  particular  forms 
of  the  Gerundive  is  either  this  Consonant  and  ana  (in  which  case 
the  Consonant  alone  would  be  considered  to  be  the  real  Verbal 
Suffix),  or  the  Verbal  Suffix  and  na,  the  i  of  the  Verbal  Suffix 
being  changed  to  a  for  the  sake  of  euphony,  i.e.,  tana  for  tina, 
etc.  Thus  in  Sa'a  e  gives  place  to  a  before  ?ia  and  ta  for  the  sake 
of  euphony;  nikf.  mother,  nikana  his  mother;  hune  to  anchor, 
hunata  an  anchor.  If  it  be  considered  that  ana  is  added  to  the 
Consonant  of  the  Verbal  Suffix  in  order  to  form  the  Gerundive, 
then  it  might  be  considered  that  ana  itself  is  probably  a  compound 
Noun  Suffix,  being  made  up  of  a  and  n«,  which  l>oth  appear  as 
Noun  Suffixes.  Ulawa  furnishes  instances  of  the  use  of  compound 
Noun  Suffixes;  alida  to  travel  by  sea,  alidana  also  alidanaha  a 
sea  journey;  kae  to  deceive,  kaena  also  kaenaha  deceit;  raqa  to 
deceive,  raqatana,  guile. 

Gerundives  in  Samoan.  • 

In  Samoan  na  is  used  as  a  Noun  Suffix  forming  Abstract  Nouns 
to  a  greater  extent  than  in  Maori;  tuli  to  drive,   tulina  driving; 


Suffixes  in  Oceanic  LaiKjwigcs.  325 

malolo  to  rest,  /i/aloloua  a  lasting  place  (Sa'a  niamalo  to  rest, 
mamalona  a  rest.  iiinnidloJia  a  resting  place);  fan  to  fight,  tauna 
A  fight,  feana'i  to  correspond,  feaiui' iwci  a  )-elationship ;  /wZor/'i 
to  command,/Jo/o<7'/nrtf  a  commandment  j  ?//?/  to  make  double,  uliiwa 
a  pair  ;  tanu  to  bury,  ton  una  a  burial.  The  other  gerundival  Suffixes 
are  also  used  to  foi-m  Abstract  Nouns  ;  luluu  to  fill  the  hand,  luutana 
a  handful;  (iin/  to  spit.  a/iufi(iua  spittle;  /nii  to  drink,  itiumana 
a  drink ;  ola  to  save,  olaana  life  time,  olafaiia  a  means  of  deliver- 
ance; lele  to  fly,  /e/f«.  to  lae  driven  away  by  wind,  Meaua  a  party 
driven  off  by  a  strong  wind  ;  fan  to  anchor,  faiilana  a  harbour. 
The  second  class  of  Noun  Sutlixes  in  Melanesia  furnishes  examples 
of  such  secondary  usages;  la,  le,  f<(,  ha,  in  Sa'a  and  Ulawa  when 
used  with  the  suffixed  Pronoun  or  the  Possessive  have  a  more  or 
less  gerundival  force  (see  above);  saanau  a  young  man,  saanauheku 
my  youth;  tono  to  drink,  tonohana  a  Kalita'alu  the  drinking 
(place)  of  KalitaWtln.  In  these  two  languages  when  it  is  desired 
to  form  Abstract  Nouns  from  Verbs  to  which  these  gerundival 
endings  may  be  added  the  Noun  Suffix  na  is  used  and  not  one  of 
these  gerundival  Suffixes;  thus  tono  to  drink,  fonowa  drinking, 
and  not  tonoha. 

Remarks. — It  may  be  concluded  then  from  the  Samoan  use  that 
the  gerundival  ending  \\a  in  Samoan  and  in  Maori  is  the  same  as 
the  na  which  appears  in  Melanesia  as  a  Noun  Suffix.  And  since 
in  Samoan  the  Gerundives  (with  the  exception  of  na  and  ana),  em- 
ploy the  Consonant  of  the  Verbal  Suffix,  whether  that  Suffix  is 
attached  by  itself  to  the  Verb,  or  only  appears  with  the  addition 
of  a  as  forming  the  Passive  of  the  Verb  {takahi  to  trample, 
takahana  the  trampling;  huaki  to  open,  rush  on,  huakana  the 
rushing  on;  naromia  to  be  destroyed,  naromana  the  destroying) 
the  conclusion  may  therefore  be  drawn  that  the  Gerundive  in 
Samoan  as  well  as  in  Maori  is  compounded  of  Verbal  Suffix  and 
Noun  Suffix  or  Suffixes,  and  that  either  the  Vowel  of  the  Verbal 
Suffix  is  changed  to  a  for  euphonic  reasons,  or  that  with  the  elision 
of  the  Vowel  i  of  the  Verbal  Suffix  the  Gerundive  is  made  up  of 
the  Consonant  of  the  Suff.x,  and  ana  a  variant  of  na  and  possibly 
itself  a  compound  of  the  two  Noun  Suffixes  a  and  na,  the  two  classes 
of  the  Noun  Suffix  thus  combining  to  form  the  special  gerundival 
Suffix. 

Independent    Nou?is. 

"  Independent  Nouns  are  formed  by  adding  the  terminations 
?■  or  c/i,  ill  or  ?/?,  or  w  to  the  stem  word — there  is  only  one  class 
of    words    which    receives    this    generalising    termination — Nouns 

13 


;326  W.  G.  Ivens: 

which  signify  parts  of  a  whole,  members  of  a  l^ody ;  things  which 
can  stand  in  a  certain  relation  to  some  inchisive  whole."  ("  Mel. 
Lang.,"  p.  141.)  Nouns  with  these  terminations  are  found  in  the 
vocabularies  of  the  Banks'  Islands'  and  New  Hel)rides'  languages 
for   "beliy,"   "body,      "bone,"   "child,"   "ear,"   "egg^"   "fnce." 

Dr.  Codrington  states  that  these  terminations  are  not  found  in 
the  Polynesian  languages,  or  in  Fiji.  Tliis  statement  is  un- 
doubtedly correct  in  regard  to  the  greatei-  number  of  the  Nouns 
or  subdivisions  of  the  class  of  Nouns  which  he  instances,  1)ut  it 
will  be  found  that  a  great  number  of  the  Oceanic  languages  which 
do  not  otherwise  show  any  trace  of  these  terminations,  yet  have 
terminations  in  n  or  iia  in  Nouns  signifying  mendjei-sliip  of  a 
body,  or  relationship,  e.g.,  father,  mother,  Itrother  (but  not  in- 
cluding child,  husband,  wife). 

It  is  almost  impossible  for  one  accustomed  to  tlie  practice  of  the 
Melanesian  languages  to  believe  that  the  Maori  word  taina  brother 
does  not  really  mean  "his  brother,"  and  so  also  with  iupuna  an- 
cestor, which  means  in  Mota  "his  ancestor,"  but  comparison  with 
Nengone  tenene  child,  where  tene  is  the  stem,  and  with  Anaiteum 
netgan  belly,  nohun  body,  naklin  egg,  Motlav  nten  child,  flen  ^^, 
shows  that  the  final  na  in  taina  is  a  Noun  termination,  and  not 
the  Suffixed  Pronoun.  In  the  Banks'  and  New  Hebrides'  languages 
this  Noun  termination  is  dropped  when  the  Pronoun  is  suffixed, 
Mota  natui  son,  nofiina  his  son,  Nengone  tenene  child,  tenego  my 
child;  but  since  the  Polynesian  languages  do  not  suffix  the  Pronoun 
to  the  Noun,  the  na  or  ne  of  the  Independent  Noun  form  remains 
constant.  Ordinarily  in  Ulawa  and  Sa'a  the  words  expressing  re- 
latiotiship  have  no  particiilar  termination  as  such,  but  when  cer- 
tain Prefixes  are  used  to  mark  reciprocity  of  relationship  or  of 
kinship,  ma,  ma,  hn'i,  lie'i,  the  Noun  to  which  they  are  affixed 
always  has  the  termination  na  or  ne;  nlke  wife,  ro  ha' i  nikana 
a  man's  wife  and  child  ;  m.u  he'i  malahune  friends;  uweli  (Vocative 
only)  a  boy's  uncle,  a  man's  nephew,  (sister's  child)  ro  ma  uweline 
uncle  and  nephew;  ro  n\a  'asine  brothers,  mu  ma  'asine  brethren; 
I'o  ma  hunaonn  father-  and  son-in-law;  ro  ha' i  ma'amana  father 
and  son.  Thej'o  .seems  to  be  no  reason  to  doubt  that  the  termina- 
tion na  seen  in  these  Sa'a  words  is  identical  with  the  na  seen  as  a 
termination  of  the  words  expressing  relationship  in  other  Oceanic 
languages.  In  Sa'a  and  Ulawa  all  the  words  expressing  kinship 
(and  the  word  for  "  friend  "  also),  except  those  for  "  wife."  "  hus- 
band," "  father  "  (when  in  the  Vocative),  "  child,"  are  never  used 


Suffixes  in  Oceanic  Languages. 


:527 


without  a  suffixed  Pronoun,  i.e.,  there  is  no  way  of  saying  "bro- 
ther," "sister,"  "friend,"  etc.,  without  saying  "my  brother," 
■etc.  This  peculiarity  of  speech  seems  to  suggest  that  originally 
certain  Nouns  expressing  kinship  or  relationship  had  a  definite 
termination  as  such  in  these  two  languages  as  they  have  in  Poly- 
nesia; and  the  refusal  of  the  two  peoples  to  use  these  words  exctj)t 
with  a  suffixed  Pronoun  may  mark  a  consciousness  of  the  loss  of 
the  termination. 

In  xMota  "  a  brother,"  "  the  brother,'"  is  rendered  o  tasiu,  in 
Maori  te  teina,  in  Sa'a  a  ma  'asine,  in  Ulawa  a  'ulaka'elu  {ka e.lu 
meaning  "  our  ").  This  termination  iia  is  seen  extensively  in  the 
Oceanic  languages  in  words  denoting  relationship  : — Maori  tupuna 
ancestor  (Mot  a  tupui);  teina  younger  brother  (Mota  tasiu); 
tuakana  elder  brother ;  Samoan  teine  girl ;  Niue  hoana  friend 
(Maori  hoa,  Mota  soai);  Fiji  tinana,  Motu  sinana,  Samoan  tina, 
Malay  inana,  mother;  Fiji  tamana  father  (Mota  tamaim  his 
father),  txikana  grandfather;  lomana  heart,  may  be  an  instance 
■of  na  as  a  Suffix ;  suina  bone  certainly  shows  na  as  a  Suffix  (Mota 
suriu,  Sa'a  su'isuli). 

Melanesian  New  Guinea  shoAvs  i,  a,  na  as  Suffixes  forming  Inde- 
pendent Nouns.  Wedau  ;  natui  son  ;  amana  father.  Dobu ;  nimana 
hand;  hihma  bone.  Panaieti;  matan  eye;  niman  hand;  maninin 
face.  Motu ;  tamana  father ;  tadina  brother ;  kakana  elder  bro- 
ther; turia  bone  (Oceanic  suli);  the  word  for  "hand"  in  Mala- 
gasy tanana  seems  to  show  na  as  a  Suffix  of  this  nature;  c.f.  also 
Malay  tanaii  hand  (Polynesian  tano  to  touch).  In  Sa'a,  Ulawa, 
San  Cristoval,  Samoa,  na  is  added  to  Cardinals  to  form  Ordinals, 
ni  is  thus  used  in  Florada,  and  iu,  i,  in  Mota,  and  the  word  so 
formed  is  a  Noun ;  hence  it  is  probable  that  these  endings  na,  ni, 
iu,  i,  are  identical  with  the  terminations  of  the  Independent 
Nouns. 

TABLE    III. 


Passive  Suffixes. 

(a)  Florida 

(1)   with  n 

(2)    without  n 

(b)   Bugotu 
<c)  Fiji       - 
(d)  Maori  - 

■     na,  ina,  rina,  tvhina 

«(?) 

'    ^■^.            .            . 

a,    la,   hia,    kia,    tnia,  n/a, 
ria,  tia 

(e)  Samoan 

-     na,  ina,  a'ina 

a,    ia,    fia,    Iia,    mia,   n/a, 

(f)  Gilbert  Is. 

-     kina 

sia,  tia 

<g)  Malagasy 

•     na,  ana,  ena,  ina 

W.  G.   Ivens 


TABLE    IV. 

A  djectival  S^iffixes. 

For  the  foundation   of   this   Table  see   "Mel.    Lang,"  p.  167,    Torn 
Straits'  Expedition,  Vol.  III.,  p.  453. 

(a)    New  Hebrides. 


Sesake 
Nguna 
Araga 
Oba 
Mae  wo 


Lakona 
Vanua  Lava 
M  ota 

Motalava    - 
Volow 
Ureparapara 


(1)  with  n 


(2)    withoiit  n. 

a 
g<h  si 


(b)    Banks'    Islands. 


n,  na 


a,  ga,  ra,  sa,  ta 


(c)    Fiji. 

a,  li,  ta 

(d)    Samoa. 

- 

a,  la,  sa 

(e)    Tongan. 

a 

(f)    Malagasy. 

- 

;/«,  ( 

ana, 

ena,  ina 

te) 

Solomon    Islands. 

Ulawa 

- 

\i,  ^ala,  la,  ta'a 

Sa'a    -          -         ■- 

- 

\i,  ^a'a,  'a/a,  la,  k,  ta'a 

Lau    - 

- 

a,  laa 

Fagani 

- 

ga 

Wango 

- 

'a 

Vaturanga 

- 

ha 

Florida 

ga                                            '  \ 

Savo 

- 

sua 

Duke  of  York     - 

ina 

. 

0 

New  Britain 

ina 

. 

Gilbert  Islands   - 

ina 

- 

Suffi^xes  in  Oceanic  Lamjimge!^.  •129 

(h)    Meliiiiesiaii   New  Guinea.         (See    "Torres  Straits'    M\pt'ditioii." 
Vol.   TIL,   p.   454). 

(1)   With   )(.  (2)   Without   n. 

Motn  -         -  -     ka,  ga,  hi,  va,  a 

Kabadi        -  -  -     va 

Wedau         -  -  -     ra 

Dobu  -  -     iia,  ina 

(i)    Malay. 
-     an 

NOTES.  ETC..  ON  TABLES  IIL  AND  IV. 

The  two  instances  of  Passives  in  Melanesia  in  the  languages  of 
Florida  and  Biigotu  have  been  referred  to  above  under  Table  ii.. 
Noun  Suffixes.  Dr.  Codrington  states  that  the  a  in  these  two  in- 
stances being  attached  to  the  Verb  conveys  a  sense  Avhich  is  Passive. 
It  will  be  noticed  in  these  two  instances  that  the  Suffix  a  which  is 
used  could  not  be  the  Suffixed  Pronoun  since  the  Pronoun  is  added 
to  it,  and  the  adding  of  the  Pronoun  proves  that  the  Avord  sn 
formed  is  a  Noun,  since  the  Pronouns  f)u,  mu,  na,  etc.,  are  at- 
tached only  to  Nouns,  and  in  consequence  this  a  must  be  a  Noun 
Suffix.  Its  use  then  in  Florida  and  Bugotu  may  be  compared  with 
the  use  of  the  Noun  Suffixes  la,  ta  in  Sa'a  and  Ulawa,  which  also 
are  used  with  a  gerundival  force,  and  we  should  thus  conclude  that 
there  is  no  real  example  of  Passive  Suffixes  in  Melanesia. 

Dr.  Codrington  ("Mel.  Lang.,"  p.  192).  suggests  that  the 
Maori  Passive  may  have  arisen  from  an  impersonal  use  of  the  Verb 
^fter  the  style  of  the  following  sentence  in  Mota;  nie  taiir  veta  o 
Ima  built  already  the  hou.*ie,  the  house  is  built.  There  is  no  pas- 
sive in  Melanesia  as  such  and  the  nearest  approach  to  it  is  in  such 
impersonal  uses  of  the  Voib.  Mr.  Ray,  "  Common  Origin  of  the 
Oceanic  Languages,"  consideis  tliat  tlie  Passive  in  Polynesian  is 
built  up  of  the  Verbal  Suffix  and  c/,  and  he  considers  this  d  to  be 
the  Suffixed  Pronoun,  but  he  gives  no  reason  why  the  Pronoun 
should  be  suffixed  in  the  third  Person  Singular  only,  nor  Avhy  this 
special  Melanesian  characteristic  of  suffixing  the  Pronoun  should 
thus  occur  in  Polynesia.  As  he  says  words  like  pmiif/a  and  ta\\isi<i 
in  Samoan  have  a  decidedly  Melanesian  look,  but  in  no  Polynesian 
language  is  the  Personal  Pronoun  suffixed  to  the  Verb,  and  this 
fact  alone  would  seem  to  vitiate  Mr.  Ray's  theory  as  to  tlie  nature 
of  the  termination  a  of  the  Polynesian  Passive.  Dr.  Codrington 
is  probably  correct  in   his  theory   of   the  Passive   arising   from    an 


mo  W.  G.  Ivens: 

impersonal  use  of  the  Verb,  but  he  propounds  no  theory  to  account 
for  the  endings  of  these  Passive  Suffixes,  though  he  calls  attention 
to  the  similarity  between  the  first  part  of  them  and  the  Verbal 
Suffixes,  and  Mr.  Ray's  theory  fails  to  account  for  the  Passive 
Suffixes  which  contain  ■//. 

It  will  be  noticed  in  Table  iv.  that  the  adjectival  SutHxes  in 
Malagasy  are  the  same  as  the  Passive  Suffixes.  Richardson 
("  Malagasy  Grammar  ")  says  that  "  the  place  of  English  Adjec- 
tives in  ttble,  ihle,  is  supplied  in  Malagasy  by  Passive  Verbs  pre- 
ceded by  azo,  e.g.,  azo  hanina  eatable,  tsy  azo  resena  invincible." 
In  the  Dictionary  hanina  appears  as  a  Noun,  but  the  presence  of 
gana,  'ani,  in  Oceanic  languages,  nxeaning  "to  eat,"  suggests 
that  haniiHi  is  made  up  of  hajii  v.  and  vn  Suffix,  and  resena  is  an 
Adjective  formed  from  rese  v.  The  use  of  the  Passives  in  Malagasy 
ua,  ana.  ena,  ina,  is  plain  enough,  but  while  Dr.  Codrington  says 
that  there  is  no  sign  of  special  forms  in  Malagasy  for  adjectival 
endings  Richardson  in  his  "  Grammar  "  in  a  Table  of  Adjectives 
says  that  they  are  "  formed  from  the  root  of  the  word  with  the 
affix  ina,  ena,  ana,''  and  he  instances  nofo  flesh,  nofosana  fleshy. 
To  this  may  be  added  vorif  froth,  vortna.  frothy;  vaoka  whiskers, 
caohina  whiskered;  Komotra  beard,  soniorina  bearded;  olitra  a 
worm,  olerina  wormy;  ozatra  muscle,  ozatina  muscular;  volo  hair, 
volohui  hairy.  Many  of  the  so-called  Adjectives  in  Malagasy  are 
evidently  Neuter  Verbs,  while  others  are  Participles,  e.g.  fotsiona 
whitened  (fotsy  white),  is  evidently  a  Participle.  From  the  above 
example  the  connection  seems  established  between  the  Passive  and 
the  adjectival  (or  participial)  terminations  in  Malagasy. 

Polynesia  has  no  adjectival  endings  of  the  first  class  containing 
//,  but  Micronesia  has  Gilbert  Islands  mama  moonlight,  mamaina 
white  (Mota  vida  (1)  moon,  (2)  white),  and  Melanesia  shows  four; 
Mofca  9vnivana  wide,  oba  tvaivn  open  sea  (Sa'a  niatawa 
open  sea,  Malag,  fafana,  M.L.  p.  189,  c.f.  Malag.  inasina 
salt,  Figi  inasima)  ;  Mota  malea  tasteless,  malean  Ijrackish  , 
Duke  of  York  ina;  ruma  house,  rumaina  containing  houses;  Dobu 
va:  werahana  witch,  werahaimia  witch-likv  ;  ha  ran  sorcerer, 
haraharauna  sorcerer-like;  hila  to  rot,  hilahilina.  rotten;  muta 
to  mould,  mutamutana  mouldy;  'edagi  to  laugh,  ' eda' cdagiva  hav- 
ing the  quality  of  laughter;  siwa  to  pour  out.  Kiwaaiirana  poured 
out;  'efinie  to  send,  'etu'etunena  the  sent.  New  Bi-itain  ina; 
IcdLau  lime,  kahanina  white.  Malay  shows  an  used  in  the  same 
way;  pileh  to  choose,  pilehhan  v.t.   pilrhan  chosen;   hantah  to  con- 


Suffixes  in  Oceanic  Languages.  331 

tradict,  hantahan  quarrelsome;  durian  a  thorny  fruit,  duri  a 
tliorii,  ra)iihutan  a  liairy  fruit,  ramhut  hair,  probably  shown  an  as 
an  adjectival  ending.  In  Tagalog  an  appears  as  an  adjectival 
Suffix  e(][uivalent  to  -ahlc  in  English,  lapii  idea  of  approaching, 
di  imdapitan   unapproachable. 

From  the  evidence  of  the  endings  in  Malagasy  and  from  the  use 
of  an  in  Malay  and  tia  in  Melanesia  as  adjectival  endings  it  may 
safely  be  concluded  that  the  termination  na  of  the  Passive  Suffixes 
in  Polynesia  is  identiral  with  the  termination  na  of  the  adjectival 
Suffixes  seen  above. 

The  use  of  the  adjectival  Suffix  a  in  Samoan  and  Melanesian 
justifies  the  conclusion  that  the  Passive  Suffix  a  is  the  same  as  the 
adjectival  Suffix  a.  Samoan  shows  a  and  sa  as  adjectival  Suffixes; 
eleelt  dii-t,  eleelea  dirty;  naoa  also  naosa  stony;  Tongan  maka 
stone,  makaia  stony;  Motu  lokua  folded  (Sa'a  loloku  to  be  bent). 
The  Suffix  a  is  used  with  an  adjectival  force  in  the  following 
Samoan  words:  Tane  man.  tanea  having  to  do  with  men;  full  of 
men;  lele  to  fly,  lelea,  to  be  carried  off  by  the  wind;  lai  the  westerly 
wind,  laia  to  be  bliglited  by  £lie  Avesterly  wind.  In  Sa'a  and  Ulawa 
the  adjectival  Suffix  when  added  to  Verbs  conveys  a  sense  which 
might  really  be  said  to  be  Passive;  rere  to  sharpen  by  rubbing, 
rere'a  sharpened,  clean;  roro  to  be  tight,  to  incur  a  debt,  roro'a 
to  be  at  fault,  to  have  incurred  a  debt;  ere  to  coil,  ereere'a  also 
ereerea'ile  (a'i  Verbal  Suffix)  coiled.  The  explanation  of  the  Ulawa 
word  irala'awa,  walaa  to  speak  (see  above,  under  Noun  Suffixes) 
may  possi51y  be  found  in  the  addition  of  V/,  the  adjectival  Suffix 
to  the  Verb  wala. 

There  remains  yet  the  provision  of  a  theory  to  account  for  the 
initial  portion  of  the  Passive  Suffixes.  //*,  mi,  etc.,  of  the  second 
class,  and  /,  //.  whi.  fi' i ,  of  the  first  class.  It  will  be  noticed  that 
the  Consonant  and  first  Vowel  of  the  Passive  Suffixes  of  the  second 
class,  and  the  initial  vowel  or  Consonant  with  Vowel  (exclud- 
ing the  foriii  nn)  of  the  first  class  are  the  same  as  the  initial  Con- 
sonants and  Vowels  of  the  Verbal  Suffixes,  and  since  the  use  of 
Passives  in  the  Polynesian  languages  has  very  probably  arisen,  as 
Dr.  (,'odrington  suggests,  from  an  impersonal  use  of  the  Verb  as 
seen  in  Melanesia,  Ave  seem  to  be  justified  in  concluding  that  the 
Passive  Suffixes  are  made  up  of  the  Verbal  Suffixes  with  the  addi- 
tion of  the  adjectival  Suffixes  conveying  a  participial  force. 

The  use  of  the  Transitive  Suffixes  in  the  formation  of  the  Pas- 
sive Suffixes  would  seem  to  be  accounted  for  bv  what  Mr.   Ray  says 


332  W.  G.  Ivens :  Suffi.xes  in  Oceanic  Languages. 

in  "Common  Origin  of  the  Oceanic  Languages,"  "The  identity 
of  passive  and  transitive  is  strengthened  by  the  fact  that  the  Poly- 
nesian passive  i§  used  when  the  action  is  emphatic  rather  than  the 
agent,  and  hence  is  more  frequently  used  in  the  case  of  transitive 
A'erbs  than  the  active  form."  This  laying  stress  upon  the  action 
is  seen  in  the  Samoan  Passive  Suffix  n'hia  which  is  said  to  denote 
intensity  of  action;  tuli  to  drive,  tidiaina  to  drive  on;  telea'i  to 
run  quickl3^  telea'ina  to  hurry  on.  The  same  thing  appears  in 
the  Gilbert  Islands  where  the  Passive  Sufhx  kina  denotes  "  a  fre- 
quentative use";  matai  to  look  at  covetously,  mafalakitia  to  look 
at  with  longing  for;  mutiahina  to  regard. 

It  having  been  shown  that  Verbal  Suffixes  occur  in  Polynesian 
languages  there  is  ,no  difficulty  in  drawing  the  conclusion  that  since 
the  Verbal  Suffix  definitely  strengthens  the  action  of  the  Verb  (and 
having  regard  to  the  nature  of  the  Passive  as  explained  above  by 
Mr.  Ray),  the  /(/,  mi,  etc.,  and  the  /,  r/,  v/7^/,  «'/,  of  the  Passive 
endings  are  identical  with  the  Verbal  Suffixes,  and  that  the  n, 
na,  of  the  endings  conveys  the  passive,  i.e.,  tlie  adjectival,  or  par- 
ticipial, force. 

No  rule  can  be  given  as  to  whether  the  Suffixes  with  /;  are  to  be 
used  for  the  formation  of  the  Passive  in  any  particular  case,  or 
those  without  n. 

TJie  Passive  in   Fijian. 

Dr.  Hazelwood  says  that  the  Passive  in  Fijian  is  formed  by  re- 
placing the  final  a  of  the  Verbal  Suffix  by  /,  or  by  adding  i  to  the 
verb  when  no  Ver1)al  Suffix  is  ordinai'ily  used,  Init  tliis  statement 
is  questioned  by  Dr.  Codrington  in  "  Mel.  Lang.,"  p.  191,  on  the 
authority  of  Dr.  Fison,  who  says  tliat  "  no  Fijian  would  use  Hazel- 
wood's  example."  If  Dr.  Hazelwood's  examples  of  words  used 
showing  a  passive  meaning,  are  coi-rcct.  tlicn  tliev  would  seem  to 
fall  into  line  witli  such  words  in  Maori  as  hokai  spread  out;  punui 
close  together;  irhai  settled.  These  liave  been  shown  above  (see 
Verbal  Suffixes  in  Maoi'i)  to  l)e  Participles  formed  l)y  the  addition 
of  Verbal  Suffixes. 


[Proc.  lioY.   Soc.   Victoria,  27  (N.S.),  Part  \I.,   1914]. 

Akt.  ^XW.—Nofe.^  on  the  s()-(;aUed  Obsidian  ffoni  Geelong  and 
fr<n)i  Taradale,  and.  on  A'iistndites. 

By    Profkssok    K.RNE.ST    W.    SKEAT8,    D.Sc,    A.R.C.S.,    F.G.S. 
L^ead  lOtli   December,  1911]. 

Introduction, 

In  the  Records  of  the  Geological  Survey  of  Victoria,  Vol.  III., 
Part  3,  19U.  pp.  322-326,  recently  published,  Mr.  E.  J.  Dunn. 
F.G.S. ,  in  a  paper  entitled  "  Further  notes  on  Australites,"  quotes 
some  old  analyses  of  Mr.  Cosmo  Newbery  of  two  specimens  of 
"obsidian''  from  the  Geelong  district,  of  a  "basalt''  from  neai- 
Kyneton,  and  of  an  australite  from  the  Wimmera  Plains.  In 
addition  a  recent  analysis  of  a  so-called  obsidian  from  Taradale 
is  quoted,  and  the  claim  is  made  in  the  paper  that  these  analyses 
show  that  acidic  volcanic  glass,  similar  in  composition  to  that  of 
australites  exists  in  Victoria  associated  with  the  newer  volcanic 
rocks. 

Mr.  Dunn's  long  and  wide  experience  as  a  field  geologist  ensures 
that  any  paper  of  his  dealing  witli  problems  of  field  geology  will 
command  confidence  and  respect  fi'om  all  geologists.  He  has  had, 
however,  no  special  experience  in  chemical  and  jDetrological  ques- 
tions, and  the  problems  raised  in  his  recent  paper  and  on  austral- 
ites generally  are  to  a  large  extent  chemical  and  petrological.  In 
consequence  of  this  I  feel  that  he  has  misunderstood  tlie  evidence 
and  come  to  erroneous  conclusions. 

The  object  of  this  communication  is  to  criticise  some  of  tlie 
evidence  stated  in  Mr.  Dunn's  paper  and  to  show  that  the  older 
rock  analyses  of  the  Geological  Survey  of  Victoria,  in  common  with 
many  old  rock  analyses,  arc  quite  unreliable,  tliat  tlie  rocks  from 
Geelong,  described  as  obsidian,  are  ically  tacliylytv.  that  the 
rock  from  Taradale  is  not  obsidian,  l)ut  ii  vok-anic  glass  of  peculiar 
composition  and  belonging  to  the  Intei'inediate  division,  that  no 
rock  of  the  nature  of  obsidian  is  known  to  occur  among  the  newer 
Volcanic  rocks  of  Victoria,  and  that  in  consequence  no  support  is 
lent  to  the  hypothesis  of  the  volcanic  oiigin  of  australites  by  an 
appeal  to  the  chemical  composition  of  the  newer  volcanic  rocks  of 
this  State. 


334  Ernest   W.  Skeats 


The  nature  of  obsidian. 

During  the  last  century  the  significance  of  many  of  the  terms 
used  by  the  older  mineralogists  and  geologists  has  by  a  process  of 
evolution  undergone  change  and  revision.  The  change  has  usually 
been  from  a  vague  and  general  definition  to  one  of  a  more  precise 
and  limited  character.  The  progressive  changes  in  the  meaning 
attached  to  the  word  obsidian  illustrate  this  process. 

A  century  ago,  and  even  down  to  60  or  70  years  ago,  the  black 
compact  glass  called  obsidian  was  believed  to  be  definite  in  com- 
position and  to  constitute  a  true  mineral  species. 

Later  it  was  shown  to  be  a  volcanic  glass  of  variable  composition, 
and  then  any  volcanic  glass  was  spoken  of  as  obsidian.  At  a  later 
date  the  glassy  form  of  basalt  was  distinguished  by  the  name  of 
tachylyte,  while  the  name  of  obsidian  was  reserved  for  volcanic 
glasses  of  acid  to  intermediate  composition. 

In  recent  years  intermediate  volcanic  glasses  have  been  distin- 
guished either  as  trachyte-glass  and  andesite-glass,  or  as  trachytic- 
obsidian  and  andesitic-obsidian.  Avhile  the  term  obsidian,  without 
qualification,  has  been  by  petrologists  restricted  to  the  acid  volcanic 
glasses  corresponding  in  chemical  composition  to  the  rhyolites  and 
acid  granites. 

It  is  this  modern  definition  as  an  acid  volcanic  glass  which  alone 
should  be  applied  to  obsidian,  and  it  is  in  this  sense  that  I,  in 
common  with  other  petrologists,  understand  the  term. 

The  present-day  definition  implies  an  acid  volcanic  glass  of  about 
the  following  composition  : — 


SiO., 
AI..O., 

I 

66- 
13- 

-80% 

-16% 

Fe,0, 
FeO 

} 

2  . 

-3% 

CaO 
MgO 

{ 
1 

1 

-3% 

K,() 
Na./) 

\ 
1 

6 

-8% 

Most  obsidians  have  a  silica  percentage  of  over  70,  and  it  should 
be  noted  not  only  that  the  iron  oxides  seldom  exceed  3  per  cent., 
but  that  the  alkalies  are  commonly  in  notable  excess  over  the  alka- 
line earths. 


NoteK  o)i   Obsididn  and  Anntrdlitcti.  385 


The  so  called  obsidians  from  Geelong. 

In  the  Notes  on  the  Physical  Geography,  Geology  and  Mineralogy 
of  Victoria,  by  A.  H.  Selwyn  and  G.  H.  F.  Ulrich,  published  in. the 
Intercolonial  Exhibition  Essays,  1866,  p.  65,  obsidian  is  stated 
to  occur  in  a  basalt  quarry  near  Geelong  in  patches  and  irregular 
veins  of  an  inch  or  more  in  thickness.  Two  analyses  by  Mr.  Cosmo' 
Newbery  are  quoted  from  this  locality.  The  same  statements  and 
analyses  are  quoted  in  Selwyn's  Descriptive  Catalogue  of  the  rock 
specimens  and  minerals  in  the  National  Museum,  collected  by  the 
Geological  Survey  of  Victoria,  1868,  p.  80.  The  specimens  are 
labelled  Specimen  24  and  24a. 

These  are  two  of  the  analyses  quoted  by  Mr.  Dunn,  and  are  a& 
follow  : — 


Geelong  Specimen. 

Geelong  Specii 

Black  to  bi 

I'own.  Sp. 

Gr.  2.41. 

Bluish 

g-rey.  Sp.  G 

No.  24. 

No.  24 A. 

SiO., 

- 

72.23 

68.45 

AlA 

- 

16.43 

5.38 

Fe.30,, 

- 

- 

2.2s 

7.21 

CaO 

- 

3.17 

- 

8.11 

MgO 

- 

2.12 

- 

1.03 

MnO, 

- 

— 

- 

- 

0.50 

TiO., 

- 

— 

. 

0.30 

Na,0  , 
K.p    ) 

4.65 

- 

7.36 

Loss  ijy 

ignition 

0.13 

- 

- 

— 

101.01  98.34 

To  anyone  accustomed  to  rock  analyses  the  above  figures  at  once 
suggest  inaccuracy,  not  only  by  the  summation,  but  still  more  by 
the  curious  and  unusual  proportions  of  some  of  the  oxides. 

Mr.  Dunn  has  overlooked  the  fact  that  as  long  ago  as  1898  Mr. 
Walcotti  in  his  paper  on  Obsidianites  had  examined  these  speci- 
mens, had  called  attention  to  the  discrepancy  between  the  published 
analyses  and  the  appearances  of  the  specimens  and  had  detached 
a  chip  from  specimen  24  and  by  chemical  analysis  obtained  only 
53.2  per  cent,  of  silica.  He  pointed  out  that  the  appearance  and 
silica  percentage  pointed  to  the  mate'-ial  being  tachylyte  and  not 
obsidian. 

1   Proc.  Roy.  Soc.  Victoria,  vol.  xi.  (N.S.),  1898,  p.  32. 


336  Ernest   W.  Skeats  : 

By  the  courtesy  of  Professor  Spencer  I  was  enabled  to  make  an 
examination  of  the  two  specimens,  Nos.  24  and  24a.  There  are 
two  specimens  of  No.  24.  The  smaller  is  partly  scoriaceous,  partly 
dense,  and  is  a  dark  grey-green  in  colour. 

The  larger  specimen  is  similar  to  the  smaller,  but  shows  a 
sporadic  development  of  spherical  scoriaceous  areas  constituting 
pseudo-spherulites.      The  rest  of  the  material  is  a  dense  glass. 

No.  24a  is  dense  and  mostly  dark  blue  in  colour.  Some  black 
spherulitic  areas  occur  with  cracks,  filled  with  ])i-own  limonite. 

Both  24  and  24a  have  all  the  appearances  characteristic  of  tachy- 
lyte,  as  Mi-.  Walcott  has  previously  described.  I  determined  the 
specific  gravity  of  the  two  pieces  of  No.  24  by  Walker's  balance. 
The  small  piece  gave  a  value  of  2.36. 

The  specific  gravity  is,  of  course,  quite  unreliable,  as  the  speci- 
men is  very  vesicular.  The  true  specific  gravity  would  be  much 
higher. 

The  larger  piece  of  24  gave  a  value  of  2.50. 

This  specimen  is  also  vesicular,  so  the  result  is  also  too  low.  A 
small  chip  from  the  larger  specimen  of  No.  24  Avas  fairly  compact, 
but  contained  some  vesicles.  By  the  Joly's  spring  l)alance  the 
specific  gravity  of  the  chip  was  determined  at  2.60. 

We  may  conclude  that  the  true  specific  gravity  exceeds  this  latter 
figure.  The  glass  must  therefore  be  basic  in  composition,  i.e.,  the 
specimen  is  tachylyte.  This  is  in  agreement  with  Mr.  Walcott's 
silica  deteiinination  of  5'3.2  % 

Specimen  No.  24a  ("  Blue  obsidian  ")  is  larger  and  quite  com- 
pact. By  Walker's  balance  the  specific  gravity  is  2.74.  This  also 
indicates  clearly  that  the  specimen  is  tachylyte.  I  am  quite  at  a 
loss  to  explain  how  Mr.  Cosmo  Newbery  could  have  obtained  the 
results  quoted  for  the  chemical  analysis  of  these  specimens  or  the 
figures  for  their  specific  gravities  (No.  24  =  2.41,  No.  24a  =  2.36). 
It  is  clear,  however,  from  Mr.  Walcott's  Avork  and  my  own  deter- 
minations of  specific  gravity  that  ])oth  specimens  are  tacliylyte  and 
not  obsidian,  as  described. 

Further,  it  is  uiif<u-tunately  cleai-  tlint  [\w  oldor  clu'itiical  analyses 
of  rocks,  etc.,  published  by  the  Cieological  Survey  of  Victoi-ia,  must 
be  regarded  as  quite  untrustworthy. 

This  criticism  must  include  in  tliis  ((.nncrtion  not  only  the  an- 
alysis of  the  "  obsidian  "  from  Geelong.  but  also  tlie  analysis  of 
Specimen  No.  21,  an  australite  from  Horsham,  in  which  less  than 
5    per    cent,    of    alumina    is    recorded,   and  over   10  per  cent,   of 


Xotes  on  Obsidian  (iiid  Auslralites.  337 

alkalies,  and  also  the  "  basalt  "  from  the  Coliljaii  Kivtr,  near 
Kjneton,  in  which  61.96  %  of  silica,  10.43  %  of  iron,  and  only 
2.10  %  of  alkalies  are  recordeil.  Tliese  are  published  in  the  essay 
cited  above,  and  ai-e  quoted  without  coiuuient  by  Mr.  Dunn.  They 
must  be  regarded  as  quite  unreliable. 

The  Taradale  "obsidian." 

Associated  with  pebbles  of  black  basalt  along  the  course  of  the 
Coliban  River  from  the  Upper  Coliban  Reservoir  to  Taradale,  Mr. 
Dunn  found  and  has  describedi  well-rounded  pebbles  of  what  he  calls 
black  obsidian.  Mr.  Dunn  first  found  these  pebbles  at  Taradale. 
He  quotes  a  first-class  analysis  made  of  this  material  by  Mr.  J.  C. 
Watson,  of  the  Geological  Survey  Laboratory,  and  for  comparison 
the  analysis  by  Mr.  J.  C.  Mingaye,  of  N.S.  Wales  Geol.  Labora- 
tory, of  a  remarkable  australite  from  Uralla,  in  N.S.  Wales. 

The  analyses  are  as  follow,  with  another  for  comparison  : — 

(1)  Taradale  (2)  Uralla  (8)  Diorite 

Obsidian.  Australite.  Porphyry. 

SiO,  63.67  64.68  62  18 

AlA  15.83  16.80  15.77 

Fe,A  1-39  6.57                  1.83 

FeO  4.06  1.01                  2  44 

MgO  2.15  2.50                 3.55 

CaO  3.88  3.88                 4.13 

Na^O  3.57  tr.                   3.92 

K2O  3.69  4.01                 3.91 

H,0+  0.02  —                   0.70 

H^O-  0.15  —                   0.30 

TiOa  1.27  —                   0.55 

PA  0.02  —                   0.32 

MnO  0.43  —           BaO  0.43 

NiO  and  CoO      0.01  —                   — 


Total  =100.14  99.45  100.23 

Sp.  Gr.  =     2.569 

3.  Diorite  Porphyry,  Steam  Boat,  Little  Belt  Mt.,  Montana.  Analyst, 
W.  F.  Hillebrand.  Desci-ibed  by  L.  V.  Pirrson.  Recorded  in  Chemical 
Analyses  of  Igneous  Rocks  by  Washington,  1903,  p.  222,  United  States 
Geol.  Survey. 

The  Taradale  rock  is  a  remarkable  one,  and  Mr.  Dunn  has  done 
a  distinct  service  to  Victorian  petrology  in  drawing  attention  to  it, 
since  it  appears  to  be  a  type  hitherto  unrecognised  among  the  recent 

1.   Op.  cit. 


mS  Ernest   W.  Hkeat.^  : 

volcanic  rocks  of  Victoria.  Until  it  has  been  found  "  in  situ,"  and 
its  relation  to  the  basaltic  rocks  of  the  district  has  been  determined 
it  would  be  premature  to  give  a  detailed  discussion  of  its  characters. 

A  glance  at  the  analysis,  however,  shows  at  once  that  it  is  not 
■obsidian,  as  the  relatively  low  silica  percentage  and  the  six  per  cent, 
of  alkaline  earths  preclude  this  possibility.  On  the  other  hand  it  is 
clearly  not  a  basalt  in  view  of  the  high  silica  percentage,  and  the 
fact  that  the  total  alkalies  exceed  7  per  cent. 

Through  Mr.  Herman,  Director  of  tlic  (Geological  Survey  of 
Victoria,  I  obtained  a  small  fragment  of  the  material,  from  which 
the  analysis  was  made,  and  had  two  rock  sections  made.  The  rock 
is  clearly  a  volcanic  glass  and  contains  besides  brown  glass,  globu- 
lites,  trichites  and  scattered  phenocrysts  of  olivine,  augite  and 
plagioclase  felspar. 

The  minerals  present  show  affinities  with  the  basalts,  but  the 
large  amount  of  glass  is  evidently  high  in  silica  and  the  alkalies. 

It  has  long  been  known  that  in  a  molten  basic  magma  in  which 
crystals  are  floating  the  composition  of  the  molten  ground  mass  is 
generally  more  acid  than  that  of  the  phenocrysts  or  of  the  whole 
rock.  In  Teall's  British  Petrography,  pp.  .399-401,  analyses  by 
Lagorio  are  quoted  which  show  this  effect,  which  is  especially 
marked  in  rocks  of  intermediate  composition  and  less  marked  in 
basic  rocks.  It  is  interesting  to  note  that  the  glass  of  such  rocks  is 
richer  in  silica  and  in  the  alkalies  than  is  the  parent  rock.  It  is 
this  richness  in  silica  and  the  alkalies  which  makes  the  Taradale 
rock  interesting,  and  suggests  that  it  may  represent  the  glass  from 
a  basaltic  magma  from  which  the  bulk  of  the  phenocrysts  are  want- 
ing. 

The  closest  approach  to  the  composition  of  the  Taradale  rock  i.s 
an   analysis    of  a  diorite-porphyry  from  Montana,   quoted   above. 

The  norms  of  the  Taradale  rock  and  of  the  Montana  loek.  and 
of  the  Uralla  australite  are  as  follow  : — 


Taradale 

Diorite 

Uralla 

Rock. 

Porphyry. 

Australite. 

Quartz 

15.66 

11.2 

37.2 

Orthoclase 

21.68 

22.8 

23.9 

Albite 

30.39 

33.0 



Anorthite 

16.12 

13.9 

19.2 

Diopside 

2.51 

5.3 

Coi 

•undum 

I    5.4 

Hypersthene 

9.06 

8.1 

6.2 

Magnetite 

2.09 

2.6 

3.9 

Ilnienite 

2.43 

1.1 

Hematite 

3.8 

Notes  on  Obsidian  and  Avstralites.  83P 

In  the  American  classification  ])oth  rocks  belong  to — 
Class  2.      Dosalane. 
Oi-der  4.     Dofelic. 
Rang  2.     Domalkalic. 
Sug-Rang  3.     Sodipotassic. 
Their  inagmatic  name  is  Adamellose. 

This  comparison  shows  that  in  chemical  composition  the  Taradale 
rock  belongs  to  the  basic  end  of  the  intermediate  class,  while  the 
mineral  phenocrysts  and  apjiarently  its  field  occurrence  suggest  a 
genetic  relationship  with  the  basalts.  It  is  quite  clear  that  rlie 
rock  is  not  obsidian. 

This  analysis  of  the  evidence  of  the  so-called  obsidian  from 
Geelong  and  from  Taradale  shows  that  Mr.  Dunn's  claim  that 
acidic  volcanic  glass,  similar  in  composition  to  that  of  australites, 
exists  in  Victoria  associated  with  the  newer  volcanic  rocks,  is 
quite  unwarranted  by  the  evidence  so  far  available. 

The  chemical  characters  of  austral ites. 

The  literature  ou  australites,  obsidianites,  or  obsidian  buttons  as 
they  wei-e  formerly  called,  is  now  voluminous.  The  best  papers 
describing  the  physical  characters  of  these  bodies  are  Mr.  Walcott'si 
and  Mr.  Dunn's. 2 

The  illustrations  in  Mr.  Dunn's  paper  are  particularh"  valuable. 
From  the  point  of  view  of  origin  and  chemical  relationships  the 
most  important  papers  are  by  Dr.  Summers^  and  Dr.  Suess."*  Dr. 
Summers  has  given  the  most  complete  discussion  of  their  origin  from 
a  chemical  standpoint,  and  has  given  a  fairly  complete  bibliography 
of  the  literature,  which  it  is  unnecessary  for  me  to  repeat. 

Among  the  hypotheses  as  to  the  origin  of  australites  are  the 
following  : — 

1.  That  they  are  artificial  bodies. 

2.  That  they  have  been  formed  by  lightning  discharge  during 

dust  storms. 

3.  That  they  are  of  volcanic  origin. 

4.  That  they  are  of  meteor itic  origin. 

For  the  first  two  hypotheses  no  serious  evidence  or  arguments 
have  been  advanced. 


1.  Walcott.     Proc.  Roy.  Soc.  Victoria,  vol.  xL,  (ii.s.),  1898. 

2.  Dunn.      Records  CJeol.    Surv.  Victoria,   vol.  ii.,  pt.  iv.,  IWS.      Bulletin  Geol.   Surv.   Vict., 
No.  27,  1912. 

3.  Summers.     Proc.  Roy.  Soc.  Victoria,  vol.  xxi.   (n.s.),  pt.  ii.,  1909:   Aust.  Assoc.  Adv.  Sc, 
Melb.,  1913. 

4.  Suess.    Jahr.  d.  k.k.  Geol  Leichaust.  Vienna,  vol.  50,  1900,  p.  194. 


840  Ervest    W.  Cheats: 

The  volcanic  hypothesis  was  once  commonly  held  until  the  ex- 
amination of  recent  volcanic  rocks  in  Austialasia  and  the  absence 
of  similar  forms  from  any  known  active  volcanoes  made  the 
explanation  of  their  composition  and  distribution  difficult. 

Dr.  Summers  has  clearly  pointed  out  that  though  these  bodies 
have  been  called  obsidianites,  the  material  is  not  obsidian,  and 
differs  from  it  in  certain  notable  chemical  characters,  especially 
the  low  alkali  percentage,  and  the  relatively  higli  percentage  of  the 
alkaline  earths,  the  latter  being  normally  in  excess  of  the  former^ 
whereas  the  reverse  relation  is  true  of  obsidian. 


Comparison  of  the  Taradale  so-called  obsidian  with 
the  Uralla  austr-allte. 

Mr.  Dunn  has  made  a  comparison  of  the  chemical  composition 
of  the  Taradale  rock  with  that  of  the  Uralla  australite,  and  comes 
to  the  conclusion  that  the  two  rocks  are  practically  identical  and 
both  are  obsidian.  I  have  shown  that  the  Taradale  rock  is  not 
obsidian,  neither  for  that  matter  is  the  Uralla  australite.  Neither 
are  the  tw^o  rocks  identical.  It  is  true  that  the  percentages  of  silica 
alumina  and  alkaline  earths  are  fairly  comparable,  but  the  percent- 
ages of  soda  and  of  oxide  of  iron,  especially  ferric  oxide,  are  widely 
different. 

Two  ways  exist  of  comparing  analyses,  each  of  which  is  more 
illuminating  than  a  simple  comparison  of  oxides.  The  one  method 
is  by  a  comparison  of  the  norms  determined  on  the  American 
classification.  These  are  shown  above  (p.  338),  and  show  wide 
differences. 

The  other  method  is  by  the  drawing  and  examination  of  "  varia- 
tion curves,''  as  utilised  by  Dr.  Summers  in  his  recent  paper. l  By 
this  method  variations  of  composition  within  the  limits  of  a  rock 
species  can  be  shown  to  lie  along  a  curve,  and  not  only  so,  but 
where  a  number  of  different  rocks  in  a  district  have  a  genetic 
relationship  with  one  another  this  is  brought  out  clearly  b}^  the  fact 
that  all  the  related  types  conform  to  the  curves.  On  the  other 
hand  if  two  or  more  rocks  are  not  so  related  this  difference  is 
indicated  by  a  lack  of  conformity  between  the  luives  representing 
the  different  rocks. 

I  have  made  such  a  comparison  of  "  variation  curves  "  between 
the  curves  of  the  Uralla  australite  and  that  of  the  Taradale  roc'; 

1.    Op.  cit. 


Notes  on  Ohsidid/)!   and  Auslialites.  341 

The  Uralla  australite  while  quite  extreme  in  iheinical  composition 
is  shoAvn  by  Dr.  Summers  to  lie  on  a  curve  containing  most  of  the 
australites  which  have  been  analysed.  In  the  case  of  the  Taradale 
rock  the  points  for  ferrous  oxide,  soda  and  total  alkalies  lie  a  long 
way  outside  the  main  curve  of  most  of  the  australites. 

The  comparison  of  the  two  types  by  both  methods,  therefore,  in- 
dicates their  essential  dissimilarity  and  the  dissimilarity  between 
the  Taradale  rock  and  australites  in  general. 

Incidentally  it  may  be  noted  that  Mr.  Dunn's  comparison  of  the 
Taradale  rock  is  not  with  Victorian  australites,  as  one  would 
expect,  but  with  a  New  South  Wales  australite  of  quite  extreme 
composition.  This  is  curious  since  Mr.  Dunn's  claim  is  to  establish 
a  connection  between  australites  and  Victorian  volcanic  rocks.  Of 
course  a  comparison  with  analyses  of  Victorian  australites  would 
have  at  once  shown  an  almost  complete  dissimilarity  of  composition. 

The  complete  failure  up  to  the  present  of  all  attempts  to  locate 
any  newer  volcanic  rocks  in  Victoria,  or  even  in  Australasia,  which 
are  similar  in  chemical  composition  to  the  australites,  is  a  for- 
midable difficulty  in  the  way  of  the  acceptance  of  a  volcanic  origin 
for  these  bodies.  With  the  large  and  rapid  increase  of  our  know- 
ledge of  the  newer  volcanic  rocks  of  Australasia,  made  in  recent 
years,  the  probability  of  finding  rocks  of  such  peculiar  composition 
becomes  less  and  less,  and  the  argument,  though  based  on  negative 
evidence,  that  the  australites  are  not  of  volcanic  origin  has  been 
proportionately  strengthened. 

Even  if.  a  volcanic  rock  of  similar  composition  to  that  of  the  aus- 
tralites were  found  in  Australia,  the  difficulties  of  the  distribution 
of  these  bodies,  in  many  cases  hundreds  of  miles  from  any  volcanic 
rocks,  remains  as  has  been  pointed  out  by  Dr.  Summers.  The 
shapes  of  these  bodies,  and  especially  the  smooth  nature  of  the 
flange,  appear  to  me  to  negative  Mr.  Dunn's  ingenious  hypothesis 
that  they  represent  the  blebs  of  volcanic  bubbles,  a  hypothesis  put 
forward  by  Mr.  Dunn  to  explain  not  only  their  form,  but  also 
their  distribution. 

It  is  the  general  failure  of  the  volcanic  hypothesis  rather  than 
positive  evidence  in  favour  of  an  extra-terrestrial  origin  which 
leads  most  modern  writers  on  this  subject  to  regard  the  meteoritic 
hypothesis  of  the  origin  of  australites  as  the  most  probable  one  in 
view  of  the  present  state  of  our  knowledge  on  the  subject. 


[Pboc.  Eoy.  Soc.  Victoria,  27  (N.S.),  Part  II.,  1914]. 


Art.  XXI II. — On  Bitter  Pit  and  Sensitivity  of  Apples  to 
liaison . 

By    ALFRED   J.    KWAHT,    l).8c.,    Ph.D. 

(Professor  of  Botany  and  Plant  fhysiolog-y  in  the  Melbourne  University). 

[4th    Papkk]. 
[Read    tlitli   Noveuil)er,   IDUJ. 

In  1913  Rothera  and  Greenwood  made  a  direct  attempt  to  test 
the  poisoning  theory  of  Bitter  Pit,  on  the  line  that  if  the  non- 
solution  of  the  starch  grains  usually  shown  in  Bitter  Pit  tissue  is 
due  to  the  action  of  the  poison,  a  diastase  solution  after  contact 
with  Bitter  Pit  tissue  should  have  its  diastatic  activit}-  retarded. 
They  stated,  however,  that  witli  malt  diastase  and  Taka  diastase  an 
accelerating  action  was  shown.  In  the  Proceedings  of  the  Royal 
Society  of  Victoria,  Vol.  26,  p.  233,  I  showed,  however,  that  they 
had  overlooked  the  influence  of  the  presence  of  tannic  acid,  and 
that  even  a  short  contact  of  10  c.c.  of  1  %  Taka  diastase 
with  20  grams  of  pounded  apple  pulp  distinctly  retarded  the 
diastatic  activity  of  the  filtered  extract.  It  is  well  known  that 
tannic  acid  retards  diastatic  action,  and  this  was  supposed  to  be  due 
to  a  direct  action  on  the  diastase.  I  showed,  however,  that  tannic 
acid,  even  when  dilute,  precipitates  starch  from  a  watery  solution, 
and  thence  concluded  that  the  action  was  rather  on  the  starch  than 
■on  the  diastase.  This  is  borne  out  by  the  fact  that  the  precipitating 
action  is  less  pronounced  at  high  temperatures,  and  that  under 
these  circumstances  the  retarding  action  of  the  tannic  acid  is  also 
relatively  less  pronounced. 

In  replying  to  my  criticism,  Rothera  and  Breidahl  reaflirni  the 
existence  of  an  accelerating  action.  This  might  be  obtained  under 
the  following  conditions  : — (1)  If  a  resistant  and  very  active  diastase 
such  as  Taka  diastase  is  used  in  relatively  large  amount.  (2)  If  the 
tests  are  made  at  high  temperatures.  (3)  If  dry  bitter  pit  pulp  in 
Avhich  the  tannic  acid  has  been  oxidised  is  compaied  with  fresh  pulp 
rich  in  tannic  acid. 

I  found  that  using  equal  volumes  of  1  %  taka  diastase  or  malt 
diastase,  of  1  %  starch  solution,  and  of  tannic  acid,  the  latter 
retarded  the  hydrolysis  of  starch  down  to  concentrations  of  0.005  to 


Bitter  Pit.  343 

0.001  %  at  28°  and  35°  C.  With  larger  amounts  of  tannic  acid  an 
apparent  acceleration  may  be  shown,  but  this  is  simply  due  to  the 
tannic  acid  condensing  and  precipitating  the  starch,  so  that  the 
liquid  above  gives  yellow  with  iodine.  If  the  whole  of  the  j-emain- 
ing  starch  is  precipitated  with  excess  of  tannic  acid,  filtered,  dried 
and  weighed,  the  control  always  contains  less  starch  than  the  tube 
with  tannic  acid.  To  get  the  full  retarding  action,  the  diastase 
extract  must  contain  no  proteids  capable  of  combining  with  and 
removing  the  tannic  acid,  and  for  this  reason  filtered  malt  diastase 
is  more  sensitive  to  the  presence  of  tannic  acid  than  unfiltered  malt 
diastase.  When  the  diastase  extract  is  free  from  proteids  capable 
of  removing  tannic  acid,  the  retarding  action  is  probably  entirely 
due  to  the  action  of  the  tannic  acid  on  the  starch  and  not  to  an 
action  on  the  diastase.  In  addition,  I  was  able  to  show  that  dilu- 
tions of  metallic  poisons  unable  to  destroy  either  oxidase  or  diastase 
were  still  poisonous  to  the  living  protoplasm  of  the  apple  and  potato 
when  applied  externally.  It  is,  in  fact,  a  fairly  general  rule  that 
enzymes  are  a  little  more  resistant  to  dry  and  moist  heat  and  to 
poisons  than  the  protoplasm  of  the  cells  containing  them,  and  hence 
the  diastase  method  will  only  detect  a  poison  when  present  in 
relatively  large  amount  and  in  soluble  form,  and  even  then  only 
when  nothing  else  which  affects  diastatic  action  is  present  in  the 
tissue. 

At  the  Sejitember  meeting  of  the  Royal  Society  of  Victoria. 
Rothera,  together  with  Miss  Kincaid  and  Miss  Jackson,  advanced 
a  criticism  of  my  work  on  the  sensitivity  of  apples  to  poison.  They 
stated  that  the  poisoning  effects  obtained  by  me  were  not  due  to  the 
poisons  used  at  all,  but  to  the  action  of  the  distilled  water  to  which 
the  apple  pulp  was  exposed  at  the  points  where  the  cuticle  had  been 
removed.  They  based  this  conclusion  on  the  following  statements  : 
— (1)  Prepared  apples  floated  on  distilled  water  developed  brown 
pits  beneath  the  points  from  which  the  "cuticle"  had  been  re- 
moved. (2)  In  isosmotic  (isotonic)  solutions  of  sodium  chloride 
(2.6  %  and  upwards)  to  which  poisonous  solutions  were  added,  no 
brown  pits  developed.  (3)  Peeled  apple  pulp  floated  on  distilled 
water  slowly  turns  brown,  but  remains  colourless  when  floated  in 
apple  sap.  They  conclude,  therefore,  that  in  (2)  and  (3)  the  pulp 
cells  are  under  normal  osmotic  conditions,  and  the  pulp  cells  remain 
living,  and  that  in  (1)  they  are  under  abnormal  osmotic  conditions 
and  therefore  die.  As  a  matter  of  fact  the  reverse  is  the  case.  No 
plant  cell  provided  with  a  cell-wall  can  grow  in  a  medium  isosmotic 


844  Alfred  J.  Ewavt: 

with  the  cell-sup.  The  essential  feature  of  a  typical  plant  cell  as 
compared  with  an  animal  cell  is  that  it  avoids  isosmotic  condi- 
tions, and  spends  its  whole  life  not  quite  in  distilled  water,  but  in  a 
very  dilute  solution  containing  usually  not  more  than  one  gram  of 
dissolved  solids  in  1  to  2000  c.c.  of  water.  This  water  saturates 
the  cell-wall,  and  the  strong  solution  inside  the  cell  presses  the 
semi-permeable  protoplasm  against  the  cell-wall,  and  stretches  the 
latter  until  its  distension  balances  the  surplus  osmotic  energy 
of  the  cell  sap  Avhen  a  condition  of  the  hydrostatic  equilibrium  is 
reached.  If  the  cell  is  now  placed  in  an  isosmotic  solution  of  an 
impermeable  salt,  the  cell  wall  is  no  longer  stretched,  no  growth  is 
possible,  and  the  cell  is  in  an  entirely  abnormal  condition. 

Scarlet  Nonpareil  apples  of  approximately  the  same  shape  and 
size  were  selected,  only  varying  a  few  grams  from  800  grams  weight. 
After  removing  the  cuticle  from  15  points  in  areas  of  as  nearly 
as  possible  1  mm.  diameter,  the  apples  were  weighed  and  floated  in 
water  and  2.5  salt  solution  for  1  week.  The  first  apple  gained  0.6 
gram  per  cent,  in  weight,  the  second  0.057  grams.  In  a  second 
experiment  the  calyx  and  stalk  w^ere  covered  with  paraffin.  In 
distilled  water  the  apple  absorbed  0.45  c.c.  of  water  per  100  grams, 
in  the  salt  solution  it  lost  0.03  c.c.  In  0.5  %  and  1.5  %  solutions 
of  sodum  chloride  distinct  gains  of  w'eight  were  shown,  but  always 
less  in  the  1.5  %  as  compared  with  the  0.5  %  solution,  and  in  the 
latter  as  compared  with  distilled  water,  provided  that  the  skin  of 
the  apples  was  without  injury  or  crack  so  that  water  could  enter 
only  at  the  prepared  points. 

The  amount  of  absorption  will  depend  largely  upon  whether 
the  osmotic  pressure  of  the  j^ulp  cells  is  or  is  not  fully  satisfied  in 
the  apple  before  it  is  immersed  in  water.  Hence  it  is  important  to 
use  apples  fresh  from  cool  storage,  in  which  the  loss  by  transpira- 
tion has  been  slight.  In  the  tests  with  very  dilute  poisonous  solu- 
tions, a  little  of  the  solution  is  drawn  into  the  apple  at  special 
points  where  the  poisonous  action  is  localised,  in  addition  to  the 
poison  reaching  the  surface  by  diffusion.  In  one  experiment  with 
1  per  100,000  copper  sulphate,  0.4  gram  of  the  solution  was 
absorbed  and  2.4  grams  of  tissue  were  poisoned,  so  that  to  poison 
1  gram  of  the  pulp  cells  required  at  least  one  millionth  of  a  gram 
of  anhydrous  copper  sulphate. 

Although  prepared  apples  soaked  in  1.5  %  and  0.5  %  salt  solu- 
tions absorb  appreciable  quantities  of  the  solution,  the  prepared 
spots  show  at  first  sight  no  signs  of  poisoning  and  remain  colourless 


B'iftcr   Pit  845 

or  nearly  so.  instead  of  turning  brown.  If  fresli  apple  pulp  is 
pounded  up  with  0.5  to  2.5  %  solutions  of  sodium  chloride,  it  does 
not  turn  brown,  although  the  cells  are  completely  killed.  The  pulp 
^ivee  even  after  some  hours  a  faint  blue  with  guiacuiii.  a  strong 
one  with  guiacum  and  hydrogen  peroxide,  and  a  fairly  i-apid 
reaction  with  ursol  tartrate.  Salt,  therefore,  prevents  the  oxida- 
tion of  tannic  acid  by  apple  oxidase  without  destroying  the  latter. 
and  it  is  a  sensitiser  to  the  oxidase  action  on  guiacum,  which 
normally  only  turns  l)lue  with  guiacixm  in  the  i^resence  of  hydrogen 
peroxide.  I  have  already  given  specific  instances  of  many  similar 
specific  "  antioxidase "  and  "sensitiser"  reactions.  ;ind  have 
shown  that  the  presence  of  salt  affects  various  of  the  colour  reac- 
tions of  tannic  acid,  including  its  reaction  with  ferric  chloride. 

Owing  to  the  action  of  salt  in  preventing  broAvning  it  is  difficult 
to  determine  its  poisonous  action.  So  far  as  can  be  judged  by 
microscopic  examination  of  the  cells  beneath  the  prepared  spots 
where  the  salt  solution  is  absorbed,  it  appears  to  belong  to  the 
elass  of  almost  non-poisonous  salts  as  compared  with  mercury  and 
copper  salts,  and  to  be  less  poisonous  than  potassium  salts.  With 
strong  solutions  osmotic  injury  is  caused,  but  this  is  mainly  con- 
fined to  the  surfaces  of  the  prepared  spots. 

In  regard  to  the  statement  that  browni  pits  developed  in  apples 
floated  on  distilled  Avater  beneath  the  prepared  spots  from  which 
the  cuticle  had  been  removed,  I  was  fortunately  able  to  examine 
subsequently  the  apples  in  question  and  to  see  that  not  only  the 
cuticle  but  also  the  epidermis  and  hypodermis  had  lieen  removed 
right  doAvn  to  the  pulp  tissue.  The  importance  of  not  removing 
these  layers  is  that  they  form  continuous  layers  of  cells  without  air 
spaces  (except  at  the  lenticels),  and  hence  prevent  the  invasion  of 
micro-organisms,  which  takes  place  very  rapidly  in  water,  particu- 
larly if  any  of  the  pulp  cells  have  been  injured  or  cut,  and  is  soon 
followed  by  an  invasion  of  fungal  hyphae. 

The  browning  of  peeled  pulp  floated  in  distilled  water  is  usually 
due  to  the  action  of  micro-organisms.  They  can  l)e  seen  in  a  few 
hours,  and  if  the  water  is  previously  sterilised,  all  ])ossible  .anti- 
septic precautions  taken  and  the  peeling  done  witli  a  sliarp  razoi-, 
the  browning  of  the  pulp  is  very  slow.  Peeled  pulp  will  remain 
fresh  and  living  under  kerosene  for  as  long  as  2  to  3  weeks,  show- 
ing that  the  death  of  the  pulp  is  not  due  to  asphyxiation  by  diow ii- 
ing.  In  fact,  apples  remain  living  for  some  Aveeks  in  an  atmo- 
sphere of  nitrogen  or  hydrogen. 


:U6  Alfred  J.   Eivart  : 

When  imiuersed  in  its  own  sap  living  pulp  usually  remains  un- 
browned  for  some  time  if  the  sap  has  been  previously  sterilised  by 
boiling.  The  soluble  matters  in  this  sap  are  impermeable  to  the 
living  protoplasm,  just  as  they  are  when  inside  the  cell.  No  pene- 
tration therefore  takes  place,  .and  the  tannic  and  other  acids  of  the 
sap  prevent  or  retard  the  development  of  bacteria.  Such  pulp  is, 
however,  readily  invaded  by  fungal  hypae. 

In  all  cases,  for  a  poisoning  effect  to  be  exercised  the  poison  must 
be  able  either  to  penetrate  the  protoplasm  or  to  injure  its  ecto- 
plasmic  membrane.  A  curious  point  worth  noting  here  is  that  the 
protoplasm  of  the  pulp  cells  is,  as  one  might  expect,  resistant  to 
tannic  acid.  This  is  probably  due  to  the  formation  of  an  imper- » 
meable  coagulation  film  on  the  surface  of  the  ectoplasmic  membrane, 
such  as  must  exist  normally  on  the  endoplasmic  membrane.  This- 
membrane  appears  to  increase  the  impermeability  of  the  protoplasm,, 
especially  to  organic  acids  (malic,  citric,  tartaric,  oxalic),  and 
hence  in  the  presence  of  tannic  acid  externally  applied,  solutions 
of  these  acids  are  only  poisonous  in  considerably  increased  concen- 
tration. This  may  explain  the  remarkable  effectiveness  with  which 
the  delicate  pulp  cells  retain  their  sugary  and  acid  contents,  al- 
though some  of  the  acids  when  applied  externally  are  poisonous. 

It  is  perhaps  hardly  necessary  to  say  that  in  my  own  work  these 
possibilities  of  error  were  detected  early.  Every  experiment  was 
done  with  a  control  in  distilled  water.  These  controls  were 
unaffected,  and,  in  fact,  properly  prepared  apples  can  be  kept 
almost  as  well  floating  in  distilled  water  as  ordinary  apples  can  be 
kept  in  air.  In  addition  the  results  were  throughout  consistent — 
i.e.,  Avith  increasing  dilution  less  and  less  poisoning  effect  was 
exercised.  In  order  to  settle  this  matter  finally,  I  arranged  to 
perform  these  experiments  before  a  committee  consisting  of  Dr, 
Hall,  President  of  the  Royal  Society,  Pi-ofessor  Osborne,  Dr. 
Rothera,  Miss  Kincaid  and  Miss  Jackson.  All  the  apples  were  pre- 
jjared  by  me.  In  the  whole  series  about  260  removals  of  the  cuticle 
from  usually  10  to  12  points  in  each  apple  took  place.  In  about 
5  or  6  cases  the  cut  was  a  little  below  the  cuticle.  Part  of  the  solu- 
tions (series  A)  were  prepared  by  myself,  part  (series  B)  liy  Dr. 
Rotheia,  Miss  Kincaid  and  Miss  Jackson.  The  apples  were  placed 
in  the  solutions  by  one  of  the  three  foregoing.  They  were  kept  in 
a  locked  cupboard  by  Dr.  Hall  and  inspected  jointly  after  3  and 
7  days'  immersion.  The  solutions  were  then  poured  away,  the 
apples  and  cylinders  washed  with  distilled   water,   left  for   a  week 


Bitter  Pit.  347 

in  moist  air  and  examined  by  the  members  of  thu  committee.  The 
average  temperature  was  IS^-lSo  C.  Dr.  Rothera  brought  Graven- 
stein  apples  for  testing.  I  preferred  Yates'  Pippin,  which  is  a 
hard-fleshed,  resistant  apple,  much  less  sensitive  to  poisons  but 
always  unaffected  by  distilled  water  if  properly  prepared. 
The  results  of  the  test  are  as  follows  : — 

Series   A. — Yates'  Pippin. 

Controls. 

Di stilled  water. 

(1)  No  pits,  browning  or  signs  of  poisoning  on  any  of  the  pre- 
pared spots. 

(2)  No  pits,  browning  or  signs  of  poisoning  on  any  of  the  pre- 
pared spots. 

Copper  Sulphate. 

(3)  1  per  100,000.  Well-defined  brown  pits  1-2  mm.  deep  on  all 
prepared  spots. 

Lead  Nitrate. 

(4)  1  per  100,000.     Doubtful. i 

Mercuric  Chloride. 

(5)  1  per  10,000.      Large  pits  1-3  mm.  deep. 

(6)  1  per  100,000.  Small  brown  pits  1-2  mm.  deep  on  all  the 
prepared  spots. 

(7)  1   per   1,000.000.      Doul)tfnl.i 

Series  B. — All  Gravenstein  apples  except  in  the  case  of  6  (b),  8  (b), 
9  (b)  and  10  (b).  wliere  Yates  apples  were  used. 

Coiitroh. 
Distilled  irater. 

(1)  No  browning,  pits  or  signs  of  poisoning  on  any  of  the  pre- 
pared spots. 

(2)  Light  brown  irregidar  pits  beneath  three  contiguous  prepared 
spots,  possibly  over  a  slightly  bruised  area,  the  other  nine  spots 
quite  unaffected. 


1.  I  could  see  distinct  signs  of  poisonin{f  on  these  apples,  but  as  Dr.  Rothera  could  not,  they 
are  given  as  doubtful.  Lead  nitrate  rapidly  destroys  oxidase  and  penetrates  slowly.  Lead  nitrate 
pits  are  always  pale,  copper  sulphate  ones  much  dai-ker. 


348  Alfred  J.  Ewart  : 

Mercuric  chloride. 

(3)  1  gram  per  10,000  c.c.  All  the  spots  with  brown  pits  2-4:  mm. 
deep. 

(4)  1  gram  per  100,000.  All  the  spots  witli  brown  pits  1-3  mm. 
deep. 

(5)  1  gram  per  1,000,000.  All  the  spots  with  brown  pits  1-2  mm. 
deep. 

(6)  1  gram  per  100.000  in  3  %  sodium  chloride. 

(a)  Browned   and  invaded  by  Pcnicillium. 

(b)  Yates.       Rather    pale    pits    to    all    the    prepared    spots 

1-2  mm.   deep. 

(7)  1  gram  per  10,000  in  3  %  sodium  chloride.  Large  deep  pits 
to  all  the  prepared  spots  4-6  mm.  deep.^ 

(8)  In  3  %  sodium  chloride  alone. 

(a)  From  superficial  browning  to  pits  i  mm.   deep. 

(b)  Yates.      Superficial  browning.      No  distinct  pits. 

Copper  Sulphate. 

(9)  1  per  10,000  in  3  %  sodium  chloride. 

(a)  Large  well-defined  pits  2-3  mm.  deep,  but  paler  than 

with  copper  sulphate  alone. 

(b)  Yates.      Large  pits,   but   ap])le  invaded  by  Penicillium 

through  a  bruise. 
(10)   1  per  100,000  in  3  %  sodium  chloride. 

(a)  All  the  piepared  spots  b)owiied,   pits  pale,   barely  ex- 

ceeding I  mm.  deep. 

(b)  Yates.    As  above,  but.  pits  not  exceeding  1  mm. 
(11)   1  per   100,000  (co])pei'  sulphate  alone). 

Large  dark  pits  to  all  tlie  prepared  spots  3-4  mm.  deep. 

These  results  closely  coincide  with  those  already  published  by  me, 
and  show  that  dilute  metallic  jjoisons  produce  browning  and  pit 
formation  in  the  presence  of  isosmotic  solutions  of  sodium  chloride, 
the  entry  here  taking  place  by  diffusion  only.  Further,  Graven- 
stein  apples  appear  to  resemble  Five  Crowns  in  their  greater  sen- 
sitivity as  compared  with  Yates.  In  a  pale-skinned  apple  it  is 
difficult  to  be  sure  that  the  I'ut  has  not  gone  too  deep,  whereas  in  a 
red  apple  the  fragments  removed  from  the  skin  must  show  no  colour. 
If  they  do,  the  cut  has  passed  through  the  hypodermal  layers. 
Further,   in  soft-fleshed  apples  some  of  the  prepared  spots  may  be 

1   The  mercuric  chloride  kills  the  cells  before  sufficient  s-ilt  has  entered  to  prevent  browninif. 


Bittrr  Pit.  349 

made  over  slightly  bruised  areas,  which  will  subsequently  give  an 
imitation  of  irregular  pit  formation.  It  was  owing  to  the  occa- 
sional unreliability  of  the  controls  that  I  abandoned  in  my  first 
paper  the  use  of  pale-skinned,  soft-fleshed  apples.  Even  in  sucli 
■cases,  however,  an  element  of  doubt  only  creeps  in  in  determining 
the  lowest  limits  of  the  poisonous  concentrations.  In  the  stronger 
solutions  every  prepared  spot  shows  a  brown  pit  whicli  has  a  well- 
defined  area  centric  to  the  prepared  spot,  and  does  not  spread 
beyond  a  sharp  boundai'v  zone.  If  when  using  a  soft-fleshed  or 
pale-skinned  apple,  an  occasional  prepared  spot  on  the  control 
develops  an  apparent  "  poison  "  pit;  this  is  usually  a  pale  colour. 
If  it  is  due  to  a  bruise  it  will  be  irregular  and  not  centric  around 
the  spot.  If  it  is  due  to  too  deep  a  cut  admitting  micro-organisms 
it  will  slowly  develop  further  in  moist  air,  but  the  other  prepared 
spots  will  be  unaffected.  If  it  is  due  to  an  invasion  of  fungal 
hypae,  it  will  spread  rapidly  through  the  whole  apple  and  the  pulp 
will  become  soft  and  watery. 

I  might  perhaps  add  that  if  red-skinned,  hard-fleshed  apples  are 
used,  this  method  forms  the  best  possible  class  experiment  to 
demonstrate — 

(a)  the  indifference  of  the  plant-cell  to  distilled  Avater ; 

(b)  the  importance  of  the  cuticle; 

(c)  the  extreme  sensitivity  of  the  pulp  cells  to  metallic  poisons. 

For  class  experiments  the  best  solutions  to  use  are  1  gram  per 
100,000  of  mercuric  chloride  or  copper  sulphate,  and  the  method 
can  be  used  to  some  extent  to  test  the  freedom  of  distilled  water  from 
small  amounts  of  soluble  metallic  poisons. 


[Proc.  Eot.   Soc.  Victoria,  27  (N.S.),  Part  II.,  1914] 


Art.    XXIV. — Neiv  or  Little-known   Victorian    Fossiia  in   the 
National  Museum. 

Part  XVII. — Some  Tertiary  Cephalopoda. 

By   FREDERICK   CHAPMAN,    A.L.S.,    <fec. 
(Palaeontologist  to  the  National  Museum,  Melbourne). 

[With  Plates  III.-VIII.] 

[Read  December  10th,  1914]. 

Introductory   Note. 

The  series  herein  discussed  comprises  examples  of  cephalopod 
shells,  some  of  which  have  been  in  the  collection  for  many  years 
In  the  case  of  the  genus  Nautilus  the  fossils  are  generally  fragile,  or 
are  only  known  as  casts,  so  that  it  is  often  impossible  to  get  quitf 
perfect  representatives  which  would  serve  as  complete  types.  These 
specimens,  imperfect  as  they  are,  nevertheless  afford  many  charac- 
ters of  differentiation  which  will  serve  to  distinguish  the  several 
forms;  and,  indeed,  the  only  named  Australian  Tertiary  species 
of  the  genus  Nautilus  {N .  geelongensis),  was  originally  described 
from  an  imperfect  cast  by  Mr.  A.  H.  Foord  in  his  British  Museum 
Catalogue  of  Cei^halopoda.  It  seems,  therefore,  in  the  interests  of 
systematic  work  upon  Victorian  Tertiary  fossils  to  place  on  record, 
without  further  delay,  some  of  the  chief  of  our  cephalopod  fossils  of 
this  latest  geological  era. 

The  present  collection  comprises  the  following  forms  : — 
Aturia  atistralis,  McCoy. 
Nautilus  halcomhensis,  sp.  nov. 
,,         geelongensis,  Foord. 
,,  altifrons,  sp.  nov. 

felix,  sp.  nov. 
Notosepia  cliftoni,  gen.  et  sp.  nov. 


Ictorlan  Fof<sib,  Pari  XVI J.  851 


DESCRIPTION    OF   THE   FOSSILS. 

Tk'I'habhanchiata.-  Order  Nautiloidka. 

Fani.  Claudonautilidak,   Hyatt. 

Genus  Aturia,    Bronn. 

Aturia  nustraUs,   McCoy.      (Plate   III.,    Fig.    '1). 

Nautilus  ziczoc,  T.  Woods,  1862,  Geol.  Observ.  in  S.  Australia, 
p.  83,  woodcut. 

Aturia  ausfralis,  McCoy,  1867,  On  the  Recent  Zoology  and  Palae- 
ontology of  Victoria,  Ann.  Mag.  Nat.  Hist.,  ser.  3,  Vol.  XX.,  p. 
192.  Brougli  Sniytli,  1874,  in  Geol.  Surv.  Vic.  ;  Report  of  Progress, 
p.  36. 

Aturia  zicznc.  Sow.  sp.,  var.  ausfralis,  McCoy,  1876,  Prod.  Pal. 
Vict.,  dec.  III.,  p.  21,  pi.  XXIV.,  figs.   1-5. 

Aturia  -J cza(\  Sow.  sp.  Ether idge  junr.,  1878,  Cat.  Austr.  Fossils, 
p.  171. 

Aturia  aturi,  Basterot  sp.,  var.  ausfralis,  McCoy.  Foord,  1891, 
Cat.  Fossil  Cephalopoda  (Brit.  Mus.),  pt.  II.,  p.  354;  also  p.  336, 
fig.  71b. 

Aturia  ausfralis,  McCoy,  Dennant  and  Kitson,  1903,  Cat.  Fossils 
Cain.  Fauna  Victoria,  Rec.  Geol,  Surv.  Vict.,  Vol.  I.,  pt.  2,  p.  92. 

Observations. — The  Australian  form  of  the  type  of  Aturia  aturi, 
Basterot,  has  been  the  subject  of  wavering  opinion  amongst  palae- 
ontologists as  to  its  specific  or  varietal  standing.  The  present  study 
of  a  large  number  of  Australian  specimens  seems  to  show  that  it  is  a 
distinct  form,  having  some  marked  characters  which  help  to  dis- 
tinguish it  from  the  Burdigalian  species  of  France  and  Italy. 

McCoy  in  1876  (vide  supra  p.  21),  remarked  that  "  It  is  with  the 
compressed  Miocene  variety  found  at  Dax,  named  N.  Aturi  by 
Basterot,  rather  than  with  the  more  ventricose  original  types  of  the 
N.  zizac  of  Sowerby,  proper  to  the  Eocene  London  clay,  that  our 
Australian  fossil  more  completely  agrees;  and  I  can  only  doubtfully 
suggest  the  separation  of  it  as  a  local  variety,  from  the  somewhat 
greater  compression  indicated  by  the  slightly  greater  length  of  the 
aperture  in  proportion  to  its  width;  and  also  a  slightly  greater 
curvature  of  the  septa  on  the  sides  as  shown  by  a  line  from  the 
apex  of  the  lancet-shaped  lobe  to  the  inner  end  of  the  same  septum, 
encroaching  rather  more  on  the  third  chamber  behind." 

Mr.  A.  H.  Foord  in  his  British  Museum  Catalogue  has  taken  the 
same  standpoint  as  McCoy,  and  regaided  it  as  a  variety,  the  specific 


:352  Frederick  ('hajmian  : 

type  being  Afiir/a  aturi.  Foord  says  (op.  eit.  p.  "joS),  "  This 
variety  closely  resembles  the  Dax  specimens  of  Afuria  aturi :  a  speci- 
men from  "  Muddy  Creek,"  Victoria  (Australia)  being  quite  indis- 
tinguishable at  first  sight  from  the  Dax  fossils.  On  comparing, 
however,  a  specimen  of  the  latter  with  the  Muddy  Creek  shell,  both 
])eing  of  equal  size,  it  is  found  that  the  Australian  shell  has  a 
lai-.gev  siphuncular  orifice  than  the  Dax  specimens,  thus  adding 
another  point  of  difference  to  those  indicated  by  McCoy  as  existing 
between  tlie  two  forms." 

Quite  recently  M.  Vignal,  of  Paris,  has  favoured  the  Museum 
Avith  a  specimen  of  Afuria  afitrl,  of  Burdigalian  age,  from  Dax. 
Landes.  Fi'ance.  On  comparing  this  specimen  with  Australian 
examples,  the  following  features,  already  pointed  out  by  McCoy 
and  Foord  are  seen  :• — 

(1)  The  Australian  shells  are  more  compressed. 

(2)  The  septa  and  growth-lines  are  more  strongly  recurved  to- 

wards the  periphery. 
(.3)    The  siphvincular  orifice  is  larger. 

In  view  of  the  above-named  cliaraeters,  which ,  are  constant  so 
far  as  my  own  observations  go.  there  are  justifiable  grounds  for 
keeping  the  Australian  form  as  a  distinct  species,  at  the  same  time 
bearing  in  mind  that  its  relationship  is  nearest  Aturia  aturi.  It 
is  only  fair  to  state,  however,  that  Mi-.  R.  B.  Newton,  during  his 
visit  with  the  British  Association  to  Melbourne  this  year,  infornietl 
U8  at  the  sessional  meeting  that  he  and  Mr.  G.  C.  Crick,  of  the 
British  Museum  of  Natural  History,  are  agreed  to  consider  our 
Australian  species  as  identical  with  Aturia  aturi.  Probably  did 
the  London  Museum  possess  a  larger  comparative  series  of  the 
Australian  form,  that  view  might  undergo  some  modification,  and 
it  is  to  be  regretted  that  Mr.  Newton  did  not  have  time  to  criti- 
cally examine  the  series  of  Aturiae  in  the  Melbourne  National 
Museum. 

C.  F.  Parona  in  1899  described  from  Gassino.  Piedmont,  an 
Upper  Eocene  or  Oligocene  Aturia  under  the  name  of  A.  rnraxen- 
diana.^  This  species  has  a  compressed  shell  after  the  mode  of  A. 
aturi,  but  in  the  structure  of  the  septation  it  shows  more  afiRnity 
with  A.  ziczac  and  its  allies.  This  species  thus  appears  to  indicate 
a  connecting  link  between  the  palaeogene  and  neogene  aturids. 

Occurrence  and  Horizons. — The  related  European  Aturia  aturi 
is,  so  far  as  I  can   discover,   typically   found   in    Miocene  beds   in 

1  Pal.  Ital.,  vol.  iv.  (1838),  189!),  p.  156,  pi.  xii.,  fisr.  1;    pi.  xiii.,  figs.  1-3. 

2  Foord.  Brit.  Mus.  Cat.,  supra  cit.,  p.  354  ("  IjOtidon  Clay.") 


l^ictoruin  Fossils,  Part  XVII.  .S5:^ 

France,  Malta  and  Italy,  although  recorded,  apparently  in  error, 
from  the  Lower  Eocene,  since  no  Eocene  locality  is  given  in  the  list 
tliat  follows.  The  Australian  species  on  the  other  hand,  has  a  very 
extensive  range,  from  Oligocene  to  Lower  Pliocene,  and  throughout 
seems  to  maintain  its  specific  characters. 

Oligocene  or  Balcombian. — Muddy  Creek,  near  Hamilton  (lower 
beds),  Newport  and  Altona  bores.  Port  Phillip.  Balcombe  Bay 
and  Grice's  Creek,  Port  Phillip. 

Miocene  or  Janjukian. — Gellibrand  River  (low  down  in  series). 
Brown's  Creek,  Otway  Coast.  Birregurra.  Lower  Moorabool,  Mit- 
chell River,  Gippsland.  Mount  Gambler,  South  Australia.  Table 
Cape.  Tasmania.  Spring  Creek,  near  Torquay.  Flemington,  near 
Melbourne. 

Lower  Pliocene  or-Kalimnan. — Beaumaris. 

Fani.    N  AUTILIDAH,    Owen. 

Genus   Nautilus,  Linne. 

Xautilus  balcojnbenais,   s}).   nov.      (Plate   IIL,    Fij;s.    3,    4;    Plate    IV. 
Figs.  5,  6;    Plate  VIIL,  Figs.  18,  19). 

Description. — Shell  well  inflated,  periphery  well  rounded.  Dor- 
sal arch  not  so  deep  as  in  N.  geelongensis .  Septa,  about  17  in  the 
last  Avhorl;  sutures  slightly  waved.  Umbilicus  narrow  and  deep. 
Siphuncle  a  little  above  the  centre  in  a  young  specimen.  Young 
examples  show  a  striated  surface  of  shell,  as  in  adult  forms  from 
mesozoic  strata. 

Dlmt)isions. — Type  specimen  (from  Balcombe  Bay)  :  greatest 
diameter,  205  mm.;  height  of  apei'ture,  118  mm.;  width,  110  mm. 
Another  specimen  (from  Muddy  Creek)  :  greatest  diameter,  80 
mm. ;  height  of  aperture,  45.5  mm. ;  width,  42  mm.  A  small  speci- 
men (from  Balcombe  Bay)  :  Height  of  aperture,  23  mm. ;  width, 
26  mm. 

Affinities. — This  Nautilus  attains  to  a  large  size,  but  is  very 
difficult  to  secure  in  anything  like  a  complete  state  owing  to  the 
thinness  of  the  shell,  and  its  frequent  occurrence  in  loose,  shelly 
marl.  The  type  of  shell  is  near  N .  regalis,  Sowerby,!  but,  unlike 
that  species,  has  an  open,  though  narrow  umbilicus.  At  first  sight 
it  might  be  confused  with  N .  geelongensis,  as  a  compressed  variety, 
but  the  latter  species  has  fewer  chambers,  a  more  strongly  arched 
dorsum,   and  a  siphuncle  situated  slightly  below    the    centre.      The 


1   Mineral  Concholotfi ,  1SS2,  vol. 


:^54  Frederick  Cltapman  .- 

sides  of  N.  geelonr/ensis  are  also  more  strongly  convex,  and  pro- 
portionately broader,  whilst  the  body  chamber  in  N .  halcomhensis 
is  higher  and  more  nearly  equal  to  the  width,  which  it  exceeds  in 
the  later  stages. 

Occurrence  and  Horizon. — The  type  specimen  is  from  Balcombe 
Bay;  collected  and  presented  by  Mr.  F.  A.  Cudmore.  This  par- 
ticular specimen  must  have  lain  for  some  time  on  the  Balcombian 
sea-bed,  since  there  are  numerous  attached  valves  of  Dimija 
dissimilis^  Tate,  adherent  to  the  exterior  of  the  shell. 

Other  specimens,  presented  by  Mr.  Cudmore,  from  the  same 
locality,  are  in  the  brephic  and  neanic  stages.  Another  example, 
in  the  Museum  collection,  in  the  ephebic  stage,  was  collected  by 
the  Avriter  from  Muddy  Creek  (lower  beds).  All  the  examples  are 
from  strata  of  Balcombian  age. 

Xiiutihis  yeelotuietisis,  Foord.       (Plate  TV.,  Figs.   7-9). 

Nautilus  geelongensis,  Foord,  1891,  Cat.  Foss.  Cephalopoda 
(Brit.   Mus.).  part  II.,  p.   332,  woodcut  fig.   69. 

Dtscri'pfion. — The  following  diagnosis  is  quoted  from  A.  H. 
Foord  :— 

"  Sp.  Char.  A  number  of  detached  casts  of  the  chaml>ers  which, 
when  fitted  together,  make  up  a  shell  of  a  somewhat  inflated  form, 
rather  compressed  on  the  sides,  and  broadly  rounded  on  the  peri- 
phery. The  aperture  would  be  considerably  wider  than  high.  The 
septa  are  moderately  distant,  the  sutures  very  slightly  flexuous, 
with  a  dorsal  lobe  in  the  young  shell.      .      .  The  siphuncle  is 

nearly  central,  perhaps  a  little  below  the  centre.  Not  a  vestige 
of  the  shell  remains." 

The  above  description,  based  on  a  cast,  gives  the  chief  points 
about  the  form  of  this  species.  Judging  by  the  figure  given  by 
Foord,  the  type  specimen  would  possess  about  15  chambers  on  the 
last  whorl,  and  this  number  coincides  with  the  examples  I  have 
identified  as  N.  geelongensis  in  the  Museum  collection.  It  occurs 
throughout  the  Miocene  proper,  or  the  Janjukian  series  of  Vic- 
toria, but  chiefly  in  the  form  of  a  cast  of  the  interior  of  the  shell. 
The  shell  is  occasionally  met  with,  but  the  beds  in  which  it  is 
found  are  not  usually  favourable  for  the  extraction  of  the  fossil 
in  anything  like  completeness.  Only  one  such  shell  is  preserved 
in  the  Museum  collection.  The  shell  is  moderately  thin,  and  the 
outer  layer  conspicuously  marked  with  growth  lines.  The  um- 
bilicus is   apparently   nearly  closed;   the   sutures   slightly  flexuous. 


Victor  tan  Fo.ssUs,  Part  XVTf.  355 

Casts  of  tlie  interior  of  the  shell  of  this  species,  from  the  Murray 
River  cliffs,  show  that  the  annular  lobe  on  the  dorsum  or  impressed 
zone  is  very  distinct  in  the  earlier  camerae,  but  become  fainter, 
and  disappear  on  reaching  the  ephebic  stage  of  the  shell.  It  is 
interesting  to  note  in  connection  with  the  presence  of  the  annular 
lobe  in  this  species,  that  it  is  also  seen  in  another  Australian  form, 
N.  felix,  but  less  strongly  developed. 

Dimensions. — The  type  specimen  of  N.  geelo?i(/ensis,  figured  by 
Foord  (op.  cit.  p.  333,  fig.  69),  has  a  maximum  diameter  of  about 
114  mm.  The  heigFt  of  aperture  is  about  45  nmi.,  and  the  width 
63  mm. 

A  shell  from  Fyansford  shows,  height  of  aperture  from  impressed 
zone  to  periphery,  25  mm.  ;  width,  32  mm. 

Another  specimen  (cast),  from  the  Murray  River,  measures  on 
the  aperture  about  67  mm.   in  height,   and  89  mm.   in  width. 

Observations.- — This  species  is  apparently  the  commonest  and 
best  known  of  the  Victorian  Tertiary  nautili,  since  it  is  a  typical 
form  in  the  widely  developed  Janjukian  series,  although  ranging  into 
the  Kalimnan.  Occurring  so  often  in  polyzoal  rock,  however,  it  is 
met  with  generally  in  the  form  of  an  internal  cast  of  the  shell. 
This  is  obviously  due  to  the  great  solvent  processes  continually  pro- 
ceeding in  and  through  this  porous  limestone.  The  characters  and 
form  of  the  original  shell  are  so  often  clearly  shown  in  the  casts,  as 
to  leave  no  room  for  doubting  the  identity  of  the  species.  The 
general  form  of  N.  geelongensis  is  like  that  of  N.  imperiolis, 
Sowerby,!  but  is  not  so  wide  at  the  aperture. 

Occurrence  and  Horizon. — The  original  locality,  "  near  Gee- 
long,"  is  somewhat  vague,  as  it  may  have  come  from  any  of  the 
chalky  or  polyzoal  limestones  within  a  wide  radius  in  that  district. 
All  of  those  localities,  however,  would  belong  to  the  Janjukian 
series.  Casts  of  Nautilus,  probably  of  this  species,  occur  in  South 
Australia,  in  the  Avhite  and  yellow  limestone  of  the  Murray  cliffs. 
A  cast  of  N .  geelongensis  preserved  in  the  white  polyzoal  lime- 
stone of  that  locality  Avas  presented  by  the  late  Rev.  C.  S.  Y.  Price, 
to  whom  the  Museum  has  been  indebted  from  time  to  time  for  many 
valuable  specimens. 

The  small  example,  having  the  shell  preserved,  was  collected  by 
Mr.  J.  F.  Mulder,  at  Fyansford,  the  deposit  at  which  locality  I 
now  include   in  the  Janjukian  series. 


1  Min.  Conch.,  vol.  i.,  1812,  p.  !),  pi.  i. 


856  Frederick  Cluvinnan  : 

From  the  Kalimuaii  series  (Lower  Pliocene)  at  its  base,  a  fine  ex- 
ample of  y.  geelonyensis  has  been  collected  by  Mr.  Kurtze,  of 
Hochkirch,  which  specimen  was  subsequently  presented  to  the 
Museum  by  Mr.  C.  French,  junr.  It  occurred  in  a  gypsum-bear- 
ing bed,  opposite  Mr.  Henty's  farm,  on  the  Grange  Burn,  asso- 
ciated with  Ostrea  manuhriata  and  Nation  cunninghamensis,  and 
is  itself  partially  filled  with  selenite. 


Nantihis    aUifronn,    sp.    uov.       (Plate    V.,    Figs.     10-12;     Plate    VI., 
Fig    13). 

Descri2)tion. — This  species  is  of  moderate  to  large  size.  It  is 
remarkable  for  the  compressed  form  of  the  shell,  and  its  conse- 
quently high  apertural  front.  The  chambers  number  about  15  to 
17  in  the  last  whorl.  The  umbilicus  is  open  and  deep,  but  not  of 
great  width;  it  has  the  appearance  of  being  stepped,  OAving  to  the 
compression  of  the  sides  of  each  turn  of  the  shell.  The  sutures  are 
more  undulate  than  in  N .  geelongensis,  from  which  it  is  further 
distinguished  by  its  depressed  form,  and  almost  quadrate  aper- 
ture. Siphuncle  sometimes  preserved  by  the  infilling  of  the  shell 
with  selenite,  when  it  is  seen  to  be  ventral  in  position. 

Dimensions. — Greatest  diameter  of  type  specimen,  about  225 
mm. ;  width  of  umbilicus,  13  mm. ;  height  of  aperture,  124  mm. ; 
width,  103  mm. 

Affinities. — This  form  of  Nautilus  is  of  the  N .  urhanus  type,  of 
the  London  Clay,  near  London,  and  the  I.  of  Sheppey.  In  N. 
urbanns  the  siphuncle  is  described  by  Edwards^-  as  dor.sal  in  posi- 
tion, whilst  in  the  present  species,  N.  altifrofis,  as  seen  in  the 
remarkably  fine  selenite  casts,  it  is  decidedly  ventral. 

Occurrence  and  Horizon. — N .  altifrons  appears  to  be  restricted 
to  Janjukian  strata.  It  occurs  at  the  Murray  River  cliffs  (type), 
where  it  is  found  preserved  in  gypsum  of  the  clear  variety  selenite, 
which  mineral  has  invaded  the  chambers,  whilst  the  shelly  septa 
and  siphuncle  are  often  well  preserved.  A  cast  of  this  species 
in  white  polyzoal  limestone  from  Nor'-west  Bend,  Murray  River, 
South  Australia,  is  also  found  in  the  Museum  collection.  A  cast 
of  Nautilus,  probably  referable  to  this  species,  occurring  at  Bairne- 
dale,  was  presented  by  Mr.  W.  A.   C.   a'Beckett. 

1    "Moil.  Eocene  CephulaiHida  ;ui(i  dnivalMs  of  l';iif,'l.ahd,"  vol.  i.  (Pal.  Soc),  1841),  p.  46. 


Victoria  a  Fossils.  Part  XVII.  357 

.Vaufl/us  felir,'  sp.  uov.     (Phite  VL,   Fig.   U;   Plate  VII.,  Fig.  15). 

Description. — Shell  somewhat  compressed,  or  only  moderately 
inflated,  with  a  well  rounded  periphery;  whorls  increasing  rapidly. 
Camerae  high,  and  with  the  sutures  slightly  undulate;  few  in  num- 
ber, nine  in  the  last  whorl.  A  feeble  annular  lobe  on  the  im- 
pressed zone.  Umbilicus  rather  wide  and  deep.  Aperture  roundly 
dome-shaped;  higher  than   wide. 

Dimensions. — Maximum  diameter  of  shell  in  type  specimen,  85 
mm. ;  minimum  diameter,  63  mm. ;  height  of  aperture,  47  mm. ; 
width,   42  mm. ;  width  of  umbilicus,   7.5  mm. 

Observations. — This  form  differs  in  many  respects  from  any  other 
known  Victorian  species.  Its  salient  characters  are — its  com- 
pressed form  compared  with  N .  halcombensis  and  N .  geelongensis, 
the  wide  umbilicus,  and  the  small  number  of  camerae  in  each 
whorl. 

Occurrence  and  Horizon. — Happy  Valley,  South  Australia 
(Magellania  j)ectoralis  beds)2  Janjukian  (Miocene).  Type  speci- 
men in  the  Dennant  coll. 

DIBRANCHIATA. 

Fam.  Sepiophoridae. 
Genus   Notosepla,  gen.   nov. 

Notosepia  cliftonensis,  sp.  nov.  (Plate  VII.,  Figs.  16,  17;  Plate  VIII., 
Figs.  20-22). 
Description. — Shell  or  sepion  large  and  comparatively  thick, 
but  variable  in  the  latter  respect,  according  to  habitat;  triangu- 
lary  ovate  in  ventral  aspect.  Alveolus  moderately  deep,  filling  up 
with  age.  Ventral  lip  of  alveolar  border  recurved,  and  sometimes 
quite  pendent;  inner  surface  of  lip  radiately  grooved  or  fluted. 
Back  and  sides  of  sepion  coarsely  reticulated  or  labyrinthic,  and 
spongy.  Vestigial  septation  of  the  internal  surface  of  the  pro- 
ostracum  faintly  marked,  but  stronger  than  in  the  living  Sepia. 
Pro-ostracum  strongly  convex  dorsally,  at  the  anterior  end  be- 
coming depressed  and  marked  with  strongly-arched  lamellar 
growth-lines.  Mucro  thick,  cylindrical,  and  bluntly  terminated; 
in  fully  grown  specimens  directly  in  line  with  the  back  of  the  pro- 
ostracum,  but  in  younger  specimens  having  a  slight  tendency  to 
recurve. 


1   Name  sujfgested  by  its  oociyrence  at  Happy  Valley. 

•2   For  notes  on  this  deposit  see  H.  Basedow,  Trans.  R.  Soc.  S.A.,  vol.  xxviii.,  1904,  p.  248. 

15 


358 


Fredei •ick  Gh(ip7nan 


Dimensions. — Approximate  lengtli  of  type  specimen  (including 
impression  of  the  anterior  part  of  the  pro-ostraciim),  i;^2  mm.  ; 
width  of  anterior  extremity  of  pro-ostracum,  6-5  mm.  ;  thickness 
of  ventral  lip  of  alveolus  in  tyjje  specimen,  8  mm.;  approximate 
length  of  mucro,  measured  dorsally  from  the  basal  sinus  at  junc- 
tion with  the  pro-ostracum,  13.5  mm.  Distance  from  centre  of 
alveolus  to  edge  of  lip,  21.5  mm. 

Relationships. — Piesumably  on  account  of  the  thickened  ventral 
lip  of  the  alveolar  border,  and  the  strong  mucro,  the  present  species 
has  been  listed  by  some  Australian  authors  in  the  genus  Belosejv'a. 
Although  characters  such  as  those  mentioned,  agree  witli  BeIo.'ie/>ifi. 
yet  the  latter  genus  is  distinct  in  several  essential  characters,  and 
these  mav  be  tabulated  as  follows  : — 


Belosepia 

Notosepia 

Sepia 

(Middle  Eocene). 

(Oligooene). 

(Livii,.?). 

Dorsum 

-     Stron'i.ly  convex     • 
anteriorly ;  vel- 
licate     posteri- 
orly. 

-     Strongly    con-     ■ 
vex. 

■     Flatly  convex. 

Alveolar 

cavity 

-     Deep  and    coni-     ■ 

-     Moderately 

■     Shallow ;     inner 

, 

cul ;   inner  sur- 

deep ;     i  n  n  e  1- 

s  VI  r  f  a  c  e     with 

face    with    dis- 

surface   with 

faint   transverse 

tant  septation. 

faint  septation. 

lamellae. 

Alveolar 

lip 

-     Greatly  extend- 

Moderately    ■ 

■     A    sharp   project- 

ed, flabelli- 

thick,     over-     - 

ing  border. 

form. 

hanging. 

Mucro 

-     Large,  thick  and     • 

■     Moderately     - 

Small,     generally 

bent  backward. 

large,    thick, 
bent  backward 
in  young  form, 
afterwards 

slender,      and 
either     straight, 
or  bent  backward 
or  forward. 

straight. 

It  is  especially  noteworthy  that  young  individuals  of  .Xotosepin, 
in  having  a  recurved  mucro,  point  to  the  older  Belosepia  type  of 
shell;  whilst  the  straight  mucro  of  the  adult  form  agrees  more 
nearly  with  that  of  the  living  Sepia,  in  which  it  is  normally 
straight,   or  only  slightly   l)ent. 

Observations. — A  large  portion  of  the  inner  surface  of  the  an- 
terior region  of  the  pro-ostracum  in  the  type  specimen,  was  for- 
tunately preserved  in  collecting  the  specimen,  and  this  materially 
adds  to  our  knowledge  of  the  form  of  the  complete  sepion.  The 
pro-ostracum  is  thin  and  expanded,  as  in  Sepia,  and  bordered  by 
a  wrinkled  sub-chitinous  membrane. 


Victorian  Fossils,  Part  XVII.  359 

Practica,lly  all  the  specimens  of  .V.  cliftoni  in  the  collection  had 
lain  on  the  sea-bed  for  some  considerable  time  before  being 
covered  up,  for  the  intei'ior  of  the  pro-ostracum  generally  carries 
attached  organisms,  as  polyzoa  and  Dinii/o  (right  or  attached 
valves). 

Occurrence  and  Horizon. — The  type  specimen  was  presented  to 
the  Museum  by  Mr.  F.  P.  Spry,  and  was  collected  by  Mr.  H.  Lodge 
at  Clifton  Bank,  Muddy  Creek,  from  the  upper,  broAvn  polyzoal 
marls  of  Balcombian  age.  It  also  occurs  in  the  lower,  blue  marls 
of  the  same  series.  There  is  a  specimen  in  the  Dennant  coll.,  from 
the  same  locality,  and  several  examples  in  theMuseum  coll.,  found 
by  the  late  Mr.  W.  Kershaw,  at  Balcombe  Bay  and  Grice's  Creek, 
Port  Phillip.  These  latter  examples  are  of  slightly  thinner  build, 
indicative  in  all  probability  of  their  deeper  water  habitat,  as 
compai-ed  with  the  deposits  at  Muddy  Creek. 


EXPLANATION   OF   PLATES. 

Plate  III. 

Fig.  1. — Aturia  aturi,  Basterot.  Broken  shell,  showing  the  char- 
acter and  arrangement  of  the  siphuncular  funnels.  Of 
Burdigalian  age.     Dax.     Nat.  size. 

Fig.  2. — Aturia  australis,  McCoy.  Broken  shell,  showing  the  in- 
ternal structure.  Balcombian.  Grice's  Creek,  Port  Phillip. 
(Coll.   J.   F.    Bailey).      Nat.    size. 

Fig.  3. — Nautilus  halcomhensis,^s^.  nov.  Exterior  of  shell  of  tyi>e 
specimen,  lateral  aspect;  w'ith  attached  valves  of  Dimya 
dissimilis.  Balcombian.  Balcombe  Bay,  Port  Phillip. 
(Coll.  F.  A.  Cudmore).     7-17  nat.  size. 

Fig.  4. — N.  balcombe n sis,  sp.  nov.  Opposite  face  of  the  same 
shell,  showing  the  internal  concameration.  About  §  nat. 
size. 

Plate   IV. 

Fig.  5. — N.  balcombensis,  sp.  nov.  Apertural  aspect  of  the  same 
shell.      Slightly  less  than  half  nat.   size. 

Fig.  6. — iV.  balcombensis,  sp.  nov.  Apertural  aspect  of  an  ex- 
ample in  the  neanic  stage.  Balcombian.  Balcombe  Bay, 
Port  Phillip.  (Coll.  F.  A.  Cudmore).  Paratype.  Nat. 
Bize. 


HOC  Frederick  Chapman  : 

Fig.    7. — Nnvtilus   geelongensis,    Foord.    A   cast    in    polyzoal    rock. 

Janjukian.      Murray    Cliffs.    South    Australia.       (Coll.    Rev. 

C.  S.  Y.   Price).     ;^5th  nat.  size. 
Fig.   8. — .T.     gedotige/isis,    Foord.        Shell    infilled    with    gypsum. 

Kalininan.     Cliffs  opposite  Henty's  farmstead,  Grange  Burn, 

near  Hamilton,  Victoria.      Lateral  aspect.      Nat.   size. 
Fig.    9. — N.    f/eelongensis,    Foord.       Apertural    view    of    the    above 

specimen.     Nat.  size. 

Pl,ATE   V. 

Fig.    10. — Nautilus   alfifrom,    sp.    nov.      Type    specimen.      Lateral 

aspect.      Janjukian.      Murray  River  Cliffs,   South  Australia. 

About  4-lOth  nat.  size. 
Fig.    IT. — N.   altifrons,   sp.    nov.      Apertural   aspect   of  the   above. 

Al)()ut  4-lOth  nat.  size. 
Fig.    12. — N.  altifrons,   sp.   nov.      Portion   of   a  shell   infilled  with 

selenite;  showing  the  septa  and  siphuncle  preserved  in  situ. 

Janjukian.      Murray    River    Cliffs,    South    Australia.      Nat- 


Plate  VL 

Fig.  13. — Nautilus  altifrons,  sp.  nov.  A  cast  in  polyzoal  lime- 
stone. Janjukian.  Nor'-west  Bend,  Murray  River,  South 
Australia.      Paratype.      About  3-5th  nat.   size. 

Fig.  14. — Navtilus  felix,  sp.  nov.  Lateral  aspect  of  type  speci- 
men. A  siliceous  internar  cast;  with  portion  of  the  shell 
preserved.  Janjukian.  Happy  Valley.  South  Australia. 
(Dennant  coll.).     About  nat.  size. 

Plate  VIL 

Fig.  15. — N .  felix,  sp.  nov.  Apertural  aspect  of  the  above  speci- 
men.    About  nat.  size. 

Fig.  16. — Notosepia  cliftonensis,  sp.  et  gen.  nov.  Internal  face 
of  aepion  of  type  specimen.  Balcombian.  Clifton  Bank. 
Muddy  Creek,  near  Hamilton,  Victoria.  (Coll.  H.  Lodge). 
Nat.   size. 

Fig.  17. — N.  cliftonensis,  sp.  nov.  Side  view  of  above  specimen. 
Nat.   size. 


Proc.  E.S.   Victoria,  19U.        Plate  III. 


Proc.  R.S.  Victoria,  19U.       Plate  IV. 


Proc.  R.S.   Victoria.   191 1.       Plate  V. 


F.C.,  Photo. 


Proc.  K.S.   Victoria,  1914.       Plato   VI. 


F.C.,  Photo. 


or.   K.S.   ViftoriM,    mil.        I'hd.-   Vll. 


F.C.,  Photo. 


Proc.  R.S.   Vie-lnria,   J  ".I  Ik       Plate   VIII. 


Victorian  Fossils,  Part  XVII.  ;5(31 


Platk  VIII. 


Fig.  18. — Nautilus  halcomhensiti,  sp.  nov.  Specimen  in  the 
brephic  stage,  with  siphixncular  orifice  clearly  seen  on  the 
face  of  the  chamber,  and  with  the  superficial  shell-orna- 
ment well-preserved.  Balcombian.  Balcombe  Bay,  Port 
Phillip.     (Coll.   F.   A.   Cudmore).     Paratype.     Nat.   size. 

Fig.  19. — N .  balcotnben.sis,  sp.  nov.  Ornament  in  aboA'^e  specimen 
enlarged.         x  3. 

Fig.  20. — Notosepifi  cliftonensis,  sp.  et  gen.  nov.  Balcombian. 
Balcombe  Bay.     (Coll.  W.  Kershaw).     Paratype.     Nat.  size. 

Fig.  21. — N.  cliff ovensis,  sp.  nov.  Sepion  in  early  stage  of 
growth,  showing  recurved  mucro.  Balcombian.  Balcombe 
Bay.     (Coll.  W.  Kershaw).     Paratype.      x  2. 

Fig.  22. — N .  cliffone?isis,  sp.  nov.  The  proostracum,  showing 
outer  shell  and  inner  concentric  lamininae.  Balcombian. 
Clifton  Bank,  Muddy  Creek.  (Coll.  H.  Lodge).  Paratype. 
Nat.  size. 


[Pkoc.  Rot.  Soc.  Victoria,  27  (N.S.),  Pt.  II.,  1914]. 

Art.    XXV. — Descriptions    of  ihree   unusual   forms    of 
Australites  from   Western   Victoria. 

By    Professor    ERNEST    W.    SKEATS,    D.Sc,    A.R.C.S.,    F.G.S. 

(With  Plate  IX.). 

[Read  lUth  December,  1914]. 

Introduction. 

During  a  visit  to  the  Grampians  in  February,  1913,  in  conn- 
pany  with  Mr.  W.  H.  Ferguson,  of  the  Geological  Survey,  I  paid 
a  visit  to  the  Stony  Creek  basin,  near  Hall's  gap,  from  which 
a  considerable  quantity  of  alluvial  gold  has  been  obtained.  From 
the  gold-bearing  gravels  and  sands  a  large  number  of  australites 
has  been  found  from  time  to  time.  The  gravels  are  quite  shal- 
low, and  I  understand  that  some  of  the  australites  have  been 
obtained  from  a  depth  of  a  few  feet  below  the  surface.  I  was 
not  successful  in  my  search,  but  Mr.  Charles  D'Alton.  of  Hall's 
Gap,  showed  me  some  which  he  had  found,  and  generously  pre- 
sented to  me  for  the  Geological  Museum  of  the  University,  two 
small  forms,  of  remarkable  character. 

Last  Aveek  Professoi-  Baldwin  Spencer,  C.M.G..  F.R.S..  Director 
of  the  National  Museum,  showed  me  another  remarkable  form 
of  australite,  from  Western  Victoria,  recently  presented  to  the 
National  Museum  by   Mr.    H.    Quiney. 

Professor  Spencer  kindly  allowed  me  to  describe  this  specimen, 
with  the  tAVo  presented  to  me  by  IMr.   D'Alton. 

Desrriptlons  of  Speciviens. — See   Plate. 

jUisfralite,  presented  hy  Mr.  H.  QtUney,  to  National  Museum. 
Measurements. — The  weight  determined  by  the  chemical  balance 
is  .5330  grams. 

The  specific  gravity  determined  by  Joly's  spring  balance  is  2.47 

Length  of  austi-alite  is  20  mm.  or  'i%  inch. 

Breadth  of  australite  is  10.7  mm.   or   ^-f  inch. 

Maximum  thickness  is  3.5  nnn.  or  ,.''j  inch. 

Length  of  australite,  excluding  the  flange,  is  13  mm.  or  \l  inch. 

Breadth  of  australite,  excluding  the  flange, 


Aasfr(difey<  jroni   Western    Victoria,  363 

A/)/)earafice  of  Aifstralife. 
General  cliaraoteis. — Tlie  speciinen  is  sliaped  somewhat  like  a 
pine-seed,  being  elliptical  in  outline,  flat  above,  convex  below,  and 
tapering  at  its  edge  to  a  thin  flange,  which  is  flat  at  the  extremities 
of  the  specimen,  and  curved  back  on  the  middle  part  of  the  upper 
surface.  The  flange  has  l)een  slightly  chipped  near  each  extremity. 
The  colour  of  the  australite  ranges  from  light  yellow  in  the  thin 
flange,  thvougli  bottle-green  to  black,  but  even  the  thickest  part  is 
translucent. 

Fhif    (ir    upper   surface. 

Examiifed  under  the  microscope  Avith  a  2-inch  objective,  numer- 
ous small  pits  of  hemispherical  shape  are  noticed  on  the  middle 
part  of  the  upper  surface.  Near  the  flange  these  pass  into  semi- 
cylindrical  grooves,  which  are  recurved  at  the  junction  with  the 
flange.  The  recurving  is  in  opposite  directions  on  opposite  sides 
of  the  central  part  of  the  flange.  Near  the  extremities  of  the  longer 
axis  of  the  specimen  tlie  grooves  run  out  into  the  flange  parallel  to 
the  longer  axis  of  the  specimen.  This  recurving  of  the  grooves 
alluded  to  above  is  what  would  be  expected  to  occur  if  they  were" 
formed  while  the  glass  was  still  plastic  and  rotating  about  an  axis  at 
right  angles  to  the  flat  or  upper  side,  while  the  turning  upwards  of 
the  central  part  of  the  flange  might  be  expected  to  occur  in  a  plastic 
body  as  a  result  of  resistance  from  the  air,  Avhile  the  body  was  mov- 
ing in  the  direction  of  the  assumed  axis  of  rotation. 

Convex  or  lower  surface. 

Pits  and  grooves  are  also  noticed  on  this  surface  of  the  speci- 
men. In  the  middle  of  the  specimen  they  are  hemispherical,  at 
the  margins  of  the  central  part  they  become  semi-elliptical  to  semi- 
cylindrical,  and  in  the  flange,  especially  at  the  extremities  of  the 
longer  axis,  they  are  drawn  out  to  linear  grooves. 

Examination  of  interior  of  Australite. 

For  this  purpose  the  australite  Avas  immersed  in  water  in  a 
watch  glass,  and  examined  under  the  microscope. 

The  specimen  shows  no  sign  of  crystals  or  incipient  crystals; 
it  is  completely  glassy.  In  polarised  light  the  central  parts  are 
completely  isotropic,  but  the  marginal  parts,  especially  the  thin 
part  of  the  flange,  exhibit  grey  to  Avhite  polarization  colours,  in- 
dicating the  existence  of  a  state  of  sti-ain  in  the  glass  of  the  mar- 
gin and  flange  of  the  australite. 


364  Ernest    W.  Skcais  : 

Boat-shaped  Australife  presented   hy   Mr.   Charles   DWlton    to 
Geolor/ical   Museum   of   the   University. 

Measurements. — The  weight  determined  by  the  chemical  bahiiice 
is  .4632  grams. 

The  specific  gravity  determined  by  Joly's  spring  balance  is  2.4.''). 

Length  of  australite  is  20  mm.  or  ||  inch. 

Breadth  of  australite  is  9.5  mm.  or  |  inch. 

Maximum  thickness  is  3  mm.  or  yL-  inch. 

Breadth  of  australite,  excluding  the  flange,  is  4  mm.  or   wV  inch. 


Appearance  of  Australite. 

General  characters. — The  specimen  is  more  or  less  boat-shaped.  It 
is  elliptical  in  outline,  with  an  upper  surface,  whose  central  part  is 
approximately  cylindrical,  and  with  a  flange  curved  upwards,  im- 
parting a  general  concave  appearance  to  the  upper  surface.  Much 
of  the  flange  has  been  lost  by  fracture,  but  in  one  place  appears 
to  be  unbroken,  and  there  the  outer  rim  of  the  flange  is  slightly 
curved  back,  and  appears  to  be  fluted.  The  specimen  is  bottle- 
green  to  black  in  colour. 

Concave   or   upper   surface. 

The  central  convex  or  cylindrical  portion  has  a  slight  constric- 
tion or  "  waist  "  developed  half-way  Ijetween  the  extremities.  The 
latter  taper  off  towards  a  point.  The  surface  of  the  central  por- 
tion shows  small  hemispherical  pits,  but  most  prominently  de- 
veloped, especially  near  the  junction  with  the  flange  are  long,  semi- 
cylindrical  grooves,  running  generally  parallel  to  the  longer  axis 
of  the  australite,  and  curving  in  at  the  "  waist,"  and  outwards 
beyond  it.  A  few  short  grooves  run  nearly  at  right  angles  to 
these  across  the  central  convex  portion.  The  flange  does  not  show 
a  constriction  to  a  "  waist,"  and  exhibits  on  its  surface  small 
hemispherical    pits. 

Convex  or  lower  surface. 

This  shows  a  few  longitudinal  grooves  near  the  flange,  but  the 
general  surface  is  covered  with  a  large  number  of  pits,  some  small 
and  hemisphei-ical,  others  large  and  flatter,  as  if  adjacent  pits 
had  become  confluent. 


Auatralites  from.    Wo^tern    Victoria.  365 

Examitiafion   of  interior  of  Ausiralite. 

The  australite  Avas  immersed  in  water  in  a  watch  glass,  and 
examined  under  the  microscope. 

The  specimen  is  completely  glassy,  showing  neither  crystallites 
or  microlites,  and  is  completely  isotropic,  except  for  slight  strain 
polarization  effects  at  the  thin  ends  of  the  australite. 


Disc-shaped    Australite    presented    by   Mr.    Charles   D' Alton    to 
Geological  Museum   of  the   U niversity. 

Measurements. — The  weight  determined  by  the  chemical  balance 
is  .3184  grams. 

The  specific  gravity  determined  by  Joly's  spring  balance  is  2.41. 

Length  of  australite  is  13  mm.  or  |^  inch. 

Breadth  of  australite  is  11.8  mm.  or  ?,#  inch. 

Maximum  thickness  is  1.2  mm.  or  ^^  inch. 

Length  of  australite,  excluding  the  flange,  is  5.2  mm.  or   ^f  inch. 

Breadth  of  australite,  excluding  the  flange,  is  45  mm.  or  ^-^ 
inch. 

Appearance  of  Australite. 

The  specimen  is  approximately  disc-shaped,  and  almost  circu- 
lar in  outline.  It  is  dark  bottle-green  in  colour,  and  quite  trans- 
lucent, owing  to  its  thinness.  The  flange  is  much  broader,  and 
slighter  thicker  than  the  central  portion.  The  edge  of  the  flange  is 
perfect,  except  for  a  small  chip.  It  is  smooth,  except  for  small 
pits  and  quite  clearly  could  never  have  formed  a  portion  de- 
tached   from    a   glass   bubble. 

Upper  Surface. — The  whole  surface  is  crowded  with  minute  pits, 
some  hemispherical  in  shape,  some  shallower,  and  many  are  con- 
fluent at  their  edges.  In  addition  shallow  grooves  are  seen  form- 
ing a  closed,  roughly  elliptical  curve  tangent  at  one  point  to  the 
central  portion,  and  passing  out  to  neai-  the  margin  of  one  part 
of  the  flange.  The  junction  of  the  flange  with  the  central  portion 
is  depressed,  and  the  flange  as  a  whole  is  thicker  than  the  central 
portion. 

Lower  Surface. — The  lower  surface  is  almost  flat.  It  is  covered 
with  minute  pits,  and  in  the  central  portion  with  sub-parallel 
grooves  trending  in  the  direction  of  the  longer  axis  of  the  speci- 
men. These  grooves,  however,  fail  to  reach  the  margin  of  the 
flange. 


:')66  Ernest   W.  Skeats  : 

Examination   of  interior  of  Avstralite. 

The  australite  was  immersed  in  water  in  a  watch  glass,  and 
examined  under  the  microscope. 

On  focusing  beneath  the  surface  of  the  australite,  it  was 
noticed  that  the  pits  or  bubbles  were  internal,  as  well  as  external, 
and  were  in  places  arranged  roughly  in  rings.  A  few  still  smaller 
gas  bubbles,  with  dark  borders,  were  also  noticed.  The  specimen 
was  entirely  glassy  and  isotropic,  except  for  slight  evidence  of 
strain   polarization. 

Conclusion. 

The  three  australites  above  described  are  remarkable,  and  I 
think  constitute  more  or  less  distinct  types  from  any  hitherto 
described.  The  best  and  most  complete  reproduction  of  different 
types  of  australites  is  given  by  Mr.  E.  J.  Dunn,i  and  includes 
button  shaped,  ellipsoidal.  dumb-lDell  shaped,  and  almost  spherical 
forms. 

To  these  must  now  be  added  the  "  pine-seed  "  type,  the  "  boat- 
shaped  "  type,  and  the  discoidal  type. 

The  three  specimens  described  are  remarkable  also  for  their  small 
dimensions  and  light  weight.  I  believe  the  disc-shaped  specimen 
from  the  Stony  Creek  Basin  in  the  Grampians  is  the  smallest  and 
lightest  australite  hitherto  described. 


DESCRIPTION   OF    PLATE. 

A  is  the  pine-seed  type  of  australite.     (Nat.  Miiseum  collection). 

B  is  the  disc-shaped  type  of  australite.  (Geol.  Dept.  Univ.  collec- 
tion. 

C  is  the  boat-shaped  type  of  australite.  (Geol.  Dept.  Univ.  col- 
lection. 

Below  each  australite  is  a  drawing  of  a  transverse  section  through 
the  australite,  and  a  drawing  of  the  upper  surface,  showing 
the  flange  and  peculiar  distribution  of  grooves.  Millimetre 
and  inch  scales  are  shown. 


1   Records  of  Geol.  Survey  of  Victoria,  vol.  ii.,  pt.  4,  1908,  pp.  202-207 
r.uUetiii  of  Geol.  Survey  of  Victoria,  No.  27,  1912. 


Pfoc.  RS.   Victoria,  lOU.       Plate  IX. 


d 


B.         a 


Lu!ll|l|||||!llllllh.llllllllllllllllllij. 

c:i^.i,,,i.,;i.„i.,,i, 


[Proc.    Kot.  Soc.  Victoria.  27  (N.S.),   Pt.  II.,  1914]. 


Akt.    XXV'K  "iVoff-   on   Eucalyptus   aljnna,  Liiui.,  and   its^ 
Essential   Oil. 

By  R.  T.  baker,  F.L.S.,  and  H.  G.  SMITH,  F.C.S., 

Teclmolo^ical  Museum,  Sydney. 

(Comuiunicated  by  Prof.   A.  J.  Evvart,  D.Sc). 
[Eead  December  10th,  1914]. 

This  specimen  was  discovered  by  Sir  Thomas  Mitchell,  in  1836, 
on  the  summit  of  Mt.  William  at  an  elevation  of  over  4,000  feet, 
and,  so  far,  is  endemic  to  Victoria.  Until  quite  within  the  last  year 
or  so,  this  was  the  only  locality  recorded  for  it,  none  other  being 
given  by  Bentham  in  his  "  Flora  Australiensis,"  or  by  Mueller  h\ 
his  "  Eucalyptographia,"  Dec.   11,  where  this  species  is  figured. 

It  has,  however,  now  been  found  by  Mr.  J.  W.  Audas  to  occur 
at  Hall's  Gap,  in  the  Grampians,  and  the  leaves  from  which  this  oil 
was  obtained  were  collected  "  on  that  poi'tion  of  the  Serra-range 
lying  between  Hall's  Gap  and  the  Victorian  Valley,  Grampian 
Mountains,"  where  it  grows  on  black  sandy  loam.  Mr.  C.  W. 
D' Alton,  of  that  locality,  informs  us  that  the  species  seldom  grows 
below  an  altitude  of  two  thousand  feet,  and  appears  to  flourish  best 
at  about  3000  feet  above  sea  level.  The  height  of  the  ti-ee  is  between 
twelve  and  thirty  feet,  being  a  robust  spreading  tree,  with  rough 
bark  at  the  foot  of  the  trunk  and  smooth  above. 

Timber. — The  timber  is  very  tough,  and  stands  heavy  winds  well. 
but  becomes  hollow  with  age. 

Remarks. — Being  confined  to  so  restricted  an  area,  one  would 
hardly  expect  to  find  any  variations,  and  Mueller,  who  figures  and 
describes  it  in  liis  "Eucalyptographia,"  does  not  give  or  refei-  to 
any.  Additional  collections  of  material,  however,  show  that  the 
fruits,  at  least,  leally  do  vary  in  shape.  Those  delineated  by 
Mueller  might  be  taken  as  the  extreme  in  size  and  contour  of  rim. 
which  is  there  shown  to  be  domed,  but  specimens  in  this  herbarium 
show  the  rim  to  be.  even  in  mature  fruits,  quite  truncate,  and  in 
others  even  half  countersunk.  The  fruit  is  also  occasionally 
ribbed. 

The  smaller  form  of  capsule  is  not  unlike  that  of  E.  capitellata 
in  shape,  otherwise  the  features  appear  fairly  constant. 


i^68  Biihcv  and  ISinith  : 

Essential  Oil. — We  are  indebted,  through  Mr.  Audas,  to  Mr.  C. 
W.  D'xVlton,  of  Hair.s  Gap,  Grampians,  Vic,  for  the  material  for 
chemical  investigation. 

The  leaves  with  terminal  branchlets  Avere  tolleoted  from  trees  12 
to  30  feet  high. 

The  leaves,  which  were  thick  and  coriaceous,  shoAved  considerable 
oil  glands,  but  these  must  have  been  largely  empty,  judging  from 
the  yield  of  oil,  as  this  Avas  only  0.36  per  cent. 

The  crude  oil,  which  was  thin  and  mobile,  had  a  terpene-like 
odour,  suggesting  that  of  turpentine.  Phellandrene  was  not  de- 
tected, and  Eucalyptol  was  only  present  in  small  amount.  The 
presence  of  the  solid  paraffin  peculiar  to  some  Eucalyptus  oils 
(Proc.  Roy.  Soc,  N.S.W.,  July,   1913)  was  also  determined. 

The  results  show  this  oil  to  consist  largely  of  pinene.  the  laevo- 
rotatory  form  predominating  slightly.  Although  lielonging  to  the 
group  of  Eucalypts  producing  a  Eucalyptol-pinene  oil,  yet  the 
epecies  has  no  commercial  value  as  an  oil-producing  plant,  the 
yield  being  much  too  small,  while  the  oil  itself  is  deficient  in 
oxygen -bearing  constituents. 

The  crude  oil  had  the  following  characters  : — 
Specific  gravity  at  15o  C.  =0.8973. 
notation  an=— 2.80. 
Refractive  index  at  15o  C.  =  1.4779. 

Insoluble  in  10  volumes  80  per  cent,  alcohol,  and,  owing  to  the 
presence  of  paraffin,  not  entirely  soluble  in  90  per  cent,   alcohol. 

The  saponification  number  for  the  esters  was  only  2.6,  so  that 
esters  were  only  present  in  very  small  amount. 

On  re-distilling  the  crude  oil,  the  usual  amount  of  acid  water  and 
volatile  aldehydes  for  this  class  of  Eucalyptus  oils  came  over  below 
1550  C.  (corrected).  Between  1550  and  1630  no  less  than  66  per 
cent,  distilled. 

This  fraction,  which  contained  a  little  Eucalyptol,  had  the  fol- 
lowing characters  : — 

Specific  gravity  at  15o  C.  =0.8669. 

Rotation  an  =  — ^A)o. 

Refractive  index  at  15o  C.  =  1.4678. 

This  fraction  had  an  odour  of  turpentine,  and  gave  the  charac- 
teristic nitrosochloride  for  pinene,  thus  showing  this  fraction  to 
consist  largely  of  that  terpene. 

Between  163o  and  215o,  16  per  cent,  distilled  (14  per  cent,  below 
I8O0).  This  fraction,  Avhich  contained  Eucalyptol,  gave  the  follow- 
ing :— 


Eucalyptus  aljxiva.  ;}6*.> 

Specific  gravity  at  loo  C.  =0.8783. 
Rotation  ajj  =  — 3.20. 
Refractive  index  at  15o  C.  =  1.4680. 
Between  215°  and  285o  only   1  per  cent,  came  over,  leaving  no 
less  than  16  per  cent,  in  the  still,  boiling  above  the  latter  tempera- 
ture.    This   residue  contained   some   paraffin,    the   remainder   con- 
sisting, perhaps,  largely  of  polyterpenes. 

A  portion  of  the  crude  oil  was  distilled  to  190oC.,  and  the 
Eucalyptol  'determined  in  this  by  the  resorcinol  method.  The 
result  showed  10.2  per  cent,  of  Eucalyptol  to  be  present  in  the  crude 
oil. 


fPROc.  Roy.  Sol-.  Victoria,  27  (N.S.j,  Part   II.,  l'J]4]. 

Akt.  XXVI  I.  —  Some  Ohservatiovf*  on  the  Metltods  of  Using  the 
Agglutination  Test  in  the  Diagnosis  of  Disease  in 
Bovines  caused  by  the  Bacillus  of  Contagious  Abortion. 

By    H.    R.    SEDDON,    B.V.Sc. 

(Veterinary  Research  Institute,  University  of  Melbourne). 

[Read   lOth  December,  1914]. 

1.    Materials    required    on    whicli   to   found    a    Diagnosis 
of   Contagious    Abortion. 

The  materials  which  may  be  examined  are  : — 

(1)  Vaginal  or  Uterine  Exudate  after   Parturition. 

(2)  Foetus  or  Foetal   membranes. 

(3)  Blood  serum. 

(4)  Milk. 

In  animals  which  have  recently  aborted  (1)  and  (2)  are  applic- 
able, but  in  animals  from  which  these  were  not  secured,  or  in 
others  in  which  it  is  desirable  to  diagnose  infection  in  the  absence 
of  abortion,  or  at  a  time  remote  from  the  act  of  abortion,  the  most 
•commonly  used  material  is  (3)  Serum.  This  is  of  especial  value 
because  of  its  being  easily  obtained  from  cows  at  all  stages  of  the 
disease  from  shortly  after  infectidn  onwards;  also  from  male 
animals,  proving  that  they  are  susceptible  to  infection,  and  from 
laboratory  animals,  such  as  guinea-pigs.  The  drawback  is  the 
difficulty  of  obtaining  the  serum  from  a  whole  herd  in  the  country 
where  dairymen  would  have  to  collect  the  samples. 

It  was  because  of  this  difficulty  that  investigations  have  been 
made  as  to  the  possible  use  of  (4)  Milk.  As  far  as  I  have  been 
able  to  ascertain,  this  material,  on  account  of  its  physical  proper- 
ties, has  not  been  used  to  any  extent  for  the  agglutina- 
tion test.  In  some  respectts  milk  itself  is  an  unsatis- 
factory material,  and  for  that  reason  Avhey,  prepared  by 
the  artificial  clotting  of  milk,  has  been  used.  Although 
these  investigations  ai-e  incomplete,  they  furnish  evidence 
strongly  suggesting  that  it  will  be  found  satisfactory  for 
diagnosis.  Should  this  be  so,  milk,  from  its  ease  of  collection, 
would  be  the  ideal  material  for  examination  in  the  case  of  lactating 
animals. 


Agglutination  l^cst  in  Abortion.  ;>/  I 

In  this  section  will  be  found  results  of  eertaiu  researches  con- 
ducted on  diajjnosis  from  specimens  of  uterine  exudate  and  of 
whey. 

When  triiei/  has  been  used  the  a<i:glutination  test  alone  has  l)een 
applied  to  it. 

When  usi/u/  e.ru<I(ite}  tlic  /ncdiis  dvaildhle  in  t/ie  Iio/ids  of  fhe 
bacteriolo(jiitt  are : — 

(1)  ]\Iicrf)Scopical   examination. 

(2)  Cultures. 

(3)  Inoculation    of    animals. 

(4)  Agglutination  test;   and 

(5)  Complement  fixation  test. 

1.  Microscojncal  examination . — To  a  person  who  is  in  the  habit 
of  frequently  examining  specimens  containing  the  bacilhis  abortus 
the  diagnosis  presents  no  great  difficulties,  especially  if  the  organ- 
isms are  plentiful  and  typically  arranged.  On  the  other  hand 
there  are  met  with  in  vaginal  or  uterine  material  bacteria  which 
simulate  more  or  less  the  B.  abortus,  and  here  the  other  tests  aid 
to  confirm  the  diagnosis. 

2.  Cultures. — For  these  to  be  satisfactory,  the  materfal  should 
be  as  free  as  possible  from  contamination  by  other  organisms.  In 
Australia  a  cow  is  frequently  at  grass  wdien  abortion  takes  place, 
and  may  have  aborted  some  days  before  the  stockman  sees  her. 
The  discharge  in  such  cases  is  sure  to  be  badly  contaminated. 

Also,  the  discharge  should  obviously  not  contain  any  antiseptic. 
It  sometimes  happens  that  one  is  called  upon  to  examine  material 
from  a  cow  which  has  been  syringed  out  with  lysol,  the  specimen 
smelling  strongly  of  the  antiseptic.  For  these  reasons  this  method 
is  of  very  limited  application. 

3.  Inoculation  of  Animals. — The  remai'ks  made  about  contamina- 
tion and  antiseptics  under  the  last  heading  apply  equally  here. 
Nevertheless,  this  method  of  diagnosis  has  been  used  here  with 
success,  guinea-pigs  being  used.  Owing  to  the  length  of  time  before 
marked  lesions  develop  one  resorts  to  the  agglutination  test  of  the 
blood  serum  of  the  guinea-pig  to  determine  whether  infection  by 
the  specific  organism  has  taken  place. 

4.  Agglutination  Test. — This  has  proved  valuable  in  diagnosing 
a  sample  of  exudate,  in  which  the  microscopical  findings  were 
doubtful,  and  where,  on  account  of  great  containination,  cultures 
were  not  obtained. 

1  The  word  exudate  is  used  throughout  to  mean  vaginal  discharge  oontainiiiy-  uterine  exudate. 


:'>72  H.   R.  Seddon  : 

It  has  been  found  very  delicate,  as  little  as  0.0025  c.c.  of  exud- 
ate causing  agglutination.  From  one  of  these  positive  cases  the 
blood  serum,  secured  16  days  later  than  the  exudate  and  17  days 
after  abortion,  gave  an  exactly  similar  agglutinating  titre  to  the 
exudate.     (See  Cow  II.,   "  Bluey.") 

Further,  exudate  may  be  kept  until  it  is  fairly  swarming  with 
bacteria,  and  yet  show  little  loss  of  agglutinant  action.  Also 
exudate  diluted  with  carbolised  saline  (10%  of  exudate  in  saline 
containing  0.5%  of  carbolic  acid)  shows  little  loss  of  agglutinating 
bodies. 

Exudate  from  a  healthy  cow  which  calved  at  the  Institute  was 
tested,  and  even  in  an  amount  of  0.25  c.c,  failed  to  give  any 
agglutination. 

5.  Coinjdement  Fixation  Test. — No  opportunity  has  presented 
itself  of  applying  this  test  to  exudate,  but,  judging  from  the  re- 
sults with  the  agglutination  test  on  this  material,  there  seems  to 
be  no  reason  why  it  should  not  be  of  use  for  diagnostic  purposes. ^ 

Details  of  Cows. 

I.  Normal  Cow. — This  animal  was  kept  at  the  Institute  in  con- 
nection with  another  experiment.  She  calved,  after  the  usual  signs 
of  on-coming  parturition,  the  offspring  being  of  full  size,  and 
vigorous. 

Exudate  secured  the  day  she  calved  gave  no  agglutination  with 
0.25  c.c. 

Whey  from  milk  taken  eleven  days  after  calving  gave  a  positive 
agglutination  with  0.25  c.c,  but  a  negative  with  0.05  c.c. 

II.  Cow,  "  Bluey." — Detailed  history  not  available.  Aborted 
on  1st  September,  1913.  Exudate — in  appearance  typical  of  the 
disease — was  secured  from  the  vagina  next  day.  It  Avas  tested  four 
days  later,  and  agglutinated  at  0.15  c.c,  this  being  the  smallest 
quantity  used.  Twelve  days  later  the  end-point  was  determined 
to  be  0.0025  c.c,  the  material  used  in  this  test  having  been  left 
in  the  bottle  and  being  now  fairly  putrid.  At  the  same  liime 
material  which  had  been  diluted  with  carbolised  saline  twelve  days 
ago  now  gave  a  reaction  with  0.005  c.c 

Microscopical  exainination  of  exudate  showed  long  chains  of 
bacilli,  streptococci,  and  also  some  clumps  of  bacilli  the  siae  of  B. 

1  An  opportunity  has  since  presented  itself  of  testing:,  by  the  Complement  Fixation  method,  a 
''ample  of  vapinal  exudate  from  a  cow  which  had  recently  aborted.  The  result  was  positive,  thus 
showing-  that  tlie  test  may  l)e  .ilso  availed  of  for  diagnosis  as  is  suggested  al)ove. 


AggiiUiudfion   Ted  in  Abortion.  373 

ff/ji/iosus.  Smears  from  plat'ontal  membi-am.'  showed  streptobacilli 
and  strept(K(tcri.  as  above.  Neither  specimen  showed  bacilli  which 
tduhl  be  detiiutely  recognised  as  tlie  l)acilli  of  contagious  abortion. 
Cii/fiirex  of  the  7i.  ahortns  were  not  obtained,  the  tubes  being  over- 
grown by  the  other  organisms  present. 

III.  Cow,  "  Baptist."— Aborted  on  22nd  June,  1914.  Exudate, 
secured  from  the  vagina  two  days  later,  gave  agglutination  with 
0.0025  CO.  Microscopical  ejamination  of  c.rudate  showed  numerous 
organisms  morphologically  like  B.  abort  ax. 

Inoculation  of  Aniniah. — Guinea-pig  \'t^^  was  inoculated  sub- 
cutaneously  with  exudate,  and  its  serum,  tested  nine  days  later, 
gave  no  agglutination  ;  10  days  after  irjoculation  a  positive  agglu- 
tination was  obtained  with  0.15  c.c.  of  serum;  76  days  after  inocu- 
lation 0.0025  c.c.  of  serum  gave  a  positive  agglutination;  95  days 
after  inocidation  the  animal  was  killed. 

I'ost-morteni  E.raniinafion. — Animal  in  good  condition  and  all 
organs  apparently  normal,  except  the  spleen,  which  showed  a  nodu- 
lar appearance  externally  and  on  section  numerous  very  small 
greyish  foci,  which  looked  rather  more  like  enlarged  and  prominent 
malpighian  bodies  than  foci  of  necrotic  material.  On  smears,  no 
organisms  could  be  detected. 

Guinea-pig  489,  inoculated  intraperitoneally  with  exudate,  was 
tested  40  days  after  inoculation,  when  the  serum  gave  a  positive 
agglutination  reaction. 

IV.  Cow.  "Garfish." — Calved  5th  July,  1914,  not  being  due 
till  the  I7tli  of  the  same  month,  but  the  owner  remarks:  "Calf 
full  size,  but  dead."  Exudate  w'as  secured  two  days  after  parturi- 
tion,  and  gave  no   agglutination  when  tested,   using  0.05  c.c. 

Microscopical  era  mi  not  ion  of  exudate  failed  to  demonstrate  the 
presence  of  B.   abortus,   and  ciiltures  gave  negative  results. 

Animals  Inoculated. — Guinea-pig  491,  inoculated  intraperitone- 
ally with  exudate,  was  tested  three  times  (the  last  test  ll.'i  days 
after  inoculation),  the  serum  giving  no  agglutination.  Guinea-pig 
492,  inoculated  subcutaneously  with  exudate,  tested  one  month 
after  inoculation,  gave  a  similar  negative  residt. 

Whey  from  milk  collected  eight  days  after  calving,  gave  a  nega- 
tive result  with  0.05  c.c. 

2.    Technique    Employed. 

In  the  following  pages  details  of  the  technique  employed  in  the 
use  of   all   the  materials   examined    are  given   with     a    view    to     a 


874  H.  R.  Seddon: 

standardisation  of  the  test  in  the  hands  of  different  workers,  so 
that  the  interpretation  and  comparison  of  lesnlts  may  be  possiljle 
and  accurate. 

a. — The   use  of  whey  and  the   value  of  ihc   meihod. 

That  the  specific  agglutinins  of  Bacillus  ahortus  may  occur  in 
milk  has  been  mentioned  by  MacFadyean  anil  Stoclcman,  (1)  in 
the  Appendix  to  Part  1  of  the  Departmental  Committee's  Report, 
p.  28,  where  they  say  :  "  We  also  found  that  the  milk  of  an  animal 
which  had  aborted  possessed  agglutinating  i)roperties  up  to  1  in 
25,  but,  owing  to  the  opacity  caused  l)y  the  addition  of  milk  to  a 
culture,  milk  is  unsuitable  for  testing  purposes."  Whether  this 
product  has  been  used  at  all  in  diagnosis  I  am  not  aware. 

It  is  obvious  that  if  milk,  or  milk  products,  could  be  used  it 
would  be  advantageous,  owing  to  the  ease  of  securing  specimens; 
but,  as  milk,  even  diluted,  is  unsatisfactory  on  account  of  its  physi- 
cal properties,  experiments  were  made  Avith  whey.  The  whey  was 
obtained  by  clotting  milk  with  Lactic  Acid,  the  technique  being  as 
follows  : — 

To  9  c.c.  of  milk,  1  c.c.  of  a  10%  aqueous  solution  of  lactic 
acid  is  added  and  mixed.  The  coagulated  milk  is  then  filtered 
through  either  cotton-wool  and  filter-paper,  or  filter-paper  alone, 
the  latter  method  being  usually  applied. 

The  whey  is  then  diluted,  one  part  to  nine  parts  of  carbolised 
saline  (Acid.  Carbol.  \'n\.  0.5,  Sod.  chlor.  0.85,  water  100),  to 
form  the  basal  dilution  1  in  10,  and  incubated  over-niglit.  Incu- 
bation and  subsequent  filtration  are  found  necessary,  otherwise 
there  may  be  a  deposit  of  albuminous  material,  which,  though 
unlike  the  typical  deposit  of  agglutinated  organisms,  is  not  desir- 
able, since  it  may  lead  to  confusion  in  reading  the  results. 

With  the  diluted,  incubated,  and  filtered  whey,  four  tubes,  each 
receiving  0.6  c.c.  of  standard  bacterial  emulsion,  ;ire  put  up.  con- 
taining the  following  amounts  of  the  basal  dilution  of  whey  (1  in 
10). 


rhey). 


A. 

B.                      c. 

I). 

].0 

0.2           -         0.1 

0.05  c.c. 

(representin"^     0.1 

tM»2          -         0.01 

0.005  c.c.  of  piu-e 

As  a  control.   1   cc. 

of  diluted  wliey  is  put 

in   a   t  ube  withoi 

emulsion. 

Carbolised  saline  is 

then  added  till  tlie  an 

louiit  of  li(]uid  ii 

tulje  is   approximately 

1.5  c.c. 

Agglittinatlon  Test  in  Abort  to  ti. 
Thus  the  series  of  tubes  contain  : — 


A. 

B. 

(.'. 

L>. 

Whey      - 

- 

O.l 

0.02 

. 

0.01 

0.005  c.c. 

Emulsion 

0.5 

0.5 

- 

n.5 

O.o  c.c. 

Saline      - 

- 

0.9 

0.98 

- 

0.99 

0.995  c.c. 

The  tubes  are  then  shaken  and  put  in  the  incubator  till  next 
<lay,  when  the  results  are  read.  Further  incubation  shows  littlr 
alteration,  a  tube  showing  "  partial  "  agglutination — i.e.,  small 
deposit,  with  no  "clearing"  of  the  supernatant  fluid  at  the  end 
18  to  24  hours,  may  be  complete  at  the  end  of  36  to  48  hours. 

Whey,  from  milk  Avhich  had  been  kept  20  days  at  room  tempera- 
ture, and  clotted  naturally,  has  also  been  tested,  when  it  was 
found  that  this  bacterially-produced  whey  exhibited  the  same  tit  re 
as  the  wliolr  milk. 

A  large  number  of  experiments  with  whey  have  been  performed, 
Ijut  as  yet  no  conclusion  has  been  come  to  as  regards  the  limiting 
titres  upon  which  a  diagnosis  may  be  made.  It  has  be(en  found 
that  the  agglutinins  in  Avhey  increase  and  decrease  in  much  the 
same  manner  as  they  do  in  blood  serum.  The  work  to  date  has 
been  chiefly  among  cows  on  a  property  where  the  disease  has  been 
in  existence  for  a  number  of  years,  but  where  the  abortions,  since 
the  investigations  commenced,  have  been  very  few — not  sufficient 
to  warrant  a  definite  opinion  as  to  the  comi3arative  value  of  whey 
versus  serum.  Sufficient  has  been  done,  however,  to  warrant  inves- 
tigation of  the  value  of  whey  as  a  material  for  diagnosis  by  other 
workers. 

b. — Collect  inn   of  Senini  from  Cattle   and  Guiuea-iiir/s. 
Occurretice  of  the  Agglutinins  in   the  Blood  of  Steers. 

Cattle. — Undoubtedly  the  most  satisfactory  method  of  obtain- 
ing serum  in  large  quantities  is  by  bleeding  from  the  jugular  vein. 
but  as  this  method  takes  some  time,  and  often  necessitates  the  cast- 
ing of  the  animal,  another  and  simpler  method  is  required  where 
only  small  quantities  of  blood,  suflicient  for  diagnostic  purposes, 
are  required. 

It  has  been  found  that  such  may  be  best  obtained  from  the  small 
artery  which  runs  with  the  vein  extending  along  the  centre  of  the 
dorsum  of  the  ear.  This  vein  is  the  most  prominent  and  is  easily 
found.  The  hair  is  clipped  off,  and  an  incision  is  made  across  the 
vein  and  the  artery  at  a  point  about  mid-way  betwen  the  tip  and  the 
base  of  the  ear.     The  artery  may  not  te  cut  at  the  first  incision,  as 

16a 


:{70  H.  R.  Seddon: 

it  usually  lies  underneath  the  vein,  and  a  second  rather  free  inci- 
sion may  be  necessary.  From  this  the  blood  spurts  or  drips  freely, 
and  5  to  10  c.c.  can  be  collected  in  a  test-tube.  The  blood  is  allowed 
to  clot,  the  clot  loosened  from  the  sides  of  the  tube  for  about  two- 
thirds  of  its  attachment,  and  the  tube  inverted  in  a  conical  urine 
test-glass.  After  allowing  this  to  stand  for  some  hours,  the  serum 
may  be  collected  free  from  corpuscles. 

Guinea-pigs. — The  following  method  has  been  found  satisfactory 
for  obtaining  small. quantities  of  serum  for  diagnostic  purposes: — 

Centrifuge  tubes  are  put  up,  containing  2  c.c.  of  citrated  carbol 
saline  (Sod.  chlor.  0.85,  Sod.  cit.  1,  Ac.  Carb.  liq.  0.5,  water  100). 
The  margin  of  the  ear  of  the  guinea-pig  is  then  incised  with  the 
scissors  and  held  dependant.  There  is  a  .small  artery  in  this  region 
from  which,  if  it  has  been  cut,  the  blood  drips  freely.  Six  drops 
of  blood  are  collected  in  the  prepared  tubes.  If  we  assume  that 
six  drops  of  blood  are  equal  to  0.3  c.c,  then  we  should  have  about 
0.2  c.c.  of  serum  in  each  tube,  or  a  dilution  of  1  in  10. 

The  tubes  are  shaken,  centrifugalised,  and  the  supernatant  fluid 
pipetted  off  and  tested  in  various  quantities.  Though  not  quite 
accurate,  this  method  is  sufficiently  so  for  determining  whether 
the  animal  is  harbouring  the  bacilli,  as,  for  example,  those  animals 
inoculated  with  vaginal  exudate  or  milk  fiom  suspected  cows. 
Healthy,  non-inoculated  guinea-pigs  have  invariably  given  a  nega- 
tive reaction,  even  with  0.1  c.c.  of  pure  serum  (?'.<?.,  1  c.c.  of  the 
citrated  saline  mixture),  whereas  some  of  our  reacting  guinea-pigs 
have  given  an  agglutinating  titre  of  0.005  c.c,  and  in  one  cas© 
of  0.0005  c.c 

E.ra/ni/iafioii    of   the   Blood  of  Steers. 

Because  of  the  large  number  of  cows  which  give  a  positive 
agglutination  reaction  it  is  important  to  determine  whether  agglu- 
tination of  the  Contagious  Abortion  bacillus  is  brought  about  by 
normal  ox  serum,  and,  if  at  all,  to  what  extent.  With  a  view  to 
obtaining  information  on  this  point,  experiments  have  been  con- 
ducted Avith  the  serum  of  male  animals  never  used  for  breeding. 

The  following  experiments  have  been  made  with  the  serum  of 
steers.  The  animals  were  for  human  consumption,  and  the  blood 
was  taken,  immediately  upon  slaughter  at  the  abattoirs,  into 
a  bottle  containing  a  small  quantity  of  strong  (20%)  citrate  solu- 
tion. The  serum  was  obtained  by  centrifugalising  and  tested  as 
follows  : — 


Agglutination  Test  in   Abortion.  Ml 

Basal   dilutions  were  made  containing    1    of   seinini  to   !)   of  i-ar- 

holised   saline  ;   the   ani<nint  of   standardised    emulsion  used    in   eaeli 
tube  was  0.5  e.c.       Results  : 


0.02  0.01  0.1  05  CO.  piiii 

Seiinii. 


Steer     1 
2 


+  +    .\gglutination  and  clearintf. 
+    Agglutination. 
S   Slight  agglutination. 
No  agglutination. 

From  the  above,  it  will  be  seen  that,  with  the  exception  of  Steer 
5,  no  animal  gave  a  positive  reaction  with  less  than  0.1  c.c.  of 
pure  serum,  and  only  one  a  definite  agglutination  with  thait 
amount.  With  regard  to  the  "  S  "  readings,  as  mentioned  else- 
where, we  do  not  count  these  as  positives,  as  the  amount  of  agglu- 
tination is  extremely  small — only  perceptible  on  very  careful  naked 
eye  examination. 

The  serum  of  the  positive  .steer  (5)  was  also  tested  by  the  com 
plement  fixation  method,  and  again  gave  a  positive  reaction. 

(c)     Standard isal ion    of  t]ic   Bacterial   Knndsion. 

In  the  description  of  the  technique  adopted  by  other  workers 
there  is  a  remarkable  absence  of  detail  as  to  the  concentration  of 
the  bacterial  emulsion. 

Although  Mohler  and  Traum  (2)  use  a  metliod  of  .standardising 
bacterial  emulsion  ("agglutinating  fluid"),  they  do  so  ])y  com- 
paring it  Avith  "the  old  titred  agglutinating  fluid,"  but  how  this 
"  old  agglutinating  fluid  "  itself  was  standardised  they  do  not  say. 
nor  do  the}'  indicate  what  it   was  like  in   ai)pearancc. 

MacFadyean  and  Stofkman  ("5)  ))icpare  "  an  emulsion  of  greater 
turbidity  than  is  ultimately  recjuired,"  and  dilute  it  "  until  when 
viewed  in  one  of  the  small  tubes  employed  for  the  tests  it  is  faintly 
hazy  in  appearance." 

In  this  laboiatory  a  method.  l)asod  upon  comparison  of  tlie  emul- 
eion    to   be   emitloyed    with    a    suspension    of    Barium    sidphate.    has 


:!7S  H.  B.  Seddon  : 

heeii  used,  the  idea  l)eiiig  suggested  by  the  "  Nephelometer  "  of 
MoFailaud  (4). 

For  the  test  the  following  solutions  are  made: — A  1%  solution 
of  Barium  chloride  in  distilled  water,  and  a  1%  solution  of  Sul- 
phuric acid  in  Avater.  Three  cubic  centimetres  of  the  Barium  solu- 
tion is  then  mixed  with  97  cubic  centimeters  of  the  acid  solution, 
shaken,  and  allowed  to  stand,  to  come  to  a  state  of  chemical  equi- 
liliriuni. 

The  B.  abortus  is  sown  on  agar  in  Roux  flasks  and  incubated 
for  two  or  three  dajs,  the  water  of  condensation  being  ruti  over 
the  surface  daily  so  as  to  get  a  good  growth  over  the  whole  sur- 
face. Twenty  cubic  centimetres  of  carbolised  saline  (Ac.  Carb.  liq. 
0.5.  Sod.  chlor.  0.85,  water  100)  is  then  added  to  the  flasks  and 
the  growth  washed  ott'.  shaken  thoroughly,  and  passed  twice  through 
filter-paper.  Dilutions  of  this  suspension,  or  "  emulsion,"  as  it  is 
generally  called,  are  then  made  with  carbolised  saline  as  folloAvs  : — 
1  c.c.  of  emulsion  and  1  c.c.  of  carbolised  solution;  1  c.c.  of  emul- 
sion and  2  c.c.  of  carbolised  saline;  and  so  on  up  to  1  c.c.  of  emul- 
sion and  10  c.c.  of  carbol  saline.  These  suspensions  are  the  fluids 
ti)  l>e  compared  with  the  barium  sulphate  mixture. 

To  compare,  the  Barium  sulphate  mixture  is  thoroughly  shaken 
and  a  small  tube  of  about  1  cm.  calibre  filled  with  the  fluid,  tlie 
fluids  to  be  tested  being  placed  in  similarly  sized  tubes  and  com- 
parisons made  over  printed  paper.  This  Barium  suspension  is 
our  standard  of  opacity  for  emulsion  (Standard  X). 

Supposing  the  tulje  which  approximates  the  opacity  of 
the  Barium  mixture  is  that  tube  which  contains  1  c.c.  of  thick 
emulsion  and  6  c.c.  of  carbolised  saline,  then  this  tube  is  of  the 
proper  standard,  and  is  called  "Standard  X."  The  whole  of  the 
ennilsion  may  then  lie  diluted  down  with  rarltolised  saline  to  the 
proper  strength,  or  kejjt  as  thick  emulsion,  the  standard  being* 
now  known.  In  the  case  instanced,  the  thick  emulsion  may  be 
termed  "  7  X,"  thereby  denoting  that  it  requires  diluting  to  seven 
times  its  volume — i.e.,  adding  six  times  its  volume  of  carbolised 
saline,  to  prepare  a  standardised  enndsion   "X." 

In  our  tests,  in  which  we  make  the  total  volume  of  fluid  in  th© 
tii})e  up  to  1.5  c.c,  we  use  0.5  c.c.  of  this  standard  emulsion  "  X  " 
in   each  tube. 


A (jglvtf nation   Test  in  Abortion.  379 

3.    Quantitative    Factors   in   the   Agglutination 
Reaction. 

(rt)  Not  simply  a  matter  of  dilution,  but  a  quantitative  reaction^ 
An  unfortunate  terminology  has  crept  into  descriptions  of  agglu- 
tination methods — probably  a  relic  from  the  descriptions  of  the 
so-called  Widal  reactions  with  the  serum  of  typhoid  patients — in 
which  frequent  use  is  made  of  the  term  "  dilution,"  to  express 
the  amounts  of  serum  (or  other  diagnostic  fluid)  necessary  to  bring 
about  agglutination. 

The  following  experiments  show  that  the  sensitiveness  of  the  re- 
action is  to  be  measured  by  accurate  determination  of  the  minimal 
quantity  of  serum  employed;   in  other  words,   it   is  not  simply   a 
matter  of  dilution,  but  a  quantitative  reaction. 
Experiments. — To  determine  whether — 

1.  The  relation  of  the  quantity  of  pure  serum  to  the  quantity 

of  fluid  in  a  tube  (i.e.,  degree  of  dilution),  or 

2.  The  amount  of  pure  serum  in  the  tube, 

is  the  determining  factor  in  agglutination  of  a  particular  serum. 

Serum  collected  from  a  cow  thirteen  days  previously  was  used,  a 
basal  dilution  of  1  of  serum  to  49  of  carbolised  saline  being  made 
(1  in  50). 

The  emulsion  was  standardised  in  accordance  with  the  usual 
method,  and  found  to  lie  of  a  standard  "  10  X." 

Set  la. 
Ten  tubes  were  put  up,  as  follows  : — 

A.  B.  C.  0.  K.          F.          G.  H.  J.           K. 

Serum  (1  in  50)            -     1.0  1.0  1.0  1.0  1.0  0.5  0.5  0.5  0.5  0.25  c.c. 

Carbolised  saline         -     0.0  0.5  1.0  1.5  2.0  1.25      1.5  2.0  2.5  1.75  c.c. 

Total  volume      -         -     1.0  1.5  2.0  2.5  3.0  1.75      2.0  2.5  3.0  2.0  c.c. 
Eelationship  of  serum 

to  fluid-         -     lin     50  75  100  125  150  175  2(X)  250  300  400 

Of  each  of  these  dilutions  1  c.c.  was  put  in  a  tube,  and  the  tubes 
similarly  lettered  so  tliat  the  amounts  of  pure  serum  in  these  tubes 
were  : — 

A.     B.    C.     I).      K.      K.      U.  H.     .1.      K. 

0.02  0.012  0.01  O.OOS  O.OOG  0.0056  0  005  0.004  0.0(J3  0.0025  c.c. 

Emulsion  (0.05  c.c.  Standard  10  X)  was  then  added  to  each  tube 
and  tlie  tubes  incubated  till  next  day,  when  readings  were  taken. 


380  H.  R.  Seddon: 

Results  : — 

A,   B,    and   C.    agfj:lutinati(>ii    and  clearing. 
D  and  E,  agglutination. 

F,  slight   agglutination. 

G,  H,  J,  and  K,  no  agglutination. 

Set  lb. 
Another  ten  tubes  were  put   up  similarly  to   above  (8et   la),   but 
with  0.1  CO.   of  emulsion  (i.e.,   double  quantity)  added. 
Results  : — 

A,   agglutination   and  clearing. 
No  agglutination  in  other  tubes. 
Note: — In   these  two   sets   of   tubes    actual   dihitlon    of   serum    in 
total  fluid  (neglecting  the  small   amount   added  with  the  emulsion) 
was  the  outstanding  test. 

Set  Ha. 
Serum  and  carbolised  saline  were  placed  in  tubes  as  in  Set  1.  : — 

A.        B.        C.        1).        E.  F.  G.        H.        J.  K. 

Serum  (1  in  50)      -     1.0     1.0     1.0     1.0     1.0     0.5       0.5     0.5     0.5     0.25  c.c. 
Carbolised  saline    -     0.0     0.5     1.0     1.5     2.0     1.25     1.5     20     2.5     1.75  c.c. 

The  bacterial  emulsion  was  added  to  the  whole  of  tlie  fluid  in 
each  tube  (not  to  1  c.c.  of  each  dilution). 

Emulsion  added  (0.05  c.c),   and  tubes  incul)ated  as  in  Set   la. 
Result  :— 

Agglutination    and   clearing   in    all    tuljcs   from    .\    to   J,    in- 
clusive. 
No  agglutination  in  K. 

Set  lib. 

Tubes  put  up  similarly  to  last  set  (Set  11a),  l>ut  wiih  0.1  c.c.  of 
emulsion  (double  (piantity)  added. 

Result  :  — 

Agglutination   and  clearing  in    .\,    l{,   (',   1),   and   E. 
No  agglutination  in  other  tubes. 

The  actual  dilution  of  tlie  serum  in  tliesf  tulies,  tlierefoi-e,  is 
the  same  in  l«)th  tests  (Sets  1.  and  11.),  but  tlie  aitual  (nnoiinf  of 
serum  in  each  tube  is  not  the  same  in  coii-espoiidingly  lettered 
tubes   in   each   test.      (See  Table   1.) 

With  each  set,  control  tithes  were  put  uj),  containing  (1)  scrum 
and  saline,   and  (2)  emulsion   and  saline. 


Agglutination  Tent  in  Abort i 


381 


Note  on   liendinds. 

"Agglutination  "  is  to  be  interpreted  as  a  definite  macroscopic 
aggregation  of  organisms  into  clumps  deposited  eithei-  at  bottom 
of  tube  or  at  bottom  and  along  sides  of  tubes. 

"  Clearing,"  where  the  supernatant  fluid  is  free,  to  the  naked 
•eye,  of  suspended  organisms — i.e.,  agglutination  and  sedimenta- 
tion. 

"  Slight,"  wliere  there  is  a  trace  of  agglutination  deposit — not 
Avhat  one  might  Avith  confidence  call  a  definite  agglutination.  These 
"  slights  "  are  read  as  ncijative  agglutinations,  in  considering  the 
agglutination  titre  of  a  serum. 


Set   I. 


Amount  of  Seniir 

0.02  c.c. 
0.012  c.c. 
0.01  c.c. 
0.008  c.c. 
0.006  c.c. 
0.0056  c.c. 
0.005  c.c. 
0.004  c.c. 
0.003  c.c. 
0.0025  c.c. 


TABLE    I. 

Dilution. 
1  in  50 
75 
100 
125 
150 
175 
200 
250 
300 
400 


Emulsion 
0.05  c.c. 

Enuihion 
0.1  c.c. 

+  + 

+ 

+  + 

— 

+  + 

— 

+ 

— 

+ 

— 

s 

-. 

Set  II. 

a. 

b. 

Tiil)e. 

Amount  of  Serum. 

Dilution. 

Emulsion 
0.05  c.c. 

Emulsion 
0.1  c.c. 

A 

0.02  c.c. 

1  in  50 

+  + 

+  + 

B 

0.02  C.C. 

75 

+  + 

+  + 

C 

0.02  c.c. 

100 

+  + 

+  + 

D 

0.02  c.c. 

125 

+  + 

+  + 

E 

0.02  c.c. 

150 

+  + 

+  + 

F 

0.01  c.c. 

175 

+  + 

— 

G 

0.01  c.c. 

200 

+  + 



H 

0.01  c.c. 

250 

+  + 

— 

J 

0.01  c.c. 

300 

+  + 



K 

0.005  c.c 

400 

— 

— 

+  +  Siy:nifies  agglutination  and  clearing. 

+  Signifies  agglutination. 

S  Signifies  slight  agglutination. 

—  Signifies  no  agglutination. 


882  H.  R.  Seddon: 

Conclusio/is  to   be  drawn   from  ((bore. 

1.— Using  the  same  quantity  of  emulsion  in  eacli  tube,  tube^ 
2^ossessurg  the  same  ddvtion  {but  different  quantities)  of  serum  do 
uot  furnish  parallel  results.  (Compare  Set  la.  with  Set  Ila.,  Set 
lb.   and  Set  lib.,  etc.) 

2. — Using  the  same  quantity  of  emulsion  in  each  tube,  tubes 
containing/  the  same  qtiantit/j  of  serum  do  furnish  parallel  results. 

3. — The  agglutination  titre  varies  with  the  quantity  of  emul- 
sion used,  for,  as  is  evident  in  the  table  (I.) — - 

(a)  With   0.05   c.c.    of   concentrated   emulsion     (10    X),     the 

minimum    amount    of   this   serum     which     will     produce 
agglutination  is  0.006  c.c. 

(b)  Witli  0.1  c.c.  of  concentrated  emulsion  (10  X),  the  mini- 

mum quantity  of  serum  required  is  0.02  c.c. 
Experiments  were  then  carried  out  to  test  the  effect  of  dilution 
on  an  agglutination  system. 

Tubes  were  put  up,  containing  : — 


.\. 

B. 

C. 

D. 

Pure  Sevuiu  - 

0.02 

0.015 

0.01 

0.005  c.c. 

Emulsion  (10  X)  - 

0.0.J 

0.05 

0.05 

0.05  c.c. 

Test  1. — Volume  of  fluid  in  each  tube  made  up  with  carbolised 
saline  to  1  c.c. 

Test  2. — Volume  of  fluid  in  each  tube  made  up  to  2.5  c.c. 
Results,  both  tests  : — 

A  and  B,   agglutination   and  clearing. 

C,  agglutination. 

D,  no  agglutination. 

Test  3. — A  tube  was  put  up,  containing  0.02  c.c.  pure  serum 
and  0.05  c.c.  emulsion  (10  X),  and  carbolised  saline  added  tip  to 
20  c.c. 

Result  : — Agglutination. 

These  tests  show  that  the  dominating  factor  is  the  quantity  of 
serum  in  each  tube,  and  not  the  degree  of  dilution.  Of  course,  if 
equal  quantities  of  each  dilution  be  taken  for  testing,  the  quantity 
of  serum  in  the  tube  will  vary  as  the  dilution  (as  is  shoAvn  in  Set 
la.).  On  the  other  hand,  in  the  practical  application  of  the  agglu- 
tination test  the  important  figure  is  what  may  be  termed  the  "  end- 
point  " — i.e.,  the  smallest  quantity  of  serum  which  will  produce 
agglutination  witli  n  standard  quantity  of  emulsion.  The  neces- 
sity,  therefore,    arises   for   taking   for   all   tests    an    exactly   similar 


Agglvfhiation  Text  in   Ahortioii.  oB-f 

<iuaiititv  of  ililuted  soniui,  heiift'  it  is  advisahU'  to  n-for  to  the- 
agglutinating  titre  of  a  serum  as  "  so  many  cul)ic  (.-(.'iitinietres  of 
serum,'"  and  not  us  "  up  to  a  dilution  of  such  and  such."  Foi- 
the  statement  of  the  dilution  to  ho  of  any  guide  to  other  workers 
this  must  be  supplemented  by  a  statement  referring  not  only  to  th& 
actual  amount  of  diluted  serum  used,  but  to  the  actual  quantity 
of  emulsion  used  also. 

Adopting  the  suggested  method — i.e.^  the  statement  of  the  exact 
Huantity  of  serum  used,  the  amount  of  emulsion  used  is  the  only 
supplementary  factor  required  to  be  known,  for,  as  is  shown  by 
these  experiments,  and  by  the  following  section,  the  amount  of 
emulsion  markedly  and  in  a  regular  manner  affects  the  agglutina- 
tion titre. 

b. — Influence    of    Qtia/it/f//    of   Emulsion    on    Agglutination. 
Also  a  note  on  a  peculiar  it  >/  of  agglutination. 

As  is  indicated  in  the  experiments  in  sub-section  (a)  of  section  5 
of  this  paper,  the  quantity  of  emulsion  present  in  a  tube  in  which 
there  is  a  certain  definite  amount  of  serum  (or,  in  other  words, 
the  proportion  between  the  amount  of  emulsion  and  the  amount 
of  serum),  has  a  bearing  on  whether  that  particular  quantity  of 
serum  will  show  agglutination  of  the  bacilli  or  not. 
whereas  with  0.05  c.c.  of  emulsion  (Standard  10  X)    agglutination 

The  tests,  la.  and  lb.  (see  Conclusion  3,  page  382),  showed  that 
occurred  with  quantities  of  serum  varying  from  0.006  c.c.  up,  with 
0.1  c.c.  of  the  same  emidsion  the  smallest  quantity  of  serum  to  giver 
agglutination  was  0.02  c.c. 

To  further  elucidate  this  relationship,  a  large  number  of  tubes, 
with  varying  proportions  of  emulsion  and  serum,  were  put  up  as 
indicated  in  the  table  (Table  2),  in  which  the  results  are  also 
shown.  On  account  of  the  wide  range  in  quantities  over  which 
the  experiment  Avas  made,  various  concentrations  of  serum  and  of 
emulsion  were  used  in  actually  making  the  test. 

These  basal  dilutions  Avere  : — 

Of  Serum  : — 1  in  5.   1  in  50,  and  1  in  500. 
Of  Emulsion: — A   standard   suspension   "X,"    and   also  one 
standardised  to  10  X — i.e.,  10  times  as  strong. 

The  quantities  of  emulsion  used  are  stated  throughout  the  table 
in  terms  of  standard  X  enmlsion,  but  for  those  tubes  shown  in 
the  table  as  containing  1  c.c.  and  over  of  standard  X  emulsion,  the 
10  X  emulsion  was  used;  the  amounts  of  this  (standard  10  X)  that 


S84 


H.  R.  Seddon: 


-!+  +  +  +  +  +  +  +  +  +  + 
^  '+++  +  +  +  +  +  +  +  + 


+  +  +  + 
+  +  +  + 


i+  +   + 
+   +   + 


^    +  + 


+  +  + 


I  d    +  +   + 


+     +     +     +    +,,  I  I  ,  I 

+  +  +  +  +  +  I    M    I    I 


+  +  +  + 
+  +  +  + 


+ 


+  "^  +  +  i    I    I    I 

+  +  +  +  I    I    i    I 


i    I    1 


Ut  +  +  I    I    I    I 


x^    i^  +  +  + 


+  +  ;  +  +  1  I  I  1  I 
+  +  +  + 


+  + 


I    I    I    I    I    !    I 


+  t t  +  +  I    I    M    I    I    I    !    I    I    I 


+  -+  I 


+  + 
+  + 


;  +  +  I  I  I  !  i  I  I  I  I  1  I 


+  4- 

+  + 


+  +  I    I    I    I    I    I    i    !    !    ! 


+++illlllllll 


I    I 


CO    T-i    rfj    -^    o\ 

-r'    <M   CO   -*   c-i   — I   r-H   o   o   o 

CD     <MiiO-ti<Mr-<-HOOOOOOOO 
rir-<^0000000000000 

od    oddcJdddddddddd 


A (jghUi nation   Test  in  Abortion.  *385 

were  put  in  being  0.1,  0.2,  0.4,  O.G,  0.8,  and  1  c.c.  respectively. 
Similarly  in  regard  to  the  serum — for  those  tubes  shown  as  con- 
taining 0.04  c.c.  of  serum  and  over,  the  basal  dilution  of  1  in  5 
was  used,  the  quantities  of  this  that  were  put  in  being  0.2,  0.4, 
0.6,  0.8,  and  1  c.c.  respectively;  for  those  tubes  shown  as  contain- 
ing from  0.002  to  0.02  c.c.  of  seium  a  basal  dilution  of  1  in  50' 
was  used,  the  quantities  being  0.1,  0.2,  O.G,  0.8,  and  1  c.c.  respec- 
tively; for  those  tubes  shown  as  containing  less  than  0.002  c.c.  of 
serum,  a  basal  dilution  of  1  in  600  was  used,  the  quantities  of  this 
that  Avere  put  in  being  0.8,  0.6,  0.4,  0.2,  and  0.1  c.c.  respectively. 

In  each  tube  the  total  quantity  of  fluid  was  made  up  to  (approxi- 
mately) 2  c.c.  Control  tubes  were  put  up,  (1)  of  serum,  and  (2) 
of  emulsion,  and  in  each  case  remained  unchanged. 

These  tests  show  that  the  cjuantities  of  emulsion  and  of  serum 
combining  to  produce  agglutination  bear  a  direct  relationship  to 
one  another.  The  result  is  particularly  striking  if  one  takes  the 
extreme  results  ("  the  agglutination  and  clearing,"  end-point, 
shown  by  -H  +),  which  are  found  to  form  a  straight  line  when 
plotted  as  a  graph. 

It  will  also  be  noted  that  this  arrangement  is  kept  up  over  the 
whole  length  of  the  series. 

One  further  point  is  evident  from  this  table  (Table  2) — namely, 
that  there  is  a  partial  inhil)itioii  with  certain  proportions  of  emul- 
sion and  serum,  as  may  be  seen  from  looking  at  the  tubes  contain- 
ing :— 

2  c.c.  emulsion  and  0.2  c.c.  serum; 

1  c.c.  emulsion,  and  0.2,  0.16,  and  0.12  c.c.   serum; 

0.8  c.c.  enmlsion,  and  0.2,  0.16,  0.12,  and  0.08  c.c.   serum; 

0.6  c.c.  emulsion,  and  0.12,  0.08,   and  0.04  c.c.   serum; 

0.4  c.c.  emulsion,  and  0.08  and  0.04  c.c.  serum; 

And  0.2  c.c.  emulsion,  and  0.04  c.c.  serum. i 

Comparing  these  with  tubes  lower  down  in  the  same  column 
where  the  amount  of  serum  is  less,  we  find  that  where  the  smaller 
quantities  of  serum  are  used  there  is  again  complete  agglutination 
and  clearing.  Further,  where  larger  quantities  of  serum  are  used, 
there  is  also  agglutination  and  clearing,  the  inhibition  thus  being 
apparently  zonary.  This  is  well  seen  in  the  columns  of  tubes  con- 
taining— 0.8,  0.6,  0.4,  and  0.2  of  enmlsion. 

Further,  in  the  table,  this  zone  of  inhibition  is  found  to  lie 
approximately  parallel  to   the   agglutination   end-point;    it  seems, 

1    An  enclosing  line  is  used  in  the  table  to  make  these  tubes  more  evident. 


-■386  H.  R  Seddon  .- 

therefore,  as  if  there  were  at  least  two  maxima  of  agglutination, 
for  a  given  quantity  of  serum,  varying  with  the  quantity  of  emul- 
:«ion,  and,  between  these  two  maxima,  the  zone  of  inhibition. 

A  peculiar  agglutination  phenomenon  similar  to  this  had  been 
noted  before  with  serum  from  the  same  animal. 

In  this  previous  test  the  same  amount  of  emulsion  was  used  in 
«ach  tube,  and  the  following  quantities  of  serum  Avas  placed  in 
tubes  : — 

Tube.  A.  B.  C.  D.  E.  I-'.  G. 

0.15     -     0.1     -     0.075     -     0.05     -     0.02     -     O.ol     -     0.005  c.c, 
Resiilt     -        +-      +       -        +         -++-++-- 

After  incubation  for  24  hours,  there  was  agglutination  deposit 
in  all  the  tubes  except  G,  but  there  was  a  marked  increase  of 
•opacity  of  the  supernatant  fluid  going  from  C.  to  A — i.e.,  with  the 
greater  amount  of  serum.  The  only  tubes  where  the  super- 
natant fluid  cleared  were  D  and  E.  After  incubating 
for  a  total  of  four  days,  all  the  tubes — A,  B  and  C — 
showed  clearing.  Emulsion  controls,  it  should  be  noted, 
remained  unchanged---^.e.,  were  not  sedimented.  It  was  considered 
at  the  time  that,  as  the  most  outstanding  feature  was  the  failure 
of  A,  B  and  C  to  sediment,  the  cause  might  be  physi- 
cal, and  that  the  reason  sedimentation  did  not  occur  was 
because  of  the  increased  viscosity  in  these  tubes,  due  to 
the  large  amount  of  serum.  In  view  of  the  further  ex- 
periment detailed  above  in  Table  2,  and  of  the  mention  by  Hew- 
lett of  a  similar  phenomenon  of  a  zone  of  inhibition  with  M.  Meli- 
fensis,  no  suggestion  as  to  the  cause  is  offered.  No  op})ortunity 
of  consulting  the  work  referred  to  by  HeAvlett  has  been  possible,  but 
the  phenomenon,  in  the  main,  seems  parallel. 

The  phenomenon  is  of  importance  in  that  an  apparent  falling  off 
in  the  agglutinating  power  of  a  serum  does  not  necessarily  mean 
that  the  end-point  is  to  be  expected  in  the  next  tube. 

There  may  be  a  zone  of  lessened  agglutination,  and  then  a  fur- 
ther increase  may  be  met  before  the  end-point  of  agglutination  re- 
action. This  "end-point"  of  reaction  figure  is  important  in 
Contagious  Abortion,  as  it  affords  a  means  of  comparing  an  ani- 
mal's condition  from  time  to  time  as  regards  the  progress  of  the 
•disease. 

c. — Ojitimum  Amount   of  Eniuhion   to  V xe . 

Having  determined  the  points  referred  to  earlier  in  this  paper, 
■the  question  of  optimum  quantity  of  bacterial  emulsion  naturally 
arises. 


Agglutination  Test  in  Abortion.  387 

Here,  again,  there  being  no  universal  standard  adopted,  ob- 
servers cannot  strictly  compare  their  results.  Thus,  to  say  that 
an  animal,  0.05  c.c.  of  whose  serum  produces  agglutination,  should 
be  considered  as  affected,  in  reality  conveys  no  definite  meaning,  in 
view  of  the  experiments  in  sub-sections  (a)  and  (b)  above,  unless 
the  amount  of  emulsion  be  stated  at  the  same  time.  On  the  other 
hand,  workers  find  by  experience  what  is  a  convenient  quantity  of 
emulsion  to  use,  based  on  the  size  of  the  tubes  employed,  etc.,  and 
having  found  this  amount  retain  it  as  a  standard  and  use  this  in 
future;  their  own  results,  therefore,  are  strictly  comparable  with 
one  another,  but  not  with  those  of  other  workers. 

The  following  experiments  were  made  to  determine  what  quan- 
tity, allowing  for  ease  of  reading  after  24  houis'  incubation,  was 
suitable  to  use. 

Material. 

Serum,  from  Cow  (as  used  in  previous  tests). 

Emulsion  (standardised,    =    "  10  X  "). 

Four  sets  of  tubes,  numbered  1,  2,  ?>,  4,  were  put  up,  iising  a 
different  quantity  of  serum  in  each  set.  Eacli  .set  consisted  of  four 
tubes — A.  B,  C,  and  D,  and  the  quantity  of  emulsion  used  was:  — 

in  the  A  tubes  -  0.05  c.c.     (10  X  emulsions) 

,.  „     B      „  -  0.025  c.c. 

..  „     C       „  -  0.01  c.c. 

„  „     D      „  -  0.005  c.c. 

To  Set  I.  was  added  1  c.c.  diluted  serum  (equal  to  0.02  c.c.  pure 
serum),  and  carbolised  saline  was  added,  to  make  tlie  Total  Vol. 
2  c.c. 

To  Set  II.  was  added  0.5  c.c.  diluted  serum  (wjual  to  0.01  c.c. 
pure  serum),  and  carbolised  saline  Avas  added,  to  make  the  Total 
Vol.  2  c.c. 

To  Set  III.  was  added  0.25  c.c.  diluted  serum  (equal  to  0.005  c.c. 
pure  serum),  and  carbolised  saline  was  added,  to  make  the  Total 
Vol.  2  c.c. 

To  Set  IV.  was  added  1  c.c.  diluted  serum  (equal  to  0.02  c.c. 
of  pure  serum),  and  carbolised  saline  was  added,  to  make  the  Tf)tal 
Vol.  20  c.c. 

Controls. — Serum  controls  were  put  up.  and  remained  unchanged. 

Emulsion  control  tubes,  of  each  quantity  of  enuilsion  used,  with 
•carbolised  saline  added,  were  put  up,   and  remained  unchanged. 

Sets  I.,  II.,  and  III.  Avere  read  at  the  end  of  24  hours'  incuba- 
tion, the  result  ]>eing  : — 


o88  '       H.  B.  Seddon .- 


Emulsion. 

A 

B 

C 

D 

0.05 

0.025 

0.01 

0.005  c.c. 

Set   I.    (containing-  pure 

serum  0.02  c.c.) 

+ 

+ 

- 

t 

+ 

Set  IE.    (containing  pure 

serum  0.01  c.c.) 

+ 

+ 

- 

+ 

+ 

Set  III.  (containing  pure 

serum  O.UOo  c.c.) 

- 

+ 

- 

+ 

+ 

Set  IV.  (containing  pure 

serum  0.02  c.c.) 

+ 

+ 

- 

+ 

p 

Note: — Set  IV.,  ut  the  end  of  24  hours'  incubation,  showed 
positive  agglutination  with  0.05  c.c.  of  emulsion — i.e.,  in  Tube  A, 
but  not  in  the  other  tubcvS — B,  (',  and  D. 

In  tubes  B  and  C,  containing  O.OL'5  and  0.01  c.c.  emulsion,  a 
positive  agglutination  was  manifest  at  the  end  of  three  days'  in- 
cubation, but  the  deposit  in  tube  D,  with  0.005  c.c.  emulsion,  even 
at  the  end  of  this  time,  was  very  small  indeed — in  fact,  barely 
appreciable. 

The  controls,   it  should  be  mentioned,   i-emained   unchanged. 

From  these  experiments  it  appears  as  if  the  large  volume  of 
Huid  (20  c.c.)  in  Set  IV.  affected  the  rate  of  sedimentation  of  the 
clumps  of  bacilli  in  those  tubes  with  the  smaller  quantities  of 
emulsion.  As,  however,  such  a  large  quantity  of  fluid  is  not  used 
in  the  tubes  in  making  a  diagnostic  test,  these  results  in  Set.  IV. 
are  not  of  great  impoitance.  In  the  practical  application  of  the 
test  the  total  volume  of  fluid  in  each  tube  is  usually  made  up  to 
about  1.5  c.c.  A  number  of  tests  have  also  been  made  in  which 
the  total  amount  was  2  c.c.  The  tubes  in  Sets  1,  2  and  3,  where 
the  total  volume  has  been  made  up  to  2  c.c,  are,  therefore,  of 
primary  importance.  Here  it  is  found  that  such  a  quantity  of 
emulsion  and  of  total  fluid  have  been  employed  that  the  complete 
agglutination  reaction  takes  place  within  the  first  24  hours. 

Tubes  of  2.5  c.c.  capacity  have  been  found  very  suitable  in  mak- 
ing the  test,  and  the  amounts  of  diagnostic  material  (serum,  whey, 
etc.),  and  of  emulsion,  are,  even  over  a  lai-ge  range  of  quantities, 
but  involving  only  a  few  different  basal  dilutions,  easily  contained 
in  1.5  or  2  c.c.  of  fluid.  Also,  24  hours  is  a  convenieTit  time  for 
incubation   l)efore   reading  the   results. 

Where  the  total  volume  of  Huid  in  each  tuljc  is  niade  up  to  1.5 
or  2  c.c,  with  incubation  extending  over  18  to  24  hours,  the 
optimum  of  emuhioti  will  he  the  smallest  quontiti/  which  gives  re- 
sults thitt  are  easily  read,  wiietlier  the  agglutination  teactioii  be 
positive  or  negative. 


Agf/latiiuition    Test  In  A  hurt  ion. 


:58<) 


The  deposit  following  agglutination  sliovild  l^e  siich  that  it  can 
be  easily  distinguished  l)y  the  naked  eye,  even  though,  as  is  fre- 
quently tlie  case,  the  whole  of  the  organisms  be  not  sediniented. 

In  the  absence  of  deposit — i.e.,  in  a  negative  agglutination  re- 
action, there  should  be  surli  a  cjuantity  of  emulsion  that  a  tulie 
containing  it  can  l)c  easily  distinguished  from  a  tul)e  not  contain- 
ing any  emulsion. 

It  is  (if  interest  here  to  note  the  naked  eye  ap]ica)'ance  of  the 
emulsion  controls  to  the  sets  of  tutes  under  review. 

In  four  of  these  controls  the  total  volume  of  fluid  was  made  up  to 
2  c.c,  with  carbolised  saline:   in  the  other  four  to   20  c.c. 


Amount  of  Emulsion. 

Total  Volume. 

Naked  Eye  appearance. 

(1)      0.05    C.C. 

2  c.c. 

cloudy. 

(2)     0.025  CO. 

2  c.c. 

faint  clondmess. 

(3)     0.01  c.c. 

2  c.c. 

trace  of  cloudiness. 

(4)     0.005  c.c. 

2  c.c. 

no  cloudmess. 

(5)     0.05  c.c. 

20  c.c. 

faintly  hazy. 

(»-,)     0.025  c.c. 

20  c.c. 

trace  of  haziness. 

(7)     0.01  c.c. 

20  c.c. 

haziness  ai^preciable  only 
on  compari.son. 

(8)     0.005  c.c. 

20  c.c. 

no  haziness. 

Of  tho.se  enndsion  controls  containing  2  c.c.  of  total  fluid,  it 
will  be  seen  that  (1)  and  (2)  above  possess  sxich  a  degree  of  cloudi- 
ness that  they  are  readily  distinguishable  to  the  naked  eye  as 
containing  emulsion. 

These  tubes  contain  0.05  c.c.  and  0.02")  r.c.  respectively. 

In  Sets  I.,  II.,  and  III.,  of  agglutination  results  I'ecorded  above 
the  smallest  deposit  (positive  agglutination),  wliich  is  easily  read 
(tubes  containing  2  c.c.  of  fluid),  is  that  where  there  is  0.025  c.c. 
of  emulsion. 

In  Set  IV..  tlie  oidy  tu])c  where  (although  tliere  was  tlio  same 
quantity  of  serum  in  each  tu])e),  agglutination  was  manifest  in 
24  hours,  was  that  one  in  wliicli  tlierc  was  0.05  c.c.  of  emulsion  in 
the  tube. 

With  tliis  large  volume  of  fluid  (20  c.c),  no  smaller  quantity 
gave  a  completed  reaction   in   2-1  liours. 

From  tliese  experiments,  therefore,  it  has  l)een  conchuled  that  tlie 
optimum  amount  of  enudsion  to  use-  is  0.05  c.c.  of  "  Standard 
10  X  ''   emulsion  (or  0.5  c.c.   of  "  Standai'd  X  "   cnuilsion). 

This  amount,  0.5  c.c.  of  "  Standard  X  "  emulsion  has,  thei'e- 
fore,  been  ado])ted  foi-  use  in  all  pi-actical  diagnostic  tests  for  the 
reasons  that — 


•490  H.  R.  Seddon: 

(1)  It  gives  a  marked   naked   eye  deposit   (and  lience   is  easily 

read),  in  a  positive  reaction; 

(2)  Conversely,    it  gives   a   definitely   cloudy   appearance   (and 

hence  is  easily  read),  in  a  tube  where  there  is  no  agglu- 
tination. 

(3)  With  the  total  volume  of  fluid  in  tlie  tube    anything  from 

H   to   20  c.c,   the   agglutuiation    reaction    is   (.'omplete   in 
24  hours. 

(4)  It  is  tlie  minimum  amount  of  ennilsion  that  will  answer  the 

above   i-equirements. 


In  conclusion,  I  wish  to  express  my  best  tlianks  to  Professor  H. 
A.  Woodruff,  Director  of  the  Institute,  for  permission  to  under- 
take this  work,  and  for  much  kindly  help  and  advice. 


BIOGRAPHY. 

1.  MacFadyean    and    Stockman    (1909).      Report    of    Dei.artmental 

Committee   (Board   of   Agriculture,    Ct.    Britain),    on   Epizootic 
Abortion,   Part   1. 

2.  Mohler  and  Traum  (1913).     Annual  Report,  Bureau  of  Animal 

Industry,  Dept.  of  Agriculture,  U.S.A.,   1911,  pp.   147-183. 

3.  MacFadyean    and    Stockman    (1912).      Journal    of    Comparative 

Pathology  and  Therapeutics,  Vol.  XXV.,  1912,  pp.  22-29. 

4.  McFarland,  Journal  American  Medical  Association,  Vol.    49,   p. 

1176.      Extracted    in    Bulletin   de   L'Institut    Pasteur,    Vol.    6, 
1908.  p.   123. 

5.  Hewlett  (1914).      Manual  of   Bacteriology,   5th   Editi..n.   p.    188. 


IN  DEX. 

The  names  of  new  genera  ami  species  are  printed  in  italics. 


Acantliochites  rubrostratus,   103 
Acantholophus  dixoiii,  256 
Acantiiolophus  hrevicornis,  257 
Acantholophus  (ingusticollis,  259 
Additions    to    the    Catalogue    of 

Marine  Shells  of  Victoria,  99 
African  cicadas,  15. 
Agglutination  Test   for  Disease  in 

Bovines,   370 
Araycterides, — Notes  on.  Part  II., 

232 
Anagallis  ar^'ensis,  297 
Analyses  of  Eocks,   123,  267,  276, 

277,  335,  337. 
Anatomy   of    Caryodes    dufresnyi, 

19 
Anthistiria  imberis,  297 
Antirrhinum  Orontium,  297 
Argilloecia  badia,  28 
Argobuccinum  retioluui,  99 
Artemisia  vulgaris,  297 
Ashton,  Howard,  12,  15 
Aster   subulatus,    298 
Atropis  magellanica,   298 
Atropis  stricta  (?),  298 
Aturia  australis,  351 
Australia,  Flora  of.  No.  22,  297 
Australian    and  Tasmauian    Scyd- 

maenidae,  198 
Australian  Cicadidae,  12 
Austmlian    Hydroids,   Part    III., 

72 
Auslralites,  Notes  on,  333 
Australites     from     Western     Vic- 
toria, 362 
A  vena    barbata,   298 
Bacillus    of    Contagious    Abortion 

in   Bovines,   370 
Baii'dia    amygdaloides,    31 
Bairdia  australis,  31 
Baker,   R.    T.,   367 
Balanus   jsittacus,   53 
Balanus  varians,  54 
Bale,   W.   M.,   72 
Bitter     Pit     and     Sensitivity     of 

Apples  to   Poison,   191 


Bitter  Pit  and  Sensitivity  of 
Apples  to  Poison,  4th  Paper, 
342 

Bovines,  Agglutination  Test  for 
Disease  in,  370 

Breidahl,  H.  G.,  191 

Bythocypris   tumefacfa,  30 

Caladenia  oongesta,  299 

Caryodes  dufi'esnyi.  Anatomy  of, 
19 

Catalogue  of  Marine  Shells  of  Vic- 
toria, Additions  to,  99 

Caudina  chilensis,  6 

Centunculus  minimus,  299 

Ceratodus — New  Species  of,  25 

Ceratodus  (Metaceratodus),  wol- 
lastoni,   25 

Cestracion  cainzoicus,  55 

Chapman,  F.,  25,  28,  350 

Chemistry,  149,  367. 

Chemistry  of  Essential  Oils,  149 

Chiridota  gigas,  7 

Chiridota  ingens,  8. 

Chrysophrys,  57 

Cicadas,  New  African,  15 

Cicadida?,  Australian,  12 

Cithna  augulata,  101 

Coatesxa,   230 

Coatesia  lata,  230 

Colochirus    doliolum,  6 

Colochirus  spinosus,  5 

Conglomerate  from   Walballsi,,   286 

Conringia  orientalis.  299 

Corbula  pixidata,  103 

Cucumaria  inconspicua,  3 

Cucumaria  mutans,  2 

Cucumaria   mutans,   4 

Cyclostrema  hilcundae,  95,  101 

Cyclostrema  vercoi,  96,  101 

Cynosurus  echinatus,  299 

Cythere    canaliculata,    32 

Cythtre  cr'spata,  33 

Cythere  dasyderma,  34 

Cythere  demissa,  34 

Cythere  dictyon,  34 

Cythere  fir  jc  least  at  a,  35 


:};i2 


liuh 


Cytlune  lactea,  36 
Cytlieve    lepralioides,    36 
Cytheie  lubbockiana,  36 
Cytheie  militaris,  37 
Cythere  noimaiii,  37 
Cytliere  obtusalata,  3S 
Cythere  ovalis,  38 
Cythere  parallelograiunia,  39 
Cythere  postikdiris,  39 
Cythere    rastromargiiiata.     1() 
Cythere  scabrocimeata,  40 
Cythere  scintillnlata,   41 
Cythere    sciitigera,    11 
Cythere    wyville-thomsoni,   41 
Cytherella  auriculus,   49 
Cytherella,  lata,  50 
Cytherella  polita,  50 
Cytherella  piik-hra,  50 
Cytherella  punctata,   50 
Cytherella  .mbtruncafa,  51 
Cythei'opteron  batesfordiense,  45 
Cytheropteroii  batesfordiense  var. 

acuhata,  46 
Cytheropteron  pudtiinhmuttuii),  46 
Cythcropteron      pmcantarcticuiu , 

47 
Cytheropteron   nficnsuiii,  47 
Cytheropteron    vodniffuin,   48 
Cythernra  capiUlfpya:  44 
Cyth crura  ouyenensis,   44 
Davies,  O.   B.,   19 
Didymograptus  adaniaittinus,  106 
Didymograptns  aurrns,  105 
Didyniograptus  bifidiis,   108 
Didymograptns        caduceus       var. 

inomihriufv.s.    108 
Didymograptns  dihitdiix.  107 
Didymograptns   extensus,    104 
Didymograptns  gracilis,   1U5 
Didyjiiograptus  hitcii'^.  106 
Didymograptns   ntuiidus.   107 
Didymograp^tus  perdifiis.  104 
Didymograptns   piocumbens,    KH! 
Disease  in  bovines     Agghitinatioii 

test  for,  370 
Distribution    of   Sea-(Jra:?ses,    180 
Diuris  maculata,  300 
Dosinia    rictoriar,   96,    103 
Drew.   1!.  15.,  149 
Eragrostis     cinviila     var.     valida, 

300. 


Erechtites  Atkinsoniae,   300 
Erechtit-es  valerianaefolia,   300 
Erigeron  cariadense,  300 
Essential  oil  of  eucalyptus  alpina, 

367 
Essentiil     Oils,     Pliysieal     Ciicm- 

istry  of,  149 
Euchalns  vixumliilicatus,  102 
Eucalyptus  alpina.   367 
Eulima  victoriup,  94,  100 
Ewart,  A.  J.,  297,  342 
F«iguson,  E.  W.,  232 
Flora  of  Australia,   No.   22,  297 
Foramelina  cxempla,  103 
Fossils   found    in    Mallee    borings. 

List  of,   58 
Fossils    from    the    Malice    Bores, 

New  and  Bare,  Pt.  III.,  28 
Further     Notes      on      Australian 

Hj-droids,  III.,  72. 
Gabriel,   C.  J.,  94,  99. 
Gatlitf,  J.  H.,  94,  99. 
Geelong,    Obsidian   from.    333 
Geographical  Distribution  of  Sea- 
Grasses,   180 
Geology,  119,  261,  286,  333,  363 
Gladiolus  grand  is,  300 
Goinphrena  canescens,  301 
Goniograptus   crinitus,   110 
Gonigraptus  laxus,  113 
Gonigraptus  uiacer,  110 
Croniograptus  spi'cio.tns,   110 
Graptolites,   Victorian,   }*art   IV., 

101 
Hall,  T.  S.,  IM 

Ilcalesville   and   Narbethong — Ig- 
neous Eocks  near,  2('l 
Helipterum   Guilfoylei,  301 
Iletei'ognatluis  armitagei,   199 
Heterognatlius  geuiculatus,   199 
Hcterognathus  gracilis,  199 
Heterognatlius  rahnstus,  199 
Holothuroidca,   Victorian,    1 
Hydrocotyle     medicaginoides,  301 
Hydroids,  Further  Notes  on  Aus- 
tralian, III.,   72 
Hyoscyanus  aibus,  301 
Igneous  Pebbles  from  Walhalla,  286 
Igneous    Eocks    near    Healesville 

and  Narbctlidug,  261 
Ivens,   W.   G.,  30  4 


hnlr. 


■■V.r. 


Joshua,  1'..  C,  1 

Juiiner,  X.  \\.,  lli»,  2l)1.  280 

Krithe  eggeri,  42 

Languages,  Certain  Suffixes  in 
Oceanic,  305 

Lea,  A.  M.,   198 

Leiobtraca  kilcundar,  94-.  TH 

Leiostraca  stiiJifinniis,  9."),   101 

Leptosynapta  dolabrifcia,  7 

Liuai-ia  elatiue,  301 

Lippia  nodiflora,  301 

List  of  fossils  found  iu  Malice 
borings,  58 

Loxocoucli  I  aastralis,  4-:^ 

Lucapinella   crucis.   1()2 

Macrocypris  decora,   29 

Macrocypris  tumida,  29 

Macrotvistia   fniichi,    12 

Macrotristia  fliopJin'nlrs,  13 

Mallee,  New  and  Rare  Fossils 
found  in  Deep  Borings,  Pt. 
III.,  28 

Mallee  Borings,  List  of  Fossils 
found  in,  58 

Marginella  schoutanica,  100 

Marine  Shells  of  Victoria,  Addi- 
tions to  Catalogue  of,  99 

Marine  Mollusca,  New  Specios  ot 
Victorian,  94. 

Mrtaceiafodus  woUastoni,  25 

MoUu-ca,  New  Species  of  Vic- 
torian Marine,  94 

Monograptus  apUnl,  114 

Monograptus  priodon,  115 

Monograptus  turriculatus,   114 

Morgania  glabra,   302 

Myliobatis  moorabinensis,    57 

Myodora  suhalbida,  96,   103 

Narbethong,  Igneous  Rucks  near.  2G1 

Nautilus  altifrons,  356 

Nautilus  balcomhensis,  353 

Nautilus  felij',  357 

Nautilus  grrJniKjciisls,  354 

New  African  Cicadas,  15 

New  and  Rare  Fossils  from  Mallee 
Bores,  Pt.  III.,  28 

New  or  Little  Known  Victorian 
Fossils,   350 

N.S.W. — New  Species  of  Ccrato- 
dus  from,  25 

New  Species  of  Aniycterides,  232 

New  Species  of  Ceralodus  from 
N.S.W.,  25 


New  Species  of  Victorian   Marine 

Mollusca,  94 
Notosepia  cliftoncnsi.'f,  357 
Obsidian    from  Geelong  and  fioui 

Taradale,   333 
Occurrence    of     Igneous     Pebbles 

neav  Walhalla,  286 
( >c(';in;c  Tjiinf;uMg-es,  Suffixes,  iu,  3(i5 
Olcaria      raniulo^a      var.       inter- 
media,  302 
(>  II  cog  rapt  us,  109 
Oncugraptus  upsilm,  109 
Ononis  spinosa,  302 
Ortlioceras  strietum,  302 
Ortiiopyxis,  72 
Orthopyxis  anguUita,  82 
Orthopyxis  caliculata,   74 
Orthopyxis  compressa,  80 
Ortiiopyxis  macrogona,  77 
Orthopyxis  platycarpa,  79 
Orthopyxis   wiJHuni,  78 
Ostenfeld,  C.  H.,  ,180 
Palaeontology,  25,  28,  104,  350 
Parameter     Values     in     Potential 

Theory,  164 
Petrology  of  Igneous  Rocks  near 

Healesville,    262 
Pliagonophana    uhundans,    223 
Plia^onophana    aiithicnides,   228 
Phagonophana  ciassipes,  225 
Phagonophana    hirticeps,    224 
Phagonophana  iiriptiiaiii,  228 
Phagonophana   pan-icollis,   227 
Phagonophana  pcdnncuhiia,  226 
Pliagonophana  mduruUs,   223 
Phagonophana  tenuis,  229 
Phasianotrochus    rutilus,    102 
Phy1loplioi-us   dearmatus,   4 
Phyllophorus  restiens,  5 
Pliysaliis  visoosa,  302 
Physical  Chemistry    of     Essential 

Oils,  149 
Pinus   insignis,   303 
Platypleura  luiiyirostiis,  17 
Platypleura   nigvoinatginata,  16 
Platypleura  sikuinliu,  16 
Potential       Theory,        Parameter 

Values  in,  164 
Prasophyllum  fiavum,  303 
Prasophyllum  Suttoni,  303 
Prostanthera  dcnticulata,   303. 
I'salidura  Irai,  241 
Psalidura  vcstita,  240 


ladt 


Psaltoda  ad<m\^.  13 
Psaltoda  iusiilaiis.    14 
Psolidium  convergent,  6 
Queeustown,  Petrolojrv   and    Geo 

logy  of,  119 
Kauui'cnlus  ophioglossitoliu.-.    Mvi 
Eeseda  lut^a,  30:3 
Rissoa  (  A  mpliitlialaiuus )  erratiwi.  102 
Rissoa  pertranslucida,  101 
Rosenblum.  E.  I.,  149 
Rothera.  A.  C.  H.,  191 
Salix  Caprea.  304 
Sca!a   platyplenra,   KKl 
Scalpelluni   suhrfaadintuin.  52 
Scleroriiuis    Jij-oni,  253 
Scleroriniis  gmulh'i.  254 
Scleioi-inus   innrnatus,  254 
Sclerorrhiuella,  244 
Scydraaeuidae.    Not^<   on    Austra- 
lian and  Tasmanian,  198 
Scydmaenns  ampJiptiinis,   211 
Scydmaeuus  (ippropiitquan.'t,   221 
Scydmaenns  atruphu<i,  222. 
Scydmaenns  hrrripUis,  206 
Scydmaeuus   brevisetdsus,    206 
Scydmaenns  calrici'ps,  216 
Scydmaenns  clat-us,  201 
Scydmaenns  (Jentirentris,  208 
Scydmaenns   ihpnssus,    217 
Scydmaenns  iraniilus,   219 
Scydmaenns  Jimbrialns,   210 
Scydmaenns  fimbricnUi'<r   202 
Scydmaenns  flaripes,  204 
Scydmaenns  flamapUaUs.  203 
Scydmaenns  fui-cidistans,  220 
Scydmaenns  fu~scipaJpis,  218 
Scydmaenns  griff ithi,  217 
Scydmaenns   gnlosus.    20(J 
Scydmaenns  kingensis,  200 
S-ydmaenus  latrbncola,  215 
Scydmaeuus   nnt-stnat,  212 
Scydmaeuus  obficuricoynis,   205 
Scydmaeuus  panamattcnsis.  201 
Scydmaenns  pibisicnlliK,  214 
Scydmaenns  rivuiaris.  219 
Scydmaenns  .'uniini'icr,  262 
Scydmaenns  subyJabriprunis,  204 
Scydmaenns  trituicnUis,  212 
Scydmaeuus  tcnuicornis,  207 
Scydmaenns  fritkntatus,  209 
Scydmaeuus    usifahix,  213 
Scydmaenns   iralkrri.   21o 
Sea-Grasses,   Geographical   Distri- 
bution of,   180 


Seddon,  H.  R.,  370 

Shells  of  Victoria,  Additions  to 
Catalogue  of  Marine,  99 

Silicularia,  83 

Siliciilaria  cjmpanularia,  84 

Silicularia  undulata,  89 

Singular  Parameter  Values  in 
Potential  Theory,  164 

Skeats,  E.  W.,  333,  362 

Smith,  H.  G.,  367 

Stichopus  mollis,  2 

Stichopus  .-;inn!laris,  3 

Stylifer  auricula,   101 

Suffixes  in  Oceanic  Lani^uages,  305 

Talaurinus,   242 

Talaurinus  carinatwr,   251 

Talaurinus  giauulattts.  244 

'I'ahuainus,  iiytttrix,  247 

Talaurinus  koi.  248 

Talaurinus     perplerus,  245 

Talaurinus  posficalis,  252 

Talaurinus  .-iiiDpIex,  'Ho 

Talaurinus  vaUdus,  250 

Taradale.  ol:)sidian  from,  333 

Tasmanian  Scydmaenidae.  Xotcs 
on,  198 

Tetragraptus  harfi,   113 

Tetragraptns  whitektiri,  114 

Thelymitra  venosa,  304 

Thyroscyphus  marginatus^   91 

Triw  iiiigrapfu.'i  iicgkciiis,  115 

Tritouia  lineata,  304 

Trochodota  a  Hani,  8 

Trochodola   rwbufki,  9 

Trygon  cf.  rugosus,  56 

Vicia  tetraspenna,  304 

Victoria,  Additions  to  the  Cata- 
logues of  Marine  Shells.  99 

Victorian   Fossils,   350 

Victorian  Graptolitcs,    104 

Victorian  Holothuroidoa,   1 

Victorian  Marine  Mollusca,  New 
Species,  94 

Voluta  magnitica,  99 

Wjilhalla,  Conglomerate  from.  2-<6 

Wcatherburu,  C.  E.,  164 

Xestoleberis  cnrta,  iS 

Xe^toleberis  margaritea,   43 

Xestoleberis  variegata.  43 

Zoology,   19 

Zygophylax  rufa,  90 

Zygophyllum  ovatum,  304 


END    OF    VOLUME    XXVII. 


Part  11.      Published  ]\lARrH.  191"). 


PROCEEDINGS 


8opl  ^orietn  of  f  itloria. 

VOL.    XXVII.      (New  SERiES>^^g[Q;^-^ 

PART   I.  y^  /^.^  <^<P] 

£///M/  u/uier  the  Authority  oj  the  Ck/HUp.    VA»*>Mrs^'' 
/SSUHD    SEPTEMBER,    1914- 


{Conlniniug   Haters   rend   before  the  Society  durinfi    the  months  of 
March  to  July,  1914)- 


IHK  AUI.IOKfl  or   IIIK  SKVBllAL  PAPBR8  KUK  INDIVIDUAM.Y  RKSPONBIHLK  KOK   IMK 

SOIINDNKHS   OK    IMK  OPINIONS  81VKN    AND   FOR  THK    ACCURACY    OK    IMK 

STATKMKNTS   MAUK,  TMKRKIN. 


MELBOUKNE: 
FURU    &    SON,    PRINTERS,    DRUMMOND    STREET,    CARLTON. 

1914. 


Publications  of  the   Royal   Society   of  Victoria,  and 
of  the   Societies  amalgamated   with   it. 


Victorian  Institute  for  the  Advancement  of  Science. 
Transactions.      Vol.   1.     1855. 

Philosophical  Society  of  Victoria. 
Tran.sactions.      Vol.  1.      1855. 

These  two  Soaeiies  then  amalgamated  and  became: — 

Philo.sophical  Institute  of  Victoria. 
Transactions.      Vols.  1-4. 

The  Society  then  became : — 

Royal  Society  of  Victoria. 

Tran.sacbions  and    Proceedings  (Vol.    5,   entitled   Transac- 
tions).    (8vo).      Vols.  5-24. 

Transactions.     (4to).      Vols.  1,  2,  3  (Pt.  1  only  was  pub- 
lished), 4,  5.      1888-1909. 
Proceedings  (New  Series).    (8vo).     Vols.  1 .1888 , 


Microscopical  Society  of  Victoria. 

Journal  (Vol.  1,  Pt.  1,  entitled  Quarterly  Journal).  V^ol.  1 
(Pts.  1  to  4),  2  (Pt.  1),  title  page  and  index  {all 
published].     1-S79-82. 

[The  Society  then  combined  with  the  Royal  Society  op  Victoria] 


NoTS. — Most  of  the  volumes  published  before  i8go  are  out 
of  print. 


PROCEEDINGS 

§01)111  c^arietD  of  f  ittoria. 

VOL.    XXVII.      (New  Series). 

PART   II. 

Edited  iindet   the  Authoril)   of  the   Council. 

ISSUED    MARCH,    igiS- 

(Conf, lining   t'apers   read   before   the  Society  during    the   mouths   of 

July  to  December,  njjf)- 

■IIIK  ADTIIURS  Ul'   IIIK  SKVUItAL  FAl'KRS  ARB  INDIVIDUALLY  KKSPONSIKI.B  KOR   IHH 

ti(HTNI>NK«H    «IK    IIIK   OPINIONS   OIVBN    AND   FOR   TlIK    ACCURACY    OK    IIIK 

STATBMBNiS   MAUK  TIIBKKIN. 


MELbOUKNE: 

FORD    &    SON,    t'KINTERS,    l>RUMMONI)    .STKKET,    CARLTON. 
1915. 


'iBL    WHO!    Library    -    Serials 

5  WHSE  00608